Dr. A. Singaraj, - EPRA Journals FEB...POSSIBILITIES IN UZBEK NOVELS Islamjon Axmedjanovich Yakubov...

1. Dr.Yi-Lin Yu, Ph. D Associate Professor, Department of Advertising & Public Relations, Fu Jen Catholic University, Taipei, Taiwan.2. Dr.G. Badri Narayanan, PhD, Research Economist, Center for Global Trade Analysis, Purdue University, West Lafayette, Indiana, USA.3. Dr. Gajendra Naidu.J., M.Com, LL.M., M.B.A., PhD. MHRM Professor & Head, Faculty of Finance, Botho University, Gaborone Campus, Botho Education Park, Kgale, Gaborone, Botswana.4. Dr. Ahmed Sebihi Associate Professor Islamic Culture and Social Sciences (ICSS), Department of General Education (DGE), Gulf Medical University (GMU), UAE.5. Dr. Pradeep Kumar Choudhury, Assistant Professor, Institute for Studies in Industrial Development, An ICSSR Research Institute, New Delhi- 110070.India.6. Dr. Sumita Bharat Goyal Assistant Professor, Department of Commerce, Central University of Rajasthan, Bandar Sindri, Dist-Ajmer, Rajasthan, India7. Dr. C. Muniyandi, M.Sc., M. Phil., Ph. D, Assistant Professor, Department of Econometrics, School of Economics, Madurai Kamaraj University, Madurai-625021, Tamil Nadu, India.8. Dr. B. Ravi Kumar, Assistant Professor Department of GBEH, Sree Vidyanikethan Engineering College, A.Rangampet, Tirupati, Andhra Pradesh, India9. Dr. Gyanendra Awasthi, M.Sc., Ph.D., NET Associate Professor & HOD Department of Biochemistry, Dolphin (PG) Institute of Biomedical & Natural Sciences, Dehradun, Uttarakhand, India.10. Dr. D.K. Awasthi, M.SC., Ph.D. Associate Professor Department of Chemistry, Sri J.N.P.G. College, Charbagh, Lucknow,

Chief EditorDr. A. Singaraj, M.A., M.Phil., Ph.D.

Managing EditorMrs.M.Josephin Immaculate Ruba

Editorial Advisors

EPRA International Journal of

Published By :EPRA Publishing

CC License

Multidisciplinary Research

SJIF Impact Factor :5.614ISI I.F. Value : 1.188

DOI : 10.36713/epra2013

Indexed By:

ISSN (Online) : 2455 - 3662

Monthly Peer Reviewed & IndexedInternational Online Journal

Volume: 6 Issue: 2 February 2020

Volume: 6 | Issue: 2 | February 2020 || SJIF Impact Factor: 5. 148 ISSN (Online): 2455-3662

EPRA International Journal of Multidisciplinary Research

(IJMR)

Peer Reviewed Journal|| Journal DOI URL: https://doi.org/10.36713/epra2013

CONTENTS

S.NO TITLE AUTHOR/S PAGES 1 THE EFFECTS OF SUPERVISOR

RELATIONS TO EMPLOYEE PERFORMANCE IN PASAY CITY

Loverly Revecho Alexandrea Nicole Rallonza

Jamie Regalado

1-9

2 OPINION OF THE CUSTOMERS TOWARDS SPECIAL BENEFITS OF AMAZON ONLINE SHOPPING IN SIVAKASI

M.Rifaya Meera R.Padmaja

P.Viswanath

10-14

3 SPECTRAL ANALYSIS OF MEDICAL

SIGNALS ON THE

OF POLYNOMIAL WALSH BASES

Rakhimov Bakhtiyar Saidovich Sobirova Sabokhat Kabulovna

Rakhimova Feroza Bakhtiyarovna Akhmedov Jamol

Saidov Atabek Bakhtiyarovich

15-16

4 THE PROBLEMS OF SPACE AND TIME IN LITERATURE

Yulchiyev Qahhor Vahobovich 17-20

5 IMPLEMENTATION OF PAPR REDUCTION SCHEMES BY USING DCT AND SLM TECHNIQUES

J.Sateesh M.Harika

P.Sirish Kumar

21-29

6 STATE RULING OF THE ARABIC KHALIFAT IN THE CENTRAL ASIA

Matyaqubov Toyirjon Sultanbayevich 30-31

7 IMPROVEMENT OF THE KHOREZM DEFENSE SYSTEM AND WEAPONS IN ANTIQUITY

Matyaqubov Toyirjon Sultanbayevich 32-33

8 MICROFLORA OF BREAST MILK AND FACTORS OF NON-SPECIFIC RESISTANCE OF BREAST-FEEDING WOMEN

Samandarova Barno Sultanovna Sadullaev Otanazar Qodirovich Zakirov Shakirbek Yusupovich

Karimova Maksuda Ahmedjanovna Rakhmanova Valeriya Rustamovna

34-36

9 THE EXPLANATION OF NAKSHBANDI ORDER IN “MAKTUBAT” BY AHMAD SIRHINDI

Feruza Mirzayeva Ahmadjon qizi 37-38

10 IDEAS ON HANDBALL AND ITS RULES Batirov Sokhibjon Sodikjonovich 39-41 11 THE IMPACT OF TRANSFORMATION OF

SOCIAL CONCIOUSNESS AND INTELLIGENCE OF RURAL POPULATION ON SOCIAL LIFE

Sapayev Valisher Odilbek ugli 42-44

12 TYPOLOGY OF QUANTITATIVE SYNTAX IN PLACE OF NP2

Aziza Alangova Hamrokulov Tohir

45-47

13 VIRGINIA WOOLF AND THE NOVEL Umida Fayzullaeva 48-49 14 SUMSOR RIVER IN THE SYRDARYA

BASIN WATER MINERALIZATION AND HYDROECOLOGICAL SITUATION

Soliyev E.A Mirabdullayev B.B.

50-54

15 THE ANALYSIS OF LANDS IN SECURITY ZONES OF HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER LINES (POWER LINE) ON THE EXAMPLE OF THE FERGANA REGION

Abdullayev Ibrohim Numanovich Marupov Azizxon Abbosxonovich

55-58

16 THE MECHANISMS OF INCREASING SOCIAL AND POLITICAL ACTIVITY OF CITIZENS IN THE PROCESS OF MODERNIZATION OF SOCIETY

Akhmadjonov Olimjon 59-60

17 ROLE OF PREAMBLE IN DEVELOPING ‘THE LIMITED THEORY OF AMENDMENT’ IN INDIA

Dr.N.M.Khirale 61-64

18 FINANCIAL LITERACY OF THE YOUNG PROFESSIONALS IN BONIFACIO GLOBAL CITY

Timothy Bustamante Janine Rose Castillo Edelyn Bagwasan

65-71

19 THE INFLUENCE OF EMOTIONAL AFFINITY TOWARD NATURE AND INSTITUTIONAL SUPPORT ON ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIBILITY BEHAVIOUR: A RELIABILITY TEST

Logeswari Uthama puthran Fais Ahmad

Hazlinda Hassan

72-75

20 FROM THE HISTORY OF ACTIVITIES OF TRADE CENTERS SERVING FOR PEOPLE IN THE VILLAGES OF FERGHANA VALLEY IN THE 60s AND 80s OF XX CENTURY

Tajimirzayev Elyorbek Akramovich 76-80

21 SOVIET POLICY AGAINST RELIGIOUS INSTITUTIONS AND RELIGIOUS LEADERS IN THE 20-30s OF THE 20th CENTURY

Soibjon Abdurazzakovich Khoshimov 81-87

22 ANALYZING A CATTLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM USING IOT AND ITS CHALLENGES IN SMART AGRICULTURE

Bharat Singh Thakur 88-92

23 PROBLEMS IN URBAN SOCIETY Anil Kosamkar 93-95 24 THE CONSUMER PERCEPTION ON

ONLINE FOOD DELIVERY SYSTEM AMONG YOUTH IN KERALA

Ms. Ardhana M Prabhash 96-100

25 MODERN APPROACH TO BUSINESS VALUATION IN UZBEKISTAN

Salimov Golib 101-105

26 IMPACT OF ENVIRONMENT, ENERGY AND FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENT ON EXPORTS OF SELECTIVE SAARC COUNTRIES

Wajiha Manzoor Nabeel Safdar

106-113

27 METHODOLOGY FOR CONDUCTING ENERGY SURVEYS OF ENTERPRISES AND ORGANIZATIONS

Troitskiy Aleksandr Viktorovich 114-119

28 DIAGONAL AND NONDIAGONAL MATRIX ELEMENTS OF THE EFFECTIVE HAMILTONIAN OF

Voxob Rustamovich Rasulov Rustam Yavkachovich Rasulov

Akhmedov Bahodir Bahromovich

120-127

ELECTRONS IN A SEMICONDUCTOR (TAKING INTO ACCOUNT SPIN-ORBIT INTERACTION)

Ravshan Rustamovich Sultanov

29 JOB PREFERENCES OF BS CRIMINOLOGY GRADUATES BATCH 2018-2019 OF NUEVA ECIJA UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

Shirley P. Ayeo-Eo 128-132

30 THE EFFECT OF CURRENT RATIO, AND GROWTH ASSETS ON DIVIDEND POLICY

Garin Pratiwi Solihati,S. 133-141

31 CONSUMER TRUST IN ONLINE PURCHASE DECISION

Febrina Mahliza 142-149

32 PERCEPTION OF ETHICS OF PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS,MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTANTS AND LECTURER ACCOUNTANTS ON EARNINGS MANAGEMENT IN JAKARTA, BOGOR, DEPOK, TANGERANG AND BEKASI (JABODETABEK) AREA

Islamiah Kamil 150-159

33 ANALYSIS OF CORRUPTION CASE OF TRUST TAX COMPLIANCE AND ITS IMPACT ON TAXPAYERS

Islamiah Kamil 160-168

34 A STUDY OF THE GRANITIC ROCKS OF THE ICHADAG AREA IN RANCHI PLATEAU IN EASTERN INDIA

Dr. P K Verma Dr. Jayant Sinha

Dr. Shweta Mishra

169-173

35 CALORIE DENSITY AND NUTRIENT CONTENT OF COMMONLY CONSUMED SWEETMEATS OF JASHORE DISTRICT IN BANGLADESH

Md. Mohsin Alam Dr. A.K. Obidul Huq

Israt Jahan Eyad Ahmed

174-179

36 CRIME PREVENTION PRACTICES OF SHOPPING MALLS IN THE PROVINCE OF NUEVA ECIJA: AN ASSESSMENT

Mary Chris A. Austria-Cruz Cristina Virginia B. Jimmy

180-184

37 APPROACHES TO DEVELOPING PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATIVE COMPETENCE OF MEDICAL STUDENTS IN FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Ahmedova Matluba Ibragimdjonovna 185-188

38 ARIMA MODELING OF NEONATAL MORTALITY IN CHITUNGWIZA CENTRAL HOSPITAL

Dr. Smartson. P. NYONI Mr. Thabani NYONI

189-196

39 FORECASTING THE NUMBER OF OUTPATIENT VISITS AT SILOBELA DISTRICT HOSPITAL IN ZIMBABWE USING ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS

Dr. Smartson. P. NYONI Mr. Thabani NYONI

197-203

40 ORGANIZATION CLIMATE AND JOB SATISFACTION IN COLEGIO DE SAN JUAN DE LETRAN – BATAAN

AP Edessa G. Flordeliz 204-209

41 FOLK SPIRIT AND STYLE IN ARTISTIC CREATIVITY

Matyakubova Tozagul Rajapovna 210-216

42 POETIC THOUGHT AND EXPRESSION POSSIBILITIES IN UZBEK NOVELS

Islamjon Axmedjanovich Yakubov 217-222

43 FIRM CHARACTERISTICS AND SOCIAL DISCLOSURE: THE CASE OF SOUTH EAST ASIAN COUNTRIES

Erna Setiany 223-231

44 THE FIRM CHARACTERISTICS AND Erna Setiany 232-237

ENVIRONMENTAL DISCLOSURE OF SOUTH EAST ASIAN COUNTRIES

45 IS NIGERIA’S DEMOCRACY BREEDING CONFLICT?

Adaora Osondu-Oti, Ph.D. Ugonna Obi-Emeruwa

238-246

46 THE IMPACT OF GOOD GOVERNANCE ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT IN BANAADIR REGION-SOMALIA

Abdirashiid Abdullahi Huriye Prof. Hussein Osman Ahmed

247-251

47 FEATURES OF ELECTROCHEMICAL MACHINING OF MAGNETIC - HARD MATERIALS

Sarvar Tursunbaev Munira Kuchkorova

Otabek Kxasanov Azamat Baydullaev

252-254

48 MULTIPLE INTELLIGENCE TEST: DESIGNING STUDENTS’ ASSESSMENT PERFORMANCE BASED ON INTEREST

Janice P. Maravilla Jayson Seel M. Maravilla

255-259

49 TECHNOLOGY FOR PRODUCING M10DM OIL BASED ON OIL DISTILLATES FERGHANA OIL PROCESSING PLANT (FOPP)

Ergashev Mahmudjon Mamadjanovich

260-262

50 THE PROBLEMS OF PRESERVATION AND USE OFARCHITECTURAL MONUMENTS OF THE FERGHANA REGION

Salimov Arif Muslimovich Tursunova Dilnoza Raufjonovna

263-266

51 FAST AND ACCURATE SIMILARITY DETECTION IN TIME SERIES REPRESENTATION MODEL

A.Angeline Valentina Sweety R.Muthulakshmi

R.Uma Maheshwari N.Raja Priya

267-272

52 MACHINE LEARNING TECHNIQUES FOR BIOMETRIC FINGERPRINT RECOGNITION USING THE MAGNITITUDES

A. Angeline Valentina Sweety Dr. C. Gopala Krishnan M. Mukesh Krishnan

273-279

53 EMOTIONAL MATURITY ANALYTICAL STUDY OF STUDENTS IN GRANTED AND NON GRANTED SCHOOLS OF GADCHIROLI DISTRICT

Dr. Govindprasad Dubey 280-282

54 A STUDY ON MEASURE THE LEVEL OF ACADEMIC STRESS AMONG THE HIGH SCHOOL STUDENTS OF GOVT. AND PRIVATE SCHOOL

Dr. Kishora Kumar Bedanta 283-284

55 FILM LANGUAGE AND KAADU (A Critical Analysis of Girish Karnad’s Kaadu, (The Forest))

Mahantha D.U. 285-289

56 PSYCHOLINGUISTIC FАCTORS OF SPEECH EFFECT

Qurbanov Elbek Elmurodovich 290-291

57 USE OF A CIRCULAR TRAINING METHOD TO DEVELOP MOVEMENT SPEED

Musaev Bahrom Bahtiyorovich Nurmamatova Sarvinoz Qurbon Qizi

292-294

58 THE PECULIARITIES AND CHALLENGES WITH LEARNERS AGE DIVERSITY IN EFL STUDENT GROUPS

Hamidov Nodirbek Zokirjon ugli 295-297

59 EMPIRICAL STUDY ON WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT AND OPERATIONAL EFFICIENCY OF LISTED MANUFACTURING FIRMS IN NIGERIA 2009 – 2018

Dr.Sylvester Ikechukwu Ejike 298-306

ISSN (Online): 2455-3662

EPRA International Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (IJMR) - Peer Reviewed Journal Volume: 6 | Issue: 2 | February 2020 || Journal DOI: 10.36713/epra2013 || SJIF Impact Factor: 5.614||ISI Value: 1.188

2020 EPRA IJMR | www.eprajournals.com | Journal DOI URL: https://doi.org/10.36713/epra2013

1

THE EFFECTS OF SUPERVISOR RELATIONS TO EMPLOYEE PERFORMANCE IN PASAY CITY

Loverly Revecho Polytechnic University of the Philippines-

CBAGS,

Manila,

Philippines

Alexandrea Nicole Rallonza Polytechnic University of the Philippines-

CBAGS,

Manila,

Philippines

Jamie Regalado Polytechnic University of the Philippines- CBAGS,

Manila,

Philippines

ABSTRACT

This study identified the effect of supervisor – employee relationship to the respective performances of the selected

respondents in Pasay City which involves 60 male and 60 female respondents, purposive sampling was adopted to select the

said number of respondents from which the data is collected. Also, the researcher used thematic analysis to analyze qualitative

data and statistical package for social science (SPSS) to analyze quantitative data. Research findings show that employees’

perceptions concerning their relationship with their supervisors has effect to their performances. It could be positive nor

negative depending on the employees’ beliefs. It was found that perceptions of employees on their relationships with

managers/supervisors was positive, and friendly to the large extent hence contributed to good performance of the work force.

On supervisors’ strategies to strengthen their relationship with their employees further planning needs to be done with the

management for them to craft one incentive program that will be recognized in the organization. The study recommended that

the supervisors should continue practices that motivates employees to keep positive environment that results to better job

performance. Conducive working environment, training, good salary, recognition from Management, and good career

development should be priority for all industries. Also, all industries should make a clear channel for information flow for

employees regarding job performance for all employees and suggestion scheme regardless of job position. This will make

employees feel valued and trusted by their supervisors.

KEYWORDS – Employees, Supervisor, Performance, Relationship, Communication, Organization

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

A wise man once said that “people leave supervisors, not companies.” Supervisors play the most significant role in the business in terms of impact with the management. They do have the most direct influence with the front runners of the entity “the employees”, they are also responsible for carrying alignment of the performance of their department and its staff with the overarching organizational goals.

Employee relations is included in the organizational functions and practices that deals with issues related to people including staffing, compensation and benefits, performance management, organization development, health and safety, communication. Wherein in the current era, this issue is a trend in the field of research as attrition rate rises each year.

In a question by Davis et al., (2012) so why do many supervisors fail early in the career? He responds that “Well, for many it is the inability to relate to the employees” as most of the employees of today's

http://www.eprajournals.com/




2

generation tend to stay in a company wherein, they feel they were valued and appreciated. Modern supervisors find that the practice of threatening employees is usually counterproductive. Instead, they view their task as one of motivating employees to do their best (Manning & Curtis, 2009) within the various industries, one singular leadership trait is excellent interpersonal skills. These include listening, questioning, negotiating and interaction with both guests and employees (Hunter, Tinton & Mannall, 2010).

There are certain types of leaders who were guided by the leadership styles that they believed in. However, most of the employees believed that effective supervisors should understand that their performance depends on their people. As each person, team/group and organization is complex and unique but the performance of an individual, team, group or organization depends on their capacity to work, willingness to work and opportunity to work.

This relationship plays a crucial role in a daily basis as Filipinos are known on returning favors and always believe that being happy at work makes them stay and productive all times. While employee relations is an approach that incorporates all the issues in the employer–employee relationship in the workplace, including recruitment, equal opportunity, training and development, and organizational structure. There is an issue that members of the organization deal within a daily basis but only few notices it.

From the employee relations perspective, an employee is an asset rather than a cost, and open communication and goal orientation are encouraged. It is accepted that legitimate differences exist in workplaces, but the aim is to reduce conflict through effective procedures and relationships

While research has investigated elements of this web of relationships, no single study has examined these variables together and over time, or how the levels and changes in the levels of these variables influence each other. This study will focus on identifying the effects of supervisor relations on employees’ performance in Pasay City. It will focus on the current strategies used by the supervisors and how it affects respective performances of the respondents.

CHAPTER II LITERATURE REVIEW Human Resource Management (Supervisors)

Human resource management is defined in different ways by different scholars around the world. Management can therefore be defined as the art and science of coordinating activities within a firm, via a

process of managerial decision-making, including areas such as finance, operations, sales and marketing, and human resources. Human resource management is therefore defined as the process of analyzing and managing an organization’s human resource needs to ensure satisfaction of its strategic objectives.

A researcher explained that the policies and practices involved in carrying out the “people” or human resources aspects of a management position, including recruitment, screening, training and

appraising‟ (Dessler, 2007). In a nutshell Human Resource Management includes planning, organizing, directing, controlling of procurement, development, compensation, integration, maintenance and separation of human resources to the end that individual, organizational and social objectives are achieved.

Thus, in managing people of different behavior, strategies and effective plans are very crucial to enhance firms or organizations. To achieve the set of goals it is very important to make sure that every employee implements his or her responsibility accordingly. In developing countries like Philippines where varieties of industries were present due to increasing economy status supervisors needs to improve or increase the performance of their employees through motivation and improved relationship with them. Specifically, as the aim of this study, is to identify the effects of supervisor relations to the employees’ performance.

In human resource, relations to workers is also important to discuss to identify if it affects their productivity. Coyle –Shapiro et al., (2013) pointed out other factors that were influential aside from this thing that were studied by other researchers.

These were the role of analysis as well as management, the connection between human resource management and achieving an organization’s strategic goals, the importance of human resource policies and practices; and their specific activities such as recruitment, selection, learning and education, and performance management to which we might add other things, such as reward, job design, employment (or ,manpower) planning, diversity management, equal opportunities and employment relations.

Employee

Employee is a person working or serving for another person, firm or organization for the sake of payments of wages or salary. In this, subject employee different industries in Pasay City and the goal is to identify whether they have same perceptions concerning the importance of supervisor-employee relationship.





3

Supervisors –Employee Relation Employee relations involves a level of

interaction between employers and employees, or their representatives, to achieve a set of working conditions that will meet the needs of employees as well as allowing the organization to achieve its strategic, tactical and operational objectives.

A researcher named Chaudhry et al., (2013) defined employee relations as a set of organizational functions that includes sets of practices in the organization whether it directly or indirectly affects the entity as a whole. This relationship is being studied for over decades to identify the best model that they can use to let every member of the organization aligned with its mission, vision, goals and objectives.

Supervisors’ roles in workers performance play important aspects in achieving organizational goals and targets. To be more precise in measuring the performance outcomes of workers one of important roles of supervisor is to provide training to workers. The supervisor’s role in training programs is often viewed as a critical organizational climate dimension where it may influence the effectiveness of training programs in an organization (Noe, 1986, 2008; Blanchard & Thackers, 2007). In a way one of the main objectives of these trainings is to improve the performance of the workers in all industries.

Ismail (2007) stated that the supervisors have two fundamental roles during the workers training program. These are support and communication. Support is often related to a supervisor who provides encouragement and opportunities to improve employee performance in organizations (MacNeil, 2004; Noe, 2005). During the training days they were expected to identify the potentials of their subordinates together with their opportunities for further improvement. Supervisors also play important roles in getting employees to be actively involved in decision making, and guide trainees in applying the new competencies to accomplish organizational goals (Elangovan & Karakowsky, 1999; Nijman, 2004; Tai, 2006). As matter of facts continuous and frequently communication between supervisors and workers will enhance effective relationships which in turn improve performances toward achieving organizational expected outcomes or goals.

CHAPTER III METHODOLOGY Research Design

This study employed a cross sectional research design. Cross sectional research design is applicable where either the whole population or subset of the study

population is selected from which data is collected to meet the objectives of the study. It is called cross sectional because the study normally intends to find out what is happening about the phenomenon at the time of undertaking it (Pine et al., 1997). This is applicable for the study as this method is often used to make inferences about possible relationships or to gather preliminary data to support further research and experimentation.

Population of the Study The study involves 120 workers and supervisors from various industries in the selected location of the study. Sampling Method

Based on the study needs the researcher used random sampling method. Random sampling is one of the simplest forms of collecting data from the total population. Under random sampling, each member of the subset carries an equal opportunity of being chosen as a part of the sampling process.

Data Collection Methods and Instruments

Interviews, questionnaire and Focus Group Discussions (FGD) were used during collection of primary data. These methods were used sometimes together to ensure checks and balances as they complement one another. The use of three methods all together was to ensure validity and reliability of the collected data.

Statistical Treatment of Data The data collected will be tabulated, analyzed and interpreted using statistics. The descriptive statistics included the measures of central tendency for quantitative variable.

Frequency Count and Percentage – this indicated the proportion responding to a particular item. It will be used to evaluate whether the response was choice of the majority of the respondents. This method will be used to organize and present the responses of the participants on assessment of the correlation between supervisor relationship to their employees’ performance.

The formula is: P = (F/N) X 100%

Ranking – this will be used to describe the positional importance of an item. It will be an arrangement of value or scores from the highest to the lowest. In this study, the





4

responses of the participants will be ranked to identify the position of the items.

SPSS - The researcher used Statistical Data Packages for Social Scientists (SPSS) for the analysis of Quantitative data. Data was sorted, coded and entered into the SPSS software. After data entry, the researcher was able to present that in descriptive

CHAPTER IV RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Data Analysis and Discussion

This part of the research provides interpretation of findings, data analysis and discussion of the findings

based on the objectives of the study. It starts by interpreting the data collected from the field and afterwards provides analysis and then discusses the findings based on the findings of other researchers.

Interpretation of the Results Gender

Most of respondents were female accounting for 70 (58.3%) of the total number of respondents and male were 40 (33.3%). Also, there are respondents who preferred not to indicate their gender for some reasons 10 (8.33%) out of 120 as indicated in the table below.

TABLE 1 GENDER OF THE RESPONDENTS

GENDER FREQUENCY PERCENTAGE

MALE 40 33.30%

FEMALE 70 58.30%

Prefer not to say 10 8.33%

TOTAL 120 100%

Job Positions of the Employees

Respondents were asked about their job positions. Results shows that most of the employees involved in the study were under rank and file which has 91.7% of the entire population while the remaining percentage 8.30% were under apprenticeship program.

Employees’ Perception on their Relationship with Supervisors

The researcher aimed to determine how the employees perceived their existing relations to their supervisor. They were asked to rate the relation using three parameters which are Very Satisfied, Neutral and Not Satisfied. The results show 50% of them felt that they were satisfied with their relationship with their supervisor whereby 8.33% said that they were not satisfied, and 41.70% percent were neutral on the issue. Table below shows the results of the perception of the relationship between supervisor and employees.

Relationship Frequency Percent

Very Satisfied 60 50%

Neutral 55 41.70%

Not Satisfied 5 8.33%

TOTAL 120 100%

To make it more precise on identifying the relationship between these factors. The researcher asked the respondents how frequently the management held meetings to discuss work related affairs with their supervisors. Gatherings were categorized into supervisor-employee meetings those initiated by supervisors; employee-supervisor on the other hand were those requested by employees. The results are as

follows; 58.30% of the respondents said that is frequently done, the other 33.30% percent said that it was very frequent and the remaining 8.30% revealed that supervisor-employee meetings were done. On the other hand, employee-supervisor meeting, respondents felt they were frequently being held 42%, very frequently held 38% and rarely held 20% as shown in figure below





5

Employees Perception on Internal Communication Situation with Supervisor

The researcher also identified the perception of the respondents on internal communication channels utilized by the management during the information

dissemination. It was found out that 41.7% of the interviewed employees said the method used was excellent. 33.33% of the population considered it good and the rest of 25% stated that it is fair.

Perception Frequency Percentage

Excellent 50 41.70%

Good 40 33.33%

Fair 30 25%

Total 120 100%




2020 EPRA IJMR | www.eprajournals.com | Journal DOI URL: https://doi.org/10.36713/epra2013 6

Employee Suggestion Scheme

As part of the study the researcher explored on how employees provide suggestions to supervisors and the result suggested that 58.30% of the population said they were given opportunities very often. The next 25% says that sometimes their suggestions were heard and there are some saying that were rarely and never heard as they got 8.30% each.

Perception on Employees’ Involvement Perception on employees’ involvement was also

measured in the research as this was considered as another variable to employees’ relation to their supervisors. The findings show that 100% of supervisors often involved their subordinates in decision making whereas 58.30% of the employees felt being involve. The figure below illustrates the perception in employees’ involvement.





7

Feeling of Employees on Supervision Style The researcher asked how the employee feels the

style of supervision from their supervisors. Employees explained how they feel about the supervisor style and results were rated into very close, close and somehow close. In this case, 50% of the respondents felt that they

were getting minimum supervision. However, 41.7% of the respondents stated that they were getting very close supervision and the remaining 8.3% says that they felt close supervision. The table below summarized the results of feelings of employees on supervision style.

Strategies for Enhancing Relationship with Subordinates for Better Performance

Out of 120 respondents of the study 80% of them stated that the management shares information through staff meetings. While the remaining says that it was usually done communications sent via skype or email.

Rewarding Good Performance

Aside from the issues raised in the first part of the study. The research also investigated the kinds of rewards they were getting when they are doing good in the business. 41.7% of the respondents were getting these perks the 25% said that they are getting it sometimes, another 25% stated that they rarely get the reward and the remaining 8.30% said that they never get even one of it. These data is shown in the table below;

Response Frequency Percent

Very Often 50 41.7%

Often 30 25%

Rarely 30 25%

Never 10 8.30%

Total 120 100% Kind of Reward Researcher asked which method was used to reward the

best employee and the findings are stated in the chart below;





8

In the survey form provided these were just divided into few categories but the respondents tend to add more options. On the graph above highest is the vacation as it gained 25% of the entire population. Followed by training and financial incentives.

Perception of Employees on Relationship between Subordinates

Findings of this research revealed that half of the respondents felt friendly with their supervisor. Such relationship is vital for job performance of every single employee in all levels of the organization. Such thing provides a conducive environment on the workplace that leads to better performance.

The finding is supported by a study of Ruya (2014) as he found out that when supervisors show

concern about employees‟ feelings and personal well-being, employees may believe their supervisors sincerely care about them, not only due to business issues, and, therefore, be more committed to the organization. If employees feel friendly to their supervisors, they likely to work hard leading to better performance and achievement of company’s goals.

In 2014, there’s a study by Okoth which informs that employees perform highly with special focus on security, firmness in service, teamwork, meeting of targets, diligence in service, decorum and etiquette, high professionalism, serving with a human face and speed. There is however a fair level of adequate response to challenges faced by customers, service with fairness and

justice, sensitivity to customers‟ requirements and understanding to customers and management. It is

however also seen that the employees do not handle difficult situations calmly.

The Effects of Employee Supervisor Relationship on Job Performance

As part of the study the researcher also determined the supervision techniques/styles used by their supervisors. As a result of the study 58.3% of the respondents said that being heard is important for their growth as an individual. The rest of the respondents also agreed with the statement provided in this part of the survey instrument. This result is in line with the study by Wanjala (2014) on influence of leadership style on job performance, the study found out that based on the relationship between the employees and the manager there was either a positive or negative influence on the job performance.

Also, the study revealed the approach in the production plays a vital role in mood setting in a daily basis. Every supervisor should understand that encouraging staff to participate in decision making on the job performance, positive influence of think and say

„we‟ rather than „I‟ on the job performance and a negative influence of believes only their ideas are best on the job performance of the respondent.

Kim et al., (2010) noted, employees value the relationship quality of their bosses and therefore, they are less likely to change their jobs. Furthermore Graen et al., (1995) considered high quality superior-subordinate relationships leads to partnerships which is characterized by behavioral and emotional exchanges of loyalty and support. With this type of relationship





9

subordinates are given the chance to express to express their thoughts and ideas that is favorable in the business.

Supervisors Strategies to Enhance Relationship with Subordinates for Better Performance

At the same time the researchers also determined the current strategies used by the supervisors to enhance the performance of their employees. Sending of communications, meetings between the members of the organization and rewarding were observed in the study. For the communication strategy 50% of the respondents said that good communication helped them improved their operation performances. The next 41.7% also agreed with the effects of this strategy on their daily stay in the business. These results somehow predict the existing of relationship between employees and supervisors. A study by Lather et al., (2015) pointed out the significance of communication in enhancing relationships at workplace as means of increasing organization turnovers. He argued that Communication is a vehicle that builds relationships between superiors and subordinates. Good quality of communication between superiors and subordinates provides a platform for self – expression and information exchange.

Also, the research also explored the channels of information flow among employees and supervisors. It was found out that most of the important matters to improved performance were being cascaded through casual meetings as 91.70% of the respondents agreed to it.

Furthermore, as the researcher tried to check the existing rewarding system used in the system it can infer that there are varieties of reward system being used as the respondents tend to add comments which were not in the given options. This result indicates that the concern should be one of the top priorities in order for the employees to know what they are working for.

Various scholars explored factors that influence job performance. For example, Du Plessis, Toh, & Chen (2013) reveals that there is a relation between job performance and the organizational reward system and reward schemes such as pay, benefits, promotions and other financial benefits greatly contribute to job performance in the workplace. Job performance improves when pay and promotion are seen as fair and reasonable; equal pay for equal work and fairness in promotion. However, there were other factors that influence relationships and job performance to employees. This is motivation which comprises financial bonus, job security, recognition, motivational talks and promotion (Du Plessis, 2015).

CHAPTER V CONCLUSION

The study found out that they have good relationship with their supervisors. It was also discovered that the closely working of employees with their supervisors enhance relationships, which turn into improved productivity. It also suggested that there are some factors that needs to be considered when it comes to employees’ performance. These are supervision style and internal communication by supervisors, where the closely and friendly supervision is a likely to enhance workers productivity or performance.

Also, the study discovered some of strategies used by the supervisors to motivate their employees in their jobs. These strategies include rewarding system and regular staff meetings. However, due to unplanned reward system employees were unable to felt it presence during operations. Almost ninety percent of respondents acknowledged that the information flow were through staff meetings where managers provide feedback to employees on their performance. Recommendations:

Based on the findings, the following recommendations are hereby suggested;

1. Each company should implement effective and implementable strategies which provides friendly working environment that leads to better performance. Those strategies include training, good salary, recognition from Management, and good career development programs by employees.

2. Also, management should put in place proper communication channels for communicating performance feedback to their employees. This will make employees feel valued and trusted by their supervisors

3. Involvement of employees by supervisors in decision making on matters relating to job performance is the key in improving workers performance in various industries.





10

OPINION OF THE CUSTOMERS TOWARDS SPECIAL

BENEFITS OF AMAZON ONLINE SHOPPING IN SIVAKASI

M.Rifaya Meera1

1Assistant Professor,

Department of Commerce,

Ayya Nadar Janaki Ammal College,

Sivakasi – 626 124,

Tamil Nadu,

India

R.Padmaja2

2Research Scholar,




Tamil Nadu,

India.

P.Viswanath3

3Research Scholar,




Tamil Nadu,

India.

ABSTRACT

Online consumers are always seeking new products, new attractiveness and the most important thing being price compatibility

with their budget. The internet is best way to save time and money through purchasing online within their range of budget at

home or in anywhere. Online consumers don‘t have limits to online shopping. They also use internet for comparison of prices

of goods and services, news, visit social networks and search information and so on. Online shopping behaviours depends

upon factors such as shopping motives, personality variables, internet knowledge and experience and last factor of shopping

incentives. This paper discuss about the opinion of the customers towards special benefits of Amazon online shopping in

Sivakasi.

KEYWORDS: customers, benefits, online shopping, amazon

1.1 INTRODUCTION

Internet marketing is conceptually different from other marketing channels and internet promotes a one to one communication between the seller and the end user with round the clock customer service. Today, business internet marketing is the fastest growing segment of online commerce. The major difference between traditional and online selling is the extent of interaction between the consumer and the seller. There is much more electronic interactivity with the consumer in the form of emails and frequently ask questions. Through frequently ask questions, the consumer‟s questions about shipment, payment, product, policies and other customer concerns can be addressed effectively.

Increasing number of people are gravitating towards more intensive use of the Internet as the accessibility of technology, the availability of

information, and the ability to interact through the internet increase and evolve. Obvious capabilities of the internet include avenues for gathering information, purchasing a product, or rendering a service. These advances in Internet technology allow for the expansion of shopping options beyond traditional methods that may be more time consuming issues with having to physically gather information with offline shopping methods are alleviated, and customers are better able to efficiently use their time. For instance, instead of having to physically visit different stores to compare prices or rely on circular pamphlets in newspapers, a consumer is able to search and retrieve needed information through the Internet.

The internet explosion has opened the doors to a new electronic world. Consumers are now able to use the internet for a variety of purposes such as research,





11

communication, online banking, and even shopping. With such advantages, the Internet is rapidly becoming the main method of communication and of conducting business conveniently. With a growing number of households turning towards the internet and the world of E-commerce to shop, invest, make payments, and do online banking, new technological advancements will have to come about to make these transactions secure. However, not all consumers are participating in online transactions as part of the internet boom. As more and more businesses continue to establish an online presence, they are finding that some consumers are still reluctant to shift in that same direction. For various consumers there are still concerns with security and passing personal data over the Internet. There is a disparity between the number of consumers who visit a site and the number of actual purchases being made.

Mobile commerce (or m-commerce) describes purchasing from an online retailer„s mobile optimized online site or app. Internet makes life simple and innovative. People are doing business online and trade has become more easy and fast. Internet provides new ways to promote business. Website becomes the essence of online business as to show their services and products. Internet gathers all competitors and consumers in one place. It brings new lane to promote, advertise products and services in market.

1.2 STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM Online shopping has become a very popular trend at present. Online shopping is highly influencing the customers because of the wide range of products and door step delivery. Almost all the items ranging from stationary items to jewellery and all other goods can be purchased through online shopping. Sitting from home and by the way of using mobile phone or laptops one can buy products from anywhere in the world. Amazon is the top most online shopping website that is used widely all over India. Amazon is uniquely known for its wide range of products, offers and discounts, prompt delivery etc. Hence the researcher intends to study the perception of the customers towards Amazon online shopping in Sivakasi.

1.3 OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY To study the opinion of the customers towards

Amazon online shopping.

1.4 PERIOD OF THE STUDY The study period was carried out from

December 2017 to February2018

1.5 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE STUDY The present study is mainly focusing on the

perception, awareness, satisfaction level and problems faced by the respondents. Hence the results of the study will definitely be useful to the customers who prefer Amazon online shopping

1.6 SAMPLING DESING The researcher has collected data from 80

customers who are using Amazon in the study area Convenient sampling technique was adopted by the researcher for selecting the respondents.

1.7 SOURCES OF DATA The required data for this study are collected from both primary and secondary sources.

1.7.1 PRIMARY DATA The primary data are collected with the help of pre-tested interview schedule .The interview schedule examines the customer expectation, customer satisfaction, quality perceptions, influencing factors and also problems faced by the customers .

1.7.2 SECONDARY DATA The secondary data are collected from various standard books, journals, magazines, websites and so on.

1.8 SATATISTICAL TOOLS The researcher has used the following statistical tools for the study.

Weighted arithmetic mean.

1.9 LIMITATIONS The following are the limitations of the study,

Due to short time, the researcher has selected only 80 sample respondents from Sivakasi town.

The results of the study are applicable only to the study area.

The published statistical data might have contains some clerical errors.

Based on their own experience, interest and distaste, the respondents might have given biased opinion. However, maximum correcting efforts have been taken by the researcher.

1.10 LITERATURE REVIEW Vijayasarathy (2004) used a sample of 281

consumers to test a model of consumer intention to use on-line shopping. The study found compatibility, usefulness, ease of use, and security to be significant predictors of attitude towards on-line shopping, but privacy was not. Another finding showed that intention





12

to use on-line shopping was strongly influenced by attitude toward online shopping, normative beliefs, and self efficacy.1 Hung-pin shih (2004) developed an extended model of consumer acceptance of e-shopping and tested it with multiple regression tests. The study found that individual attitude towards e-shopping are strongly and positively correlated with user acceptance. It also found that perceived use and perceived ease of use significantly determine individual attitude.2

Dong-mokoo (2006) investigated hierarchical effects of personal values, evaluation of online store attributes and loyalty. A sample of 353 experienced online shoppers was used in south korea for data collection. The study found that esteem life had a positive effect on attribute evaluations, mature life and happiness had negative effect on loyalty.3

Sharma and Mittal (2009) in their study “prospects of e-commerce in india”, mentions that India is showing tremendous growth in the e-commerce. Undoubtedly, with the middle class of 288 million people, online shopping shows unlimited potential in India. The real estate costs are touching the sky. Today e-commerce has become an integral part of our daily life. There are websites providing any number of goods and services. The e-commerce portals provide goods and services in a variety of categories. To name a few: apparel and accessories for men and women, health and beauty products, books and magazines, computers and peripherals, vehicles, software, consumer electronics, household appliances, jewelry, audio, video, entertainment, goods, gift articles, real estate and services. Ashish gupta, senior managing director of helion venture partners and one of the first backers of Flipkart as an angel investor: “Flipkart has been absorbing companies that have some potential (letsbuy, myntra). In that process, some of the bets will go

1Vijayasarathy (2004), “predicting consumer intentions

to use on-line shopping: the case for an augmented

technology acceptance model” information &

management, volume 41, issue 6, july 2004, pages 747-

762. ]

2 Hung-pin shih (2004), “an empirical study on

predicting user acceptance of e-shopping on the web”,

information & management, volume 41, issue 3,

January 2004, pages 351-368.

3 Dong-Mo koo (2006), the fundamental reasons of e-

consumers’ loyalty to an online store, electronic

commerce research and applications, volume 5, issue 2,

summer 2006, pages 117-130.

wrong, for sure. But that is par for the course. The company (Flipkart) is consciously taking bets that allow it to either grow or eliminate competition that reduces marketing spend and improves economics.”4

1.11 OPINION ABOUT SPECIAL BENEFITS

The researcher has analyzed the opinion about special benefits. In this regard the researcher has used the weighted Arithmetic Mean score value. The results and the allocation of points are given below.

RESULT

For Highly Satisfied = 5 points

For Satisfied = 4 points

For No opinion = 3 points

For Dissatisfied = 2 points

For Highly Dissatisfied = 1 points

4volume 1, issue 8 (2016, sept) (issn-2455-6602) online

anveshana’s international journal of research in regional

studies, law, social sciences, journalism and

management practices





13

TABLE 1.1 OPINION ABOUT SPECIAL BENEFITS

S.No Opinion H S S N D S H D S Total 1 Prices of product 14 43 18 2 3 80 2 Varieties of product 36 33 8 3 80 3 Quality of the product 20 45 10 3 2 80 4 Prompt delivering time 27 35 14 3 1 80 5 Easy accessibility 30 39 11 80 6 Offers 16 41 13 6 4 80 7 Return policy 24 26 24 4 2 80 8 Safety and security 19 45 10 1 5 80

9 Clear information 19 43 13 3 2 80

10 Attractive home screen 25 38 14 3 80 11 Packing 39 29 7 4 1 80 12 within minimum clicks 22 36 16 4 2 80 13 Payment option are stated clearly 22 40 8 6 4 80

14 Privacy policy of accessible 20 14 19 7 80

15 Queries/ compliant 13 35 17 8 7 80

16 Clear product description 20 40 11 6 3 80

17 Tracking of shipment 34 33 7 2 4 80

TABLE 1.2

WEIGHTED AVERAGE ARITHMETIC MEAN S.No

Opinion H S S N D S H D S Total

1 Prices of product 70 172 54 4 3 303

2 Varieties of product 180 132 24 6 342 3 Quality of the product 100 180 30 6 2 318 4 Prompt delivering time 135 140 42 6 1 324

5 Easy accessibility 150 156 33 339

6 Offers 80 164 39 12 4 229

7 Return policy 120 104 72 8 2 306

8 Safety and security 95 180 30 2 5 312

9 Clear information 95 172 39 6 2 314

10 Attractive home screen 125 152 42 6 325

11 Packing 195 116 21 8 1 341

12 minimum clicks 110 144 48 8 2 284

13 Payment option 110 160 24 12 4 315 14 Privacy policy of accessible 100 56 57 14 234 15 Queries 65 140 51 16 7 279 16 Clear product description 100 160 33 12 3 308

17 Tracking of shipment 170 132 21 4 4 338





14

TABLE 1.3 RANKING OF THE SPECIAL BENEFITS

S.No Opinion Percentage Rank

1 Prices of product 3.79 XIII

2 Varieties of product 4.27 I

3 Quality of the product 3.97 VII

4 Prompt delivering time 4.05 VI

5 Easy accessibility 4.24 III 6 Offers 3.74 XIV

7 Return policy 3.82 XII

8 Safety and security 3.90 X 9 Clear information 3.92 IX 10 Attractive home screen 4.06 V 11 Packing 4.26 II 12 Information found within minimum clicks 3.55 XV 13 Payment option are stated clearly 3.94 VIII 14 Privacy policy of accessible 2.92 XVII 15 Queries or compliant 3.49 XVI 16 Clear product description 3.85 XI 17 Tracking of shipment 4.22 1V

Source: Computed Data

Above ranking techniques varieties of products I (4.27), packing II (4.26),easy accessibility III (4.24), tracking of shipment IV (4.22), attractive home screen V(4.06), prompt delivery time VI(4.05),quality of the product VII(3.97), payment option are stated clearly VIII (3.94), clear information IX(3.92), safety and security X(3.90), clear products description XI(3.85), return policy XII (3.82), prices of product XIII(3.79), offers XIV(3.74) , information found within minimum clicks XV(3.55), queries or compliant XVI(3.49), privacy policy of accessible XVII(2.92). It is clear that out of 80 respondents, majority of the respondents (4.27%) are preferring Amazon online shopping as there are wide varieties of products.

1.12 SUGGESTIONS The following are the suggestions made on the basis of the interpretation made:

As many of the respondents are using Amazon online shopping for purchasing accessories, it is suggested to increase the number of availability of accessories in the store.

As many of the respondents are dissatisfied about the price of the products, the price ranges of the various products can be made affordable.

Many of the respondents are feeling that the delivery charges of the products are high,

hence steps can be initiated to reduce the delivery charges.

1.13 CONCLUSION The advent of technology has resulted in the phenomenal growth of the online shopping sites. Over the years, internet has turned out to be the medium of exchange and trade for many people all over the world. In India, the technological revolution has gained momentum over the past two decades. The revolutionary development of business is indebted to the online marketing for the availability of wide range of products and services at the fingertips of customers. The study is an attempt to make a critical evolution of the customer satisfaction levels and preference factors regarding the popular Amazon online shopping website. It has been concluded that Amazon is the most preferred online shopping site followed by Sivakasi. In the study that Amazon is considered to be the best user-friendly site with its best offers, best packaging and efficient post delivery services. Furthermore, Amazon is considered to be the online website with its excellent delivery speed.


ISSN (Online): 2455-3662 EPRA International Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (IJMR) - Peer Reviewed Journal Volume: 6 | Issue: 2 | February 2020 || Journal DOI: 10.36713/epra2013 || SJIF Impact Factor: 5.614||ISI Value: 1.188


15

SPECTRAL ANALYSIS OF MEDICAL SIGNALS ON THE

OF POLYNOMIAL WALSH BASES

Rakhimov Bakhtiyar Saidovich Urgench branch of Tashkent Medical Academy

(Uzbekistan), Urgench branch of Tashkent

University of information technologies after

named Al Kworezmy, Uzbekistan

Sobirova Sabokhat Kabulovna Urgench branch of Tashkent Medical Academy




Rakhimova Feroza Bakhtiyarovna Urgench branch of Tashkent Medical Academy




Akhmedov Jamol Urgench branch of Tashkent Medical Academy




Saidov Atabek Bakhtiyarovich Urgench branch of Tashkent Medical Academy (Uzbekistan),

Urgench branch of Tashkent University of information

technologies after named Al Kworezmy, Uzbekistan

ANNOTATION The problem of increase of productivity of the computer is one of the central problems of development of computer aids.

Search of decisions of this problem goes in a direction of development of principles of parallel and conveyor processing of the

medical information, including, constructions of structures specialized processors.

KEY WORDS: information, specialized processor, signal, functions Walsh.

1. INTRODUCTION The most perspective mathematical methods of

increase of productivity of specialized processors of processing of signals concern such which would allow to use only linear arithmetic and logic operations. From this point of view most full satisfy the mathematical methods based on decomposition on systems of basic functions by Walsh. Presence of fast algorithms of calculation of spectral factors and realization of return transformations, sufficient convergence for technical appendices, possibility of reception of basic systems derivative of them by additional transformation, the prostate of an estimation of complexity of the scheme and its speed formed a basis for wide application of basis of Walsh in problems of digital processing of signals.

2. RELATED WORKS AND ITS PROBLEMS The signals are arriving from gauges of

various devices in a type of data about a condition and measurement of temperature, radiating, and electromagnetic, gravitational, thermal and other

physical fields often are multidimensional and difficult. Problems of working out of algorithms for the express train of the analysis and the data processing, received with objects are actual, especially during ecological accidents. In the project these problems are solved.

Requirements of high efficiency of the computing systems applied in these areas can be satisfied as at the expense of development of new methods and algorithms of digital signal processing (DSP), and by means of multiprocessing means of in parallel-conveyor calculations [5,7]. The specialized computer [8] for performance of inverse Haar’s transformation [1] of is known. The development purpose is device simplification. However, it possesses such lacks, as rather low speed, the limited functionality. In [9] the device is developed for orthogonal transformation of digital signals on Haar’s [3, 4] functions. Lacks are also rather low speed, low accuracy of transformation.

The major problems are finding-out of thin structure of signals, fast revealing of local features, forecasting of development of processes and time aspiration to use of the limited number of processors of




16

processing. The transition of piecewise-quadratic Haar’s and Harmut’s [1, 2] functions and development of the computing structures, which are carrying out transformations on piecewise-quadratic functions, it allows to improve accuracy of approximation, to reduce quantity of the factors necessary for approximation, and by that to save a memory size [4, 5, 6]. The various applications principle is paralleling increase of speed of specialized computing structures [5, 7]. On the basis piecewise-polynomial methods models of computing means to develop for use in future internet based applications.

3. OBJECTIVE STATEMENT The main purpose of this project is to reduce

the economic expenses of internet based applications using parallel-conveyor computing systems. To the limits of this project algorithm piecewise-polynomial signals processing from improvement positions of characteristics of computing means on their basis will be investigated, and also programs of their modeling and simulation will be developed for use in Internet based applications. The simulation and computing models is used program in MatLab and Simulink [3]. It offered set of models and means of signal processing on the basis of basic splines and fast spectral transformations is intended to use various applications[1, 2].

4. METHODOLOGY The theoretical basis of the spent researches is

made by the theory of the functional analysis, methods of splines-functions and modeling, variation and difference methods, methods of the numerical integration, the generalized spectral methods, the theory of numbers and matrixes, and also the theory of parallel computing processes.

5. REFERENCES 1. Carl de Boor. A practical Guide to splines.

Department of computer science University of

Wisconsin – Madison, Madison, USA, 2001.

2. Ren-Hong Wang. Multivariate spline functions and

their applications. Kuliver Academic Press,

Netherlands, 2001.

3. Rakhimov B.S. Russian ―Information technologies

in medical education‖ Methods Of Science

Scientific and practical journal №12 / 2017 pages

25-27

4. R. Carranza, D. Andina. Medical Wavelet-Neural

Diagnostics in Chagastic Cardiopaties. —

Politechnical University of Madrid, 2000.

5. Uwe Meyer-Baese. Digital signal processing with

field programmable gate arrays.-Florida state

university, Florida, USA, 2007.

6. Susanto Rahardja, Bogdan J. Falkowski.

Application of Sign Haar Transform in a ternary

communication system. International Journal of

Electronics, Volume 79, Issue 5 November 1995 ,

pages 551 - 559

7. U. Pen. Application of Wavelets to Filtering of

Noisy Data. In Wavelets: the Key to Intermittent

Information? — Oxford University Press, 2000.

8. Ashok, V. Balakumaran, T. Gowrishankar, C.

Vennila, A. Kumar, A Nirmal. The Fast Haar

Wavelet Transform for Signal & Image Processing.

International Journal of Computer Science and

Information Security, IJCSIS, USA(2010), January

2010, ISSN 1947 5500,

http://sites.google.com/site/ijcsis/


http://www.informaworld.com/smpp/title~db=all~content=t713599654

http://www.informaworld.com/smpp/title~db=all~content=t713599654

http://www.informaworld.com/smpp/title~db=all~content=t713599654~tab=issueslist~branches=79#v79

http://www.informaworld.com/smpp/title~db=all~content=g777375780

http://cdsweb.cern.ch/search?f=author&p=Ashok%2C%20V&ln=ru

http://cdsweb.cern.ch/search?f=author&p=Balakumaran%2C%20T&ln=ru

http://cdsweb.cern.ch/search?f=author&p=Gowrishankar%2C%20C&ln=ru

http://cdsweb.cern.ch/search?f=author&p=Vennila%2C%20I%20L%20A&ln=ru

http://cdsweb.cern.ch/search?f=author&p=kumar%2C%20A%20Nirmal&ln=ru




17

THE PROBLEMS OF SPACE AND TIME IN LITERATURE

Yulchiyev Qahhor Vahobovich Doctor of philosophy in philological sciences,

Ds candidate

Article DOI: https://doi.org/10.36713/epra3968

ANNOTATION

While the creativity artistically realizes the existence, there is a need to percept the world through the time and space, which

has been expressed by the different views since the ancient times. Having studied the thoughts of Zoroaster (Avesto), Plato,

Aristotle, Abu Nasr Farabiy, Beruniy, Abu Ali Ibn Sino, Abu Khamid Gazali, Najmiddin Kubro and Immanuel Kant, the

author expressed his opinion to their views on the integrity of the time and space in literature.

KEY WORDS AND EXPRESSIONS: poem, fiction, artistic space, “Avesto”, “Khindustan”, Zoroaster,

Beruniy, Plato, Aristotle, Kant.

1. INTRODUCTION Being aware of the existence, the human

visualizes it within the space and time. Indeed, the life of any living creature, mainly the human, occurs in the real time and place. This matter can be clearly and vividly seen in the novel, drama and tragedy. There were some efforts to solve the problem in the epic and lyrically epic Uzbek literature, while less attention was paid to it in the poetry.

2. MATERIALS AND METHODS Approaching to Aristotle‟s view “…the elements

turned to be something general, as everything similar, being unique and simple by its nature, resides in all or many objects”[6.163], it is possible to substantiate the existence of the space and time in the poetry as the important elements. The time and period (in some degree chronotopic) are universal with the artistic world similar to them. Thus, it is natural, if the time and space in the lyrical poetry are close by their nature to the time and space in the dramatic and epic works.

It is important to emphasize that being a general philosophical category, a notion of the space and time in belles-lettres differ from the chronotop. “Being an important description of the artistic image, the artistic time and artistic space provide the holistic perception of the artistic reality and forms the composition of the work. The word art belongs to the group of the dynamic temporary arts (in comparison with the plastic space art). However, the literary-poetic image, formally dilating in the time (as the sequence of the text), reproduces the spatial-temporal picture of the world by its contents in the symbolized ideological value aspect [13.1174].

The scientist illustrated three features of the artistic time and artistic space. The first feature is the

general characteristics of the image; the second, the means, which provide the unity of the work; the third, components of the composition of the work.

This matter has been studied for a long time in the philosophical disciplines. Zoroaster, Plato, Aristotle, Beruniy, Gazzaliy, Kant debated about the space and time, their place in the human civilization. For example, “At the moment, when all the living thing appeared, seeing you at the moment of bringing to the book of all the actions and words done during the life, I realized that you will give the gift of the goodness to good people, the gift of the badness to bad people, I knew you as pure” was written in the sacred book “Avesto” [4.53].

In the given passage Zoroaster showed the existence of the real border of the word (the moment,

when all the living appeared). The word лаҳза means the moment and space, when all the living being appeared, it is relevant to chronotop. It is understood by Avesto, that before creating the world another world existed and our ancient predecessors realized that the space had several layers or it was unlimited.

“I summoned the words, before creating the blue sky, before the water, the earth, the vegetation, before the motions in the material world, before the birth of the two-legged man, before the sun, before creating Amposipands” [4.136].

Thus, the world, where we live, was created in another world, which is impossible to realize by the thought and mind of the person, that the space was created in one corner of the unlimited space, while the time considered the category, which shows all the events in it.

Considering that Avesto was a religious source, the discussions about the space and time in it can be met in the other religious books too. It can be said that


https://doi.org/10.36713/epra3968




18

the world has several layers, the bases of them is the Creator. The ideas of Zoroaster that the space is primary, while the time in it is secondary can be traced back to the ancient times.

The forms of chronotop as the human, a ground, a sky, a mountain, the thoughts about the different lyrical works are met. Especially, the thoughts about multileveled world were developed in the creations of the Middle Age scientists and the representatives of Tasawwuf1 literature. Mainly, while investigating the religion of Indian people, creation of the human and world, the measure of the space and time, Beruniy showed the great differences between the Arab Muslim world and Greek culture.

The scientist N.Komilov cites about the philosophy of Tasawwuf: “Regarding the world as the creation of the single Almighty, explaining the world as the mirror of the Allah, considering all the beauties and power came from the God, imagining the Being in the romantic colours and poetic symbols, which is in the perpetual motion under the influence of the divine light – it is a Poetry” [11.155].

The ideas of regarding the world as the great space and its Creator as unique cannot be met in the Indian scriptures.

It should be also mentioned from “Avesto” and related to the matter of the literary criticism, which is the object of the recent research and linked with the minor lyrical genres. It is mentioned that the poem, consisting of only one line, exists in the contemporary poetry. One-line poem was called in the ancient times „toso‟, which denotes two meanings in Pahlavi language. The first meaning of the word „toso‟ means the song, the second „one-line poem‟ in Avesto „afoman‟ or „pag‟mon‟ [3.598]. Thus, the one-line poem also existed in the ancient times BC and depicted the definite time.

Plato wrote in his work “State”: the poets can say whatever they want, but it is a novel about the past, present and future [7.107]. Here the idea about the space and time of the artistic work is given. The notion of the time is broader and writers cannot pass the real time borders. Developing these ideas, the interlocutors told to leave the types of the literary works, which inspire the people to goodness and truth, bringing people brave and noble; and withdraw the parts, which evoke the panic, bad and rude feelings in people. And it shows the opportunity of revealing the unity of the space and time, created by the writer.

The ideas of Aristotle on the problems of unity of the space and time are distinguished by the scientific nature and clarity. Mainly, “the tragedy can be within the day of a little more, while the epopee is not restricted by the time” [5.26].

1 Mystic-ascetic trend in Islam, which stipulates ethical

and moral precepts of religious people

If the main idea is about the differences of the tragedy and epopee, it can be also mentioned that there are two reasons for the origin of the art of the Poetry, and both of them are natural. Firstly, the simile and reduplication is a feature, peculiar to the person from the childhood… the simile as the harmony and rhythm are natural in people‟s character [5.24]. If the person can create the work, like a nature; it is natural to say, he can create artistic time and artistic space as the space in nature and the time in life. Thus, Aristotle‟s thought represents that each literary work, whether it is a novel, drama or minor poetic work; all of them reflect the part of the major time; being influenced by the world, the author can create the small part of the world in his creative laboratory.

Kwint Horaziy Flakk criticizes the extension of the composition and paying an excessive attention to the description of the space in the works “after the initial moment, which promises the most important thing, most of the time is devoted to the description of the shadows of the fences, Diana‟s alcove and winding brook, flowing in the beautiful fields, or the Rheine river, or the rainbow, seen in the blue sky in different colors in order to attach the pomposity. But it is inadequate here” [14.127]. Hence, the description of the space in belles-lettres should be relevant to the contents of it.

Michael Psell compares creating the art work with a house construction: “he reminds that it is worth beginning to construct the house not from laying the house footing, nailing, building the walls and housetop, but from decorating with the patterns and stones” [14.135]. As he states, the grounds of the house should be an exactly measured space. Another stage is building the walls, which are compared with the space; then, laying the housetop, so that the decors cannot be removed from external cold and moisture. This way, the complicated space can turn into the masterpiece. By this simile he illustrated the importance of the space in the composition of the work.

Abu Nasr Farabiy emphasizes the essence of the existence or the Creator on the bases of the Being and existence of the time motion in the space and its hidden form: “Perhaps cognition is a feature of a person or the influence of the person. If the cognition is the influence of the features of the person, its essence includes the motion to the perfectness appeared under the influence of its nature” [2.57].

Considering, that the person is a minor world, the notions of the time and the space in the major world, mainly, the things occur in the internal world of the person.

Developing his ideas, the scientist substantiated that all the things in this world are in the motion and occur, expand in the definite time. “I confirm that the substance is in motion by its nature, which consists of three types: high velocity, low velocity and medium velocity motion. There is a need to develop the science to study and compare the





19

measure of the velocity: the science on the celestial motion” [2.175-176].

It is obvious from Farabiy‟s thoughts, that the substance is the objective reality, which is in simultaneous motion in space and time. Thus, it can be stated that the entity or chronotop is mentioned here. However, it could be said that the entity or the Creator is accepted as the chronotop.

There is also a proof on the hidden time and period by Gazaliy: “You should know, that in order to form the third knowledge there should be the two other knowledge in the mind. If a person prefers this world, considers the Hereafter above this world, there are two ways for it: the first, hearing about the Hereafter from the others, he follows it and confirms not realizing the essence of it. And it is called “reiteration”, but it is not the knowledge. The second way is the exact knowledge about the Eternity. He will completely realize that the Hereafter is eternal. In the result of it, he can pass to the third knowledge. The preference of choosing the Hereafter comes on total understanding of the two previous types of knowledge” [3.4]. The scientist cites several spaces here: the heart (internal space), this world (material, visible space), the Hereafter (the other world); claiming that on the bases of them there is another, the fourth space. Thus, the idea of multileveled space, which was mentioned above has also taken the place in the views of Gazali.

Some contradictory views can be seen in the study of the time and the space as the changeable ascendant positions of the time and space. For example, the German philosopher Immanuel Kant confirms that the things can belong to the space and the sensory imagination of them is purely subjective and the space prevails in revealing the things and events [10.13].

Indeed, Kant appreciated the primary position of the space in esthetic perception of the existence. However, in his ideas the interrelated features of the space and time were not mentioned. It can be inferred that the person imagines the existence through the coordinates of measure of this world. It can be understood that the sequences of events or the action of the materialistic world can be measured by time.

As Najmiddin Kubro proposed in the theory of “Ofoq va anfusa” that the person is a minor world, who reflects the features of the major world [11.174].

In the literature of Tasawwuf the notions of the time and the space is mostly regarded as the formation of the spiritual, hidden views, observing the major world as the existence, the large space, while the person is a minor world.

Abu Reikhan Beruniy determines the integrity of the space and artistic information and the differences of their opportunities as the following: “The utterance „it is preferable to see rather than to hear‟ is quite correct. When the person sees with his own eyes, he can rightly accept the situation at the time and place when it is happened. If there are no uncertainties in delivering the information, it can be more feasible. However, being

limited by the objective existence the reality cannot transcend the definite time, while the information can involve the periods of what is happened before and after the event” [8.57]. Being at the place and seeing the event, the author delivers the artistic information by preceding and accomplishing moments, furthering the increase of the opportunities of the time and space units. Hence, the effects of the lyrical poem in the form of the artistic information will increase.

Beruniy depicts the views of the Greek, Indian and Muslim scientists about the time and space and shows his own attitude to them. “There are living creatures in the world; consequently, there must be a spirit. There are rational beings among the livings and also the art, carried to the perfectness. Consequently, there should be a Creator, a wise and knowledgeable, making everything perfect and correcting to the best, gifting the power of the mind to reach the salvation. However, there are such thinkers, who ponder the eternity and time as a single notion, while finiteness the property of the motion, counting the time out” [8.288]. Thus, Beruniy subscribes to the opinion about the existence of the wise people and the perfect art, as well as the existence of the spirit in the animate being.

Beruniy expresses his view on the scientific opinions of his contemporaries about the space and time. “According to the doctrine of the ancient Greeks, the five things existed eternally: the Creator – let glory be upon him! – and the universal spirit, the primary substance, the abstract space and the abstract time. He created his own doctrine on the five things, which fundamentally based on them. He distinguished the time and duration” [8.288].

Though, the world creating is mentioned here, the bases of it are closer to our research, the scientist distinguishes forming the world by the time and space, Roziy states knowing the differences between the time and extent. Beruniy considers the time and extent separately in order to attach importance to the motion and action on the bases of the time and extent. As the world is an enormous space, the time reveals through the action, event and occurrence.

Abu Ali Ibn Sina (Avicenna) mentioned about the time in fiction in the oriental poetry: “Usually the words of image and dreams fulfill much, some of them are related to the time outspoken and its duration. The duration of the time is a weight” [1]. If the attention is paid, the scientist meant that the event in the poetry was mostly related to the time. The time is a definite measure, which shows the appropriateness to the poem‟s measure. However, there is no view about the space, the event and the contents.

It is seen from the above-mentioned, that the study of the space and the time has a long history. The oriental scientists have the same opinion about the relations of time and space, their compatibility, interpenetration, and that all the things existed on the bases of the two of them.





20

The problem of chronotop in Alisher Navoiy works and the forms of it in the work “Days gone by” are worth attention in the research of U.Jurakulov [9]. The scientist successfully reveals the chronotop from the standpoint of the historical poetry. Furthermore, the Russian scientist M.Bakhtin made his contributions to the revealing of the problem. M.Bakhtin particularly emphasizes the peculiar features of chronotop in the Uzbek literature. He distinguishes the two types of chronotop in “Lison-ut-tayr” and made an effort to depict the features of the genre “Khamsa”. He ponders about the religious, mythological forms of revealing the world, the notions of the universe and chaos, which prove the knowledge about the universe as the chronotop and the existence of the world and human chronotop in artistic reflection. Especially, the cronotop and its national, Islamic values are properly substantiated.

There are various thoughts about the unity of the time and space, in some cases they should also be explained through motion and reflection of the world. It seems to be unfeasible, as the artistic time and the artistic space can be considered the componential part of both artistic thought and the plot. Indeed, the people exist within the time and space in the life and percept the world spiritually, rationally and emotionally. However, the artistic time and the artistic space can be revealed through realization of the artistic thought in the forms of the action of the time, thoughts and debates. Thus, the artistic time and the artistic space can be the compositional bases of any work, the other elements as the plot, text forming, details and image exist in the time and space. Supposing there are no time and space, there will not be abovementioned elements.

3. CONCLUSIONS The following conclusions on the development

of the space and time in the history of the artistic thought can be cited:

1. The problem of the time and space as the philosophical categories is considered to be the object of the research in literary criticism. Therefore, the historical developments of the time and space along with the approaches of the eastern and western scientists have been compared. The results show the identity of their views, which complement each other‟s theories.

2. The views of some scientists in perception of the world illustrate that the space is primary and the motion of the events in it is secondary.

3. As the sources show, the scientists share the similar views on the two prevailing features of the time and space: the first, the time and the space are interrelated categories; the second, they extend in the definite sphere and

can be in constant motion, or in logical sequence.

4. According to the different approaches there are several forms of the time and space as the real time and space, hidden time and space, religious time and space.

REFERENCES 1. Абу Али ибн Сино. шеър санъати http://www.e-

adabiyot.uz.adabiyotshunoslik ( Uzbek Language)

2. Абу Наср Форобий. Фозил одамлар шаҳри

(Танланган асарлар). – Тошкент: Абдулла

Қодирий номидаги халқ мероси нашриѐти,

1993. – 224 б. ( Uzbek Language)

3. Абу Ҳомид Ғаззолий. Иҳѐу улумид-дин.

Тафаккур китоби. – Тошкент: Тошкент ислом

университети, www.ziyouzcom.uz. ( Uzbek

Language)

4. Авесто: тарихий-адабий ѐдгорлик / Н.Жўраев;

таржимон А. Маҳкам. – Тошкент: Ғафур

номидаги нашриѐт-матбаа ижодий уйи, 2015.

–732 б. ( Uzbek Language)

5. Арасту. Поэтика. Ахлоқи кабир. Риторика. –

Тошкент: Янги аср авлоди, 2012. – 352 б. (

Uzbek Language)

6. Аристотель. Метафизика. Перевод с

греческого П. Д. Первова и В. В. Розанова. - М.:

Институт философии, теологии и истории св.

Фомы, 2006. – 232 с. (Russian Language)

7. Афлотун. Давлат. – Тошкент: Янги аср

авлоди. 2015. – 464 б. ( Uzbek Language)

8. Бируни А. Индия: Пер. с араб./Репринт с изд.

1963 г. — М.:Ладомир, 1995. – 727 с. (Russian

Language)

9. Жўрақулов У. Назарий поэтика масалалари:

Муаллиф. жанр, Хронотоп. –Тошкент: Ғафур

Ҳулом номидаги нашриѐт матбаа уйи, 2015. –

356 б. ( Uzbek Language)

10. Кант, Иммануил. Критика способности

суждения. – М.: Искусство, 1994 —365 с.

(Russian Language)

11. Комилов Н. Тасаввуф. Биринчи китоб. –

Тошкент: Ёзувчи. – 272 б. ( Uzbek Language)

12. Комилов Н. Тасаввуф. Иккинчи китоб. Тавҳид

асрори. – Т.: Ғафур Ғулом номидаги адабиѐт

ва санъат, 1999. –208 б. ( Uzbek Language)

13. Литературная энциклопедия терминов и

понятий / Под ред. А.Н.Николюкина.— М.:

НПК «Интелвак», 2001. — 1600 стб. (Russian

Language)

14. Қуронов Д., Раҳмонов Д. Ғарб адабий-

танқидий тафаккури тарихи очекрлари. –

Тошкент: Фан, 2008. – 276 б. ( Uzbek

Language)


http://www.e-adabiyot.uz.adabiyotshunoslik/

http://www.e-adabiyot.uz.adabiyotshunoslik/

http://www.ziyouzcom.uz/




IMPLEMENTATION OF PAPR REDUCTION SCHEMES

BY USING DCT AND SLM TECHNIQUES

J.Sateesh1

1Assistant Professor(c),

Dept. Of ECE, JNTUK, University College of

Engineering,

Vizianagaram

M.Harika2


Dept. of ECE, Satya Institute of Technology

and Management,

Vizianagaram

P.Sirish Kumar3


Dept. of ECE, Aditya Institute of Technology and Management,

Tekkali

ABSTRACT One of main disadvantage of Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) is high peak-to-average power ratio

(PAPR). In this paper, two effective PAPR reduction schemes are proposed. These techniques combine the DCT and

SLM techniques. The scheme 1 is composed of the DCT followed by the SLM technique, and the DCT is used followed by

conventional SLM in proposed scheme 2. Simulation results show that the proposed schemes can obtain significant

PAPR reduction performance with that of ordinary SLM techniques.

KEYWORDS: SLM, DCT Transform, PAPR, OFDM

1. INTRODUCTION Wireless communication is among technology’s biggest contributions to mankind. Wireless communication involves the transmission of information over a distance without help of wires, cables or any other forms of electrical conductors. The transmitted distance can be anywhere between a few meters (for example, a television’s remote control) and thousands of kilometers (for example, radio communication). Some of the devices used for wireless communication are cordless telephones, mobiles, GPS units, wireless computer parts, and satellite television.

Advantages: Wireless communication has the following advantages:

Communication has enhanced to convey the information quickly to the consumers.

Working professionals can work and access Internet anywhere and anytime without carrying cables or wires wherever they go. This also helps to complete the work anywhere on time and improves the productivity.

Doctors, workers and other professionals working in remote areas can be in touch with medical centers through wireless communication.

Disadvantages The growth of wireless network has enabled us to use personal devices anywhere and anytime. This has helped mankind to improve in every field of life but this has led many threats as well

Wireless Medical Technologies New wireless technologies, such as mobile body area networks (MBAN), have the capability to monitor blood pressure, heart rate, oxygen level and body temperature. The MBAN works by sending low powered wireless signals to receivers that feed into nursing stations or monitoring sites. This technology helps with the intentional and unintentional risk of infection or disconnection that arise from wired connections.

2. ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING (OFDM)

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) is a Multi-Carrier Modulation technique in





which a single high rate data-stream is divided into multiple low rate data-streams and is modulated using

subcarriers which are orthogonal to each other.

Fig 1: All cargo on one truck vs. splitting the shipment into more than one

Principle of Orthogonality The condition for maintaining the orthogonality is that the frequency spacing between the carrier signals must be an integer multiple of the lowest carrier frequency.

In multi-carrier system, occupied bandwidth on the channel is minimized as possible. This minimization is possible by reducing the frequency space between carriers. The narrow space among the carriers is obtained when they are orthogonal to each other. To be orthogonal, the time averaged integral product of two signals should be zero.

(i) (ii)

Fig 2.(a): (i)Area under a sine wave over one period is always zero.

Mathematically, the orthogonality of two signals can be expressed as

(2.1) Where , fk (t) and fl(t) are any two signals over time interval [ t1, t1+T ],T a is signal time period. For orthonormal, the time averaged integral product of two signals should be one. Mathematically, orthonormal of two signals can be expressed as

(2.2) Using equation (2.1) and (2.2), orthogonality for OFDM system is expressed as-

(2.3) Solving equation (2.3), we get-

(2.4)





Taking the discrete samples with the sampling instances at t=nTs=nT/N, n=0,1,2,…..N-1 . Equation (2.4) can be written in the discrete time domain as-

(2.5) OFDM communication systems are able to effectively utilize the frequency spectrum through overlapping subcarriers. Simulation of figure (2.2) for five sub-carriers shows that sub-carriers are able to partially overlap without interfering with adjacent

sub-carriers because the maximum power of each subcarrier corresponds directly with the minimum power of each adjacent channel. In additional, different sub-carriers are orthogonal to each other and they are totally different from one another.

Fig 2.(b) frequency response of 5 sub carriers of OFDM signal

Block Diagram

Fig 3: Block diagram of OFDM system

3. MODULATION TECHNIQUES Modulation is defined as the process in which the characteristics of a carrier signal is varied in accordance with the instantaneous values of modulating signal. the modulation techniques are classified into two types. They Are:

1. Analog Modulation Techniques 2. Digital Modulation Techniques

Analog Modulation Technique The analog modulation is to transfer an analog low pass signal i,e. audio or video signals over the analog band pass channel i,e. limited radio frequency band. analog modulation is three types. They Are:

1. Amplitude Modulation 2. Frequency Modulation





3. Phase Modulation 4.

Digital Modulation Technique The digital modulation is to transfer digital bit stream over the analog band pass channel. Digital modulation techniques are three types. They Are:

1. Amplitude Shift Keying

2. Frequency Shift Keying

3. Phase Shift Keying

4.

5. PAPR REDUCTION TECHNIQUES PAPR (PEAK-TO-AVERAGE POWER RATIO) The Peak to Average Power Ratio (PAPR) of OFDM is defined as the ratio between the maximum instantaneous power and the average power.

The PAPR is the relation between the maximum power of a sample in a given OFDM transmit symbol divided by the average power of that OFDM symbol. PAPR occurs when in a multicarrier system the different sub-carriers are out of phase with each other. At each instant they are different with respect to each other at different phase values. When all the points achieve the maximum value simultaneously; this will cause the output envelope to suddenly shoot up which causes a 'peak' in the output envelope. Due to presence of large number of independently modulated subcarriers in an OFDM system, the peak value of the system can be very high as compared to the average of the whole system. This ratio of the peak to average power value is termed as Peak-to-Average Power Ratio.

PAPR is defined as:

Where [| |

] represents the maximum power of

the signal and E[| | ] is the average signal power.

For an OFDM system with N sub-carriers, the peak power of received signals is N times the average power when phase values are the same. The PAPR of

baseband signal will reach its theoretical maximum at

(𝑑𝐵) =10log 𝑁. PAPR in dB is given as:

PAPR =( Ppeak/Paverage)=10log10[[max |x(t)|2]/E{x(t)2}]

Criteria For PAPR Reduction Method Selection The criteria of the PAPR reduction is to find the approach that it can reduce PAPR largely and at the same time it can keep the good performance in terms of the following factors as possible. The following criteria should be considered in using the techniques:

i) The high capability of PAPR reduction is primary factor to be considered in selecting the PAPR reduction technique with as few harmful side effects such as in-band distortion and out of band radiation.

ii) Low average power: Although it also can reduce PAPR through average power of the original signals increase, it requires a larger linear operation region in HPA and thus resulting in the degradation of BER performance.

iii) Low implementation complexity: Generally, complexity techniques exhibit better ability of

(i) PAPR reduction. However, in practice, both time and hardware requirements for the PAPR reduction should be minimal.

iv) Without additional power needed: The design of a wireless system should always take into consideration the efficiency of power.

Reduction Techniques PAPR reduction techniques vary according to

the requirement of the system and are dependent on various factors such as PAPR Spectral efficiency, reduction capacity, increase in transmit signal power, loss in data rate, complexity of computation and increase in the bit-error rate(BER) at the receiver end are various factors which are taken into account before adopting a PAPR reduction technique of the system. Many techniques have been suggested for PAPR reduction, with different levels of success and complexity. lot of techniques presents for the reduction of this PAPR.





These Reduction techniques are divided into three groups:

1. signal distortion techniques

2. signal scrambling techniques 3.coding

Fig.4. PAPR Reduction Techniques

5. COMBINATION OF SLM AND DCT SLM

SLM (Selective Level Mapping)

In the SLM, from a number of copies that represent the same information, one with lowest PAPR is chosen for transmission.

Fig.5 (a) :SLM Block diagram X is the OFDM data block, is the phase vectors and is the modified data vectors in the frequency domain. So the time domain signal,





where u= 1,2…U ,and N is length of X, also the number of sub-carriers. Among the modified data blocks, the one with the lowest PAPR is selected for transmission. The amount of PAPR reduction for

SLM depends on the number of phase sequences U and the design of the phase sequences. Construction of OFDM frames representing the same in-formation is by defining D distinct vectors:

Figure 5.1 (a) shows the basic block diagram of selection mapping technique for suppressing the high PAPR.

Fig.5.1 (b) Flow chart for SLM technique.

6. RESULTS AND ANALYSIS CCDF Plots: Cumulative distributive function is to describe the probability of the random variable with the given probability distribution function. Complementary cumulative distributive function is also called as tail distribution which is used to illustrate the PAPR of OFDM signal. The output curve is used to conclude the design parameters of the modulation system.

Complementary cumulative distribution function (CCDF) is a method used to characterize the peak power statistics of a digitally modulated signal. CCDF object measures the probability of a signal’s instantaneous power to be a specified level above its average power. The CCDF of an OFDM system to measure the PAPR can be given as

6.1.1 Comparison of original papr with different carriers

The vertical axis range of CCDF plots is from 100 to 10-1, indicative of 0 db to -10 db respectively. The CCDF plots determine the probability of different orthogonal frequencies that

can be modulated with different carriers like 64,128,256 & 4096 and the PAPR values as indicated in the below figures. Fig 6.1.1 (a) corresponds to BPSK. Fig 6.1.1 (b) corresponds to QPSK.





Fig 6.1.1 (a) Comparison of original papr using BPSK Fig 6.1.1 (b) Comparison of original papr using QPSK

In the OFDM system the number of carriers increases the PAPR values also increases.

6.1.2 Comparison of Original PAPR with SLM [phases=2,4,8]

The vertical axis range of CCDF plots is

from 100 to 10-3, indicative of 0 db to -30 db respectively. The CCDF plots determine the probability of different orthogonal frequencies that can be modulated with carrier 4096 and the PAPR values as indicated in the below figures. Fig 6.1.2 (a) corresponds to BPSK. Fig 6.1.2 (b) corresponds to QPSK.

Fig 6.1.2 (a) Comparison of Original PAPR Fig 6.1.2 (b) Comparison of Original PAPR with SLM[phases=2,4,8] using QPSK with SLM[phases=2,4,8] using BPSK The original PAPR is comparatively more than the PAPR after the Selective Level Mapping is applied. In SLM techniques as the numbers of phase blocks increases the PAPR values are reduced.

6.1.3 Comparison between SLM and DCT combined with SLM [phase 4]

The vertical axis range of CCDF plots is from 100 to 10-3, indicative of 0 db to -30 db respectively. The CCDF plots determine the probability of different orthogonal frequencies that can be modulated with carrier 4096 and the PAPR values as indicated in the below figures. Fig 6.1.3 (a) corresponds to BPSK. Fig 6.1.3 (b) corresponds to QPSK.





Fig 6.1.3 (a) Comparison of SLM and DCT SLM using BPSK Fig 6.1.3 (b) Comparison of SLM and DCT SLM using QPSK

When the SLM technique is applied, the PAPR values are comparatively more than the PAPR values after the Combination of Selective Level Mapping (SLM) and Discrete Cosine Transform (DCT) applied. The above plots are taken when the number of phase blocks are 4.

6.1.4 Comparison between SLM and DCT combined with SLM [phase 8]

The vertical axis range of CCDF plots is from 100 to 10-3, indicative of 0 db to -30 db respectively. The CCDF plots determine the probability of different orthogonal frequencies that can be modulated with carrier 4096 and the PAPR values as indicated in the below figures. Fig 6.1.4 (a) corresponds to BPSK. Fig 6.1.4 (b) corresponds to QPSK.

Fig 6.1.4 (a) Comparison of SLM and DCT SLM using BPSK Fig 6.1.4 (b) Comparison of SLM and DCT SLM using QPSK

When the SLM techniques is applied, the PAPR values are comparatively more than the PAPR values after the Combination of Selective Level Mapping (SLM) and Discrete Cosine Transform (DCT) applied. The above plots are taken when the number of phase blocks are 8. here also as the number of phase blocks increases the PAPR is reduced.

In this thesis MATLAB simulation version used is “MATLAB R2009a”. PAPR value is

calculated for different data carriers with different phase blocks. In SLM and combination of DCT with SLM, this process is applied for different input data which are multiplied with phase blocks combined to minimize the PAPR.

In this thesis the PAPR performance of SLM and combination of DCT with SLM algorithms and conventional OFDM signal is evaluated with different modulation techniques such as BPSK, QPSK and is





used for simulation. CCDF can be indicative of the figure of merit for the performance of PAPR. Some of the PAPR values of different modulation

techniques with and without SLM and combination of DCT with SLM are as shown in tables 6.1 and 6.2.

PAPR OF OFDM USING BPSK

PAPR N=2 N=4 N=8

ORIGINAL PAPR 5.212 5.212 5.212

PAPR WITH SLM 6.336 5.239 4.974

COMBINATION OF DCT WITH SLM

5.967 4.487 4.199

Table 6.1 comparison of papr using SLM and combined DCT SLM

PAPR OF OFDM USING QPSK

PAPR N=2 N=4 N=8

ORIGINAL PAPR 7.816 7.816 7.816

PAPR WITH SLM 6.896 5.672 4.947

COMBINATION OF DCT WITH SLM

6.041 5.63 4.712

Table 6.2 comparison of papr using SLM and combined DCT SLM

CONCLUSION OFDM is a very attractive technique for multicarrier transmission and has become one of the standard choices for high – speed data transmission over a communication channel. It has various advantages; but also has one major drawback: it has a very high PAPR. From the simulation results, it is observed that the reduction of PAPR is higher in the technique DCT combined with SLM compared to the conventional SLM technique when BPSK/QPSK modulation was used. The PAPR also reduced as the number of blocks of phases increased when BPSK/QPSK modulation was used.Use of QPSK allows higher transmission capacity due to the QPSK uses two bits per symbol. Hence QPSK is easily effected by the noise. Therefore OFDM with QPSK requires large transmit power. So BPSK is preferable for the OFDM systems.

FUTURE SCOPE The following are some of the interesting extensions of the present work:

The PAPR can be reduced further using different window techniques like hamming , Hann Peak Windowing etc are combined with PAPR reduction techniques likes SLM ,PTS.

REFERENCES 1. Y.Wu and W. Y. Zou, “Orthogonal frequency

division multiplexing: A multi-carrier modulation

scheme,” IEEE Trans. Consumer Electronics,

vol. 41, no. 3, pp. 392–399, Aug. 1995.

2. Tao Jiang, Yiyan Wu,”peak to average power

ratio reduction in OFDM systems”, IEEE

transactions on broadcasting, vol. 54, no. 2, June

2008.

3. Suvera Sengar, Partha Pratim Bhattacharya,

“PERFORMANCE IMPROVEMENT IN OFDM

SYSTEM BY PAPR REDUCTION”, Signal &

Image Processing An International Journal

(SIPIJ) Vol.3, No.2, April 2012.

4. Mr.Jobin Raj, Mr.M.Malleswaran, “DCT Based

Modified SLM Technique for PAPR Reduction in

OFDM Transmission”, International Journal of

Scientific & Engineering Research Volume 3,

Issue 6, June-2012.

5. Kavita Mhatre, Uday Pandit Khot, “Efficient

Selective Mapping PAPR Reduction

6. Technique”, International Conference on

Advanced Computing Technologies and

7. Applications (ICACTA-2015).





STATE RULING OF THE ARABIC KHALIFAT IN THE CENTRAL ASIA

Matyaqubov Toyirjon Sultanbayevich Student,

Department of History,

Faculty of History,

Urgench State University,

Urgench, Uzbekistan.

ABSTRACT

The Khaleefah had the right to appoint or dismiss the regional deputies. The legal issues of the Khilafah were dealt on the

basis of the Qur’an and the instructions of the prophet. During the first period of the Arabic Caliphate, a Caliph was elected.

During the period of the Umavi and the Abbasias, the position to the next the despot had unlimited power. While the Caliphs

in the early days of the Arab Caliphate did not seek to separate themselves from the people and lived a very wealthy life.

During the Ummaviys and Abbasias a much wider and relatively centralized bureaucratic apparatus was established.

KEYWORDS: theocratic state, Arab Caliphate, modern scientific literature, local governors, legal disputes.

INTRODUCTION By the middle of the VII century, political rule

in the Movarounnahr and Khorasan regions had been adapted to the political system of the Arab Caliphate. Governors in the provinces and the rest of the rulers were obligated to submit to the Khilafah deputy governor, despite the fact that the form of administrative authority remainded in shape. Most of the local leaders had embraced Islam in order to preserve their rights and privileges. The nobles who did not convert to the Islam were deprived of their wealth or paid large sums.

According to the modern scientific literature, the center of Arab control over the occupied territories of Central Asia was Marv, and from there it was headed by the Khaleefah’s deputy Movaraunnahr and Khurasan. As we have already mentioned, by the middle and the end of the VII century, political rule in the Movarounnahr and Khorasan regions had been adapted to the political system of the Arab Caliphate. During this period, the main task of the local governors in Movarounnahr was Sughd, Shash, Ferghana, Khorezm, Ustushona, Takharistan. It was the work of the local governors was largely controlled by the Khaleefah, and they were also obliged to obey the Khaleefah’s deputy in Khorasan.

The Khaleefah relied on the vazir ul-vuzaro ( great minister) of state for governor. Military and military forces were in the hands of the Emir. The Khaleefah considered diffret types of points in the Devan ad- da’r that council the devan ad-da’r was devided into three major divisions and they were The devan al- mashriq, The devan al- magrib, The devan al-

kharaj. Issues related to Movarounnahr were resolved in Devan al- mashriq[1].

MATERIALS AND METHODS Uzbekistan was the part of the Arab Caliphate

after the Arab invasion. The Arab Caliphate was a feudal theocratic state with a Caliph on it. The Khaleefah had all the secular and religious power in the state. Above the provinces occupied by the Arab Caliphate were Emirs appointed by the Khaleefah. The territory of Uzbekistan was ruled by the Khaleefah’s deputy Khurasan and Mavarounnahr. The deputy has appointed governors and Sheikhs of separate cities and settlements. They were responsible for collecting money from the local population and maintaining public order. In addition to administrative and financial rights, some mayors even ruled military forces. In many places the Arabs had deployed their military units. They kept the locals in captivity. The Arabs had administrative staff and officers and the governors had their own bodyguards[2].

There were a council under the Khaleefah who decided the important issues. The Caliph’s immediate adviser and deputy, the highest official in the state, was the great Minister The Arabic word means “bearer of the burdens”. The great minister had great authority, who was responsible for the expenditure of the state on behalf of the Khaleefah appointing Ambassadors and Sultans Positions. Chief of the Khaleefah’s personal bodyguards, police chief, special officer overseeing other officials it was. The central government bodies were called devans. The Arab Caliphate has the following devils:





Al Hiraj- Internal Affairs Office-headed financial affairs; Al Hatim-the secret police function as the Khilafah secretariat performed; Ar Rasail is the mail and communication dean. He has provided mail and government freight. Supervised the construction of roads, caravansarays, wells; Al Mustaqilot-accounted for the military and was responsible for maintaining the army. If the four devans in the Abbasias would increase to ten. At the head of the provinces was the minister appointed by Khaleefah, or the rais ud-devon. Apart from the above, there is also the state Treasury-Byte-al-mal, which is engaged in collecting the zakat[1].

RESULT AND DISCUSSION Judical power was separated from the

administrative power. Local authorities were not entitled to interfere with the decision of judge.

The Shari’a as a religious right differs from the canonical (religious, holy, hardened, exemplary)law of European countries, and it is not only a clearly defined area of and church life, but also a comprehensive and comprehensive one. It facts as a legal system with many issues. Although Islamic law was originally established in a number of countries in Asia and Africa, over time its scope of action spread to central Asia, the Causasus , North, and partly to East and West Africa,and to several countries in Southeast Asia. However, the rapid and widespread use of Islam and the Shariah has led to its increasingly local character. As a result, the Shari’a has different interpretations and approaches to interpret certain legal disputes. As a consequence, Islam has created various currents, directions and sects[2].

CONCLUSION Social and Dialogue characteristics the social

aspect of the Arab Caliphate was that it did not establish a classical regime, as it did in European countries. Here the distinctive character of the legal status of different groups of the populations was, first and foremost, that the right of Muslims and non-Muslims , Arabs and other peoples were unequal and different. List of used literature[2].

REFERENCES 1. Mukhammedov Kh. State and law of foreign

countries. Section II. - T., “Tashkent State Law

Institute”, 2005.

2. Turayev A.I., Akhmadov A.A. History of state

institutions in Central Asia and Uzbekistan.

Bukhara, “Bukhara State University” 2018.





IMPROVEMENT OF THE KHOREZM DEFENSE SYSTEM AND WEAPONS IN ANTIQUITY

Matyaqubov Toyirjon Sultanbayevich Student,

Department of History,

Faculty of History,



ABSTRACT

The planning ancient cities of Khorezm is similar to that used in the construction of Sogd, Ferghana, Bactria and Margiana.

Circular and rectangular constellations are one of the oldest in the history of the cities of Khorezm oasis. Khiva, Bactria,

Hayitobodtepa, and the Eylatan in the Ferghana Valley are among them. The improvement of weapons is linked to the

Bronze Age, which proves to be familiar with such concepts as military action in society, aggression, violence, seizure, wealth

accumulation, and territorial expansion. At the beginning of the first millennium BC, tensions between the tribes became

even more acute. Different methods and trends have emerged in defense and offensive knowledge, and based on this, the

weapons have also improved and become more military defensive.

KEYWORDS: irrigation water, complex gate structure, rectangular square, structure of the fortress walls, military

operations.

INTRODUCTION Analysis of the sources on the formation and

development of the first states on the territory of Uzbekistan, the primitive states are confined to individual locations or the first cities and the area of cultivated land and irrigation systems in a relatively small area, in fact, they are found in the ancient irrigated oasis, which is widely used for agriculture and production purposes. About this the researcher O’. Abdullaev in his monograph “Ancient Management System and Early State Historiography in Central Asia” provides protection for the population of such regions defense of the territories, organization of irrigation and farming, and internal and external communication of the community. It was an important and vital necessity to solve their problems. In order to solve these tasks, the community has the respect of the community for organizing certain activities (large- scale construction and distribution of irrigation water, community religious practices, disputes, etc.) people who write down – guides about emergence[1]. The written sources partly illuminated the history of Uzbekistan in the first half of the first millennium BC. The “ Avesto “ belongs to history of Uzbekistan, the medieval writings of the Byzantine period and the earliest written sources of the ancient world (Greco-Roman) were the first in the history of the ancient East and the world in the history of nations, separate places, mountains, rivers and lakes, contains the names of legendary heroes and kings, information on the life, religion, culture, socio- economic and political system of the population. Since these sources are incomplete, it is necessary to compare

the written and archaeological sources in the study of ancient economic and political processes. Archaeological data extends written sources and shows specific areas of historical development[2].

MATERIALS AND METHODS As a result of the process of urbanization of the

Khorezm oasis since the middle of the 6th centuary BC, the socio-economic and ethno cultural relations of the society have undergone profound changes that led to the formation of the foundations of urban planning and statehood[3]. The military threat of military tribes in the Kkorezm region created the alliance of the Sak-Massaget tribes. In the VI-V centuries BC in the Khorezm oasis the cities with the developed defense system were developed on the basis of careful planning. Kualikir, Kalykikir, Oybuqqal’a, Khiva, Bazarqal’a, Khazarasp were built according to a well-developed plan. Kurbanboy Sobirov, a long time researcher, in his book “ Defense Buildings in Rural and Cities of Khorezm” acted as a military frontier with the settlers at the highlands of Kualikir, Kalykikir, and attacked the west-south of the Khorezm oasis for protecting it. The protection was recorded by Oybuqqal’a, while Khiva was defending the Khazarasp fortresses to the south.

One of the leading defense methods in the ancient cities of Khorezm is the zodiac. In the defense system of the cities Khorezm there were built three types of zodiacs: half circle, rectangular square. Walls and zodiac signs are decorated with chess-shaped, rectangular tires. Tires occupy a special place in the defense of ancient cities. The city’s warrior was able to





hit the enemy with three tires at a certain point in the corridor, with an active attack and quick defense to reach the defensive position.

One of the most important elements of the defense system in the ancient cities of Khorezm was a complex gate structure. As early as the sixth centuary BCE, the Khorezmites paid special attention to the gate and provided protection at the gate. Built in the VI-V centuries BC, the defense system of Khorezm was built on the basis of active defense, with the assistance of infantry and cavalry, and played an important role in the lives of city’s inhabitants.

RESULT AND DISCUSSION In Khorezm, large tracts of irrigation facilities of

the VII-VI centuries BC are located in the middle and lower reaches of the Amudarya river. Numerous houses of ruins, villages and towns were discovered and investigated in the territory of Khorezm at the end of seventh century BC. One of the oldest centers of ancient Khorezm has a lot in common with the structure of the fortress walls of Kyzyltepa in Bactria. This indicates the development of cultures close to Khorezm , Margiana and Sogdiana[4].

The spear is one of the oldest weapons used in the tribes living in the Khorezm oasis since the fifth millennium BC. The spear tip is sharp, the leaf is a tree, the handle is 1 m long.

The dagger is an ancient weapon used by humanity since the Bronze Age. Originally made of bronze, this iron weapon was used in close range military operations, mainly in infantry and cavalry. Sword have been used the Khorezm oasis tribes in military and defense work since the middle of the first millennium BC.

CONCLUSION The Khorezm carried the sword to the left and

dagger with them, swinging the sword to the right. The shield was a weapon of defense and was used in the middle of the first millennium BC. This weapon was made of wood, bronze, and iron, both small and large. The infantry and cavalry had closed the front chest. A comprehensive analysis of the ancient Khorezm population’s defensive weapons and their improvement is provided in the book “ Rural and Urban Defense facilities in Khorezm”[5].

Basen on the data and analysis cited above, it should be noted that as a result of urban development, the development of complex defense system in Khorezm in the VI-IV centuries BC, such as defense structures and military knowledge, came to the top.

REFERENCES 1. Abdullaev U.Ancient system of government in

Central Asia and the first state historiography.-

Tashkent: Academy, 2009.

2. Sagdullaev A. History of the Ancient Central Asia. –

Tashkent: University, 2004.

3. Askarov A. Some of problems of ancient Khorezm

history. Scientific collection. – Tashkent, 2004.

4. Sagdullaev A., Mavlonov U. History of State

Administration in Uzbekistan. – Tashkent:

Academy, 2006.

5. Sobirov K. Rural and urban defense structures in

Khorezm.- Tashkent.: Science, 2009.





MICROFLORA OF BREAST MILK AND FACTORS OF NON-SPECIFIC RESISTANCE OF BREAST-FEEDING

WOMEN

1Samandarova Barno Sultanovna

1Senior teacher of the Department of

mikrobiology of Urgench branch of Tashkent

medical Academy, Urgench, Republic of

Uzbekistan.

2Sadullaev Otanazar Qodirovich 2Senior teacher of the Department of



Uzbekistan.

3Zakirov Shakirbek Yusupovich

3Senior teacher of the Department of



Uzbekistan.

4Karimova Maksuda Ahmedjanovna

4Assistant of the Department of mikrobiology of

Urgench branch of Tashkent medical Academy,

Urgench, Republic of Uzbekistan.

5Rakhmanova Valeriya Rustamovna

5Assistant of the Department of

Faculty and Hospital Therapy of Urgench branch

of Tashkent medical Academy,

Urgench, Republic of Uzbekistan.

ABSTRACT To date, it is believed that the natural feeding of the newborn is the most optimal and physiological for the full development of the

newborn. It is known that immunity against enterobacteria causing diarrheal diseases is mainly carried out by IgM. This

immunoglobulin does not cross the placenta, so babies are not protected against intestinal infections.

Given the close relationship between microflora and the immune system, the aim of our work was to study the microbial

landscape of breast milk of nursing women with a parallel study of the level of IgA, G, M and SIgA in breast milk. 914 breast-

milk samples of lactating women were studied in a bacteriological laboratory of center for urban sanitary and epidemiological

surveillance and center for railway station sanitary and epidemiological surveillance of Urgench city.

KEY WORDS: breast milk, IgM. IgG, IgA, microbial landscape, bacteriological research, breast milk culture.

INTRODUCTION Natural breast milk, in addition to nutritional

value, is of great and decisive importance in the formation of the normal microflora of the intestines of the newborn, and is also important in protecting the baby from infection (1).

It is known that immunity against enterobacteria causing diarrheal diseases is mainly carried out by IgM. This immunoglobulin does not pass through the placenta; therefore, babies are not protected against intestinal

infections [Vershigora А.Е., 1989]. IgM deficiency is supplemented by the amount of IgG and IgA that passes into the infant's body with breast milk. In this regard, the study of non-specific protective factors that provide the main biological property of breast milk - protective, is very important.

However, there are absolute and relative contraindications to breast-feeding, in addition to this, the question of the possibility of infection of breast milk and,

accordingly, the newborn remains open. Excluding the possibility of breast milk infection in case of purulent-inflammatory diseases (PID) of the mammary gland (mastitis), in some cases, breast milk infection can only be associated with septic conditions of mothers (2, 3, 4).

Currently in Uzbekistan significant proportion of children (more than 30% from 3-6 months of age) are on artificial feeding (1). According to our data, infectious disease doctors and pediatricians recommend bacteriological research of breast milk when children start to develop various pathological conditions.

Given the close relationship between microflora and the immune system, the aim of our work was to study the microbial landscape of breast milk of breast-feeding women with a parallel study of the level of IgA, G, M, and secretory IgA (SIgA) in breast milk.



MATERIALS AND METHODS Over the course of 3 years, 914 breast-milk

samples of lactating women were studied in a bacteriological laboratory of Center for Urban Sanitary and Epidemiological surveillance and Center for Railway station Sanitary and Epidemiological surveillance of Urgench city. Breast milk was collected according to generally accepted recommendations, in compliance with asepsis rules.

Bacteriological research was conducted by traditional methods. The sowing of breast milk in solid nutrient media was carried out by the quantitative Gold method using the sector sowing method. Determination of the level of IgA, G, M and SIgA was carried out by the method of radial immunodiffusion according to Mancini (1964). Statistical processing of the results was carried

out with the calculation of P, m, δ and the criterion t according to Fisher and Student.

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Analysis of the data on the appeal of breast-

feeding women to bacteriological examination of breast milk correlates with the level of diarrheal diseases among infants. An increase in the number of positive bacteriological results is also noted. It should be especially noted that only 29.1 ± 1.7% of women had breast milk that was sterile. In 70% of cases, gram-positive cocci were sown, whereas S. aureus and S. epidermidis were sown in 72.1 and 53.1% of cases accordingly. Isolation of coagulase-negative

staphylococci from breast milk, in particular S. epidermidis, indicates that aseptic rules were not observed during the collection of material, since S. epidermidis, despite its belonging to the conditionally pathogenic group of bacteria, is a representative of normal microflora of the human body. A natural assumption is that the presence of coagulase-negative staphylococci in breast milk in the presence of a mastitis clinic indicates their etiological role in this process. The presence of S. aureus in breast milk undoubtedly indicates its etiology in the inflammatory process of the mammary gland.

The activity of biological systems is characterized by non-linear correlation relationships. These correlations show the nature of the statistical relationship between the studied indicators. In our work, we noted the presence of a relationship with a correlation relationship greater than 0.5. The main goal was to determine the interspecific relationship between the isolated microbes from breast milk of lactating women and their relationship with the concentration of breast milk immunoglobulins. A bacteriological study of breast milk of the right and left mammary glands of lactating women, in the absence of PID, did not show significant differences in the quantitative and qualitative composition of microorganisms. An age-specific analysis of bacteriological studies of breast milk in lactating women is presented in table 1. Of all the indicators, the greatest difference is noted in the group of mothers of late reproductive age.

Table 1 Indicators of bacteriological studies of breast milk of lactating women (P ± m)

Age groups Sterile breast milk

%

Isolated microorganisms, % Ratio S. aureus to

S. epidermidis, units.

S. aureus S.еpidermidis

18-21 years old 27,3±1,6 20,7±1,4 52±1,9 1:2,51 22-29 years old 30,7±2,1 18,1±1,5 51,2±2,0 1:2,83 30-35 years old 25,5±1,9 12,7±1,8 61,2±2,2 1:4,86 36-49 years old 40±1,2 20±2,3 40±2,6 1:2

Total 29,2±1,7 17,2±1,8 53,1±2,2 1:2,98

Given the close relationship between the microflora of the human body and the immune system, we determined the level of Ig A, M, G, SIgA and the total microbial number (TMN).

Based on our own research and reference data, 5 groups were formed (table 2): I - women with clinically and laboratory established mastitis (n = 30); II - a healthy mother - a child with diarrhea (n = 29); III - a healthy mother and a healthy child (n = 20); IV - a nursing mother with mastitis - a child with diarrhea (n = 20); V -

a healthy mother and a healthy child in Tashkent (n = 10, control group). Groups I - IV were formed at the study site in Urgench. As can be seen from the table in groups I, II, and IV, the level of class G immunoglobulins exceeds similar indicators compared with groups III and V. IgA level is significantly high in groups I, III, IV, IgM is significantly reduced in groups I, II, III. SIgA is reduced in I-IV groups compared with the control group in Tashkent.

Table 2 The level of immunoglobulins in breast milk of lactating women (in mg /%.)

Groups

IgG

IgA

IgM

SIgA

ОМЧ в lg КОЕ/мл

I 30 342±1,6 108,8±0,5 164±0,9 360,6±2,3 834,7±46,8 II 29 385,7±2,8 80,7±0,4 160,9±0,6 430,5±4,2 1666,3±112,3 III 20 295,9±1,2 88,9±0,6 163,2±0,4 437,6±2,4 - IV 20 326,3±2,3 87,5±0,4 176,6±0,9 343, ±1,5 1906,5±124,2 V 10 287,6±1,7 79,5±0,7 172,1±1,3 498,2±3,6 -





Thus, a decrease in the level of secretory IgA was noted in the group of women with mastitis, mothers of newborns with diarrhea. In the group, diarrhea of newborns and mother’s mastitis convincingly shows and confirms the fact of reduction of one of the strong factors of local non-specific resistance - SIgA. The increased content of IgG in breast milk in the group of mothers with mastitis, in the group of healthy mother and diarrhea of the newborn, and in the group of diarrhea of the newborn and mastitis of the mothers indicate the presence of an infectious pathological process. We have traced a clear relationship between the total microbial number (TMN in log CFU / ml) in breast milk of lactating mothers with an imbalance in the level of immunoglobulins determined in the same biological material.

CONCLUSIONS 1. In 29.2% of nursing mothers studied in the

Khorezm region of Uzbekistan, breast milk is sterile. 2. The results of the studies demonstrate that in

69% of cases the microbial factor in breast milk was determined, which was characterized by gram-positive cocci.

3. Detection in breast milk in 53% of cases of S. epidermidis suggests the possibility of poor-quality collection of breast milk for bacteriological research.

4. There is a significant decrease in the level of SIgA in breast milk in all groups of the examined Khorezm region of Uzbekistan in comparison with the group of healthy mothers and healthy newborns in Tashkent. In all groups examined in the Khorezm region of Uzbekistan, an increase in the level of IgA and IgG in breast milk was noted.

REFERENCES 1. Ganiev A.G. Mother's milk as an integral part of the

rational feeding of children of the first year of life //

Bulletin of a general practitioner (Samarkand) - 2003

- No. 1 - P.62 - 64.

2. Kopanev Yu.A., Sokolov A.L. The effect of infected

breast milk on the intestinal microflora of children

who are naturally or mixed-fed // Association

Medicine-2000, Moscow.

3. Sharipov G.T., Iskhakova S.I., Vokhidova Kh.V.

Microorganisms found in breast milk of women //

"Actual problems of clinical microbiology". -

Materials of the Republican scientific and practical

conference - Tashkent - 2002 - S. 44 - 45.

4. Winlkoff B., Baer E. The obstetrician’s opportunity:

translating “breast is best” from theory to practice

//American j. of obstetrics and gynecology – 1980 –

138 – Р.105 – 117.





THE EXPLANATION OF NAKSHBANDI ORDER IN “MAKTUBAT” BY AHMAD SIRHINDI

Feruza Mirzayeva Ahmadjon qizi Lecturer,

Ferghana State University,

Ferghana,

Uzbekistan.

ABSTRACT

In this article, Ahmad Sirhindi's commentary on Maktubat and the doctrine of Nakshbandi, as well as his views on religious

issues, is presented. In addition, the letters analyzing the superiority of the Nakshbandi teaching over other doctrines and the

purification of the Nakshbandi method from various horesies are analyzed.

KEY WORDS: Naqshbandi order, the work “Maktubat”, letter, shariah, doctrine, horesy, murid, shaykhs.

INTRODUCTION Mystical sources, throughout many ages, have

not lost their important value. At the same time, in the study of these sources, special attention should be paid to the knowledge of the terms related to mysticism.

One of the theorists of the Nakshbandi order, Sheikh Ahmad Sirhindi al-Faruqi al-Rabbani (1564-1624), entitled "Maktubat", is one of the most popular works in the world of mysticism. This work is a collection of 535 letters by Ahmad Sirindi, highly regarded in Movarounnahr and still remains necessary. The work was later published in Tashkent, Kazan, and India, and was one of the largest volumes of ornamental books. More than 11 letters in the book are devoted to the praise of the Nakshbandian teaching, its peculiarities, maturity and excellence, and its challenges. The Nakshbandi teaching is an ideology of people whose hands are illuminated with the light of Allah and whose hands are creative [ 1:13]. In several of his letters, Ahmad Sirhindi lists the issues which he sees as the pillars of this teaching for various reasons. As it is written in the book “Maktubat”, the ways of Hazrat Khojaghon are built on the level of end connected with horesy. Hazrat Bahauddin Naqshband in this regard: They said, "We have made the end with a bid'ah." This is the path of the Companions. No matter what the meaning of their conversation with the Prophet (peace and blessings of Allah be upon him), the guardians of this Ummah will not be formed at the end. The best of centuries is the age of the Companions. Abdullah ibn Mubarak was asked, "Which is the most virtuous between Umar ibn Abdulaziz and Muawiya?"

He replied, "By Allah, the dust that penetrates the nose of Mu'awiya’s horse is better than Umar ibn Abdulaziz." The chains of these great breeds are charm. (In the sense of a gold chain. This means that the Meccans have a single gold ring in the way of meaning.)

MATERIALS AND METHODS The superiority of this method over the other

methods is the superiority of the century in which the Companions lived [2:78]. This method differs from its predecessors by its immediate proximity to life. Nakshbandi softened, normalized, adapted to everyday life the rigid rules of mysticism that had been in effect. This ensured the penetration of the pattern into the wider population and played an important role in the socio-political, spiritual and cultural life of Central Asia, the Middle and Near East [3:184]. Here is what Sirhindi wrote in his book Letters: Those who practice this do not consider it permissible to follow the permission. Although they appear to be useful because of their outward appearance. They do not hesitate to follow Azimat, even though they see it as harmful. The circumstances and feelings are governed by the Shari'ah rules. It is believed that the interests and enlightenments serve the Shari'ah sciences. They do not substitute the delicate pearls of the Shariah with the nuts and holes of the body like babies. Ignorant Sufis do not get deceived by their martyrdom. They do not fall into temptation because of their falsehood. They do not abandon texts because of the pressure. (That is, they do not abandon the Koran and the Sunna as Ibn al-'Arabi's work of Fiqh al-hikam). They leave Futuhati Madani, and they don't care about Futuhati Mekkiye. (Pay attention to the testimonies then). Their condition is always the same. For those who are like lightning for others, it is permanent for the greats of the teaching. The pleasure





that followed the backbiting was ignored in the eyes of these great men. There is no one who distracts them from the remembrance of Allah, nor of prayer, nor of giving alms. However, all of them understand how they fear from Qiyomat (Judgement Day) [4:355]. On the contrary, those who do not go to the higher levels of this teaching (Kosher) go as far as denying some of the greatness of the great. Even if they accuse them of being stupid and insulting them, their way is pure.

RESULT AND DISCUSSION He also made numerous reforms in the theory

and practice of knitting, in particular, in his work "Maktubat", in particular, "dhikr", "wahdat", "etiquette and murid"[5:3]. For example, in the letter 131 of his book Maktubot, he expresses these points: Some of their murids claimed that our sheikhs were perfecting the doctrine through these horesies. On the contrary, they strove to destroy and eradicate this teaching. Unfortunately, they have produced some heretics that have never been found in this way. This is because they are performing salat in congregation. At that time, people from all walks of life gathered for the prayer of tahajjud and performed it with a perfect congregation. This is an act of tahrimi makruh. It is permissible for the mahalla to call each other to make it appear that it is permissible to perform the supererogatory prayer in public by reading the prayer at one side of the mosque. The same heretics also believe that this image is 13 rak'ahs. He recites 12 rak'ats standing and 2 rak'ats sitting and claiming 1 rak'ah. It is said to be 13 rak'ahs. The job is not what they think. Because the Prophet (pbuh) would sometimes read 9 rak'ahs and 7 rak'ahs sometimes 13 rak'ahs and sometimes 11 rak'ahs. This is because of the witr prayer in the Maghrib. There is no ruling on praying one rak'ah before standing up for two rak'ats sitting. The source (cause) of such knowledge and actions is due to not following the Sunnah of the Prophet (saas). It is strange that such horesies are common in the cities and towns of the ulema, where scholars live. Whereas poor people like us have access to Islamic knowledge because of their blessings”[2:125].

CONCLUSION In conclusion, Ahmad Sirhindi made a

significant contribution to the theoretical development of the Nakshbandian sect, revised the teachings on the basis of Shari'a principles, and cleared it of various prejudices and practices. In addition, Sirhindi's superiority of belonging to the Nakshbandi doctrine, the popularity of this teaching, its superiority over other teachings, and his views on promoting the Nakshbandi teaching are reflected in his letters to various sections.

Representatives of all sects around the world appreciate the work of Ahmad Sirhindi's "Maktubot". This work, in particular, is one of the most trusted sources of narcissism. After all, today's emerging teachings, the activities of some of their irreligious

sheikhs, and the murders of their murids, led to the writing of this work, which had taken place during the reign of Ahmad Sirhindi. That is the reason why the work is still important.

REFERENCES 1. Qilicheva K. Bahouddin Naqshbandning ta’limiy-ahloqiy

qarashlari. Ped. fan. nom. dis. … avtoref. – Т.: 2004.

2. Maktubot Imom Rabboni. 2 tomlik. Т. 1. – Istanbul:Yasin

Yayinevi, 2006.

3. Naqshbandiya // Islom ensiklopediyasi. – Т.: O’zbekiston

milliy ensiklopediyasi, 2004.

4. Qur’oni karim ma’nolarining tarjimasi. Nur surasi, 37-oyat /

tarjima va izohlar muallifi Abdulaziz Mansur. – Т.: Тоshkent

islom universiteti, 2007.

5. Yuldashxodjayev X. Musoxon Daxbidiyning naqshbandiya-

mujaddidiya tariqati rivojida tutgan o’rni (XVIII аsr): Таr.

fan. nom. ... dis. аvtoref. –Т.: O’zR FA SHI, 2008.





IDEAS ON HANDBALL AND ITS RULES

Batirov Sokhibjon Sodikjonovich Lecturer,

Department of Teaching Physical Education and Sport Sciences,

Faculty of Primary Education and Physical Culture,

Namangan State University,

Uzbekistan

ABSTRACT Handball in its modern form was invented by Danish football players at the turn of the XIX-XX centuries as a substitute for

football in the winter. The date of the birth of the sports ball game, which was registered in the international sports

classification under the name "handball", is considered to be 1898. In 1898, a physical education teacher, Holger Nielsen

from the Danish city of Ordure, introduced a ball game called “handball” into physical education classes for women's groups.

During the new game, teams of 7 people competed in a small field, passing the ball to each other and trying to throw it into

the goal. This article discusses the facts related to this.

KEY WORDS: handball, players, ball, serving

INTRODUCTIONIn 1917, the Berliner Max Heiser picked up the

idea of this ball game with his hands, and already in 1920 the first German handball cup and championship took place in Berlin. And in 1923, new rules of the game were introduced: the size of the ball decreased, the rules of “three seconds” and “three steps” were introduced. All this made it possible to improve the game and its technique.

In 1925, the first international game was held between the teams of Germany and Austria, where the Austrians won with a score of 6: 5. In 1926, handball was recognized as an international sport, which gave impetus to the development of the game in Europe: clubs began to appear in Spain, Switzerland, Luxembourg and several other countries.

In 1928, the International Amateur Handball Federation was created in Amsterdam, which included 11 countries. It existed until 1944. And in 1936, handball was included in the Olympic program at the 11th Olympiad in Berlin.

A new step in the development of this sport was the creation of the International Handball Federation - IHF - in 1946. She approved the program for the development of handball and designated the holding of the World Cup in 11x11 format with the participation of women's and men's teams.

In 1954, the 7x7 world championship was held on Wednesday for the men's teams in Sweden, where the hosts of the competition won, and in 1957 the first 7x7 women's world handball championship was held in Yugoslavia. As a result, in 1966, the 7th and last 11x11 world handball championship was held, then it was decided to develop 7x7 handball.

MATERIALS AND METHODS Handball in 7x7 format was returned to the

Olympic program in 1972, at the 20th Olympic Games in Munich. Competitions were held indoors only among men. The handball players of Yugoslavia won. Women's handball first entered the program in 1976 in Montreal, at the 21st Olympic Games.

After the inclusion of handball in the program of the Olympic Games, the popularity of this sport in the world has increased dramatically. Currently, the International Handball Federation includes 150 countries and many clubs and schools developing handball.

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION 4 rules of handball

The handball field is rectangular, on two sides there are gates 2 meters high and 3 meters wide. The main task of the players is to score the ball with the hands of an opponent.

In this game, as in any other sport, there are several rules, these are the most important of them: 1. During the game on the field there are no more than 7 people from each team, one of them is the goalkeeper, the rest of the players are substitutes. At the beginning of the game, there must be at least five players on the court. 2. Game time: matches for adult teams consist of two halves, each of which lasts 30 minutes. The break between them is 15 minutes. The duration of halves for children's teams is from 20 to 25 minutes, depending on the age of the players. Teams change sides after the break.





3. Each match begins with the ball in the center of the playing court. You can touch the ball with any part of the body, with the exception of the legs. The other player must be at a distance of more than three meters in order to be able to transfer him. And most importantly, each player can take no more than 3 steps with the ball and keep it for no more than 3 seconds, then the ball needs to be thrown to another player on command. 4. The team that scores more goals in the opponent’s goal wins.

What can be done during the game: • put your hands to block and master the ball; • use your palms to knock the ball out of the player of another team; • block the opponent with the body; • touch the opponent’s hands in front to block his actions.

What can not be done during the game: • wrest a ball from an opponent; • block and push the opponent with arms and legs; • apply physical impact on a player of the opposite team that is traumatic for him.

If you want to send your child to the handball section, it’s not difficult to do it - there are many

schools where сhildren from 5 years old. At the same time, training is free.

For adults, training and games will cost you from 500 to 1,500 rubles per lesson, depending on the hall, conditions and level of play.

How are classes. A handball lesson in a group of 10 to 15 people lasts 2 hours on average. The first part of the workout consists of running exercises and warming up for all muscle groups. Most of the time is spent studying blows, learning techniques and tactics. The last half hour, those present at the training are divided into two teams and practice the technique directly during the game. At the end of the session, a hitch and stretching exercises are held.

Ways to pass the ball: - passing the ball with two hands: allows the player to pass the ball clearly to the partner if he is at close or medium distance. The ball is transmitted in several ways: from below or from the side, from the chest with a rebound from the floor, from the chest during movement, or from above with two hands. - passing the ball with one hand: the main method of passing the ball between the players in the process. Such a transfer creates the conditions for better interaction between partners, especially near the gates of the enemy, and also allows you to organize a quick attack. The ball is transmitted with one hand either from below or from the side.

Dribbling and catching exercises • Dribbling between the posts. Bypassing the obstacles on the right side, you need to keep the ball with your left hand, and with your right hand when the rack is on the left. This exercise simulates an opponent’s round to protect the ball.

• Throwing the ball against the wall. These are projectile hits on the wall for accuracy, range and throwing power. Speed, distance to the wall and types of throws can vary. • Exercises for two people - passing the ball while moving with two hands, or one. The distance between the players, the speed of the movement and the method of serving may vary. • Exercises for three or four players. The simplest thing is passing and throwing the ball along a triangle or rectangle, remaining in one place and not changing position after the throw. The task is to keep the ball in the game for as long as possible. Option: passing the ball between players while moving.

3 interesting facts about handball 1) There is a hero in the history of handball -

Igor Turchin, who played for the USSR national team and in its composition won 13 European championship cups, two gold and one bronze medals at the Olympic Games, was twice champion and twice vice-champion at world handball championships .

2) Handball can be played not only indoors. Since 1990, Italy began to engage in this sport on the beaches, and today handball in the sand is practiced in more than 40 countries. In the US, they even decided to combine rugby and handball. The ball in this game is much larger, each team consists of four people, and each has a stun gun to protect the ball and select it from opponents.

3) A funny event occurred in the city of Wittislingne, where the Sri Lankan handball team came to train. The first few days, all athletes attended training and games, but then all 23 people disappeared, leaving a note in the hotel room, indicating that they would not return home because they went to live in France. After this strange disappearance, the police sent a request to the representative office of Sri Lanka, but the response was shocking, as it turned out that this state did not have its own handball team.

How is handball useful for an athlete? In children, general endurance to physical activity develops Handball also develops logic and quick thinking. In order to pass the ball to a partner or to throw in the goal, it is not enough just to be agile and quick. It is necessary to predict the actions of the opponent, calculate the general course of the game and quickly make the right decision. Handball is a sport of smart and strong. Unlike football, it requires work not only legs but also hands. Handball can be played by both boys and girls. You can play not only indoors, but also in open areas, both with grass and rubber coating. Sometimes meetings are held in the sand - beach handball. But the rules here are slightly different from the traditional ones.





CONCLUSION Where to begin? When choosing a section,

we recommend starting from the following criteria: · Perspective. Look for sections with the opportunity to participate in tournaments and competitions, both in your hometown and with departure to other cities. · Trainer. All specialists have their own approach to work and children, as well as their strengths. Someone gets along well with the wards, and someone is a good professional in their field, but at the same time a tough mentor. Go to trial classes in different sections, look at training. This will help you determine where and with whom your child will be more comfortable. · Recommendations. Read reviews about the section, chat with other parents, find out what you liked in the class and what not. · Features of the child. The main deficit in handball is left-handed people. They are taken almost blindly. If your child is one of them, you can be sure that he will not only be credited to the section, but will also be kept on a special account.

It is never too late to discover a new sport, to learn something new, so it is possible and it will become interesting for you to try handball and begin to practice it.

REFERENCES 1. Things You Didn't Know About Handball".

Olympics. IOC. 10 June 2016. Archived from the

original on 19 July 2018. Retrieved 19 July 2018.

2. "IHF Rules of the Game: Regulations on Protective

Equipment and Accessories"(PDF). Nederlands

Handbal Verbond. Retrieved 3 January 2019.

3. John Anthony Cuddon, The Macmillan Dictionary

of Sports and Games, p.393, Macmillan, 1980,

ISBN 0-333-19163-3





THE IMPACT OF TRANSFORMATION OF SOCIAL CONCIOUSNESS AND INTELLIGENCE OF RURAL

POPULATION ON SOCIAL LIFE

Sapayev Valisher Odilbek ugli Lecturer,

Faculty of History,



ABSTRACT This article analyzes the implications of changes in the social consciousness and thinking of rural people on social relations

and processes in society from philosophical point of view. An attempt has been made to clarify the directions of social reform

in rural people’s life and the priorities for these reforms. As well as, the issue of transformation process of social

consciousness and intellectuality, and the influence of social reforms on it have been studied. At the new stage of progress,

the peculiarities of the tendencies of social consciousness changes of agricultural social policy and its significant factors in

Uzbekistan are investigated. The usage of mechanisms of influencing on rural population consciousness and its features in

social policy has been studied through comparative method. In conclusion, the ultimate theories on transformation of public

consciousness and intelligence at the new stage of progress in Uzbekistan are pointed out.

KEYWORDS: Social consciousness, infrastructure, social thinking, social reforms, rural social processes, social

service, social relations, social protection, action strategy, Prosperous village.

INTRODUCTION As we know, there are different forms of social

consciousness. The human social consciousness represents the individual attitude of person on social system social relations in the society, existing social processes, state and social relations. All levels of social consciousness and thinking of the rural population play an important role in rural social processes. There are a variety of factors that contribute to the formation of social consciousness and thinking, and the criteria and principles should be followed in social systems and social processes are significant. The enhanced social consciousness contributes to the well-being of the rural or urban population. The human attitude to existing social-economic, political-cultural processes is identified with the level of social consiousnes. Therefore, the social consciousness of the individual is important in the development of social processes of the society and rural social life.

METHODOLOGY The Public policy of the state plays an important

role in the development of the social consciousness and thinking of the rural population. The social policy, which is not based on the needs of the people and citizens, can have a negative impact on the development of the country. “Social existence is inextricably linked to social consciousness”[1]. For example, the social policies during the former ideology had a negative impact on the development of social consciousness and thinking of the Uzbek people. In the development of social consciousness of the society, the principle of

inheritance was violated. The direction in social policy of today's Uzbekistan is a completely new direction. Because today's social policy is aimed at enlightening the social consciousness of all peoples and nations living in the republic, which is the basis of human and universal values. "It is impossible to overlook the fact that over the last decades, people with certain values have developed a certain social consciousness"[2]. Consequently, the activities of science, technology, literature, art, ethics and aesthetics, and educational-training institutions that promote the development of the social consciousness of the present person are dynamically changed.

The laws of development of the essence and directions of social consciousness are reflected in the outlook and behavior of citizens of our country, especially in rural areas. Due to the liberalization of rural social processes, real opportunities for direct access to and participation of people in social life have become real. The growth of social consciousness and social orientation, change of economic, political and spiritual bases of social life is an important factor in the formation of rural social consciousness in rural areas. A new criteria-based relationship between social life and economics, state and social processes has been established, and a legal framework has been developed. “The social consciousness of the people reflects the whole social existence, first of all, the socio-economic relations, and actively influences the material and spiritual life of the community”[3]. It is the base of human social consciousness and intelligence development of rural people. The development of social consciousness and thinking of the rural population





ensures the future and prospects of the republic as an independent state, and the creation of legal democratic civil society.

RESULTS In the work being done to promote social

processes, the reforms should aim not at the formation of the human mind but on the formation of a person with social consciousness and thinking. It is necessary to define the essence, character, purpose of social processes with the social consciousness of the modern person. Of course, this is not an accidental process. In this regard, the social activity, social policy, the system of public administration, the social policy of the country and the level of self-awareness of the population play an important role. It is important for the formation of social consciousness that any person belongs to a particular social group and has an attitude towards social processes, a vision and a vital position. Therefore, no matter wherever a person lives, he/she belongs to a social group, regardless of where he or she lives, and is thus involved in social relations. S/he protects own personal and group benefits and interests. The process of formation of human social consciousness provides objective and subjective conditions for their transformation from ordinary observers to subjects of social policy.

It is important to determine whether the people are joining a particular group, by participating in social relations, acting according to the interests of common sense, or participating in a community based on the local basics of everyday life. A person with a high level of social consciousness is more concerned with real life and the daily small issues are secondary, while a person with a low level of mentality and social consciousness has a low level of thinking and understanding of interests.

Such people are influenced by certain individuals in their participation in social processes. They do not have a social mind. They do not have a sense of responsibility for social relations in the society.

The living conditions, social services, social security, labor activity, relations with the state, and other demographic and subjective factors have always been influencing on the formation of the social consciousness and thinking of the rural population. Today, the processes aimed at instilling the social consciousness and thinking of the rural population are inseparably linked with socio-political reforms. In the current environment, both in the economic and social sectors, it is taking rapid steps to improve human life, work and living conditions, and to create decent living conditions for them.

DISCUSSION In recent years, on the development of the social

sector has been increasingly focused on as extracurricular from industries. Different social groups have emerged as social service providers that serve the interests of different groups. In particular, the social

relations between the villagers, family-life and daily life have been adequately assessed. The norms of justice in rural social relations have been restored. All people were given the opportunity to social protection, to be a consumer of social services and to choose their own way of life. The moral and ethical basis of state power has changed in the organization of social processes. Much has been done to bring social reform to the minds and consciousness of people.

In general, these fundamental principles are crucial for the process of transformation in organizing above mentioned deep reforms. This is the meaning of the idea „The society is governed by principles.‟ But, the nature of principles of reformations is more important. When it comes to social consciousness, it is worth noting that the strength and prosperity of the state is determined by the principles that govern its socio-moral basis, human intelligence and potential and the principles that they follow.

The renovations of social processes, the change of social consciousness are such a complex and colorful process that different social groups and layers cannot have the same social consciousness and thinking. The people express their views and interests through their social consciousness and thinking. Or, existing social institutions represent and reflect their interests. However, as the awareness of the interests of the villagers expands, they become closer and closer to the general public interest. This is the sphere of such a benefit that there is no place suiting naturally to will and hope linking them together, only by uniting them in this degree the human consciousness and thinking can reach the level of universal interest.

There will be no inferiority to the current social processes when the development of the society is built on the principles of mutually beneficial cooperation and universalism. The transformations in social processes of the society, is in its turn consistent with the cultural-educational basics in the society.

The rise of social consciousness is consistent with the socio-economic cultural development of the society. The development of social processes brings a person closer to another person. It encourages them to be mature and united. When a person becomes socially active, his or her inner world changes through social thinking. The purpose of social change is to show human dignity. The orientation of social consciousness to universal values encourages a person to feel himself as part of the universe.

The development and nature of the social consciousness and thinking of the rural population depends on the level of rural economy and the well-being of the population. The higher the level of production in rural areas is base of the greater the interest to social life and the increase in social activity.‟

CONCLUSION The improvement of living conditions of

rural population is the basis of social reforms in the country. Improving the job conditions of the rural





population increases the interest to the results of the work, to take a worthy role in production and society. It is becoming more and more obvious for people that the agricultural production is a crucial factor in the development of agriculture. As a result, the living conditions of the rural population are improving day by day. This process can be seen as in follows:

- The development of rural social services to increase labor productivity of the rural population.

- The relationship between the economic situation of the country, the natural growth of the population, its needs and demands, and the economic opportunities,

- The identification of social interest and demand - The abandonment of the system of minimum

living conditions in rural areas; - The development of awareness of the social

rights of the rural population in the process of social and cultural life of the country

- Understanding the necessity of improvement of social conditions of rural population.

- Wider participation of the rural population in social processes;

Owing to the profound reforms in the aforementioned directions, the social life of the rural population is being dynamically changed, and the transformed social consciousness and thinking of the people plays an important role in this process.

REFERENCES 1. Philosophy (Academic manual)/ Supervision

General editor E.Y. Yusupov, Tashkent, 1999, (in

Uzbek) p-139, 297

2. I.Ergashev. National ideology of Independence,

Academic Issue, 2005 p-19-56

3. Dacin, P. A.; Dacin, M. T.; Matear, M. Social

Entrepreneurship: Why We Don’t Need a New

Theory and How We Move Forward from Here. The

Academy of Management Perspectives. 2010, p-37-

57

4. A accessible-sciencific text-book to study and

widespread for public awareness President of

Uzbekistan Sh.M.Mirziyoyev’s Appeal to Oliy

Majlis – T.: “Ma’naviyat ”, 2018. P-73

5. Directory of the state Statistics Committee of the

Republic of Uzbekistan. Demographic situation..

2018. p-14

6. Шкерин, А.В. Современная модель глобализации

и проблемы развития сельских террито- рий

России // Вестник Нижегородского

государственного университета им. Н.И.

Лобачевского. Серия Социальные науки, 2010.–

№3. C-6

7. Шкерин, А. Глобализация и сельские

территории России // Социология, 2011.– №1.

C-8

8. https//stat.uz

9. http://uzedu.uz

10. http://marifat.uz

11. https://www.lex.uz


http://uzedu.uz/

http://marifat.uz/

https://www.lex.uz/




TYPOLOGY OF QUANTITATIVE SYNTAX IN PLACE OF NP2

Aziza Alangova Student,

Samarkhand State Iistitute of Foreign

Languages,

Uzbekistan.

Hamrokulov Tohir Student,

Samarkhand State Iistitute of Foreign

Languages,

Uzbekistan.

ABSTRACT It is known that in both Uzbek and English languages, predicate can be formed by various types of parts of speechs. This

paper includes information about the syntactical analysis of predicate, different elements like numbers, that used in the place

of predicate. The similiarities and dissimiliarities of anaylizing them in both languages is briefly indicated, which will be

benevolent in learning the languages grammar deeply, as all given statements are with proof examples.

KEY WORDS: quantitativeness, syntactic and semantic character, core predicate, subordinate links, depassivation,

depassivation.

INTRODUCTION This paper study focused on analyzing the

elements that have been crossed in English and Uzbek on the basis of the kinetic-structural synthesis principles that have evolved in recent years, as well as identifying the comparative-typological features of the studied units. In the analysis of the phenomenon of the political-typological analysis, the syntactic typology used the synthesis of the syntax based on the elements of the hepatic component. This linguistic method is a unique approach to predicative analysis in both languages. In particular, this identifies differential and syntactic semantic signs of syntactic units, comparative-typological analysis of them, comparing their expression options, and clarifying syntax-based syntaxes with core predicate and subordinate links.

LITERATURE REVIEW Quantitativeness is a differential syntactic

semantic character and is one of the non-categorical symbols of qualifications. It assigns a numeric function to the item NP1 that is in the sentence: 1) He was eleven and Cheese-Face was thirteen - U paytda Martin o’n birda, Moy Qovoq esa o’n uchda edi; 2) She was almost fourty ; Davlat narxi esa bor yo’g’i o’n ming; 3) Ettore was twenty three; Bir jo’ra atlas ikki yuz so’m ekan.

The items that came in NP2 in the speech were (1) was eleven, was thirteen, o’n birda, o’n uchda, (2) was fourty, o’n ming; (3) was twenty three, ikki yuz so’m ekan with numerical explanation of such elements as NP1, He, Cheese-Face, Moy Qovoq, U, She, Price, Ettore.

In fact, when we look at the actual material, the element that comes with NP2 in addition to the quantum can also include the elective (choice) sign:

4) She was one of them – U o’shalardan biri 5) She is one in a shadow - U mingdan biri

As is well known, in English, quantitativeness differential syntactic - semantic sign is expressed by the combination of person form of “to be” and numbers, while in Uzbek it is now a integer number, past or future, with number + suffix or is represented by a non-league verb.

The representation of the static syntax in the English language instead of NP2 is represented by the verbs of the lexical-semantic group, which represent the state of the subject in the sentence.[1] Beloxi was fainted. Kalamushlar kabob bo’ldi.

In these words, was fainted, kabab compound represented the position of elements such as Beloxi, Kalamushlar, represented by a noun instead of NP1. That’s why the elements of the was fainted, kebab were considered static syntax.

There are many difficulties in distinguishing between static and active syntax in English and Uzbek, and this requires special research. Based on the English material, M.M. Boldireva estimates that when to be+ participle II is in place ofNP2, can speak of two meanings, namely action and condition, In his view, when expressing the action, the to be + participle II is associated with a placeholder in the subordinate database, with the predecessor by the action person. When to be+participle II represents condition, predecessor cannot be expressed with the preposition by to the context.[2]

O.A.Pismennaya distinguishes between static and active syntax, and can only relate to adverbial elements in a "NP2-based procedural-static syntax" subordinate database. Its main difference is that it does not relate to such elements as procedural-active syntax. [3] However, in the case of English NP2, the





procedural-active syntax can be linked to adverbial elements in a subordinate database. Example: Riley Anderson goes there.

Differentiation of static and active syntax can be based on the following: static syntax can be linked to a locative syntax based on subordinate link, and procedural-active syntax associated with locative-allative and locative-abstract syntax.[4] According to NE Voskresenskaya, thr elements such as intently, rapidly cannot be added to NP2, that express level when procedural-static syntax comes to place of NP2 in sentences.[5]

For example: I happened to tell him // I happened intently to tell him. According to OE Filimonova, elements expressing staticity can be expressed in different parts of speech. It only depends on where they come from in the sentence.[6]

Generally, in English, the procedural-static syntax is expressed in the person form of a verb to be and participle II when substituted for NP2, and its past participle form is represented mainly by intransitive verbs. To the structure of such statements preposition by cannot be inserted. This issue requires special study in Uzbek as well. Factual evidence suggests that the Uzbek language may also have different interpretative static syntax. For example: a) By using passive voice: Birida qurt, birida bolasi kasallikka chalindi; b) by a verbal adverb suffix - (i) b +qo’ymoq auxiliary verb: Payl uni osiltirib qo’ydi; c) With the help of a verbal adverb suffix - (a) b +qo’ymoq: Jo narsalarni joylab qo’ydi

The foregoing examples show that the procedural static syntax in place of NP2 in English does not undergo depassivation. This syntax represents the state of the elements represented by live nouns or nominative pronouns in place of NP1 on the basis of the nuclear predicate. In Uzbek, the elements that come in the form of NP2 are undergoing a transformation passivisation: Payl uni osiltirib qo’ydi – U Payl tomonidan osiltirib qo’yildi; Payl hang it – It was hang by Payl. Jo narsalarni joylab qo’ydi – Narsalar Jo tomonidan joylandi; Jo put items – Items were put by Jo.

As it turns out, if Pale and Jo elements are syntaxes of action or substitution agents, things, it elements, with the meaning of the positioning components. Thus, in Uzbek, the procedural-static syntax is associated with a substitution-agent syntax based on the core predicate connection, whereas the object with the meaning of the subordinate connection can be associated with the syntax. English is exception in that case. There are also verbs in the Uzbek language (hayajonlanmoq, to’lqinlanmoq, iztirob chekmoq, bezovta bo’lmoq, qayg’urmoq, harat chekmoq, ma’yuslanmoq, ranjimoq,o’pka qilmoq, hursand bo’lmoq, sevinmoq, quvonmoq, ga’azablanmoq,

sog’inmoq, jahli chiqmoq, achinmoq) represent the procedural static syntax when they are in place of NP2 in the sentence, and the object, like English, is not associated with syntax.

This syntax is expressed in English using a person form of to be. For example: The Mitty Crowd is in there. June has been here.

The is and has been that are substituted for NP2 in these words represent niether the action nor the condition. According to A.N. Smirnitsky, there is no reason to call is as predicate because its lexical meaning is insignificant and vague. He says that the verb acts as an auxiliary word, as in the phrase "He is a doctor." The phrase "He is here" predicate is more complex according to its formation, it consists of a linking verb and a place component. But semantically, the second component of the sentence here is predicate, because it serves as a predicate. This type of predicate is called modifier predicate as A.N. Smirnitsky case.[7] In the Uzbek language, however, the situation is different: All are here – Hammasi shu yerda I am at the Institute – Men institutdaman He is in school – U maktabda In the context of the foregoing, here (shu yerda), at the institute (institutda), in school (maktabda) elements are marked as predicate. According to A. Gulomov, M. Askarova argues that the nounnin the place of predicate serves as predicate besides possessive case and accusative case. Thus, nouns that receive predicative affixes act as predicate in the sentence structure.[8] But it's hard to believe that the words like here, in school, are recognized as predicate. Because when these words are converted into past or future forms, a different form will occur: Hamma shu yerda – Hamma shu erda edi; Everybody is here – Everybody was here; Hamma shu yerda – hamma shu yerda bo’ladi; Everybody is here – Everybody will be here.

When the elements of the words there, here, shu yerda, institutdaman, maktabda are divided into direct individual participants,the syntactic links between them and forms such as, is, has been, edi edim, bo’laman, bo’ladi can be found. This, of course, indicates that they are interconnected by subordinate connection. To prove this, if the words like work, o’qiyman are included to the sentences The Mitty Crowd is in there, and Men institutdaman, they cover the following sentences. The Mitty Crowd works and Men institutda o’qiyman and the words there, indtitutda remains locative syntax as in the previous sentences. But the elements works, o’qiyman represent procedural when the elements of the text are syntactically and semantically derived. If they represent an active action, then the elements of is, edi, edim, bo’laman, bo’ladi mean the existence. Therefore, The Mitty Crowd, June, hammasi, men, u, are considered the substantial existential syntax. The elements of the syntax is has been, edi, edim, bo’laman, bo’ladi considered as





existential variants. In the sentences Men intitutdaman, hammasi, shu erda, u maktabda, the existentialism is not grammatically expressive, that is, they are equal with zero or existentialism is loaded with person suffixes. This is also evident in the translation: The grocery was below – Do’kon pastda edi.

CONCLUSION By the way of conclusion, learning both

languages, that is Uzbek and English is being attracted by students of both nations, and day by day the number of them is increasing rapidly. It should be metioned that even indigenious English people are having an interest to be aware of Uzbek language and its grammar. What is more, this topic is quite important in teaching and learning other grammatical themes, especially syntactical analysis of other parts of sentences and speechs, as many students tend to do mistakes at differentiating part of sentences. This paper has a great advantages on doing and correcting aforementioned statements.

REFERENCES 1. Гнушине Э.Ш. Соотношения пассива и

статива в литовском языке // Сб.

Лингвистические исследования. – М., 1973. – С.

50.; Плоткин В.Я. Грамматические системы в

английском языке. – Кишинев: Штиинца, 1975. –

С. 104.; Райхель Г.М. К вопросу о

грамматическом значении сочетания to be +

причастие II в современном английском языке:

Автореф. дис. … канд. филол. наук. – М.: МГУ,

1954. – С. 11

2. Болдырова М.М. Сочетания to be+Participle II

со значением результативного состояния в

современном английском языке // Учен.зап.

МГПИ т. 59. – М., 1971. – С. 35.

3. Письменная О.А. Двухядерные безглагольные

предложения в современном английском языке:

Дисс. канд. филол. наук. - Киев: КГПИ, 1975. –

С.104.

4. Мухин А.М. Лингвистический анализ:

Теоретические и методологические проблемы. –

Л.: Наука, 1976. – С. 106.

5. Воскресенская Н.Е. Предложения с ядерном

дважды предицируемым компонентом в

современном английском языке: Дис. канд.

филол. наук. – Л., 1976. – С. 122.

6. Филимонова О.Е. Стативная синтаксема в

английском предложении: Автореф. дисс. …

канд. филол. наук. – Л.: ЛОИЯ, 1978. – С. 11-12

7. Смирницкий А.Н. Синтаксис английского языка.

– М.: Лит.на иностр.яз., 1957. – С. 114-115.

8. Ғуломов А., Асқарова М. Ҳозирги ўзбек адабий

тили. Синтаксис. – Тошкент: Ўқитувчи, 1987.

– Б. 87.





VIRGINIA WOOLF AND THE NOVEL

Umida Fayzullaeva Jizzakh State Pedagogical Institute,

Uzbekistan.

ABSTRACT Following work is dedicated to the use of the "stream of consciousness" technique in Virginia Woolf's novels. Which entails

the inevitable weakening of such traditional components of the novel as the plot, intrigue, the image of the main character-

where it is necessary to find new ways to develop a coherent narrative.

KEYWORDS: new writing, stream of consciousness, the novel of narration, the internal monologue, a special genre of

the novel, inner life of the character.

INTRODUCTION The ideal model of the novel according to Virginia Woolf, is applying the "new way" of reflecting reality, that is, reality, the external world is verbal, only at the level of consciousness, not at the level of interpretation. The intent of such a work should be aimed at creating such an opportunity for the reader that the reader should feel the real reality in this, and thus plunge into this reality. The "new method" should involve a lot of cartographers-words in their flow, colliding with each other-and in the process of the next collision, taking a spark out of the grass, for a moment in its rays to see the insides, thoroughness and bottomless of reality, to see its own personal existence. And this cannot be an absolute creation of some kind of post modernistic "new novel", but an reanimation of a realistic novel, although for this it is necessary to abandon the stable, integral element in literature: plot, intrigue, traditional hero, to save the literature itself, the "classic text".

"The stream of consciousness," modern researchers write, "offers a technique for depicting the different ways in which different characters perceive events. The reader is informed not only about the events, but also-and first of all-about the characters' never-ending, constantly changing perception of these events, which is completely consistent with the temporary nature of the modernist worldview." However, the designation of the new style of writing by the term "stream of consciousness" is, of course, extremely conditional. As James Naremore noted: "Mrs. Woolf is still widely known as a writer of stream of consciousness, but there is relatively little agreement among critics as to what such definitions mean, and even less as to how accurate they are descriptions of her method."

MATERIALS AND METHODS Indeed, L.E Bowling, argue that the stream of

consciousness is nothing more than a very special writing technique, which differs, for example, from the internal monologue. Others Robert Humphrey and

Melvin Friedman, tend to think that "stream of consciousness" is a special genre of the novel, in which various writing techniques can be used: internal monologue, soliloquy, and others. "The stream of consciousness," writes Robert Humphrey,"…is most quickly determined by its subject. It is more than its technical features, tasks, or themes that define it. Hence, novels that are said to use the stream-of-consciousness technique they must be novels that choose the display of one or more consciousnesses as their main subject; the depicted consciousness serves as a kind of screen on which the material of these novels is displayed." And Melvin Friedman agrees with this statement:"Indeed, there is no stream-of-consciousness technique; in saying this, one can make a serious mistake in literary terminology. "Stream of consciousness" denotes a kind of novel, just as "ode" or "sonnet" denotes a kind of poetry. The ode and sonnet use certain poetic techniques that differ from each other, but still remain in the same genre category. A similar division can be made between a narrative novel and a stream-of-consciousness novel. The technical difference lies in two different ways of thinking, which can be said to be continuous: directed thinking and thoughts in dreams or daydreams.

The novel of narration which tries to establish communication through the means of conventional syntax is difficult and exhausting; the novel of the stream of consciousness, on the contrary, flows continuously without any difficulties, working simultaneously with memories and anticipations."

However, when it comes directly to Wolfe's novels and the manner in which her "experimental" novels are written, the differences in researchers' views become more significant. And here it is quite possible to agree with the opinion of W. Davenport: "The phrase stream of consciousness" is not a magic formula that immediately gives us the key to understanding Virginia Woolf. We need to remember that this phrase is nothing more than an attempt at a General classification of those novels that focus more on the





mood than the plot, and portray the mood by creating the impression of the individual consciousness of their characters."

RESULT AND DISCUSSION Virginia Woolf's "stream of consciousness" is

not the same as Joyce's "stream of consciousness". As N.P. Mikhalskaya rightly notes: "Using the stream of consciousness to reveal the complex spiritual organization of a person, Virginia Woolf seeks to introduce it into the channel of a clear composition. In the construction of her works, there is a certain rationalism, that strict thoughtfulness that distinguishes Woolf's novels from the amorphous and deliberately loose compositional books of Joyce and his followers." And the General goal of reanimating a realistic novel was solved by these writers in similar, but not identical, ways. We have already noted that the real "reality" in Woolf was associated not so much with the world of physical objects as with some deep essence of the universe. And so, unlike Joyce, she always tries to transcribe the emotional background of the character, the changeable play of his feelings, rather than thoughts and reasoning. Writes James Naremore: "In Joyce's sense experiences are often correlated with the encountered words..., while Virginia Woolf's words sometimes seem superfluous, and sometimes even false in relation to the perception of something non-verbal. That's why Virginia Woolf's treatment of consciousness... often based on indirect speech and metaphors designed to describe the emotional state of the character..." Such characteristic features of Woolf's "new writing" make some researchers wonder if the term "stream of consciousness" is applicable to her novels at all. After all, in all her novels, she moves from narration, describing the character's feelings to transcribing his thoughts, to depicting thinking and memory in ways that explain rather than simply represent these thoughts. Moreover, the narrative is often conducted by an observer who, although not the "ubiquitous narrator", can nevertheless describe both the thoughts of the character himself and the thoughts of other people about this character. Therefore, extreme positions on the question of belonging to the English writer's school of "stream of consciousness" are not accidental.

Indeed, it is Woolf's desire to convey the emotional "I" of the character, in which not only psychological nuances are important, but also his, in the language of medicine, "motor reactions" to what is happening, that dictates the need to "mediate" the "stream of consciousness" by the presence of an invisible transfer instance between the character and the reader, a kind of observer who could not only look into the souls, but also see the appearance of the characters.

CONCLUSION However, this observer must always be

transparent, because the "stream of consciousness", as

already noted, is intended to capture the immediate inner life of the character. This is where the use of such writing techniques in "Mrs. Dalloway" and "To the lighthouse" arises, which some researchers define as "internal monologue" or "not actually-direct speech". However, it should be noted that in the novel "Waves", which is, in the words of Robert Humphrey, "a demonstration of psychological analysis in literature in its purest form", the method of Wolfe is already different from what was presented in previous works. The observer disappears, completely dissolves in the monologues of the characters, who themselves, in turn, turn into some disembodied voices of consciousness, almost indistinguishable from each other.

REFERENCES 1. V.Woolf , A Change of a Perspective. The letters of

Virginia Woolf,L,1977

2. V.Woolf, The Questions of Things Happening : The

letters of Virginia Woolf,L.,1976

3. V.Woolf, Modern Literature\\ England writers

about the literature.M., 1981

4. Fokkema, Douwe &Ibsch, Elrud. Modernist

Conjectures: a mainstream in European literature.

NY, 1988

5. James Naremore. The World without a Self:

Virginia Woolf and the Novel. New Haven, London,

1973

6. Bowling, L.E. what is the Stream of Consciousness

Technique?\\PMLA,1955

7. Robert Humphrey. Stream of consciousness in the

Modern Novel. Berkley, Los Angels, 1954

8. Melvin Friedman. Stream of consciousness: A

Study of Literary Method. New Haven, L., 1955

9. N.PMikhalskaya. Virginia Woolf’s novels.M., 1964

10. Leon Edel. The Psychological Novel.NY, 1955

11. Ralph Freedman. The Lyrical Novel.

Princeton,1963

12. James Hafley. The Glass Roof; Virginia woolf as a

Novelist. Berkeley, LA,1954

13. Lisa Dahl. Linguistic features of the stream of

consciousness techniques of J.Joys , Virginia Woolf

and Eugene O’Neill. Turku, 1970

14. Daniel Albright. Personality and Impersonality:

Lawrence, woolf and Mann. Chicago, London,1978

15. David Daciches. The novel and the Modern world.

Chicago, London, 1965





SUMSOR RIVER IN THE SYRDARYA BASIN WATER MINERALIZATION AND HYDROECOLOGICAL

SITUATION

Soliyev E.A Ph.D. Sciences,

Associate Professor,

Department of Geography,


Namangan, Uzbekistan

Mirabdullayev B.B. Ph.D. Sciences,


Department of Geography,


Namangan, Uzbekistan

ABSTRACT

The article examines the hydro ecological status of inland watersheds, which focuses on the assessment of transboundary

pollution of rivers in the region, the analysis of hydro chemical observations and changes in them. In the article, the Sumsor

(Rezaksay) River of the Syrdarya river basin is selected as an object for analysis and analysis of river water salinity from the

river basin observation stations, the level of household and industrial pollution; assessment of the level of contamination by

hazardous radioactive and chemical substances; the prevalence of surface water pollution and the direction of pollution

trends over time. Today, due to the rapid economic activity in the Uzbekistan part of the river basin, the operation of irrigation

main canals and underground water reservoirs, intensive development of rock and gravel deposits, population growth and

development, the high hydro ecological situation in the development of new areas remains high.

KEYWORDS: Water Resources, Transboundary pollution, Hydrochemistry, Hydro ecological situation, Surface water.

INTRODUCTION In recent decades, industrial development, intensification of agricultural production and population growth in Central Asia have caused many regional environmental problems. One of the most serious hydro ecological problems in Central Asia is the preservation of surface water quality in the region's second largest waterway, the Syrdarya River [1]. Not only agriculture and internal pollution sources are concentrated in the river basins of the Ferghana Valley, but also industrial facilities (mining companies) are located on the territory of the Kyrgyz Republic. At present, the main pollutants found in surface water in the Fergana Valley are the wastes of these mines, which seriously threatens the water resources of the Syrdarya river basin [4].

GOALS AND OBJECTIVES The main purpose of the work is to assess the

hydro ecological status of the water resources of the Syrdarya river basin, to study the current level of river pollution, to determine the results of hydro chemical observations and changes, to make conclusions and recommendations.

For the purpose, the Sumsor River (Rezaksay) was selected as an object and the environmental status of the river basin monitoring stations was analyzed by the mineralogical composition of river water, household and industrial wastewater pollution levels; assessment

of the level of contamination by hazardous radioactive and chemical substances; tasks to study the prevalence of surface water pollution and the direction of pollution processes over time. The following key sources of pollution were taken into account when setting the target.

Sumsor is a polymetallic deposit in the river basin and operated from 1950 to 1978. Lead ore, tin and tungsten, copper, iron, arsenic, antimony, selenium and cadmium are the main ore deposits. On the sides of the river valley there are three garbage dumps filled with lead ore. Total emissions, according to some estimates, are 2.67 million m3, others - 4.5 million tonnes, and waste area - 260,000 m2. The basin was flooded in 1994 and 2017, tens of thousands of cubic meters of toxic waste fell into the river [2]. In addition, there are six remaining mines in the Shokaftar uranium mine, which operated from 1946 to 1957. Their total length is 76 square km and depth is 260 m, it was reported. Currently, the amount of radioactive waste in the basin is 60,000 m2, according to various sources, from 330 to 700,000 m3. These areas are occasionally washed away by river water and dispersed into the middle and lower reaches of the Sumsor River, causing contamination of the abiotic and biotic components of the environment [4].





METHODS USED The analysis of hydro chemical substances in

river basins and streams was used in field, base-experimental, natural geographical, comparison, statistical, geochemical, hydro chemical and experimental laboratory methods.

THE MAIN PART The Sumsor River begins at the eastern slope

of the Kugala Range in the highlands, up to 3700m high, like the Kokserak River. The area of the river at the top of the river with its broad, broad direction is called Kugalisoy. This river originates with the name Sumsor starting from the Ayirmasay tributary. Above the Kuklikkurgan village, this river flows out of the mountains into the canals. The natural stretches southward. Crossing the hills of Surson, it is called Rezaksay and is divided into three parts, pour to the Syrdarya.

Picture 1. Sumsor River

During the summer, the river flows downstream between Kuklik-Kurgan and Rezak villages. In the Sumsor River basin, sand and effusive rocks are predominant. The monitoring of river flow is carried out on the hydroposts of the upper watershed. The analysis shows that the Sumsor (Rezaksay) river basin is in the area of: strong cross-border pollution; Moderate transboundary pollution, mild transboundary pollution, and transboundary pollution with low impact are common [3].

The hydro chemical analysis of river water was used by the surveillance posts along the river length of Damabad, Baymak, Shayon, Chustnon, Namangan-Tashkent highway, downstream of Rezaksay reservoir and Chust, Seyrek canals. Measurement of river water pollutants in hydro posts was carried out in accordance with the criteria established in the "Index of Environmental and Natural Resources Act [4]. Evaluation of water quality According to the "Generalized List of Maximum Permissible Concentrations" and instructions for the use of hazardous substances in water for fishing ponds, 16 types of pollutants, including pH, hardness, chlorides, sulfates, ammonium ions, quantities of nitrites, sodium, potassium, petroleum products, lead, antimony, copper, mercury, zinc and iron (Table 1).





Table 1 Hydrochemical composition of Sumsor River water

Ingredients 1 2 3 PDK

pH 7,6 8,4 7 6,5

Hardness, mg-equ/l 6,8 9,4 8,4 7

Ammonium ion, mg/l 0,28 1,52 1,22 0,5

Nitrates, mg/l 0,11 0,12 0,05 0,08

Oil products,mg/l 0,056 0,088 0,086 0,05

Chlorides, mg/l 338 434 498 300

Sulfates, mg/l 249 301 356 100

Copper, mg/l 0,0038 0,0064 0,0046 0,001

Mercury, mg/l 0,0001 0,00008 0,00007 0,00001

Sweets, mg/l 0,014 0,024 0,016 0,01

Zinc, mg/l 0,012 0,015 0,012 0,01

Iron, mg/l 0,2 0,24 0,16 0,05

* The table is based on the results of the monitoring of the Environmental Assistance Project [4]. The analysis shows that at the entrance to the

region, sulfates in river waters contained 1,8 to 2,5 times, petroleum products from 1,1 to 1.6 times, copper 3,5-5,3 times, mercury 7,6-15,0 times, zinc increased by 1,3-1,5 times, iron by 2,8-4,0 times. The water hardness was changed to 1,2 mg equiv/l. One-time increase of nitrite in water was recorded 1.4 times. The

mineralization of water with chlorides and ammonium ions corresponds to the norm. Comparing the values of phase 1 in the observed phase, it was found that the oil content was 1,9 times, copper 1,2 times, iron 1,1 times higher, and zinc 1,2 times lower. In the upper reaches of the river, the iron content is 1,8–4,0 times higher (Picture 2).





Picture 2. Dynamics of pollutants content in Sumsor (Rezaksay) river waters At all monitoring stations in the river, high

sulfate content was recorded at all stages of the study. In particular, the amount of sulfates was higher than the norm set in the Baimak, Shoyon, Chustnon and Rezaksay reservoirs. Almost all oil samples studied have small amounts of oil ranging from 0,0018 to 0,0100 mg / kg. The content of heavy metals and other controlled ingredients in the sediments does not exceed the established limits.

In the lower reaches of the river, the concentration of pollutants decreases and reaches the minimum values when it reaches the lowlands as a result of the spreading and absorption of pollutants in the lower reaches, and the addition of river water from other river valleys.

SUMMARY 1. Today, due to the rapid economic activity in

the Uzbekistan part of the river basin, operation of irrigation main canals and groundwater pools, rapid development of rock and gravel deposits, population growth and the high hydro ecological situation in the development of new areas remains.

2. Not only agricultural and internal sources of pollution are concentrated in the Sumsor (Rezaksay) river basin, but also industrial facilities (mining companies) are located on the territory of the Kyrgyz Republic. And today, the main pollutants found in the river flow are the waste of these mines.

3. The spring floods on the Reaksaksay (Sumsor) river basin showed that the most dangerous for the population. In addition, during this period there





is a risk of toxic waste and erosion of mining waste and their distribution to the river.

REFERENCES 1. Declaration “On improvement of regional ecology,

water resources and environmental management by

the Central Asian states”. Ashgabat,2018.

2. Rysbekov Yu.Kh. Cross-border cooperation on

international rivers: problems, experience, lessons,

expert forecasts.- T .: SIC ICWC, 2009. - P.91

3. Hikmatov FH, Yakubov MA, Aitbaev DP Dynamics

of flow and flow. –Tashkent: University, 2004.

4. Chub. V. E. Climate change and its impact on

hydrometeorological processes, agroclimatic and

water resources of the Republic of Uzbekistan. -

Tashkent, SANIGMI, 2007, 132 p.

5. Integrated environmental monitoring of water

pollution in the Syrdary river basin (phase IV). -

Tashkent. 2018.





THE ANALYSIS OF LANDS IN SECURITY ZONES OF HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER LINES (POWER LINE) ON THE

EXAMPLE OF THE FERGANA REGION

Abdullayev Ibrohim Numanovich1

PhD of Fergana polytechnic institute,

Uzbekistan

Marupov Azizxon Abbosxonovich2

PhD applicant of Fergana polytechnic

institute,

Uzbekistan


ANNOTATION Practice shows that the lack or late receipt of information with special conditions for the use of territories often has a negative impact

not only on the budget and time frame for the construction of a real estate facility, but also on the fate of the built facility in general.

The protection areas of underground and above-ground engineering communications play an important role for the future in land

use. And also, when using these lands for agricultural needs, with the correct organization of cadastral relations represents the

relevance of the issue under study. In the present, as an example, a section of high-voltage power transmission lines (power lines) of

1 km length is presented.

KEY WORDS: security zones, land plot, information about zones, high-voltage zones, power transmission lines, pipelines, gas

pipelines, bonality score, engineering networks, construction of buildings and structures.

INTRODUCTION The security zone is installed depending on the

type of protected object. The list of types of zones of the Fergana region is established by the Land Code of the Republic of Uzbekistan, according to which 28 types of zones with special conditions of use of the territory are defined, for example, security zones of pipelines, electric grid facilities, lines of structures and communication, roadside lanes, etc.

OBJECTIVES Depending on the type of zones within its

territory, certain restrictions on the use of land plots are established. These restrictions are mainly related to the possibility of placing capital construction facilities in principle, or compliance with certain parameters of the object under construction, carrying out certain construction works. [1]

First, when using a land plot, it is important to know what security zones are available on the plot. When checking the planned land plot for acquisition, special attention should be paid to engineering networks located within its borders or in adjacent plots. For example, around a surface or underground pipeline there is a security zone, the regime of which can be an unpleasant surprise for the developer, especially for underground structures, which cannot be visually detected. [1]

Any protection zone implies restrictions on the targeted use of the land plot. The security zone of the gas

pipeline or the power line can entail the ban on construction of any buildings, buildings and constructions. The presence of a sanitary protection zone indicates a ban on the construction of residential facilities. The presence of a cable means that any earthworks are carried out only if the organization - owner of such a cable line - agrees.

Land plots are not seized from their owners, land users, landowners and tenants, but within the boundaries of these plots a special regime may be introduced for their use, limiting or prohibiting those activities that are incompatible with the purpose of establishing such zones.

If the land user has doubts about the correctness of the established size of the security zone, it is possible to contact the cadastral engineer to check the distance from the object in connection with the location of which the zone is installed to the boundaries of the land plot and compare it with that entered in the Unified State Register of Real Estate (EGRN). If they do not coincide, and it is obvious that the site does not enter the security zone, then it is necessary to write a letter to the operating organization demanding to reconsider the boundaries of the security zone.

METHODOLOGY In this article studied and the example shows high

voltage areas of power transmission lines. Land use in such zones without

harmonization is subject to such responsibilities for officials of organizations as disciplinary liability, and






further, depending on the consequences, administrative or criminal liability may arise. For example, work in the security zone of the power grid line without the approval of the organization can cause accidents and harm the health of the persons carrying out the work. It is obvious that the official will be prosecuted for such an incident. If it is the actions of an organization whose work has led to the failure of the energy system, it will first of all be civil consequences and compensation for losses.

If the security zone does not allow using the land plot for the intended purpose, losses are recovered from the owner of the object for which the security zone is installed. If damages are not compensated or are not compensated in a small amount, the court should be contacted.

STATISTICAL DESIGN The area of Uzbekistan is about 450 thousand

km2, of which 60% of the territory are deserts, 20% mountain masses and only 20% is used by the population.

Fergana region occupies more than 7 thousand km2, which is 1.56% of the total area of Uzbekistan. [2]

Providing the population and all industrial potential, such sources of life as heat, gas, energy and water supply force to alienate large areas for the laying of communication networks.

Such demographic conditions, environmental issues, careful and unsustainable treatment of land require careful study and analysis of all underground, above-ground and air communication networks.

The transit corridor of only high-voltage power lines with a width of 150 m laid through the Fergana region has a length of more than 100 km occupies 1500 hectares of land belonging to an average of 56 points of agricultural land. [3]

For example, only in the city of Fergana there are underground and air power lines for more than 975 km (Table-1). However, the listed width of the security strip on the territory of the city is in non-economic use, either under the roads or under well-equipped squares.

Power line of the city of Fergana. Table-1.

№ View of the power line Length, km. Standard width of

guard zone, m. 1. Low-voltage cable line (0,4 kw.) 81,253 2 2. Low-voltage air-line (0,4 kw.) 574,988 2 3. High-voltage cable line (10/6 kw.) 202,197 20 4. High-voltage air-line (10/6 kw.) 116,25 20

Total: 974,688 44

All issues and legal actions for the use and proper use of lands concerning the protection zones of the EB LINE of the Republic of Uzbekistan are regulated by Cabinet of Ministers Decision No. 93 of 17 May 2010. The resolution briefly and clearly describes the rules of the security facilities of the electric grid farm. In the annex of this resolution the following rules are taken into account when placing the facilities of the electric grid farm:

- Land plots for the construction of electric grid facilities are allocated in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation of the Republic of Uzbekistan;

- The protection zone of electric grid facilities is the surface of the plot of land or the bottom of the water space, on which a special order of ownership and use of the land plot or water space is established. The protection areas of the electric grid facilities established in accordance with these Rules are encumbrances of land plots and are subject to state registration in accordance with the established procedure;

- Ownerships and legal entities responsible for the objects of the power grid are obliged to transfer the materials of the executive top geodetic survey of the routes to the territorial bodies of architecture and construction for their application in the corresponding maps of land use;

- Protection zones of electric grid facilities are established in kind by district services on land resources in

rural areas, real estate cadastral services in cities and towns in cadastral division of territory and cadastral surveys of land plots and are subject to mandatory registration in the cadastral business and display on the cadastral plan of the land plot;

- Design and estimate documentation for construction, reconstruction of objects that can be a source of contamination and corrosion of electric grid facilities shall provide measures limiting pollution and corrosion or removal of electric grid facilities from the contamination zone (corrosion);

- The land area of the protection zones of existing electricity grid facilities is not subject to seizure from owners of land plots, landowners and land users, including tenants;

- In special cases, with the permission of the Cabinet of Ministers of the Republic of Uzbekistan, it is allowed to build electric grid facilities in protected natural areas, state reserves, protected areas of natural parks, state biosphere reserves, etc.

The following protection zones of the power grid facilities are established by these Regulations:

A) along overhead power transmission lines in the form of a land plot and airspace limited by vertical planes standing on both sides of the line from extreme wires at a distance, Table-2:





for voltage lines (Table-2):

№ Voltage lines, kw. Width security zones, m. 1. 20 10 2. 35 15 3. 110 20 4. 220 25 5. 500 30

B) along overhead power transmission lines up to 1000 volts (except for branches to entrances to buildings) in the form of a plot of land limited by parallel straight lines, standing from projections of extreme wires to the ground surface (in case their position is not closed) by 2 meters on each side;

C) along underground cable power transmission lines in the form of a plot of land limited by parallel straight lines standing from extreme cables by 1 meter on each side, and when cable lines pass in cities under sidewalks - by 0.6 meters towards buildings and structures and by 1 meter towards the street roadway;

D) along underwater power transmission cable lines in the form of a section of water space from the water surface to the bottom enclosed between vertical planes standing from extreme cables to 100 meters on each side.

The minimum permissible distances between power transmission lines and the nearest buildings and structures, as well as wood and other perennial plantations, are determined on the basis of the rules of design and arrangement of electrical installations.

GEOGRAPHICAL AREA Figure-1 shows an example of laying 5, 10/6

kilowatt overhead power transmission lines ("transverse" view) around the town of Fergana, in the Kirgili area, crossing the streets of Fergana and Sh.Rashidova along to the west.

Picture-1 Parallel air power lines in the city of Fergana, Sh.Rashidova Street (transverse view)

Picture-2. Displays this strip of about 10 hectares in plan view. It clearly shows the location of all the power lines 5. From the east runs Ferganskaya Street, to the north Sh.Rashidova Street. As can be seen from the 1 from the roof of the power line to the multi-storey residential buildings, the roadway and a strip of green plantations are open. However, south between the 5 of the LEP and the individual private development, the security zone has been disrupted. On the north-west part between 1 and 3 of it the line (3 ha) is occupied by dwarfs of fruit plantations. The rest of the strip (7 ha) despite the suitability is inactive.

In order to ensure the absence of pressure, it should also be noted that when the power lines are cut across the street of Ferganskaya, frame lighting supports for the protection of the roadway from the break of wires

are removed, as well as road signs prohibiting the stoning and parking under the power lines.

RESULTS In this case, the analysis of the 500-600 m long

strip shows the istic age of the security zone. Taking into account such facts as the laying of 5 power lines at various times, from the 1950s to the 1990s, the formation and various reasons for development in border security zones, etc., it is concluded that a hundred in the past the rules of placement of electric grid facilities and alienation of land plots have not always been observed. Thorough and meticulous study and analysis of the power line corridor under consideration over the whole length to reveal many positive and negative aspects of the functioning of only one security zone of power supply.





Picture-2. Parallel air power lines in the city of Fergana, Sh.Rashidova Street (plan view)

The size of the protected areas of electric grid

facilities in protected natural areas in the cases provided for in paragraph 11 of these Rules and their regime shall be established by the enterprise in charge of the electric grid facilities, in agreement with the State Ecology Committee of the Republic of Uzbekistan. Construction of roads, entrances and other structures for operational maintenance of electric grid facilities is carried out on the basis of projects that have received a positive conclusion of the State Ecological Expertise [4].

SUGGESTIONS Owners of electric grid facilities in protected areas

and on leaks are allowed: - Construction of roads, entrances and other

structures necessary for maintenance of power grid facilities (by additional agreement for land removal and abutment to public roads);

- Opening of pits, trenches and pits for repair of these electric grid facilities with mandatory backfilling and land recultivation;

- Trimming trees both to ensure a set width of seeps and height limits.

If there are electric grid facilities on sites allocated for industrial and other construction, as well as for agricultural purposes, organizations that have received these sites are obliged to coordinate their use with the corresponding owners of electric grid facilities. [4]

CONCLUSION Considering that there are many such zones in the

region, in the valley and in the Republic, the practical study of analysis and theoretical comprehensive study provides an opportunity to develop recommendations on the regularization of the state of the protected zones, the design and alienation of new protected zones. This is important in the rapid development of the energy complex of the country. When laying new communication networks in the construction of wind power plants and solar panels, which

require large areas for construction. Our careful and insensitive attitude towards land should increase the efficiency of land use with environmental cleanliness and transfer it to new generations.

REFERENCES 1. http://library.ziyonet.uz/ru/book/download/34

264

2. https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/%D0%A3%D0%

B7%D0%B1%D0%B5%D0%BA%D0%B8%

D1%81%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BD

3. Kamolot Xakimova, Azizxon Marupov,

Gulshanoy Mirzakarimova. (2019),

“Maintaining Cadastral Valuation for the

Effective Use of Agricultural Lands of the

Fergana Region”, INTERNATIONAL

JOURNAL OF ADVANCED RESEARCH IN

SCIENCE, ENGINEERING AND

TECHNOLOGY, India, p.p: 11022-11026

4. Cabinet of Ministers Republic of Uzbekistan,

Decision No. 915 of 14 November 2017 -

National Database of Legislation, 15.11.2017

г., № 09/17/915/0259


https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/%D0%A3%D0%B7%D0%B1%D0%B5%D0%BA%D0%B8%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BD






THE MECHANISMS OF INCREASING SOCIAL AND POLITICAL ACTIVITY OF CITIZENS IN THE PROCESS

OF MODERNIZATION OF SOCIETY

Akhmadjonov Olimjon

Andijan State University

The department of Democratic Society


ABSTRACT

“Society is the initiator of reforms”

“Sh. M. Mirziyoyev”

From year to year our life has developed, achieved great results and achievements in various spheres of social and political

development, and has been strived for the highest level in the world community. At the same time, democratization and

renewal of society, modernization and reforming of the country require particular attention as a priority in expanding the

participation of the population in the socio-political life.

Decree of the President of the Republic of Uzbekistan No. 4947 PD “On the Strategy of actions for further

development of the Republic of Uzbekistan” of 7 February 2017, which has played an important role in the new stage of

national development of Uzbekistan, democratization and liberalization of social and political life, protection of human rights

and freedoms, state and the main directions of effective communication between the population, has been developed.

DISCUSSION The fate of the ongoing reforms, the effectiveness and prospects for democratization are largely dependent on the active participation of citizens and the participation of the population in the socio-political processes, since one of the factors determining the socio-political potential of the state is determined by the commitment, intelligence and selflessness of the citizens of the country. As the main goal of building a democratic state and a strong civil society in our country, the fate of democracy, in many respects, depends on the participation of citizens in the socio-political processes. Therefore, in order to deepen democratic reforms, it is necessary to become a genuine participant of democratic processes and active advocate for democratic values. This requires constant development of the process. The state of citizens' participation in the socio-political processes largely depends on the spiritual environment in the society, the system of public administration, and the human factor. It is natural that the person's involvement in social and political processes varies widely. The existence of democratic values in the human mind, its understanding of its constitutional duty and its exercise of personal rights, the degree of its moral and enlightenment knowledge

are, in general, defined as an opportunity to thoroughly analyze what is happening in our lives. The participation of the population in the democratic life of the democratic states is reflected in the participation of citizens in the formation of the government, participation in the decision-making and control over the implementation of issues which are significantly important, in support of the ongoing reforms. It is also important to note that the participation of citizens in socio-political processes also depends on the degree of participation of democratic institutions, parties, non-governmental and public organizations. Indeed, as noted by the head of state, the role of non-governmental, non-profit and community organizations is very important in strengthening democratic reforms in the minds of people, enhancing their political and civic activity, and expanding and deepening democratic reforms in the country. It is the civil institutions, non-profit organizations that have the ability to freely monitor independent thinking, social and political processes, to have their own civic position, to take an active part in the creative endeavors undertaken in our country, to be able to develop the necessary forms of human activity. It is an important tool for developing the skills to pay particular attention to the formation of the human mind.






As the first President of the Republic of Uzbekistan IA Karimov said, “The political activity of the population has to be repeatedly stated that it is still inadequate and still inadequate. We have to admit that we cannot completely get rid of old patterns. All of the important decisions are made from above, and it is difficult for us to lose the defects of the administrative, commanding, totalitarian system that have only made us subordinate executives and sometimes victims of unintended decisions. The political culture needs to be enhanced. People need to know how decisions are made, how their performance is monitored, and actively participate in the preparation and implementation of these decisions. In other words, it is necessary to be aware of the way in which the society is elected at the center and at the local level. Everyone should know their place in society and feel themselves an integral part of their society. The idea of from national revival to national progress put forward is considered to be a practical program which is thought to deal with aforementioned defects. The essence of the work on further development of Uzbekistan's integration into the world community, modernization of social and political life of the country, including democratization of state power and governance, judicial system, development of electoral legislation, further deepening of civil society institutions, citizen activism plays a very important role in the deeper understanding. It is noteworthy that, given the objectives set out in the Development Strategy of Uzbekistan; modernization of the society and increasing the participation of citizens in social and political life should be reflected in the following mechanisms: - Further formation of the legal culture of citizens in the process of modernization and renewal of society; - Strengthening effective public control over the activities of state and government structures; - Ensuring full utilization of constitutional rights to ensure active participation of citizens in social and political life; - Use of effective methods for further strengthening of civil society institutions in civil self-governance; - Further strengthening and development of democratic skills in the minds of citizens; - Strengthen practical work aimed at further strengthening the political participation of the population in the electoral process; - Formation of a sense of belonging to the socio-political, spiritual and educational attitudes of the youth; - To further increase social and political activity of women in society; - To create in citizens' minds the feeling of love for the country, prosperity of the nation, commitment to duty.

The President of the Republic of Uzbekistan Shavkat Mirziyoev said in his address to the Parliament of the Republic of Uzbekistan on January 24, 2020 that we are making great progress in the development of our country, based on the intelligence, power and potential of our people. Most importantly, the results of our reforms should be felt by every person, every family living in our country today. To do this, leaders at all levels must work to ensure that every citizen has conveniences needed instead of chasing after interests, per cents, numbers, or papers. Then the idea that all our multinational people will be pleased with us is an indication of the main goal of our renewed development strategy of Uzbekistan.

REFERENCES 1. Decree of the President of the Republic of

Uzbekistan Sh.M. Mirziyoyev No. 4947 of 7

February, 2017 "On the strategy of further

development of the Republic of Uzbekistan"

2. Decree by the President of the Republic of

Uzbekistan No. PD-5430 on measures to complete

enhancement of the role of civil society institutions

in the democratic renewal of the country T.: May 4,

2018.

3. Address by the President of the Republic of

Uzbekistan to the Parliament - Oliy Majlis of the

Republic of Uzbekistan January 24, 2020

4. Speech of the President of the Republic of

Uzbekistan Sh.Mirziyoev at the solemn ceremony,

devoted to the 27th anniversary of the Constitution

of the Republic of Uzbekistan. T .: December 7,

2019.

5. Karimov I.A. Further deepening of democratic

reforms and formation of civil society is the main

criterion of development of our country. T. Volume

19





ROLE OF PREAMBLE IN DEVELOPING ‘THE LIMITED

THEORY OF AMENDMENT’ IN INDIA

Dr.N.M.Khirale1

Associate Professor& Head,

Department of Law, Dr. Ambedkar College,

DeekshaBhoomi,

Nagpur,Maharashtra


ABSTRACT The Preamble to the constitution has a noble vision which is reflected in the body of constitution in two parts. Chapter on

fundamental rights and directive principles both are constitutional goals. The foundation of welfare state and democratic

setup is a basic feature which directs state machinery to respect the way, access to exercise of right to life of millions in India.

The Supreme nature of the constitution, Republic and Democratic form of Government. Secular in itself and partially

adoption of theory of Separation of powers with Federal character are the basic elements of the constitution which can easily

be understand by anybody by simply reading the contents of the preamble.

The Constitution-makers with legitimate voice finalized the competency parliament to make amendments in rights to

cater the present needs of nation and also to find remedial measures for the problems of socio-economic progress and

development of the country.

KEYWORDS: Preamble, Basic structure, Amending powers, limited power theory.

INTRODUCTION Objective Resolution Which Was Moved By

Pandit Nehru In The Year 1928 Was Under Consideration Of Drafting Committee, Finally Contents Of objective Resolution Was Redrafted And Adopted By The Constituent Assembly on twenty sixth day of November, 1949. The Opening of the Preamble Says That we, the people of India, having solemnly resolved to constitute India into a [sovereign socialist secular democratic republic] and to secure to all its citizens: „Justice, social, economic and political; Liberty of thought, expression, belief, faith and worship; Equality of status and of opportunity; And to promote among them all Fraternity assuring the dignity of the individual And the [unity and integrity of the nation];‟

In our constituent assembly this twenty sixth day of November, 1949, do hereby adopt, enact and give to

ourselves this constitution. The Above Introductory Part Was Came Into Force from 26 January 1950.

The spirit or the ideology contain in objective resolution was adopted in its totality by the constituent assembly and framer put life in it and finally it becomes introductory part of Constitution. The fundamental rights are given an inspirational position for development of citizen to the fullest extent under our Constitution. Parliament has limited powers, it has to keep in mind the philosophy, history of its inclusion in constitution. In Constitution provisions relating to fundamental rights and Directive Principles formed an unified mutually inclusive scheme, of an independent code. State can enforced the Directive Principles of State Policy without recourse to Article 13 of the constitution. Guarantee of fundamental rights is not absolute, It determines the ambit of the freedom. the Constitution contain provisions for the suspension of exercise of fundamental rights subject to social control and national interest. Parliament can introduce some






changes by way of amendment to the constitution for peace, welfare and good government of the state.

HISTORY OF PREAMBLE The first meeting of the Constituent Assembly

took place on December 9, 1946 when the swearing in of members and election of a temporary president to conduct the business until the installation of a permanent head, took place. On December 13, 1946 Pandit Jawahar Lal Nehru moved the famous "Objectives Resolution" giving an outline, aims and objects of the Constitution. This resolution was actually passed on January 22, 1947 by all members of the Constituent Assembly (standing) and it declared among other matters that all power and authority of the sovereign Independent India, its constituent parts and organs of Government are derived from the people. By November 26, 1949 the deliberations of the Constituent Assembly had concluded and the Constitution had been framed. As recited in the Preamble it was on that date that the people of India in the Constituent Assembly adopted, enacted and gave to themselves "this Constitution" which according to Article 393 was to be called "The Constitution of India". In accordance with Article 394 that Article and the other Articles mentioned therein were to come into force at once but the remaining provisions of the Constitution were to come into force on the 26th day of January 1950.

THE PREAMBLE: PRIDE OF PLACE It was specifically held by the court in 1965 in

Beruberi case that preamble is a solemn form all the ideals and aspirations of the Indian people. Philosophy of Lord Buddha certainly represented in preamble and it also contains some ideas adopted by other countries. But the constant strain which runs throughout each and every article of the Constitution is reflected in the Preamble which could and can be made sacrosanct. The preamble was, therefore, meant to embody in a very few and well defined words the key to the understanding of the Constitution. It occupied symbol status and place of pride in Indian constitution.

On July 22, 1947, while moving the report of the Union Constitution Committee, Jawaherlal Nehru suggested that it was not at that stage necessary to consider the Preamble since the Assembly stood by the basic principles laid down in the Objectives Resolution and these could be incorporated in the Preamble later. The suggestion was accepted and further consideration of the Preamble was held over.

Meanwhile important developments had taken place in regard to the Indian States. With the completion of the process of merger and integration of the Indian States the principle had been accepted (i) of

sovereign powers being vested in the people, and (ii) that their Constitutions should be framed by the Constituent Assembly and should form integrated part of the new Constitution The draft preamble was considered by the Assembly on October 17, 1949.

An amendment was moved in the Constituent Assembly to make it clear beyond all doubt that sovereignty vested in the people. It was not accepted on the short ground that "the Preamble as drafted could convey no other meaning than that the Constitution emanated from the people and sovereignty to make this Constitution vested in them

The history of the drafting and the ultimate adoption of the Preamble shows :

(1) That it did not "walk before the Constitution" as is said about the preamble to the United States Constitution;

(2) That it was adopted last as a part of the Constitution:

(3) That the principles embodied in it are taken from the Objectives Resolution;

(4) That it embodied the fundamental concept of sovereignty being in the people.

THE PREAMBLE: SOURCE OF LIMITED POWER

How the preamble will assist in interpreting and in discovering the meaning of the word "amendment" employed in Article 368 was under consideration of Indian judiciary.

The preamble does not have the widest possible meaning and there are certain limitations to the exercise of the amending power and, therefore, the expression "amendment" should be construed considering those limitations. All the elements of the Constitutional structure, are to be found in the preamble and the amending body cannot repeal or abrogate those essential elements because if any one of them is taken away the edifice as erected must fall.

The preamble was finalized after a long discussion and it was adopted last so that it may embody the fundamentals underlying the structure of the Constitution It is true that on a concept such as social and economic justice there may be different schools of thought but the Constitution makers knew what they meant by those concepts and it was with a view to implement them that they enacted Parts III (Fundamental Rights) and Part IV (Directive Principles of State Policy) - both fundamental in character-on the one hand, basic freedoms to the individual and on the other social security, justice and freedom from exploitation by laying down guiding principles





THE PREAMBLE: PEOPLE'S WILL The various fundamental rights has permanence

place in Indian constitution. They are “paramount', "sacrosanct", "these rights are reserved by the people', they are "inalienable and inviolable”, and "transcendental". the part III is a foundation for minorities which shows their existence in political platform. It is a guarantee for them to live dignified life like others. Preamble is the people's will and certain Articles or doctrines of the Constitution are utterly incapable of alteration at any time even if demanded by an absolute majority of the voters.

THE PREAMBLE: GUIDANCE FORCE Indian judiciary has constantly looked to

importance of the preamble and its guidance force and given it a transcendental position when considering on the issue of the waiver of a fundamental right referred to the preamble and to the genesis of declaration of fundamental rights while interpreting the Constitution or other laws. The Supreme Court denoted to the preamble extensively and observed that the fundamental rights were provided for "to implement and fortify the supreme purpose set forth in the preamble".

In other countries also following the same system of jurisprudence the preamble has been referred to for finding out the Constitutional principles underlying a Constitution.

The Preamble is a similar in principle to the constitution and any amendment to basic features can be declared beyond the competence of Parliament or any state legislature to enact so long as our Constitution remains in its present form of a Constitutional democracy.

In re. Berubari case The Court laid down the following propositions

A preamble is useful, it is helpful for opening the minds of the makers, and object behind several provisions in the Constitution; the government has limited powers under the Constitution; there are certain prohibitions and limitations on the powers of government;

The people of India gave to themselves this Constitution on the 26th day of November 1949. Even if the preamble was actually adopted by the Constituent Assembly at a later date, no one can question the statement made in the Preamble that the Constitution came into force on the date mentioned therein. The supreme court held that The preamble itself must be deemed by a legal fiction to have come into force with effect from 26th November 1949. Even if this is a plausible conclusion, it does not appear to be sufficient to support the observation in the Berubari case that the preamble was not a part of the Constitution.

The preamble serves several important purposes. Firstly, it indicates the source from which the Constitution comes viz. the people of India. Next, it contains the enacting clause which brings into force the Constitution. In the third place, it declares the great rights and freedoms which the people of India intended to secure to all citizens and the basic type of government and polity which was to be established. From all these, if any provision in the Constitution had to be interpreted and if the expressions used therein were ambiguous, the preamble would certainly furnish valuable guidance in the matter, particularly when the question is of the correct ambit, scope and width of a power intended to be conferred by Article 368.

The historical background, the Objectives Resolution formed the basis of the preamble and the preamble occupies fundamental position in our Constitution. It constitutes a land-mark in India's history and sets out as a matter of historical fact what the people of India resolved to do for molding their future destiny. The Constitution makers made everything clear during debate ion status of preamble and its guidance force.

While examining the effect of the declarations made and the statements contained in the preamble on interpretation of the word "amendment" employed in Article 368 of the Constitution the Apex Court said that the people of India resolved to do was to constitute their country into a Sovereign, Democratic and Republic. The preamble contains the fundamentals of our the historical background, the Objectives Resolution formed the basis of the preamble and the preamble occupies fundamental position in our Constitution. It constitutes a land-mark in India's history and sets out as a matter of historical fact what the people of India resolved to do for molding their future destiny

CONCLUSION The effect of the declarations made and the

statements contained in the preamble on interpretation of the word "amendment" employed in Article 368 of the Constitution the Apex Court said that the people of India resolved to do was to constitute their country into a Sovereign, Democratic and Republic. the preamble contains the fundamentals of our Constitution, it has to be seen whether the word amendment in Article 368 should be so construed that by virtue of the amending power the Constitution can be made to suffer a complete loss of identity or the basic elements on which the Constitutional structure has been erected, can be eroded or taken away.





REFERENCES 1. Preamble to the Constitution of India.

2. Behram Khurshid Pesikaka's [1955] 1 S.C.R. 613 at

p. 653case.

3. Bhagwati J., in Basheshar Nath v. Commissioner of

Income-tax [1959] Suppl. 1 S.C.R. 528

4. In Re Kerala Education Bill 1957 [1959] S.C.R. 995

this (Constituent Assembly Debates Vol. 10, pp.

432-442).

(The Framing of India's Constitution by B. Shiva

Rao, p. 131)

5. Rex v. Hess [1949] Dom. L.R. 199 at p. 208

6. I. C. Golaknath & Ors vs State Of Punjab & Anrs

1967 AIR 1643, 1967 SCR (2) 762

7. Kesavananda Bharati v. State of Kerala (1973) 4

SCC 225: AIR 1973 SC 1461





FINANCIAL LITERACY OF THE YOUNG PROFESSIONALS IN BONIFACIO GLOBAL CITY

Timothy Bustamante Student in Master in Business Administration,

Polytechnic University of the Philippines,

Sta. Mesa, Manila,

Philippines

Janine Rose Castillo Student in Master in Business Administration,


Sta. Mesa, Manila,

Philippines

Edelyn Bagwasan Student in Master in Business Administration,


Sta. Mesa, Manila,

Philippines

ABSTRACT

The research study focused on Financial Literacy of Young Professionals in Bonifacio Global City, Taguig. There were

100 respondents and mostly female, aged 23-24, single with monthly salary of 20,000 and below. The researcher used the

descriptive method as the survey technique. Questionnaire was prepared and approved by the research committee to be

used for the research study.

The data was gathered, interpreted and analyzed by the researchers using the statistical tools. Based on the

respondent’s assessment of the effectiveness of young professionals in terms of personal financial management, the

grand mean was 4.39 which was interpreted as “Effective”. In the respondent’s assessment of effectiveness of young

professionals in terms of risk management it was resulted to the grand mean of 3.59 which was interpreted as “Effective”.

The respondent’s assessment of the effectiveness of young professionals in terms of educational planning it

resulted to the grand mean of 3.19 which was interpreted as “Somehow Effective”.

KEYWORDS - Financial Literacy, Investment Decisions, Educational Planning, Finance Management, Financial

Product

I. INTRODUCTION It is very essential that each person should have the ability to understand how money works; how to manage it to earn and to invest or how to donate it to help others (IEF, 2013). Financial literacy provides the necessary knowledge, skills and tools for individuals to make informed financial decisions with confidence, to manage personal wealth with efficiency and to increase financial competence to demand for better financial services (Ali, 2013). JumpStart (2009) noted and argued that students who took up financial literacy courses were not better off than those who did not. The financial literacy level of the average Filipino remains alarmingly low, a problem that begins with poor childhood education that persists until their adult years. Complementary to such it has become a cultural meager mindset of Filipinos that upon receipt of salaries, spending comes in before

saving. What is left is saved. If there‟s none left, then there‟s nothing saved. Financial literacy is vital in harnessing the wealth of the younger generation. Heavy borrowings and a lack of saving habit have been blamed for the financial problems the Filipinos are facing in the country and abroad. Heavy borrowings and lack of prudent saving habits are major problems that we are trying to address. Citing the results of a study by the World Bank, the BSP said only 2 percent of Filipino adults answered all questions about financial literacy correctly. The study also showed that Filipinos lack specific knowledge to make informed financial decisions. Stressing that financial education was an “imperative,” considering the country‟s low financial literacy levels. The same study indicated that money management habits formed in childhood stay into adulthood. Those who began saving as children display better attitudes to saving, and tend to





outperform their peers who did not develop the habit early in the areas of choosing financial products and services, monitoring expenses and planning for retirement. The BSP believes that a financially learned citizenry can be more effective in productively contributing to Philippine economy. Government institutions like the BSP and private sector players like banks have mounted their respective efforts to improve the financial literacy of Filipinos, particularly students, young professionals, overseas Filipino workers (OFWs), and disadvantaged people like farmers. BSP runs “Economic and Financial Learning Program” (EFLP), its flagship initiative for financial education. According to the central bank, this is in line with its drive to promote greater awareness and understanding of essential economic and financial issues that will help the Filipino public acquire the knowledge and develop the skills to make well-informed economic and financial decisions and choices. Based also on the Philippine Financial Literacy Advocacy 2013 Report, most of the Filipinos have good knowledge on financial concept of investments, but they lack in understanding the concept of healthy budget and inflation. Financial literacy is now acknowledged globally as an important element for economic and financial stability and development. Trends support the rising global interest in financial literacy as a key to life skill. Existing empirical evidence shows that adults in both developed and emerging economies who have been exposed to financial education are subsequently more likely than others to save and plan for retirement. Those with higher financial literacy are better able to manage their money, participate in the stock market and more likely to invest. Moreover, those who have greater financial knowledge are more likely to accumulate higher amounts of wealth. Financially literate consumers can make more informed decisions and demand higher quality services which will encourage competition and innovation in the market. BGC is the fastest growing city in Metro Manila and in the Philippines. Bonifacio Global City is a true child of the 21st century a modern wonder of contemporary living populated by great minds and passionate hearts. The researchers conducted this study to give the importance on the level of financial literacy to young professionals in BGC and how it affects the behaviors of the respondents and its outcome. The point of this study is to examine the level of effectiveness among young professional in terms of their personal financial management, risk management, & educational planning. This research aims to assess the level of effectiveness of personal financial management practices of young professionals in BGC. Specifically, the study seeks to

answer the questions in terms of the demographic profile of the respondents and how the respondents assess the level of effectiveness of their Personal Financial Management practices. It is not enough that people work and get paid. It is also important where to put their money and let their money earn as well.

II. OBJECTIVES As this study aims to assess the financial literacy of young professionals in BGC, the following are the objectives to meet:

1. To be able to examine the level of effectiveness of financial management practices of BGC‟s young professionals in terms of personal financial planning, risk management, and educational planning;

2. To provide recommendations on financial management aspects that needs improvement; 3. To raise awareness to young professionals the significance of financial literacy; 4. To help provide financial institutions and curriculum developers a picture of the current status of young professional‟s financial literacy; 5. And lastly, to help future researchers who may want to undertake research in the field of financial literacy.

III. METHODOLOGY This researcher used the descriptive method

as the survey technique. The method used was considered appropriately since the study assessed the level of effectiveness on personal financial management practice of young professionals in Bonifacio Global City.

Data gathered and treated were Respondent‟s profile such as age, sex, civil status, average monthly net income, job position level. A total of one hundred (100) respondents were surveyed, 22 were male and 78 were female. The respondents of this were the young professionals working at Bonifacio Global City, Taguig, Philippines. These are individuals currently performing jobs at high standards. The questionnaire was distributed personally. The researcher allotted much time to ensure that all of the questionnaires were collected and retrieved from the respondents. The results were tallied and tabulated according to frequency of items checked by the participant. After data tabulation, results were interpreted using various statistical tools. The results of the technique used in the data gathering will help the researcher to arrive at the interpretation of data. The data collected in this study will be organized and classified based on the research design and the problems formulated. The data will be coded,





tallied and tabulated to facilitate the presentation ad interpretation of the results using the following:

1. Frequency & Percentage Distribution Method.

These are tools that were used in analyzing the demographic profile of the respondents. Where percentage (%) is equal to frequency of responses (f) over total number of respondents (N) multiplied by 100.

2. Weighted Mean (WM) It is the sum of the product of the

frequency and the unit weight (∑fw) divided by the number of respondents (N). The average weighted mean (x) is the sum of the weighted mean ∑(WM) divided by the number of items (N). This measure the central tendency or point where most of the scores cluster.

3. T-test and Analysis of Variance (ANOVA)

According to statistics-help-for-students.com (2017), ANOVA stands for Analysis of Variance. With ANOVA, data are analyzed and compared the variability of scores in between conditions and within conditions. This helped the researcher find out if the independent variable (IV) had a significant effect on the dependent variable (DV). The research will also use One Way Anova test to compare three or more groups or conditions in an experiment. A One Way Anova will help the researcher find out if the means for each group/condition are significantly different from one another of if they are relatively the same. If the means are significantly different, the researcher can say that the variable being manipulated, your Independent Variable (IV), had an effect on the variable being measured, the Dependent Variable (DV).

4. Likert Scale This method was used in

conjunction with the weighted mean. This research uses the verbal interpretation and arbitrary scale for the Likert Scale.

5. Ranking In statistics, “ranking” refers to the

data transformation in which numerical or ordinal values are replaced by their rank when the data are sorted.

IV. SAMPLING DESIGN The respondents of this study were the young professionals working at Bonifacio Global City, Taguig, Philippines. There are 100 respondents selected to answer the questionnaires. The researchers used the

cluster sampling method, where the respondents are strategically selected from 4 different locations in Bonifacio Global City that have high populations of young professionals. To have a definitive result, researchers chose 25 respondents from the estimated population of each locations. They were assessed in terms of age, sex, civil status, average monthly net income and job position level. These are individuals currently performing jobs at high standards.

V. STATISTICAL DESIGN The statistical design used was by experiment type whose principles are formulation of questions, randomization of sample population, and application of basic statistics.

1. Formulation of Question - The researcher designed the questionnaire in proper form to accommodate sufficient and relevant information required from the respondents. The questionnaire was divided into two parts. The first part was about the profile of respondents. The second part focused on the level of personal financial management literacy of the respondents.

2. Randomization of Sample Population – The population of this study comprised of young professionals working in Bonifacio Global City, Taguig, Philippines. A total of 100 respondents from different in location in BGC were randomly selected to answer the survey questionnaires.

3. Application of Basic Statistics – The results gathered from the collected data were interpreted using Frequency & Percentage. Distribution Method, Weighted Mean, Test and Analysis of Variance, Likert Scale, and Ranking.

VI. GEOGRAPHICAL AREA The survey was conducted in

Bonifacio Global City, Taguig, Philippines. It is a financial and lifestyle district in Metro Manila. Local and Foreign companies have main offices and country office branches serving the central business district. This area is also considered home to many young professionals. The vicinity not only offers a premier business address but also is among the most liveable cities in the metro. The respondents selected were from the following strategic locations Bonifacio High Street, North Bonifacio, Forbes Town Center, Uptown Bonifacio.





VII. RESULTS This chapter presents the findings, analysis and interpretation of data obtained from the primary instrument used in this study. It discusses the financial management practices of the young professionals as to personal financial management, risk management, and educational planning. The profile of the respondents in terms of age, sex, civil status, average monthly net income, job position level was gathered and showed the following results. Young professionals‟ age ranged 23 to 24 were the most number of respondents in this study and mostly female with 78% respondents. As to civil status majority were single comprised of 90% of population. The average monthly income was Php 20,000-below which were classified as rank and file. Based on the respondent‟s assessment of the effectiveness of young professionals in terms of personal financial management, the grand mean was 4.39 which was interpreted as “Effective”. It means young professional working in Bonifacio Global City were „Effective” in terms of personal management practices which includes the payment of utility bills on time. Avoid availing loans to pay off loans. Pay short-term and long-term obligation, budget money on a monthly basis, living one‟s life within one‟s means. Set aside 10% of monthly income as savings. Allot money for any emergencies/contingencies. In the respondent‟s assessment of the effectiveness of young professionals in terms of risk management it was resulted to the grand mean of 3.59 which was interpreted as “Effective”. Among the young professionals financial management practices in terms of risk management the “protecting loved ones by buying life/health insurance ranked as the first which obtained a WM = 3.88 which was interpreted as “Effective”. Updating the premium payments ranked as second with a WM = 3.69 which verbally interpreted as “Effective”. Protecting oneself by purchasing property insurance got the lowest weighted mean of 3.19 and verbally interpreted as “Somehow Effective”.

The respondent‟s assessment of the effectiveness of young professionals in terms of educational planning it resulted to the grand mean of 3.19 which was interpreted as “Somehow Effective”. Study includes allotting money for dependent‟s education, allotting money for personal education or advancement - MBA or other advanced studies.

DISCUSSIONS This chapter presents the findings based on the

obtained results, the conclusions formulated based on the findings, and the recommendations suggested based on the conclusions of the study.

Findings This study aimed to assess the level of

effectiveness of personal financial management practices of young professional in the Bonifacio Global City, Taguig.

Specifically, the researcher aimed to determine the following: (1) the demographic profile of the respondents in terms of age, sex, civil status, average monthly net income, job position level; (2) the level of effectiveness in their personal financial management practices in terms of personal financial planning, risk management, educational planning, and retirement planning. This study utilized the descriptive survey method of research. The respondents of the study were one-hundred (100) young professional in BGC regardless of their residence. The questionnaire was the main instrument used to gather data. The statistical tools were frequency, percentage of distribution, ranking, t-test, and ANOVA. Based on the gathered data, the followings finding were drawn. 1. Profile of the Respondents The results were revealed that out of one-hundred (100) respondents, 21% were between 21 to 22 years old, 47% were between 23 to 24, 23% were between 25 to 26, 5% were between 27 to 28, and four (4) or 4% were 29 to 30 years old. In terms of sex, twenty-two (22) or 22% were male and seventy-eight (78) or 78% were female. As to civil status, ninety (90) or 90% were single young professionals and ten (10) or 10% were got married. In terms of average monthly net income, fifty-three (53) or 53% were in the monthly net income range of Php 20,000 – below, Forty-seven (47) or 47% were in the monthly net income range of 20,001-50,000, and none of the respondents got Php 50,000 – above monthly net income range. In terms of job position level, ninety-one (91) or 91% were rank and file, two (2) or 2% were top management, three (3) or 3% were middle management and four (4) or 4% were supervisory. 2. Respondents’ Assessment on the Effectiveness of their Personal Financial Management Practices in Terms of Personal Financial Planning, Risk Management, Educational Planning, and Retirement Planning. In terms of Personal Financial Management, payment of utility bills on time was perceived to be the first management practices of young professionals in BGC which obtained WM = 4.76 rated as “Very Effective”. Avoidance of availing loans to pay off loans and payment for short-term and long-term payable on time were ranked 2.5 which got a WM = 4.66 both rated as “Very Effective”. Allotting money for any emergencies and contingencies was the lowest





in terms of young professional‟s personal financial management practices which obtained WM = 4.06 rated as “Effective”. 3. Respondents’ Assessment on the Effectiveness of their Personal Financial Management Practices in Terms of Risk Management. In terms of Risk Management, the two highest sub variable who received a weighted mean of 3.88 (Effective) and 3.69 (Effective) were “protecting loved ones by buying life/health insurance and updating the premium payments. On the other hand, protecting oneself by purchasing property insurance got the lowest weighted mean of 3.19 and verbally interpreted as “Somehow Effective”. 4. Respondents’ Assessment on the Effectiveness of their Personal Financial Management Practices in Terms of Educational Planning. In terms of educational planning, Allotting money for dependent‟s education was the highest sub variable obtained a WM = 3.23 which was interpreted as “Somehow Effective”. While “allotting money for personal education or advancement - MBA or other advanced studies” got a WM = 3.15 which verbally interpreted as “Somehow Effective”.

VIII. SUGGESTIONS

Based on the findings and conclusions, the following recommendations were drawn.

1. In terms of personal financial management, young professionals in BGC should give importance on proper budgeting. Though the overall result was effective, young professional should have known the goal of budgeting is not to over spend your income. If that happens, it would result to financial crisis.

2. In terms of risk management, as part of the financial planning, one of the important thing to remember is protect our income from any uncertainties that might happened in the future. By that, Life insurance companies VUL product is one thing to consider by young employees nowadays. Many people do not take the necessary precautions to insure themselves, and it could end up costing them a

substantial amount of money. You need several different types of insurance if you want to live a comfortable financial existence.

3. In terms of educational planning, young professionals should also invest in getting a post-graduate degree as this would help them land a good career and bigger opportunities.

4. Young professionals should learn to manage their finances. Proper budgeting is necessary in Philippine setting. Budgeting allows you to create a spending plan for your money, it ensures that you will always have enough money for the things you need and the things that are important to you. Following a budget or spending plan will also keep you out of debt or help you work your way out of debt if you are currently in debt.

IX. CONCLUSIONS

Based on the findings of the study the researcher derived on the following conclusions.

1. Most of the young professionals in Bonifacio Global City, Taguig were aged 23-24 years old, mostly female, single, rank and file employees with monthly average net income of 20,000 and below.

2. The respondents assessed in their personal financial management practices in terms of personal financial planning & risk management, were “Effective” while educational planning was “Somehow Effective”

Therefore, young professionals in BGC were proficient of financial principles and concepts such as financial planning, risk management and educational planning. They understood that being financial literate helps they become self-sufficient so that they can achieve financial stability. While financial illiteracy causes many people to become victims of predatory lending, subprime mortgages, fraud and high interest rates, potentially resulting in bad credit, bankruptcy or foreclosure.





X. FIGURES, TABLES & REFERENCES

Table 1 Respondent’s Assessment on the Level of Effectiveness

of the Financial Management Practices in Terms of Personal Financial Management

Table 2

Respondent’s Assessment on the Level of Effectiveness of the Financial Management Practices

in Terms of Risk Management

PERSONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT Weighted

Mean Verbal

Interpretation Ranking

a. Pay utility bills on time. 4.76 Very Effective 1

b. Avoid availing loans to pay off loans. 4.66 Very Effective 2.5

c. Pay short term and Long-term payables on time.

4.66 Very Effective 2.5

d. Budget money on a monthly basis. 4.28 Effective 4

e. Living one’s life within one’s means. 4.17 Effective 5

f. Set aside 10% of monthly income as savings. 4.15 Effective 6

g. Allot money for any emergencies/contingencies.

4.06 Effective 7

Grand Mean 4.39 Effective

RISK MANAGMENT

Weighted Mean

Verbal Interpretation

Ranking

a. Protect loved ones by buying life/health insurance.

3.88 Effective 1

b. Updated in premium payments of insurance coverage.

3.69 Effective 2

c. Protect oneself by purchasing property insurance i.e car insurance, house, business and others.

3.19 Somehow Effective

3

Grand Mean 3.59 Effective





Table 3

Respondent’s Assessment on the Level of Effectiveness of the Financial Management Practices in Terms

of Educational Planning

REFERENCES

1. Kebede,M. (2015). Financial Literacy and Management of Personal Finance: A Review of Recent Literatures.

2. Kenya Obago, S.O. (2014). Effect of Financial Literacy on Management of Personal Finances among Employees

of Commercial Banks.

3. Chen, H. and Volpe, R. (2015). An Analysis of Personal Financial Literacy Among College Students.

4. University of Colorado (2015) . The Effect of Financial Literacy and Financial Education on Downstream

Financial Behaviors.

5. Owusu, Eric Nkrumah (2015).Assessing The Level Of Financial Literacy Among Teachers A Case Study Of

Sekyere East District Of Ashanti Region Of Ghana.

6. https://www.investopedia.com

7. https://business.inquirer.net

8. http://www.bsp.gov.ph

EDUCATIONAL PLANNING Weighted

Mean Verbal

Interpretation Ranking

a. Allot money for your dependent's education (if any).


1

b. Allot money for personal education or advancement-MBA or other advanced studies.


2

Grand Mean 3.19 Somehow Effective





THE INFLUENCE OF EMOTIONAL AFFINITY TOWARD

NATURE AND INSTITUTIONAL SUPPORT ON

ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIBILITY BEHAVIOUR: A

RELIABILITY TEST

Logeswari Uthama puthran1

1PhD Scholar,

School of Business Management,

Universiti Utara Malaysia,

Kedah,

Malaysia

Fais Ahmad2

2Associate Professor,



Kedah,

Malaysia

Hazlinda Hassan3

3Senior Lecturer,



Kedah,

Malaysia


ABSTRACT Over the last few decades, environmental issues such as global warming, acid rain, air pollution, urban sprawl, waste

disposal, ozone layer depletion, water pollution and climate change have facing concern among prominent world

organisational annual meeting and occasions. Almost media covers the environmental and sustainability issues in their daily

publications. Malaysia as a developing country starving to survive with annual climate change issues such as flash floods,

haze, water and air pollution and increasing seasonal sicknesses. In conjunction, government, policymakers, learning

institutions, and Non-Government Organisations (NGOs) play their role in educating people to attain sustainability lifestyle.

Specifically, institution leaders as a change agent encourage adapting environmental behaviour to enhancing environmental

attitude and behaviour among their stakeholders. Therefore, the purpose of this study is to test the reliability of environmental

responsive behaviour, specifically among school leaders in Malaysia. For this study, 503 samples were used to test reliability.

The findings indicated that all examined variables consistently reflect the construct it is measuring. Hence, adapted

measurement items are reliable to use in future studies.

1. INTRODUCTION Generally, emerging global environmental

challenges threatens human health, physical security, material needs and social cohesion. It has proven by increasingly intense and frequent storms, rising sea level, extensive flooding, drought, acid rain, deforestation, increase of the carbon dioxide and greenhouse gases, land degradation, and overconsumption of energy (Alberti, 2015; Enger & Smith, 2015). Consequently, ecological impacts in Malaysia alarming for implementation of policies, procedures and guidelines integrated with

environmental sustainability. Cameron Highland mud floods 2013, Hulu Langat landslide 2011, tsunami 2004 and Highland Tower 1993 are some of the notable environmental disasters that have been occurred in Malaysia (Abdul Rahman, 2014). Furthermore, environmental degradation and local socio-economic revolution caused the Malaysia government to expend RM2,236.7 million to environmental protection expenditure for 2013.

Although there are numerous regulations available, daily‟s update shows that environmental offences are frequent outbreaks. Importantly, the






Environmental Quality Act 1974 implemented to attain sustainability by the striking balance between environmental preservation and economic expansion (Mustafa, 2011; Nor, Bahari, Adnan, Kamal, & Ali, 2016). Apart from that, other environmental law and policies such as the Natural Resources and Environment Ordinance 1997, the Protection of Wildlife Act 1972 Act 76, the Fisheries Act 1985 Act 317, the National Forestry Act 1984, the National Parks Act 1980, the Town and Country planning Act 1976 (Mohammad, 2011) are prominent regulation to tract those who are jeopardise wellbeing of nature. On the other hand, International Organization Standardization certification for environmental (ISO 14000) is an excellent tool for an organisation to improve sustainability attributes in their principal activity. ISO 14000 accreditation is catering a guideline for organisations to improve their environmental management efforts (Mustafa, 2011).

2. LITERATURE REVIEW Environmental disasters depicted as major

threaten for human life. All the above efforts specifically government initiatives become baseless without transformation of human behaviour to actual environmental sustainability behaviour. Importantly, sustainability is not the only responsibility of the government. It is impossible for the government policy to success without the dedication and commitment from its stakeholders such as implementers. Notably, no real reform can occur without education immersion (Hii, Zaki, Aghamohammadi, & Rocklöv, 2016; Pothitou, Varga, Kolios, & Gu, 2017; Shaikh et al., 2017). Notably, the school are the right place to highlight the impact human make on the environment. Leaders in the schools were assuming as an agent of change and the most influential person in the institution (Robertson, 2018; Shafique & Kalyar, 2018; Ugwu, 2018; Van Gils, Van Quaquebeke, Borkowski, & van Knippenberg, 2018). Any policy and reformation begin from school leaders had great potential and chance to succeed. However, pro-environmental behaviour stagnant as knowledge without actual involvement among school leaders that encourage to evaluate attendance of sustainability behaviour among schools leaders (Khalid, Harun, Muda, & Ismail, 2011). Malaysia education system limits the sustainability elements by implementing environmental education since 1998 (Khalid et al., 2011) and currently, environmental aspects are only thought and integrated as an element in every subject. Thus, school leaders need to develop and articulate clear conceptions of the vision and approach to stimulate environmental behaviour in their schools so

that such implementation transform next-generation environmental behaviours.

Initially, interest toward nature, feeling of oneness with nature, love and attachment toward nature is proven to be the best predictor of nature protective behaviour. Jones (2013) try to overcome „nature deficit disorder‟ in the learning institutions, and the scholar found that direct nature experiences mainly rural nature experience potentially change the level of emotion and emotional attachment to nature which lead to a high inclination to affinity toward nature. Therefore, emotional affinity toward nature has to retrieve as a direct predictor to environmental intention and behaviour. Thus, in this research emotional affinity toward nature suitable for explaining environmental responsive behaviour among school leaders. This research will be comparing the predictive power of emotional affinity toward nature (a cognitive appraisal) and school leaders‟ environmental responsive behaviour (a responsibility related performance appraisal)(Mulford, 2003). According to the psychological aspects, childhood nature experience is vital to preserving the environment. Schools play an essential role in eliciting environmental experience to students (Fernández, Alférez, Vidal, Fernández, & Albareda, 2016; Krettenauer, 2017; Yost & Ellis, 2008). Particularly, school leaders‟ environmental interest, feeling of oneness and love to nature may give experience through their attitude that practice environmental activities in schools (Uthamaputhran, Ahmad, Jaganathan, & Hee, 2016.

In the education context, institutional support also plays a vital role to improve students‟ performance by providing administrative support, financial arrangement and opportunity that cater to their interest (Kozeracki & Brooks, 2006). Nevertheless, school level institutional support was provided for the school management from the government to improve academic and non-academic achievement. Malaysia relies on a single entity such as the Ministry of Education to guide and collaborate with school leaders. National Institute of Education Management and Leadership or Institut Aminuddin Baki (IAB) is a leading training institute for the school leaders in Malaysia. National Professional Qualification for Educational Leaders (NPQEL) is mandatory for school leaders professional development (M. Jones et al., 2015). Six core areas covered during the training session such as “vision development; instruction and achievement; change management and innovation; resource and operation; interpersonal relationships; and self- management” (Ng, 2016). Alternatively, sustainable resource consumption may integrate with the element of the training to encourage





environment responsive behaviours among school leaders.

3. METHODOLOGY A survey method used in this study and 503

samples were used to test reliability. Data were collected by using online survey method from primary schools from Malaysia. The Likert-type scale was used to measure the items from all three variables, namely; environmental responsive behaviour, emotional affinity toward nature and institutional support.

In connection to adapt the instrument for environmental responsive behaviour, which focuses on behaviour,12 items were adapted, which developed in the previous studies (Xiao & Hong, 2010)(Marcinkowski, 2001). For the context of emotional affinity toward nature was assessed using a

ten-item measurement adapted from (Müller, Kals, & Pansa, 2009) and for institutional support 6 items measurement were used which adapted from past studies (Oliveira, Thomas, & Espadanal, 2014; Zhu & Kraemer, 2005).

4. RESULTS Table 1 illustrated the reliability of all variables

of the research. Usually, Cronbach‟s alpha used to estimate the reliability based on the inter-correlation of all the indicators in the construct. Besides, reliability is the consistency of the measures and the ranges from 0 to 1, with a value of 0.60 to 0.70 deemed the lower limit of acceptability (Joseph F. Hair, Black, Babin, & Anderson, 2010).

Table 1.0

Reliability Assessment for Variables Variables Cronbach Alpha No. of items Environmental Responsive Behaviour 0.889 10 Emotional Affinity Toward Nature 0.969 10 Institutional Support 0.914 6

As shown in the findings, the Cronbach Alpha for emotional affinity toward nature indicates the highest value which is 0.969. Reliability value for institutional support (0.914) and environmental responsive behaviour (0.889) relatively higher than minimum acceptable of reliability (Nunnally, 1978). Besides, there is no item dropped to increase the reliability of the construct. Hence, it can be concluded that the questionnaire is good and reliable for further analysis.

5. CONCLUSION The main objective of this study is to assess the

reliability of environmental responsive behaviour, and their influential constructs such as emotional affinity toward nature and institutional support. Result of this study indicated that all measured constructs hold good internal consistency that is consistent across the research. Therefore, these results relatively suitable and reliable in the research. Since the study on environmental behaviour related to leadership attributes are very limited, it is without a doubt that this measurements with high internal consistency could be adopted for the different context of research such as region, industry and so on. In addition, it is very crucial to include more variation in the research to establish better and consistent reliability. To sum up, it is hoped that this reviewed reliability analysis on environmental

behaviour and institutional support constructs could help researchers who are interested to understand further on green behaviour adoption and institutional support.

6. REFERENCES 1. Abdul Rahman, H. (2014). An overview of

environmental disaster in Malaysia and preparedness

strategies. Iranian Journal of Public Health, 43(3), 17–

24.

2. Alberti, M. (2015). Eco-evolutionary dynamics in an

urbanizing planet. Trends in Ecology and Evolution,

pp. 114–126.

https://doi.org/10.1016/j.tree.2014.11.007

3. Enger, E. D., & Smith, B. F. (2015). Environmental

Science: A Study of Interrelationship (14th ed.). New

City: McGraw-Hill.

4. Fernández, M., Alférez, A., Vidal, S., Fernández, M. Y.,

& Albareda, S. (2016). Methodological approaches to

change consumption habits of future teachers in

Barcelona, Spain: Reducing their personal Ecological

Footprint. Journal of Cleaner Production, 122, 154–

163. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2016.02.026

5. Hii, Y. L., Zaki, R. A., Aghamohammadi, N., &

Rocklöv, J. (2016). Research on Climate and Dengue

in Malaysia: A Systematic Review. Current

Environmental Health Reports, Vol. 3, pp. 81–90.

https://doi.org/10.1007/s40572-016-0078-z

6. Jones, D. R. (2013). “The biophilic university”: A de-

familiarizing organizational metaphor for ecological





sustainability? Journal of Cleaner Production, 48,

148–165. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2013.02.019

7. Jones, M., Adams, D., Hwee Joo, M. T., Muniandy, V.,

Perera, C. J., & Harris, A. (2015). Contemporary

challenges and changes: principals’ leadership

practices in Malaysia. Asia Pacific Journal of

Education, 35(3), 353–365.

https://doi.org/10.1080/02188791.2015.1056591

8. Joseph F. Hair, J., Black, W. C., Babin, B. J., &

Anderson, R. E. (2010). Multivariate Data Analysis

(MVDA). In British Library Cataloguing-in-

Publication Data (7th ed.).

https://doi.org/10.1002/9781118895238.ch8

9. Kozeracki, C. a, & Brooks, J. B. (2006). Emerging

Institutional Support for Developmental Education.

New Directions for Community Colleges, (136), 63–74.

https://doi.org/10.1002/cc

10. Krettenauer, T. (2017). Pro-Environmental Behavior

and Adolescent Moral Development. Journal of

Research on Adolescence, 27(3), 581–593.

https://doi.org/10.1111/jora.12300

11. Marcinkowski, T. (2001). Predictors of responsible

environmental behavior: A review of three dissertation

studies. Essential Readings in Environmental

Education, (1973), 247–276.

12. Mohammad, N. (2011). Environmental Law and Policy

Practices in Malaysia : An Empirical Study. Australian

Journal of Basic and Applied Sciences, 5(9), 1248–

1260.

13. Mulford, B. (2003). School Leaders: Challenging Roles

and Impact on Teacher and School Effectiveness.

Educational Management Administration &

Leadership, 66.

https://doi.org/10.1080/13603120500483672

14. Müller, M. M., Kals, E., & Pansa, R. (2009).

Adolescents’ Emotional Affinity toward Nature : A

Cross-Societal Study. The Journal of Developmental

Processes, 4(1), 59–69.

15. Mustafa, M. (2011). The Environmental Quality Act

1974: A significant legal instrument for implementing

environmental policy directives of Malaysia. IIUM

Law Journal, 19(1), 34. Retrieved from

http://journals.iium.edu.my/iiumlj/index.php/iiumlj/arti

cle/view/1

16. Ng, A. Y. M. (2016). School leadership preparation in

Malaysia: Aims, content and impact. Educational

Management Administration and Leadership, 45(6),

1002–1019.

https://doi.org/10.1177/1741143216662922

17. Nor, N. M., Bahari, N. A. S., Adnan, N. A., Kamal, S.

M. Q. A. S., & Ali, I. M. (2016). The Effects of

Environmental Disclosure on Financial Performance

in Malaysia. Procedia Economics and Finance, 35,

117–126. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2212-

5671(16)00016-2

18. Nunnally, J. C. (1978). Psychometric Theory (2nd ed.).

Psychometric Theory.

19. Oliveira, T., Thomas, M., & Espadanal, M. (2014).

Assessing the determinants of cloud computing

adoption: An analysis of the manufacturing and

services sectors. Information and Management, 51(5),

497–510. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.im.2014.03.006

20. Pothitou, M., Varga, L., Kolios, A. J., & Gu, S. (2017).

Linking energy behaviour, attitude and habits with

environmental predisposition and knowledge.

International Journal of Sustainable Energy, 36(4),

398–414.

https://doi.org/10.1080/14786451.2015.1032290

21. Robertson, J. L. (2018). The Nature, Measurement and

Nomological Network of Environmentally Specific

Transformational Leadership. Journal of Business

Ethics, 151(4), 961–975.

https://doi.org/10.1007/s10551-017-3569-4

22. Shafique, I., & Kalyar, M. (2018). Linking

Transformational Leadership, Absorptive Capacity,

and Corporate Entrepreneurship. Administrative

Sciences, 8(2), 9.

https://doi.org/10.3390/admsci8020009

23. Shaikh, P. H., Nor, N. B. M., Sahito, A. A.,

Nallagownden, P., Elamvazuthi, I., & Shaikh, M. S.

(2017). Building energy for sustainable development in

Malaysia: A review. Renewable and Sustainable

Energy Reviews, Vol. 75, pp. 1392–1403.

https://doi.org/10.1016/j.rser.2016.11.128

24. Ugwu, C. I. (2018). Mediation effect of knowledge

management on the relationship between

transformational leadership and job performance of

librarians in university libraries in Nigeria. (2014).

https://doi.org/10.1177/0961000618763715

25. Uthamaputhran, L., Ahmad, F., Jaganathan, M., &

Hee, H. C. (2016). Revisiting Influence of Marketing

Effectiveness and Environmental Awareness on Buying

Behaviour of Green Product: a Sem Approach. Journal

of Global Business and Social Entrepreneurship

(GBSE).

26. Van Gils, S., Van Quaquebeke, N., Borkowski, J., &

van Knippenberg, D. (2018). Respectful leadership:

Reducing performance challenges posed by leader role

incongruence and gender dissimilarity. Human

Relations, 21.

https://doi.org/10.1177/0018726718754992

27. Xiao, C., & Hong, D. (2010). Gender differences in

environmental behaviors in China. Population and

Environment, 32(1), 88–104.

https://doi.org/10.1007/s11111-010-0115-z

28. Yost, E., & Ellis, G. D. (2008). Effect of self

determination theory-based recreation activity-staging

on vitality and affinity toward nature among youth in a

residential treatment program. Residential Treatment

for Children and Youth, 23(1–2), 5–26.

https://doi.org/10.1300/J007v23n01-02

29. Zhu, K., & Kraemer, K. L. (2005). Post-adoption

variations in usage and value of e-business by

organizations: Cross-country evidence from the retail

industry. Information Systems Research, 16(1), 61–84.

https://doi.org/10.1287/isre.1050.0045





FROM THE HISTORY OF ACTIVITIES OF TRADE CENTERS SERVING FOR PEOPLE IN THE VILLAGES OF

FERGHANA VALLEY IN THE 60s AND 80s OF XX CENTURY

Tajimirzayev Elyorbek Akramovich Senior teacher at Uzbek History department of Andizhan State University,

Republic of Uzbekistan


ABSTRACT The article deals with the provision of trade services to villagers in the Ferghana Valley from 1960 to 1980. In particular, the

provision of trade services to the rural population with shops, markets, public catering establishments, shops and consumer

services was analyzed on the basis of archival materials and scientific literature.

KEY WORDS: Trade Services, District, Rural, Village, Collective Farm, State Farm, School, Kitchen, Shop, Buffet,

Food, Public Dining Center.

INTRODUCTION From ancient times trade and transit routes have

played an important role in the development of nations. In the regions of our country, the first stage of trade services, trade relations, dates back to the Bronze Age. Trade services play a huge role in meeting the daily needs of the population. During the years of independence Uzbekistan has been focusing on the provision of trade services to the population at the level of state policy.In particular, the third point of the Strategy of Action for the five priority areas of development of the Republic of Uzbekistan in 2017-2021 is the priority of economic development and liberalization, its subsection 3.1 includes issues such as, continuation of policies to reduce the tax burden and simplify the taxation system, continuation of policies to reduce the tax burden and simplify the taxation system, improve tax administration, and expand appropriate incentives; Further improvement of monetary policy using the tools used in the best international practice, as well as the gradual introduction of modern market mechanisms of currency regulation, ensuring the stability of the national currency; deepening and ensuring the stability of the banking system, increasing the level of capitalization and deposit base of banks, strengthening their financial stability and reliability, further expansion of lending to promising investment projects and small businesses and private entrepreneurship [1.]. These reforms contribute directly to improving the provision of trade services to meet the daily needs of the population.

Analyzing the general status of trade services to the population during the Soviet era is one of the important tasks. Therefore, in this article, we have tried to explain the status of trade services to villagers in the Ferghana Valley in the 1960s and 1980s based on archival documents. Between 1960s and 1980s, markets, shops and public catering facilities served the rural population. In 1960, there were 237 kitchens, 330 buffets and teahouses in 140 state farms in Uzbekistan. The working capital of public catering establishments in state farms in 1959 increased by more than 2 times in 1957. The number of workers and laborers in the kitchens continued to increase. Hot meals were organized at field-houses during busiest periods of field work. Coverage cooperatives have started the work of bakeries, shops and public service establishments in state farms besides public catering facilities

[2.Р.271].But the kitchen network in the state farms was not enough. Public catering establishments were organized mainly in rural centers. Kitchens were poorly equipped with refrigerators, dishes, process equipment and utensils. Also, most of the dishes made were not tasty, but the prices were high. In addition, there had been occasions when the Directorate of State farms deviated from the daily needs of the population. In particular, they did not provide vegetables to the public catering establishments, nor did they provide kitchen utilities. In addition, rent and electricity bills were very

high in establishing kitchens [2. Р.272].






In 1960s, 382 schools did not have buffets in Andijan. Medical facilities, children's institutions and boarding schools were also undernourished. In rural areas, there was no systematic commission sale of meat, vegetables and other agricultural products. Moreover, pricing was often even more expensive than in the market. During the period under review, no attention was paid to the provision of public services to the population of the "Southern Olamushuk" and "Polvontosh" oil mining villages. This was also reflected in the protests written to the government about the improvement of trade and public services to the

population of the villages [3. Р.109]. In Andijan region in 1964 it was planned to open 4 children's clothing stores, yet they were not opened. It was planned to open 29 self-service shops, and only 8 were opened. Semi-finished goods production shops, canteens, cafés and grocery shops were not opened. Book sales in Andijan region were in poor condition. In particular, during the first 8 months of 1961, the regional cooperative organizations did not pick up literature worth 205,000 rubles from the regional bookstore. District printing societies had sent back books sent by the regional book trade organization (Bozsuv, Kholdivonbek and other districts) for lack of textbooks for secondary school students. In the collective and state farms of the region, the provision of trade services to the population during the cotton

harvest was not satisfactory [4. Р.121]. There had been some positive developments in some areas of the valley during this period. For example, in the 1968-1970s in Akhunbabaev district of Fergana region, 40 stores and kitchens, as well as a number of bakeries were built, which increased the number of trade and catering organizations. The increase in trade working capital through the regional coverage system in 1969 amounted to 3480.7 thousand rubles [5.P.48]. In total, in 1968-1970s, the number of commercial and catering establishments in the Ahunbabaev district increased by 28 and totaled 356. For example, in the village of Achshak, which had a population of 5518 people, there were 10 shops, and there were 4 retailers and 8 catering places per 1000 population. In the rural district of Gulistan, with a population of 6,183, 9 stores provided commercial

services to the population [5. Р.55], with 3 retailers and 11 catering places per 1,000 people. In total, the Akununbabaev District Coverage Society had 5 retailers per 1,000 people and 16 places in the catering sector, which was higher than the regional average. In 1970, the working capital of the RCS was 3488.7

thousand rubles [5. Р.56]. However, some villages in Akhunboboev district of Ferghana region did not have commercial service facilities at all or did not provide adequate public services. For example, 7 out of 18 rural areas of Saddinisky rural district had a population of 4.5 thousand, but there were no stationary trading facilities.

It was 1.5-3 km to visit the shops in the villages nearest to these villages which required the inhabitants to walk

that far distance to meet their needs [5. Р.51]. This had a negative impact on the living standards of the population. There was also a shortage of first-time

consumer goods in stores in the valley areas [6. Р.217]. For example, in the 1969 and 1970, mugs and soft blankets were not brought to the shops of the village councils of Ahunboboev district. Some shops did not have glasses, knives, enameled and aluminum

kettles, handbags, and axes [5. Р.58]. Therefore, per capita product sales in 1970 increased by only 30 per cent compared to 1969 [5.B.57]. From 1971 to 1975, the volume of retail trade in the Ferghana region increased by 49.9%, in rural areas it was 54.4%. In other words, rural areas had a higher working capital

than the regional ones [6. Р.217]. In 1971, as a result of measures taken to boost cooperative sales by the Provinces of the Namangan Regional Coverage Society and the subordinate organizations of the local cooperative, the annual working capital amounted to 213468 thousand soums instead of 211949 soums, and the sale of industrial and food products exceeded by 1519 soums. The annual growth rate was 7.3% (14,500,000) [7.P.20]. However, the implementation of the annual plan was not homogeneous across the sub-coverage and cooperatives. In particular, the sales amounted to Chust district demand union - 350,900, Namangan demand union - 717,9 thousand, Uchkurgan district demand union - 267,7 thousand, Shakhand coverage society - 218,5 thousand sums whereas had sales under the planned figure for Uychi district coverage society - 607 thousand, Chust coverage society - 309 thousand, Yangikurgan coverage society - 425 thousand and Lenin labor cooperative - 60 thousand soums. As a result, the regional coverage society sold industrial and food products to the villagers for less than 1351 thousand soums. This was evidenced by the fact that according to the results of 1972, 838 out of 996 enterprises of the coverage society of Namangan region had fulfilled their annual plan, while 157 stores had not fulfilled the annual plan. In particular, 46 (64.8 per cent) businesses in the Uychi District Coverage Company and 15 in Zadarya District (22 per cent) [7.P.21] did not meet the annual plan. Despite the fact that Namangan regional party committee and the regional executive committee had repeatedly stated that the sale of some goods was unsatisfactory, and the failure of the regional coverage cooperative to address these shortcomings there could be seen as a disruption in the sale of goods listed in the minimum. In particular, in 1971, the sale of 15 types of goods declined in comparison with 1970. This can be seen from the low sales of cotton oil for 60,000 sums, canned meat for 166,000 sums and silk fabrics for 497,000 sums. The lack of daily consumer goods in shops had led to the decline in labor productivity of collective and





state farms. People had to travel dozens of kilometers to get the goods they needed. Many shops in the villages of the region were not provided with the essential goods. For example, during the check-up of the assortment of goods listed in the minimum at a convenience shop under the cabinet of Worker's Cooperation named after Lenin there was no dry tea, cotton oil, pasta, butter and cigarette, at the same time there were no children's suit and shirt made of natural fiber, toothbrush and pins at the "Ilgor" department store which was under the cabinet of Umurzokov coverage society. At the shop numbered 6 within the same coverage society there was no diverse semolina, pasta, food concentrates, dry tea, sugar, measurably sold biscuits, various jams, tomato pastas, vegetable tins, butter and matches [7.P.22-24]. In 1972, Namangan region carried out a number of works in accordance with the decision of the Council of Ministers of the UzSSR from February 22, 1972, of the Central Committee of the Communist Party of the USSR and the Council of Ministers of the USSR dated January 7, 1972 "On some measures to improve trade and its equipment". In particular, this year, 37 refrigerators were installed in trade, catering and manufacturing, with 633 units in the region. However, due to insufficient attention to the technical condition of the existing refrigerators by the heads of cooperative organizations, the technical department of the coverage and the repair department, about 50% of the refrigerators did not work this year [7.P.200]. The construction of a number of facilities in Namangan Region had not been completed for several years due to the irresponsibility of the construction companies and contractors. In particular, there was a general kitchen for 75 seats in Kossansay village, a shop for 6 workers in the collective farm "Leningrad", 2400 sq. M. 5,000 sq. m. of drying warehouse and 10 construction trust which were under construction, the construction of the Naryn and Turakurgan wholesale warehouses began in 1966, construction and yet it was not completed in 1972. In addition, 284,000 sums were allocated to the construction of the Naryn base that year, which amounted to 208.4 thousand sums (73.4%), and Turakurgan base worth 62.4 thousand sums (36.1%) from 173 thousand. [7.P.199 ]. In the Namangan region during the period 1971-1973 and within 9 months of 1974 17 grocery stores owning 1718 sq.m. of land [8.P.65], 5 pavilion shops, 1 vegetable market with 200 sq.m. of total area, potato storage with 7,000 tons of volume and 46 catering establishments were opened. Certain work on construction and improvement of collective farms was carried out in Namangan region. In particular, a fruit and vegetable trade pavilion for 140 seats was opened in Chust. In 1972 another pavilion was opened in Uchkurgan. Agricultural products at the collective farms in cities and regions had been growing year by year. 125,440 tons of vegetables and fruits were sold

instead of 103 690 tons planned for 1971-1973 and 9 months of 1974 [8.P.66]. During the first 9 months of 1973 in the Chortoq rural coverage society of the Yangikurgan district, 1 department store, 2 shops of industrial goods, 1 clothing store, 1 oil products store, 4 shops of cultural goods, 1 bookshop, 6 shops for household goods, 1 shop selling products designed for children, 2 groceries, 1 gastronomic shops, 1 bakery, 1 dairy product, 38 daily needs shops and in total there were a total of 62 shops running [9.P.275]. In 1973, there were 440 rural shops which were serving for the needs of customers in Namangan region [10.P.2]. Of these, during the spring field work in 1973, 150 rural shops without sales assistants, 94 truck-delivered shops, 120 mobile shops and 84 bus-shops operated in rural areas [10.P.3]. Also, during the study period, kitchens and canteens served for students and teachers in schools. For example, in the province of Namangan in the 1974-1975 school year, 445 rural schools had 235 buffets (1,450 seats) and 134 canteens (4,980 seats) [9.P.3]. As 49 schools were transferred to state farms and the administration of supply service for laborers, the state administrations provided food for the students. In 39 schools, there were few students and they were attached to nearby stores. In each area, the school's cafeterias had been attached to schools to provide school buffets and canteens. They also offered biscuits, coriander, croissants, and cookies. School canteens with dumplings and dim sum had been set up in Kosonsay, Turakurgan, Namangan, Naryn and Uychi districts. Although kitchens and canteens of rural schools in the Namangan region were provided with refrigerators, many of them did not work. In addition, most of the school's cafeterias were not adapted to it and did not meet sanitary regulations. Most of the buffets and canteens had no floor or ceiling coverage. For example, schools 14, 22 and 32 of Turakurgan district, schools 17, 21 and 22 of Uchkurgan district, schools 20 and 35 of Namangan district, cafeterias and canteens of schools No 15, 16 and 17 of Naryn district had no floors and ceiling coverage. [10.P.4]. In 1975, the department of catering in Chust district of Namangan region signed an agreement with 22 rural schools to provide buffets and canteens with food. From September 1 to November 1, schools in Chust District were supplied with 25 kgs of peanuts, 61 cans of juice, and 60,000 cakes made in school canteens in October. Experts had criticized school buffets for failing to make coffee and cocoa because of the lack of eggs and milk [9.P.7]. In 1975, there were 28 buffets and 15 canteens for 100 seats in 42 schools in the Pop District, 6 schools were attached to the Nayman and Pop state farms, and four schools to "Chodak" and "Kokand" departments of food supply for laborers. There were no refrigerators and other process equipment in the school buffets in the Pop District.





There were buffets and canteens in 39 out of 46 schools in Chust district, 23 out of 38 schools in Kosonsoy district and 34 out of 42 schools in Uychi district. However, most of these buffets and kitchens were not equipped with refrigerators and other appliances [9.P.24]. In the 1975-1976 school year, there were 27 rural schools in the Yangikurgan district of Namangan region, where 15,682 students were educated. There were 14 canteens (620 seats) and 25 buffets (740 seats) in 27 schools. That was, 8.3% of rural school students who were provided with buffets and canteens [9.P.46]. In 1976-1980 the per capita working capital of the urban population increased by 24.3%, while in the rural population it was 17.9%. In 1981-1985, trade capital was steadily declining. Commodity capital in cities was 15%, in rural areas - 9.6%. In 1985, rural per capita capital was 2.5 times lower than in urban areas [11.P.26]. In 1981-1985 new plants and workshops were launched in rural areas, including 3 canned goods, 10 sausages, 5 smoked fish, 10 confectionery products, 7 ice creams, 8 soft drinks factories and workshops [11. P.15]. In 1985, with the decline of alcohol sales, great attention was paid to the production of juice, kvass, and ice cream. Various service points had been set up for the sale of Lola type probes. Per capita index of development of rural catering establishments was more detailed. In 1975-1985, the per capita food capital in rural areas increased by 55% and in urban areas by 17% [11.P.15]. In 1985, the area of shops of the Soviet Socialist Republic of Uzbekistan was 54.1 thousand square meters which was an increase. Of these, 20.9 thous.was at the expense of reconstruction. In the beginning of 1986 the area of trade in rural areas was 1,400,000 sq. m. There were 16,154 stores. In the early 1980s, much attention was paid to the creation of specialty shops in rural areas. In 1985 there were 66 malls, 410 department stores and 4711 specialized shops selling industrial products in the villages. There were also 8009 daily consumer shops. In 1985, 14140 stores or 87% of all stores were self-service [11.P.13]. However, despite the expansion of trade and consumer services in the countryside, the population had often been forced to attend district centers and cities due to a shortage of essential goods. In a sociological survey conducted by sociologists in the villages of Andijan in 1987, 63 percent of respondents answered the question of, "Why do you want to go to the city?" and their responses were "to buy goods and to be in the consumer services business ". Less than half of the respondents were satisfied with the work of commercial and consumer services businesses, 32.1% were not satisfied with the variety of goods in shops. 43.3% said that they should set up television or radio equipment in a collective farm or state farm, 34.2% needed to repair refrigerators, and 30.0% to build and repair shoes.

Consequently, the rural population's demand for these types of services was not satisfactory [12.P.98-99]. In addition, the answers to the question "How do you rate rural trade?" the distribution among the population of Andijan region villages as follows: Good - 45.3%, bad - 15.3%, Business mode - 4.1% Not enough - -, Offshore stores - 3.2%, no necessary goods - 32.1% [12.P.99]. In the early 1980s, the production of national bread in the villages of Namangan region was 68.4%, an increase of 6.5% compared to 1979. Per capita consumption of bread and bakery products was 167 grams per day [10.P.14]. In the early 1980s, the loaf consisted of 25 kopecks, 13 kg of baton of 0.5 kg of first grade flour, 11 kg of 0.4 kg of freshly baked bread, 16 kopecks of the second grade [10. P.15]. The first type of 0.4 kg of patties was 18 kopecks [10.P.18] The first grade of 0.2 kg was 6 kopecks and 9 kopecks with a weight of 0.3 kg [10.P.19]. The bakery industry was significant parts of the total turnover of «Uzbekbirlashuv» and operated in 226 bakeries in 1985 and 2,791 tonnes of bread were made per day. The range of bakery products had also improved during these years. In 1985, 70 types of bakery products were produced, with the total national bread making up 48.1% [11.P.14]. During the period under review, trade services to the rural population were low. In many settlements there were no commercial enterprises or public catering establishments until 1985. More than 3,000 rural settlements (1,262,000 people) did not have trade enterprises. 8,375 rural settlements (5238 thousand people) did not have catering facilities. They was forced to attend a grocery store 10 km away or more in 152 villages with a population of 77,000 [11.P.14]. The development of public catering facilities in rural areas was also considered. In the system of coverage cooperatives in 1986 there were 10322 catering establishments with 443.8 thousand seats. In 1981-1985 the growth in this area was 81.1 thousand [10.P.14]. One of the most important indicators of rural life was an increase in the average per capita capital, which was 319 rubles in 1975, 405 rubles in 1980 and 447 rubles in 1985, and increased by 40.1 percent in 10 years. In cities, this figure increased by 35.7 percent. In conclusion, during this period, markets, shops, teahouses, buffets and canteens provided services to the rural population. In addition, hot meals were served in the field. During the agrarian activities, mobile shops were established and people were provided with trade services there. Buffets and canteens set up in kindergartens and schools served for children, but there were problems with the provision of adequate food and it was, in most cases, in poor quality. By the end of the period, trade services for the population had declined significantly.





REFERENCES 1. Strategy of Action for the Five Priorities of

Development of the Republic of Uzbekistan for

2017-2021, listed in Annex 1 to the Decree of the

President of the Republic of Uzbekistan dated

February 7, 2017 № 4947 //

http://strategy.regulation.gov.uz

2. National State Archives of the Republic of

Uzbekistan (CSA of the Republic of Uzbekistan), R-

90 stock, list 10, work 3043.

3. UzR CSA, stock R-837, list 39, case 552

4. UzR CSA, R-217 fund, list 10, 7 work

5. UzR CSA, R-2454 fund, list 6, case 2019

6. State Archives of Fergana region, fund R-1124, list

13, work 108

7. Namangan State Archives R-80 fund, list 3, 785

works

8. UzR CSA, fund R-837, list 41, case 3454

9. Namangan regional state archive R-80 fund, list 3,

work 818

10. Namangan regional state archive R-80 fund, list 3,

work 815

11. UzR CSA, fund R-837, list 41, case 7061

12. Egamov E., Mehmonov S. Rural Livelihoods:

Problems and Solutions. –T .: “Labor,” 1991

(Эгамов Э., Меҳмонов С. Қишлоқ аҳолисининг

турмуш шароити: муаммо ва ечимлар. –Т.:

“Меҳнат”, 1991)





SOVIET POLICY AGAINST RELIGIOUS INSTITUTIONS AND RELIGIOUS LEADERS IN THE 20-30s

OF THE 20th CENTURY

Soibjon Abdurazzakovich Khoshimov Associate Professor of Andizhan State University,

PhD in History,

Republic of Uzbekistan


ABSTRACT

The article analyzes Soviet policy in the 20-30s of the 20th century against religious institutions and religious scholars using

archival documents and scientific literature.

KEY WORDS: Soviet government, October overturning, religious establishment, religious scholars, literature, art, church,

madrassah.

INTRODUCTION

Following the October overturning in 1917 in Russia, a devastating blow to the spiritual life of Turkic peoples, who were colonized, was devastated. Soviet “cultural” policy was initially aimed at separating ethics, literature, and art from the national ground, imposing a “proletarian culture”, a communist ideology that was alien to national thinking.

This is understandable. The Soviet authorities knew that they would not be able to stay in this country for a long time without changing the mentality of our people. The policy against our great spirituality was pursued by the Bolsheviks secretly and transparently, not at once. The RSFSR ICC issued a letter on November 20, 1917 to “All Muslim Workers in Russia and the East”: “Your religion and customs .... From now on it is free and inviolable… ”[1, p.283] in the real world, the opposite was true.

The policy of atheistic extremism began in Turkestan according to the Decree of the People's Commissars’ Council dated January 2, 1918 “On separation of church from school”. In November 1918, a fatwa was issued in Turkestan on the basis of a decree on the separation of religion from the state and the school, to the closure of mosques and madrasas, and to the fight against Islam and its leaders.

A new step in policy toward religion and religion was the instruction of the RKP (b) of the Central Committee of the Republic of Kazakhstan on August 9, 1921, “to promote anti-religious propaganda”. According to the party's program, members of the party were banned from contacting religious institutions, urged them to engage in active atheistic propaganda, and called on the party not to allow members of religious institutions and their affiliates. Since 1923 the decision of the Turkestan

NSC began to expel party members of the party, who participated in religious ceremonies on the ground and had contacts with believers.

RESEARCH METHODS During the establishment of the Khorezm

republic in the Soviet style, there was a military barracks in the khan’s palace, where the barracks appeared. The madrassahs were closed, the foundation's property was confiscated, and an order was made to list boys and girls between the ages of 7 and 15. As a result of this policy, in June 1920 madrasah students and teachers were revolted in Khiva, and its organizers were arrested, while Judge Ibrahim Ahun and Rafi Ahun, Saidjon kori, Mullah Muhammadniyoz Bahodirhon and Muhammadamin Ahun were shot dead [2, p.9]. The overturning had a profound effect on the socio-political life of the society. This event clearly shows that clergy are a great force in society. The Soviet government had to change its religion policy.

In the Bukhara attack, the famous Minorai Kalon was hit by the balls and seriously injured. In the capital, a number of provinces and districts, mosques and madrasas have been demolished, and they have been converted into stables. In 1917-1920 workers, sailors, and “redheads” of the Red Army converted mosques and madrassas in Samarkand to torment the relatives of Uzbeks and Tajiks who fled abroad [3, p.71-75]. Hundreds of judges, imams, teachers and teachers were arrested in the Ferghana Valley for the ideological leadership of the “printing” movement between 1918 and 1920. The Red Mosque in Andijan has been converted into a barracks by Muslim troops. Red Army detachments attacked teachers and scholars who were praying in mosques and madrassas, throwing bombs at them and destroying them [4, p.80,193].






The destruction of religious institutions, especially mosques and madrassas, in the process of the establishment of the Soviet power has been a source of pride and pride for the people. In addition, the development of education and culture in the country was in line with religious institutions and organizations and foundations. That is why the Central Executive Committee of Turkestan ASSR adopted special decrees in this area from 1922 to 1923, and put the issue of repatriation of foundation property on mosques, schools and madrassas.

“On the return of foundations to madrassahs and mosques in the Republic of Turkestan” by the Turkestan ASSOC NIC on June 30, 1922 (No. 75) [5, p.55]; “On

Foundations” of September 28, 1922 (№173) [6,p.55]; In 1923, the decrees of the Waqf (No. 164) [5.49-50] allowed the teaching of madrassahs, and allowed the operation of waqf, mosque schools, lodgings, and waqf property - caravanserai, shops, and mills. The trustees are responsible for managing the property of the foundation and directing it to socially useful areas and to the development of culture and education. Waqf management is at the disposal of the Waqf General Directorate [7, p.51].

Between 1922 and 1923, the governments of the PRC and the PRC developed projects for authorizing religious institutions and organizations, restoring foundations, and making them the basis of economic and cultural development in the country. However, the decisions and decrees adopted in this area were formal and not implemented, but remained on paper. The cautious attitude of the Soviet authorities to religion was superficial, and it was simply to take a breath to begin a new struggle against it after a brutal battle. In the 20-30s of the 20th century, along with the policy of collectivization and agrarian agriculture, the religion and the believers were severely hit. Bolshevik political circles tried to instill in the public consciousness a special belief. This religion was the religion of the party, Marxism. Every effort was made to promote it. With the introduction of Marxism as the main ideology of society, the dissenting views were completely ignored. Anyone who rejects the idea of Marxism has been declared an enemy of the people, no matter who he is.

On April 30, 1926, the Party Council under the Central Committee of the Communist Party (b) adopted the thesis of anti-religious propaganda [8, p.269]. The tasks set by the Central Command will begin in excess. Burnashev, the Executive Secretary of the Central Committee of the CP (b), issued a “very secret” directive to the responsible secretaries of district committees on August 7, 1927, “without exceptions, to consider a number of issues related to religion against closed meetings”.

At the closed meeting of the Executive Committee of the Central Committee of the Communist Party of Uzbekistan (b) on July 21, 1927, the resolution 104 was adopted and the nature of the ongoing struggle against religion was determined. In particular, it states, “Strictly point out to county committees that they should

adhere to the decisions of the VI plenum of the Central Committee of the CP (b) of the CPC (b) in carrying out major activities in the fight against religion. Additional decisions of the Central Committee will continue to be used in the winter of 1927-1928 and will be the basis for all internal preparations until the fall of next year. At present, all efforts in the fight against religion must be actively promoted and explained, with the aim of influencing the masses and overcoming the middlemen [8, p.270-271].

The 6th plenum of the Central Committee of the CP (b) was the direction that laid the foundations of the ideological struggle for Islam and its attitude. The VIII plenum, which is a major step forward in the “development and refinement of decisions” of the Central Committee of the Central Committee of the CPC (b), states that “Islam is a major obstacle to the strengthening of the proletariat’s ideas and socialism towards the development of culture as other religions”. It is stated that “Eshony as the main idea of the patriarchal-feudal society is deeply rooted in the backward regions of Uzbekistan, especially in Kashkadarya, Surkhandarya and Khorezm” [9, p.443]. “Conservative clerics,” says the VI plenum’s decision under the “secret” section, have not lost their race until the Revolution, which is popular amongst traders and herdsmen. In Uzbekistan, anti-religion issues were not properly addressed by party members. Every member of the party, especially the activists, must realize that communism and religion are at odds with one another, and it is absolutely impossible to unite them. The motto: “Anyone who believes in religion cannot be a member of the party” [8, p.269]. OGPU authorities have tightly controlled the activities of religious institutions and believers and collected information about religious practices and the status of believers by placing their own people or recruiting agents.

On February 4, 1928, the political bureau of the Communist Party of Uzbekistan issued a decree "On strengthening religious propaganda." On February 27, instructions were issued on how to combat believers.

The Soviet authorities attempted economic and political repression against religious leaders and ministers and tried to destroy them both spiritually and economically. This increased the discontent of the clergy. In March 1925, religious leaders and ordinary people in the Asi-Shahan and Pop Volos of the Namangan District protested the Soviet authorities’ disobedience to the religion of Islam, the Shari'a principles, and the persecution of the believers. They demanded that he be allowed to live in sharia. A group of demonstrators was arrested by GPU staff [10, p.196]. In the fight against religion, Soviet authorities have also used the economic pressure to become one of the main methods that the Soviet authorities tested in their fight against religion. The basis for this is the decisions he made in the 1920s and 1930s to intensify economic repression against religious people.

One of the forms of economic repression against believers is their taxation. According to the procedure, the clergy were also subject to the following taxes:





agricultural tax, basic (classical) property tax, property tax, equalization fees, local fees, civil dues, per capita tax, military duty tax. , an increasing tax. In addition, in 1923-1924, the local Volost and County Tax Commissions issued two five-soms, one state-owned, and the other, with a winning lottery [11, p.196-197].

In addition to agricultural tax from religious institutions, individual tax on working animals and property is derived by cash per capita and by type of animal. The property tax was levied on believers by 14 rubles to 40 tiyin, plus an equalization tax. It was determined by local authorities and increased by 10 rubles depending on its social status. On January 5, 1930, by the decision of the Finance Committee of the USSR, all religious institutions and organizations were subject to increased taxation on buildings and land used by them [12, p.11].

Soviet and party organizations and religious institutions under the auspices of the OGPU were forced to pay heavy taxes by the government if they continued to operate. As a result, in the late 1930s only six mosques operated in Bukhara, which were also heavily taxed [12.130]. However, on the eve of the establishment of the Uzbek SSR, in 1924-1925, there were 231 madrasahs in Bukhara, 429 mosques with old schools, and 133 cemeteries. The amount of land owned by the foundations was 161,127, and the total income of the foundation was 882,889 rubles [13, p.13-14]. On the eve of 1925 in the PRC, there were 2306 mosques and 199 outlets, with only 123 hospitals in Khiva, 39 madrassas and 37 madrasahs in Urgench and Gurlan districts [13, p.15].

Along with economic repression against believers and clergy, political repression was also applied. One of the manifestations of political repression was the loss of these rights. During the period under review, discrimination was applied to most segments of the population. Taxes for “deprived people” were raised, access to collective farms was limited, and employment problems were high. Those who have been deprived of their rights, as well as their families and loved ones, have not escaped this policy.

Even during the 1925-1926 elections to city and rural Soviets, the list of “deprived persons” of the right to vote included clergy, imams, and thus, all clergy, irrespective of their religious position and economic status [14, p.19-21].

Moreover, according to the UNFCCC decision of August 1930, the employment of former clerics was also a problem. The priests would now have to change their place of residence even if they wanted to find a job. Even if they were employed, they would be arrested and charged with pests.

On December 5, 1936, the new USSR Constitution was adopted. According to Article 135 of the Constitution, all were eligible to vote. On the basis of this constitution, the Constitution of the Uzbek Soviet Socialist Republic was adopted in 1937, which also gave everyone equal rights and suffrage. However, a new era of repression soon followed in 1937-1938. Now, religious leaders, representatives of the clergy as "enemies of the

people" have been sentenced to 8-10 years in prison or shot.

According to paragraph 35 of the USSR ISS # 2 of January 2, 1928, all religious institutions and their buildings, religious institutions and their lands in the former Soviet Union are seized by the state [15, p.11] In turn, in Uzbekistan, the Soviets of the Soviet Socialist Republic of Uzbekistan on September 22, 1928, with the decision of the NSS and the IFC “Transfer of Waqf Property to Local Soviets”, completely transferred the foundations and their revenues to the state. [16, p.78] This was a devastating blow to the economic backbone of religious institutions and clergy. OGPU’s representative in Central Asia and Dyakovs, representative of the Oriental Office, informed Zelensky of VKP (b) Central Asia Bureau of December 1, 1928 about the “general condition of madrasas in the cities of Uzbekistan” [17, p.89-93].

According to this information, as of December 1, 1928, many madrassas in Uzbek cities were closed or stopped due to economic shortages. According to the information, according to the decision of the Executive Committee of the Old City in Tashkent, all existing madrasahs were closed in 1926. However, well-known teachers Shomahmud Ahun, Isakkhan Alam and Shamil Domlas taught about 30 students in their homes [17, p.93].

During the 1920s and 1930s, many schools in the Ferghana Valley, despite the harassment and persecution of the Soviet authorities, secretly and openly organized classes. Thus, as of December 1, 1928, there were 315 students in 6 madrassas, 13 madrassas in Margilan, 174 students, and 218 madrasahs studying in Andijan. In Namangan 3 madrassahs and 11 teachers organized classes at their home where 359 students were trained. Thus, as of December 1, 1928, only 40 madrasah classes were organized in Uzbekistan, and the rest were closed [18, p.88-89].

Reports of the OGPU’s autonomous representation in Central Asia show that according to a special decision of the political bureau of the Communist Party of Uzbekistan on April 17, 1929, “mosques and madrasas were closed and the campaign to convert clubs and red chambers into” [19, p.6-7]. Hundreds of mosques were closed in 1925-1929 as a result of the outdated tradition. Sacred shrines and shrines were destroyed, and timber, brick and other building materials were used for building warehouses, hospitals, red teasers and clubs. On March 15, 1929, the chairman of the Fergana district executive committee was asked by the chairman of the NSS of the Uzbek SSR Y.Okhunboboev to report on the reasons for the demolition of the cemetery in the village of Oranbozor in Bisoran rural Soviet district [20, p.799]. Dozens of mosques, such as the White Mosque in Khiva, Khorezm Province, Saidboy Kushbegi, Nurullaboy, Mamad Mahram, Dorot Shahboz Bobo, and the Tigers [21, p.14], will be closed during the mentioned years. In each of these mosques, between 500 and 600 to 1,000 people from different parts of Khorezm province prayed and performed one of the Muslim duties. The mosques given





to Uzkomstaris (the Committee for the Protection of Ancient Monuments of Uzbekistan) only slightly preserved their original condition. Dozens of other mosques and madrassas have been abandoned and are in ruins. An undercover report from one of the officials of the Karakalpak ASSR’s religious affairs office in Tashkent said that Abdujamolov Haji Eshon mosque in the republic was turned into a pickle warehouse for the Chimbay trade organization. Half of the mosque in Kaganovich kolkhoz, located in the Black Uzbek (Karauzyak) district, has been converted into a collective farm warehouse and the other half a kindergarten. The mosque in the district of Okhunboboev rural council of Kungrad district was a hospital.

There are seven temples in Chimbay, and they are all busy. These buildings include hospitals, cultural institutions, grain warehouses, student dormitories and kindergartens. Two prayer buildings in Kungrad district were destroyed. Three prayer houses were converted into grain storage warehouses and one was converted into prison. All 11 mosques in Khojeyli district are occupied by cultural and educational institutions, the Blind Society, the warehouses, the oil warehouse, the farmers' home, the library, the art house for the disabled, and the kindergarten. We have no information about the other districts. I believe that the state of the mosques and mosques in them is not better than the above [22.35-36].

On October 2, 1928, a representative of the Central Bureau of the Central Committee of the Central Committee of the Communist Party of Central Asia (OGPU) told the Ostroumov and Oriental Affairs Department that 182 mosques were closed in Bukhara region, including September 16, 1928) at the initiative of Myrtostim madrasah, on September 22, activists of Hazratimir Rural Council reported that three mosques in the countryside had been closed, Qatavon, Arab-Kar-Khoja and Kuljon had been evacuated, and the worshipers had been expelled. At the time of the prayer, the imam information about the turban thrown to the ground [23. p.9]. Closed, these madrasahs and mosques have been converted into club and red tea houses.

On November 17, 1932, the All-Union NSC and IFC issued a special decree to transfer religious offices to cultural-educational institutions and cultural centers [24 p.93]. This further aggravated the attack on religious institutions. The same policy has been widespread in Uzbekistan. According to the Central Asian Bureau of the OGPU Representative Office in Central Asia on November 14, 1934, during the period from November 1933 to October 1934, a total of 1,012 mosques in Uzbekistan were closed and converted into clubs and red-hot chambers. , reportedly cursing Soviet authorities [25, p.9–10].

In the thirties, gold jewelry and various objects of the 9th century tomb and mosque were erected in honor of Sultan Weiss's grandfather, friend of Prophet Muhammad Sallallahallahsall in Beruniy district of the Republic of Karakalpakstan. The medressa was demolished. According to the data of 1935, the office of the Commission for the Preservation of the Monuments of

Bukhara is located in the Devonbegi madrassah in Bukhara, the excursion base. The Kukeldash Madrasah and the Devonbegi Room are located in the Bukhara City Museum. The mosque was used as a grain storage warehouse, and cotton was stored in the Kadmadrasa building. In the same 1935 reports, Mir Arab Madrassah, Bahovuddin Naqshband Mausoleum and Mosque and others were condemned as religious centers [25, p.9-10].

Akkurgan mosque, located in the center of present-day Balikchi district of Andijan region, was built between 1800 and 1850. This mosque, whose living room was ten meters long, eight inches wide, and four meters high, formerly built of wood and clay for a hundred worshipers, was left unattended by 1920. During the collectivization (1930-1933), the “Akkurgan” mosque, along with many other mosques, was used for other purposes. The mosque is named after Kaganovich’s collective farm. Her balcony was blocked off and a collective farmhouse, a living room, and the upper floors turned into a school for elementary school children [26, p.30].

During the period under review, more than 24,000 mosques in Uzbekistan were closed, their buildings demolished [27,193] or used for other purposes. Hundreds of monuments, shrines, mosques and madrassas, sacred and sacred to Muslims, which are the historical and cultural heritage of the people, have been destroyed. In 1920, only 23 of the 26 madrassas in the capital Tashkent were destroyed [27, p.193].

Apart from the mosques, apartments, bathrooms, bathrooms, mills, and shops have been destroyed and many have been lost. Gardens and land belonging to religious and religious organizations have been abandoned, the soil has lost its fertility, and conscientious peasants have lived half-hungry and poor [28, p.3-4]. In February 1929 it was decided to liquidate the foundation's property and transfer them to the local Soviets. It was then noted that 10% of the proceeds from the foundation's assets were transferred to the Ministry of Education of the UzSSR and spent on the needs for the protection and repair of cultural and natural monuments [29, p.41]. On May 22, 1929, article 13 of the USSR Constitution was amended to allow for the promotion of religious and cultural values. Religious propaganda has gradually become regarded as anti-government policy.

In early 1929, L.M. Kaganovich signed a directive that places, including Uzbekistan, are an antagonistic force that religious organizations are the only ones acting legally and affecting the masses. To the local Bolshevik organizations, the document served as the only ground for treating religion and believers. Since the Bolsheviks have strengthened their positions in power, opposition newspapers, national religious and political organizations have been shut down everywhere, the assets of religious institutions have been confiscated, and clergy and prominent Muslim leaders have been innocent [29, p.237]

Religious literature has been declared reactionary. Rare manuscripts in the old Uzbek spelling based on the Arabic spelling have been destroyed as an





outlier. The advice of the leading clergy and their suggestions for peaceful education reform were rejected. Because the authorities feared them and regarded it as a cunning policy of clergy trying to adapt to the new conditions [30, p.285]. There was an opinion among the party and state officials that Islam was a leader of the indigenous peoples of Central Asia against colonial oppression and Russification [31, p.76]. In its turn, the Alliance of Struggle Gods played a major role in strengthening the general suspicion. Although her career has been successful in marrying young women, abducting women, and abusing women, it has played a major role in the brutal struggle against clergy and clergy. A number of churches, mosques and religious schools were closed down in 1931 in Ferghana, Bekabad, and Tashkent, according to the organization [32, p.394]. Residents of the October district of Tashkent demand the return of mosques converted to Komsomol clubs. But these protests were seen as anti-regime propaganda. There are 90,000 members in Uzbekistan, including 60,000 youth [32, p.394]. Fighting Godless” has widely promoted atheism in women’s clubs, red tea houses and peasant houses, clubs and libraries. Magazines “Without Gods”, "Gods of Uzbekistan" and “Without God” were established. Through articles and newspapers in these newspapers and magazines, propaganda was made against religion and the clergy. For example, articles in the newspaper “Without God” (“Without God”) titled “Temples on the Front” and “Shattering Religion” (B. Zahd’s article) condemning religion as an outrageous act and saying that praying in the mosque is superstitious. Religious higher education institutions were established in the field. The anti-religion higher education curriculum includes: 1) natural science (9 sessions - 27 hours); 2) History of religion (11 sessions - 33 hours); 3) The functions of socialist construction and anti-religion advocacy (13 sessions-39 hours) [34.55]. The Institute of Extracurricular Religious Fighting operates under the Ministry of Education of the Uzbek SSR [35, p.15]. There was also a 10-day special seminar for anti-religious activists. During the seminars, the promoters were armed with tasks and instructions from the Center, with colorful posters and posters promoting their atheism.

The classical teahouses will also be converted into a battlefield to challenge the beliefs and values of the Uzbek people. In January 1925, 25 “red teahouses” were opened on the territory of the republic, and they were supplied with the necessary literature, newspapers and magazines [36,130]. Each Red Tea has its own “Lenin Corners,” which features posters describing Lenin’s works, portraits, photographs, and life stories. The slogans like “Komsomol in the struggle against religion” and “The fight against religion is a struggle for socialism” were put up against religious values [37]. By 1926, there were 177 red tea houses in Uzbekistan [38, p.49]. The Soviet state also carried out various activities to attract the population to the red tea houses. In particular, during the drought in the southern regions of Uzbekistan from 1925 to 1926, the sale of low-cost foodstuffs was organized in the red tea houses.

The resolutions of the Third Congress of the Communist Party of Uzbekistan (b) held in November 1927 states that “schools, red corners, red teahouses, clubs, peasants’ homes, agronomic centers and ungodly cells should become centers of religious propaganda”. In addition, activists have been shown to fight widespread religious practices such as circumcision, religious funerals, visiting graves, teaching marriage, and so on [39, p.251]

Since 1929, ungodly cells have been established in the red teahouses operating in Uzbekistan [40.7]. There are 3,300 subordinate organizations of the Ungodly, with 12,000 members [41]. From 1930 to 1935 362 cultural clubs, 2560 red tea houses, 5 women's clubs and 12 cultural parks served as foci of religious propaganda [42, p.5]. There is constant control over the activities of the red tea houses and their propaganda against religion. An article published in the 1931 “Godless” (“Without God”) newspaper, entitled “Fighting Religion in the Red Tea,” criticized the lack of red-hot newspapers and magazines in many cities and villages of the Ferghana region [43].

In 1931 alone in the city of Kokand there were more than 20 red teahouses, each of which was organized by the newspaper newspapers, red corners, and propagandized anti-religious propaganda [43]. An article published on January 22, 1931 in the newspaper “Without God” published under the title “Union of the Mulls with the rich”, "The class enemy is rich and the mullahs use their religion and superstitions to attack the Soviets, and to attack local party officials” [44].

Hundreds of people, who have a thoroughly Islamic faith and spirituality, have been arrested, oppressed or expelled from the country because of their brutal treatment of religion. The Soviet authorities did not stop persecuting the clergy during the penalties. 33-year-old Mullo Murod Nurmuhammedov, who served as chairman of the 3rd District People's Court in the Guzar district of Kashkadarya region, will be punished both for himself and the mullah for marrying on religious grounds. This issue was considered at a meeting of the supervisory commission of the district committee of committees on May 7, 1927, and is reflected in the decision 7. Kari Fayzi Nurillaev was sentenced on March 17, 1927, as a “foreigner” to the priest's son by the decision of the Panel’s Board. The same applies to Abdurahmon Pulatov and 38-year-old Hol Shakirov. Hol Shokirov, 29, the head of the Shahrisabz jail, is being held as a “foreigner” for his role as judge of the Shari'a and concealing it from entering the sect [8, p.272]

Abdukhalil Yunusov, 40, who was a supervisor at the Kitab district's education department, was expelled from the group for being a pilgrim at that time and for supporting old-fashioned school. Hussein Nasrullaev was criticized and imprisoned in “Red Uzbekistan” newspaper for his wedding, observance of religious rituals and pilaf. Mullo Rasulov is a former imam in the sect and Soviet affairs, and Mullo Ermat Shormatov is exposed and punished for assisting publishers [8, p.272]. According to the OGPU Representative Office in Central Asia, November 30, 1927, imam of the mosque





Akhmedov Saidkomil from the village of Tashrobot in Kerman district of Bukhara region. born imam Idrisov Bahroms were regularly involved in clerical rebellion, campaigned against Soviet-era policies, and encouraged the "invaders" absence and sentenced to 5 years in exile [45, p.123].

Minutes №103 of the October 27, 1930 meeting of the “trio” of the OGPU in Central Asia in accordance with the decision of the CPSU of 9 June 1927 (Chairman of the Meeting - Autonomous Representative of the OGPU in Central Asia, Deputy Director of the OGPU Central Asia Berman, head of the military district of OGPU Babkevich, assistant of the State prosecutor of the Uzbek SSR Sarichev, secretary Kovach) son of Hojakhon Kanoatov and Sultonov Gafur, 37, imam of the mosque who worked in the anti-Soviet propaganda, Communist Party of land and water in opposition to the path of reform, "but lacked" ideological convicted on charges of killings inspired [46, p.7-17]. Troika with this statement is Mulla Isroil Sodiqboev, Hodikhon Mulla Karimboev, Mulla Turdi Ashurmatov, Mullausmon kori Dadabaev, Mulla Abdukadir Muhammadkarimov, Abdullaqori Kattashaykhov, Yuldashev Mullatojiboy, Fayziboy Usmanov, Israilhodjaev, Khudoynazar Umurzakov, Madibrohim Barotboev, Mulla Abdulhayqori Dadabaev, Nuriddingori Asadullaev, Mullaaskar Nazarmatov, Mullamamajon Karaboev, Sayfiddingori Abdujalilov, Inomjonqori Muhammad Adaminov, Ilmiyami Yusupboev, Akromhontura Mullakhodjaev, Abdukholik Abdugafforov, Esonboy Urazboev, Mullamumin Rustamov, Omongeldiev Eshniyoz were sentenced to concentration camps for one to 10 years [46, p.7-17]. Their guilt was persecuted in the past by the imam or religious scholars, and some were the son of a religious leader [46, p.18-33].

According to the same Protocol No. 114 of December 17, 1930, Bayzakov Sanakul, Goyberdiev Mullausmon, Mullarozikhon Aliev, Omonullaev Abdulla, Hodzhamkulov Hodzhimurot, Mukhimkhon are alien, imam, religious scholars, ideological leaders sentenced to between 3 and 10 years in prison on charges of conspiracy to overthrow the Soviet system [46, p.18-33] On October 24, 1931, the “trio” of the OGPU in Central Asia ruled that Zulfikar Boykulov was a religious pastor and imam, and from spring 1931 Husainbek helped Mubarak leaders, ideologically encouraged the “invaders”, and fought against the Soviet authorities. [46, p.69-70]. On the same day, the “trio” sentenced 37-year-old Dosat Tashpulatov to support the former imam Zulfiqar’s leader and sentenced him to five years in prison for allegedly encouraging Rustam Kasymov, 47, son of the imam and leader of the mosque himself.

On May 19, 1932, Ochilov Pulat, who was a religious leader and father of a religious theologian, opposed the Soviet system and campaigned against kolkhoz, according to the verdict of the “trio” of the autonomous representation of the OGPU in Central Asia on May 19, 1932, Muzaffarov Nurillamulla, son of the imam, who served as a mosque in the mosque until 1926, fought against the Soviet authorities' collective farm

policy for five years for allegedly propagandizing religious leaders and collective farms [46, p.89-120] is presented. It is worth noting that first of all the persecuted and persecuted religious scholars and believers were forced to go abroad to save their lives and the lives of their families. From 1917 to 1934, over 900,000 people left Central Asia. According to official data, by the end of the 20th century, there were about 3 million Uzbeks living abroad, of which 2 million were Uzbeks [47,328]. One of such migrants, Muhammadjon Khushmakov, was born in 1914 in the village of Naymancha in Turakurgan district of Namangan region. While studying at the madrassa at the age of 14-15 in 1928-1929, the madrassa was closed and its students were persecuted [48, p.123].

Political and physical persecution of religion, clergy, and clergy has undermined the spiritual culture of the people. With the introduction of administrative and social order in the social life, the scientific view of religion began to decline. The worldview of religion and atheism has been replaced by political confrontation. The fanatic view that socialism has no place in religion and religion is alien to it, has prevailed. Thus, the negative attitude towards religion has become an act of violence against religion.

Conclusion. However, the violent crackdown on atheism during these years and the violence against Islam did not lead to the end of religion. Even though the believers were deprived of the mosque and their rights, they continued to worship in secret. The closure of mosques, madrasahs, and the repression of the clergy have caused great damage to the promotion of universal moral values and national morality among the population. The younger generation has lost a great spiritual heritage left by Islam. This certainly had a negative impact on the socio-spiritual life of Uzbekistan at that time.

Thus, during the period under review religious leaders and religious leaders were deprived of various civil rights. Mosques and madrasahs were shut down, their foundations were closed, and religious believers were persecuted. Between 1936 and 1938, religious scholars and clergy were repressed on the grounds that they had helped the “invaders”, their ideological leaders, such as “the enemy of the people” and “the class stranger”.

REFERENCES 1. Ikromov A. On the clergy and school // Selected works

in 3 volumes. - Tashkent, 1972.

2. National Archive of Uzbekistan (NAUz), Fund 71, list

1, work 128.

3. Kosimov B. Ignorance // Youth. - Tashkent, 1990.

4. The sorrow of Atabaev without pain. // Uzbegim, 1992.

Rajabov Q. The black army of the victorious army. //

Oriental Star. - Tashkent, 1998. - №6.

5. NAUz, Fund 25, list No.11414.

6. NAUz, Fund 94, list 1, case 332.

7. NAUz, Fund 25, list No.11414.

8. Ravshanov P. The Red Kingdom is on the brink.

Attack. (History in the Documents). Three volumes.

Volume I - Tashkent: East, 2011.History of Uzbek





SSR. - Tashkent: Science, 1974. РИСТДА, 62-фонд,

2-рўйхат, 310-иш.

9. Proceedings of the Central Committee of the CPSU.

1990. –№4.

10. CSA RF, fund 5263, list 2, case 3.

11. NAUz, fund R-837, list 32, case 1269.

12. NAUz, Fund R-94, list 1, case 332.

13. CSARF, Fund- 5263, list 2, case 3.

14. NAUz, fund 837, list 1, case 141.

15. RISTDA, Fund 62, list 2, 1775.

16. Shamsutdinov R. Muslim madrassas are viewed by

Soviet law enforcement agencies.// Wadinoma, Issue

1, 2016

17. RISTDA, stock 62, list 2, 1775.

18. RISTDA, stock 62, list 2, case 1355.

19. NAUz, Fund R-66, list 1, case No. 5372.

20. NAUz, fund R-2456, list 1, work 10.


22. RISTDA, fund 62, list 2, case 1355.

23. RF DA, fund 5263, list 2, case 1.


25. Abdusamedov A.E. History of religions. - Tashkent,

2004.

26. NAUz, R-94 fund, list 1, case 573.

27. NAUz, fund R-95, list 5, case 435.

28. Ikromov A. On the clergy and school // Selected works

in 3 volumes. - Tashkent, 1972.V.1.

29. Hansuvarov I. Musdukhovenstvo // “Communist

Thought”, Book 5.- Tashkent, 1927.The modern

history of Uzbekistan. The second book. Uzbekistan

during the Soviet colonial era. Scientific editor

Jurayev. - Tashkent: East, 2000.

30. Without God, 1931, February 13.




34. Without God, February 25, 1931.

35. Ruzmatov A. Ideological and political upbringing in club

facilities - Tashkent, 1982.

36. Resolutions and decisions of the CC Congress of

Uzbekistan. - Tashkent, 1958.


38. Pravda Vostoka, January 25, 1940.

41. NAUz, Fund R-94, list 5, case 1456.Without God,

February 25, 1931.

42. Without God, January 22, 1931.

43. RISTDA, stock 62, list 2, case 398.

44. Central Asian village during the Great Terror.

(Compiled by Shamsutdinov R.T., Yusupov E.Yu.,

Khoshimov S., Dustmatov E.P.). - Andizhan, 2007.

45. Shamsutdinov R. Rural tragedy: consolidation, listening,

exile (on the example of Central Asian republics).

Tashkent: Shark, 2003.

46. Hayitov Sh. History of Uzbek Immigration (1917-1991) -

Tashkent: ABU PRESS CONSULTATION, 2008.




ANALYZING A CATTLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM USING IOT AND ITS CHALLENGES IN

SMART AGRICULTURE

Bharat Singh Thakur

Research Scholar,

SSUTMS, Sehore,

M.P.

ABSTRACT The cattle farming is an important component of the world economy. Added benefits will be realized because of this

category of technology, like the capability to determine the presence of disease thereby and early prevent the spread of its.

Nowadays, lots of advance technical strategies in actual operations are produced by engineers as well as researchers.

Among the advance specialized development streams is farm automation. Cattle Farming is an area which demands

understanding and interest as the demands of each livestock vary based on the breed of it’s as well as geographical

location. The main problem in the milk business includes absence of information accessibility amongst farmers, financial

problems as well as lack of understanding regarding the health as well as wellbeing of the cattle. Cattle wellness

monitoring system is latest research subject in farm automation. The IOT based environment and cattle health

monitoring technique monitors different livestock health parameters including body temperature, heartbeat, place of

creatures as well as green variables like heat, humidity. The implementation of IoT would further develop the market as

the info is going to be distributed with the whole public.

KEYWORDS: Cattle health, Smart Agriculture, IoT, Monitoring System.

1. INTRODUCTION Cattle farming play a crucial role in the present era and are just about the most attractive sectors because milk as well as dairy products have an enormous demand throughout the globe. The quickly growing dairy industry demands the implementation of more info on an everyday basis. It's vital for the growers to have access to info about different breeds of cattle as well as the habits of theirs. Several of the problems experienced as of today are not enough information regarding the feeding practices of various breeds of livestock, insufficient understanding regarding the sicknesses as well as absence of preventive healthcare procedures [1].

During last 2 decades an essential requirement of farm automation being researched for wellness monitoring system. In this paper researcher has focused on monitoring the wellness of cattle by making use of noninvasive, affordable sensors technological innovation which detect abrupt change in body parameter as temperature, blood pressure etc. The parameter that's considered by sensors are entry by utilizing wireless engineering collect information use for early detection of disease this particular things will develops by utilizing IOT.

The primary goal of introducing brand new solutions for this area is obtaining better output and

income in a quick span of time, making the farming a lot more easier with the newest technology can help farmers lessen the hard work as well as male power they've to commit and may also draw in far more individuals to invest into this particular company. In case cattle isn't cared for and treated very well then, the odds that the yield of the cows is impacted is significantly improved. The farm must be handled effectively. The farm needs to be cleaned on a regular basis and also the cattle need to be given on time. This can instead lead to the greater health and also the cattle giving far more yields [2]

2. LITERATURE REVIEW Swathi Ramnath Et el. (2017) explained the IoT based monitoring as well as localization for special packages. The experts proved that IoT based methods are additional bendy compared to some other localization methods as well as the structures of theirs are undoubtedly more correct on monitoring and localization. The paper pointed out that big unfold deployment of IoT is an organic choice for localization as well as monitoring plans and the status of its is on the rise. Nevertheless, safety associated elements are nevertheless a count of situation for all those packages [3].




Anitha Ilapakurti & Chandrasekar Vuppalapati (2015) described a novel method to cope with taking care of the important needs of Dairy undertaking. We unequivocally acknowledge as legitimate with which the associated Dairy will deliver colossal operational efficiencies, price budgetary money, and also substantial bits of expertise to tackle Dairy cultivate creature's relevant important problems. Associated milk, drastically, is a record empowered smart unit which encourages much better command of Dairy workouts. Sometime, connected milk provides anticipating bits of information that provides window of your time opportunity to milk functional command while in transit to much better plan to handle any unexpected weather connected variants from the majority, Dairy cow's health & crises [4].

S. Jegadeesan and Dr. G. K. D. Prasanna Venkatesan (2016) has illustrated concerning Wireless Sensor Network technology to the developments. Farmers may support creation with this homestead course of action and make a database with information accumulated from the farm and environmental variables' based devices [5].

Anselemi B.Lukonge, Ramadhani S and Dr.Shubi Kaijage. Sinde (2014) given ideas about some other cattle observing techniques and furthermore the advantages of utilizing remote sensor systems for checking steers center body temperature notwithstanding place for the homesteads together with their disadvantages and advantages [6].

3. METHODOLOGY The Figure 1 gives a fundamental idea about the proposed method. The Health monitors the temperature sensor, humidity sensor and heart rate monitor. The temperature sensor is liable for checking the heat of the cows so that virtually any type of abnormal temperature readings or anomalies is quickly reported. The Pulse rate monitor is liable for checking the pulse price of the animal so that virtually any situation of increased pulse rate or maybe irregularities could be administered. Precisely the same information may possibly be applied to anticipate the feelings on the pet to an extent there by supporting the farm owners to quickly communicate with the creatures. The pulse rate could be monitored on a routine basis to assess whether the animal is good as well as allows the owners to take measures that are essential to make certain the great health of the livestock.

The data has been collected by all of the sensors over a periodic basis based on the demand of the users. This data delivered to a central processing unit (CPU) that is going to process the information to provide significant info therefore in is examined by the pros. The data is saved in the website that can be seen by the authorized personnel. This data is secure since it's entirely backed up in the website. This data is published into the cloud therefore it may able to be publicized and the farmers or other people can use this info whereby they could improve their yield and efficiency by utilizing the information which has already been established to deliver results that are good.

Figure 1: Architecture of Proposed System

Data gaining unit comprise of different sorts of biomedical sensors as body temperature sensor, pulse sensor, dampness sensor, heartbeat rate recognition sensor that is interfacing with microcontroller. The data gaining units acquire data and furthermore helps make it open for any data overseeing just as data

cooperate unit (cloud, server and furthermore site page).

The sensors are used for fundamental and general programmed estimation of numerous therapeutic variables. Such kind of health sensors is introduced on the dairy cattle body that always sees the body issues of the bovines as temperature, heartbeat rate




and so forth and furthermore take paper inside the sort of electric signal. These signals are then set close by a standard point of confinement of typical qualities built up as the beginning spot in data managing unit.

If the managing unit are seen irregular changes or huge changes in certain steers they can reach to closer creature care doctor and if a few causes specialist

won't offered in closer emergency clinic after that utilizing IOT overseeing unit controlling individual can convey the diagram to the specialist. So by watching this specific diagrams doctor can tell about the creature health data and furthermore appropriate treatment that to be actualizes on steers without doctor during crisis.

Figure 2: Flowchart

4. EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS Subsequent to interfacing the majority of the receptors on the steers' body it will give the body temperature and furthermore heart beat chart. Utilizing this specific chart we can see the health of

the dairy animals and identify disease from what the cows' are having. The diagrams are explored below:




Figure 3: Body Temperature Of Cattle

Figure 4: Heart Beat Of Cattle The GSM is utilized to notify the farmer with SMS when there's any irregular change in the wellness of the livestock.

5. CHALLENGES Low quality sensors: If the caliber of the

receptors utilized isn't satisfactory, the data gathered with it won't be dependable.

Applicable only for vast scale dairy farming: The proposed strategy is fitting just for substantial scale steers cultivating as doing this specific framework for little scale cows cultivating will prompt the sustenance wastage of assets

Initial cost is truly high: The establishment cost of the strategy is amazingly expansive as it gives a lot of sensors

Unexpected accidents: Though data investigation helps in predicting issues, surprising mishaps can't be anticipated

Partial Automation: Though the devices could be computerized which will bring down labor, total mechanization can't make sure as despite everything it requires hand help and control.

6. CONCLUSION This paper reviews natural checking and

health of domesticated animals and furthermore so as to screen spot of the cows. We propose that IOT based Cattle health and condition observing item should be set on ranches to gather environmental parameters that will consequently encourage ranchers in checking the creatures from outside the homestead. The proposed procedure actualizes driving edge innovation into this specific market in this way even novices can work pleasantly. The gadget will adequately actualize sensors to screen the and day by day errands of the cows to assemble data on standard premise. This data is cautiously broke down making utilization of the program and afterward required




measures are taken to deal with the dairy cattle. With the help of the proposed technique it's doable for the cultivators to foresee the conduct of creatures in a couple of conditions and perceive sicknesses the dairy cattle could get in the primary stages itself accordingly the turmoil might be distinguished just as keep the spread of its to different animals in the ranch. The program appropriately actualizes most current innovation for draining the milking the cows.

REFERENCES 1. Ms. Amruta Helwatkar, Daniel riordan (2014)

“Sensor Technology for Animal Health

Monitoring” in the 8th international conference

on sensing technology held at Liverpool, UK.

2. Ms Meenakshi.M, Snehal S Kharde (2016)

“Advance Cattle health monitoring system using

Arduino and IOT” in the international journal of

Advanced Research in Electrical, Electronics and

instrumentation Engineering ISSN: 2278-8875.

3. Swathi Ramnath, Abhishek Javali, Bhumika

Narang, Pallavi Mishra, and Sudhir K Routray,

―IoT Based Localization and Tracking‖,

International Conference on IoT and Application

(ICIOT), 2017, Page(s):1-4

4. Anitha Ilapakurti & Chandrasekar Vuppalapati,.

"Building an IoT Framework for Connected

Dairy", In 2015 IEEE First International

Conference on Big Data Computing Service and

Applications (Big Data. Service), 2015,

Page(s):275-285

5. S. Jegadeesan, Dr. G. K. D. Prasanna

Venkatesan, “Smart Cow Health Monitoring,

Farm Environmental Monitoring And Control

System Using Wireless Sensor Networks”,

International Journal of Advanced Engineering

Technology, Tamilnadu, Vol. VII/Issue I/Jan.-

March.,2016.

6. Anselemi B.Lukonge, Dr.Shubi Kaijage ,

Ramadhani S. Sinde, “Review of cattle

monitoring system using wireless network”,

International Journal Of Engineering and

Computer Science ISSN: 2319-7242 Volume 3

Issue 5, May 2014.


ISSN (Online): 2455-3662 EPRA International Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (IJMR) - Peer Reviewed Journal

Volume: 6 | Issue: 2 | February 2020 || Journal DOI: 10.36713/epra2013 || SJIF Impact Factor: 5.614||ISI Value: 1.188


PROBLEMS IN URBAN SOCIETY

Anil Kosamkar Associate Professor

Dept. of Sociology

Dr.L.D.Balkhande Arts and Commerce College Pawani

ABSTRACT

Urbanisation is process in which people move from rural to urban area, leading to growth of city. It is increase in the number

of people living in big cities and towns. By large mass transfer of people to cities. It has lead cities to achieve better social,

physiological, economical status and helps them to become more productive. Urbanisation is common for both developing and

developed countries as more people have tendency to move to developed areas to get social and economic benefits. Rural

people don't have quality education, health care, good opportunities, due to which they come to urban cities to improve their

lifestyle. Majority of people move to cities and towns because they view rural society as place of hardship having backward

lifestyle. Large no of population moves more and more towards developed areas. It’s immediate outcome is urbanisation. It

eads to development of land for social and commercial purposed, support institutes , transportation and buildings but thry

also lead to several urbanisation issues.

INTRODUCTION 1) Urbanisation is process in which people move

from rural to urban area, leading to growth of city. It is increase in the number of people living in big cities and towns.

2) By large mass transfer of people to cities . It has lead cities to achieve better social, physiological, economical status and helps them to become more productive.

3) Urbanisation is common for both developing and developed countries as more people have tendency to move to developed areas to get social and economic benefits.

4) Rural people don't have quality education, health care, good opportunities, due to which they come to urban cities to improve their lifestyle. Majority of people move to cities and towns because they view rural society as place of hardship having backward lifestyle.

5) Large no of population moves more and more towards developed areas. It’s immediate outcome is urbanisation. It leads to development of land for social and commercial purposed, support institutes , transportation and buildings but they also lead to several urbanisation issues.

PHYSICAL ASPECTS 1) Industrialization results in increase in urban

population, it has lead to creation of further pressure on urban land. Due to which, there's a dearth of space, consequently congestion and overcrowding . Municipal authorities now finding it difficult to provide the basic facilities to the migrated and existing population of the city.

2) Basic amenities include food ,water, shelter and protection from infectious diseases.Other major consequence of an increase in population is the imbalance created between demand and supply of goods and commodities. The prices rise exorbitantly due to inflation and lack of adequate supply.

SOCIAL ASPECTS 1) Increasing number of inhabitants in a large

settlement affect the relationship between them and character of the city. The greater the number of individuals participating in a process of interaction, the greater is the potential of differentiation between them whereby the personal trails, the occupations, the cultural life and the ideas, and beliefs and values get widely separated.





2) These variations give rise to the spatial segregation of individuals. The bonds of kind ship, neighbourliness and sentiments of living together for generations are absent among these people due to such diverse origin and backgrounds.

PROBLEMS IN URBAN SOCIETY 1.) Housing problems Urbanization attracts people to cities and towns which lead to high population increase. With the increase in the number of people living in urban centers, there is continued scarcity of houses. This is due to insufficient expansion space for housing and public utilities, poverty which can only be afforded by few individuals.

2) Overcrowding Overcrowding means huge number of people living in a small space. This congestion in urban areas is consistent because of overpopulation and it is an aspect that increases day by day as more and more people move into cities and towns in search of better life. Most people from rural or undeveloped areas always have the urge of migrating into the city that normally leads to congestion of people within a small area.

3) Unemployment The problem of joblessness is highest in urban areas and it is even higher among the educated people,it is mainly due to overpopulation. It is estimated that more than half of unemployed youths around the globe live in metropolitan cities. . The increasing relocation of people from rural or developing areas to urban areas is the leading cause of urban unemployment.

4) Slums Development The cost of living in urban areas is very high. When this is combined with random and unexpected growth as well as unemployment, there is the spread of unlawful resident settlements represented by slums and squatters. The growth of slums and squatters in urban areas is even further exaggerated by fast-paced industrialization, lack of developed land for housing to the cities in search of better life, and the elevated prices of land beyond the reach of the urban poor.

5) Water and sanitation problems Because of overpopulation and rapid population increase in most urban centers, it is common to find there are inadequate sewage facilities. Municipalities and local governments are faced with serious resource crisis in the management of sewage facilities. As a result, sanitation becomes poor and sewages flow chaotically, and they are drained into neighbouring streams, rivers, lakes, or seas. Eventually, communicable diseases such as typhoid, dysentery, plague, and diarrhea spread very fast leading to

suffering and even deaths. Overcrowding also highly contributes to water scarcity as supply falls short of demand.

6) Transport In the industrialised countries increasing volumes of private car, public transport and commercial vehicle traffic have exposed the inadequacies of urban roads, especially in older city centres where street patterns have survived largely unaltered from the nineteenth century and earlier. With traffic bottleneck and traffic congestion, almost all cities and towns of India are suffering from acute form of transport problem. Transport problems increase and becomes more complex as the town grows in size. With its growth, the town performs varied and complex functions and more people travel to work or shop.

7) Spread of diseases The social, economic and living conditions in congested urban areas affects access and utilization of public health care services. Slum areas in particular experience poor sanitation and insufficient water supply which generally make slum populations susceptible to communicable diseases. The environmental problems such as urban pollution also cause many health problems namely allergies, asthma, infertility, food poisoning, cancer and even premature deaths.

8) Traffic congestion When more people move to towns and cities, one of the major challenges posed is in the transport system. More people means increased number of vehicles which leads to traffic congestion and vehicular pollution. Many people in urban areas drive to work and this creates a severe traffic problem, especially during the rush hours. Also as the cities grow in dimension, people will move to shop and access other social needs/wants which often cause traffic congestion and blockage. 9) Urban crime Issues of lack of resources, overcrowding, unemployment, poverty, and lack of social services and education habitually leads to many social problems including violence, drug abuse, and crime. Most of the crimes such as murder, rape, kidnapping, riots, assault, theft, robbery, and hijacking are reported to be more prominent in the urban vicinities. Besides, poverty related crimes are the highest in fast-growing urban regions. These acts of urban crime normally upset the peace and tranquility of cities/towns.

10) Gambling Gambling is the wagering of money or other valuables on the outcome of a game, race, contest or other event. Although few societies in general have ever wholly approved of gambling, none has been able to eradicate it.





Gambling is an organized activity in many urban centres. People living in cities have a craze to make money. So, they are ready to adopt any means to make money—gambling gives them an opportunity to make instant or quick money. The hope of making quick money easily is what gives gambling its appeal.

11) Prostitution Urbanization involuntarily leads to trafficking of women and children. It is the social manifestations arising from the process of increasing transformation, and is further exacerbated and compounded by the phenomena of poverty, unemployment, increasing urban/rural disparities, inveterate gender discrimination and migration. The full scale of the practice remains unknown because few women and children are prepared or able to report what has happened to them to the police or women’s organizations or NGOs. 12) Beggary Many people, who migrate to the urban centres in search of better opportunities, end up as beggars. They actually are a financial burden on the country. The beggars are economically unproductive and almost remain as parasites in the society. Beggary also has social and moral aspects apart from the economic side. Most beggars stay in such unhealthy environment that they develop some or the other diseases. Thus, they become lithe which means to spread infectious diseases in the city.

SOLUTIONS OF URBANISATION 1) Sustainable and environmentally friendly cities Governments should pass laws that plan and provide environmentally sound cities and smart growth techniques, considering that people should not reside in unsafe and polluted areas. Governments should also encourage sustainable use of urban resources and support an economy based on sustainable environment such as investment in green infrastructure, sustainable industries, recycling and environmental campaigns, pollution management, renewable energy, green public transportation, and water recycling and reclamation.

2) Provision of essential services Urban stakeholders must ensure all populations within the urban areas have access to adequate essential social services namely education, health, sanitation and clean water, technology, electricity, and food. The objective here is to provide and implement employment opportunities and wealth creation activities so that people can earn a living to pay for the maintenance of the services. Subsidies can also be availed by the government to lower the costs of basic healthcare, basic

education, energy, education, public transportation, communication systems and technology.

3) Creation of more jobs To lessen the negative effects of rapid urbanization while at the same time conserving natural ecosystems, private investments should be encouraged so as to utilize natural resources and create more job opportunities. Tourism promotion and the sustainable exploitation of natural resources can create more jobs for the urban populations. Subsidies and grants may as well be provided to foreign and private investment in environmentally friendly development projects that encourage job creation.

REFERENCES 1) Escobar, Arturo, 1995, Encountering Development:

The Making and Unmaking of the Third World,

Princeton, Princeton University Press.

2) Hoogvelt, Ankie, 1997, Globalization and the Post-

Colonial World - The New Political Economy of

Development, London, Macmillan.

3) Hoogvelt, Ankie, 1998, The Sociology of

Development, London, Macmillan.

4) Jha Avinash, 2000, Background to Globalization,

Centre for education and Documentation, Mumbai.

5) Kofman and Young, 2003, Globalization, Theory

and Practice, Continuum, London.

6) 59

7) Kiely, Ray and Phil Marfleet (eds.) 1998,

Globalization and the Third World, London,

Routledge.

8) Lechner F. and Boli J. (ed), 2000, The

globalization, Blackwell Oxford.

9) Preston, P.W., 1996, Development Theory - An

Introduction, Oxford, Blackwell.

10) Schuurman Frans J. (ed), 2002, Globalization and

Development Studies, Sage Publications, New

Delhi.

11) Waters, Malcolm, 1996, Globalization, London,

Routledge



EPRA International Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (IJMR) - Peer Reviewed Journal



THE CONSUMER PERCEPTION ON ONLINE FOOD DELIVERY SYSTEM AMONG YOUTH IN KERALA

Ms. Ardhana M Prabhash Assistant Professor

Department of Economics

University of Calicut

ABSTRACT Rise of the platform economy, aided by the evolution of new digital technologies, has contributed to the tremendous growth of

the food delivery sector in India. In recent times, this sector has witnessed the emergence of new players ,as Swiggy and Uber

Eats with already established players like Zomato tweaking their business models to align them with the demands of the

sector. While the Online Food Delivery platforms have opened new opportunities in the labour market and expanded the

consumer base for existing restaurant. E-commerce in India is expected to grow from US $100 billion by 2020, making it the

fastest growing e-commerce market in the world !E-commerce is also witnessing a spurt in online food and restaurant service

companies, which is expected to reach $2.7 billion by 2019.

KEY WORDS: Online food delivery system, Consumer behavior, E-commerce, Platform economy, Satisfaction

INTRODUCTION In this 21st century, we see India at a rising pace where young minds of the country are excelling in the era of technology and innovations. The recent development of internet augmented the e-commerce industries in India. E-commerce development made online food ordering services more convenient for those who wanted to get food delivered at their door step. It has been observed that the corporate lifestyle has curbed the leisure out of Indians that is the attitude towards online sources of ready to eat food. Online food ordering is a process of delivering a food from local restaurants with the help of cooperative webpage created. Many of these services allow customers to keep accounts with them to order frequently. The payment is either by credit card or cash, and the restaurant return a percentage of payment to online food company. Indian population is by all account in the awe of this online food request and delivery choice for the comfort and prompt wellspring of food at home. The food delivery applications has corresponded the idea of ease and comfort to the millenial life style because of financial advance. So as more investors are prepared to give vitality and interests in the ventures committed to delivering food at door step . To a larger extent, consumers have come to expect the ability of a restaurant to allow them to place orders through online.

Adopting new technology, does not only ease the customers, but also ensure that this business is enabling to stand tall in two day’s modern competitive world market. The 1st online food ordering company is pizza that established in 1994. The 1st online food ordering service, World Wide Waiter was set up in 1995. With increased usage of smart phones, food delivery start-ups started to receive more attention. The recent creativeness of online food servicing agent are ,mobile ordering ,facebook ordering, Digital menu boards & smart phones, Games while-u-wait and Online coupons. Indian Online food services are in a boom to the digital industry across the globe. And market size of food is expected in India to reach Rs. 12 lakh by 2020.

REVIEW OF LITERATURE Kimes (2011) said that, the amount of increase in online food ordering is because of convenience and control. Almost half of the populations has ordered food online. Personal interaction with restaurant employees, satisfaction level of consumers after ordering food online and changed behavior of the consumers regarding food mobile ordering Apps shows the perception of consumers for mobile food ordering apps.

According to Serhat Murat Alagoz and Haluk Hekimoglu (2012), e-commerce is rapidly growing






worldwide, the food industry is also showing a steady growth. In this research paper they have used the Technology Acceptance Model (TAM) as a ground to study the acceptance of online food ordering system. Their data analysis revealed that the attitude towards online food ordering vary according to their innovativeness against information technology, their trust in e-retailers and various external influences. Leong Wai Hong (2016) stated that people have managed their easily and efficiently because of technological advancements. Management system helps in reducing the time, and further helps in generating report for management purpose by fully utilizing the system. According to Sethu and Bhavya Saini (2016), their aim was to investigate the student’s perception, behaviour and satisfaction of online food ordering and delivery services. Their study reveals that online food purchasing services help the students in managing their time better. It is also found that ease of availability of their desired food at any time and at the same time easy access to internet are the prime reason for using the services. Dang and Tran (2018) said that internet has played a major role in increasing the awareness of the online food delivery apps. Through internet, people can search about foods and restaurants, compare their prices and their services and have easy access to them. Internet has made all these things convenient for the customers.

STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM In this growing world of technology, online food

delivery has become an important element of people’s life. The concept of dine out system has changed and made people to order food at any time conveniently just by few clicks. This system is revolutionizing the present restaurant industry .Consumer preference is the main stimulating factor for business owners to indulge in online delivery services .With intensive urbanization large volumes of food move through the systems . With the changes in India’s population, more industry in different cities for the purpose of studies and employment, the busy schedules of both husband and wife in the family eats the demand for online food

ordering developing and growing up steadily .The purpose of this study is to measure the perceptions of customers regarding electronic food ordering among youth of Kerala state. This study analyses the factors that attract consumers towards online food delivery system and this study also analyze the advantage and disadvantage of the online food delivery system among youngsters in Kerala, by using primary data. The cleanliness and hygiene of food being delivered to the customers, the quality and quantity worth to price are the problems addressed by the customers relying on online food delivery system.

OBJECTIVES 1. Factors that attract consumers towards the

online food delivery. 2. The advantages and disadvantages of the

online food delivery system.

METHODOLGY The area of study is Kerala state, by selecting

five major districts in Kerala including Trivandrum, Ernakulam , Thrissur, Kozhikode, Kottayam . Primary survey method was carried out in the study . For this study, 250 youths were selected as samples through the method of random sampling. The collected data is analyzed with appropriate statistical tool.

FINDINGS The data shows that, out of 250 respondents,56%

of respondents are female and 44% respondents are male. So the major portion of respondents comprise of female gender .The major proportion of respondents 66% belong to urban area and the 34% of respondents belong to rural area which means the online food delivery system has also began to gain importance in rural area too.Major proportion of respondents(175people) have used some kind of online food delivery services and 24% (75 people) among the respondents have not yet used any kind of online food delivery services.






Among the selected youths, major proportion of people who get access to online food services belongs to the age group of 20-25 the major proportion of youth who orders weekly, monthly or rarely ,relies on the money of their parents or other source. And major factor that attracts the consumers to prefer online food delivery system is offers/discounts provided by

different online food applications also an influencing factor and the convenience of consumers followed by on time delivery services provided by the delivery companies.

The major factor that hinders consumers from

online food delivery are unawareness and as most of them are afraid or unaware about payment through online. The both factors constitute of 38.90% of the respondents. Together 77.8% of people does not rely on online food services due to factors such as unawareness

and fear to use online payment. This means that most people don’t feel safe to share their financial and personal information over the internet. 16.7% of people opted for other factors mentioned that they prefer online homely food than hotel food.

22.70%

25%

0%

45.05%

6.08%

FACTORS THAT ATTRACT CONSUMERS TOWARDS ONLINE FOOD DELIVERY

SYSTEM

ON TIME DELIVERYSERVICES

CONVENIENCE

EASE OF PAYMENT

OFFERS/DISCOUNTS

38.90%

5.50%

38.90%

16.07%

FACTORS THAT HINDERS CONSUMERS FROM DEPENDING ON ONLINE FOOD

DELIVERY SYSTEM

UNAWARENESS

BAD PASTEXPERIENCES

AFRAID OFPAYMENTTHROUGH ONLINE

OTHERS






The major proportion of people order food

through Swiggy which constitutes of 67.4% followed by Uber eats and 6% of people depend on other apps such as delivery provided by different hotels. 70.2% of people orders food rarely. The occasion in which a person orders food rarely are during an functions or gatherings, when companies provide affordable discounts, in situations where

people stay in unfamiliar places, in urgent situations and etc. There are four people who order once in a week, 3 people orders twice in a week. One person orders thrice in a month and one person orders four or five times a month. 67.4% of youth from Kerala prefers swiggy, followed by uber eats, zomato, potafo

Majority of respondents (86.5%) are satisfied

with the services of online food delivery services they depend and neglecting the fear of online payment mechanism all are satisfied. The particular food people prefers includes appetizers, fast food, non veg food, snacks and meals etc. The approximate money youth spend on online food delivery lies between Rs 500 to Rs 3000. 86.5% of people are satisfied with the services provided by the company they rely upon.This system saves time of people especially of families in which both men and women work. Some people are with the opinion that the food ordering companies should assure

the cleanliness and hygiene of the food being delivered to the customers.

CONCLUSION The young population of India is significantly

interested in online food ordering. The slowing trend of dine out system is due to the shift towards online ordering of food and the cause for it is the easy availability of internet at low cost and more use of electronic devices around people. The consumer’s perception on online food ordering varies from individual to individual based on their personal

67.04% 6%

19.60%

5% 2%

ATTITUDE TOWARDS THE ONLINE DELIVERY APP

SWIGGY

ZOMATO

UBER EATS

POTAFO

OTHERS

9.60%

86.50%

1.95% 1.95%

CONSUMER SATISFACTION LEVEL

HIGHLY SATISFIED

SATISFIED

DISSATISFIED

HIGHLYDISSATISFIED






opinions. The study reveals that most youngster’s are well aware about online services. The most influencing factor is offers provided by online food apps. Fast food was fancied by most respondents in their choice of cuisines. The study also revealed that a major proportion of respondents uses Swiggy and least uses Potafo. In this fastest growing economy, as both men and women are the bread winners, online food delivery services saves time of working people. Convenience, ease of payment are the other advantages enjoyed by people. On the other hand, unawareness, fear of online payment and fear to disclose personal information are some factors which hinders people to order food online. To conclude, transformation in the trends of food ordering is occurring because of the changing lifestyle of the consumers and due the expansion and innovations in online activity.

REFERENCE 1. Ahmad Al – Tit (2015) “The effect of service and

food quality on customer satisfaction and hence

customer retention” – Asian social science 11(23)

129-139 october 2015.

2. International Journal of recent technology and

engineering, VOL 8, Issue 1, The study of interest of

consumers in mobile food ordering apps.

3. Journal Of Management (JOM),(2018) VOL 5,

ISSUE5, Sept-Oct pp.155-163 Consumer perception

towards online food ordering and delivery services:

An emperical study.

4. Malik Chaudhary, Suryadev Singh Rathore, Malik

Chaudhary, IJMBS (2018) VOL.8, Issue 4, OCT-

DEC ,Madhya Pradesh.

5. Nick Johns(2002) – “Consumer behaviour in the

food service industry” – International Journal of

hospitality management 21(2): 110 – 134 June

2002.

6. Rathore, S. S., and Chaudhary, M.(2018).

Consumers perception on online food ordering.

7. R.,Priyadharshini.(2017).Consumer perception

towards MNC fast food outlets in Coimbatore.

International Journal of Applied Research, 3(3).

8. International Journal of Management and Business

Studies, 8(4).

9. Sainath Reddy k, Chaitanya KGK, Abhinav M and

Feiroz Khan TH(2016) “An online food court

ordering system” – Open access journal .






MODERN APPROACH TO BUSINESS VALUATION IN UZBEKISTAN

Salimov Golib Researcher at the Department of Economics of the

Ferghana Polytechnic Institute

Ferghana, Uzbekistan

ABSTRACT In the scientific article, the essence and value of enterprise valuation, including indicators that affect the price, were justified,

and the features of goodwill valuation were disclosed.

KEYWORDS - business valuation, brand, goodwill, International Valuation Standards.

INTRODUCTION A number of prominent ranking organizations

positively evaluate the economy of Uzbekistan. In particular, in World Bank ranking published on May 1, 2019, Uzbekistan took 69th place among 190 countries. This rating assesses the conditions for businesses in 10 areas. The results of the conducted study can help solve general problems common to all types of business. [1]

In a short period of time, Uzbekistan has achieved stable economic growth through reforms and liberations of economic development. The President of Uzbekistan Shavkat Mirziyoyev made the following statement “Our priority is to strengthen macroeconomic stability and increase rates of economic growth”. [2]

The experience of developed countries shows that the dynamics of growth in the evaluation of enterprises value determine its effective development for the long term as well as an increase in the well-being of the country's population. In addition, it becomes necessary to determine the market value of enterprises in connection with privatization development processes, stock markets and mortgage insurance. The concept of costing was first introduced by two Nobel laureates, American economists Merton Miller and Franco Modigliani, in the Journal of Business in an article entitled “Dividend Policy, Growth and Valuation of Shares” 1961 [3]. They first laid the foundations of the concept of capital value and stocks.

Subsequently, this concept was disseminated and put into practice by such European scientists as Alfred Rappaport and Joel Stern. They were first who used proposed by Miller and Modigliani calculation formulas in the computer and software industry to calculate the market price of shares.

And in the field of business valuation, such scientists as Christopher Mercer Z. and Travis W. Harms stood out in his monograph entitled “Business valuation: An integrated theory”, which was of practical importance all over the world. This work has advanced the integrated theory of business valuation.

In international valuation standards, the definition of the enterprise value is as follows - the value of the enterprise plus the total cost of private business capital and minus cash [4].

When assessing the value of an enterprise, international economists mostly pay attention to the earnings reports of a company, taking into account the value of growth stocks. The Russian economists focus on the production and commercial activities of the enterprise.

In our opinion, the following definition of enterprise value is appropriate- enterprise value (EV), total enterprise value (TEV) or firm value (FV), which is an estimate of the enterprise value, taking into account all sources of its financing.

OBJECTIVES In the estimation of the enterprise's value, there

are not only scientific and fundamental approaches but also those that have legal foundations which consider national legislation.

According to the resolution of the State Property Committee of the Republic of Uzbekistan dated October 6 - 2009, under number 01/19-18/19, registered with the Ministry of Justice of the Republic of Uzbekistan on October 28, 2009, under number 2026, national standard No. 9 on property valuation, in which the following is defined:


https://www.investopedia.com/articles/professionals/072415/value-or-growth-stocks-which-best.asp







In any situation - the goal of assessing enterprise value is to forecast the profitability of the enterprise and effectively managed its future activities.

The objectives of the property valuation are: -conclusion of a sale transaction; - property insurance; - transfer of property for rent or pledge; - the determination of the property value; - the determination of the property value

received free of charge; - the preparation of financial statements; - the reorganization of enterprises; - resolving property disputes; - making management decisions and so on. In general, it can be noted that the assessment of

the enterprise's value remains one of the categories of modern economic processes.

METHODOLOGY In our opinion, in the modern economy, when

forming the enterprise's value, it would be advisable to consider a number of factors.

Factors that influence the formation of enterprise value are as follows:

- The enterprises demand for products and services;

- The evaluation of companies presents and future profit;

- Costs of organization and promotion of the enterprise;

- The probability of income; - Investment attractiveness of the evaluated

company; - Image of the enterprise; - The financial condition of the enterprise;

- Time; - The state of the management system; - The staff of the enterprise; - The possibility of expanding production, etc. In terms of occurrence, these factors can be

divided into internal and external (Fig. 1), and in terms of level of their impact on enterprises value formation into positive and negative.

The image of the enterprise has always been an important tool for business development and promotion.

As studies show, the above-listed factors for evaluating the value of an enterprise, such as the prestige of the enterprise, level of recognition, quality of goods and services, number of customers and market place can be conditionally divided into three groups.

The first group includes the advertising of products and services, best practices in sales, the availability of qualified personnel, the territorial location of the enterprise and intangible assets.

The second group includes factors related to the personnel potential of the enterprise. The personnel potential includes the prestige of an employee, his know-how skills, professional skill and the ability to conclude contracts. The value of intangible assets included in this group cannot be determined.

The third group includes the company name, trademark, logo, copyright, patents and others. Intangible assets that are included in this group can be estimated. It is also possible to calculate depreciation on these intangible assets and their fixation in the balance sheet.

The concept of goodwill is used to evaluate the value of the enterprise, taking into account the above factors.






Fig - 1 Classification of factors affecting the value of the enterprise In our opinion, among the listed factors affecting

the value of the enterprise, the concept of “Image” deserves special attention. The reason for this is that in the early 90s, this concept has become a practice for assessing the value of an enterprise and was the subject of discussions and debates for many years.

The image of the enterprise is the face of the company, that’s formed from society's perception through the media and psychological influence.

The Russian sociologist F.I. Sharkov in his book “Constants of Goodwill: Style, Publicity, Reputation,

Image and Brand of the Firm” wrote that such constants as brand, perception, celebrity, popularity are involved in the formation of goodwill value.

But economists I. Oleinik and A. Lapshov wrote that “The value of your company is its tangible assets plus or minus prestige”. Sharkov’s opinion that the image of the enterprise is a component of goodwill must be substantiated.

There are the following definitions of goodwill. Currently, there is no universally accepted

definition of goodwill. In the International Business

Enterprises value

external factors Inner factors

regional

factors

factors in

the

industry

image

openness financial and

economic

activities

On a

national

At the

regional

GDP, level of economic and political

stability, included investment rate of

the main capital, exchange rate

fluctuations, inflation rate,

unemployment rate, transparency of

legislation, protection of the legal

rights and interests of the owner

Geographic location, industrial production

rate, the average amount of labor force

Market capacity, growth rate, adoption of

technologies in the process of production of

new tokens, the rule of law, production

efficiency, solvency of buyers, the number of

competitors in the market, the level of

diversification of the tokens of competing

enterprises

Level of recognition, level

of trust, quality, number

of customers, reputation,

market position

Organizational structure of the enterprise,

licensing of activities, having patents and

other intangible assets, price and quality of

products (work, service), financial status of

the enterprise, compliance with international

standards of accounting reports, the amount

of reserves for the main activity, production

capacity, growth of sales volume,

opportunities to expand production,

opportunities to introduce innovative

projects, personnel composition

The degree of distribution of shares among

shareholders of the enterprise, liquidity of shares

of the enterprise


https://context.reverso.net/%D0%BF%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%BE%D0%B4/%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B3%D0%BB%D0%B8%D0%B9%D1%81%D0%BA%D0%B8%D0%B9-%D1%80%D1%83%D1%81%D1%81%D0%BA%D0%B8%D0%B9/Society%27s+perception





Valuation Standards, there is no precise definition of Goodwill.

Studies show that the value of the goodwill is high in evaluating the value of an enterprise. According to the rating agency “BrandZTM Global Top 100 Brands”, in 2017 Google was recognized as the most expensive brand (245.581 billion US dollars).

The next position is secured by Apple (234.671 billion US dollars) and Microsoft (143.222 billion US dollars). This year, social networks such as Amazon (139.286 billion US dollars) and Facebook (129.8 billion US dollars) reached record brand growth (+ 41%) [10].

In Table 2 it can be seen the company’s brands share cost and the total value of assets.

Table No-1

Analysis of the company’s brands share cost and the total value of assets

Brand name Cost (billion $) Value of total

assets (Billion $)

Brand value and total enterprise value

in %

Google 245,6 532 46

Apple 234,7 618 38

Microsoft 143,2 483 30

Amazon 139,3 356 39

Facebook 129,8 332 39 According to the table, the enterprise value of

Google is 46%, Apple-38%, Microsoft 30%, Amazon 39%, and Facebook 39%. It should be noted that the above brands are not the only brands of these companies. The Google brand, with 46% of the company's value, belongs to Alphabet Inc, which includes such well-known brands as AdWords, Android and YouTube.

In this regard, when enterprises have been sold or joined, it is recommended the recognition and evaluation of their goodwill.

According to the resolution of the Committee of the Republic of Uzbekistan on October 6, 2009, under number 01/ 19-18/19, registered with the Ministry of Justice of the Republic of Uzbekistan on October 28, 2009, under number 2026, the assessment of property, according to which the cost of goodwill is determined, carried out the following way:

If there is information about the average industry return on assets, goodwill is calculated according to the following formula: intangible assets recorded on the balance sheet of an enterprise, that arose as a difference between the book value and the estimated value of private capital:

where

NP- net profit MVA- the market value of assets IARA- industry average return on assets CR- capitalization rate

SUGGESTIONS Based on the above conclusions, the following

approaches to the assessment of goodwill are proposed: 1. The accounting approach (method). If the

company was purchased at a price higher than the value of its assets then the difference is measured as goodwill. This method is used in assessing the value of goodwill as well as unidentified tangible assets.

2. An analytical method for valuing intangible assets. The main idea of this method is that assets such as fame and prestige of an enterprise are assessed as “hidden” investments. This method is recognized as one of the most popular. The cons of this method arise in the calculation.

3. Business Valuation method. Usually, this method is widely used in the western commercial organizations.

4. The capitalization method. Capitalization of profits through the use of goodwill while maintaining high growth rates.

5. The need to assess enterprise value or its market value arises in parallel with the processes of economic development, scientific and technological progress. The enterprise appraisal process provides an opportunity not only to determine the value of the enterprise but also determines the development opportunities of the enterprise.






BIBLIOGRAPHY 1. Doing Business 2020: Equal Opportunities

for All. © 2020 International Bank for

Reconstruction and Development / The

World Bank 1818 H Street NW, Washington,

DC 20433

2. http://press-service.uz/uz/lists/view/187

3. Merton M., Franco M., Dividend Policy,

Growth and the Valuation of

Shares//Journal of Business. 1961b,

October, page 411.

4. International Valuation Standards IVS -

2017. IVSC, 2017.- 115 page


http://press-service.uz/uz/lists/view/187




IMPACT OF ENVIRONMENT, ENERGY AND FOREIGN

DIRECT INVESTMENT ON EXPORTS OF SELECTIVE

SAARC COUNTRIES

Wajiha Manzoor Department of Economics

Comsats University Islamabad,

Lahore Campus,

Pakistan

Nabeel Safdar Nust Business School

Nust University Islamabad


ABSTRACT This study focused on the relationship of environment, energy used and foreign direct investment inflows on exports of

selective SAARC countries including Pakistan , Bangladesh , India , Sri Lanka and Nepal from 1980-2018. The results

revealed that environment has significant positive impact on exports. Energy has also positive impact on exports except

Pakistan and Nepal where results showed negative relationship. The FDI inflow in India and Sri Lanka has not significant

impact on exports while other three countries has significant impact on exports of those countries. Overall environment,

energy used and foreign direct investment inflows have positive impact on export while controlling the impact of inflation,

GDP growth, reserves and domestic credit to private sector in SAARC countries.

INTRODUCTION SAARC comprises of eight South Asian nations

and was made in 1985 to improve financial collaboration in region. Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan and Sri Lanka are the founder members of SAARC and later in 2005 Afghanistan has joined the organization. The interesting factor of f SAARC is that there is one giant nation (India) and all others are moderately little. Subsequently, possibility of financial participation among SAARC nations can be a one of a kind contextual analysis of the capability of South-South Cooperation. The Export, Environment pollution, energy use and FDI inflow has altogether expanded right now the previous decade, particularly, in India. Other part states are additionally actualizing different arrangements, for example, concession on charge, decrease in taxes, credit offices, etc., to pull in increasingly outside capital through FDI to boost exports.

The worldwide network has worry for ecological degradation too, however it just spotlights on the exercises or productions responsible for an Earth-wide temperature boost and environmental change. The

outflows of greenhouses gases (GHG) have suggestions for a dangerous atmospheric deviation, environmental change, and natural uneven characteristics. Since the mechanical transformation, there has been a persistent increment in GHG and carbon outflows, which comprise a significant segment of agribusiness, and ranger service are significant segments of GHG emanations. One can accuse a locale or a nation for an unnatural weather change and atmosphere. Foreign Direct Venture (FDI) has, to an enormous degree, supplanted remote guide as a wellspring of money for creating nations to connect the customary two holes for example .reserve funds speculation send out import whole. In the process FDI, rather than keeping the generation just to home nation (or hardly any created nations), has globalized the creation. Therefore the absolute generation by worldwide is currently fundamentally contributing towards the GDP (Gross domestic product) at world level. At present, worldwide companies likewise rule the world exchange as a result of their inclination for intra global types of exchange. This pattern may change throughout the years as undertakings of creating nations likewise achieve mechanical and administrative development.






Zhang et al. (2013) investigated the associations among China's monetary development and its vitality utilization, air discharges, and air ecological security venture during 2000–2007. The outcomes show that vitality utilization quickly ascends with China's quick monetary development; be that as it may, vitality effectiveness and natural stacking force from vitality utilization are diminished all the while, and their upgrades fall a long ways behind their financial development rate. Effect of air outflows on human wellbeing (particularly dust) is diminished. The presentation of air natural insurance speculation is declined in the investigation time frame. Tan et al. (2013) examine the since quite a while ago run and the causal connection between ozone harming substance discharges, monetary development per unit of vitality use, and vitality utilization in Pakistan over a 36-year timespan, i.e., somewhere in the range of 1975 and 2011. The discovering proposes that vitality utilization goes about as a significant driver for the expansion in ozone harming substance discharges in Pakistan. The outcomes demonstrate that by and large, causality runs from vitality utilization to ozone depleting substance emanations, however not the other way around as indicated by Tan et al. (2013).

Akhmat and Zaman (2013) investigate the causal relationship among nuclear essentialness use, business imperativeness usage (i.e., oil use, gas use, power use, and coal use), and monetary improvement in South Asian countries, to be explicit, Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan, and Sri Lanka, over the hour of 1975–2010. The results reveal that nuclear essentialness use Granger causes budgetary improvement in Nepal and Pakistan, while business imperativeness use, i.e., oil use Granger causes money related advancement in Bangladesh, Bhutan, Maldives, Nepal, and Sri Lanka; gas usage Granger causes monetary improvement in Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, and Maldives; influence use Granger causes budgetary improvement in India and Sri Lanka; finally, coal use Granger causes monetary advancement in Bangladesh, Bhutan, Nepal, and Sri Lanka.

Akhmat et al. (2014) study results demonstrate that vitality utilization goes about as a significant driver to increment ecological contaminations in SAARC nations. Granger causality runs from vitality utilization to natural contaminations, yet not the other way around, with the exception of carbon dioxide (CO2) discharges in Nepal where there exists a bidirectional causality among CO2 and vitality utilization. Methane outflows in Bangladesh, Pakistan, and Sri Lanka and extraordinary temperature in India and Sri Lanka don't Granger cause vitality utilization by means of the two

courses, which holds lack of bias speculation. Fluctuation decay investigation shows that among all the ecological markers, CO2 in Bangladesh and Nepal applies the biggest commitment to changes in electric force utilization. Normal precipitation in India, methane emanations in Pakistan, and outrageous temperature in Sri Lanka apply the biggest commitment.

Zhang (2005) in an exhaustive report, in light of full example of various types of businesses, demonstrates that FDI contributed around 57 percent in send out from China. As per Zhang (2005) 'FDI have the dominating effect on China's fare execution. In all cases, the FDI variable has moderately enormous and factually noteworthy coefficients [as illustrative variable for trades from China] (p/1)'. This is a persuading proof of positive and solid effect of FDI on sends out. Be that as it may, there is a requirement for additional examination to see whether FDI could be considered as the sole factor for expanding trades by such a major edge. It is notable that China has customarily utilized its underestimated money to advance fares (and FDI is profiting by the approach). Sharma (2000), utilizing yearly information (1970-1998), in a synchronous condition model, didn't watch a factually huge connection between inflows of FDI and fares of India. The investigation arraigned different components (for example conversion scale) are progressively significant in advancing fares. As it were, FDI in India has basically satisfied household need instead of sending out. Curiously, in another investigation by Sudershan et al. (2012) watched a negative connection between FDI inflow and Pharmaceutical Fares from India.

If there should arise an occurrence of Pakistan, Siddiqui et al. (2013) found a long unidirectional negative connection between inflow of FDI and current record of equalization of installments. In the short run inflow of FDI has, be that as it may, demonstrated no association with Taxi. The long haul negative impact is clearly could be the consequence of repatriation of benefit emerging from combined FDI. In any case, the examination has not inspected the effect independently on significant components of Taxi for example trades, imports. Shahbaz et al. (2013) discovered positive effect of capital fare, vitality utilization, budgetary improvement, imports, and universal exchange on financial development in China from 1971 to 2011. Uni and bi directional Granger causality was found from vitality utilization to monetary development; and between budgetary advancement and vitality utilization, and among exchange and vitality utilization individually. Pradhan (2011) discovered short run what's more, since a long time ago run bidirectional





causality between government spending and financial development in five SAARC nations from 1970 to 2007 with the exception of Pakistan and Sri Lanka. Yousuf et al. (2012) observationally broke down the effect of FDI and found a negative connection among FDI and fares. Tabassum et al. (2012) additionally demonstrated a statically powerless however positive connection among FDI and fares. A typical shortcoming of these investigations is disregarding the major financial interruptions occurring in Pakistan during the period for which the information has been examined.

Tang and Tan (2015) examined non-linear connections among GDP and carbon discharges for Vietnam. Tang and Tan (2015) found that carbon emission, usage of energy, and FDI were cointegrated over the long run. Nguyen et al. (2012) while exploring connection between bank advertise force and income broadening in four South Asian nations (Bangladesh, India, Pakistan, and Sri Lanka) from 1998 to 2008 discovered manages an account with more noteworthy market power center more around ordinary premium income producing exercises. Be that as it may, differentiating across both intrigue and non-intrigue pay exercises help them more settle. Kreishan and Sami (2012) discovered positive effect of FDI and trades on

monetary development in Jordon from 1970 to 2010. They discovered since quite a while ago run causality from fares and FDI to monetary development. Perera and Wickramanayake (2012) found that both stock also, security returns were co-coordinated inferring normal stochastic patterns. The investigation was directed in money related markets of four significant South Asian nations for example Bangladesh, India, Pakistan, and Sri Lanka. Alam et al. (2015) uncovered through board co-reconciliation test recommend that the factors are co-incorporated and have a since quite a while ago run connection between them. Furthermore, three distinctive board information strategies for example pooled least square, fixed impacts and irregular impacts have been utilized to test the legitimacy of the "vitality development nexus by means of budgetary improvement" in the SAARC.

DATA AND METHODOLOGY We used data for five countries of SAARC

including Pakistan (PAK), Bangladesh (BGD), India (IND), Sri Lanka (LKA) and Nepal (NPL) from 1980-2018. The table below showed the variable used in this study along with sources of data.

Sr no Variable Description Source 1 lnexport Log natural of Exports of goods and services (current US$) WDI 2 lnco2 Log natural of CO2 emissions (kt) WDI 3 lnenergy Log natural of Energy use (kg of oil equivalent per capita) WDI 4 lnfdi Log natural of Foreign direct investment, net inflows (% of GDP) WDI 5 lncredit Log natural of Domestic credit to private sector (% of GDP) WDI 6 lnreserve Log natural of Total reserves (% of total external debt) WDI 7 Inflation Inflation rate WDI 8 Gdp growth GDP growth (annual %) WDI Equation is representing the model used in this study as follows

Lnexport represents log of the dependent variable export at time t, while the betas show the

elasticity of the independent variables and represents the error term in time t. We have compared the results of different techniques like pooled Ordinary Least Square (OLS) regression, Panel fixed effect along with random effect model, and Haussmann test significant result suggested fixed effect models are adequate. Also results of are obtained through panel Generalized Least Square (GLS) regression model and also compared by dynamic panel regression model. In addition OLS regression independently for each country is ran to

check each countries individual pattern of exports as well. We have used Stata 15 to analyze the models.

RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS Figure 1 showed the exports of SAARC over

1980-2018 for selected five counties, India is the largest exporter. While figure 2 explained co2 emission of SAARC over 1980-2018 for selected five counties with India is emitting more co2 and boosting their exports. Figure 3 is about energy used of SAARC over 1980-2018 and showed that again India is leader in usage of energy while Pakistan and Sri Lanka are also using more energy which is not translated in their exports.

Table 1 reported the overall descriptive of all variables used in study with 167 total observations. Descriptive showed mean, standard deviation, minimum and maximum for all variables. Table 2 reported correlation coefficients of all variables, the





correlation among all dependent variables is below 0.6 which indicated no Multicollinearity among predictors.

We also check Durbin Watson test and found the values around 2, which indicated no serious auto correlation.

Figure 1. Exports of SAARC over 1980-2018

Figure 2. CO2 Emission of SAARC over 1980-2018


https://www.google.com/search?q=Multicollinearity&spell=1&sa=X&ved=2ahUKEwjs0rmNjMDnAhUBZcAKHbWrD2QQkeECKAB6BAgRECM




Figure 3. Energy used of SAARC over 1980-2018

Table 1. Descriptive Analysis over 1980-2018.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) VARIABLES N mean sd min max

Reserves 167 35.842 37.364 3.793 202.93 Domestic credit to private sector 167 26.71 15.00 2.508 87.02 Exports 167 3.215e+10 9.313e+10 1.851e+07 5.366e+11 FDI inflow 167 0.756 0.844 -0.655 6.175 Energy use kg 167 339.6 119.9 104.9 636.6 Gdp growth 167 5.481 2.893 -2.977 28.70 co2emissions 167 188,683 423,315 22.00 2.238e+06 Inflation 167 8.137 4.322 0.156 24.89 Number of countries 5 5 5 5 5





Table 2. Correlation Matrix of all five countries over 1980-2018. Variables Lnexport lnco2 lnenergy lnfdi lnreserve lncredit Inflation Gdp growth

lnexport 1.000 lnco2 0.953*** 1.000 lnenergy 0.434*** 0.301*** 1.000 lnfdi 0.459*** 0.252*** 0.575**

* 1.000

lnreserve -0.230*** -0.357*** 0.355***

0.085 1.000

lncredit 0.660*** 0.595*** 0.499***

0.493***

-0.063 1.000

Inflation -0.084 -0.006 0.118 -0.056 -0.199*** -0.135**

1.000

Gdp growth -0.050 -0.116* 0.095 0.225***

0.302*** -0.074 -0.219***

1.000

*** p<0.01, ** p<0.05, * p<0.1

Table 3.Regression results using all five countries over 1980-2018.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

VARIABLES lnexport lnexport lnexport lnexport lnexport VIF

L.lnexport

0.94750***

(0.03492)

lnco2 0.62861*** 0.80496*** 0.62735*** 0.62832*** 0.07790** 1.31

(0.01828) (0.19450) (0.03993) (0.01746) (0.05958)

lnenergy 0.11206 1.91023** 0.11206 0.11206 0.00846** 1.92

(0.08578) (0.65805) (0.27669) (0.10723) (0.22412)

lnfdi 0.22523*** 0.07429*** 0.22523*** 0.22523*** 0.00083** 1.64

(0.02338) (0.01608) (0.03502) (0.02536) (0.00785)

lnreserve 0.14750*** 0.16901** 0.14750** 0.14750*** 0.03133* 1.42

(0.05102) (0.09433) (0.14883) (0.04730) (0.01747)

lncredit 0.37527*** 0.26696** 0.37527 0.37527*** 0.01729* 1.87

(0.11853) (0.09339) (0.25350) (0.09972) (0.04039)

Inflation -0.00144 -0.00316** -0.00144 -0.00144 -0.00258** 1.16

(0.00920) (0.00408) (0.00826) (0.00834) (0.00185)

Gdp growth -0.00655 0.01557 -0.00655 0.00655 0.01365 1.14

(0.01494) (0.00988) (0.02488) (0.01625) (0.00413)

Constant 15.34689*** 3.60139** 15.34689**

* 15.34689**

* 0.27717

(0.51913) (2.21762) (1.07202) (0.58034) (0.51095)

Observations 167 167 167 167 149

R-squared 0.83151 0.93592 0.84533 0.89513 0.86315

Number of countries 5 5 5 5

Robust standard errors in parentheses

*** p<0.01, ** p<0.05, * p<0.1





Table 3 explained coefficients with logarithm

natural of exports as dependent variable with panel 1 pooled OLS regression, panel 2 as Panel fixed effect, panel 3 with random effect model, panel 4 reported results obtained through panel GLS regression model and panel 5 reported results obtained by dynamic panel regression model. Panel 6 of table 3 reported Variance Inflatory factor (VIF). All values of VIF less than 10 shows that there is no Multicollinearity among predictors. Results of table 3 showed that co2 emission has positive and significant impact on exports in all techniques which indicated that by increasing pollution in SAARC the exports are boosted. While coefficient result of energy usage has positive and significant impact in fixed effect model, panel GLS and dynamic

panel models and other models have shown no significant relationship of energy usage with exports. Table 3 showed that FDI inflows has positive and significant impact on exports in all techniques which indicated that exports are boosted due to FDI inflows in SAARC countries. Dynamic panel model explained that first lag of exports has a positive significant impact on exports and co2 emission, energy used, FDI inflows, reserves and credit availability has positive and significant impact while inflation has negative significant impact on exports. GDP growth has found no significant impact on exports of SAARC countries. These signs of results are in accordance with panel fixed effect model and GLS as well.

Table 4 OLS Regression results for each country over 1980-2018.

(PAK) (BGD) (IND) (LKA) (NPL) VARIABLES lnexport lnexport lnexport lnexport lnexport

lnco2 1.352*** 1.397*** 1.028*** 0.942* 0.503*** (0.296) (0.373) (0.236) (0.548) (0.115) lnenergy -0.557 1.115* 1.654*** 1.540 -0.472 (1.111) (0.602) (0.582) (1.424) (0.648) lnfdi 0.0907* 0.0312 -0.0149 -0.0979 0.0100 (0.0489) (0.0256) (0.0264) (0.107) (0.0206) lnreserve 0.0309 0.0541 0.267*** 0.152 -0.138* (0.0419) (0.0681) (0.0391) (0.171) (0.0703) lncredit -0.837*** -0.427 0.724*** -0.237 0.584*** (0.212) (0.309) (0.168) (0.154) (0.125) Inflation 0.00336 -0.000824 0.0329*** -0.00723 -0.0153** (0.00398) (0.00698) (0.00740) (0.00817) (0.00652) Gdp growth 0.0192 0.0281 0.00825 0.00760 -0.00688 (0.0117) (0.0208) (0.00876) (0.0280) (0.0118) Constant 13.44*** 3.697 -2.985** 5.019 18.31*** (3.519) (2.457) (1.306) (4.051) (3.230) Observations 35 33 35 35 29 R-squared 0.982 0.990 0.996 0.933 0.989

Robust standard errors in parentheses *** p<0.01, ** p<0.05, * p<0.1

Table 4 reported results of OLS regression for

each country separately. Panel 1 of table 4 reported results for Pakistan, panel 2 of table 4 reported results for Bangladesh, panel 3 of table 4 reported results for India, panel 4 of table 4 reported results for Sri Lanka and panel 5 of table 4 reported results for Nepal with logarithm natural of export as dependent variable for all countries. Result of table 4 showed co2 emission has

positive and significant impact on exports in all five countries. While energy has also positive impact on exports except Pakistan and Nepal where results showed negative relationship which is due to using more energy which is not translated in their exports. The FDI has no significant impact on exports of SAARC countries except Pakistan, which has positive significant at 10% level relationship. Inflation has


https://www.google.com/search?q=Multicollinearity&spell=1&sa=X&ved=2ahUKEwjs0rmNjMDnAhUBZcAKHbWrD2QQkeECKAB6BAgRECM




negative impact on exports except Pakistan and India in SAARC countries. Table 4 showed that GDP growth has no significant impact on exports of SAARC countries. Availability of credit has positive and significant impact in case of India and Nepal, while Pakistan has negative, impact on exports.

CONCLUSION This study mainly focused on the environment,

energy, FDI inflows and inflation impact on the exports of SAARC region, the findings indicate that the exports of the country are boosted by the industrialization and omitting more CO2 emissions. In Pakistan and Nepal the energy usage indicate negative effect on the export showing nonproductive usage of energy. While the findings for the other countries, show the energy usage as significant booster of the exports in SAARC region. The persistent rising in the prices has negative impact on exports, so it is suggested to control inflation to boost the exports for SAARC region. FDI is another important factor to enhance exports as it leads to more production in SAARC. In future the results can be replicated for all other regions and for major exporting countries.

REFERENCES 1. Ahmed Siddiqui,A D., Hasnain Ahmad, M., & Asim,

M. (2013). The causal relationship between Foreign

Direct Investment and Current Account: an

empirical investigation for Pakistan economy.

Theoretical & Applied Economics, 20(8).

2. Akhmat, G., & Zaman, K. (2013). Nuclear energy

consumption, commercial energy consumption and

economic growth in South Asia: bootstrap panel

causality test. Renewable and Sustainable Energy

Reviews, 25, 552-559.

3. Akhmat, G., Zaman, K., Shukui, T., Irfan, D., &

Khan, M. M. (2014). Does energy consumption

contribute to environmental pollutants? Evidence

from SAARC countries. Environmental Science and

Pollution Research, 21(9), 5940-5951.

4. Alam, A., Malik, I. A., Abdullah, A. B., Hassan, A.,

Awan, U., Ali, G., & Naseem, I. (2015). Does

financial development contribute to SAARC׳ S

energy demand? From energy crisis to energy

reforms. Renewable and Sustainable Energy

Reviews, 41, 818-829.

5. Nguyen, M., Skully, M., & Perera, S. (2012). Market

power, revenue diversification and bank stability:

Evidence from selected South Asian countries.

Journal of International Financial Markets,

Institutions and Money, 22(4), 897-912.

6. Perera, A., & Wickramanayake, J. (2012).

Financial integration in selected South Asian

countries. South Asian Journal of Global Business

Research.

7. Pradhan, R. P. (2011). Government spending and

economic growth in SAARC: evidence from panel

cointegration. International Journal of Economic

Policy in Emerging Economies, 4(1), 78-94.

8. Sami, J., & Kreishan, F. (2012). FDI and export-led

growth in Jordan: evidence from cointegration and

causality test. Economics Bulletin, 32(2), 1-18.

9. Shahbaz, M., Khan, S., & Tahir, M. I. (2013). The

dynamic links between energy consumption,

economic growth, financial development and trade

in China: fresh evidence from multivariate

framework analysis. Energy economics, 40, 8-21.

10. Sharma, K. (2000). Export Growth in India: Has

FDI played a role? (No. 1858-2016-152730).

11. Sudershan, K., Muppani, V. R., Khan, M., & Ali, A.

(2012). Foreign direct investment and export

performance of pharmaceutical firms in India: An

empirical approach. International Journal of

Economics and Finance, 4(5).

12. Tabassum, U., Nazeer, M., & Siddiqui, A. A. (2012).

Impact of FDI on import demand and export supply

functions of Pakistan: An econometric approach.

Journal of Basic & Applied Sciences, 8(1), 151-159.

13. Tan, K. C., Lim, H. S., & Mat Jafri, M. Z. (2013,).

Relationship between ozone and the air pollutants

in Peninsular Malaysia for 2003 retrieved from

SCIAMACHY. In AIP Conference Proceedings (Vol.

1528, No. 1, pp. 151-156). American Institute of

Physics.

14. Tang, C. F., & Tan, B. W. (2015). The impact of

energy consumption, income and foreign direct

investment on carbon dioxide emissions in Vietnam.

Energy, 79, 447-454.

15. Yousaf, M. M., Hussain, Z., & Ahmad, N. (2008).

Economic evaluation of foreign direct investment in

Pakistan. Pakistan economic and social review, 37-

56.

16. Zhang K.H. (2005). How does FDI affect a host

country’s export performance? The case of China,

Paper presented in International conference of

WTO China and the East Asian Economies III Xian

China : pp25-26

17. Zhang, X., Wu, L., Zhang, R., Deng, S., Zhang, Y.,

Wu, J.,. & Wang, L. (2013). Evaluating the

relationships among economic growth, energy

consumption, air emissions and air environmental

protection investment in China. Renewable and

Sustainable Energy Reviews, 18, 259-270.




METHODOLOGY FOR CONDUCTING ENERGY

SURVEYS OF ENTERPRISES AND ORGANIZATIONS

Troitskiy Aleksandr Viktorovich Key specialist in Standardization and

Management Systems at LLC “NP ESAN”, Tashkent,

Uzbekistan.

ABSTRACT

This article talks about progress energy effectiveness and actualize worldwide energy resources of preservation measures

and enhancements by giving concrete prove of fruitful performance-enhancing exercises from which the financial

benefits ended up apparent.

KEYWORDS: Audit, development, efficiency, energy, implementation, monitoring, methods.

1. INTRODUCTION Energy audit in the Republic of Uzbekistan

is carried out in accordance with the Rules for conducting energy surveys and expert examinations of consumers of fuel and energy resources, approved by the Prime Minister of the Republic of Uzbekistan Sh. Mirziyayev

August 7, 2006, No. 164, in order to assess the efficiency of the use of energy resources by enterprises and organizations, reduce consumer costs and implement energy efficient solutions.

This methodology determines the procedure for conducting an energy audit of enterprises (organizations) and applies to enterprises (organizations) that are legal entities, regardless of ownership, their branches that use fuel and energy resources (FER) for the production of goods and services, for their own needs, as well as on organizations conducting energy surveys.

Energy audit is aimed at solving the following main tasks:

• Assessment of the effectiveness of the use of fuel and energy resources in the enterprise;

• Identifying the causes of occurrence and determining the values of losses of fuel and energy resources;

• Development of an action plan aimed at reducing the loss of fuel and energy resources;

• Identification and assessment of the possibility of reducing the cost of fuel and energy resources;

• Determination of rational sizes of energy consumption in production processes and power plants;

• Determination of requirements for enterprises and organizations to improve the accounting and control of fuel and energy resources.

And it serves to obtain initial information in order to address the issues of creating new equipment, improving technological processes in order to reduce energy costs, optimizing the structure of the energy balance of the enterprise by choosing the optimal directions, methods and sizes of the use of summed up and secondary energy resources.

The main reason for the need to improve energy efficiency and the implementation of global energy conservation measures is the depletion of natural resources and greenhouse gas emissions. Limited energy, one way or another, affects all states and has become a global problem.

The change in attitude to the use of energy resources is associated with high energy intensity of products. This problem, in turn, entails such consequences as the inefficiency of the economy, the lack of competitiveness of products, low sales on world and domestic markets, export costs, the closure of inefficient enterprises, etc.

2. METHODS OF RESEARCH Energy efficiency monitoring is initially

used to document the current situation. Once a review is received — for example, data from 6 months to one year — you can set complex, but realistic goals to increase efficiency, while continuing to track progress toward your goals. In turn, more data will lead to a better understanding of the energy characteristics of the plant and the development of further goals. This is a well-known procedure known as ―Monitoring & Targeting‖.

2020 EPRA IJMR | www.eprajournals.com | Journal DOI URL: https://doi.org/10.36713/epra2013 114 1




2

Monitoring & Targeting (M & T) is a management approach that helps companies eliminate waste and reduce the current use of energy (and other supplies) by providing timely and relevant information. It also provides an incentive for further improvement by providing concrete evidence of successful performance-enhancing activities from which the economic benefits become apparent.

A similar approach can be adopted for monitoring and managing emissions, although the concept of ―goals‖ is somewhat different here. A reasonable goal is to monitor the level of emissions established by relevant regulations, and many enterprises will strive to fulfill their obligations, rather than reduce emissions further. This can ensure regulatory compliance, although it may well be possible to increase profits by further reducing emissions. Each case must be considered individually, as the situation will vary from enterprise to enterprise.

The implementation of a monitoring and targeting system includes two main functions:

• Continuous monitoring of energy use; • Investing in energy efficiency measures. Management information from effective

monitoring and targeting can improve both performance and quantification of these improvements.

Management information is a vital element in successful monitoring and targeting.

The types of savings that have been achieved through successful monitoring and targeting with minimal or zero investment are improved working methods, improved maintenance schedules and staff training.

Along with cost savings, systematic monitoring and evaluation of energy consumption can lead to higher product quality and higher productivity, as well as lower maintenance and waste costs. Effectively implement a system subject of monitoring and targeting, some costs will be required. Actual cost depends on the details of the monitoring that will be carried out.

The goal of a good M&T system should be:

• Establishment of a consumption model over the past period of time;

• comparison of current consumption with data from previous consumption and (or) standards;

• setting future energy goals; • comparison of actual consumption with

goals; • determination of consumption trends. The energy audit methodology includes the

following levels of energy audits: • preliminary energy audit (pre-audit); • energy audit of the first level - calculation

of energy consumption and costs;

• energy audit of the second level - an in-depth examination of energy technology systems and the industrial enterprise as a whole, calculation of energy flows.

Pre-audit aims to assess the need for an audit.

To do this: • assessment of the share of energy costs in

the total costs of the enterprise (electricity, heat, fuel, water, etc.);

• identification of the dynamics of changes in the share of costs for the last 2-3.

If the share of energy consumption is: • 5-10%, then an energy audit can not be

carried out so far; • 11-15%, then an energy audit is

necessary; • 16–20% or more, an energy audit should

be carried out urgently. An energy audit of the first level has the

following objectives: • determine the structure of energy

consumption and the structure of energy use; • identify and present to the enterprise

management the potential for energy conservation; • identify areas where energy is wasted or

wasted; • prioritize future work; • identify and prove to the management of

the enterprise the feasibility of conducting an in-depth examination.

The energy audit of the second level has the following objectives:

find opportunities for the implementation of energy-saving projects;

evaluate their technical and economic effectiveness;

combine recommendations and technical solutions for rational energy use and energy saving in one system;

create prerequisites for the preparation of a comprehensive long-term plan for the implementation of energy conservation at the enterprise.

A preliminary audit serves to draw up an energy audit program. At this stage, the main characteristics of the enterprise are determined - the range of products, the composition of energy resources consumed, the production structure, the number of employees, the composition of the main equipment and buildings, the operating mode, management structure, etc.

Preliminary audit stages: • acquaintance and initial conversation

with top managers; • familiarization with the company; • analysis of energy supply agreements

concluded by the enterprise. In the process of conversation with the first

managers of the enterprise, it is necessary to identify





3

those who make decisions, obtain initial information about the enterprise, obtain information about the amount of energy consumption in the cost of products, determine the goals of energy-saving measures; to allocate responsibility for the energy audit work carried out at the enterprise and to clarify the list of persons with whom it is necessary to work in the process of energy audit.

Acquaintance with the enterprise includes: inspection of the enterprise; study of power supply schemes; energy accounting systems and production technological schemes.

At this stage, it is necessary to clearly determine the available information on energy use at the enterprise, assess the degree of its reliability, highlight the part that will be used in energy audits.

It is necessary to identify the most energy-intensive units, technological cycles and the places of the most probable losses of energy resources.

At the end of the preliminary stage, an energy audit program is drawn up, which is agreed with the enterprise management and signed by two parties. When compiling the program, the opinion of the surveyed enterprise on the order and priority of work at various sites is taken into account.

The main types of work: • familiarization with the enterprise,

collection and analysis of information available at the enterprise that is useful for energy audits;

• identification of potential energy saving potential at the enterprise.

The main stages of energy audit of the first level:

1) collection of primary information, 2) analysis of energy and economic

indicators of the industrial enterprise, 3) selection of audit objects, 4) preparation of a conclusion on the main

results of the primary energy audit. Primary Information Collection At the preliminary stage, both the survey

organization and the surveyed enterprise participate in the collection of information. Information is recorded in standard forms.

Throughout the energy audit, information is collected in accordance with the developed program. Sources of information are:

• interviews and questionnaires of management and technical personnel;

• power supply and energy metering schemes;

• reporting documentation on commercial and technical accounting of energy resources;

• invoices from energy suppliers; • daily, weekly and monthly load

schedules; • data on the volume of production, prices

and tariffs;

• technical up documentation on technological and auxiliary equipment (technological systems, specifications, regime cards, regulations, etc.);

• reporting documentation on repair, commissioning, testing and energy-saving measures;

• promising programs, feasibility studies, project documentation for any technological and organizational improvements approved by the enterprise development plan.

The company must provide all the necessary information for work for at least the last 3 years. In this case, the surveyed company is responsible for the accuracy of the information provided.

The composition of the primary information:

• general information about the enterprise; • actual reporting data on energy use and

output in the base year and for the last 3 years (by months);

• list of basic energy technology equipment;

• technical and energy characteristics of installations;

• technical and economic characteristics of energy carriers used at the enterprise;

• information about the sources of electricity, heat, water, compressed air, fuel, etc.

Analysis of energy and economic indicators of the enterprise:

• quantitative characteristics of production over the past 3 years by month;

• the cost of production, including the cost of fuel, electric and thermal energy, water at the time of the survey and for the last 3 years by month;

• energy intensity of products; • specific energy intensity of products by

months; • specific energy costs for major products

by month; • the average annual number of employees,

including production and managerial personnel, energy service personnel, etc.

It is necessary to find out the share of which energy resources in total consumption is the most significant, the use of which energy resources should be paid attention to, first of all. Information on energy consumption should show the share consumption of various energy resources at the enterprise and their costs. Information on prices should include the price per unit of fuel and the tariff (if used). Components of prices and differences in prices should be noted.

When considering the structure of tariffs for energy resources, it is necessary to take into account all factors that ultimately determine how much an enterprise pays for energy resources: price





4

changes during the year; tariff structure; differentiated tariff rates; penalties and other payments.

The most complicated is usually the structure of electricity tariffs, which depends on the type of consumer consumption. To assess the potential savings in electricity consumption, you must obtain the following information:

• what is the capacity of each electricity input;

• what is the total power of the connected load;

• what are the load profiles - daily and annual;

• what is the average power factor; • Is reactive power compensation

available? • What is the general structure of power

consumption (engines, lighting, technological processes, etc.).

To assess the efficiency of energy use and the visibility of the information provided, various types of unit costs can be obtained: the average cost of energy and energy; marginal cost; unit cost of energy in an energy carrier; unit cost of useful energy.

At the end of the first familiarization phase, energy auditors should have an idea of the enterprise and the main technological processes, as well as the following information:

• the total cost of the enterprise’s costs for energy, water, sewage and sewage, etc.

• cost structure for energy carriers; • seasonal changes in consumption and

value; • price structure for each energy resource. This information will give a clear picture

of the current situation with energy use at the enterprise and the opportunity to identify priority areas for further work.

The objectives of the energy audit of the second level:

• determination for each energy resource of the most significant consumers in terms of costs and consumption;

• distribution of consumption of each energy resource by main consumers (development of energy balances);

• development of measures to reduce energy consumption.

To achieve your goals you must: • conduct a survey of the enterprise; • draw up diagrams of technological

processes; • make a list of key energy consumers; • calculate the energy consumption of each

of the main energy consumers; • analyze the work of key consumers. When examining the enterprise, you must: • identify energy flows to and from

processes;

• determine the flows of raw materials and products;

• establish flows of losses and waste; • establish production operating modes and

key figures at the enterprise (the key people in the enterprise are process plant operators, foremen and technologists, product managers).

At this stage, the collection of statistical data and primary information, which includes:

• annual and monthly release of main and additional products for both the current and previous 3 years;

• annual and monthly consumption and consumption of energy resources;

• specific norms for the production unit; • fund of working time and shift; • sources of heat, electricity, water, gas,

water, compressed air, etc .; • schemes of heat, water, gas, electricity

and air supply systems, etc. enterprises and individual divisions;

• indicators of energy consumption in existing forms of statistical and in-plant reporting;

• measures to improve energy efficiency and their implementation over the past 3 years;

• state of accounting and rationing of the consumption of heat and electric energy, water, etc .;

• availability of passports for energy-intensive equipment;

• availability of secondary energy resources, including low potential ones, and their use;

• availability of an energy passport of the enterprise.

Process flow charts are a diagram showing the main steps through which materials pass sequentially from the initial state to the finished product.

The diagrams should show the places of supply and use of energy resources, marked the processing of materials, waste disposal in the process.

It is possible to identify the main consumers on the basis of a conversation with the staff, studying the schemes of technological processes, equipment certificates and bypassing the enterprise.

The largest consumers of electricity are usually

• electric furnaces; • heating, ventilation and air conditioning

systems; • compressed air compressors; • technological pumps; • vacuum pumps; • hydraulic pumps; • equipment for mixing and heating liquids; • lighting systems. The main major fuel consumers are

usually: • steam and hot water boilers;





5

• furnaces for various purposes; • fluid heaters; • heating systems. Consumption calculation In order to select the most significant and

prioritize them for a detailed survey from the compiled list of the main consumers of energy resources, it is necessary to know their share in total consumption. To assess the consumption values of individual consumers, it is necessary to consider:

• analysis of seasonal changes in consumption;

• results of measurements and calculations. Seasonal changes in energy consumption

can help separate process energy consumption from heating consumption.

Consumption calculations are often combined with measurements, pricing, and calculations. At this stage, it is not so much the exact values of consumption that are important as the overall picture.

To clarify the calculated data on the balance of energy consumption at the enterprise, it is necessary to evaluate the existing energy flows. There are several ways to evaluate different energy flows:

• use of any existing meters; • use of special portable equipment for

energy audits; • use of design data of the equipment used; • estimation of maximum flows by pipeline

diameters. Designed in accordance with the structure

of the enterprise. The following areas of electricity consumption are distinguished:

• factory costs; • general shop costs for each type of

product; • technological costs of each type of

product.

3. RESULTS The main tasks of the analysis of the energy balance of an industrial enterprise are:

assessment of the actual state of energy use;

identification of the causes and values of energy losses;

improving the operation of technological and energy equipment;

determination of the rational size of energy consumption in production processes and plants;

improvement of standardization methods and development of standards for energy consumption for production;

definition of requirements for the organization, to improve the system of accounting and control over the consumption of various types of energy resources.

Draw up a block diagram of the power supply and apply commercial and technical metering devices to it, identify the missing diagnostic devices for analyzing energy consumption.

Analyze the energy distribution system and its costs. To do this, you need to get, as mentioned above:

• energy bills; • value of tariffs for energy consumed; • real values of energy consumed by the

readings of commercial meters, as well as graphs of typical loads during the winter and summer highs.

Determine the cost of energy resources for individual industries and sections of an industrial enterprise and get the structure of energy distribution.

Calculate the consumption of individual types of energy for various industries and the industrial enterprise as a whole.

To compile the energy balance of an industrial enterprise and analyze:

compliance of the consumed electric energy with the values calculated for bills and tariffs electrical energy;

the ratio of the values of the declared maximum of active power to the largest values of active power in winter and summer during hours of monitoring the maximum power system operation.

Using monitoring and targeting provides the following benefits:

• Better control of energy use, raising awareness of energy costs and increasing commitment to improving energy efficiency,

• good management information for making production and commercial decisions and for forecasting future energy budgets,

• reduction of energy costs, as a rule, by about 10%, but exclusively up to 25%. This is achieved by improving energy use without significant capital expenditures and within existing workloads,

• the best information on ways to improve energy efficiency and cost savings that can be achieved by improving working methods or further investments in improving energy efficiency,

• further reduction of electricity bills through cost-effective investments in measures that increase efficiency,

• More reliable procedures for measuring actual energy cost savings and evaluating the return on investment in energy efficiency.

4. CONCLUSION Indirect benefits from implementing

monitoring and targeting systems include improved control of the building’s environmental conditions and product quality. Monitoring and targeting provide incentives to increase productivity and provide management information to convince senior officials of the value of investing in improving energy efficiency measures.





6

Maintaining the momentum of the M and T programs can be difficult. It is important for the enterprise to conduct a periodic assessment of the system, determine whether goals are being achieved or not, measure the relative success of the methods used to achieve the goals, and identify opportunities for further progress,

To maintain interest, it is necessary to train station personnel at all levels in order to equip them with the skills and knowledge necessary for the efficient operation of the station, understanding and participating in the development of goals and moving towards these aims.

REFERENCES 1. The Future of Manufacturing: Making Things in a

Changing World, Deloitte University Press, 2015.

50p.

2. Sirkin H.L., Zinser M., Rose J. The Robotics

Revolution: The Next Great Leap in

Manufacturing, BCG Perspectives, September

2015.

https://www.bcgperspectives.com/content/articles

/lean-manufacturing-innovation-robotics-

revolution-next-great-leap-manufacturing/

3. Gandhi A., Magar C, Roberts R. How Technology

Can Drive the Next Wave of Mass Customization.

McKinsey on Business Technology. Winter 2013.

№ 32. P. 2-9.

4. Weizsäcker E. et al. Factor Five: Transforming

the Global Economy Through 80% Improvements

in Resource Productivity. A Report to the Club of

Rome. London: Earthscan, 2009. 400p.

5. ICT Facts and Figures: The World in 2015.

International Telecommunication Union.

https://www.itu.int/en/ITU-

D/Statistics/Documents/facts/ICTFactsFigures20

15.pdf

6. Emerging Trends in Global Manufacturing

Industries. UNIDO, Vienna, 2013.

7. Power Forward: Why the World's Largest

Companies are Investing in Renewable Energy.

Ceres, 2012.

8. Power Forward 2.0: How American Companies

are Setting Clean Energy Targets. Ceres, 2014.

9. https://www.epa.gov/sites/production/files/2016-

04/documents/top30onsite_apr2016.pdf

10. www.mininnovation.uz



https://www.epa.gov/sites/production/files/2016-04/documents/top30onsite_apr2016.pdf

https://www.epa.gov/sites/production/files/2016-04/documents/top30onsite_apr2016.pdf

http://www.mininnovation.uz/




DIAGONAL AND NONDIAGONAL MATRIX ELEMENTS

OF THE EFFECTIVE HAMILTONIAN OF ELECTRONS IN A

SEMICONDUCTOR (TAKING INTO ACCOUNT

SPIN-ORBIT INTERACTION)

Voxob Rustamovich Rasulov1

1Docent,

Department of Physics,

Fergana State University,

Uzbekistan.

Rustam Yavkachovich Rasulov2

2Professor,



Uzbekistan.

Akhmedov Bahodir Bahromovich3

3 PhD Research Scholar,



Uzbekistan.

Ravshan Rustamovich Sultanov4

4Undergraduate,



Uzbekistan


ABSTRACT

The matrix elements of the effective Hamiltonian of current carriers are calculated as in the Kane approximation, where the

conduction band, the valence band consisting of light and heavy hole subbands, and the spin-split band, as well as in the

Luttinger-Kohn model, are considered.

KEYWORDS: matrix element, effective Hamiltonian, current carriers, wave function.

INTRODUCTION

It is known that many physical parameters of the crystalline potential depend on the band structure of the

semiconductor [1-5]. Moreover, usually in band theory it is believed that the crystalline periodic potential is always an

even function of coordinates. However, in some cases, for example, in a semiconductor, where there is a heterojunction,

the periodic potential of the crystal, along with the symmetric part, can have an asymmetric part.






THE MAIN RELATIONSHIPS

This case requires a separate analysis of the matrix elements of the effective Hamiltonian of current carriers

as in the Kane approximation, where the conduction band, the valence band consisting of light and heavy hole subbands,

and the spin-split band, as well as in the Luttinger-Kohn model [6, 7]. Next, we consider the case when the extreme

points of the zones are in the center of the Brillouin zone, i.e. at the point k⃗ = 0, where k⃗ is the wave vector of current

carriers. In this case, the effective Hamiltonian can be represented as

H = H0 +ћ

4m0𝒞22 ,∇⃗⃗ V × p⃗ - ⋅ σ⃗⃗ (1)

and the corresponding (1) Schrödinger equation has the form

*H0 +ћ

4m0C22 ,∇⃗⃗ V × p⃗ - ⋅ σ⃗⃗ +ψnk⃗⃗ (r ) = En(k⃗ )ψnk⃗⃗ (r ) , (2)

where H0 =p2

2m0+ V(r) consists of kinetic and potential energy operators, the second term in (1) is the spin-orbit

interaction operator, σ⃗⃗ is the vector of Pauli spin matrices with components:

σx = {0 11 0

} σy = {0 − i0 i

} σz = {1 00 −1

} (3)

whence for the spinors ↑≡ {10} ↓≡ {

01} we have the following relations

σx ↑=↓ σy ↑= i ↓ σz ↑=↑ σx ↓=↑ σy ↓= −i ↑ σz ↓= −↓ (4)

If the solution (3) is sought in the form of the Bloch function ψnk⃗⃗ (r ) = eik⃗⃗ r⃗ unk⃗⃗ (r ),, then we obtain the

equation for the Bloch amplitude unk⃗⃗ (r) as

*H0 +ћ

m0k⃗ p⃗ +

ћ

4m0𝒞22 ,∇⃗⃗ V × p⃗ - ∙ σ⃗⃗ +

ћ2

4m0𝒞22 ,∇⃗⃗ V × k⃗ - ∙ σ⃗⃗ +unk⃗⃗ (r ) = E′unk⃗⃗ (r) (5)

where E′ = En(k⃗ ) −ћ2k2

2m0. The last term in (5) describes the spin-orbit interaction, which depends on the wave vector of

current carriers. Thus, the effective Hamiltonian acting on the periodic function unk⃗⃗ (r) is expressed as:

H = H0 +ћ

m0k⃗ p⃗ +

ћ2

4m02с2

,∇⃗⃗ V × k⃗ - ⋅ σ⃗⃗ +ћ

4m02с2

,∇⃗⃗ V × p⃗ - ⋅ σ⃗⃗ (6)

Here H1 =ћ

m0k⃗ p⃗ and H2 =

ћ2

4m02с2

[∇⃗⃗ V × k⃗ ] ⋅ σ⃗⃗ appear due to the transition from the Bloch function to the function

unk⃗⃗ (r), the term H3 =ћ

4m02с2

,∇⃗⃗ V × p⃗ - ⋅ σ⃗⃗ describes p⃗ dependent in-orbit interaction. The Bloch amplitude unk⃗⃗ (r)

for electrons in the conduction band can be represented as: |iS ↑⟩, |iS ↓⟩, and for holes in the valence band -|X ↑⟩,

|X ↓⟩, |Y ↑⟩, |Y ↓⟩, |Z ↑⟩, |Z ↓⟩ with the corresponding intrinsic energies Es and Ep , which are defined as

H0|S⟩ = Ec|S⟩, H0|X⟩ = Ep|X⟩, H0|Y⟩ = Ep|Y⟩, H0|Z⟩ = Ep|Z⟩, where [8]





|S⟩ =1

√4π , |Z⟩ = √

3

4π

z

r , |X ± iY⟩ = √

3

4π

x±iy

r, (7)

where it was considered that the wave function of the electrons in the conduction band is the wave function of the

s-state, and for the valence band, the p-state of the hydrogen atom. Since the states in the conduction band are twofold

degenerate along the spin, and in the valence band fourfold degenerate, therefore, the basic functions can be represented

as:

|1⟩ = |iS ↓⟩, |2⟩ = |X−iY

√2↑⟩, |3⟩ = |Z ↓⟩, |4⟩ = | −

X+iY

√2↑⟩ , (8)

|1⟩ = |iS ↑⟩, |2⟩ = | −X+iY

√2↓⟩, = |Z ↑⟩, = |

X−iY

√2↓⟩ . (9)

RESULTS AND CONCLUSIONS

First, we determine the diagonal matrix elements of the Hamiltonian (6) from the basis functions (8) and (9).

This requires calculating the matrix elements of each term (6) separately, where in further calculations we take into

account that ∭x2m+1∙yl∙zμ

rn

∞

−∞dr = ∭

xm∙y2l+1∙zμ

rn

∞

−∞dr = ∭

xm∙yl∙z2μ+1

rn

∞

−∞dr = 0 , where dr = dxdydz , m, l, μ are

integers. Then the matrix elements of the operators

H1 =ћ

m0k⃗ p⃗ , H2 =

ћ2

4m02с2

[∇⃗⃗ V × k⃗ ] ⋅ σ⃗⃗ , H3 =ћ

4m02с2

,∇⃗⃗ V × p⃗ - ⋅ σ⃗⃗ (10)

are defined with the following relations

(H0)11 = ⟨1|H0|1⟩ = ⟨−iS ↓ |H0|iS ↓⟩ = ⟨S|Es|S⟩ = Es, (11)

(H1)11 = ⟨1|H1|1⟩ = ⟨−iS ↓ |H1|iS ↓⟩ = ⟨S|ћ

m0k⃗ p⃗ |S⟩ = 0, (12)

(H2)11 = ⟨1|H2|1⟩ = ⟨−iS ↓ |H2|iS ↓⟩ =

= ⟨−iS ↓ |ћ2

4m02с2

[∇⃗⃗ V × k⃗ ] ⋅ σ⃗⃗ |iS ↓⟩ = −ћ2

16πm02с2

𝒥1 (13)

where

𝒥1 = ∭ {∂V

∂xky −

∂V

∂ykx}

∞

−∞dxdydz (14)

and take into account that p⃗ |S⟩ = 0 (since the function S is a constant value), as well as the conditions of orthonormal

spinors

σx ↑=↓, σy ↑= i ↓, σz ↑=↑, σx ↓=↑, σy ↓= −i ↑, σz ↓= −↓ . (15)

If we consider that the crystalline periodic potential consists of two: even and odd terms with respect to the

coordinate inversion: V(r ) = Vass(r ) + Vsim(r ), where Vsim(r )V(r ) = (−r⃗⃗⃗⃗ ⃗), Vass(r ) = −Vass(−r ), Vass(r ), then it is

easy to verify that the integral 𝒥1 has nonzero terms. Therefore, we analyze the following cases.

It follows from (14) that: a) if V(r ) has an odd term with respect to z, then 𝒥1 = 0; b) if V(r ) has an odd

term with respect to x, then 𝒥11 ≠ 0; c) if V(r ) has an odd term with respect to y, then 𝒥12 ≠ 0; e) if V(r ) has an odd

term with respect to x and y, then 𝒥1 ≠ 0.





(H3)11 = ⟨−iS ↓ |H3|iS ↓⟩ = ⟨−iS ↓ |ћ

4m02с2

,∇⃗⃗ V × p⃗ - ⋅ σ⃗⃗ |iS ↓⟩ =

= −ћ

4m02с2

⟨S |[∇⃗⃗ V × p⃗ ]z| S⟩ = 0 (16)

The diagonal matrix elements of the effective Hamiltonian are defined by the following expressions:

(H0)22 = *X+iY

√2|H0|

X−iY

√2+ = Ep , (17)

(H1)22 = ⟨X + iY

√2↑ |H1|

X − iY

√2↑⟩ = 𝒥22

(1)+ 𝒥22

(2)+ 𝒥22

(3)+ 𝒥22

(4).

where

𝒥22(1)

= −ћ2

4m02с2

1

i

3

4π∭

1

r4{x2yky + (xy2 + xz2)kX}

∞

−∞dxdydz,

𝒥22(2)

= +ћ2

4m02с2

1

i

3

4π∭

1

r4{(yx2 + yz2)ky + xy2kX}

∞

−∞dxdydz,

𝒥22(3)

= −ћ2

4m02с2

3

4π∭

1

r4{(x3 + xz2)ky + x2ykX}

∞

−∞dxdydz,

𝒥22(4)

= −ћ2

4m02с2

1

i

3

4π∭

1

r4{xy2ky + (y3 + yz2)kX}

∞

−∞dxdydz,

whence it is clear that: a) 𝒥22(1)

consists of three terms, the first of which is nonzero for V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) +

Vsim(z), and the second is different from zero for V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vsim(z); b) 𝒥22(2)

consists of two terms,

the first of which is nonzero for V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vsim(z) , and the second is nonzero for V(r ) =

Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vsim(z); c) 𝒥22(3)

consists of two terms, the first of which is nonzero for V(r ) = Vsim(x) +

Vasim(y) + Vsim(z), and the second is nonzero for V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vsim(z); d) 𝒥22(4)

consists of two terms,

the first of which is nonzero for V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vsim(z) , and the second is nonzero for V(r ) =

Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vsim(z).

(H2)22 = ⟨X+iY

√2↑ |H2|

X−iY

√2↑⟩ ==ℛ22

(1)+ ℛ22

(2)+ ℛ22

(3)+ ℛ22

(4), (18)

where

ℛ22(1)

=ћ2

4m02с2

3

4π∭

1

r2{x2 ∂V

∂xky − x2 ∂V

∂ykx}

∞

−∞dxdydz,

ℛ22(2)

=(−i)ћ2

4m02с2

3

4π∭

1

r2{xy

∂V

∂xky − xy

∂V

∂ykx}

∞

−∞

dxdydz,

ℛ22(3)

=iћ2

4m02с2

3

4π∭

1

r2{xy

∂V

∂xky − xy

∂V

∂ykx}

∞

−∞

dxdydz,

ℛ22(4)

=ћ2

4m02с2

3

4π∭

1

r2{y2

∂V

∂xky − y2

∂V

∂ykx}

∞

−∞

dxdydz.

The last relations show that: a) ℛ22(1)

consists of two terms, the first of which is nonzero for V(r ) =

Vasim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vsim(z), and the second is nonzero for V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vasim(z), and the third for





V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vsim(z); b) ℛ22(2)

consists of three terms, the first of which is nonzero for V(r ) =

Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vsim(z), and the second is nonzero for V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vasim(z), and the third with

V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vsim(z); c) ℛ22(3)


Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vsim(z) , and the second and third terms are nonzero when V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vasim(y) +

Vsim(z); d) ℛ22(4)

consists of two terms, the first of which is nonzero for V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vsim(z), and the

second is nonzero for V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vsim(z).

(H3)22=ћ

4m02с2

*ℑ33(1)

+ ℑ33(2)

+ ℑ33(3)

+ ℑ33(4)

+

ℑ33(1)

= i3ℏ

4π∭

1

r4{∂V(r⃗ )

∂yzx2 −

∂V(r⃗ )

∂zx2y}

∞

−∞dxdydz,

ℑ33(2)

= i3ℏ

4π∭

1

r4{∂V(r )

∂yy2z + (yx2 + yz2)

∂V(r )

∂z}

∞

−∞

dxdydz,

ℑ33(3)

= +3ℏ

4π∭

1

r4{xyz

∂V(r )

∂y+ (x3 + xz2)

∂V(r )

∂z}

∞

−∞

dxdydz,

ℑ33(4)

= −3ℏ

4π∭

1

r4{xyz

∂V(r⃗ )

∂y− xy2 ∂V(r⃗ )

∂z}

∞

−∞dxdydz,

Analyzing the last relations, we have that: a) ℑ33(1)

is nonzero at V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vasim(z); b)

ℑ33(2)

consists of three terms, the first of which is nonzero at V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vasim(z), and the second is

nonzero at V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vasim(z), and the third with V(r ) = Vфsim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vsim(z); c) 𝒥33(3)

consists of three terms, the first of which is nonzero for V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vasim(z), and the second and

third terms are nonzero when V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vasim(z); d) ℑ33(4)

consists of two terms, the first of which is

nonzero for V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vasim(z) , and the second is nonzero for V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vsim(y) +

Vsim(z).

Below are expressions for the matrix element of each member of the Hamiltonian. In particular, (H0)33 =

⟨Z ↓ |H0|Z ↓⟩ = ⟨Z|Ep|Z⟩ = Ep and does not depend on the parity of the crystal potential relative to the coordinates;

(H1)33 = ⟨Z ↓ |H1|Z ↓⟩ = ⟨Z ↓ |ћ

m0

k⃗ p⃗ | Z ↓⟩ =<↓↓> ⟨Z |ћ

m0

k⃗ p⃗ | Z⟩ =

= iћ2

4m02с2

3

4π∭

1

r2{kx(−xz2) + ky(−yz2) + kzz

y2 + x2

r3}

∞

−∞

dxdydz,

whence we have that the first term of the last integral is nonzero for V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vsim(z), and the

second for V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vsim(z), the third is when V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vasim(z).

(H2)33 = ⟨Z ↓ |H1|Z ↓⟩ = ⟨Z ↓ |ћ

m0

k⃗ p⃗ | Z ↓⟩ =<↓↓> ⟨Z |ћ

m0

k⃗ p⃗ | Z⟩ =

= iћ2

4m02с2

3

4π∭

1

r2{kx(−xz2) + ky(−yz2) + kzz

y2 + x2

r3}

∞

−∞

dxdydz.

It can be seen from the last relations that the first term of the matrix element (H2)33 is nonzero for





V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vsim(z), and the second for V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vsim(z), the third is when

V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vasim(z).

(H3)33=⟨Z ↓ |H3|Z ↓⟩ = ⟨Z ↓ |ћ2

4m02с2

[∇⃗⃗ V × p⃗ ] ⋅ σ⃗⃗ |Z ↓>=

= −iћ2

4m02с2

3

4π∭

1

r4{z2 ∂V(r⃗ )

∂xy − xz2 ∂V(r⃗ )

∂y}

∞

−∞dxdyd and this matrix element is nonzero at V(r ) = Vasim(x) +

Vasim(y) + Vsim(z).

The nondiagonal matrix elements ⟨1|H0|2⟩ , ⟨1|H1|2⟩ is equal to zero, and the expression for the

nondiagonal matrix elements ⟨1|H2|2⟩ and ⟨1|H3|2⟩ are given below

⟨1|H2|2⟩ = ⟨1|H2|2⟩ = ⟨−iS ↓ |H2|X−iY

√2↑⟩ =

ћ2

4m02с2

*𝒥21 − i𝒥22+,

⟨1|H3|2⟩ = ⟨1|H3|2⟩ = ⟨−iS ↓ |H3|X−iY

√2↑⟩ =

ћ

4m02с2

(𝒥31 − i𝒥32),

where

𝒥21 = 𝒥21(1)

− i𝒥21(2)

, 𝒥21(1)

= kz√1

4π√

3

4π∭

∂V(r⃗ )

∂y

x−iy

r

∞

−∞dxdydz,

𝒥21(2)

= ky√3

4π√

1

4π∭

∂V(r )

∂z

x − iy

r

∞

−∞

dxdydz;

𝒥22 = 𝒥22(1)

− i𝒥22(2)

, 𝒥22(1)

= kx√1

4π√

3

4π∭

∂V(r⃗ )

∂z

x−iy

r

∞

−∞dxdydz,

𝒥22(2)

= kz√3

4π√

1

4π∭

∂V(r )

∂x

x − iy

r

x − iy

r

∞

−∞

dxdydz;

𝒥31 = ⟨S |[∇⃗⃗ V × p⃗ ]x|X−iY

√2⟩ = 𝒥32

(1)− 𝒥31

(2),

𝒥31(1)

=ℏ

i√

1

4π√

3

4π∭ {

∂V(r⃗ )

∂y} (−1)

z

r

x−iy

r2

∞

−∞dxdydz,

𝒥31(2)

=ℏ

i√

1

4π√

3

4π∭ {

∂V(r )

∂z}

1

r3*−i(x2 + z2) − yx+

∞

−∞

dxdydz;

𝒥32 = ⟨S |[∇⃗⃗ V × p⃗ ]y|X−iY

√2⟩ = 𝒥32

(1)− 𝒥32

(2),

𝒥32(1)

=ℏ

i√

1

4π√

3

2π∭ {

∂V(r )

∂z}

1

r3*y2 + z2 − iyx+

∞

−∞

dxdydz,

𝒥32(2)

=ℏ

i√

1

4π√

3

4π∭ {

∂V(r )

∂x} (−1)

z

r

x − iy

r2

∞

−∞

dxdydz,

whence it is clear that the nonzero values of these matrix elements are determined by the physical nature, i.e. depending

on the coordinate of the crystalline potential: V(r ) = Vass(r ) + Vsim(r ).





Now we analyze the functions of 𝒥lm: a) 𝒥21 consists of two terms, the first of which is nonzero for

V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vsim(z), and the second is nonzero for V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vasim(z); b) 𝒥22

consists of two terms, the first of which is nonzero for V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vasim(z), and the second is

nonzero for V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vsim(z) ; c) 𝒥21(1)

differs from zero for V(r ) = Vasim(x, ) + Vsim(y) +

Vsim(z); d) 𝒥21(2)

and 𝒥22(1)

consists of two terms, the first of which is nonzero for V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vsim(y) +

Vasim(z), and the second is not equal to zero when V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vasim(z); e) 𝒥22(2)

consists of two

terms, the first of which is is not equal to zero when V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vsim(z), and the second is nonzero

for V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vsim(z); f) 𝒥31(1)


Vasim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vasim(z), and the second is differs from zero at V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vasim(z); g) 𝒥31(2)

consists of two terms, the first of which is nonzero at V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vasim(z), and the second is differs

from zero at V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vasim(z); i) 𝒥32(1)

consists of two terms, the first of which is not equal to

zero when V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vasim(z) , and the second is nonzero at V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vasim(y) +

Vasim(z); k) 𝒥32(2)

consists of two terms, the first of which is differs from zero at V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) +

Vasim(z), and the second is not equal to zero when V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vasim(z).

Similarly, we obtain the expressions for the following matrix elements: (H0)13 = ⟨1|H|3⟩ = ⟨−iS ↓

|H|Z ↓⟩ = 0, (H1)13 = ⟨−iS ↓ |H1|Z ↓⟩ = −i⟨S|ћ

m0k⃗ p⃗ |Z⟩ = kz℘z, where ℘z = −

ћ2

m0

√3

4π∭

x2+y2

r3

∞

−∞dxdydz. А также

and

(H2)13 = ⟨−iS ↓ |H2|Z ↓⟩ = ⟨−iS ↓ |ћ2

4m02с2

[∇⃗⃗ V × k⃗ ] ⋅ σ⃗⃗ |Z ↓>=

= iћ2

4m02с2

1

√4π√

3

4π∭ (

∂V

∂xky −

∂V

∂ykx)

z

r

∞

−∞

dxdydz,

It can be seen from the latter that the first term is nonzero for V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vsim(y) + Vasim(z), and the

second term is nonzero for V(r ) = Vsim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vasim(z). Also

(H3)13 = ⟨−iS ↓ |H3|Z ↓⟩ = −(−i)ћ

4m02с2

⟨S |[∇⃗⃗ V × p⃗ ]z| Z⟩ =

= −ћ2

4m02с2

√3

4π∭

1

r3{yz

∂V

∂x− xz

∂V

∂y}

∞

−∞

dxdydz

whence it is clear that this matrix element is nonzero at V(r ) = Vasim(x) + Vasim(y) + Vasim(z).

Thus, it was shown that, when the asymmetric part of the crystalline potential in semiconductors is taken into

account, additional terms are obtained in the matrix elements of the effective Hamiltonian.

If we assume that the crystalline potential does not have an asymmetric part, then all the expressions obtained

above and related to Vasim(x, y, z) turn to zero automatically.





REFERENCES

1. Charles Kittel. (2005), “Introduction to Solid State Physics.” John Wiley and Sons, Inc. All. Rights reserved. -675 p.

2. J. M. Ziman. (1972) “Principles of the Theory of Solids”. Cambridge University Press, - 435 p.

3. Mohammad Abdul Wahab. (2005) “Solid State Physics: Structure and Properties of Materials” Alpha Science

International, -596 p. 1842652184, 9781842652183.

4. Neil W. Ashcroft, Mermin Ashcroft, Dan Wei, N. David Mermin.(2016) “Solid State Physics.” CENGAGE Learning Asia, -

1332 p.

5. Cardona Yu Peter, Cardona Manuel.( 2002) “Fundamentals of Semiconductor Physics.” Translate. from English I.I.

Reshina. Ed. B.P. Zakharcheni. - 3rd ed., Rev. and add. -M .: Fizmatlit, -560 s. http://www.twirpx.com/file/221809/.

6. G. L. Bir, G. E. Pikus.( 1974) “Symmetry and Strain-induced Effects in Semiconductors”. Wiley, - 484 p. ISBN 0470073217,

9780470073216.

7. E.L.Ivchenko, R.Ya.Rasulov. (1989) “Symmetry and real band structure of semiconductors.” -Tashkent. -Fan. –126 p.

8. L. D. Landau E. M. Lifshitz. (1977) “Quantum Mechanics” 3rd edition. Non-Relativistic Theory. Pergamon. -688 p.




JOB PREFERENCES OF BS CRIMINOLOGY GRADUATES BATCH 2018-2019 OF NUEVA ECIJA UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

Shirley P. Ayeo-Eo Nueva Ecija University of Science and Technology,

College of Criminology,

Cabanatuan City,

Nueva Ecija,

Philippines

ABSTRACT The study determined the job preferences of BS Criminology Graduates Batch 2018-2019 of NEUST for job placement or

hiring. Data were gathered from 70 respondents randomly selected. Using a descriptive survey method, the study revealed

that, most preferred agencies are Philippine National Police, Bureau of Jail Management and Penology and Bureau of

Fire Protection. The two least opted are to become Criminology Instructor and the field of Industrial Security. The

respondents identified their selves as highly competent in patrolling but competent to the rest of the areas such as traffic

directions and control, and community relations. However, respondents were least competent in terms of performing

front desk assignment, report writing and teaching.

KEY WORDS: Job Preference, BS Criminology, Senior Students, NEUST

INTRODUCTION

Choosing the right profession in accordance to college degree obtained is very essential. Also, correct staffing is a significant element for an organization to achieve its very purpose of existence. Hence, graduates of Bachelor of Science in Criminology should be working to agencies they rightfully belong based on the mandates of Republic Act 11131 also known as The Philippine Criminology Profession Act of 2018.

The Nueva Ecija University of Science and Technology (NEUST) offered Bachelor of Science in Criminology in the year 2008. Four years after, it started producing graduates and eventually becoming Registered Criminologist until today. The Republic Act 11131 provides that registered criminologist refers to a natural person who holds a valid certificate of registration and an updated professional identification card as criminologist issued by the Board (Professional Regulatory Board for Criminologists) and the Commission (Professional Regulation Commission). In essence, a Registered Criminologist can venture to any of the following: a) as a law enforcement administrator, executive, adviser, consultant, officer, investigator, agent or employee in any private or government agencies performing law enforcement and quasi-police functions at the Philippine National Police (PNP), the National Bureau of Investigation (NBI), the Philippine Drug Enforcement Agency (PDEA), the

Bureau of Fire Protection (BFP), the Bureau of Jail Management and Penology (BJMP), the Provincial Jail, the Bureau of Corrections (BUCOR), the Probation and Parole Administration (PPA), the Bureau of Internal Revenue (BIR), the Bureau of Customs (BoC), the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas (BSP), other government and private banks, the Philippine Postal Corporation (PPC), the Sea and Air Marshalls, the VIP Security, Airport and Seaport Police, the National Intelligence Coordinating Agency (NICA), the Intelligence Service of the Armed Forces of the Philippines (ISAFP), and other intelligence service or agencies of the government exercising similar functions; b) teach as professor, instructor or teacher in any university, college or school duly recognized by the government; c) As a technician, examiner/criminalist, or specialist; d) as a correctional administrator, executive, supervisor, or officer in any rehabilitation, correctional, and penal institution or facility, and in any community-based corrections, and rehabilitation agencies and/or programs; e) as a counsellor, consultant, adviser or researcher in any government or private agency on any aspect of criminological research or project involving the causes of crime, children in conflict with the law, treatment of offenders, police operations, law enforcement administration, scientific criminal investigation or public safety and national security administration; and f) As a private investigator, administrator, consultant or agent, or




detective in any private security and investigation agency organized under the laws of the Philippines. Further, relative to teaching, Section 11 of Republic Act No. 8981 provides that, All subjects for licensure examinations shall be taught by persons who are holders of valid certificates of registration and valid professional licenses of the profession and who comply with the other requirements of the CHED (Commission on Higher Education). Hence, passing the licensure examination or becoming a Registered Criminologist is the very key for NEUST criminology graduates be employed in their preferred work aforementioned.

The NEUST is a consistent producer of Registered Criminologists every Criminologists Licensure Examination (CLE). Evidently, survey of Local Pulse (2018) showed that the NEUST College of Criminology ranked 6th out of 624 colleges and universities offering criminology course all over the country. It entails that the University maintains standard of education that equips criminology graduates with appropriate competence that is beneficial on their employment. In fact, Aydinan (2019) on his study Employment Array of Bachelor of Science in Criminology Graduates in Nueva Ecija University of Science and Technology found out that most of the Criminology graduates are now employed in different law enforcement agencies such as the PNP, BJMP, and BFP - the tri-bureau.

Personnel competence is important in every workplace. According to Business Dictionary (06 January 2020), competence indicates sufficiency of knowledge and skills that enable someone to act in a wide variety of situations. Similarly, competency is a series of knowledge, abilities, skills, experiences and behaviors, which leads to the effective performance of individual's activities Maaleki (2018). Also, Weinert (1999), competence pertains to “cognitive fitness for a particular class of tasks, a roughly specialized system of abilities, proficiencies, or individual dispositions to learn something successfully, to do something successfully, or to reach a specific goal. This can be applied to an individual, a group of individuals, or an institution.” Study of Abas and Ombra (2016) showed that one critical measure of success in workplaces is an employee‟s ability to use competently the knowledge, skills and values that match the needs of his job, satisfy the demands of his employer, and contribute to the overall achievement of institutional goals. In connection thereto, in consideration of the job opportunities of Registered Criminologists which are mostly public service, it therefore demands not only a license to practice profession but also competence or work competence. Hence, in accordance to the Commission on Higher Education Memorandum Order No. 5, s. 2018, criminology graduates must be competent to the following areas for their future employment: a) traffic direction and

control; b) patrolling; c) guarding; d) front desk assignment; e) criminal investigation; f) report writing; g) community relations; h) observance of protocol; i) firefighting; j) jail assignment; and k) teaching in Criminology.

Work preference plays a significant role towards the attainment of individual or organization‟s success. As cited by Gilbert, Sohi, and McEachern (2008), work preferences are the outcomes individuals desire from their engagement in paid work (Konrad et al., 2000). They influence career choice decisions (Brown, 1996) and are critical determinants of job attitudes and work motivation (Brenner et al., 1988). Likewise, job preference may cause satisfaction to personnel or employees. According to Voordt (2004), employee satisfaction refers to the degree to which the working environment meets the wishes and the needs of the employees. Hence, working to a suitable, desired or preferred occupation makes personnel productive, effective, and efficient.

The researcher believes that understanding the job preferences and competencies of graduates may somehow help administrators and faculty of any educational institutions in their decision-making towards improvement of certain program. Hence, the present study tried to assess the job preferences and competencies of the Criminology Graduates of NEUST College of Criminology Batch 2019-2020 in order to identify their job interests and provide possible improvement on the College‟ academic programs geared towards work-related competency development for the benefit of the present and future criminology students. In doing so, it could prepare NEUST Criminology students or graduates become more capable and confident to performing their desired future line of work.

Specifically, this study attempted to answer the following:

1. What are the Job Preferences of NEUST Bachelor of Science in Criminology Graduates Batch 2018-2019?

2. How may the level of competence of NEUST Bachelor of Science in Criminology Graduates Batch 2018-2019 be described?

METHODOLOGY The study is descriptive in nature since it

aims to study the present condition/situation as it would like to know „what is‟ or as exists about the senior students. As cited by Eduardo (2018), descriptive method is a purposive process of gathering, analyzing, classifying, and tabulating data about prevailing conditions, practices, beliefs, process es, trends and cause-effect relationships and then making adequate and accurate interpretation about such data with or without the aid of the




statistical methods. Respondents were identified through total sampling. Data were gathered from 70 NEUST Bachelor of Science in Criminology Graduates Batch 2018-2019 through researcher-prepared questionnaire validated by an expert supported by an interview upon attainment of the consent of the Dean of the College. Reliability of the research instrument was determined through Cronbach's alpha. The research was conduct within the School Year 2019-2020. The analysis of data utilized tallying, frequency counts, Average Weighted Mean (AWM) and ranking.

RESULTS and DISCUSSIONS 1. Job Preferences of BS Criminology Graduates Batch of 2019-2020

Table 1 shows that Philippine National Police ranked 1st, Bureau of Jail Management ad Penology, ranked 2nd, and Bureau of Fire Protection ranked 3rd as preferred agencies of BS Criminology graduates Batch of 2019-2020 to work for with a frequency of 47, 25, and 19, respectively. However, the last option (ranked 7) is to join the Industrial Security with a frequency of 7.

Table 1. Job preferences of the Senior BS Criminology Graduates Agency/Institution Frequency Rank

1. Philippine National Police (PNP) 47 1 2. Bureau of Jail Management and Penology

(BJMP) 25 2

3. Bureau of Fire Protection (BFP) 19 3 4. Armed Forces of the Philippines (AFP) 17 4 5. Industrial Security (IS) 11 7 6. Criminology Instructor (CI) 14 6 7. Philippine Coast Guard (PCG) 17 5 8. Others None Specified

It implies that most of the respondents are

settled in joining the uniform force within the umbrella of the Department of Interior and Local Government which is expected. Further, interview revealed that most of the respondents have chosen the tri-bureau (PNP, BJMP and BFP) due to its civilian character concept consisting of lesser military training unlike the Armed Forces of the Philippines. Also, respondents were motivated to join the uniform service due to salary factor which is greater as compared to being a college instructor or working in the security industry. 2. Level of Competence of BS Criminology Graduates Batch 2019-2020 Table 2 shows that BS Criminology Batch 2019-2020 are highly competent in Patrolling with a mean of

4.02 (ranked 1st) which implies that they perform beyond the standards set by the agency or institution whom they perform patrolling. Also, they are competent on all work activities but Traffic Direction and Control and Community Relations ranked 2nd and 3rd with means of 3.46 and 3.44, respectively. The last (10th rank) is Teaching with a mean of 2.64 but still described as competent. It implies that BS Criminology Graduates Batch 2019-2020 perform within the standards required by different agencies or institution. It is noteworthy that Teaching got the lowest mean which is expected considering the nature of the work which requires in-depth trainings concerning teaching methodologies, strategies and the like.




Table 2. Level of Competence of BS Criminology Graduates Batch 2019-2020

Work Activities Average

Weighted Mean Descriptive Equivalent

Rank

1. Teaching 2.64 Competent 10 2. Front Desk Assignment 2.88 Competent 9.5

3. Report Writing 2.88 Competent 9.5 4. Criminal Investigation 2.96 Competent 8

5. Fire-fighting 3.00 Competent 7 6. Observance of Protocol 3.06 Competent 6

7. Jail Assignment 3.14 Competent 5 8. Guarding 3.18 Competent 4

9. Community Relations 3.44 Competent 3 10. Traffic Direction and Control 3.46 Competent 2

11. Patrolling 4.02 Highly Competent

1

Overall Mean 3.15 Competent Scale: Highly Competent : 3.51 – 4.00 Competent : 2.51 – 3.50 Moderately Competent : 1.51 – 2.50

Not Competent : 1.00 – 1.50 The overall mean is 3.15 described as

Competent. It signifies that the BS Criminology Graduates Batch 2019-2020 are capable of discharging their duties within the established standards needed by the aforesaid agencies or institutions. Further, it implies that they have learned the appropriate competence, skills, techniques, and the like their instructors or faculty have taught during their academic years.

CONCLUSION In the light of the findings, the researcher concluded that the Philippine National Police, Bureau of Jail Management and Penology, and Bureau of Fire Protection greatly attracts or influences criminology students or graduates. Also, the College of Criminology of Nueva Ecija University of Science and Technology imbibe to their students the needed competence the tri-bureau requires. Similarly, the faculty of the College observe the appropriate level and content of instruction provided by relative CHED Memorandum order.

REFERENCES 1. Abas, Maripaz & Imam, Ombra. (2016).

Graduates’ competence on employability skills

and job performance. International Journal of

Evaluation and Research in Education (IJERE).

5. 119. 10.11591/ijere.v5i2.4530.

2. Aydinan, JJ B. (2019). Employment array of

bachelor of science in criminology graduates in

Nueva Ecija University of Science and

Technology. International Journal of Arts,

Humanities and Social Sciences. Accessed from

https://ijels.com/ detail/employment-array-of-

bachelor-of-science-in-criminology-graduates-in-

nueva-ecija-university-of-science-and-

technology. Accessed: 12.16.2019.

3. competence. BusinessDictionary.com. Retrieved

from Business Dictionary.com website:

http://www.business dictionary. com/

definition/competence.html. Accessed: January

06, 2020.

4. CMO 05 s. 2018. Policies, Standards and

Guidelines for the Bachelor of Science in

Criminology (BS Criminology) Program. April

25, 2018.

5. Eduardo, J. (2018). Indigenous peoples’ rights

act (IPRA) of 1997: A standpoint from selected

higher education institutions in Nueva Ecija After

20 Years. Journal of Progressive Research in

Social Sciences, 8(1), 595-613. Retrieved from

http://www.scitecresearch.

com/journals/index.php/jprs s/article/view/1547.

Accessed: 8.8.2019.

6. Local Pulse. (2018). 32 Best Criminology Schools

in the Philippines for 2018. Retrieved from

https://www.localpulse.net/education/top-

schools/32-ranked-best-criminology-schools-in-

the-philippines-for-2018-31964/. Accessed:

12.8.2019.

7. Maaleki, Ali (9 April 2018). The ARZESH

competency model: Appraisal & development

manager's competency model. Lambert Academic

Publishing. p. 18. ISBN 9786138389668.

8. Republic Act No. 11131. The Philippine

Criminology Profession Act of 2018. November 8,

2018.

9. Republic Act No. 8981. PRC (Professional

Regulation Commission) Modernization Act of

2000. December 05, 2000.

10. Weinert, F. E. (1999). Concepts of competence,

definition and selection of competencies

(DeSeCo). Organisation for Economic Co-

operation and Development (OECD). Available

from:

http://citeseerx.ist.psu.edu/viewdoc/download?doi


https://ijels.com/%20detail/employment-array-of-bachelor-of-science-in-criminology-graduates-in-nueva-ecija-university-of-science-and-technology




http://www.business/

http://www.scitecresearch/

https://www.localpulse.net/education/top-schools/32-ranked-best-criminology-schools-in-the-philippines-for-2018-31964/





=10.1.1.111.1152&rep=rep1&type=pdf.

Accessed: 2 April 2016.

11. Gilbert, G. R., Sohi, R. S., & McEachern, A. G.

(2008). Measuring Work Preferences: A

Multidimensional Tool to Enhance Career Self-

Management. Marketing Department Faculty

Publications. Retrieved from

https://digitalcommons.unl.edu/marketingfacpub/

18. Accessed: January 5, 2019.

12. Voordt, T.J.V.D., 2004. Productivity and

employee satisfaction in flexible workplaces.

Journal of Corporate Real Estate, 6(2), 133-148.


https://digitalcommons.unl.edu/marketingfacpub/18

https://digitalcommons.unl.edu/marketingfacpub/18



THE EFFECT OF CURRENT RATIO, AND GROWTH

ASSETS ON DIVIDEND POLICY (Empirical Study of Property, Real Estate and Building Construction Sector Companies Listed

on the Indonesia Stock Exchange for the Period of 2015-2017)

Garin Pratiwi Solihati,S.

Business and Economic Faculty,

Mercubuana University,

Jakarta, Indonesia


ABSTRACT

This study aims to determine and analyze the effect of the current ratio and growth assets on dividend policy partially and

simultaneously. By testing the independent variables one by one dependent and jointly testing all independent variables. This

type of research used quantitative research.

The objects of this study are all Property, Real Estate and Buillding companies listed on the Indonesia Stock

Exchange (IDX) in the 2015-2017 period. This research was conducted on 19 companies, the sample selection method used

was purposive sampling method. The data analysis method used in this study is multiple linear regression, which is an

analysis of the relationship between one dependent variable with two or more independent variables.

The results of this study indicate that partially and simultaneously the Current Ratio has a positive and significant

effect on Dividend Payout Ratio, and Growth Asset has a negative and not significant effect on Dividend Payout Ratio.

KEYWORDS : Current Ratio, Asset Growth, Dividend, Property company, Real Estate dan Buillding

1. BACKGROUND The increasingly stringent business development requires each company to innovate in order to compete with other companies so that the company's performance is increasing. The capital market is seen to help the company's finances by selling company shares to investors. The investor is a person who has funds and invests their capital with the aim of making a profit (Komang and Gusti, 2016). Firm value can also be influenced by dividend policy. Dividend policy is often regarded as a signal to investors in assessing the merits of a company; this is because dividend policy can have an effect on the company's stock price. The size of the company pays dividends to shareholders depending on the dividend policy of each company.( Angela Dirman and Putri Dwi Wahyuni) According to Hikmah and Yamin (2015: 1) The company's dividend policy is reflected in the dividend payout ratio (DPR) which is the percentage of earnings distributed in cash dividends, which means that the size of the dividend payout ratio (DPR) will affect the

investment decisions of shareholders and on the other hand it affects the company's financial condition. This consideration regarding dividend payout ratio (DPR) is thought to be very related to corporate finance. If the company's financial performance is good, then the company will be able to determine the amount of the dividend payout ratio (DPR) in accordance with the expectations of shareholders and of course without ignoring the interests of the company to stay healthy and grow. Investors who are not willing to take risks, have the view that the higher the risk of a company, the higher the level of expected profits as a result or reward for that risk. Dividends received today have a higher value than capital gains to be received in the future (Lanawati and Amilin, 2015: 1). One sector on the IDX that distributes dividends is the Property, Real Estate and Building Construction Companies. The following table and graph illustrate the development of the average Dividend Payout Ratio (DPR) in the Property, Real Estate and Building Construction Companies in the Indonesia





Stock Exchange (BEI) in 2015-2017, which experienced fluctuations in the 4 sector companies,

namely the Sector Property, Real Estate and Building Construction.

Picture 1.1. Dividen Payout Ratio Average (DPR) period 2015-2017

Source : indonesia stock Exchange

In the table and graph above shows the average value of Dividend Payout Ratio (DPR) in the Property Sector, Real Estate and Building Construction Companies in 2015-2017 has fluctuated and there is no indication in the implementation of a stable dividend policy. In 2015 the development rate of the average dividend decreased by 0.21%, then increased in 2016 by 0.32%, and then experienced a very drastic decrease in 2017 of 0.14%. The decrease and increase in the dividend payout ratio (DPR) on the graph contains information on the current state of company management and the state of future profits. Current Ratio (CR) is needed by the company because this ratio helps the company in measuring the extent to which it fulfills its obligations that are due soon. "Current Ratio (CR) is a measure commonly used for short-term solvency, the ability of a company to meet debt needs when due" (Irham Fahmi 2014: 66). Companies with higher cash availability make it possible to pay corporate dividends from companies with sufficient cash availability (Kazmierska-Jozwiak, 2015). Fatimatuz Zuhro MB (2016), Assets Growth is an asset used for company operational activities. The greater the assets are expected the greater operational results produced by the company. Asset growth is defined as the annual change in total assets. Based on previous studies Janifairus (2013) conducted research on the effect of Return on Assets (ROA), Debt to Equity Ratio (DER), asset growth (AG)

and cash ratio (CR) on the dividend payout ratio (DPR), the results showed that Variable Return on Assets (ROA), Debt to Equity Ratio (DER), asset growth (AG) and cash ratio (CR) significantly influence the dividend payout ratio (DPR). While Effendi et al (2014) conducted a study on the effect of Return on Assets (ROA), Asset growth (AG), Sales growth (SG) and Debt to Equity Ratio (DER) on the dividend payout ratio (DPR), the results showed that only the Return variable on Asset (ROA) which has an influence on the dividend payout ratio (DPR).

2. LITERATURE REVIEW 2.1. Signalling Theory

SIGNALING THEORY (SIGNAL THEORY) Signaling Theory or signal theory developed by (Ross, 1977), states that corporate executives who have better information about their companies will be encouraged to convey this information to prospective investors so that the company's stock price increases. Positive things in signaling theory where companies that provide good information will distinguish them from companies that do not have "good news" by informing the market about their condition, signals about good future performance given by companies whose past financial performance is not good will not be trusted by the market (Wolk and Tearney in Dwiyanti, 2010).

Brennan, M., and T. Copeland, (1988) stated that stock splits require large transaction costs, such as printing new certificates so that companies with good prospects are able to bear these costs. If reacting at the




time of stock split does not mean the market reacts to stock split information that has no economic value, but rather to know the company's future prospects signified through stock split. So the motivating factor for a stock split is the company's performance.

2.2. Dividend Policy The company will distribute dividends if the

company's operations make a profit. The company cannot distribute dividends if the company suffers a loss. Thus the potential profit of investors to get dividends is determined by the company's performance. Dividends are given after obtaining approval from the shareholders at the General Meeting of Shareholders (GMS). Generally dividends are one of the attractions for holders with a long-term orientation, such as institutional investors or pension funds and others.

Dividends distributed by companies can be in the form of cash dividends, meaning that to whom the shareholders provide cash dividends in the amount of certain rupiahs for each share or it can also be in the form of stock dividends or capital gains in the form of the difference between the selling price and the purchase price (Halim, 2015: 18).

Firm value can also be influenced by dividend policy. Dividend policy is often regarded as a signal to investors in assessing the merits of a company; this is because dividend policy can have an effect on the company's stock price. The size of the company pays dividends to shareholders depending on the dividend policy of each company.

With formula :

2.3. Current Ratio The company must continuously monitor the

relationship between the amount of current liabilities and current assets. This relationship is very important especially to evaluate the company's ability to meet its short-term obligations using current assets. Companies

that have more current liabilities than current assets, then usually these companies will experience liquidity problems when their current liabilities expire (Hery, 2016: 50). Following is the formula used to calculate the current ratio:

2.4. Asset Growth Company growth (Assets Growth) is expressed

as total asset growth where past growth will reflect

profitability which will reflect future profitability and future growth (Nurhasanah, 2016: 17). Asset Growth can be formulated as follows:

3. RESEACRH METHODS This research is a quantitative study in which the data used are the financial statements of the Property, Real Estate and Building Construction Companies listed on the Indonesia Stock Exchange for the period 2015-2017. The study was conducted from August 2018 to January 2019.

The population of this study researchers used the Property, Real Estate and Building Construction companies on the Stock Exchange in the 2015 to 2017 research period, there were 71 companies in the Property, Real Estate and Building Construction sector during the research period. The sampling technique in this study using the criteria or purposive sampling, the research sample of 19 samples.

Stock Dividend

DPR =

Net Profit

Year Asset t – Year Asset t-1

AG =

Year Asset t

Current Assets

Current Ratio =

Current Liabilities




4. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION 4.1 Descriptive Statistics Test Results

Descriptive Statistics

N Minimum Maximum Mean Std. Deviation

CR 57 ,8791 6,9133 2,048614 1,2091606

AG 57 ,8358 2,4166 1,232874 ,2933552

DPR 57 ,4790 6,3170 1,736649 1,0958801

Valid N (listwise) 57

Current Ratio has the lowest value (minimum) of 0.88 (88%) owned by PT Intiland Development Tbk in 2017, and the highest value (maximum) of 6.91 (691%) owned by PT Lippo Karawaci Tbk in 2015, with an average value of 2.048614, the standard deviation of 1.2091606. Which means the standard deviation is smaller than the average value (Mean). This shows that the data is well distributed. Asset Growth has the lowest (minimum) value of 0.84 (84%) owned by PT Gowa Makassar Tourism Development Tbk in 2015, and the highest value (maximum) of 2.42 (242%) owned by PT Waskita Karya ( Persero) Tbk in 2015. With an average value of 1.232874, the standard deviation of 0.2933552.

Which means the standard deviation is smaller than the average value (Mean). This shows that the data is well distributed. Dividend Policy (Y) which is proxied by Dividend Payout Ratio (DPR) has the lowest (minimum) value of 0.5 (50%) owned by PT Duta Pertiwi Tbk in 2016, and the highest value (maximum) of 6.32 ( 632%) owned by PT Surya Semesta Internusa Tbk in 2016. The mean (dividend) policy of the company of the 57 samples studied was 1.7367 with a standard deviation of 1.0958801 which means the standard deviation is smaller than the mean (Mean). This shows that the data is well distributed.

One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test

Unstandardized Residual

N 57

Normal Parametersa,b Mean 0E-7

Std. Deviation ,12819134

Most Extreme Differences Absolute ,156

Positive ,136 Negative -,156

Kolmogorov-Smirnov Z 1,176

Asymp. Sig. (2-tailed) ,126

a. Test distribution is Normal.

b. Calculated from data.




4.2 Normality Test Results Based on table 4.3, the data normality test results are said to be normal if the Asympotic Significant value Sig. (2-tailed) more than 0.05. The test results using One Sample Kolmogrov Smirnov

based on the tebel above shows the value of the Asympotic Significant Sig. (2-tailed) is 0.126. Thus, the data of this study are normally distributed because of the Asympotic Significant Sig. (2-tailed) 0.126> 0.05.

4.3 Multicollinearity Test Results

Coefficientsa

Model Unstandardized Coefficients Standardized Coefficients

t Sig. Collinearity Statistics

B Std. Error Beta Tolerance VIF

1

(Constant) ,858 ,084 10,204 ,000

CR ,865 ,015 ,954 59,615 ,000 ,989 1,011

AG -,724 ,060 -,194 -12,113 ,000 ,989 1,011

a. Dependent Variable: DPR

The criteria in determining multicollinearity tests (ghozali: 2016) are as follows: 1) Current tolerance ratio (CR) value is 0.989> 0.10 and VIF value is 1.011 <10. 2) The tolerance value of Asset Growth (AG) is 0.989> 0.10 and the VIF value is 1.011 <10.

From the value of tolerance and VIF so that it can be concluded that the model is free from multicollinearity. The heteroscedasticity test can be seen in Figure 4.1 as follows:

Based on Figure 4.1 above, it can be seen that there are no clear patterns and spread points above and below the

number 0 on the Y axis, it can be concluded that the regression model does not occur heteroscedasticity.




4.4 Autocolleration Test Results

Model Summaryb

Model R R Square Adjusted R Square

Std. Error of the

Estimate

Durbin-Watson

1 ,993a ,986 ,986 ,1305437 1,744

a. Predictors: (Constant), AG, CR

b. Dependent Variable: DPR

Based on the results of the autocorrelation test in table 4.4 above shows that the Durbn-Watson (DW) value of 1.744. While the size of the DW-table with a sample size of 57 (N = 57) and the number of

independent variables 2 (K = 2) obtained dL (lower limit) = 1.5004 and dU (upper limit) = 1.6452. Then dU <d <4-dU (1.6452 <1.744 <2.3548), there is no positive or negative autokoleration (not rejected).

Hipothesys Decision If Positif No autocolleration Decline 0 < d < dl 0 < 1,744 < 1,5004 Negative No autocolleration No desicison dl ≤ d ≤ du 1,5004≤ 1,744 ≤ 1,6452

N Negative autocolleration Decline 4 – dl < d < 4 2,4996< 1,744 <4 Negative No autocolleration No desicison 4 – du ≤ d ≤ 4 – dl 2,3548≤ 1,744 ≤ 2,4996 No Negative and positive autocolleration

No Decline du < d < 4-du 1,6452< 1,744 < 2,3548

4.5 F Test Results

ANOVAa

Model Sum of Squares df Mean Square F Sig.

1

Regression 66,333 2 33,167 1946,206 ,000b

Residual ,920 54 ,017

Total 67,253 56


b. Predictors: (Constant), AG, CR

Based on table 4.5 it can be seen the influence of Current Ratio, and Asset Growth on dividend policy. From the ANOVA table it can be seen that the value is 1946,206> 3.17. The hypothesis is accepted, meaning that X1, X2 simultaneously influence Y. Significance value is less than 0.05, this shows that Current Ratio,

and Asset Growth affect the policy dividends in the property sector, real estate and building construction companies listed on the Indonesia Stock Exchange in 2015-2017.




4.6 T Test Results

Coefficientsa

Model Unstandardized Coefficients

Standardized Coefficients

t Sig. Collinearity Statistics


1

(Constant)

,858 ,084

10,204 ,000

CR ,865 ,015 ,954 59,615 ,000 ,989 1,011

AG -,724 ,060 -,194 -12,113 ,000 ,989 1,011

a. Dependent Variable: DPR Based on table 4.6 above, it can be tested the hypotheses proposed in this study to get a significant effect of the independent variables on the dependent variable as follows: H1: Current Ratio has a significant effect on dividend policy. Based on the results of the t test in table 4.6, the results show that the Current Ratio variable has a calculated t value of 59.615> 1.67356, then the hypothesis is accepted, there is an effect of x1 on Y. This shows that the Current Ratio is negative and significant towards dividend policy (DPR ) in the property sector, real estate and building construction companies on the Indonesia Stock Exchange in 2015-

2017, so it can be said that the first hypothesis is accepted. H2: Asset Growth affects dividend policy Based on the results of the t test in table 4.6, the results show that the Current Ratio variable has a calculated t value of -12.113 <1.67356, then the hypothesis is rejected, there is no effect of x2 on Y. This shows that the Current Ratio is negative and not significant to the policy dividends (DPR) in the property sector, real estate and building construction companies on the Indonesia Stock Exchange in 2015-2017, so it can be said that the second hypothesis is rejected.

4.7 Multiple Linear Regression Test Results

Coefficientsa



T Sig. Collinearity Statistics


1

(Constant) ,858 ,084 10,204 ,000

CR ,865 ,015 ,954 59,615 ,000 ,989 1,011

AG -,724 ,060 -,194 -12,113 ,000 ,989 1,011


Based on Table 4.7 above, it can be seen the regression equation as follows: 1) A constant value of 1.158 is positive

indicating a positive effect of the independent variable (Current Ratio, and Asset Growth with a significant value of 0,000, indicating that the independent variable is less than the tolerance

value α = 0.05. If the independent variable rises or influences in one unit, the variable Dividend Payout Ratio will increase or be fulfilled.

2) Current Ratio variable coefficient value of 0.069 with a significant value of 0.150 states that

the significant value of the Current Ratio variable

is less than the tolerance value that is α = 0.05, then the coefficient of the variable Net Profit margin affects the Dividend Payout Ratio variable.

3) Asset Growth variable regression coefficient value of -0.194 with a significant value of 0.413 states that the significant value of the Current Ratio

variable exceeds the tolerance value α = 0.05, then the coefficient of the variable Net Profit margin has no effect on the Dividend Payout Ratio variable.




CONCLUSION Based on the results of testing the hypothesis

that has been analyzed, the conclusions that can be drawn from this research are as follows:

1. T-test results (partially) Current Ratio has a positive and significant effect on Dividend Payout Ratio in Property, Real Estate and Buillding construction companies listed on the Indonesia Stock Exchange in 2015-2017.

2. T-test results (partially) Asset Growth has a negative and insignificant effect on Dividend Payout Ratio in property, real estate and building construction companies listed on the Indonesia Stock Exchange in 2015-2017.

SUGGESTIONS Some suggestions that can be given with the results of this study for companies, investors and potential investors, and for further researchers are as follows: 1. For companies The results of this study indicate that an issuer needs to pay attention to the company's financial performance and evaluate it. By considering these independent variables the company can decide the amount of dividends to be distributed so as to produce an optimal dividend policy for the company. Dividend Payout Ratio is considered important not only because the amount of funds to be distributed but is caused by financial factors and investment decisions determined by the company. The management must make a decision on dividend policy to be carried out, investment decisions, funding decisions and expected growth. 2. For investors and potential investors Investors and potential investors need to pay attention to the value of the company's Dividend Payout Ratio while still considering the positive and negative impacts. Investors must pay close attention to the company's dividend policy in order to have a good composition and in accordance with the capabilities and growth of the company. For investors who want a dividend as a return from their investment, it is necessary to pay attention and analyze a high current ratio variable before investing in a company, because a company that has a high current ratio means that it will be able to settle its short-term obligations properly so that the projections will distribute dividends will be high anyway. 3. For further researchers This research can be a reference and foundation that can be used for the expansion of research in the same field and the addition of variables for its development

REFERENCES 1. Abdul Halim. 2015. Manajemen Keuangan Bisnis:

Konsep dan Aplikasinya. Jakarta: Mitra Wacana

Media.

2. Agus Sartono. 2016. Manajemen Keuangan Teori

dan Aplikasi. Edisi empat. Cetakan ke tujuh

Yogyakarta:Penerbit BPFE.

3. Ainy, Desyi N., dan Widyawati, Nurul. (2016).

Pengaruh Kebijakan Dividen, Kepemilikan

Institusional dan Profitabilitas Terhadap Nilai

Perusahaan. Jurnal Ilmu dan Riset Manajemen,

Vol. 6 No. 4, ISSN : 2461-059.

4. Angela Dirman, Putri Dwi Wahyuni, Danang

Choirul Umam, Herlambang (2019). Analysis of the

Effect of Institutional Ownership, Independent

Commisioners, Dividend Policy, Debt Policy, and

Company Size on Firm Value. International Journal

of Academic Research in Accounting, Finance and

Management Sciences, Vol. 9, No.4, October

2019. E-ISSN: 2225-8329, P-ISSN: 2308-0337

5. Brigham, Eugene F. Dan Joel F. Houston. 2014.

Dasar-Dasar Manajemen Keuangan. Edisi 11.

Jakarta: Salemba Empat.

6. Bursa Efek Indonesia, www.idx.co.id

7. Dantes, Nyoman, 2012. Metode Penelitian, Andi

Offset, Yogyakarta.

8. Fahmi, Irham. 2014. Analisis Laporan Keuangan.

Bandung: Alfabeta.

9. Ghozali, Imam. 2016. Aplikasi Analisis Multivariate

dengan Program SPSS. Semarang: Badan Penerbit

Universitas Dipenogoro.

10. Gitman, L.J.; Zutter, C.J. 2012. Principles of

Managerial Finance. 13e. Boston: Pearson.

11. Hanafi, Mamduh M dan Abdul Halim. 2016.

Analisis Laporan Keuangan. Edisi Keempat.

Yogyakarta: STIM YKPN.

12. Hery. 2016. Analisis Laporan Keuangan. Edisi 1.

Yogyakarta: Center For Academic Publishing

Services.

13. I Gede Ananditha Wicaksana,2012, “Pengaruh

Cash Ratio, Return on asset, Debt To Equity

Terhadap Devidend Payout Ratio Pada Perusahaan

Manufaktur Yang Terdaftar Di Bursa Efek

Indonesia”

14. Jalung, K., Mangantar, M., & Mandagie, Y. (2017).

Analisis Faktor-faktor yang Mempengaruhi

Dividend Payout Ratio Pada Sub-Sektor Bank yang

Terdaftar di Bursa Efek Indonesia. Jurnal EMBA:

Jurnal Riset Ekonomi, Manajemen, Bisnis dan

Akuntansi, 5 (2): 334 – 342.

15. Janifairus, J.B., Hidayat, R., dan Husaini, A.

(2013). Pengaruh Return on Asset, Debt to Equity

Ratio, Assets Growth, dan Cash Ratio Terhadap

Dividend Payout Ratio. Jurnal Hipotesis. Vol. 1.

(No. 1).

16. Joel. G. Siegel dan Jae. K. Shim. 2000. Kamus

Istilah Akuntansi. Jakarta: Gahlia Indonesia.

17. Jozwiak, Bogna Kazmierska. “Determinants of

Dividend Policy: Evidence from Polish Listed.” 2nd


http://www.idx.co.id/



GLOBAL CONFERENCE on BUSINESS,

ECONOMICS, MANAGEMENT and (2015).

18. Lanawati dan Amilin. 2015. “Cash Ratio, Debt to

Equity Ratio, Return on Asset, Firm Size, Growth,

dan Dividend Payout Ratio Pada Perusahaan

Manufaktur di Indonesia”. Jurnal Riset Akutansi

dan Perpajakan JRAP Vol.2, No.1, Juni 2015: 59.

19. Made Wiradharma S, Gede Adi Y, Anantawikrama

Tungga A. (2014). Analisis FaktorFaktor Yang

Mempengaruhi Kebijakan Dividend Payout Ratio

Yang Terdaftar Di Bursa Efek Indonesia (BEI). E-

Journal S1 Ak Universitas Pendidikan Ganesha

Jurusan Akuntansi Program S1, Volume 2 No: 1.

20. Miller, M. H., dan F. Modigliani. (1961). Dividend

Policy, Growth, and the Valuation of Shares.

Journal of Business. Vol. 34 (4): 411-433.

21. Mubarok (2016) pengaruh current ratio (CR), debt

to equity ratio (DER), total asset turnover (TAT)

dan Return on Asset (ROA) terhadap dividend

payout ratio (DPR).

22. Murhadi, Werner R. 2013. Analisis Laporan

Keuangan Proyeksi dan Valuasi Saham. Jakarta:

Salemba Empat.

23. Nining Dwi Rahmawati, Ivonne S. Saerang dan

Paulina Van Rate. 2014. Kinerja Keuangan

Pengaruhnya Terhadap Kebijakan Dividen Pada

Perusahaan Bumn Di Bursa Efek Indonesia. Jurnal

EMBA Vol.2 No.2 ISSN 2303-1174. Fakultas

Ekonomi dan Bisnis. Universitas Sam Ratulangi

Manado.

24. Pasadena, Rizka Persia. 2013. Pengaruh Likuiditas,

Leverage, Profitabilitas, dan Ukuran Perusahaan

terhadap Kebijakan Dividen pada Perusahaan

Manufaktur yang Terdaftar Di Bursa Efek

Indonesia. Skripsi. Universitas Islam Negeri.

Jakarta.

25. Prihadi, toto, (2012): Akuntansi laporan Keuangan

Lanjutan Proyeksi dan evaluasi. Jakarta: PPM.

26. Rahayuningtyas, Septi. Suhadak dan Siti Ragil

Handayani. 2014. Pengaruh Rasio- Rasio

Keuangan Terhadap Dividend Payout Ratio (DPR)

(Studi Pada Perusahaan Yang Listing Di BEI Tahun

2009-2011). Jurnal Akuntansi Bisnis. Volume 7

Nomor 2.

27. Rita Martini, Maria dan M. Thoyib. 2014.

Kebijakan Dividen Berdasarkan Rasio Keuangan

pada Perusahaan Industri Dasar Kimia Yang

Terdaftar di BEI. Prosiding Seminar Nasional

Penelitian dan Pkm Sosial, Ekonomi dan

Humaniora Vol. 4 No. 1 ISSN 2089-3590. Jurusan

Akuntansi, Politeknik Negeri Sriwijaya.

28. Sanjari, Tahere dan Batool Zarei, 2014. ”The Study

Factors Influencing Corporate Dividend Policy of

Financial and Non-Financial Firms on Companies

Listed In Tehran Stock Exchange”. Research

Journal of Finance and Accounting, Vol. 5, No. 21.

29. Sari, Ni Komang ayu Purnama dan I Gusti Ayu

Nyoman Budiasih. 2016. Pengaruh Kepemilikan

Managerial, Kepemilikan Institusional, Free Cash

dan Profitabilitas pada Kebijakan Dividen. Jurnal

Akuntansi, Juni 2016, Vol. 15, No. 3.

30. Sarwono, Jonathan. (2012). Metode Riset Skripsi

Pendekatan Kuantitatif Menggunakan Prosedur

SPSS (Edisi Pertama). Jakarta: PT Elex Media

Komputindo.

31. Silviana, Charlina. R.Rustam Hidayat. Dan Nila

Firdausi Nuzula. (2014). “Analisis Variabel-

Variabel Yang Mempengaruhi Kebijakan Dividen”.

Jurnal Administrasi Bisnis. No. 1. Hlm. 1-7.

32. Spence, Michael. 1973. Job Market Signaling. The

Quarterly Journal of Economics, Vol. 87, No. 3.

(Aug., 1973), pp. 355-374.

33. Sugiyono. 2016. Metode Penelitian Kuantitatif

Kualitatif dan R&D. Bandung: Alfabeta.

34. Zaipul, Achmad. (2011). “Pengaruh Debt to Equity

Ratio, Firm Size, Investment, Cash Position,

Growth, dan Return On Equity Terhadap Dividend

Payout Ratio pada Perusahaan Manufaktur yang

Listing di BEI.” Jurnal Universitas Gunadarma.

35. Zuhro, Fatimatus MB dan Suwitho (2016).

“Pengaruh Ukuran Perusahaan, Pertumbuhan Aset,

Dan Profitabilitas Terhadap Struktur Modal.

“Jurnal Ilmu dan Riset Manajemen : Jurnal Volume

5, Nomor 5. ISSN : 2461- 0593.




CONSUMER TRUST IN ONLINE PURCHASE DECISION

Febrina Mahliza Faculty of Economics and Business

Universitas Mercu Buana

Jakarta, Indonesia


ABSTRACT

Trust plays an important role in online purchasing. Trust issues that arise in online purchasing occur since consumers

cannot verify the product directly. This study aims to analyze the antecedents of trust in terms of online purchase decision

and analyze the effect of trust on online purchase decision. The sampling technique used in this study was purposive

sampling. The total sample of 120 respondents in Jakarta was obtained through the distribution of online questionnaires.

The data analysis method used in this study is Partial Least Square (PLS). The results show that brand image and

security are the antecedents of trust which have a significant positive effect on trust. The results show that perceived risk

is the antecedent of trust which has a significant negative effect on trust. The results also show that consumer trust has a

significant positive effect on online purchase decision.

KEYWORDS: trust, antecedents, purchase decision, partial least square

INTRODUCTION Trust has always been an important factor in

influencing consumer behavior towards companies (Schurr & Ozanne, 1985). Trust plays an important role in e-commerce transactions because consumers will not shop online if they do not trust the seller (Kim, Ferrin, & Rao, 2008). However, trust issues that arise in online purchasing occur since consumers cannot verify the product directly (Dachyar & Banjarnahor, 2017).

Trust also becomes an issue that needs to be considered by the seller because it is related to consumers in making purchase decision (Murwatiningsih & Apriliani, 2013). Consumers decide to purchase online because consumers feel that sellers can be trusted (Putra, Rochman, & Noermijati, 2017). The higher trust will increase consumer purchase decision (Tanjung, Elfa, & Andreas, 2018). Consumers who already trust a seller will be interested in making a purchase decision (Irawan, 2018). Trust is the essential element for building relationship with consumers (Mittal, 2013).

Since trust has an important role, it is important to identify the antecedent factors of trust that can increase or decrease trust. Furthermore, consumer trust with antecedent of trust will be seen its effect on online purchase decision. One of antecedents of trust is brand image. Brand image is one of the antecedents of trust which has a positive effect on trust (Prasetya,

Kumadji, & Yulianto, 2014). The higher the brand image of seller, the higher trust by consumer.

The other antecedents of trust is security. Security is one of the antecedents of trust which has a positive effect on trust (Azam, Qiang, & Abdullah, 2012; Hayuningtyas & Widiyanto, 2015). The higher the sercurity provided by of seller, the higher trust by consumer.

The other antecedents of trust is perceived risk. Consumer trust in online purchasing is also influenced by the risk perceived by consumers (Murwatiningsih & Apriliani, 2013). Consumers who concern about online transactions will lead them to choose sellers who successfully meet the requirements as trustworthy sellers (Hong, 2015). The lower the risk perceived by consumers, the higher the consumers trust in seller.

Based on the description above, this study aims to analyze the antecedents of trust including variable brand image, safety and perceived risk. Furthermore, this study aims to analyze the effect of consumer trust on online purchase decision. In this study, DKI Jakarta was chosen as the location of the study because in 2018, 80.4% of the population of DKI Jakarta was internet users (Indonesia Internet Service Provider Association, 2018).





LITERATURE REVIEW Brand Image and Trust

Brand image is a series of associations of a brand that is in the minds of consumers who are organized into a meaning (Aaker, 1994). Brand image is a collection of associations that exist in consumers' memories that are perceived and believed by consumers (Keller, 2013). Brand image is not only related to product image but can be related to company or seller's image (Rekarti, 2012).

Brand image is one of the antecedents of trust which has a positive effect on consumer trust (Prasetya et al., 2014). Brand image is measured through brand excellence, brand strength and brand uniqueness (Priskila, Sembiring, & Mangani, 2016). Brand image makes the credibility and reputation which later becomes guideline for consumer (Wijaya, 2013). Brand image had strong effect on trust formation (Yeh & Li, 2009). The higher the brand image of seller, the higher the trust by consumer. Security and Trust

Consumers' perceptions of security, that is, consumers expect their personal information shared on the seller's site to not be seen, stored or manipulated by other parties (Chellappa & Pavlou, 2002). Security is a key factor that people concerns about in using internet to purchase because most transactions are carried out on the web where information about users is transferred through an insecure environment (Raman & Annamalai, 2011). Consumer will trust the seller when consumer feels that the seller provides security. Consumer trust is influenced by the security that provided by the sellers who handling their data (Flavián & Guinalíu, 2006).

Security is one of the antecedents of trust which has a positive effect on consumer trust (Azam et al., 2012; Hayuningtyas & Widiyanto, 2015). Security can be reflected through guarantees of transaction security and data confidentiality (Azam et al., 2012). The higher of security provided by seller, the higher consumer’s trust (Kim, Ferrin, & Rao, 2003). When the seller are able to increase security to consumer, consumer trust can be increased (Mittal, 2013).

Perceived Risk and Trust

Perceived risk is consumer perceptions of uncertainty and adverse consequences in carrying out an activity (Dowling & Staelin, 1994). Perceived risk is the level of risk that is believed by consumers related to the purchase of a product from a particular seller (Miyazaki & Fernandez, 2001). Perceived risk can be reflected through the risk about the suitability

of product, the suitability of information, and privacy (Murwatiningsih & Apriliani, 2013).

In the context of online commerce, perceived risk is considered higher than in traditional commerce because of the limited physical contact between consumers and products to be purchased. Consumer who concerns about online transactions will lead consumers to choose sellers who successfully meet the requirements as trustworthy sellers (Hong, 2015). The lower the perceived risk, the higher the consumer trust in seller. Trust and Purchase Decision

Trust plays an important role in e-commerce transactions because consumers will not shop online if they do not trust the seller (Kim et al., 2008). Trust is the expectation of consumers towards sellers that they have appropriate behavior in fulfilling their commitments to consumers (Gefen, Karahanna, & Straub, 2003). Trust is something that makes consumers decide to transact online because consumers feel that the seller can be trusted (Putra et al., 2017).

Trust is something that needs to be considered by the seller to consumers to obtain purchase decision (Murwatiningsih & Apriliani, 2013). Purchase decision is a process of consumers in recognizing the problem, finding information about a particular product or brand, evaluating alternatives that further lead to purchasing decisions (Kotler & Keller, 2012). Indicators of purchase decision include stability in purchasing, desire to repurchase, in accordance with the wishes (Hayuningtyas & Widiyanto, 2015).

Consumers need trust that is reflected through integrity, benevolence and competence from sellers before they make a purchase decision (Budyastuti & Iskandar, 2018; Hayuningtyas & Widiyanto, 2015; Kwahk, Ge, & Park, 2012; Rahmawati & Widiyanto, 2013). With its antecedents, trust has a positive effect on consumer purchase decision (Hayuningtyas & Widiyanto, 2015; Rahmawati & Widiyanto, 2013). The higher of consumer trust in sellers, the higher of consumer purchase decision.

HYPHOTESIS Based on the description above, the hypothesis

formulated in this study are: H1 = Brand image has a positive effect on trust. H2 = Safety has a positive effect on trust. H3 = Perceived risk has a negative effect on trust. H4 = Trust has a positive effect on purchase decision.

Based on the hypothesis development, the framework of this study can be seen in Figure 1.




Figure 1. Framework

RESEARCH METHODS

This type of this research is causal research. The variables studied consisted of latent variables and indicators. The latent variables studied are brand

image, security, perceived risk, trust and purchase decision. Measurement of variables can be seen in Table 1.

Table 1. Measurement Constructs Indicators References

Brand Image Brand excellence (BI1) Brand strength (BI2) Brand uniqueness (BI3)

(Priskila et al., 2016)

Security Transaction security guarantee (SC1) Data confidentiality (SC2)

(Azam et al., 2012)

Perceived Risk The suitability of product (PR1) The suitability of information (PR2) Privacy (PR3)

(Murwatiningsih & Apriliani, 2013)

Trust Competence of seller (TR1) Benevolence of seller (TR2) Integrity of seller (TR3)

(Hayuningtyas & Widiyanto, 2015; Rahmawati & Widiyanto, 2013)

Purchase Decision Stability in purchasing (KP1) Desire to repurchase (KP2) In accordance with the wishes (KP3)

(Hayuningtyas & Widiyanto, 2015)

This study used purposive sampling technique.

The criteria of respondents i.e. consumers who live in Jakarta and have made an online purchase decision. The number of respondents in this study is 120 respondents.

Data collection was conducted in February-April 2019 through the distribution of online questionnaires with a Likert scale ranging from 1-5. The distributed questionnaire had already been tested for its level of validity and reliability through an instrument trial. Data were analyzed using a

component based structural equation modeling (SEM) approach known as Partial Least Square (PLS).

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Profile of Respondents

Respondents are internet users who live in Jakarta and have made an online purchase decision. The respondents profile consists of demographic data on gender, age, occupation and income. Profile of respondents can be seen in Table 2.




Table 2. Profile of Respondents Parameters Items Frequency Persentage

Gender Male 48 40% Female 72 60%

Age 15 – 25 years 45 37.5% 26 – 36 years 56 46.7% 37 – 47 years 18 15% >47 years 1 0.8%

Occupation Private employee 109 90.8% Civil servant 1 0.8% Entrepreneur 7 5.8% Others 3 2.5%

Income < Rp. 1.000.000 Rp. 1.000.001 – Rp. 4.000.000 Rp. 4.000.001 – Rp. 7.000.000

>Rp. 7.000.000

6 21 70 23

5% 17.5% 58.3% 19.2%

Source: Data Processed, 2019

Partial Least Square Evaluation of Measurement Model

Evaluation of measurement models can be seen from the results of convergent validity.

Convergent validity is seen from the generated outer loading value. Indicator outer loading value greater than 0.7 is said to be valid. The outer loading value of this study can be seen in Table 2.

Table 2. Outer Loading Values

Variables Indicators Outer Loading

Brand Image BI1 0.715 BI2

BI3 0.767 0.823

Security SC1 0.892

SC2 0.909

Perceived Risk

PR1 PR2 PR3

0.938 0.836 0.912

Trust

TR1 TR2 TR3

0.845 0.877 0.835

Purchase Decision

PD1 PD2 PD3

0.821 0.848 0.894


Based on the Table 2, it can be seen that all indicator variables have an outer loading value greater than 0.7. It means all indicator variables are valid. There are no indicator variables that must be removed.

The construct has good reliability if the Composite Realiability value > 0.7, and the Cronbach’s Alpha value > 0.6. Construct has good validity if the AVE value is above 0.5. The following Composite Reliability, Cronbach’s Alpha, and AVE values can be seen in Table 3.




Table 3. Values of Composite Reliability, Cronbach’s Alpha, AVE Constructs Composite

Reliability Cronbach’s Alpha Average Variance

Extracted (AVE) Brand Image Security Trust Purchase Decision Perceived Risk

0.813 0.896 0.889 0.890 0.924

0.661 0.768 0.812 0.815 0.876

0.592 0.811 0.727 0.731 0.803


Based on Table 3, all constructs are reliable. This is because all constructs have Composite Reliability values above 0.7 and Cronbach’s Alpha values > 0.6. Besides being reliable, all constructs are valid. This can be seen from all constructs that have AVE values above 0.5.

The next construct validity test is evaluating discriminant validity by comparing the AVE square

root values with correlations between constructs. If the AVE square value of each construct is greater than the correlation value between constructs and other constructs in the model, then it is said to have a good discriminant validity value. The comparison of AVE square root results with correlations between constructs can be seen through The Fornell-Larcker Criterium (Table 4).

Table 4. The Fornell-Larcker Criterium Brand Image Security Trust Purchase

Decision Perceived Risk

Brand Image Security Trust Purchase Decision Perceived Risk

0.769 0.520 0.670 0.577

-0.349

0.901 0.507 0.374

-0.250

0.853 0.771

-0.527

0.855 -0.550

0.896


Table 4 shows the bold diagonal value is the

AVE square root value while the other value is the correlation value between constructs. AVE square root values for brand image, security, trust, purchase decision and perceived risk are greater than the maximum correlation value with other constructs listed in the same row and column. This means that the discriminant validity fulfilled.

Evaluation of Structural Model The evaluation of the structural model looks at the relationship between constructs and their significance value as indicated by the t-statistic or p-value based on PLS output. The path coefficient can be seen in Table 5. The path coefficient that has a p-value <0.05 (significance level of 5%) is declared significant.

Table 5. Path Coefficient Path Constructs Coefficient T-Statistics P-Value Results

Brand Image Trust Security Trust Perceived Risk Trust Trust Purchase Decision

0.461 0.188

-0.319 0.771

6.155 2.152 3.787

18.447

0.000 0.016 0.000 0.000

Significant Significant Significant Significant


(significance level of 5%)

Based on Table 5, the relationship test between constructs shows that the construct of brand image has a positive effect on trust with a construct coefficient value of 0.461 and is significant because of the p-value (0,000) <0.05. The security construct has a positive effect on trust with a construct coefficient of 0.188 and is significant because the p-value (0.016) <0.05. The perceived risk construct has a negative effect on trust with a construct coefficient of -0.319 and is significant because the p-value (0,000) <0.05.

The construct of trust has a positive effect on purchasing decisions with a construct coefficient of 0.771 and is significant because the p-value (0,000) <0.05. The evaluation of the structural model is also done by looking at the value of R-Square. The R-Square value of trust is 0.572. R-Square value of the purchase decision is equal to 0.594.




The Effect of Brand Image on Trust Brand image has a positive effect on trust with a

construct coefficient of 0.461. The influence of brand image on trust proved significant because p-value (0,000) <0.05. This means that H1 is accepted. This shows that the online store brand image has been proven to influence consumer trust in the context of online commerce.

The brand image in this study is reflected through brand excellence, brand strength and brand uniqueness. Consumers feel that the brand of the company as the seller that is superior, strong and unique, influences their trust before making an online purchasing. The results of this study indicate that the brand image is proven to act as one of the antecedents of trust. Brand image has become the antecendent of trust which has the most influencing on trust.

The results of this study are supported by Prasetya et al. (2014) which shows that the better the brand image of the seller, the higher the consumers trust. With a good brand image, this will affect consumer trust. The seller also uses consumer trust in the brand image as a sales strategy.

The Effect of Security on Trust

Security has a positive effect on trust with a construct coefficient of 0.188. The effect of security on trust proved significant because the p-value (0.016) <0.05. This means that H2 is received. This shows that security in online commerce transactions is proven to affect consumer trust.

Security in this study is reflected through guarantees of transaction security and data confidentiality. Consumers feel that the seller that provides security guarantees in transactions and maintain the confidentiality of consumer data, affects their trust before making online purchasing. The results of this study indicate that security is proven to play a role as an antecedent of trust.

The results of this study are supported by Azam et al. (2012) and Hayuningtyas & Widiyanto (2015) who show that security has a positive effect on consumer trust in the context of online purchasing. The higher the security provided by the seller, the higher of consumer trust. When the seller are able to increase security to consumers, consumer trust can be increased.

The Effect of Perceived Risk on Trust

The perceived risk has a negative effect on trust with a construct coefficient of -0.319. The effect of perceived risk on trust proved significant because the p-value (0,000) <0.05. This means that H3 is accepted. This shows that the risk perceived by consumers in the context of online commerce is proven to affect consumer trust.

The perceived risk in this study is reflected through the suitability of the product, the suitability of information and privacy. Consumers feel that

having a product that is in line with expectations, information that is in accordance with reality and their privacy that can be maintained, affects their trust before making an online purchasing. The results of this study indicate that perceived risk is proven to act as one of the antecedents of trust.

The results of this study are supported by Murwatiningsih & Apriliani, (2013) which shows that perceived risk has a negative effect on consumer trust in the context of online purchasing. The lower the risk perceived by consumer, the higher the consumer trust. Consumers who concern about the risks arising from online transactions will lead consumers to choose sellers who successfully meet the requirements as trustworthy sellers (Hong, 2015).

The Effect of Trust on Purchase Decision

Trust has a positive effect on purchase decision with a construct coefficient of 0.771. The influence of trust on purchase decision proved significant because the p-value (0,000) <0.05. This means that H4 is accepted. This shows that consumer trust has been proven to influence purchase decision in the context of online commerce.

Trust in this study is reflected through the competence, benevolence and integrity of the seller (Budyastuti & Iskandar, 2018; Hayuningtyas & Widiyanto, 2015; Kwahk et al., 2012; Rahmawati & Widiyanto, 2013). Consumers need trust that is reflected through integrity, benevolence and competence from sellers before they make a purchase decision. Consumers who feel that the seller is competent, provide good service to consumers and can be trusted, it can influence them to make purchase decisions.

The results of this study indicate that trust is proven to play a role as a mediating variable of the three antecedents of trust consisting of brand image, security and perceived risk to purchasing decisions. The results of this study are supported by Hayuningtyas & Widiyanto (2015) and Rahmawati & Widiyanto (2013) which shows that trust as a mediating variable of antecedents of trust, has a positive effect on purchasing decisions. The higher the consumer trust in sellers, the higher the consumer purchase decision.

CONCLUSION AND IMPLICATION Conclusion

Brand image has been proven to play a role as an antecedent of trust. Seller’s brand image has a positive effect on consumer trust before they make online purchasing. The better the brand image of seller, which is reflected through brand excellence, brand strength and brand uniqueness, the higher the consumers trust.

Security is proven to play a role as an antecedent of trust. Security positively influences consumer trust before they make online purchasing.




The higher the security provided by the seller, which is reflected through guaranteed security of transactions and data confidentiality, the higher the consumer trust.

The perceived risk is proven to play a role as an antecedent of trust. The perceived risk negatively affects consumer trust before they make an online purchase decision. The lower the risk perceived by consumers, which is reflected through the suitability of product, the suitability of information and maintained privacy, the higher the consumer trust.

Trust is proven to play a role as a mediating variable of the three antecedents of trust, which consists of brand image, security and perceived risk, towards purchasing decisions. Trust has a positive effect on purchase decision. The higher the consumer trust in seller, which is reflected through the competence, benevolence and integrity of seller, the higher the consumer purchase decision. Implication

This study contributes to provide empirical evidence regarding consumer trust in the context of online purchasing where the trust issues that arise in online purchasing occur since consumers cannot verify the product directly. The results of this study can also be used as managerial implications on seller because the results show that consumer trust plays an important role in online purchase decision. Consumer trust can also be improved through antecedents variables. A seller that is able to increase consumer trust through trust antecedents (brand image, security and perceived risk), will subsequently have an impact on increasing consumer purchase decision.

This study has limitations in its scope. Therefore, the researcher can then add other constructs besides the constructs that have been used in this study. Further researchers can also add a larger number of samples and a wider area to be able to describe the situation in Indonesia.

REFERENCES 1. Aaker, D. A. (1994). Building a Brand: The

Saturn Story. California Management Review, 36(2), 114–133.

2. Azam, A., Qiang, F., & Abdullah, M. I. (2012). Consumers’ E-commerce acceptance model: Antecedents of trust and satisfaction constructs. BEIAC 2012 - 2012 IEEE Business, Engineering and Industrial Applications Colloquium, 371–376. https://doi.org/10.1109/BEIAC.2012.6226086

3. Budyastuti, T., & Iskandar, D. (2018). The Influence of Usefulness , Easy of Use and Trust Using E-Commerce To User Behaviour ( Case Study To Lazada . Com Consumers ). Journal of Marketing and Consumer Research, 46, 78–83.

4. Chellappa, R. K., & Pavlou, P. A. (2002). Perceived information security, financial liability and consumer trust in electronic commerce transactions. Logistics Information Management,

15(5/6), 358–368. 5. Dachyar, M., & Banjarnahor, L. (2017). Factors

influencing purchase intention towards consumer-to-consumer e-commerce. Intangible Capital, 13(5), 946–966.

6. Dowling, G. R., & Staelin, R. (1994). A Model of Perceived Risk and Intended Risk-handling Activity. Journal of Consumer Research, 21(1), 119–134.

7. Flavián, C., & Guinalíu, M. (2006). Consumer trust, perceived security and privacy policy: Three basic elements of loyalty to a web site. Industrial Management & Data Systems, 106(5), 601–620.

8. Gefen, D., Karahanna, E., & Straub, D. W. (2003). Trust and TAM in Online Shopping: An Integrated Model Trust and TAM in Online Shopping: an Integrated Model. Source: MIS Quarterly MIS Quarterly, 27(1), 51–90.

9. Hayuningtyas, W. H., & Widiyanto, I. (2015). Antecedent kepercayaan dan keputusan pembelian. Diponegoro Journal of Management, 4(4), 1–11.

10. Hong, I. B. (2015). International Journal of Information Management Understanding the consumer ’ s online merchant selection process : The roles of product involvement , perceived risk , and trust expectation. International Journal of Information Management, 35(3), 322–336.

11. Indonesia Internet Service Provider Association. (2018). Penetrasi & Profil Perilaku Pengguna Internet Indonesia. In Laporan Survei. Retrieved from www.apjii.or.id

12. Irawan, I. A. (2018). Effect of trust, convinience, security and quality of service on online purchase decision (consumer case study in tangerang selatan area). Jurnal Ekonomi, 23(1), 114–122.

13. Keller, K. L. (2013). Strategic Brand Management: Building, Measuring, and Managing Brand Equity (4e Global). Harlow: Pearson Education Limited.

14. Kim, D. J., Ferrin, D. L., & Rao, H. R. (2008). A trust-based consumer decision-making model in electronic commerce: The role of trust, perceived risk, and their antecedents. Decision Support Systems, 44(2), 544–564.

15. Kim, D. J., Ferrin, D. L., & Rao, R. H. (2003). Antecedents of Consumer Trust in B-to-C Electronic Commerce. AMCIS 2003 Proceedings, (2003), 157–167.

16. Kotler, P., & Keller, K. L. (2012). Marketing Management, 14th ed. New Jersey: Pearson Education, Inc.

17. Kwahk, K., Ge, X., & Park, J. (2012). Investigating the Determinants of Purchase Intention in C2C E-Commerce. International Journal of Social, Behavioral, Educational, Economic, Business and Industrial Engineering, 6(9), 497–501.

18. Mittal, A. (2013). E-commerce : It ’ s impact on consumer behavior. Global Journal of Management and Business Studies, 3(2), 131–138.

19. Miyazaki, A. D., & Fernandez. (2001). Consumer Perceptions of Privacy and Security Risks for




Online Shopping. The Journal of Consumer Affairs, 35(1), 27–44.

20. Murwatiningsih, & Apriliani, E. P. (2013). Apakah kepercayaan konsumen lebih efektif daripada risiko dan harga? Jurnal Dinamika Manajemen, 4(2), 184–191.

21. Prasetya, C. H. A., Kumadji, S., & Yulianto, E. (2014). ( Survei pada Pembeli Sepeda Motor Honda Vario pada PT Sumber Purnama Sakti di Kabupaten Gresik ). Jurnal Administrasi Bisnis, 15(2).

22. Priskila, E. K., Sembiring, C. F., & Mangani, K. S. (2016). Analisis keputusan pembelian di Tokopedia yang dipengaruhi celebrity endorser, brand image, kelompok referensi dan usia. Fundamental Management Journal, 9220(1), 11–19.

23. Putra, B. A. P. W., Rochman, F., & Noermijati, N. (2017). the Effect of Trust, Risk, and Web Design on Consumer Intention By Means of Consumer Attitude To Purchase Online. Jurnal Aplikasi Manajemen, 15(3), 472–479.

24. Rahmawati, S. A., & Widiyanto, I. (2013). Antecedent Keputusan Pembelian Online. Diponegoro Journal of Management, 2(2009), 1–11.

25. Raman, A., & Annamalai, V. (2011). Web Services and e-Shopping Decisions : A Study on Malaysian e-Consumer. 3rd International Conference on Wireless Information Networks & Business Information System (WINBIS-2011), 8–13.

26. Rekarti, E. (2012). Pengetahuan dan Keterhubungan Merek dalam Mempengaruhi Pembelian Konsumen. Jurnal Enterpreneur (Manajemen Dan Bisnis), 11(Juli), 40–57.

27. Schurr, P. H., & Ozanne, J. L. (1985). Influences on Exchange Processes: Buyers’ Preconceptions of a Seller’s Trustworthiness and Bargaining Toughness. Journal of Consumer Research, 11(4), 939.

28. Tanjung, C., Elfa, N., & Andreas, Y. (2018). Analysis of Price Perception , Promotion , and Trust toward Decision Purchase on Online Site Tokopedia. 3(12), 386–389.

29. Wijaya, B. S. (2013). Dimensions of Brand Image : A Conceptual Review from the Perspective of Brand Communication. European Journal of Business and Management, 5(31), 55–65.

30. Yeh, Y. S., & Li, Y. M. (2009). Building trust in m-commerce: Contributions from quality and satisfaction. Online Information Review, 33(6), 1066–1086.




PERCEPTION OF ETHICS OF PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS,

MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTANTS AND LECTURER

ACCOUNTANTS ON EARNINGS MANAGEMENT IN

JAKARTA, BOGOR, DEPOK, TANGERANG AND BEKASI

(JABODETABEK) AREA

Islamiah Kamil Economics and Business Faculty

University Prof. DR. Moestopo, Beragama

ABSTRACT

This study aims to determine and measure the Effect of Ethical Perception of Public Accountants, Management Accountants,

and Accountants Lecturer Against Earning Management Practice in Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi. The

research method used is causal, with unit of Public Accountant, Management Accountant, and Accountant of Lecturer in

Area Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi. Data analysis is done by descriptive analysis and simple linear

regression test. The result of the research shows that from the simple linear regression test, there is positive influence of

Public Accountant's Ethical Perception, and Lecturer Accountant in Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi Areas

against Earning Management Practices. Therefore, the more Public Accountants, and the Lecturer Accountant to earnings

management practices, the more positive the ethical perception towards earnings management practices. While on Ethical

Perception Variables Management Accountant There is no positive influence of Ethical Perception of Management

Accountant in Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi Territories to Earning Management Practices. This indicates

that the less understanding of the Management Accountant to earnings management practices, the more negative the ethical

perception of earnings management practices.

KEYWORDS: Ethical Perceptions, Earning Management Practices

PRELIMINARY A. Background

Malia (2010) Accounting Profession is a Profession supported by science and skills relevant to the field of work. With the changes of various disciplines and higher demands from accountant service users, the accounting profession needs to identify, develop, improve and maintain and improve the knowledge and skills that will be capital to run the profession in a more dynamic society.

There are different views on earnings management practices and this creates an ethical dilemma. On the one hand, earnings management is seen as an act that should not be done because the existence of the earnings management information provided does not fully reflect the company's circumstances and obscure the true value of the company. Such actions may cause stakeholders to be wrong in making decisions. On the other hand, earnings management is perceived as normal and is a rational

measure to take advantage of flexibility in terms of financial reporting.

Komala Inggarwati and Arnold Kaudin (2010) described earning management as a form of management intervention in the preparation of financial statements. Interventions through manipulation of reported accounting figures led to various accounting scandals, such as in the case of Enron Energy's off-balance sheet transactions of 2000, cases of Xerox's 1997-2000 revenue increase and so on. In Indonesia, this has also become an issue, such as in the case of Kimia Farma's earning mark up in 2001 and Lippo Bank's double bookkeeping case in 2002.

Earnings management is an attempt to change, conceal and engineer the figures in financial statements by playing with accounting methods and procedures used (Sri Sulistyanto, 2008: 15). Earning management is certainly very misleading to investors. According to Munter and Ketz (1999) earnings management must be prevented because it can mislead investor decisions. However, earnings management should not be tied to




attempts to manipulate accounting data or information but rather to be associated with the selection of accounting methods to manage earnings that can be made as permitted under accounting regulations.

Earning management can be made by leveraging the use of accounting methods and procedures, establishing accounting policies and accelerating or delaying the recognition of costs and revenues to be smaller or greater than they should be. This is what allows the management to make earnings management for personal interests and interests of the company. The case of accounting fraud through earnings management practices has been widely prevalent both domestically and internationally. Based on the description above, the goal to be achieved by the authors of this study are:

1. To know and measure the Effect of Ethical Perception of Public Accountants in Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang And Bekasi (Jabodetabek) Area to Practice of Earning Management

2. To know and measure the Effect of Ethical Perception Management Accountant In Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang And Bekasi (Jabodetabek) Area to Practice Management Earning

3. To know and measure the Effect of Ethical Perception of Lecturer Accountant in Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang And Bekasi (Jabodetabek) Area to Management Practice Earning

The usefulness or expected benefit can be obtained from this research is to know the extent of ethical perception of Public Accountant. Management Accountants and Lecturer' Accountants in the Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang And Bekasi (Jabodetabek) Area can influence earnings management practices in the viewpoint of academia and the Business World and the results of this study are expected to provide additional science in the form of a description of the theory and practice of earnings management.

THEORETICAL FOUNDATION A. Understanding General Perception

Perception according to Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI, 1995) is the response (acceptance) directly from a process someone knows some things through the five senses. While Matlin (1998) in Sudaryanti (2001) and adapted by Frederich and Lindawati (2004), defines a broader perception, namely: as a process involving prior knowledge in obtaining and interpreting a combination of external world factors (visual stimuli) and ourselves (previous knowledge).

1. Understanding Ethics Ethics (Ancient Greek: "ethikos", meaning "to

arise from habit") is something where and how the main branch of philosophy that studies the value or quality that is the study of standards and moral judgments. Ethics includes analysis and application of concepts such as right, wrong, good, bad, and responsibility. Methodologically, not every thing judging acts can be said as ethics. Ethics requires a critical, methodical, and systematic attitude in reflection. That's why ethics is a science. As a science, the object of ethics is human behavior. But unlike other sciences that examine human behavior, ethics has a normative point of view. It means that ethics sees good and bad angles to human actions.

2. Ethics is divided into three main parts: 1. Meta-ethics (the study of the concept of ethics) 2. Normative ethics (ethical value determination study) 3. Applied Ethics (study of the use of ethical values). 3. Type of Ethics is divided into two, namely: • Philosophical Ethics

The philosophical philosophy literally (fay overlay) can be regarded as ethics derived from the activities of philosophy or thinking, which is done by humans. Therefore, ethics is actually part of philosophy; ethics is born from philosophy. The following are two ethical traits: 1) Non-empirical Philosophy is classified as non-empirical science. Empirical science is a science based on fact or concrete. Philosophy, however, is not the case, philosophy seeks to transcend the concrete by as if to ask what is behind concrete phenomena. Similarly with ethics. Ethics does not just stop at what the concrete factually does, but asks what should or should not be done. 2) PracticalThe branches of philosophy speak of something "existing". For example the legal philosophy of studying what is law. But ethics is not limited to it, but rather asks "what to do". Thus ethics as a branch of philosophy is practical because it is directly related to what people can and should not do. But remember that ethics is not practical in the sense of presenting ready-made recipes. Ethics are not technical but reflective. That is, ethics only analyzes major themes such as conscience, freedom, rights and duties, etc., while looking at past ethical theories to investigate their strengths and weaknesses. It is hoped that we will be able to construct our own test-resistant arguments. • Theological Ethics

There are two things to remember about theological ethics. First, theological ethics does not belong only to a particular religion, but every religion can have its own theological ethic. Secondly, theological ethics is part of ethics in general, therefore many of the elements in it are contained in ethics in general, and can be understood after understanding the




ethics in general. In general, theological ethics can be defined as ethics that stems from theological presuppositions. This definition becomes the distinguishing criterion between philosophical ethics and theological ethics. C. Causes of Unethical Behavior

In social life, ethical behavior is very important. This is because the interaction between individuals within the community is strongly influenced by ethical values. Basically it can be said that awareness of all members of society to behave ethically can build a community bond and harmony. However, we can not expect everyone to behave ethically. Arens and Loebbecke (1997: 73) mention that, there are two main factors that may cause people to behave unethical, namely: 1) The ethical standard of the person is different from that of society in general. 2) The person deliberately acts unethically for his own benefit. The impetus of people to do unethical may be strengthened by the rationalization which the self-proclaimed by the observer and the knowledge concerned. According to Arens and Loebbecke (1997: 75) the rationalization includes three things as follows: 1) Everyone also does the same (unethical) thing. 2) If a deed does not violate the law it does not violate ethics. The possibility that his unethical acts are unknown to others and should be held liable if such unethical acts are known to others is insignificant.

B. Earning Management 1. Definition of Earning Management Earnings management is a management action to choose the accounting policies of a certain standard to affect the earnings that will happen to be as they want through the management of internal factors owned by the company. According Sugiri (1998), divide the definition of earnings management into two namely: a. Narrow Definitions Earning management in this case is only related to the selection of accounting methods. Earnings management in the narrow sense is defined as the manager's behavior to "play" with the discretionary accrual component in determining the amount of earnings. b. Broad Definition Earnings management is the action of managers to increase (decrease) current reported earnings of a unit in which managers are responsible, without causing an increase (decrease) of long-term economic earningability of the unit.

2. Earning management patterns According to Scott: 2000 in Aji and Mita (2010), identified four patterns of management performed to manage the following earnings: a. Taking a Bath This pattern occurs at the time of reorganization including the appointment of a new CEO by reporting large losses. This action is expected to increase future earnings. Management tries to shift the expected future cost to the present, in order to have a greater opportunity to earn earnings in the future. b. Income Minimization Performed at the time the company experienced a high level of earning so that if earnings in the coming period is expected to fall drastically can be overcome by taking earning period earlier. Management is trying to move the burden to the present in order to have a greater chance of earning a earning in the future. c. Income Maximization Performed when earning decreased by moving the load into the future. The action on income maximization aims to report high net income for larger bonus purposes. This pattern is performed by companies that commit breaches of debt agreements. d. Income Smoothing Conducted by the company by way of the reported earnings that can reduce fluctuations in earnings that are too large because investors generally prefer a relatively stable earning.

3. Factors Affecting Earning Management According to Scott (2000) in Ma'ruf (2006), there are various motivations of companies to make earnings management, namely:

a. Other Contractual Motivations In general, to fulfill contractual obligations, including debt agreements (debts convenants).

b. To Communicate Information To Investors Investors will see the accounting policies selected when evaluating and comparing earnings.

c. Political Motivations To reduce the political costs and oversight of the government, to obtain government facilities and facilities such as subsidies and protection from overseas competitors, to minimize trade union demands, which are done by lowering earnings.

d. Taxation Motivations Earnings management is done for the purpose of tax savings, ie by reducing the earningability resulting in what is paid to the government is also smaller than it should be.

e. Changes of Chief Executive Officer (CEO)




CEOs who are approaching the end of their posts, tend to earn income maximization to increase their bonuses.

f. Initial Public Offerings (IPO) Companies that will conduct initial public offering (IPO), tend to make income increassing to attract potential investors. From various opinions and definitions above it can be said that earnings management is an effort in manipulating the financial statements for personal interests conducted by selecting accounting methods are allowed in the principles of accounting. However, in an ethical perspective such actions may reduce the credibility of financial statements and will harm external parties in decision-making.

D. Previous Research The ethical perception of accounting actors

against earnings management practices can be influenced by the accounting profession. The existence of differences in work environment and the problems faced by academic and practitioner accountants enable the emergence of differences in ethical perceptions between academic accountants (including academics who practice minimal) with practitioner accountants. For example, Zoraifi (2005), related to audit conflict situations, found that the interaction between work experience and ethical perceptions is significant and affects auditors.

In general, research concerning ethical perceptions of accountants based on the profession is divided into students' ethical perceptions, accountant Lecturer, and accountant practitioners. Fischer and Rosenzweig (1995) examine differences in ethical perceptions of earnings management among undergraduate students, MBA students and accounting practitioners in the US. They found that students tend to be more lenient in assessing earnings manipulation ethics than accountant practitioners. They also found that the study subjects had greater tolerance for manipulation of operating decisions than accounting manipulations.

Elias (2002) in his study of 763 practitioners and academic respondents found that in earnings management accounting practitioners were more able to accept the manipulation of operating decisions than accounting students. In addition, both practitioners and students view accounting manipulation as unethical but there is a tendency that students are more tolerant.

Differences in ethical perceptions between students and practitioners also occur in the business field. Cole and Smith (1996) examine differences in perception of ethics business between students and business people. In the study subjects were asked to

respond to a problem as 1) a business actor responded and 2) responded with ethical considerations. In a study involving 537 senior business school students and 158 businesspeople it was found that students tend to receive more ethically ambiguous responses than businesspeople. In addition, the students' views on business ethics are more negative than the business people see themselves. The study of differences in ethical perceptions in earnings management is also conducted in Indonesia.

Malia (2010) in his study involved public accountants, government accountants, accountants Lecturer and management accountants Jakarta area with the results of his research that ethical orientation and accountant experience have a significant effect on ethical perceptions about the practice of earnings management.

Syarifah (2015) which in his study involves two groups of public accountant responders and tax consultants on earnings management practices viewed from five situational factors namely the type of earnings management, earning management materiality, consistency to GAAB and the period of effect. The results of his research indicate that there is a significant perception difference between public accountant and tax consultant to earnings management practices from the whole variable.

Rahmawati and Sulardi (2003) who in his study involved accountant Lecturer, accounting students, and managers in Surakarta actually found that in general there is no significant difference between ethical perceptions of earnings management practices of accountant Lecturer, accounting students and managers. In another study, Rustiana (2006) found differences in ethical perceptions between accounting students and auditors in the ethical accounting dilemma situation. The ethical dilemma situation in the study is the volume of sales that was advanced earlier with the motive of pursuing bonuses and credit approval based on good relations. The ethical perceptions in the study were measured by the multidimensional ethics scale adopted from the Reidenbach and Robin studies.

Ludigdo and Machfoedz (1999) found significant differences between the perceptions of accountants and accounting students on business ethics. According to Ludigdo and Machfoedz, accountants have better perceptions than students. Their research involved 116 public accountant and accountant Lecturer and 159 accounting students.




E. Framework for Thinking 1. Effect of Ethical Perception of Public Accountant on Earning Management Practice

The ethical perception of accounting actors against earnings management practices can be influenced by the accounting profession. The existence of differences in work environment and the problems faced by academic and practitioner accountants enable the emergence of differences in ethical perceptions between academic accountants (including academics who practice minimal) with practitioner accountants. For example, Zoraifi (2005), related to audit conflict situations, found that the interaction between work experience with Ethical perceptions are significant and affect the auditor. Malia (2010) in his study involved public accountants, government accountants, accountants Lecturer and management accountants Jakarta area with the results of his research that ethical orientation and accountant experience have a significant effect on ethical perceptions about the practice of earnings management

2. Effect of Ethical Perception of Management Accountant on Earning Management Practice

In general, research concerning ethical perceptions of accountants based on the profession is divided into students' ethical perceptions, accountant Lecturer, and accountant practitioners. Fischer and Rosenzweig (1995) examine differences in ethical perceptions of earnings management among undergraduate students, MBA students and accounting practitioners in the US. They found that students tend to

be more lenient in assessing earnings manipulation ethics than accountant practitioners. They also found that the study subjects had greater tolerance for manipulation of operating decisions than accounting manipulations. Malia (2010) in his study involved public accountants, government accountants, accountants Lecturer and management accountants Jakarta area with the results of his research that ethical orientation and accountant experience have a significant effect on ethical perceptions about the practice of earnings management

3. Effect of Ethical Perception of Lecturer Accountant on Earning Management Practice

Rahmawati and Sulardi (2003) who in his study involved accountant Lecturer, accounting students, and managers in Surakarta actually found that in general there is no significant difference between ethical perceptions of earnings management practices of accountant Lecturer, accounting students and managers. In another study, Rustiana (2006) found differences in ethical perceptions between accounting students and auditors in the ethical accounting dilemma situation. The ethical dilemma situation in the study is the volume of sales that was advanced earlier with the motive of pursuing bonuses and credit approval based on good relations. The ethical perceptions in the study were measured by the multidimensional ethics scale adopted from the Reidenbach and Robin studies Based on that thinking, the framework of thinking in this research is as follows:




Figure 2.1 Research Framework

G. Hypothesis Formulation of hypotheses in this study are as follows:

Ha1: The Ethical Perception of Public Accountants in Jabodetabek Territory Affects Earning Management Practices.

Ha2: Ethical Perception Management Accountant in Greater Jakarta Area Affects Against Earning Management Practices.

Ha3: Ethical Perceptions of Lecturers Accountants in Greater Jakarta Area Affect Against Earning Management Practices.

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY A. Time and Place of Study Research on "The Effect of Ethical Perception of Public Accountant, Management Accountant and Accountant Lecturer In Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang And Bekasi (Jabodetabek) Area To Earning Management Practice", implemented in the period of June 2017 - December 2017. B. Research Methods This study uses an associative method with a quantitative approach that aims to determine the effect of systematic research variables, factual and accurate about the ethical perceptions of Lecturers accountants to Earning Management Practice. C. Definition and Operationalization of Variables Operational definition of a variable is a definition given to a variable by giving meaning, or providing an operational needed to measure that variable. The

Operational Definition Variables used by the author in conducting the preparation of research are:

a) Ethical Perceptions of Accountants Is Ethical Perception on Earning Management Practices based on accounting profession in Jabodetabek area.

b) Earning Management Practices Is a Earning Management Practice against Manipulation of Operational Decisions and Accounting Manipulation from the point of view of Profession in Accounting and Management

D. Data Collection Method Data collection is an early stage in conducting the survey. After developing a list of questions (questionnaires) and sample determinations for surveys, the next step determines how to collect data. The data collection methods used by the author, namely: Survey With Questionnaire That is, surveys are administered in groups (Group-administed Survey). In this case, respondents are gathered in a group in a certain place, usually at the place (room) in their workplace. The survey officer then explained their purpose and how to answer the questionnaire, and after the respondents completed the questionnaire, they returned it to the survey officer. This will increase the rate of return (respondent rate) of the questionnaire used for the study. Primary Data is a technique of collecting data through a number of questionnaires submitted that relate to the problem under study by distributing questionnaires to the Public Accountant Profession, Management Accountant and Lecturer Accountant in order to fill in the form field objectively

Ethical Perception of

Public Accountants

Earning Management

Practices

Ethical Perception of Management Accountants

Earning Management

Practices

Ethical Perception of

Lecturer Accountants

Earning Management

Practices




E. Population And Sample Research Population refers to the entire group of people, events, or interests to be investigated (Now, 2006). The population used in this study are accounting actors with the profession of Public Accountant, Accountant Management and Accountant Lecturer in the area of Jakarta Bogor, Depok, Tangerang, and Bekasi Sampling technique in this study is incidental sampling technique, by distributing questionnaires to respondents encountered by the author in Jabodetabek area according to his profession. The reason for selecting this sampling technique is to simplify the sampling process. (Fikriningrum, 2012: 34). Roscoe (1975) in Sekaran (1992) stated that: 1. The number of samples sufficient for the study is in the range of 30 to 500. In studies using multivariate analysis (such as multiple regression analysis), the sample size must be at least 10 times larger than the number of independent variables. Meanwhile, Tabachnick and Fidell (1997) in (Hair, 1998), the required sample size is between 5 - 10 times the number of parameters. With the number of research parameters, in this case is the number of construct indicators of 20, then the number of respondents ideally is between 100-200 respondents .. F. Data Analysis Method 1. Test Validity and Realibility

a) Validity test Validation test is used to measure the validity or validity of a questionnaire. The questionnaire is said to be valid if the question on the questionnaire is able to reveal something that will be measured by the questionnaire.

b) Test Reliability Reliability test is a measuring tool for a stability and consistency of respondents in answering matters relating to construct - construct question which is an indicator of a variable and arranged in a form of questionnaire.

2. Descriptive Statistics Analysis Descriptive statistics are statistics used to analyze data by way of describing or describing data that has been accumulated as is without intending to make conclusions that apply to the public or generalization.

3. Classic Assumption Test a) Normality test

Normality test is used to determine whether the data is normally distributed or not. The normalized level of data is very important, because with normally distributed data, then the data is considered to be representative of the population.

b) Test Multicolonierity Multicolonierity test aims to test whether the regression model found the correlation between independent variables (Independent). A good regression model should not be correlated between independent variables.

c) Heteroscedasticity Test Heteroskedasticity test aims to test whether the regression model of variance inequality occurrence of one observation residual to another observation remains, hence it is called Homoscedasticity and if different is called Heteroscedasticity.

4. Hypothesis Testing a) Coefficient of Determination Test

Coefficient determines to see how big variable X1 and X2 have relation to variable Y, hence used coefficient of determination (Kd) which is correlation square.

b) Whole or Simultaneous Testing (F Test) F test is done to know the relation of independent variable simultaneously to the dependent variable then used significant level 0,05.

c) Individual or Persial Testing (t-test) To know the assumption or guess is true or not, then conducted a test called t test. T test is a procedure that allows the decision whether the decision is accepted or rejected on the assumption or hypothesis proposed. (Source Nila Hapsari, 2013)

d) Simple Linear Regression Analysis Testing this hypothesis in accordance with the predefined hypothesis, namely using regression testing with tools SPSS Statistics program version 20.0. In this study each independent variable is tested with a simple linear regression equation




RESEARCH RESULT AND DISCUSSION

Based on the results of hypothesis testing can be summarized in the following table 4.1:

Table. 4.1 Hypothesis Testing Results

Hypothesis H0 Ha Sig. (p-value) Remark

Hypothesis 1 > 0,05 ≤ 0,05 0,002 Ha1 Accepted

Hypothesis 2 > 0,05 ≤ 0,05 0,073 Ha2 Rejected Hypothesis 3 > 0,05 ≤ 0,05 0,004 Ha3 Accepted

Source : SPSS

From table 4.1 above, it can be concluded that according to the ethical perceptions of Public Accountants and Accountants Lecturer effect on earnings management practices. While on the ethical perception of Management Accountant happened the opposite.

1) Hypothesis Testing Results 1 The results of this study say that the public accountant's ethical perception of positive influence on earnings management practices. In the study of Malia (2010) in his study involving public accountant, government accountant, accountant educator and accountant of Jakarta area management with the result of his research that ethical orientation and accountant experience have significant influence to ethical perception about earnings management practice, this research is in line with previous research which stated result a positive ethical perception of the public accountant profession to earnings management practices.

2) Hypothesis Testing Results 2 The results of this study say that the ethical perception of Management Accountant has no positive effect on earnings management practices. In the study of Malia (2010) in his study involving public accountant, government accountant, accountant educator and accountant of Jakarta area management with the result of his research that ethical orientation and accountant experience have significant influence to ethical perception about earnings management practice, this research is not in line with previous research which stated result of a positive ethical perception of profession of management accountant to earnings management practice.

3) Hypothesis Testing Results 3 The results of this study say that the ethical perception of Lecturer Accountant positive influence on earnings management practices. In the study of Rahmawati and Sulardi (2003) which in his study involves accountant Lecturer, accounting students, and managers in Surakarta actually found that in general there is no significant difference between ethical perceptions of earnings management practices of accountant Lecturer, accounting students and managers. This study is in line

with previous research that states the result of no significant difference in the ethical perception of accountants Lecturer to earnings management practices.

CONCLUDE, IMPLICATION AND ADVICE 1. Conclusion Based on the results of the discussion in the previous chapter, several conclusions of the results of this study are summarized as follows:

1. There is a positive influence of Ethical Perception of Public Accountant in Jabodetabek area to Earning Management Practice. This indicates that the public accountant's understanding of earnings management practices, the more positive the ethical perception towards earnings management practices.

2. There is no positive influence of Ethical Perception of Management Accountant in Jabodetabek Area to Earning Management Practice. This indicates that the less understanding of management accountant to earnings management practice or if management acknowledge the practice of earnings management does not affect the ethical perception of the implementation of earnings management on the implementation of tasks and responsibilities in the field of accounting, the ethical perception was more negative to the practice of earnings management

3. There is a positive influence of Ethical Perception of Lecturer Accountant in Jabodetabek area to Earning Management Practice. This indicates that the public accountant's understanding of earnings management practices, the more positive the ethical perception towards earnings management practices




2. Suggestions This study has implications for future research, especially those related to the level of understanding and ethical perception. Therefore research in the future, other researchers need to pay attention to the limitations include:

1) Limitations On Research Instruments Research data resulted from the use of the instrument based on perceptions of respondents' answers. To collect data one of the methods used by researchers is to apply survey method by using questionnaire which resulted in the possibility of bias control of respondents' answers. Respondents may not be honest in filling out the questionnaire. To overcome the weakness of this survey method, researchers also conducted a direct interview method to some respondents at the time of the distribution of questionnaires.

2) Limitations on the sample This study uses the respondents as samples in the study, then the limitations that may arise is the bias due to inappropriate sample selection. To overcome this weakness the researchers increased the number of questionnaires distributed from the minimal sample.

3) Limitations on time and research

variables. Taking into account the time of limited research so that researchers should limit the research variables that should be developed more varied again.

Due to the above limitations, it is recommended in further research:

1. In future research, it is suggested to use more in the method of interview or experiment so that internal validity and external data more reliable. It is also recommended that subsequent research using secondary data to support primary data so that research variables are more varied such as environmental factors and business communication.

2. The number of Respondents in this study is still lacking and needs to be expanded the distribution of questionnaires in other universities, in order to achieve the balance of the population of respondents.

3. In the research questionnaire, as much as possible using a straightforward language and easily understood and understood by the respondents, of course by using the language in accordance with the theme of research.

REFERENCE 1. A Mubarok. Yuni U. 2011, Persepsi Profesi

Akuntan Terhadap Penerapan Manajemen Laba,

Universitas Pancasakti Tegal

2. A Mubarok, 2011, “Pengaruh Faktor Tingkat

Pendidikan, Pengalaman Memimpin dan Skala

Usaha terhadap Penerapan Sistem Informasi

Akuntansi: Penelitian pada Lembaga Keuangan

Mikro Syariah BMT di Daerah Tegal”, Jurnal

Sosekhum. Vol.7 No. 10.

3. Baihaqi F, A. Mubarok, Yuni U. 2011. Persepsi

Profesi Akuntan terhadap Filsafat Moral, Etika

dan Tanggung Jawab Sosial dan Pengaruhnya

terhadap Penilaian Manajemen Laba. Laporan

Penelitian. Lembaga Penelitian. Universitas

Pancasakti Tegal. Widarjono. 2010. Analisis

Statistika Multivariat Terapan. Edisi Pertama

Yogyakarta: UPP STIM YKPN

4. B Y S Abadi, 2002, Analisis Tingkat Penerapan

Good Corporate Governance Perusahaan

Perbankan yang Terdaftar di Bursa Efek Jakarta

Tahun 2003. Perbanas Finance & Banking Journal.

Vol. 6. No.1: 1-22.

5. C D Astuti dan dan Hasnawati, 2003, Analisis

Pengungkapan Tema-Tema Sosial pada Industri

Customer Goods yang Terdaftar di Bursa Efek

Jakarta, Bunga Rampai Penelitian Akuntansi.

Jakarta: LPFE Universitas Trisakti.

6. I Baharuddin dan H Satyanugraha, Faktor-Faktor

yang Mempengaruhi Persepsi Profesi Akuntan

terhadap Praktik Earning Magement. Media Riset

Akuntansi, Auditing dan Informasi. Vol. 4. No. : 1-

22.

7. Ghozali. 2007. Aplikasi Analisis Multivariate

dengan Program SPSS. Cetakan IV. Semarang: BP

Universitas Diponegoro.

8. Inggarwati Komala dan Kaudin Arnold. 2010

Persepsi Etis Pelaku Akuntansi Terhadap Praktik

Manajemen Laba Berdasarkan Profesi Akuntansi

Dan Jender1, Jurnal Akuntansi Teori dan Terapan

Tahun 3, No. 3, Desember 2010

9. M Jalil dan A. Mubarok, 2010, Persepsi Fakultas

Ekonomi Universitas Pancasakti Tegal terhadap

Etika Bisnis, Majalah Cermin UPS Tegal. Edisi

45/Maret 2010: 45-51. N. Indriantoro dan B

Supomo. 2009. Metodologi Penelitian Bisnis untuk

Akuntansi & Manajemen. Edisi Pertama.

Yogyakarta: BPFE.

10. Malia, 2010, Pengaruh Orientasi Etika dan

Pengalaman Akuntan Terhadap Persepsi Etis

Tentang Praktik Manajemen Laba (Studi Pada

Akuntan Di Jakarta), Skripsi Universitas Islam

Negeri Syarif Hidayatullah Jakarta.

11. Riduwan. 2004. Metode & Teknik Menyusun Tesis,

Bandung: Penerbit Alfabeta.

12. S Sulistyanto. 2008. Manajemen Laba: Teori dan

Model Empiris. Jakarta: Penerbit Grasindo.

13. Suprapti Chatarina. 2013. Pengaruh Beban pajak

Tangguhan, Earningabilitas Dan Leverage




Terhadap Manajemen Laba (Studi Empiris Pada

Perusahaan Perbankan yang Terdaftar Dibursa

Efek Indonesia Periode 2010 – 2012. Jakarta,

Universitas Mercubuana

14. ______. Konsep Laba Teori Akuntansi.

15. http://dianpawpaw.wordpress.com/2012/1

2/05/konsep-laba-teori-akuntansi/, diakses

tanggal 20 Juli 2017


http://dianpawpaw.wordpress.com/2012/12/05/konsep-laba-teori-akuntansi/

http://dianpawpaw.wordpress.com/2012/12/05/konsep-laba-teori-akuntansi/



ANALYSIS OF CORRUPTION CASE OF TRUST TAX COMPLIANCE AND ITS IMPACT ON TAXPAYERS

Islamiah Kamil Faculty Of Economics And Business

University Prof.Dr.Moestopo University (Beragama)

ABSTRACT

To objective of this study to determine the effect of the Trust Tax Corruption taxpayer and to determine the effect of the

tax Corruption Taxpayer Compliance in the Territory of Jakarta and Tangerang. Analysis technique used is a simple

linear regression. Hypothesis testing is to determine the effect of independent variables on the dependent variable as a

whole is to use partial hypothesis testing performed by t test. The end result of this research is that the corruption tax

significant effect on the Trust Territory Taxpayers Tax Office (KPP) Pratama of Jakarta and Tangerang. And Corruption

Compliance taxes significantly influence taxpayer in Regional Tax Office (KPP) Pratama of Jakarta and Tangerang

KEYWORDS: Corruption Tax, Trust Taxpayers and Taxpayer Compliance

I. INTRODUCTION 1.1 Background

Liputan6.com (2019). The Ministry of Finance (MoF) estimates the receptiontax for the whole year 2019 will not reach the target. Known to the target set in the Budget (APBN) in 2019 amounted to Rp 1577.56 trillion. Director General of Taxation (DGT) of the Ministry of Finance Robert Pakpahan said deficiency or shortfall of tax revenues by the end of the year is estimated to reach Rp 140 trillion. He explained that the tax revenue until the end of the year will only reach 91 percent of the target with growth of just 9.5 percent from a year ago. In fact, growth in tax revenues last year could reach 14.3 percent even though only 92 percent of the target.

kompasiana.com (2015) All citizens of Indonesia certainly has the understanding that corruption as an extraordinary crime (extraordinary crime) is a crime of moral hazard. But we must also agree that the legislation made full flavor of corruption is also a moral hazard, as well as anti-corruption efforts that led to the occurrence of crime or injustice against the alleged corruption is also a moral hazard.

Some Corruption Cases Taxes revealed back in 2019 include Bribery case Restitution of PT Wahana Auto one-way (WAE), which revealed the Commission, on Thursday (15/08/2019) is not new in the list of corruption in the Directorate General of Taxation (DGT). Earlier, a similar case was also carried out by PT Cherng Tay Indonesia and expressed thanks to the results of the investigation the Commission and the Inspectorate of the Ministry

of Finance Investigation. Two cases were so interesting, because later on Restitution be one factor contributing to the breakdown of the pockets of tax revenue. In 2018, for example, the DGT recorded a VAT refund (VAT) and Income Tax (Income Tax) reached around Rp118 trillion, an increase of 2017 stands at Rp110 trillion. This year, the restitution payment is projected to reach Rp141,6 trillion, growing by about 20 percent compared to 2018. In the first quarter / 2019, the time of actual payment of restitution which reached Rp50, 65 trillion --tumbuh 47.83 percent over the same period in the year 2018-- non-oil tax can be collected only 234.5 trillion, up 0.6 percent. Why the government is speeding up the restitution jor-rod? Restitution acceleration policy has actually been in force since 12 April 2018 through the Finance Minister Regulation (PMK) No. 39 of 2018 (tirto.co.id 2019)

Vivanews.com (2010) Poor perceptions of law enforcement can be observed from the various surveys conducted, both by the Indonesian Survey Institute (LSI) and Transparency International aional Indonesia (TII). LSI Survey (2010), entitled the integrity of law enforcement is divided into two, namely the prevention of internal corruption and political independence of law enforcement, employers and corruption showed a very low figure.The current condition of society has not fully feel the results of national income through the tax. Their receipts, it turns out sometimes leak in the middle of the road. The money from the tax incurred by the taxpayer this turned out to be misused. Money-money from this tax into personal savings tax officials. The tax officer sad action when compared


https://www.liputan6.com/bisnis/read/4008486/sri-mulyani-terbitkan-aturan-diskon-pajak-300-persen-pekan-depan



with people who did not difficult the continuation nasibnya.Perkembangan note how corruption cases in Indonesia is quite alarming, before the corruption cases emerge confidence and taxpayer compliance is still low. But the case of this tax officials, inevitably affect people's negative view of the officer or anything related to taxes. Researchers want to know how far the influence of corruption on trust and its impact on taxpayer compliance. The purpose of this study is to demonstrate empirically regarding:

1) To determine the effect of the Tax Tax Corruption Trust Territory taxpayer in the tax office in Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi

2) To determine the effect of the Tax Corruption Taxpayer Compliance Regional Tax Office in Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi

ICW (2011) The purpose of the enforcement of corruption is the birth of a deterrent effect. The deterrent effect is important to control corruption crime that did not develop into a criminal act of a systemic nature. Because, if corruption is to be on a systemic level, the impact of these crimes are becoming more serious, because it not only causes great loss to the state, but also breeds poverty, poor public services, and undermine the country's economic foundation. Even as corrupt law enforcement, corruption cases are handled they often lead SP3, shelved or even end up 'peace'. In this case the public trust is very important in realizing the tax compliance amid rampant corruption cases that develop tax.

II. LITERATURE REVIEW 2.1 Theory of Bad Apple

This theory states that a person who committed corruption caused by moral defects and there is a causal relationship between moral disability with a propensity for corruption. Someone has a moral disability because in the process of socialization that he received, he "permeates" the values that deviate from the community so that he acted on the basis of distorted values that he received on the socialization process itself. Efforts to prevent corruption by these theories bad apple is when the root cause in the question of why someone with corruption and the answer lies in self-control self sendiri.agar indivvidu it can improve self-control that exist within the individual itself is a way to create norms strong norms Yazid (2014).

2.2 Tax Tax Definition of tax under Soemitro in the

Official (2009: 1) describes the "taxes are the contributions of the people to the state treasury by law (which can dipaksanakan) does not receive the services of reciprocity (contra) directly demonstrated, and which is used to pay for general expenses" some of the collection system, the official assesstment system, self assesstment system, and with the holding system. The mechanism of voting and tax cuts must

meet the requirements of the four principles (Smith in Prawoto, 2010; 56) which equalit principle, the principle of certainty, convenience of payment principle and the principle of efficiency. Taxes have an important role in the life of the nation, especially in the implementation of development for a source of state income tax to finance all public spending including development expenses. One form of state revenue is a tax pajak.Penerimaan acceptance of mandatory contributions from persons or entities that are owed to the State and be enforceable under the law, by not getting rewarded directly and used for the purposes of state for the greatest prosperity of the people. Tax revenue sources divided into two central taxes and central daerah.Pajak tax is a tax used to finance the State's household, this tax is levied by the central government. Central taxes such as income tax (VAT), value added tax and the goods and services sales tax on luxury goods (VAT; VAT-BM), land and building tax (PBB), stamp duties, import duties, excise and export taxes. Tax receipts is mandatory contributions from persons or entities that are owed to the State and be enforceable under the law, by not getting rewarded directly and used for the purposes of state for the greatest prosperity of the people. Tax revenue sources divided into two central taxes and central daerah.Pajak tax is a tax used to finance the State's household, this tax is levied by the central government. Central taxes such as income tax (VAT), value added tax and the goods and services sales tax on luxury goods (VAT; VAT-BM), land and building tax (PBB), stamp duties, import duties, excise and export taxes. Tax receipts is mandatory contributions from persons or entities that are owed to the State and be enforceable under the law, by not getting rewarded directly and used for the purposes of state for the greatest prosperity of the people. Tax revenue sources divided into two central taxes and central daerah.Pajak tax is a tax used to finance the State's household, this tax is levied by the central government. Central taxes such as income tax (VAT), value added tax and the goods and services sales tax on luxury goods (VAT; VAT-BM), land and building tax (PBB), stamp duties, import duties, excise and export taxes. by not getting rewarded directly and used for the purposes of state for the greatest prosperity of the people. Tax revenue sources divided into two central taxes and central daerah.Pajak tax is a tax used to finance the State's household, this tax is levied by the central government. Central taxes such as income tax (VAT), value added tax and the goods and services sales tax on luxury goods (VAT; VAT-BM), land and building tax (PBB), stamp duties, import duties, excise and export taxes. by not getting rewarded directly and used for the purposes of state for the greatest prosperity of the people. Tax revenue sources divided into two central taxes and central daerah.Pajak tax is a tax used to finance the State's household, this tax is levied by the central




government. Central taxes such as income tax (VAT), value added tax and the goods and services sales tax on luxury goods (VAT; VAT-BM), land and building tax (PBB), stamp duties, import duties, excise and export taxes.

2.3 Corruption Tax Corruption is a very broad term

pengertiannya.Pavarala (1996) divided the two groups the sense used in view of legal or so-called corruption in the sense sempit.Kedua is a broader definition of corruption is seen not only legal but more than that in considering the moral and ethics. In a narrow sense, corruption is defined as bribery (bribery), the use of public goods that are not in accordance with the allotment (misappropriation of public resources), commissions (kickbacks and commissions), misappropriation (embezzlement), the provision exceeds the value allowed (gifts beyond a Certain value ), and selling public office (sale of public office). Like a dangerous virus of corruption can cause widespread outbreaks of the social and economic conditions of the community. Corruption is any abuse of authority and power with the aim to enrich themselves or among themselves very didrahasiakan for parties outside the circle itself (Vito Tanzi, 1998). Corruption is an act that deviates from the existing provisions for personal gain, as described by Joseph S. Nye in Klitgaard (1998: 31), the definition of corruption is behavior that deviates from the official duties of a public office for profit status or money regarding personal (individual, close relatives, the group itself) or violate the rules of implementation of some personal conduct. According to the Indonesian General Dictionary in Djaja (2008: 8), corruption is bad deeds such as embezzlement, receiving kickbacks and so forth. Understanding of corruption based on Article 2 of Law no. 31 of 1999 as amended by Law no. 20 in 2001, corruption is an act unlawfully with intent to enrich themselves / others (individual or corporation) that can be detrimental to the financial / economy of the State. Kartono (1983) provides limits of corruption as the behavior of individuals who use the authority and position to extract a personal benefit, harm the public interest and the state. So corruption is a symptom of misuse and mismanagement of power for personal gain, mismanagement of the resources of the country by using the authority and powers of formal (eg for legal reasons and firepower) to enrich themselves. Corruption occurs due to abuses of power and positions held by officials or employees for personal gain in the name of personal or family, relatives and friends. Tax abuse is unethical actions that are still common. Taxes were supposed to be functioning well as budgetair become less effective. Tax misuse occurs occurs can be seen from two points of view, ie from the standpoint of the taxpayer and the second is from the standpoint of the government.

a. From a community perspective From the standpoint of the taxpayer means the fact that there is still a group of people who are less aware of the importance of taxation as budgetair so they avoid tax evasion by the government (corruption) that nantinta impact on the communities they are less trusting THAT pemerintah.Oleh Therefore, there needs to be improvement in sector taxation mechanism to make it more profitable taxpayer. Many complaints from people who feel less satisfied on taxation, less fair and less reflect the provisions of the Act. According to them the tax collection mechanism created more favorable Tax Directorate officers rather than the taxpayer. According to the observation that was done Angga Pangestu (2010) in the factors which affect tax evasion is as follows do not trust government, do not understand about the mechanism of payment of tax, requires a long time to pay taxes, and the latter are less satisfied with the performance of tax institutions. The results are as follows Seeing the results of this survey, we can conclude that the performance in tax institutions must be addressed, including in its supervision.

b. Perspective of Government Abuse of tax seen from the viewpoint of the government is often encountered. Corruption occurs because of several causes that can be seen from the aspect of individual behavior, organizational aspects of government, and aspects of the legislation. Aspects of individual behavior in the theory of Maslow's needs, said Sulistyantor (2004) corruption should only be done by people to satisfy two needs at the bottom and the logic of the straight only be done by a community of people who barely survive, but today corruption is committed by people rich, higher education and has office. There are several causes of corruption. Singh (1974) found in his research that the cause of corruption is moral weakness (41.3%), economic pressure (23.8%), the administrative structure of the barrier (17.2%),

2.4 Taxpayer Compliance Tax compliance proposed by Norman D.

Nowak as "a climate" awareness of compliance and fulfillment of tax obligations are reflected in the taxpayer understand the situation or trying to understand all the provisions of the tax legislation, filling out tax forms completely and clearly, calculate the amount of tax payable properly, and pay taxes owed on time. Tax compliance and awareness qualitatively have the following; understanding tax awareness is considered to have more than the value of tax compliance. Awareness of taxation arising from the taxpayer's own self, without too much attention to their tax penalties. Whereas tax compliance arise precisely because of knowing their tax penalties. Nevertheless, in practice it is difficult to distinguish whether a taxpayer who meet the tax obligation is motivated by conscience or motivated




by compliance experts stated, compliance behavior is to do or not do certain activities in accordance with the rules and regulations. If the taxpayer has been able to understand the tax rules and regulations, and understand the meaning and function of taxes, then the public will be aware of paying taxes (tax consciousness). Sincerity desire to pay taxes will be realized with the active actions, ie pay taxes on time and the amount due (tax disciplinary). So it can be concluded, tax compliance is the behavior of the Taxpayer in fulfilling tax obligations in accordance with applicable regulations. compliance behavior is to do or not do certain activities in accordance with the rules and regulations. If the taxpayer has been able to understand the tax rules and regulations, and understand the meaning and function of taxes, then the public will be aware of paying taxes (tax consciousness). Sincerity desire to pay taxes will be realized with the active actions, ie pay taxes on time and the amount due (tax disciplinary). So it can be concluded, tax compliance is the behavior of the Taxpayer in fulfilling tax obligations in accordance with applicable regulations. compliance behavior is to do or not do certain activities in accordance with the rules and regulations. If the taxpayer has been able to understand the tax rules and regulations, and understand the meaning and function of taxes, then the public will be aware of paying taxes (tax consciousness). Sincerity desire to pay taxes will be realized with the active actions, ie pay taxes on time and the amount due (tax disciplinary). So it can be concluded, tax compliance is the behavior of the Taxpayer in fulfilling tax obligations in accordance with applicable regulations. Sincerity desire to pay taxes will be realized with the active actions, ie pay taxes on time and the amount due (tax disciplinary). So it can be concluded, tax compliance is the behavior of the Taxpayer in fulfilling tax obligations in accordance with applicable regulations. Sincerity desire to pay taxes will be realized with the active actions, ie pay taxes on time and the amount due (tax disciplinary). So it can be concluded, tax compliance is the behavior of the Taxpayer in fulfilling tax obligations in accordance with applicable regulations. Komalasari (2005) stated when talking about compliance (compliance), it first needs to be known about what should be measured, whether evasion, avoidance, compliance or non-compliance. Compliance can be categorized in two ways: 1. Administrative compliance, Is a form of

compliance with administrative rules such as the submission of timely payments.

2. Technical compliance, A technical tax compliance to the payment of taxes, such as taxes are calculated in accordance with the technical provisions of the tax law.

Additionally, Nurmantu (in Yunita, 2007) distinguishes compliance into two kinds, namely:

1. Formal compliance Formal compliance is a condition where the taxpayer formally meet tax obligations in accordance with the provisions of the tax laws. For example, the deadline of filing (SPT) yearly.

2. Material compliance Compliance material is a situation where Compulsory PajakNsecara substance or material nature to fulfill all terms of taxation that is according to the contents and provisions of the tax laws. So Taxpayers who meet the material compliance in filling SPT is a taxpayer who fills honestly, properly and correctly in accordance with the provisions of tax returns and submit to the Tax Office (LTO) before the deadline.

2.5 Trust Taxpayers Public confidence in the tax officials are influenced by how the attitude of tax officials as well as the actions taken when carrying out their duties. Fraud action by tax officials, make the Indonesian people have a negative perception of the tax authority and tax officials, and it will encourage taxpayers tend to be tidsk obedient. Suciaty (2013) and Susan (2013). Confidence (trust) is defined as the belief that arise because the customer was satisfied and comfortable for the fulfillment of the responsibility of providers of goods and services. Factors that shape a person's belief against the other three, namely the ability (ability), goodwill (benevolence), and integrity (integrity) (Mayer et al., In Rofiq, 2009: 32). These three factors can be explained as follows:

1. Ability (Ability), refers to the competence and capability characteristics of sellers / organizations in influencing and authorize the specific area. In this case, how the government, especially the tax authorities are able to provide, to serve, to secure the transaction of any other party interference. This means that the taxpayer obtain satisfaction guarantee and security in the transaction. Kim and Tadisina (2003) states that the abilities include competence, experience and institutional endorsement, and kemampuam in science. The belief that a partner has the necessary skills to do a task (Coetzee & Eloff, 2005: 498).

2. Goodwill (Benevolence), goodwill is the willingness of sellers to provide mutual satisfaction with the consumer. According to Kim and Tadisina (2003), benevolence include "attention, empathy, confidence, and acceptance". A person may rely on the good will of others to act in the best interest of a person. (Hoy & Tarter, 2004: 254)

3. Integrity (Integrity, integrity relates to how the behavior or habit sellers in doing business. The information provided to consumers is completely inconsistent with the facts or not. Kim and Tadisina (2003) suggested that "integrity can be seen from the point of fairness (fairness), compliance ( fulfillment),




fidelity (loyalty), frankness (honestly), the linkage (dependability), and reliability (reliabilty) ". While integrity is honesty, fairness, and trust given to consumers (Koeszeig, 2004: 640).

Trust is the willingness on the availability to make an exchange with a trusted partner, due to the reliability and integrity. Trust is a willingness or confidence exchange partners to establish long-term relationships to generate a positive working (Crosby

et al., 2000 in Yulianto and Waluyo, 2004: 349). Trust exists when a group believes in nature reliable and integrity of partners. Trust is the expectation held by individuals that greeting someone reliable. Reliable group needs to have high integrity and reliable, which is associated with the quality that is: consistent, competent, honest, fair, responsible, helpful and kind (Morgan and Hunt, 2004 in Yulianto and Waluyo, 2004: 350). Trust is a number of specific beliefs about integrity,

2.6 Framework and Preliminary Study The framework of this research are:

Figure 2.1. framework Thought

2.7 hypothesis The hypothesis is a temporary answer to the

problem studied and the truth needs to be tested empirically. This study uses research hypothesis stating their causal influence of one variable to another variable.

1. Corruption affects the Trust Tax Personal Tax According to the Indonesian General Dictionary in Djaja (2008: 8), corruption is bad deeds such as embezzlement, receiving kickbacks and so forth. Understanding of corruption based on Article 2 of Law no. 31 of 1999 as amended by Law no. 20 in 2001, corruption is an act unlawfully with intent to enrich themselves / others (individual or corporation) that can be detrimental to the financial / economy of the State. Budi vice governor (2012) based on her research is not found the influence of perceived levels of corruption in the institution of taxation on the intention to behave not dutifully pay taxes. Public confidence in the tax officials are influenced by how the attitude of tax officials as well as the actions taken when carrying out their duties. Fraud action by tax officials, make the Indonesian people have a negative perception of the tax authority and tax officials, and it will encourage taxpayers tend to be non-compliant. Suciaty (2013) and Susan (2013). Based on the description of the research hypothesis is as follows:

H1: Corruption Tax effect on the individual taxpayer confidence in the Regional Tax Office of Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi

2. Tax Corruption affects the individual taxpayer compliance According to the Indonesian General Dictionary in Djaja (2008: 8), corruption is bad deeds such as embezzlement, receiving kickbacks and so forth. Understanding of corruption based on Article 2 of Law no. 31 of 1999 as amended by Law no. 20 in 2001, corruption is an act unlawfully with intent to enrich themselves / others (individual or corporation) that can be detrimental to the financial / economy of the State. Bird et al (2004 in Ajaz and Ahmad, 2010) discovered an important role of corruption, the Gupta (2007) also found that corruption has a significant negative impact on the performance of the reception. Premature et al (2016) suggest that the perception of the taxpayer on corruption and extortion does not have a significant influence on the level of tax compliance.

H2: Corruption Tax effect on the individual taxpayer compliance in the Regional Tax Office of Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi

III. RESEARCH METHODS 3.1 Research Methods This study uses causal research methods which aims to meguji about the effect, between a variable (an independent / Xn) with other variables (Dependent Variable / Yn). In this case comprises: X1 = Corruption Tax, and Y1 = Taxpayer confidence Dependent variable tax as well as Y2 = Compliance taxpayer as Dependent variables. This research requires a hypothesis testing with statistical tests.

Tax Corruption

Taxpayer

confidence

Taxpayer

compliance




3.2 Definisi and Operational Variables variablesare all things that will be the object of

observation in other research in the form of a concept that has a variation value. In this research will reveal the independent variable (independent variable) and the dependent variable (dependent variable, the independent variables are:

a) Corruption Tax (X1) as independent variables

b) Taxpayer confidence Tax (Y1) as the Dependent variables

c) Taxpayer Compliance (Y2) as varaibel Dependent

DefinitionOperational variables is a definition given to a variable by giving a sense, as well as provide an operational needed to measure these variables. The Operational Definition of Variables used in the conduct of research preparation is:

a. Corruption Tax Is the perception of an individual taxpayer on tax corruption case on factors corruption tax in the region of the Tax Office in Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi

b. Trust and Taxpayer Compliance Is the result of measurement of perceived individual taxpayer tax corruption case of the factors of corruption pajakterhadap satisfaction and compliance with an individual taxpayer in the tax office in Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi

3.3 Population and Research Samples Population whole groups of people, events, or

anything interests you want investigated (have now, 2006) digunakand .Populasi the nature of this research is an individual taxpayer who performs the registered office of the Tax that was in Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi and is still a taxpayer effectively, the reason for the selection of this population as an individual taxpayer effectively the taxpayers who meet tax obligations, and this study focuses on the factors that affect individual taxpayers in meeting tax obligations (Fikriningrum 2012 : 34). The sampling technique in this research is incidental sampling technique, by distributing questionnaires to taxpayers who are visiting Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi Tax Office. The reasons for selecting the sampling technique is to simplify the process of sampling. (Fikriningrum, 2012: 34) .Roscoe (1975) in sekaran (1992) menyatakanbahwa: 1. The number of samples sufficient for the study ranged from 30 to 500. In a study using multivariate analysis (such as regression analysis), the sample size must be at least 10 times greater than the number of independent variables. Meanwhile, Hair et al. (1998) states that the minimum number of samples to be taken when using multiple regression analysis

technique is 15 to 20 times the number of variables is digunakan. Sample is determined by the requirements as specified by Tabachnick approach and Fidell (1997) in (Hair, 1998), the required sample size is between 5-10 times the number of parameters.

3.4 Metode Data Analysis Before testing the hypothesis that the normal

assumption test to determine whether the variables compared to averages have normally distributed. Normality testing techniques used in this study is the One-Sample T Test Program is contained in SPSS 20.0 for Windows.

Decision-making is done by comparing the significance of test results with a significance level of 0.05. The significance of this normality test to be 0.05, because if the significance value less than 0.05 then the data is not normally distributed.

If the data distribution is not normal trimming method is used. One of the causes that make the data are not normally distributed is because there are several items of data that are outliers, ie which has a value outside the normal range compared with other data in a sample. For this purpose trimming method, ie discard the data that are outliers (Nugroho: 2005). Characteristics of statistical test equipment Independent-Samples T Test is:

1) Data to be tested normal distribution or,

2) Variants of these data homogeneous, if one of these two characteristics are met then testing can be done.

Indenpendent Test-Samples T Test is based on the results of Levene's Test, taken a decision. Basis of decision-making is if the probability is greater than 0.05 then Ha is rejected, meaning there is no significant difference between groups of samples. Conversely, if the probability is less than 0.05 then Ha accepted, meaning that there are significant differences between sample groups.

1. Validity test Validity is a measure of what you want to measure, validity or authenticity of the form, predictive, convergent, correlation technique is used, whereas discriminant t test was used to distinguish items that distinguishing between 50% or 27% of the lowest score with 50% or 27% of the highest score. If t + T table then the data collection tool can be expressed Valid for these variables.

2. test Reliability Test reliability or reliability of the use of

"Cronbach Alpha" (α) this can be used to test the reliability of the instrument Likert scale (1 to 5) or the item-item instrument in the form of an essay. Reliability tests for analysis item Likert scale use, ie for each particular item scores dikorekalsikan with the total score, if r is less than 0.80 or r (alpha) <t otherwise unreliable.




3. Hypothesis test Testing the hypothesis in this thesis, using Influence testing which uses two variable or more variables that distinguish between dependent variables and independent variables. Testing Influence here using multivariate techniques for using two variables indpenden. Assessment of the effect is done by examining the effects of the independent variables to the dependent variable. In this study used regression models; then testing the effect statistically wanted to test the influence of variable X (an independent) into a variable Y (Dependent). Tests were conducted to see the effect of X to Y is a t-test.

IV. ANALISIS RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Satatistik t test is used to look at the significance of the influence of individual independent to dependent variable by comparing t arithmetic and t table at 0.05. The statistical test t basically shows how far the influence of the independent explanatory variables individually or in explaining the variation of the dependent variable. According to the table t with a significant level of 0.05 / 2 = 0.025 (two-sided test) then obtained t table 0.2832. T statistical test results are as follows:

Table 4.1 Test results Faith Against Corruption T Taxes Taxpayers

Coefficientsa

Model Coefficients unstandardiz

ed

standardized Coefficients

t Sig.

B Std. Error beta

1 (Constant) 31 622 1,578 20 021 .000

Corruption Tax .181 .056 .310 4,756 .001

a. Dependent Variable: Trust Taxpayers Sumber: Data processed in 2019

Based on table (X) t statistical test result obtained by value t count equal to 4,756 with a significant level of 0.001. This means that t> t table (4.756> 2.832) and significant levels <0.05 (0.000

<0.05 means that corruption k taxes significantly affect the taxpayer Trust (Y1) on the Tax Office (KPP) Pratama of Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi

Table 4.2

Test results T Against Corruption Tax Taxpayer Compliance Coefficientsa

Model Coefficients unstandardized

standardized Coefficients

t Sig.

B Std. Error beta

1 (Constant) 32 383 1,578 20 438 .000

Corruption Tax .212 .046 .289 3,237 .004

a. Dependent Variable: Taxpayer Compliance Sumber: Data processed in 2019

Based on table (X) t statistical test result

obtained t value of 3.237 with a significant level of 0.004. This means that t> t table (3.237> 2.832) and significant levels <0.05 (0.004 <0.05 means that corruption k taxes significantly affect the Taxpayer Compliance (Y2) on the Tax Office (KPP) Pratama

of Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi Based on SPSS output results on the analysis

of the data in Table 4.1 and 4.2 above a simple linear regression equation as follows:

1. Trust Taxpayers = 31.622 + Taxes 0,181 Tax Corruption i

2. Taxpayer Compliance = 32.383 + 0.212 Tax Corruption

Table 4.1 above shows that the constant of

31.622, meaning that if the corruption tax (X) value is 0, then the taxpayer Trust (Y1) value is positive at 31 622, the explanation is a positive value on the




regression coefficient of 0.81 X variable taxpayer confidence. Based on t test is the Corruption Tax positive and significant impact on the Trust Taxpayers, which explains that the increasingly rampant corruption, the more influential the tax on the taxpayer confidence significantly.

Table 4.2 above shows that the constant of 32.383, meaning that if the corruption tax (X) value is 0, then the Taxpayer Compliance (Y2) is positive at 32.383, explanations positive value on the regression coefficient variable X for 0212 is that there is a positive relationship between the variables of Corruption Taxes (X) with variable Taxpayer Compliance. Based on t test is the Corruption Tax positive and significant impact on the Taxpayer Compliance, which explains that the increasingly rampant corruption, the more influential tax on tax compliance is significantly

1. Corruption affects the KepercayaanWajib Tax Personal Tax From the test results obtained by t statistic t value of 4.756 with a significant level of 0.001. This means that t> t table (4.756> 2.832) and significant levels <0.05 (0.000 <0.05 means the tax corruption significantly influences Taxpayer Trust (Y1) on the Tax Office (KPP) Pratama Jakarta, Bogor , Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi. the study is in line with research Mip Gaharu Janah (2018) based his research is the result of this study showed that corruption and extortion variable has no significant effect on tax compliance, then the hypothesis can be accepted as follows:

H1: Corruption Tax effect on Personal

Tax Trust in the Regional Tax

Office in Jakarta, Bogor, Depok,

Tangerang, and Bekasi

2. Tax Corruption affects the individual taxpayer compliance From the test results obtained by t statistic t value of 3.237 with a significant level of 0.004. This means that t> t table (3.237> 2.832) and significant levels <0.05 (0.004 <0.05 means that corruption k taxes significantly affect the Taxpayer Compliance (Y2) on the Tax Office (KPP) Pratama of Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi. the study is in line with the study the study is in line with research Mip Gaharu Janah (2018) based on his research are the results of this study indicate that the variable corruption and extortion has no significant effect on tax compliance, then the hypothesis is acceptable as follows:

H2: Corruption Tax effect on the

individual taxpayer compliance in

the Regional Tax Office of

Jakarta, Bogor, Depok,

Tangerang, and Bekasi

V. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 5.1 Conclusions To Object aims to determine the effect of the tax corruption of trust and tax compliance Tax Office (KPP) Pratama of Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi Based on the analysis and discussion of the research, it can be concluded as follows:

1. Corruption Tax has a positive and significant impact on the confidence of the taxpayer at the Tax Office (KPP) Pratama Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi. The results of this study provide empirical evidence that the confidence of taxpayers affected by the tax corruption case.

2. Corruption Tax has a positive and significant impact on the taxpayer of the Compliance Tax Office (KPP) Pratama Jakarta, Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi. The results of this study provide empirical evidence that compliance of taxpayers affected by the tax corruption happens.

5.2. Recommendations Based on the conclusions of the study, the researchers recommend include:

1. Taxpayers influence perceptions regarding corruption variable tax reporting in the mass media and law enforcement in the tax corruption affects the confidence and tax compliance, so it's good all the involved in the field of taxation reform and qualified mental revolution.

2. Future studies are expected to expand the research sites and the study population by increasing the population of all types of taxpayer. The location of research is not only limited in KPP

3. Future studies are expected to increase taxpayer awareness variable, extortion and corruption in the form of organizational climate

4. Perceptions of Taxpayers on reports tax corruption in the media and law enforcement in the tax corruption has a significant impact on the trust and tax compliance, it is expected that the tax agency and the government to follow up cases of corruption in the field of taxation that occurs strictly and fairly




and precautions in order to avoid a similar action in order to create trust taxpayers to meet their tax obligations using more samples and add other variables as well as extend the time of observation so that the results are better.

REFERENCES

1. Anonymous. Law of the Republic of Indonesia

Number 28 Year 2007 on

2. General Provisions and Tax Procedures.

3. Anonymous. Law Number 36 Year 2008 regarding

Fourth Amendment of Law Number 7 of 1983 on

Income Tax.

4. Arif and Yuda (2017). Corruption Perception

Analysis of Organizational Climate Against Tax

and Individual Tax Payer Compliance Employees,

JOURNAL OF MANAGEMENT RESEARCH Vol.

4, No. 2, July 2017, 169-180

5. Adnan Topan Husodo, et al (2015). Evaluation

And Law Enforcement Commission Roadmap

2012-2015. ICW, 2012.

6. Choiriyah (2013). Influence Taxpayer Trust

Account Representative On Against Taxpayer

Compliance (A Study on the Tax Office for Listed

Companies Securities Indonesia). 2013 Journal of

the UB

7. Diah And Sihar (2018). Influence Taxpayer

Awareness And Against Corruption Perception

Taxes Taxpayer Compliance With Public Trust

For Moderating Variable. Tax Accounting media

publication by the Faculty of Economics and

Business ISSN (P): 2355-9993 (E): 2527-953x

Universitas 17 Agustus 1945 Jakarta Vol. 2, No.

2, July-December 2017: 23-33

Http://Journal.Uta45jakarta.Ac.Id/Index.Php/Ma

8. Hendry (teorionline.2010). Path Analysis.

9. Jogiyanto. 2010. Business Research Methodology,

One Kaprah and experiences. Yogyakarta: BPFE.

10. Mip Gaharu Janah (2018) Effects of Patriotism,

Extortion Against Corruption and Tax

Compliance Tax Office Primary In Jayapura,

Journal of Accounting & Finance Regions Volume

13, Number 1, May 2018: 135-147

11. Mardiasmo. Taxation 2008. Revised Edition.

Yogyakarta: CV Andi Offset.

12. Puspita Rahayu Widodo 2012. Influence

Perceptions Regarding Taxpayers Tax Officer,

Trust And Satisfaction Taxpayers Taxpayers

Against the Taxpayer Compliance (Case Study on

STO Surabaya Simokerto) Faculty of Economics,

University of National Development "Veteran"

East Java

13. Tri Puput Komala Sari, Moh Nashih.

2005.Degree Of Tax Compliance and Tax Payer

Tariff The Testing On The Impact of Income

Types, SNA VIII Solo.

14. Officially, Siti. 2009. Taxation & Case Studies.

Issue 4. Jakarta: Four Salemba.

15. Rutherford, Robert D and minja Kim Choe.

(1993). For Causal Models Statistical Analysis.

New York: John Wiley & Sons.Inc.

16. Sekaran, Uma. 2006. Research Methods for

Business. Jakarta: Four Salemba.

17. Sugiyono, 2009. Business Research Methods

(Quantitative Approach, Qualitative and

18. R & D) .Bandung: lfabeta.

19. Suciaty et al (2014). Corruption Perceptions

Regarding Taxpayers Tax Compliance and Its

Effect on Taxpayers (Study on WPOP the Doing

Business in North Malang STO). Journal e-

Taxation, No. 1 volume 1 2014

20. Imam Ghazali, Multivariate Analysis Applications

With IBM SPSS Program 21 BP Diponegoro

University 2011

21. Translation Team Complete Dictionary of

Psychology. 2011. Complete Dictionary of

Psychology by JP Chaplin. Jakarta: Rajawali

Pers.

22. Drafting Team Indonesian dictionary. 1998.

Dictionary of Indonesian Language, First

Edition. Jakarta: Balai Pustaka.

23. WaLuyo. 2004. Taxation in Indonesia. Jakarta.

Salemba Four.

24. http://www.kompasiana.com/wahyu-

triono2010/korupsi-pajak-dan-moral-hazard

downloaded August 21, 2019

25. http://nasional.kompas.com/read/2015/10/22/080

70321/Kejaksaan.Agung.Usut.Dugaan.Korupsi.P

ajak.PT.Mobile.8 downloaded August 21, 2019

26. http://korupsi.vivanews.com/news/read/187354-

survei--hanya-kpk-yang-masih-positif

downloaded August 2019

27. https://tirto.id/egpt "Bribery Case Restitution Tax

& Areas Prone to Corruption in DGT Ministry of

Finance" downloaded August 2019

28. https://www.pajak.go.id/index.php/id/artikel/kepat

uhan-pajak-dihantam-perilaku-koruptif-yang-

permisif downloaded August 2019 downloaded

August 2019

29. www.liputan6.com Prediction MoF Tax Revenue

Reaches Target 2019 Tak. downloaded August

2019


http://www.kompasiana.com/wahyu-triono2010/korupsi-pajak-dan-moral-hazard

http://www.kompasiana.com/wahyu-triono2010/korupsi-pajak-dan-moral-hazard

http://nasional.kompas.com/read/2015/10/22/08070321/Kejaksaan.Agung.Usut.Dugaan.Korupsi.Pajak.PT.Mobile.8



http://korupsi.vivanews.com/news/read/187354-survei--hanya-kpk-yang-masih-positif

http://korupsi.vivanews.com/news/read/187354-survei--hanya-kpk-yang-masih-positif

https://tirto.id/egpt

https://www.pajak.go.id/index.php/id/artikel/kepatuhan-pajak-dihantam-perilaku-koruptif-yang-permisif%20diunduh%20Agustus%202019



http://www.liputan6.com/



A STUDY OF THE GRANITIC ROCKS OF THE ICHADAG AREA IN RANCHI PLATEAU IN EASTERN

INDIA

Dr. P K Verma,

Associate Professor

(Geology), presently DSW,

Ranchi University,

Ranchi 834001,

Dr. Jayant Sinha,


Department of Geology,

St. Xavier’s College,

Ranchi 834001

Dr. Shweta Mishra,

Jailhata,

Daltonganj,

82210,

ABSTRACT

The Ichadag area forms the northern extremity of Ranchi plateau in the Chotanagpur region of eastern India and is

dominated mainly by the Precambrian lithounits. It is represented by a vast expanse of granitic rocks with

metasedimentaries and amphibolites occurring in close association. The Precambrian metamorphites and the associated

granitic rocks of the region have been subjected to repeated tectonism and associated metamorphism.

The metasedimentaries in the area are the remnants of argillaceous, arenaceous and calcareous primary rock

materials, which have been subjected to various phases of tectonism and metamorphism and they comprise of biotite

schist, biotite- muscovite schist, phyllites, quartzites, calc- silicate rocks, crystalline limestone etc. The granitic rocks of

the study area include granite gneisses, anatectic granites, migmatites, pegmatites and associated quartzo-felspathic

veins. They differ widely in mineralogy, texture and field relationship.

The granite gneisses possess an alternations of lepidoblastic and granoblastic fabric, whereas nonfoliated

granites are typically hypidiomorphic and crystalline in nature.

The granites of the Ichadag area are peraluminous, their silica percentage lies between 70 – 74% and CaO % is

less than 3.7%. The geochemical study of these granitic rocks establishes their S-type lineage. There are enough

indications that points towards the contribution of pelitic schists in generation of anatectic melt for the evolution of

granitic rocks of the study area.

INTRODUCTION The Ichadag area forms an important

segment of the Chotanagpur Granite Gneissic Complex (CGGC), which bears the signature of the various tectonic, intrusive and metamorphic activities and is composed essentially of Precambrian rocks. The predominance of granite gneisses has imparted a more common nomenclature for this region as CGGC. The present area of study forms the northern segment of Ranchi plateau and is a depository of almost all representative lithounits of CGGC. The study area occupies the southeastern and southwestern sections of Survey of India Toposheet number 73 E/6 and 73 E/10 respectively. It is located at the boarder of Ranchi and Hazaribagh districts of Jharkhand. The area is almost rectangular in shape lying between the latitude 230 32’ to 230 36” N and longitude 850 25” to 850 32’ E.

The Ichadag area is a vast expanse of granitic rocks occurring in association with amphibolites and metasedimentaries. The granitic rocks are the type representatives of CGGC. In the present project, emphasis has been given to the

problem of compositional variations in the granites and their petrogenesis.

GEOLOGICAL SETTING The Geological investigation of the area reveals that the Ichadag area represents a highly metamorphosed and deformed terrain in the CGGC. The lithounits are composed of pelitic metasediments, confirmably interlayered belts of quartzites, and small isolated exposures of calcareous metamorphites, ambhibolites and different variants of granites. The granitic rocks and metamorphites constitute the bulk of the area. The granitic rocks include granite gneisses, grey and pink granites, pegmatites, migmatites and associated quartzo-felspathic veins. The various metamorphites are represented by biotite schists, biotite-muscovite schists, phyllites, calc silicates and crystalline limestones, quartzites and amphibolites.

The area is a hilly and densely forested terrain, thus it is very difficult to get the exposures of different lithounits, and their contact is also obscure. However the same can be studied in nala cuttings and streams flowing in the area. Large numbers of stone chip quarries have also come up in the area, which




provide very good exposure of the rocks. The rock formations met within the area mostly belong to the Precambrian era. Detail and systematic study of the area reveals the occurrence of three facies- argillaceous, calcareous and arenaceous in a epicontinental sea environment ( Sarkar et al.,1985; Tiwary et al., 1982). The pelitic schists represent the first phase of sedimentation. These metasediments occur as inclusions, having diverse shapes and sizes in vast expanse of granitic rocks. A series of tectonic disturbances and igneous activities seem to have taken place after the first period of sediementation. The argillaceous metasediments are represented by biotite schists, biotite- muscovite schists and phyllites. The pelitic metasediments are followed by quartzites of varied types, which represent the psammitic metasediments in the Ichadag area. The calcareous facies is the youngest of the three sedimentaries in the area. Crystalline limestones and calc-silicate rocks representing the calcareous facies occur as small isolated outcrops in this granitic country. The metamorphosed sedimentary sequence is followed by the amphibolites, which occur as large and small massive bodies, concordant bodies and as inclusions in granitic rocks.

The granitic rocks of the area are younger than amphibolites. These rocks are most prominent and cover large portion of the area. Based on field observations, broadly two types of granites have been identified, viz, the strongly to weakly foliated and lineated type and the massive, equigranular and crystalline variety. The foliated ones are characterized by distinct gneissose structure, in which alternate bands of quartzo-felspathic and mafic minerals show strong foliation along E – W. The light coloured bands are dominated by quartz and plagioclase feldspar, showing granulose structure; whereas biotite and hornblende displaying schistose fabric is abundant in mafic layers. The granite gneisses have suffered migmatisation varying from incipient to advanced stages. The massive granites of the study area are leuco to grey in colour, medium grained, holocrystalline, equigranular and nonfoliated rocks. They are intrusive into metasedimentaries, amphibolites and even granite gneisses, thus they are younger to all these rocks and probably represent last phase of intrusive activity ( Sarkar et al., 1985).

The area seems to have witnessed three phases of deformations, i.e. F1, F2 and F3. Each phase of tectonism has modified the previous structure and presents a new and overprinted structural pattern.

THE GRANITIC ROCKS The granitic rocks of ichadag area differ mainly in mineralogy, texture and nature of ferromagnesian constituents. Following types of granites have been identified in the area:

1. Granites possessing gneissic bandings called Granite gneisses

2. Granites without gneissic bandings called Massive granites

3. Migmatites 4. Pegmatites, aplites and quartz veins

Granite gneisses

The granite gneisses of the study area are characterized by heterogeneity in mafic mineral composition and structure. They show distinctive gneissosity and strong mineral lineations and most of them have suffered migmatisation. They are characterized by alternate felsic and mafic bands, which is exceedingly prominent and sharply divided. These rocks show large scale variations in terms of size and shape of the bands, the width of the band is seen to vary from about 1 cm to 3 cms. The individual bands are seldom straight and are often found to be contorted and folded. In the banded gneissic granites, the leucocratic and melanocratic bands are distinctly of different age. The melanocratic bands seem to be reconstituted and recrystallised and are distinctly older than the leucocratic layers and may be regarded as palaeosomes. The leucocratic band is medium to coarse grained, dull white to grey in colour and is not uniform in thickness. At times, it is found to pinch and swell abruptly. The effect of spheroidal weathering is quite visible in these rocks, as they out crop in the form of rounded to elliptical dome like bosses and hills. These gneissic rocks enclose numerous xenolithic inclusions of biote schists and amphibolites. These rocks are profusely intruded by younger pegmatites and quartz veins along the foliation planes.

Massive Granites

They are white to pink and grey coloured, hard, compact, massive and medium grained rock. Massive granites have limited occurrence in the area and they are found in small pockets. These rocks are nonfoliated and leucocratic in nature and are charcterised by their intrusive nature. They also occur as small veins and stringers in the older country rocks. Cross joints are prominent in them and at few places inclusions of older rocks like amphibolites and mica schists are found to be present as small lenticular bodies in these rocks. They consist essentially of quartz, k-felspar and plagioclase, biotite, hornblende and iron ores are the common mafic accessories. These rocks show two sets of joints viz. NE – SW and NW – SE.

Migmatites Migmatites are also called mixed rocks. The

formation of migmatites may take place in one of the two ways. The metamorphic rock may be heated enough to partially melt, but not completely. The




molten material resolidifies within the metamorphic rock, producing a rock that incorporates both igneous and metamorphic features. Migmatites can also form when metamorphic rocks experience multiple injections of melt that solidify to form a network of cross cutting dykes. These are the mixed rocks that is veined or streaked with granites. Migmatites of Ichadag area are composed leucosomes of quartzo-felspathic material, which is intimately admixed in varying degrees with the dark coloured minerals called melanosomes. The major trend of foliation in these migmatites is NW – SE. The leucocratic bands frequently pinch and swell out. The thickness of both the types of bands is variable. The migmatites of the area are characterized by numerous crosscutting veins of quartz and quartzo-felspathic materials.

Pegmatites, Aplites and Quartz veins

Numerous corcordant and discordant veins of pegmatites are widely distributed in the area. These veins are often found crosscutting the regional foliation of the host rock. The pegmatite veins in turn have been traversed by quartz veins. The pegmatites and quartz veins have invades practically all the older rocks in the area and thus are the youngest intrusive in the area. NNE – SSW and WNW – ESE are the two major regional joints in the area and the crystallization of pegmatite and quartz has taken place along these regional joint planes. Pegmatite veins upto 50 cm in thickness and of at least two generations have been observed traversing the granite gneisses. The pegmatites are very coarse grained, however their grain size is found to decrease along the walls. White to light grey rectangular crystals of

feldspar, quartz and muscovite are the essential mineral constituents of these rocks, while tourmaline, biotite and garnet occur as accessories. The pegmatite veins exhibit a highly contorted nature and ptygmatic folding.

Fine grained varieties of pegmatites are called aplites. They show the characteristic saccroidal texture and they occur in the outer zones of pegmatite walls. Aplite veins have been found traversing both the massive as well as gneissic granites at many places, thus confirming their higher position the stratigraphical sequence.

Chemistry The greater part of the study area is

occupied by the granitic rocks of various types. Presence of enclaves of metasedimentaries and also amphibolites in them makes it hard to believe that all the granites are magmatic in origin. The chemical analyses of major element chemistry of these rocks have been given in table. I. One of the most popular classifications used in recent studies is the I-type and S-type granite classification. These two contrasting granite types have been recognized by Chappell and White (1974) in the plutonic rocks of southeastern Australia. They proposed a genetic subdivision of the investigated granites into those extracted from sedimentary protoliths as S-type and those derived from igneous source rocks as I-type. Granites were interpreted as being derived by partial melting with composition that directly reflect their source compositions.

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 SiO2 71.06 71.98 70.89 71.23 70.70 72.98 72.85 73.45 TiO2 0.09 0.13 0.20 0.20 0.23 0.131 0.40 0.35 Al2O3 15.14 14.25 14.37 14.44 13.99 14.25 13.25 13.17 Fe2O3 0.62 0.70 0.75 0.29 0.38 0.25 0.78 0.80 FeO 0.76 0.84 1.02 1.48 1.53 1.37 1.27 1.32 MnO 0.018 0.04 0.05 0.08 0.051 0.043 0.15 0.16 MgO 0.28 0.22 0.59 0.60 0.59 0.22 0.95 0.78 CaO 1.61 1.29 1.82 1.79 1.82 1.29 1.52 1.27

Na2O 4.49 4.34 3.80 4.1 3.8 4.34 3.38 3.49 K2O 4.71 4.97 4.93 4.88 4.93 4.97 4.54 4.26 P2O5 0.035 0.03 071 0.07 0.07 0.034 0.15 0.17 LOI 098 1.17 1.35 1.21 1.11 1.27 1.05 0.90

Total 99.79 99.96 100.48 100.37 99.20 101.15 100.29 100.12

Table: 1 Chappell and White proposed several chemical parameters to distinguish S-type and I-type granites. S-type granites have been determined to have a Mol (Al2O3/(Na2O+K2O+CaO) ratio of greater than 1.1 and I-type less than 1.1.The granitic rocks of the present area are peraluminous, i.e. the value has been found to be more than 1.1, which very well matches with the S-type granite affinity. The CaO percentage in S-type granites should be less than 3.7 wt%. The CaO wt % of granitic rocks of the study area is between 1 and 2, thus supporting the pelitic parentage

for these granites. Chappell and White suggest S-type granites are restricted in composition to high SiO2 types. While I-type granites have a wide composition from felsic to mafic. These characteristics are a consequence of S-type granites having been derived from a more SiO2 rich source. Therefore, granites containing less than 65% can generally be assumed to be I-type, but the average value of SiO2 for granites of Ichadag area is more than 71%, thus matching with the standards of S-type granites. I- / S-type compartmentalization of granitic rocks have also been




attempted using SiO2 vs CaO variation diagram given by Koble and Taylor (1966). The granitic rocks of the present area are placed very close to S-type field, in fact all the points are far away from that of I-type( Fig. 1), thus indicating their S-type lineage. SiO2 vs TiO2 binary diagram (after Koble and Taylor, 1966) has been found to be very effective in parentage categorization of granites. Here the compositional

points occupy the S-type field (Fig. 2), thereby suggesting their S-type parentage. S-type affiliation of the granites of study area is further cemented with the help of FeO – Fe2O3 (Fig. 3) and K2O – Na2O (Fig. 4) variation diagrams. The compositional points religiously occupy the field assigned for S-type granites.

0

60 70 80 90

2

4

6

8

SiO 2 W T %

Ca

O w

t %

Fig . 1 SiO2 vs CaO binary variation diagram, fields for I- and S- type

Granites, a f t er Koble and tay lo r ( 1966)

5 0

I - Type

S - Type

0

60 70 80 90

0.2

0.4

0.6

0 .8

SiO 2 W T %

SiO

2

Fig . 2 SiO2 vs TiO2 binary variation diagram, fields for I- and S- type


5 0

TiO

2

WT

%

I-Type

S-Type

I -Type

0

60 70 80 90

0.2

0.4

0.6

0 .8

SiO 2 W T %

SiO

2

Fig . 2 SiO2 vs TiO2 binary variation diagram, fields for I- and S- type


5 0

TiO

2

WT

%

I-Type

S-Type

I -Type

0

1 2 3 4

1

2

3

FeO W T %

Fe

2O

3 w

t %

Fig . 3 FeO vs Fe2O3 binary variation diagram, fields for I- and S- type

Granites, a f t er H ine et a l . (1978)

0

I-Type

S-Type

1

3 4 5 6

2

3

4

K2O W T %

Na

2O

wt

%

Fig . 4 . K2O vs Na2O binary variation diagram, fields for I- and S- type

Granites, a f t er H ine et a l . (1978)

2

I-Type

S-Type

An amalgamation of all these observations is a clear indication towards the contribution of pelitic schists in the generation anatectic melt, which formed granites of Ichadag area.

CONCLUSION The Ichadag area is a vast expanse of

granitic rocks with metapelites, quartzites, calcareous metasediments and amphibolites occurring in close

association. The granitic rocks are most prominent and cover large portion of the area. They show wide scale variations in their fabric and mineral composition. Two major groups of granitic rocks namely, the granite gneisses and massive granites, have been identified in the area. The I- / S-type compartmentalization the granitic rocks have been attempted taking into account various geochemical parameters and the syntheses of all these studies put




granitic rocks of Ichadag under the category of S-type. It also clearly indicate the effective role of partial melting of pelitic schists in generation of anatectic melt for formation of the granitic rocks of study area.

REFRENCES 1. Bose M K.1997 Igneous Petrology. The world

press pvt Ltd. Cal. 568 p;

2. Chayes F. 1956. Petrographic Modal Analyses,

John Wiley. London.

3. Ghose N C. 1983, Geology, Tectonic and

Evolution of Chotanagpur Granite Gneiss

Complex ,Eastern India; Structure and Tectonic

of Precambrian rocks of India; Hind publ corp,

10 pp,-211-247.

4. Le Bas M J and Streckeisen A L. 1991. The I UG

S Systematics of Igneous rocks. ;jour

.Geol.Soc.London. 148 pp. 825-833.

5. Sarkar A N and Jha B N. 1985. Structure,

Metamorphism and Granitic Evolution of the

Chotanagpur Gneiss Complex around Ranchi.

Rec. Geol . Surv.ind. 113(III) pp.1-12.

6. Sengupta Dk . et al. 1980. Migmatites of the area

around Kakuara, Bhagalpur Dist. ,Bihar. J. Geol.

Soc. Ind. 21.pp. 358-361.

7. Singh S P. 1981. Petrochemistry of the granitic

and associated rocks of the region north of

Latehar Dist . Palamau, Bihar. Ph.D. Thesis. R U

(unpub).

8. Singh S P et al. 1988. Black Granite- The

amphibolites around Ichadag area. Ranchi,

Bihar: A petrographical study. Proc .Sem. Min.

Expl. And Dev.; in Bihar. Pp .212-217.

9. Tiwary A K. 1992. Geology of The Area

Halwadih and kadru Rep. Mines and geol. Bihar

(unpub).




CALORIE DENSITY AND NUTRIENT CONTENT OF

COMMONLY CONSUMED SWEETMEATS OF JASHORE DISTRICT IN BANGLADESH

Md. Mohsin Alam1

1Department of Nutrition and Food Technology,

Jashore University of Science and Technology,

Jashore-7408,

Bangladesh

Dr. A.K. Obidul Huq2

2Department of Food Technology and

Nutritional Science,

Mawlana Bhashani Science and Technology

University,

Santosh, Tangail-1902,

Bangladesh

Israt Jahan3

3Department of Public Health Nutrition,

Primeasia University, Banani,

Dhaka,

Bangladesh

Eyad Ahmed4

4Department of Nutrition and Food Technology,

Jashore University of Science and Technology,

Jashore-7408,

Bangladesh


ABSTRACT The purpose of the current study was to analyze the nutrient content of some commonly consumed sweetmeats of Jashore

district in Bangladesh and calculation of the their calorie densities. The selected samples for the study were as follows:

Rosogolla (sponge, white), Kalojam, Laddu (mewa), Chomchom (black, brown, white), Shondesh (para, chinir, cake), Doi

(mishit, tok, tok-mishti). Sweetmeats were collected from three different popular shops of Jahsore Sadar in Jashore district

during the period of October, 2019 to December, 2019. Proximate analysis of the samples was conducted in triplicate by

various standard methods and calorie densities were calculated by amount of energy per gram of food. Ash content ranged

from 2 to 5.33%, moisture content ranged from 25.66 to 69.3%, protein content ranged from 2.19 to 4.05%, fat content ranged

from 0.64 to 2.55%. In case of dietary fiber, highest fiber content was found in laddu (1.37%) and lowest fiber content was

found in kalojam (0.73%). However, carbohydrate content was measured by subtraction method and highest carbohydrate

content was found in chinir sondesh (64%) and lowest carbohydrate content was found in tok doi (22.68%). Afterwards,

Sweets were ranked in descending order according to their calorie densities. It was seen that chinir sondesh was the most

calorie densed foods and tok doi was the least amongst the studied samples.

KEYWORDS: Calorie density, nutrient, sweetmeats, Jashore, Bangladesh.





INTRODUCTION The word ‘Sweetmeat’ means a food which is

rich in sugar with milk. Everyone loves to eat sweets. The same picture is obvious in in Bangladesh also. Bangladeshis like to eat milk made sweets [1]. The sweetmeats are enjoyable, wholesome, nutritious and very popular item in Bangladesh [2]. Occasions and sweetmeats are the two intimate part of Bengali tradition as Bangladeshi people are fond of sweetmeats a lot. In this country people could not imagine to rejoice any opportune events without sweetmeats. Bangladeshi sweetmeats also renowned all over the world. In any kind of entertainment, either at household or national level, sweetmeats are a must to have [3]. There have been a variety of sweetmeats produced and also available in the markets of Bangladesh such as Rosogolla, Rasomalai, Doi, Chomchom, Kalojam, Malaikari, Sondesh, Rasokadam, Kachagolla, Peda, Rajvog, Amirti, Chanar, Polao, Monda etc.

The food market is continuously changing which leads to a growing diversity of available foods [4]. Among these varieties of foods, sweetmeats and other sweet products are mentionable. It was observed in a government study that about 10% of the total milk produced in Bangladesh are used for the preparation of chhana and finally for sweetmeat making [5] and about 4% of the milk is used for Yoghurt preparation [6]. Not only they are palatable but also supply essential nutrients like Proteins, Vitamin-B, Calcium and Phosphorus along with numerous other essential major and minor substances [7].

Information of the nutrient content of all kinds of foods is crucial for nutritional research and various applied nutrition projects, including the interpretation of food consumption studies, the nutritional assessment of food supplies, and the planning of nutritionally adequate diets. Food composition databases (FCDBs) are essential tools in these regard. In dietary treatment of diseases, knowledge of food intake and its chemical composition is essential [8]. FCDBs need to be of high quality, reliable, up-to-date and representative of the foods consumed by the population [4, 9]. There have been some recently published FCDBs for Bangladeshi foods [10, 11] but none of those included commonly consumed sweetmeats of Bangladesh. Hence, the objective of the current study was to explore the nutrient content of some commonly consumed sweetmeats of Jashore district in Bangladesh and to calculate their calorie density.

METHODOLGY Sample Selection

A short market survey was conducted prior to selection of the samples. Findings from the market

survey suggested to finally short listed the selected samples for the study. Thirteen samples of different varieties were selected. They were as follows: Rosogolla (sponge, white), Kalojam, Laddu (mewa), Chomchom (black, brown, white), Shondesh (para, chinir, cake), Doi (mishit, tok, tok-mishti). Sampling Area and Sample Collection

Samples were collected from three locally popular sweet shops of Jashore sadar in Jashore district. Samples were collected in air tight bags immediately followed by bringing the samples in the Food Analysis Laboratory of Jashore University of Science and Technology. Samples of same varieties were homogenized at first and then taken for further analysis. Proximate Analysis The proximate analysis of was conducted by using standard methods [12]. Each samples were analyzed in triplicate. Moisture Samples were analyzed for moisture content in a dry air oven at 105oC. Following formula was used: Moisture content (%) = [Final weight (in gram)/ Raw sample weight (in gram)]x 100

Here, Final weight= (Crucible + dried sample)- (Crucible+ Raw sample)

Ash (total minerals) Ash content was measured by using a muffle furnace. Following formula was used: Ash content (%) = [Final weight (in gram)/ Raw sample weight (in gram)] ×100 Here, Final weight= [(Crucible+ ash)- Empty crucible]; Raw sample weight= [(Crucible+ Raw sample)- Empty crucible]

Protein Protein content of the samples was estimated by micro-kjeldahl method. The following formulas were used: Nitrogen (%) = [(S-B) × N×14×100]/ (Raw sample weight ×1000) Crude protein (%) = Nitrogen (%) ×6.25 [13] Here, S= Titration reading for sample; B= Titration Reading for blank, N=Strength of acid. Fat The crude lipid content was estimated by using Soxhlet organic extraction apparatus [14]. The samples were dried prior to the extraction with petroleum ether. Following formula was used: Crude lipid (%) = [(A-B)/ W] ×100 Here, A=Conical flask weight+ extracted oil; B= Conical flaks weight; W= Sample weight Total Dietary Fiber (TDF) Modified-Prosky method [12, 15] was used to measure total dietary fiber. Following formula was used:




TDF (%)= [{R- (A+P+B)}/ Sample weight (mg)]x 100 Here, R = Average residue weight (mg); A = Average ash weight (mg); P = Average protein weight (mg); B= Blank weight Carbohydrate Carbohydrate content was measured by the difference [16]. It was calculated by following equation: Carbohydrate (%)= 100- [Moisture (%)+ Ash (%)+ Crude protein (%)+ Crude lipid (%)].

Calorie Density Calorie density was estimated by amount of energy per gram of food and foods were ranked in descending order according to their calorie densities thereafter.

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Table 1 shows the nutrient content of the

selected sweetmeats. Para sondesh contained about 2.67% ash, 34.6% moisture, 3.87% protein, 2.15% fat, 0.77% DF and 55.95% CHO; Para sondesh contained about 4% ash, 39.13% moisture, 4.05% protein, 2.07% fat, 0.92% DF and 50.75% CHO; Chinir sondesh contained about 3.67% ash, 25.66% moisture, 3.43% protein, 1.99% fat, 0.78% DF and 64.47% CHO; Black

chomchom contained about 5.33% ash, 44.18% moisture, 4.05% protein, 1.62% fat, 0.88% DF and 43.93% CHO; Brown chomchom contained about 4% ash, 40.1% moisture, 3.38% protein, 1.26% fat, 0.96% DF and 50.29% CHO; White chomchom contained about 3.67% ash, 32.8% moisture, 3.71% protein, 1.58% fat, 1.13% DF and 57.12% CHO; Rosogolla contained about 2% ash, 34.67% moisture, 2.32% protein, 0.73% fat, 0.90% DF and 59.38% CHO; Sponge rosogolla contained about 2.67% ash, 45.47% moisture, 2.5% protein, 0.64% fat, 1.12% DF and 47.61% CHO; Kalojam contained about 2% ash, 35.2% moisture, 2.19% protein, 1.42% fat, 0.73% DF and 58.46% CHO; Laddu contained about 3.33% ash, 50.53% moisture, 2.36% protein, 1.32% fat, 1.37% DF and 41.09% CHO; Tok doi contained about 2% ash, 69.27% moisture, 2.74% protein, 2.29% fat, 1.03% DF and 22.68% CHO; Tok misti doi contained about 2% ash, 53.17% moisture, 3.8% protein, 2.06% fat, 1.17% DF and 37.81% CHO; Misti doi contained about 2% ash, 46.2% moisture, 3.63% protein, 2.55% fat, 0.95% DF and 44.87% CHO.

Table 1: Nutrient content of the selected samples expressed as g/100g. Name of sweets

Ash

(g/100g) Moisture (g/100g)

Protein (g/100g)

Fat (g/100g)

DF (g/100g)

CHO (g/100g)

Para sondesh (mean± SD)

2.67±1.15 34.6±9.89 3.87±0.95 2.15±0.55 0.77±0.12 55.95±9.10

Cake sondesh (mean± SD)

4±0 39.13±6.40 4.05±0.58 2.07±0.86 0.92±0.38 50.75±6.80

Chinir sondesh (mean± SD)

3.67±2.52 25.66±2.09 3.43±1 1.99±0.69 0.78±0.12 64.47±4.43

Black chomchom (mean± SD)

5.33±1.15 44.18±12.49 4.05±0.77 1.62±0.14 0.88±0.35 43.93±10.99

Brown chomchom (mean± SD)

4±2 40.1±4.66 3.38±0.53 1.26±0.07 0.96±0.21 50.29±5.61

White chomchom (mean± SD)

3.67±0.58 32.8±11.56 3.71±0.58 1.58±0.21 1.13±0.56 57.12±11.44

Rosogolla (mean± SD)

2±0 34.67±6.50 2.32±0.18 0.73±0.07 0.9±0.22 59.38±6.74

Sponge rosogolla (mean± SD)

2.67±1.15 45.47±2.89 2.5±0.18 0.64±0.33 1.12±0.19 47.61±3.20

Kalojam (mean± SD)

2±0 35.2±5.70 2.19±0.72 1.42±0.32 0.73±0.08 58.46±5.83

Laddu (mean± SD)

3.33±1.15 50.53±7.56 2.36±0.42 1.32±0.44 1.37±0.14 41.09±8.56

Tok doi (mean± SD)

2±2 69.27±10.86 2.74±0.51 2.29±0.4 1.03±0.26 22.68±11.06

Tok misti doi (mean± SD)

2±0 53.17±8.26 3.8±0.72 2.06±0.72 1.17±0.38 37.81±9.73

Misti doi (mean± SD)

2±0 46±2.163 3.63±1.19 2.55±0.21 0.95±0.13 44.87±1.67

N.B.: g=gram, DF= dietary fiber, CHO= carbohydrate, SD= standard deviation.




Figure 1a and 1b depicts the ash and moisture content of the selected samples. Ash content of the sweets ranged from 2.0 to 5.33 g/100g. About 2g ash was found in rosogolla, kalojam, tok doi, tok misti doi and misti doi. Highest ash content was found in black

chomchom. On the other hand, cake sodesh and black chomchom contained about 4g ash per 100 g. In case of moisture content, highest moisture content was found in tokdoi (69%) and lowest moisture content was found in chinir sondesh (25%).

Figure 1a: Ash content of the selected samples. Figure 1b: Moisture content of the selected samples.

Figure 2a and 2b depicts the protein and fat

content of the selected samples. Protein content of the sweets ranged from 2.19 to 4.05 g/100g. About 3.43g protein was found in chinir sondesh, 2.32 g ash in rosogolla. Highest protein content was found in black

chomchom. On the other hand, tok misti doi contained about 2.73g protein per 100 g. In case of fat content, highest fat content was found in misti doi (2.55%) and lowest fat content was found in sponge rosogolla (0.64%).

Figure 2a: Protein content of the selected sample Figure 2b: Fat content of the selected samples.

Figure 3a and 3b depicts the total dietary fiber

and carbohydrate content of the selected samples. Dietary fiber content of the sweets ranged from 0.73 to 1.36 g/100g. About 0.78g fiber was found in chinir

sondesh, 0.9 g fiber in rosogolla. Highest fiber content was found in laddu. On the other hand, tok misti doi contained about 1.03g fiber per 100 g. In case of carbohydrate content, highest carbohydrate content was

2.67

4 3.67

5.33

4 3.67

2

2.67

2

3.33

2 2 2

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

g/1

00

g

34.6

39.13

25.65

44.18

40.1

32.796 34.66

45.46

35.2

50.53

69.26

53.16

46

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

g/1

00

g

3.86 4.05

3.43

4.04

3.38

3.7

2.32 2.49

2.19 2.36

2.73

3.8 3.62

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

4.5

g/1

00

g

2.15 2.07

1.99

1.62

1.26

1.58

0.73 0.64

1.41 1.31

2.28

2.05

2.55

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

g/1

00

g




found in chinir sondesh (64.47%) and lowest carbohydrate content was found in tok doi (22.67%).

Figure 3a: Dietary fiber content of the selected samples. Figure 3b: Carbohydrate content of the selected samples.

Table 2 demonstrates the calorie densities of the

sweets studied. It was seen that energy content of the sweets ranged from 122.23 kcal to 289.52 kcal per 100 g of sweets. Subsequently, calorie densities were calculated and ranked in descending order. After

ranking, it was observed that, chinir sondesh made to the top of the list since its calorie density was 2.90 (highest among the samples) and tok doi occupied the bottom of the list and ranked last amongst the samples (1.22).

Table 2: Calorie densities of the selected sweets Name of sweets Kcal per 100 g Calorie density Ranking

Para sondesh 258.62 2.59 2

Cake sondesh 237.82 2.38 6

Chinir sondesh 289.52 2.90 1

Black chomchom 206.5 2.07 9

Brown chomchom 226.06 2.26 7

White chomchom 257.51 2.58 3

Rosogolla 253.4 2.53 5

Sponge rosogolla 206.2 2.06 10

Kalojam 255.35 2.55 4

Laddu 185.65 1.86 11

Tok doi 122.23 1.22 13

Tok misti doi 184.95 1.85 12

Misti doi 216.95 2.17 8

N.B.: Kcal= kilocalorie, g=gram.

0.76

0.91

0.78

0.88 0.96

1.13

0.9

1.11

0.73

1.36

1.03

1.16

0.95

0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1

1.2

1.4

1.6

g/1

00

g

55.95

50.74

64.47

43.93

50.29

57.11 59.37

47.61

58.45

41.08

22.67

37.8

44.87

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

g/1

00

g




CONCLUSION This study was the first of its kind in Bangladesh

to reveal the calorie density and nutrient content of different varieties of commonly consumed sweetmeats of Bangladesh. Although the nutrient content and calorie densities obtained from this study may not be regarded as conclusive since these may vary due to variations in recipes and qualities may vary from place to place but the results might be useful for dietary analysis for the determination of nutrient intake in various nutrition surveys and research along with decision making in the formulation of a more cautious and insightful healthy diet plan.

REFERENCES 1. Islam MS, Basak S. Study on Sweetmeat Processing

in Bangladesh. The Int. J. Eng. Sci. 2013;2:46-54.

2. Mannan, A.K.M., Hossain M.S. and Islam. M.N.

1994. Standard and Standardization of Sweetmeats.

Standard of Traditional Made Chhana and

Rasogolla. BAU. Res. Prog., 8: 410-413.

3. Kuila RK, Sen DC. Milk sweets of Eastern India.

Milk sweets of Eastern India.. 2000:64-73.

4. SICHERT-HELLERT, W. et al. German food

composition database for dietary evaluations in

children and adolescents. Journal of Food

Composition and Analysis, v. 20, p. 63-70, 2007.

http://dx.doi. org/10.1016/j.jfca.2006.05.004

5. Forth Plan Study, No. 3. (1968). Estimation of

livestock and poultry population and their

products.Government of East Pakistan.Dept.Agril.

Sec. P. 34.

6. Mustafa MM. A study on the preparation of fruit

dahi (yoghurt). A MS Thesis. Dept. of Dairy Sci,

Mymensingh Agricultural University, Mymensingh.

Bangladesh. 1997.

7. Karthikeyan N, Dhanakakshmi B. Hygienic quality

of Indian sweet milk products from different

sources. Bangladesh Journal of Microbiology.

2010;27(2):32-7.

8. McCance and Widdowson’s. 1991. The

Composition of Foods, 5th ed. Royal Society of

Chemistry, Cam-bridge, UK.

9. PENNINGTON, J. A. T. Applications of food

composition data: Data sources and considerations

for use. Journal of Food Composition and Analysis,

v. 21, n. 1, p. S3-S12, 2008.

10. Shaheen N, Bari L, Mannan MA. Food composition

table for Bangladesh, 2013.

11. Islam SN, Khan MN, Akhtaruzzaman M. A food

composition database for Bangladesh with special

reference to selected ethnic foods. Dhaka: Institute

of Nutrition and Food Sciences. University of

Dhaka. 2010 Nov.).

12. AOAC. Official Methods of Analysis. 18th edn.

Association of Official Analytical Chemists;

Arlington, VA, USA: 2005.

13. Jones DB. Factors for Converting Percentages of

Nitrogen in Foods and Feeds into Percentages of

Protein. US Dept. of Agrie, Cir. No. 83, 22 pp. SI.

Rev. 1941.

14. Raghuramulu, N., Nair, M.K. & Kalyanasundaram

S. (2003). A manual of laboratory techniques.

National Institute of Nutrition, ICMR,

JamaiOsmania, Hyderabad, India.

15. Prosky, L., Asp, N-G., Furda, I., DeVries. J. W.,

Schweizer, T. F. & Harland, B. F. (1985). J. AOAC

Int., 68, 677-679 .

16. Rand WM, Pennington JA, Murphy SP, Klensin JC.

Compiling data for food composition data bases.

Tokyo, Japan:: United Nations University Press; 1991.




CRIME PREVENTION PRACTICES OF SHOPPING MALLS IN THE PROVINCE OF NUEVA ECIJA:

AN ASSESSMENT

Mary Chris A. Austria-Cruz Faculty, College of Business Management and

Technology


Technology

Nueva Ecija, Philippines

Cristina Virginia B. Jimmy Dean, College of Criminology


Technology

Nueva Ecija, Philippines


ABSTRACT

The study is focused on the evaluation of the crime prevention practices of shopping malls located in five (5) cities in the

Province of Nueva Ecija within the year 2019. It particularly emphasized on crime occurrences, implementation of crime

preventive measures, and crime prevention practices. Using a descriptive method of research and validated questionnaire-

checklist as the main tool of gathering data from a randomly selected respondents the researchers concluded that shopping

malls in the Province of Nueva Ecija are prone to criminal victimizations. Crime prevention measures and practices, security

programs and procedures, though implemented at the highest degree, are not sufficient or workable to curtail and prevent

criminal activities. Also, the limited security practices and crime prevention programs of shopping malls open the gate of

criminal victimization most particularly on Crime Against Persons.

1. INTRODUCTION

One of the signs of healthy economy in a particular community or society is the noticeable continuous growth of business. Business provides employment; also, taxes from it could be used by a government for social services of its people. Likewise, business is extremely important to a country’s economy because businesses provide both goods and services and jobs (eNotes Editorial, 17 February 2015). However, entwined to it is the security or safety of business establishments, employees, operators, owners, and clients which is a foremost concern. Logically, a capitalist or even operators of small medium enterprises (SMEs) would not pursue establishing business in a certain area if there are security issues or problems. A crime free society is a reflection of law enforcers’ competence in terms of crime prevention. In fact, the 9th Principle of Policing by Robert Peel stated that “the test of police efficiency is the absence of crime and disorder…” (UK Government, 10 December 2012). Reasonably, a society that maintains law and order attracts people and entrepreneurs; hence, crime prevention is an investment.

The progress of SMEs or big businesses is dependent on the crime preventive action or condition

of a certain area. Crime prevention according to Van Dijk and De Waard (1991) refers to the total of all private initiatives and state policies, other than the enforcement of criminal law, aimed at the reduction of damage caused by acts defined as criminal by the state. Also, UNODC (2010) defined it as strategies and measures that seek to reduce the risk of crimes occurring, and their potential harmful effects on individuals and society, including fear of crime, by intervening to influence their multiple causes. But then, crime is unavoidable; Hubert and Wright (1982) mentioned that according to Durkheim, he suggested that the condition that generates crime is inevitable ("normal") and desirable. Hence, businesses cannot avoid destruction of property, theft, robbery, shoplifting, vandalism and other crimes that may cause injuries clients, employees, and employers. In support thereto, based on Dempsey (2010) as mentioned by Chris Mcgoey, the most common violent crimes committed in the parking lot are stranger-on-stranger purse snatch and strong-arm robbery and occasionally carjacking and abductions. Survey of Tilley (1993) revealed that there were high rates of re-victimization amongst businesses targeted for burglary. Wood, Wheelwright, and Burrows (1997) found out that the





sector most vulnerable to burglary was manufacturing, and many incidents were concentrated around a few victims. Also, the 1997 UK Small business crime initiative found 3.3 per cent of respondents had been the victim of a successful robbery, and 4.5 per cent had experienced an attempted robbery, with the majority of businesses affected being retailers. Eijken and Mijer (1995) crime survey on 1989 Dutch Commercial demonstrated that one in five establishments had been victims of burglary, and that there was a strong likelihood of repeat victimization. Also, Johnston, Leitner, Shapland, and Wiles (1994) study of crime on industrial estates (undertaken in 1990 in the UK) found that 26 per cent of respondents had suffered vandalism, with few incidents reported.

Businesses and establishments also in the Province of Nueva Ecija are susceptible to a variety of crimes. Though Nueva Ecija ventures primarily on variety of agricultural business SMEs, shopping malls, hospitals, banking, financial institutions continue to proliferate most especially in its five (5) cities. The surge of businesses in the Province may possibly parallel the increase of business-related crimes. According to Philippine News Agency (20 July 2017) in the year 2017, the Nueva Ecija Police Provincial

Office (NEPPO) recorded 231 cases of theft were recorded, followed by physical injuries (230), robbery (200), car theft (134), rape (90), murder (81) and homicide (12) though incidence of crime decreased by 43.31 percent in the year 2018 (Arcellaz, 26 March 2018). For this reason, the researchers sought to determine the crimes and crime prevention measures being implemented by shopping malls in the Province. Hence, the researchers offer the following problems:

1. How may the Crime Occurrence be described as Perceived by Mall Representatives and Tenant-Respondents in terms of:

a. Crimes against Public Morals; b. Crimes against Persons; and c. Crimes against Properties?

2. How may the Implementation of Crime Preventive Measures be described as Perceived by Mall Representatives and Tenant-Respondents in terms of:

a. Punitive Prevention b. Environmental Prevention; and c. Mechanical Prevention?

3. What are the crime prevention practices being used by Shopping Malls?

Figure 1. Research Paradigm

1. Description of

Crime

Occurrences.

2. Implementation

of Crime

Preventive

Measures.

3. Description of

Crime Prevention

Practices.

-Descriptive research

method

-Questionnaire-checklist

-Interview

-Weighted mean

-Analysis of data

Crime Prevention

Implementation for

Shopping Malls in the

Province of Nueva Ecija.

INPUT PROCESS OUTPUT

FEEDBACK




2. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY The study used the Descriptive Survey

Method. As cited by Eduardo (2018), descriptive method is a purposive process of gathering, analyzing, classifying, and tabulating data about prevailing conditions, practices, beliefs, process es, trends and cause-effect relationships and then making adequate and accurate interpretation about such data with or without the aid of the statistical methods. Also, according to Pagandian and Eduardo (2019) citing Kumar, this method can systematically describe a situation, problem, phenomenon, service or programs,

or provides information or describes the attitude towards an issue. Hence, the Method is appropriate to the study. Self-prepared and validated questionnaire-checklist was the main gathering tool supplemented by interview. The 200 respondents (tenants, proprietors/employers, mall representatives, employees, citizens in the area) were identified through simple random sampling only in the five (5) cities of Nueva Ecija in the year 2019 namely: San Jose City, Science City of Munoz, Cabanatuan City, Palayan City, and Gapan City. The following rating scale was used:

Scale Range Values Description 4 3.26- 4.00 Frequently 3 2.51- 3.25 Occasionally 2 1.76- 2.50 Rarely 1 1.00- 1.75 Never

3. PRESENTATION, ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF DATA 3.1. Crime Occurrence as Perceived by Mall

Representatives and Tenant-Respondents in terms of Crimes against Public Morals, Crimes against Persons, and Crimes against Properties

Results in Table 1 shows that all group of crimes occur occasionally in various shopping mall in five (5) cities in the Province. It signifies that the three (3) group of crime occur continuously every month. Crime Against Property ranked 1st with a mean of 3.02; ranked 2nd is Crime Against Public Morals with a mean of 2.92; and ranked 3rd is Crime Against Person with a mean of 2.60.

Table 1. Crime Occurrence as Perceived by Mall Representatives and Tenant-Respondents Group of Crime Mean Description Rank

Crime Against Public Morals 2.92 Occasionally 2

Crime Against Persons 2.60 Occasionally 3

Crime Against Properties 3.04 Occasionally 1

The findings imply that crime against property

really is the chief problem or concern of shopping malls located in the five (5) cities of Nueva Ecija. Interview with the respondents revealed that theft and robbery was the most recurring crime despite of increasing the employment of security guards. It further exposed that most theft incidents happened during daytime (business hours) while robberies usually transpire during nighttime.

3.2. Implementation of Crime Preventive Measures as Perceived by Mall Representatives and Tenant-Respondents in terms of Punitive Prevention, Environmental Prevention, and Mechanical Prevention

Table 2 shows all the five (5) shopping malls implement the three (3) crime preventive measures with means of 3.5, 3.52, and 3.59 described as Frequently for Punitive, Environmental, and Mechanical, respectively. It implies that the malls regularly observe and practice crime preventive measures. It further signifies that mall owners, tenants, and representatives are aware of the possible economic losses that crime may cause.




Table 2. Implementation of Crime Preventive Measures as Perceived by Mall Representatives and Tenant-Respondents

Shopping Mall Punitive Description Environmental Description Mechanical Description

Shopping Mall A 3.59 Frequently 3.67 Frequently 3.68 Frequently

Shopping Mall B 3.48 Frequently 3.53 Frequently 3.60 Frequently

Shopping Mall C 3.54 Frequently 3.60 Frequently 3.64 Frequently

Shopping Mall D 3.30 Frequently 3.08 Occasionally 3.10 Occasionally

Shopping Mall E 3.59 Frequently 3.70 Frequently 3.93 Frequently

Total Mean 3.5 Frequently 3.52 Frequently 3.59 Frequently

However, one (1) among the five (5) shopping malls is found to be quite unresponsive to crime prevention measures. Shopping Mall D has a limited practice in terms of Environmental and Mechanical prevention measures with means of 3.08 and 3.10 respectively described as Occasionally. It suggests that Shopping Mall D could be easily victimized due to limited implementation of crime preventive measures. Interview with respondents exposed that limited budget for security is their major concern such as limited security personnel, lack of security equipment, mall security trainings, seminars, and the like. Moreover, close coordination with nearest police stations is not being observed.

3. Crime Prevention Practices used by Shopping Malls Table 3 reveals that the five (5) shopping malls practice methods geared towards prevention of crime. Shopping malls regularly practice the issuance of mall vicinity entry ticket to vehicle owners, retrieval of mall vicinity vehicle entry ticket upon leaving, and visibility of security guards in complete uniform with means of 4.16, 4.14, and 4.08, respectively described as Frequently. It implies that shopping malls perform crime prevention activities on a consistent and systematic basis. However, installation of numerous light posts around the mall like in the parking area is the lowest with a mean of 3.8 but still described as Frequent.

Table 3. List of Crime Prevention Practices used by Shopping Malls

Practices Mean Description

1 Issuance of mall vicinity entry ticket to vehicle owners. 4.16 Frequently

2 Retrieval of mall vicinity vehicle entry ticket upon leaving. 4.14 Frequently

3 Visibility of security guards in complete uniform. 4.08 Frequently

4 Check in/out register for employees, as well as for suppliers, contractors, and visitors. 4.07 Frequently

5 Baggage checking upon entry in the mall vicinity. 4.03 Frequently

6 Strict and standard security measures. 3.95 Frequently

7 Recording of vehicle plate numbers upon mall vicinity entry. 3.91 Frequently

8 Emergency lights installed in preparation to power failure. 3.83 Frequently

9 Alternative power system installed. 3.82 Frequently

10 Numerous light posts installed around the mall like in the parking area. 3.8 Frequently

The findings imply that shopping malls value the importance of practicing security measures and procedures. Also, it implies that mall owners, tenants, and representatives understand how crime could cause ill effects (economic loss) to their business.

4. CONCLUSION The findings of the study guided the

researchers to conclude that shopping malls in the Province of Nueva Ecija are prone to criminal victimization. Crime prevention measures and practices, security programs and procedures, though implemented at the highest degree, are not sufficient or workable to curtail and prevent criminal activities. Also, the limited




security practices and crime prevention programs of shopping malls open the gate of criminal victimization most particularly on Crime Against Persons.

REFERENCES 1. Policing by Consent. UK Government. 10 December

2012. Retrieved 29 December 2013.

2. Van Dijk, J. & De Waard, J. (1991). A two-

dimensional typology of crime prevention

projects. Criminal Justice Abstracts, vol. 23, No. 4,

483-503.

3. United Nations in the United Nations Guidelines for

the Prevention of Crime (Economic and Social

Council resolution 2002/13). It is also reproduced

on page nine of the Handbook on the Crime

Prevention Guidelines - Making them

work (UNODC, 2010).

4. Why is business so important to a country's

economy?" eNotes Editorial, 17 Feb. 2015,

https://www.enotes.com/homework-help/why-

buisness-important-country-economy-474583.

Accessed 12 Feb. 2020.

5. Hubert, R. & Wright, C. (1982). Durkheim and

Quinney on the inevitability of crime: A

comparative theoretical analysis. Deviant

Behavior, 4:1, 67 87, DOI:

10.1080/01639625.1982.9967603.

6. Dempsey, J. (2010). Introduction to private security,

2nd Edition. WADSWORTH Cengage Learning, Inc.

7. Tilley, N. (1993). The prevention of crime against

small businesses: The Safer cities experience. Crime

Prevention Unit paper no. 45, London: Home

Office.

8. Wood, J., Wheelwright, G. & Burrows, J. (1997).

Crime against small business: Meeting the

challenges. Swindon, UK: Crime Concern.

9. Eijken, T. & Meijer, R. (1995). Prevalence and

prevention of crime against businesses in the

Netherlands. Security Journal 6: 37–46.

10. Johnston, V., Leitner, M., Shapland, J. & Wiles, P.

(1994). Crime on industrial estates. Crime

Prevention Unit series paper no 54 London: Police

Research Group, Home Office.

11. Philippine News Agency. Manila Bulletin. (20 July

2017). Nueva Ecija crime rate down – PNP.

Accessed from

https://news.mb.com.ph/2017/07/20/nueva-ecija-

crime-rate-down-pnp/. Accessed: February 1, 2020.

12. Arcellaz, PC. (26 March 2018). Crimes down 36%

in Central Luzon. SunStar, Philippines.

https://www.sunstar.com.ph/article/425676.

Accessed: February 1, 2020.

13. Eduardo, J. (2018). Indigenous Peoples’ Rights Act

(IPRA) of 1997: A Standpoint from Selected Higher

Education Institutions in Nueva Ecija After 20

Years. Journal of Progressive

14. Research in Social Sciences, 8(1), 595-613.

Retrieved from http://www.scitecresearch.com/

journals/index.php/jprs s/article/view/1547.

Retrieved June 18, 2019.

15. Pagandian, J. & Eduardo, J.P. (2019). Restorative

justice in cordillera administrative region:

Tradition and praxis towards a peace process

model. International Journal of Social Science

Studies, Vol. 7, No. 1


https://www.unodc.org/documents/justice-and-prison-reform/crimeprevention/resolution_2002-13.pdf

https://www.unodc.org/documents/justice-and-prison-reform/crimeprevention/resolution_2002-13.pdf

https://www.unodc.org/pdf/criminal_justice/Handbook_on_Crime_Prevention_Guidelines_-_Making_them_work.pdf



https://www.enotes.com/homework-help/why-buisness-important-country-economy-474583.%20Accessed%2012%20Feb.%202020



https://doi.org/10.1080/01639625.1982.9967603

https://news.mb.com.ph/2017/07/20/nueva-ecija-crime-rate-down-pnp/

https://news.mb.com.ph/2017/07/20/nueva-ecija-crime-rate-down-pnp/

https://www.sunstar.com.ph/author/4256/1/Princess-Clea-Arcellaz

https://www.sunstar.com.ph/article/425676



APPROACHES TO DEVELOPING PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATIVE COMPETENCE OF MEDICAL

STUDENTS IN FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Ahmedova Matluba Ibragimdjonovna Lecturer,

Foreign languages faculty,

Fergana state university,

Uzbekistan

ABSTRACT This paper discusses the aspects of teaching medical communication to Uzbek ESP learners. Two aspects of medical communication

have been explored: medical communication and the communication in preventive medicine. First, this paper focused on the findings

related to teach foreign languages to medical students. Key differences were found between therapeutists and hygienist-

epidemiologists interactions. Next, the article described the offered approaches and methods for developing professional

communicative competence of medical students in foreign languages, acknowledged the importance of designing role play activities

relevant to specialists of preventive medicine.

KEY WORDS: aspects of medical communication, preventive medicine, role play activities.

DISCUSSION The requirements for training specialists vary

together with changes in political, social and professional spheres. These changes have impact on the quality of training specialists and serve as the reference point for selecting the curriculum content and teaching methods.

Despite the wide range of research works addressed to developing medical students‟ communicative competence in a foreign language, there are numerous issues in teaching medical communication. One area identified as problematic is teaching foreign languages to professionals of preventive medicine.

The research analysis revealed that medical communication have been explored extensively elsewhere and consists of doctor–patient or nurse-patient interactions in an in-patient hospital setting. Nevertheless, it is important to note the fact that such approach doesn‟t include the communication of preventive medicine professionals from an ESP perspective. However, medical communication doesn‟t consist only of doctor-patient or nurse-patient interactions, but it was found to have another aspect, which represented in the current study, particularly in Uzbekistan. The findings showed that preventive medical communication consists of hygienist-epidemiologist–people or patients, hygienist-epidemiologist–employers and employees of plants or representatives of organizational settings, foreign colleagues and medical experts‟ interactions. Doctor-patient and nurse-patient communication includes

having rapport and empathy. However, the specialists of preventive medicine actively participate in intercultural communication than therapeutists, and their communication should include being decisive, reasonable and tolerant in times of crisis. Hygienist-epidemiologists need to communicate with different professionals in different spheres of social life (employers and employees, representatives of international medical projects).

There is a need to explore these aspects of medical communication. Many new approaches to teaching foreign languages require a methodological analysis of the problem and the development of a new concept. These aspects show the relevance of this chosen topic.

There are two aspects to developing the personality of medical specialists in universities. The first is organizing learning process considering the proficiency level in foreign language, applying professionally oriented approach and the second is using appropriate methods, organizing communication through offered techniques.

By engaging students in active cognitive activities, we can develop professional communication qualities in foreign language. At this stage, the age of students coincides with the formation of personal views, acquiring values, and understanding the essence of their profession. Therefore, we should develop methodical system for developing professional communicative competence in foreign language during the study medical sciences.

The literature on the methodology of teaching foreign languages in the eighties of the last century




offered the intensive system of teaching foreign languages, which later became known as the system of communicative teaching. The basis of this method is the suggestopedic teaching system developed by G.Lozanov in the seventies of the last century. This teaching system is based on three principles: - suggestopedia positively changes the attitude towards learning a foreign language, activates internal memory capacity, prevents mental stress, promotes successful learning and increase self-confidence, and, in general, enhances the student's full potential;

- suggestopedia decreases anxiety, relaxing music inspires, learners performances and playing drama reduce fatigue and make learning language enjoyable;

- suggestopedia teaches to comprehend foreign language and use speech patterns in various social situations. [8.131-137]

It was important to study some of the innovative approaches in the world linguistics over the past three decades. The most important of these is the issue of developing communicative competence of ESP learners. Another achievement is the methodological idea of attitude towards language learning. In this regard, R.C.Gardner, G.Lozanov, J.Jalolov recommended “attitude” to learn. [5, 7, 1] Students‟ attitude to foreign language learning is a key factor of learning, an instrument to control the behavior of learner in a specific speech situation while at the same time stimulating the students' learning. [5]

All the aforementioned methodical systems can be used in teaching foreign languages to the students of preventive medicine. We tried to develop an effective form of teaching system for Uzbek students combining every element of above discussed language teaching methods.

In recent years, language educators all over the world have been widely using role play activities as a teaching method. Philosophers, psychologists, ethnographers, anthropologists, and linguists have developed game theory as a form of human activity in detail.

V.Wundt studied the game as an analogue of practice and work activity. “Game stimulates to work,” he wrote. [4. -9]

The theoretical foundations of using role plays and simulation activities in higher education have been extensively studied by M.Altun, A.A.Verbitsky, V.Littlewood, E.Milrou, N.Pern. Role-plays are different in terms of teaching aim: they can be differentiated between drama, research-oriented, career-oriented, role play activities for developing language skills, managerial, communicative, and activity-based. The main purpose of using role play activities is to involve students in the learning process and to develop steady motives for learning.

We have tried to incorporate role plays intended for personality traits development into foreign language learning process. Career-oriented role play activity is a

method of teaching based on the modeling person's activity, in which learners can practice the situations that they face in their future profession and also practicing native speakers performing speech.

The research analysis showed the above discussed principles can be effectively applied to preventive medical communication. For example, in modeling communication between hygienists and population, interaction in organizing health measures among public, problems that can appear in examining the sources of diseases. In this way, we modeled the communication of preventive medicine.

Organizing effective communication in a foreign language is a complex task, which requires special skills and develop listening, questioning, and communication skills. During the conversation, special attention is paid to being genuine and tolerant in communication, listening attentively to the communicator's ideas, being approachable, determined, sincere and respectful. The professional communication situation is modeled. The study revealed the possibility of forming some qualities of preventive medical professional. These qualities include: interacting with a foreign colleague, working autonomously, working in a team, communicating with the public and patients, making speech before public, acquiring the rules of medical etiquette, being decisive, showing respect to other cultures, self-esteem aspiration, emergency response, preventive medical communication style, communication ethics, specialist image.

The study also provided a clear definition of the place and time of communication in foreign language at medical university. At the initial stage of the English course, the learning components encourage students in speech situations, such as “sanitary examination and evaluation of the object”, and the communication tasks should be gradually complicated. Speech situations are the content of teaching foreign language. The research results showed that organizing teaching foreign languages on the bases of professionally oriented problem solving tasks create the process of natural communication. Therefore, efforts have been made to model speech communication and select problematic situations, involve them to real preventive medical problem situations. Standard and various problem solving tasks are also important in creating speech situations.

The professional problems, which students understand and address, are reflected in their speech situations. The professional problem solving activities presented below are the speech material for modeling communication: problems arousing in medical international relations. Student-doctors always play some role in social discourse in speech-based activities that reflect interactions. They may be preventive medical experts and residents, epidemiologist and epidemiologist, hygienist and supervised objects, foreign medical experts, or representatives and principals of the plants




and factories. The role is a functional aspect of preventive medical expert‟s status, which determines the person's position, rights and responsibilities in the system of relationships. Problems with social status and role-playing games can be seen in the relationship between ethical and professional activities.

While determining the learning objective, it is necessary to select type of collaborative activity considering the individual experience of the students. [2. 93-97, 8, 10. 4-14] Each type of speech situation has its own language means. Speech situations should serve as motivation for the students to speak. Speech situations created on the life situations have great impact on learners and an important learning tool in speech communication.

Studies showed that EFL students tend to feel anxiety and excitement in in intercultural communication. E.K.Horwitz and J.A.Coup provided a series of recommendations for teachers to overcome the classroom anxiety in learning a foreign language. In particular, they suggested to use role-plays to avoid the stress and educators can easily encourage students to learn other cultures and cultural norms.

The research revealed that the students‟ of preventive medicine will learn how to greet, share ideas and opinions, making comment, introduce themselves in intercultural communication and understand subtleties of intercultural interaction in foreign language through playing variety of roles, such as participating in the World Health Organization‟s projects, medical exhibitions, supermarket inspections, Nobel Prize ceremonies. This technology teaches students to use facial expressions, body language in different discourse situations. One of the most important aspects of using role-playing games is developing a hygienist-epidemiologist‟s communication style, communication behavior in a foreign language, developing communication skills and communicator image of the specialist and the formation of professional communicative competence.

Another teaching tool for speech management technology is the role play cards for participants. It contains all specific features of the communicators. The recommendations on this card will serve as a personal basis for the participant in the interaction. This type of verbal supports provide stimulation for learning. By introducing this type of professional communication framework into the learning process (or the establishment of a professional framework for the learning process), teaching and learning becomes more effective and more manageable. It also helps to take into account the professional interests of students and improves their language training.

Students will focus on using language units for communicative purposes. This will have a positive effect on their speaking ability. Interviewees should be able to guess quickly changing situations in the process and be ready to respond. Reserved and unconfident students can easily play a role and repeat somebody‟s

words during conversation, and respond more effectively to the stimulus given in the interview. Therefore, the learners are able to overcome the psychological barriers in the conversation by practicing on someone's role.

Despite the fact, that much attention is being paid to developing foreign language skills, the technology of speaking in a foreign language in medical field is not adequately developed.

In role-plays directed to developing reading and listening skills, instructional material should consist of audio and reading texts and video material. This technology is effective as it includes a wide range of career specific topics, improves verbal and nonverbal communication skills, creative abilities, provides comprehensible input, and decreases anxiety. Participants of the interaction feel the need in sharing information. In this respect, Skalkin's position on the role of speech situation in dialogic discourse is noteworthy. He considered dialogic discourse as “a combination of thematically organized communicative situation and communication desire carried out by two or more interlocutors in speech act”. [3]

The traditional presentation of speaking situations is also reflected in the distribution of roles. Students can chose their roles after reviewing the problem presented. When communication process focuses on solving professional problems, four different students‟ creative abilities are revealed. The first one is the role of hygienist-epidemiologist based on the students‟ level of knowledge. The other students are able to see their level of knowledge through imitation roles and compare their performance with excellent learners. Third, students develop team-working skills by playing imitational roles. At the same time, students will develop the quality of „”help in any situation” as defined in the doctor's oath during working together on the scenarios. [6. 628-631]

It does not appear in any other form of communicative activity. The student is able to express his hero's actions through verbal communication and foresee the action of the hero in the role assigned to him. Therefore, this method of teaching, a dialogue, is particularly effective in teaching medical students, develops speaking skills in foreign languages, and professional qualities in future hygienist-epidemiologists, as well as their communicative skills in the implementation of state sanitary control.

In the process of modeling communication, students also improve their professional qualities such as speech etiquette of the medical expert, being sociable, and the ability to make decisions in different situations and in times of crisis, and learners will be motivated in the subject matter.

In EAP teaching, it is important to take into account not only the means of teaching, but also its personality-forming, controlling, diagnostic functions, in other words, it should be suggested as a component of the linguistic approach.




Role plays require modeling scenarios, career specific games, and role-plays as a form of collaborative creative activity. Researchers who investigate such approaches also acknowledge the emotionality of the process and, in some cases, being deeply involved in playing roles. Such enthusiasm of the students is related to the game activities, and as a result, they defend their viewpoint, try their best, and can fell satisfaction from the game. Therefore, even though role-plays are conditional, the emotions of the participants are natural; it is reflected on the development of critical thinking ability during solving professional problems.

It is useful to apply simulation-games as a term that fully cover the essence of these situations, as their professional and speech skills are developed simultaneously in practice.

The data analysis of the research proved the effectiveness organizing foreign language teaching at preventive medical departments on the bases of simulation activities that deal with the situations like sanitary inspections and sanitary evaluation of the establishments, checking food quality, participating in conferences, organizing contests, health measures on improving public health education and sanitation state, professional role-play activities in the form of reports or projects on developing anti-epidemic measures and are specific to the hygienist-epidemiologist. These activities are also effective in improving professional skills.

Summarizing the above, it is worth noting that the introduction of professionally oriented English language teaching system opens up great opportunities for medical students to develop communication skills in a foreign language.

REFERENCES

1. Жалолов Ж. Чет тил ўқитиш методикаси.

Ўқитувчи нашриёти. НМИУ, 2012. Тошкент 2012

й. – 395 бет.

2. Леонтьев А.А. Эмоционально–волевые процессы в

овладении иностранным языком / А.А. Леонтьев //

ИЯШ. – 1975. – №6. – С. 93 – 97.

3. Скалкин В.Л. Обучение диалогической речи. – Киев:

Радянськая школа, 1989.– 158 с.

4. Эльконин Д.Б. Психология игры. - М.: Просвещение, 1978.

- 9 с.

5. Gardner R.C. Social psychology and second language

learning. The role of attitudes and motivation. London:

Edward Arnold. 1985. -20.

6. Leonard B., Shuhaibar E.L.H., Chen R. Nursing

student perceptions of intraprofessional team

education using high–fidelity simulation. Journal of

Nursing Education, 49(11), 2010. 628–631. Retrieved

from

http://dx.doi.org.ezp.waldenulibrary.org/10.3928/0148

4834–20100730–06).

7. Lozanov G. Suggestology and outlines of suggestopedy

(7th edition). New–York: Gordon and Breach Science

Publishers. 1992. 131–137p.

8. Maxwell C. Role-play and foreign language learning.

Hamamatsu, Japan. 1997.

9. Milroy E. Role–play: A practical guide. Aberdeen,

U.K.: Aberdeern University. 1982.

10. Smith E.C. Drama and schools: A symposium. In N.H.

Brizendine, Thomas J.L. (Eds.), Learning through

dramatics: Ideas for teachers and librarians. 1972.

pp.4–14. Phoenix, AZ: Oryx.


http://dx.doi.org.ezp.waldenulibrary.org/10.3928/01484834-20100730-06

http://dx.doi.org.ezp.waldenulibrary.org/10.3928/01484834-20100730-06



ARIMA MODELING OF NEONATAL MORTALITY IN

CHITUNGWIZA CENTRAL HOSPITAL

Dr. Smartson. P. NYONI ZICHIRe Project,

University of Zimbabwe,

Harare,

Zimbabwe

Mr. Thabani NYONI Department of Economics,


Harare,

Zimbabwe

ABSTRACT This study uses monthly time series data on neonatal death cases at CCH from January 2013 to December 2018; to predict

neonatal death cases over the period January 2019 to December 2020. Unit root tests have shown that the series under

consideration is I (0). The paper applied the Box-Jenkins SARIMA models. The residual correlogram of the chosen optimal

model is stable and acceptable for forecasting neonatal death cases at CCH. The model predicts a slow but steady decrease in

neonatal deaths over the out-of-sample period. In order to enhance the prevention of neonatal deaths at CCH, the study offers

a 4-fold policy recommendation.

1. INTRODUCTION

The term “neonatal deaths (mortality)” refer to the number of neonates dying before reaching 28 days of age (Usman et al. 2019). Neonatal mortality is highest in the first 24 hours of life and accounts for 65% of infant mortality (Nouri et al. 2013). The first 2 days after birth account for over 50% neonatal deaths, while the first week of life accounts for over 75% of all neonatal deaths (Carlo & Travers, 2016). Death of a neonate has always been a devastating experience, especially for the mother and of concern in clinical practice (Feresu et al. 2005). Globally, 3 million babies die in the first seven days of life (Zupan & Aahman, 2005). In fact, 2.6 million children died in the first month of life in 2016 – nearly 7000 newborn deaths every day – most of which occurred in the first week, with about 1 million dying on the first day and close to 1 million dying within the next 6 days (UNICEF, 2017). Neonatal deaths are most frequently due to birth asphyxia, prematurity, sepsis as well as congenital malformation (Carlo & Travers, 2016). Thus, neonatal deaths are an indicator of healthcare systems in each country (Babaei et al. 2018) because they reflect the health of children and development of the economy and culture of a country or region (Chengye, 2012). However, neonatal deaths can “largely” be prevented (Tachiwenyika et al. 2011). In order to enhance the prevention of neonatal mortality, modeling and forecasting neonatal deaths is not unimportant,

especially in developing countries such as Zimbabwe where neonatal mortality is still a serious problem. Therefore, this paper, hinged on 3-fold study objectives outlined below, will go a long way in uncovering the distribution and dynamics of neonatal mortality in Chitungwiza urban district and hence shed more light on policy formulation in order to tackle the neonatal mortality not only in Chitungwiza but also in the country at large. Objectives of the Study

i. To investigate the months during which neonatal mortality cases mostly occur at Chitungwiza Central Hospital.

ii. To forecast neonatal mortality cases for the out-of sample period.

iii. To examine the pattern of neonatal mortality cases for the out-of-sample period.

Relevance of the Study Neonatal mortality is still a significant public health problem worldwide and accounts for more than 60% of newborn deaths before their first birthday (UNICEF, 2008). Of the world’s 7.7 million deaths in those aged younger than 5 years, 3.1 million are neonatal deaths (Rajaratnam et al. 2010). Approximately 99% of these neonatal deaths occur in low and middle – income countries, mostly in sub-Saharan Africa (Lawn et al. 2005) including Zimbabwe which continues to bear a heavy burden of neonatal mortality (Ministry of Health




and Child Care, 2007). Annual neonatal mortality rate in Zimbabwe is approximately 24 per 1000 live births (Ministry of Health and Child Care, 2017) and this is unacceptably high. This study seeks to examine and forecast neonatal death cases at Chitungwiza Central Hospital (CCH), which is one of Zimbabwe’s quaternary level hospitals. In order to deal with burden of neonatal mortality in Zimbabwe, there is need for reliable forecasts that will act as a guiding tool for policy makers in the health sector; hence, the need for this study. In this paper we focus on CCH only and attempt to come up with area specific (Chitungwiza dormitory) policy conclusions.

2. LITERATURE REVIEW Sarpong (2013) examined maternal mortality

ratio (MMR) at the Okomfo Anokye Teaching Hospital in Kumasi, Ghana, from the year 2000 to 2010. The study explored the feasibility for application of ARIMA models in modeling and forecasting MMR. The results indicated that the hospital’s MMR was relatively stable although it had a very alarming average quarterly MMR of 967.7 per 100000 live births which is about twice the national ratio of 58.41; the study concluded that the ARIMA (1, 0, 2) model was optimal for forecasting quarterly MMR at Okomfo Anokye Teaching Hospital. In Zimbabwe, Mlambo et al. (2013) examined the main causes of maternal mortality through carrying out key informant interviews based on convenient sampling. The study was done at Mpilo Hospital in Bulawayo. Their results show that hemorrhage was the leading cause of maternal deaths, amongst other causes such as abortion, hypertension and sepsis. In another Zimbabwean study, Nyoni (2019) modeled and forecasted maternal deaths in Zimbabwe using annual time series data covering the period 1990 – 2015. The author applied the Box-Jenkins ARIMA models and basically found out that in the next decade (2016-2025), maternal deaths will increase. In yet another recent Zimbabwean paper, Chaibva et al. (2019) analyzed stillbirths and neonatal deaths in Mutare district: the study conducted a retrospective review of 346 patient records, of women who delivered at Sakubva Hospital and those reffered for Mutare district facilities to Mutare Provincial Hospital, between January and June 2014 and then used descriptive statistics to explore the contributors to stillbirths and neonatal deaths in Mutare. Their results indicate that of the 346 women, 15.6% (i.e. 54) experienced an adverse pregnancy outcome (stillbirth or neonatal death). Their results also show that contributing factors to adverse pregnancy outcomes included birthweight, gestational age, delivery complications and delivery methods. Ezeh et al. (2014) studied the determinants of neonatal mortality in

Nigeria using the Cox Regression model. Their results indicated that a higher birth order of newborns with a short birth interval of less or equal to 2 years and newborns with a higher birth order with a longer birth interval of greater than 2 years were significantly associated with neonatal mortality.

In a recent study in India, Mishra et al. (2019) forecasted Infant Mortality Rates (IMR) using ARIMA models. The forecast of the sample period (1971-2016) showed accuracy by the selected ARIMA (2, 1, 1) model. The post sample forecast with the ARIMA (2, 1, 1) model showed a decreasing trend of IMR (2017-2025). The forecast IMR for 2025 was 15/1000 live births. In another recent paper, Khan et al. (2019) modeled and forecasted IMR of Asian countries using the log-log regression and ARIMA models. Their empirical analysis showed that there was a negative correlation between IMR and GDP (PPP). Secondary data of IMR and GDP (PPP) from 1980 to 2015 was examined and forecast was done from 2016 to 2025: the AR (1) model was found for all countries except Japan and Nepal for which the ARIMA (1, 1, 1) model was found suitable. In yet another recent study, which was done in Africa; relatively closer to Zimbabwe, Usman et al. (2019) investigated the incidence of the rate of neonatal mortality in Nigeria using ARIMA models. Their trend plot of the incidence indicated that there was a steady decrease in the incidence rate over the years. The ARIMA (1, 1, 1) model was found to be the best fit model. The time series analysis also showed the neonatal mortality rate has reduced by 17.8% from 51.7% in the year 1990 to 33.9% in the year 2017.

While our study is completely new in the case of Zimbabwe, it is very closely related to Usman et al. (2019). Our study focuses on a specific teaching hospital, that is; Chitungwiza Central Hospital (CCH), unlike Usman et al. (2019) who focused on Nigeria as a country. Hence, our study’s contribution is unique in the sense that it will generate results specifically meant for CCH instead of generalizing country specific results over individual hospital units. After all, our results can also be applied in similar teaching or central hospitals in Zimbabwe, especially the Parirenyatwa Group of Hospitals, the Sally Mugabe (formally Harare) Central Hospital as well as the Mpilo and the United Bulawayo Hospitals. Furthermore, this study can be replicated for these hospitals in order to get specific results for the particular hospitals.

3. METHODOLOGY A time series is a sequence of observations taken

sequentially in time (Box et al, 2015). Our choice of using a time series model is justified because data used for this study was recorded chronologically. The




analytical approach to this study is hinged on the Box-Jenkins Seasonal Autoregressive Integrated Moving Average (SARIMA) model. The SARIMA model is apparently a combination of non-seasonal and seasonal components, and can be specified as SARIMA (p,d,q)x(P,D,Q)s, where p, d and q are orders of the non-seasonal autoregressive (AR), non-seasonal differencing and non-seasonal moving average (MA) parts of the model. P, D and Q are orders of the seasonal AR, seasonal differencing and seasonal MA

parts of the model and s is the length of the seasonal period. The AR process captures previously observed values up to a specified maximum lag, plus a disturbance term. The process of differencing is called “integration” and apparently captures the stabilization of the data by removing seasonality or trend, while the MA process accounts for disturbance terms. The basic algebraic specification of the SARIMA model applied in this study is consistent with Brockwell & Davis (1991) and is as given below:

( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

The non-seasonal factors are given as: ( )

( ) }

The seasonal factors are given as:

( )

( ) }

Where Xt is the data series (that is ND), is the

disturbance term, B is the backshift operator, is the

coefficient of the non-seasonal AR, is the coefficient

of the non-seasonal MA, is the coefficient of the

seasonal AR, is the coefficient of the seasonal MA,

is the difference operator, with d order of

differencing and is the seasonal difference operator,

with D seasonal order of differencing and s length of the seasonal period. In this paper, a SARIMA (p,d,q)(P,D,Q)12 model was constructed using monthly

neonatal mortality case data from January 2013 to December 2018.

Data Issues

This study is based on neonatal deaths (neonatal mortality cases) at Chitungwiza Central Hospital, over the period January 2013 to December 2018. The out-of-sample forecast covers the period January 2019 to December 2021. All the data employed in this paper was obtained from DHIS2 system for Chitungwiza urban district.

Diagnostic Tests and Model Evaluation Stationarity Tests: Graphical Analysis

Figure 1: Graphical Analysis

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019

ND




Unit Root Tests Table 1: Unit root tests

Augmented-Dickey-Fuller (ADF) Test

Test Statistic

Variable Constant Constant + Trend

NDt -5.844090*** -6.919769***

NB: ***, ** and * imply rejection of null hypothesis at 1%, 5% and 10% levels of significance, respectively.

Figure 1 above shows the time trend of the series under consideration. A formal test for stationarity is shown in table 1, where the ADF test was applied. Table 1 above, indicate that the series under consideration is stationary, hence I (0). Model Evaluation (without a constant)

Table 2: Model evaluation Model AIC ME RMSE MAE

SARIMA (0,0,3)(2,0,0)12 640.8452 6.3356 19.798 15.187 SARIMA (0,0,1)(1,0,0)12 649.1065 9.1476 21.989 16.855 SARIMA (0,0,2)(2,0,0)12 642.9915 6.4182 20.522 16.057 SARIMA (0,0,0)(1,0,0)12 660.3542 8.239 26.672 18.934 SARIMA (0,0,0)(2,0,0)12 655.6835 5.9364 26.106 18.61 SARIMA (0,0,0)(3,0,0)12 653.9450 4.6713 25.781 18.241 SARIMA (0,0,1)(0,0,0)12 665.4913 17.168 23.883 19.044 SARIMA (0,0,2)(0,0,0)12 656.0779 13.535 22.023 17.59 SARIMA (0,0,3)(0,0,0)12 648.9796 11.234 20.681 16.348 SARIMA (0,0,3)(3,0,0)12 641.2870 5.6021 19.673 14.886 Table 2 shows that the best model, based on the AIC, is the SARIMA (0,0,3)(2,0,0)12.

Analysis of the Residuals of the SARIMA (0, 0, 3)(2, 0, 0)12 Model Residual Correlogram of the SARIMA (0, 0, 3)(2, 0, 0)12 Model

Figure 2: Residual correlogram

Figure 2 above, indicates that the selected optimal model is not suffering from autocorrelation and

hence stable. Therefore, the model is suitable for forecasting neonatal deaths at CCH.

-0.3

-0.2

-0.1

0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0 5 10 15 20

lag

Residual ACF

+- 1.96/T^0.5

-0.3

-0.2

-0.1

0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0 5 10 15 20

lag

Residual PACF

+- 1.96/T^0.5




4. FINDINGS OF THE STUDY Descriptive Statistics

Figure 3: Descriptive statistics

0

4

8

12

16

20

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90

Series: ND

Sample 2013M01 2018M12

Observations 72

Mean 28.84722

Median 24.00000

Maximum 88.00000

Minimum 0.000000

Std. Dev. 16.78670

Skewness 1.392751

Kurtosis 5.425198

Jarque-Bera 40.92182

Probability 0.000000

Over the study period, the average number of

neonatal deaths at CCH is approximately 28 per month. The minimum number of neonatal death cases is zero and this was experienced during the months of September 2017, as well as March and December 2018. The maximum number of neonatal death cases over the study period is 88 per month and this is unacceptably high. This was experienced in the month of September 2013. Such large numbers of neonatal deaths indicate

that there is need for serious action on the part of policy formulation and implementation. The series under consideration is positively skewed and not normally distributed as shown by the skewness and kurtosis statistics. The Jarque-Bera statistic, with a highly statistically significant probability, at 1% level of significance; also confirms that the series under consideration is not normally distributed.

Results Presentation

Table 3: Main Results of the SARIMA (0, 0, 3)(2, 0, 0)12 Model

( ) ( ) Equation [4] can be expressed as follows:

(

) (

)

Variable Coefficient Standard Error z p-value 0.338821 0.109435 3.096 0.0020*** 0.286037 0.130898 2.185 0.0289** 0.533557 0.110862 4.813 0.000149*** 0.244745 0.120591 2.030 0.0424** 0.225426 0.115152 1.958 0.0503*

NB: ***, ** and * imply statistical significance at 1%, 5% and 10% levels of significance




Forecast Graph Figure 4: Forecast Graph

Out of Sample Forecasts

Table 4: Out-of-sample forecasts (January 2019 – December 2020) Year: Month Predicted Neonatal Deaths Standard Error 95% Confidence

Interval 2019:01 4.35905 18.3518 (-31.6098, 40.3280) 2019:02 13.9670 20.8007 (-26.8015, 54.7356) 2019:03 0.932352 21.2801 (-40.7758, 42.6405) 2019:04 14.1606 21.6785 (-28.3284, 56.6496) 2019:05 28.7264 21.6785 (-13.7626, 71.2154) 2019:06 15.0187 21.6785 (-27.4703, 57.5077) 2019:07 11.0142 21.6785 (-31.4748, 53.5032) 2019:08 11.5863 21.6785 (-30.9027, 54.0753) 2019:09 7.79289 21.6785 (-34.6961, 50.2819) 2019:10 14.6578 21.6785 (-27.8312, 57.1468) 2019:11 12.1056 21.6785 (-30.3834, 54.5946) 2019:12 4.00452 21.6785 (-38.4845, 46.4935) 2020:01 9.77202 22.5526 (-34.4302, 53.9743) 2020:02 9.59496 22.7953 (-35.0830, 54.2729) 2020:03 0.315901 22.8460 (-44.4615, 45.0933) 2020:04 10.2326 22.8890 (-34.6290, 55.0943) 2020:05 16.5980 22.8890 (-28.2636, 61.4596) 2020:06 10.5234 22.8890 (-34.3383, 55.3850)

2020:07 9.16655 22.8890 (-35.6951, 54.0282)

2020:08 9.36038 22.8890 (-35.5012, 54.2220)

2020:09 9.21925 22.8890 (-35.6424, 54.0809)

2020:10 11.5452 22.8890 (-33.3164, 56.4069)

2020:11 9.25029 22.8890 (-35.6113, 54.1119) 2020:12 1.35682 22.8890 (-43.5048, 46.2184)

-60

-40

-20

0

20

40

60

80

2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021

95 percent interval

ND

forecast




Graphical Presentation of the Predicted Monthly Neonatal Mortality Cases at Chitungwiza Central

Hospital Figure 5: Graphical presentation of out-of-sample forecasts

Table 3 shows the main results of the selected optimal model. Equations [4 & 5] are the mathematical representation of the optimal model. The striking feature of this model is that all of its parameters are statistically significant. Figure 4, table 4 and figure 5 show forecasts of the model. The selected optimal model generally predicts that there will be a decline in neonatal deaths at CCH for the out-of-sample period. This means that current policies and programmes designed to combat neonatal mortality Chitungwiza (and other parts of Zimbabwe) are on the winning side in the war against neonatal mortality in Zimbabwe. This precisely suggests that policies for pediatric management at CCH (and of course, in Zimbabwe at large) are effective and should be maintained.

5. CONCLUSION & RECOMMENDATIONS

In this study, the SARIMA (0,0,3)(2,0,0)12 model has been successfully used to model neonatal death cases at CCH over the period Janauary 2013 to December 2018. The forecasts show a slow but steady decrease in neonatal deaths at CCH. It could be inferred that the fight against neonatal mortality is gradually being won in Zimbabwe. However, more attention should be paid

to this fight to engender even a rapid decline than is currently witnessed. Further studies should explore the main causes of neonatal deaths in Chitungwiza urban district and other areas in Zimbabwe at large. The following recommendations are derived:

i. There is need for increased training programs in resuscitation and in essential newborn care in order to maintain low levels of and or eradicate neonatal deaths.

ii. The government of Zimbabwe should work towards improving access to healthcare, especially for expectant mothers in the CCH catchment area.

iii. The government of Zimbabwe should also work toward capacity building at CCH in order for the hospital to continue offering comprehensive neonatal care services.

iv. There is need for consistent home visits by community health workers, for neonatal care.

REFERENCES 1. Babaei, H., Dehghan, M., & Pirkashani, L. M.

(2018). Study of Causes of Neonatal Mortality

and Its Related Factors in the Neonatal

Intensive Care Unit of Iman Reza Hospital in

Kermanshah during (2014 - 2016),

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

Predicted Neonatal Deaths at Chitungwiza Central Hospital

Predicted Neonatal Deaths




International Journal of Pediatrics, 6 (5): 7641

– 7649.

2. Box, G. E. P., Jenkins, G. M., Reinsel, G. C., &

Ljung, G. M. (2015). Time Series Analysis,

Forecasting and Control, 5th Edition, Wiley &

Sons, London.

3. Brockwell, P. J., & Davis, R. A. (1991). Time

Series: Theory and Methods, Springer Science

and Business Media, New York.

4. Carlo, W. A., & Travers, C. P. (2016).

Maternal and Neonatal Mortality: Time To

Act, Journal of Pediatrics, 92 (6): 543 – 545.

5. Chaibva, B. V., Olorunju, S., Nyadundu, S., &

Beke, A. (2019). Adverse Pregnancy Outcomes

“Stillbirth and Early Neonatal Deaths” in

Mutare District, Zimbabwe (2014): A

Descriptive Study, BMC Pregnancy and

Childbirth, 19 (86): 1 – 7.

6. Chengye, J. (2012). Child and Adolescent

Health, People’s Medical Publishing House,

Beijing.

7. Ezeh, O. K., Agho, K. E., Dibley, M. J., Hall,

J., & Page, A. N. (2014). Determinants of

Neonatal Mortality in Nigeria: Evidence From

the 2008 Demographic and Health Survey,

BMC Public Health, 14: 521 – 531.

8. Feresu, S. A., Harlow, S. D., Welch, K., &

Gillespie, B. W. (2005). Incidence of Stillbirth

and Perinatal Mortality and Their Associated

Factors Among Women Delivering at Harare

Maternity Hospital, Zimbabwe: A Cross-

Sectional Retrospective Analysis, BMC, pp: 1 –

12.

9. Khan, M. S., Fatima, S., Zia, S. S., Hussain, E.,

Faraz, T. R., & Khalid, F. (2019). Modeling

and Forecasting Infant Mortality Rates of

Asian Countries in the Perspective of GDP

(PPP), International Journal of Scientific and

Engineering Research, 10 (3): 18 – 23.

10. Lawn, J. E., Cousens, S., & Zupan, J. (2005).

Neonatal Survival 1:4 Million Deaths: When?

Where? Where? Why? Neonatal Survival

Series Paper 1, Lancet, 365: 891 – 900.

11. Ministry of Health and Child Care (2007). The

Zimbabwe National Maternal and Neonatal

Health Road Map (2007-2015), Government of

Zimbabwe, Harare.

12. Ministry of Health and Child Care (2017).

Assessment of Maternal and Perinatal Death

Surveillance and Response Implementation in

Zimbabwe, Government of Zimbabwe, Harare.

13. Mishra, A. K., Sahanaa, C., & Manikandan, M.

(2019). Forecasting Indian Infant Mortality

Rate: An Application of Autoregressive

Integrated Moving Average Model, Journal of

Family and Community Medicine, 26: 123 –

126.

14. Mlambo, C., Chinamo, C., Zingwe, T. (2013).

An Investigation of the Causes of Maternal

Mortality in Zimbabwe, Mediterranean

Journal of Social Sciences, 4 (14): 615 – 620.

15. Nouri, A., Barati, L., Qhezelsofly, F., & Niazi,

S. (2013). Causes of Infant Mortality in

Kalaleh City During 2004 – 2012, Hakim

Jorjani Journal, 1 (2): 2 – 37.

16. Nyoni, T. (2019). Maternal Deaths in

Zimbabwe: Is it a Crime to be a Woman in

Zimbabwe? MPRA Paper No. 96789,

University Library of Munich, Munich.

17. Rajaratnam, J. K., Marcus, J. R., & Flaxman,

A. D. (2010). Neonatal, postnatal, childhood

and under-5 mortality for 187 countries, 1970

– 2010: A Systematic Analysis of Progress

Towards Millennium Development Goal 4,

Lancet, 375: 1988 – 2008.

18. Sarpong, S. A. (2013). Modeling and

Forecasting Maternal Mortality; An

Application of ARIMA Models, International

Journal of Applied Science and Technology, 3

(1): 19 – 28.

19. Tachiwenyika, E., Gombe, N., Shambira, G.,

Chadambuka, A., Tshimanga, M., & Zizhou, S.

(2011). Determinants of Perinatal Mortality in

Marondera District, Mashonaland East

Province of Zimbabwe, 2009: a Case Control

Study, Pan African Medical Journal, pp: 1 – 8.

20. UNICEF (2008). The State of the World’s

Children, Child Survival-UNICEF.

21. UNICEF (2017). The neonatal period is the

most vulnerable time for a child.

http://data.unicef.org/child-

mortality/neonatal.html ; accessed 29/01/2020.

22. Usman, A., Sulaiman, M. A., & Abubakar, I.

(2019). Trend of Neonatal Mortality In Nigeria

From 1990 to 2017 Using Time Series

Analysis, Journal of Applied Sciences and

Environmental Management, 23 (5): 865 –

869.

23. Zupan, J., & Aahman, E. (2005). Perinatal

Mortality for the Year 2000, WHO, Geneva.


http://data.unicef.org/child-mortality/neonatal.html

http://data.unicef.org/child-mortality/neonatal.html



FORECASTING THE NUMBER OF OUTPATIENT VISITS AT SILOBELA DISTRICT HOSPITAL IN ZIMBABWE

USING ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS

Dr. Smartson. P. NYONI ZICHIRe Project,


Harare,

Zimbabwe

Mr. Thabani NYONI Department of Economics,


Harare,

Zimbabwe

ABSTRACT This paper employs monthly time series data on outpatient visits at Silobela District Hospital (SDH) from January 2012 to

December 2019, to predict healthcare demand (outpatient visits) using Artificial Neural Networks (ANNs). Residual analysis

of the ANN model indicates that the employed model is adequate. This paper is the first of its kind in Zimbabwe and its

primary contribution is finding that there is need for more prudent resource planning and allocation at SDH as warned by

high numbers of projected outpatient visits over the period January 2020 to December 2021. The study managed to come up

with a 3-fold policy recommendation envisaged to improve healthcare management at SDH.

1. INTRODUCTION Forecasting the number of patient visits to

hospitals has aroused an increasingly large interest from both theoretic and application perspectives (Yu et al. 2017). This can be attributed to the fact that forecasting the number of patient visits to hospitals is paramount in allocating human and material resources of hospitals (Hadavandi et al. 2012). The Outpatient Department (OPD) is the window of the hospital external service from the hospital actual operation, and can experience increasing stress from year to year due to increasing patient volumes (Luo et al. 2017). Therefore, the ability to predict outpatient visits is essential for resource planning and allocation as well as efficient appointment scheduling in OPD aimed at avoiding overcrowding and providing high quality patient care service (Hadavandi et al. 2012). Precise and reliable predictions of outpatient amount can contribute to allocate the main healthcare resources effectively. Hence, it is important to make an accurate forecast of outpatient visits in advance, in order to help hospital managers to make the right decisions to meet the anticipated healthcare demand effectively and timely (Luo et al. 2017; Huang & Wu, 2017).

Hence, these days, forecasting the number of patient visits to hospitals has achieved an

overwhelmingly significant status in hospital management (Huang & Wu, 2017). Thus, more accurate hospital visits prediction can contribute to higher efficiency of hospital management without any doubt (Yu et al. 2017). In fact, the importance of this paper to SDH is basically three fold:

i. To offer adequate and safe patient care supported by appropriate resource planning.

ii. Understanding outpatient visits dynamics at SDH has implications for administrative and clinical decisions, for example; nurse-to-patient ratios and bed management decisions.

iii. This paper will also facilitate optimal allocation of limited personnel and resources in order to avoid problems such as poor nurse and doctor staffing levels.

iv. This study will also go a long way in minimizing patient wait time (which is economically inefficient) at SDH, while not having more on-duty nurses and doctors than necessary.

Motivated by overcrowding and resource scheduling problems prevalent in Zimbabwe, we select a typical district hospital – Silobela District Hospital (SDH) and consider a time series forecasting problem of monthly outpatient visits. SDH is a government run




district hospital in the Midlands province of Zimbabwe, and just like many public hospitals in Zimbabwe, has large-scale outpatients. This paper will go a long way in helping the SDH health executive team in making the necessary policy decisions in order to meet the expected healthcare demand in Silobela.

1.1 OBJECTIVES i. To analyze SDH outpatient visits over the

period January 2012 to December 2019. ii. To forecast SDH outpatient visits over the

period January 2020 to December 2021. iii. To determine whether the outpatient visits at

SDH are increasing or decreasing over the out of sample period.

iv.

1.2 RELEVANCE OF THE STUDY Overcrowding of hospital waiting rooms by

patients characterizes the OPDs of healthcare centres of developing countries (Bahadori et al. 2017;

Yarmohammadian et al. 2017). Patients wait for so long and such medical wait times are economically inefficient as they represent lost productivity for patients (Oostrom et al. 2017). After all, time spent waiting to see a doctor influences a patient’s healthcare experience and can lead to dissatisfaction with the hospital or medical establishment. Lengthy clinical wait times are a signal of sub-optimal processes within the healthcare system and are caused by overcrowding and under-staffing of medical facilities that exceed peak volumes in times of high demand. But the problems of overcrowding and understaffing can be ameliorated (Guan & Engelhardt, 2019), especially through modeling and forecasting outpatient visits. In this paper, an Artificial Neural Network (ANN) model is proposed to predict outpatient visits at SDH. The model is envisioned to aid in overcoming the effects of overcrowding in hospital waiting rooms and places, which results from a mismatch between hospital staffing ratios and the demand for healthcare services.

2. LITERATURE REVIEW

Table 1: Summary of Reviewed Previous Studies Author/Year Country Period Method Main Findings

Wang et al. (2015) Taiwan January 2009 – December 2011

Google Trends Google Trends are a powerful prediction tool

Sukmak et al. (2015)

Thailand January 2007 – December 2010

ANNs (RBF & MLP) The RBF was selected as the final model

Capan et al. (2016) USA January 2008 – December 2012

ARIMA; SARIMA Best fitting models included the ARIMA (1,0,0), SARIMA (1,0,0)(1,1,2)12, SARIMA (2,1,4)(1,1,2)14 as well as the Seasonal Linear Regression (SLR) model

Yu et al. (2017) China January 2011 – December 2015

WD; ANN ANN models are powerful prediction tools

Luo et al. (2017) China 2016 SARIMA; SES; CFM CFM performs better Huang & Wu (2017)

China Janauary 2005 – December 2013

EMD; ANN; PSO EMD-BPANN is a powerful predictive hybrid tool

Tamatta (2018) UK January 2014 – June 2016

ARIMA; TBATS; ANN ARIMA model is the best

Zhou et al. (2018) China January 2010 – June 2016

SARIMA; NARNN; SARIMA-NARNN

The hybrid SARIMA-NARNN was the best model

Rochman et al. (2018)

Indonesia 2016 ELM ELM is a powerful predictive tool

Mtonga et al. (2019)

Rwanda 2018 Machine Learning; Transfer Systems

Machine learning-based patient load prediction model performs better




Guan & Englehardt (2019)

USA January 2010 – September 2018

ANNs, Linear Regression; SARIMA

RNN models are the best and are also able to capture seasonality

Elgohari et al. (2019)

Egypt January 2011 – December 2017

ARIMA; ES The ARIMA (3,1,3) model was found to be the best model

Choudhury & Urena (2020)

USA January 2014 – August 2017

ARIMA; HW; TBATS; ANN; SARIMA

The SARIMA (3,0,0)(2,1,0)12 model was the best fit model

There is no doubt; this paper is new in Zimbabwe. To the best of our knowledge, there is no similar study done in Zimbabwe so far. Although, we are inspired by Elgohari et al. (2019), we adopt the ANN approach due to its efficiency and novelty as already proven by Sukmak et al. (2015), Huang & Wu (2017), Yu et al. (2017), Guan & Englehardt (2019), Mtonga et al. (2019).

3. METHODOLOGY The number of outpatient visits is a non-linear

and non-stationary series (Huang & Wu, 2017). Hence, the suitability of the ANN approach in this study since it can properly handle noisy non-linear and non-stationary processes. This paper uses the ANN approach based on the Multi Layer Perceptron Neural Network (MLPNN) which belongs to a general class structure of ANNs called Feedforward Neural Networks (FNNs). All the data used in this study was collected from the OPD at SDH. The data is for all age-groups and covers the period January 2012 to December 2019.

4. FINDINGS OF THE STUDY

4.1 DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS Figure 1: Descriptive Statistics

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950

Series: OPV

Sample 2012M01 2019M12

Observations 96

Mean 546.8438

Median 546.0000

Maximum 930.0000

Minimum 321.0000

Std. Dev. 120.8676

Skewness 0.619073

Kurtosis 3.625507

Jarque-Bera 7.697046

Probability 0.021311

Figure 1 indicates, as expected, a positive a high

average outpatient visits figure of approximately 547 visits per month over the study period. For a district hospital like SDH, this figure is already too much right away. This is a warning sign to policy makers and relevant authorities; doctor and nurse staffing levels need to be re-checked if healthcare demand is to be adequately met at SDH, otherwise long wait times and

patient dissatisfaction may continue haunting the hospital’s reputation. The minimum is 321 visits while the maximum is a high as 930 visits. The series under consideration is positively skewed as shown by the skewness statistic of o.619073 and is not normally distributed as indicated by the kurtosis of 3.625507.




4.2 ANN MODEL SUMMARY FOR SDH OUTPATIENT VISITS Table 2: ANN model summary for SDH outpatient visits

Variable SDH Outpatient Visits Observations 84 (After Adjusting Endpoints) Neural Network Architecture: Input Layer Neurons 12 Hidden Layer Neurons 12 Output Layer Neurons 1 Activation Function Hyperbolic Tangent Function Back Propagation Learning: Learning Rate 0.005 Momentum 0.05 Criteria: Error 0.080314 MSE 738.372941 MAE 22.508823 Residual Analysis for SDH Outpatient Visits

Figure 2: Residual Analysis for SDH Outpatient Visits

In-sample Forecast for SDH outpatient visits




Figure 3: In-sample Forecast for SDH outpatient visits

Out-of-Sample Forecast for SDH outpatient visits: Actual and Forecasted Graph

Figure 4: Actual and Forecasted Graph

Out-of-Sample Forecast for SDH outpatient visits: Forecasts only




Figure 5: Forecasts only

Table 2 is the summary of the ANN model used in this study. The residual analysis of the model in figure 2 shows that the model fits the data well. Figure 3 are in-sample forecasts while figure 4 & 5 and out-of-sample forecasts. Policy makers are very much interested in figures 4 and 5 which present the forecasts of the anticipated healthcare demand at SDH. From figure 5, we can see that over the out-of-sample period, SDH will likely experience at least 343 visits per month and this least number of outpatient is projected to be realized in January 2021. The highest number of outpatient visits (i.e. 927) is projected to be realized in July 2021. All the forecasts show that there will be relatively high healthcare demand at SDH over the period January 2020 – December 2021 and hence there is need for careful human and material resource planning in order to enhance efficiency at SDH.

4.3 RECOMMENDATIONS The study basically recommends the following:

i. There is need to increase doctor staffing levels at SDH. At the moment, there are only two doctors (Nyoni & Nyoni, 2019); two more doctors could help meet the current and projected demand more efficiently.

ii. There is need to increase nurse staffing levels at SDH.

iii. There is need for the government to capacitate clinics in the SDH catchment area so that patients are well taken care of in the primary levels of care and only reffered to the secondary level (district hospital) when necessary.

5. CONCLUSION Modeling and forecasting outpatient visits is

now becoming very crucial in public health policy discourse, particulary in light of overcrowding and persistent patient dissatisfaction in many hospitals and clinics around the globe, especially in developing countries. Zimbabwe, just like any other developing country, also faces problems of overcrowding, long wait times and patient dissatisfaction. Almost, every health facility in Zimbabwe is characterized by these issues, especially in district rural hospitals such as SDH. These problems can be solved if reliable forecasting models could be constructed to make sound projections of outpatient visits. This could help in terms of planning ahead with regards to human and material resources. This paper used 96 observations of outpatient visits in order to project healthcare demand for SDH

502.443

646.1118

844.7789

625.8523

511.3395

817.2995

855.5682

773.176

631.2704

499.8686

667.7477

473.8455

343.1695

600.5629

840.8828

638.2684

529.8852

620.6978

927.115

557.0871

506.0467

709.1358

919.1944

556.1069

Predicted Outpatient Visits

Predicted OPV




over the next 24 months. Our forecasts are an early warning sign to the district health executive at SDH and are envisioned to enhance resource planning and allocation.

REFRENCES 1. Bahadori, M., Teymourzadeh, E., Ravangard,

R., & Raadabadi, M. (2017). Factors Affecting

the Overcrowding in Outpatient Healthcare,

Journal of Education and Health Promotion,

6: 1 – 9.

2. Capan, M., Hoover, S., Jackson, E. V., Paul,

D., & Locke, R. (2016). Time Series Analysis

for Forecasting Hospital Census: Application

to the Neonatal Intensive Care Unit, Applied

Clinical Informatics, 7: 275 – 289.

3. Choudhury, A., & Urena, E. (2020).

Forecasting Hourly Emergency Department

Arrival Using Time Series Analysis, British

Journal of Health Care Management, 26 (1):

34 – 43.

4. Elgohari, H., Bakr, A. M., & Majeed, M. A.

(2019). Forecasting the Number of Outpatient

Visits in Tertiary Hospital Using Time Series

Based on ARIMA and ES Models, Australian

Journal of Basic and Applied Sciences, 13 (7):

70 – 77.

5. Guan, G., & Engelhardt, B. E. (2019).

Predicting Sick Patient Volume in a Pediatric

Outpatient Setting Using Time Series Analysis,

Proceedings of Machine Learning Research,

106: 1 – 16.

6. Hadavandi E., Shavandi, H., Ghanbari, A., &

Abbasian-Naghneh, S. (2012). Developing a

Hybrid Artificial Intelligence Model for

Outpatient Visits Forecasting in Hospitals,

Applied Soft Computing, 12 (2): 700 – 711.

7. Huang, D., & Wu, Z. (2017). Forecasting

Outpatient Visits Using Empirical Model

Decomposition Coupled With Back

Propagation Artificial Neural Networks

Optimized by Particle Swarm Optimization,

PLoS ONE, 12 (2): 1 – 17.

8. Luo, L., Luo, L., Zhang, X., & He, X. (2017).

Hospital Daily Outpatient Visits Forecasting

Using a Combinatorial Model Based on

ARIMA and SES Models, BMC Heath Sciences

Research, 17 (469): 1 – 13.

9. Mtonga, K., Kumaran, S., Mikeka, C., Jayavel,

K., & Nsenga, J. (2019). Machine Learning-

Based Patient Load Prediction and IoT

Integrated Intelligent Patient Transfer Systems,

Future Internet, 11 (236): 1 – 24.

10. Nyoni, S. P., & Nyoni, T. (2019). Forecasting

TB Notifications At Silobela District Hospital,

Zimbabwe, IJARIIE, 5 (6): 1461 – 1471.

11. Oostrom, T., Einav, L., & Finkelstein, A.

(2017). Outpatient Office Wait Times and

Quality of Care for Medical Patients, Health

Affairs, 24 (1): 1 – 5.

12. Rochman, E. M. S., Rachmad, A., Syakur, M.

A., & Suzanti, I. O. (2018). Method Extreme

Learning Machine for Forecasting Number of

Patients’ Visits in Dental Poli (A Case Study:

Community Health Centre Kamal Madura

Indonesia), IOP Conference Series – Journal

of Physics, 93: 1 – 8.

13. Sukmak, V., Thongkam, J., &

Leejongpermpoon, J. (2015). Time Series

Forecasting in Anxiety Disorders of Outpatient

Visits Using Data Mining, Health Science, 20

(2): 241 – 253.

14. Tamatta, R. K. (2018). Time Series Forecasting

of Hospital Inpatients and Day Case Waiting

List Using ARIMA, TBATS, and Neural

Network Models, MSc Thesis, School of

Computing, National College of Ireland.

15. Wang, H., Chen, D., Yu, H., & Chen, Y. (2015).

Forecasting The Incidence of Dementia and

Dementia-Related Outpatient Visits With

Google Trends: Evidence From Taiwan,

Journal of Medical Internet Research, 17 (11):

1 – 13.

16. Yarmohammadian, M. H., Rezaei, F.,

Haghshenas, A., & Tavakoli, N. (2017).

Overcrowding in Emergency Departments: A

Review of Strategies to Decrease Future

Challenges, Journal of Research in Medical

Science, 22: 1 – 16.

17. Yu, L., Huang, G., Tang, L., Zhao, Y., & Lai,

K. K. (2017). Forecasting Patient Visits to

Hospitals Using a WD & ANN-based

Decomposition and Ensemble Model, Eurasia

Journal of Mathematics, Science and

Technology Education, 13 (12): 7615 – 7627.

18. Zhou, L., Zhao, P., Wu, D., Cheng, C., &

Huang, H. (2018). Time Series Model for

Forecasting the Number of New Admission

Inpatients, BMC Medical Informatics and

Decision Making, 18 (39): 1 – 11.




ORGANIZATION CLIMATE AND JOB SATISFACTION IN COLEGIO DE SAN JUAN DE LETRAN – BATAAN

AP Edessa G. Flordeliz Colegio de San Juan de Letran-Bataan


ABSTRACT This descriptive study in nature was designed to determine the relationship of dimensions of organizational climate and job

satisfaction of teachers in Colegio de San Juan de Letran-Bataan. Forty two (42) of collegiate and basic education faculty

were the respondents. The study adopted Organizational Climate Descriptive Questionnaire (OCDQ) developed by (Croft,

1963) to know the type of organizational climate, were used for data collection. It is found that there is significant relationship

between dimensions of transformation and diversity and Colegio’s image of organizational climate and job satisfaction while

there is no significant relationship between dimensions of trust, training and development, leadership, employee’s wellness,

communication, performance management, remuneration and rewards, teamwork and work environment of organizational

climate and job satisfaction.

KEY WORDS: Organization climate, job satisfaction, employee, management, leadership

INTRODUCTION Acknowledged as the most imperative factor

for human knowledge growth and progress, education, has its impact on the human advancement connected to the globalization process. According to the National Policy of Education (1969), "Education is an important venture for national development which depends upon quality leadership, which is provided by quality education.

Thus, making any educational institution a fundamental part of the society.

Anyone who spends time in schools will definitely determines how one school can sense different from other schools. School climate is a universal articulation that denotes particularly the feel, atmosphere, tone, ideology, or milieu of a school. Just as individuals have personalities, so too do schools; a school climate may be thought of as the personality of a school.

School climate has become a comprehensive paradigm that researchers often use loosely to group together studies of school environment, learning environment, learning climate, sense of community, leadership, academic climate, and social climate.

This broad application reveals both the strength and weakness of school climate (Liano, 2001). Though it is a useful integrating concept on the one hand, but it also suffers from a lack of clear definition. The word sometimes obscures, rather than creates, understanding.

As the identification of the organizational climate of school is reliant upon the faculty's perception of interaction within the organization, it would be expected that the values, needs, and expectations of the individual teacher and the particular – characteristic of the organization would play a substantial part in influencing the impressions formed.

School organization like any other organization has definite characters, structures and belief. To achieve organization's goals and also

gratifies his necessities as part of the organization, an individual does his obligation well. The organization, to keep his part of the accord, functions according to a set of ideologies and customary responsibilities to achieve its objectives and the same sense of controlling the members of the organization. The overall purpose of this study is to assess the interactive impact of selected factors of organizational climate of Colegio de San Juan de Letran-Bataan focusing specifically on trust, training and development, transformation and diversity, leadership, employees’ wellness, communication, performance management, remuneration and awards, teamwork, work environment and Colegio’s image in determining the faculty’s job satisfaction. Specifically, the objectives of the study were:

1. To study the relationship of various dimensions of organizational climate and job satisfaction of faculty

2. To study the level perceptions of faculty of Colegio de San Juan de Letran about parameters of organizational climate.

Management situations were one of the issues that members of organizations were most concerned about ( (Chambers, 1978). Whether these issues are trust, training and development, transformation and diversity, leadership, employees’ wellness, communication, performance management, remuneration and awards, teamwork, work environment and Colegio’s image, they are all closely connected with the fundamental interests of employees. Thus, management style and its operation mode are crucial to the way employees perceive organizational climate, and thus are significant factors affecting organizational climate. Moreover, the faculty’s opinions about organizational management style affect their personal performance (Jackson, 1995). Because management is of such great significance for organizations specially academic institutions and their front runners,





organizational climate in relationship with their jobs satisfaction were investigated in this paper.

THEORIES AND HYPOTHESES In this study the possibility of correlation

between various dimensions of organizational climate and job satisfaction is proposed with reference to Watkin (2003) who stated that perception of individuals and define climate as a measure of what employees perceive from the environment regarding how work should be done. Taneja (1987) also addresses the climate as the way by which members of the organization comprehend what is important for an effective organization.

An organization cannot create knowledge without individuals. The organization should support creative individuals and provide contexts for them to create knowledge.

Researches have shown that when a man is satisfied with his work, he alone is not benefited but the employee too gets benefit. Besides, satisfaction brings many other tangible and intangible results. The studies in this area have revealed that a person satisfied with his job is likely to profit by having morale in his general living. The community profits on the score of individual and the well-being of the society in general. The person satisfied with job is an asset to the organization and the dissatisfied person is a liability. Thompson, (1995) referred job satisfaction as "a set of attitudes that employees have about their jobs and describe it as the psychological disposition of people towards their jobs, how they feel about the work." (Mundray, 1999) defines satisfaction as the difference between the amount of rewards workers receive and the amount they believe they should receive. When people speak of employee attitudes, more often than not they mean job satisfaction. Tosi et al (1998) define job satisfaction "as a function of the extent to which the task provides a person desired level of both intrinsic and extrinsic outcomes." Education is the largest enterprise. It employs about 60 percent of its product at various types of jobs.

Delimitation of the Study 1. The study is limited to full time faculty only of

Colegio de San Juan de Letran -Bataan. 2. The organizational climate dimensions are

limited to trust, training and development,

transformation and diversity, leadership, employees’ wellness, communication, performance management, remuneration and awards, teamwork, work environment and Colegio’s image.

Statistical Techniques The following statistical techniques are employed: 1. Descriptive statistics such as - mean median,

mode, standard deviation, are used to ascertain the nature of distribution of scores on the various dimensions of organizational climate and job satisfaction.

2. Product moment method of correlation is used for finding the relation between various dimensions of organizational climate and job satisfaction.

Sample Units & Sampling Techniques Since the study is delimited only to all full time faculty of the Colegio de San Juan de Letran-Bataan, there was no longer a need to come up with a sample of the said population. Thus, a universal sampling techniques was adopted. All forty two (42) full time faculty are respondents of the study. Description of Tool

The researcher utilized an appropriate standardized instruments which are already developed and widely used (Stone, 1978).

It has 54 questions in four point Likert scale as follows:

1) Strongly Disagree 2) Disagree 3) Agree 4) Strongly Agree

Such standardized instruments provided several

advantages. It has been carefully developed over a period of years to accurately measure specific attitudes and perceptions, so reliability and validity have already been proved.

The twelve dimensions of OCQD and serial numbers of items covered are given below in table 1

Table 1 OCQD Dimensions

Dimension Number

Dimension # of items

Covering the dimensions

1 Trust 5

2 Training and Development

5

3 Transformation and Diversity

4

4 Job Satisfaction 4 5 Leadership 8 6 Employees’ Wellness 5 7 Communication 5

8 Performance management

5

9 Remuneration and Rewards

2

10 Teamwork 5 11 Work environment 2 12 Colegio’s Image 4




Research Model The research model utilized in the study incorporated relevant constructs developed in prior studies was

proposed in this study. The comprehensive model is shown in Fig.1 .

Figure 1. Research Model

The model is composed of dimensions of

organizational climate. These

dimensions were expected to influence faculty’s’ job satisfaction.

Results and Discussion Table 2

Summary of Respondents’ Profile

Of the 42 questionnaires distributed, 42 were received, completed and usable. Out of 42 respondents, 20 respondents (47.62%) were from college department while 22 (52.38%) were from the basic education department.

Female respondents dominated the population (61.9%), and 38.1% were male

respondents. Most of the respondents were aged 24 years old (28.6%) while ages 27,31,33 and 35 years comprised the lowest number of percentage who got a total frequency of 1 (2.4%)

In terms of highest educational attainment, most of the respondents are college degree (95.2%) wherein most of them are currently pursuing their masters while 2 (4.8%) respondents are master’s degree holder wherein 1 of them is currently pursuing doctorate degree. Most of the study’s respondents are single (66.7%) while the remaining (33.3%) are married. In terms of length of stay in Letran, most of the respondents are still in their initial year (38.1%), while there are 10 respondents (23.8%) who have stayed in the Colegio for 3 years.

Department Frequency Percent

College 20 47.62

High School 22 52.38

Sex Frequency Percent

Male 16 38.1

Female 26 61.9

Age Frequency Percent

20 2 4.8

21 3 7.1

22 3 7.1

23 3 7.1

24 12 28.6

25 3 7.1

26 3 7.1

27 1 2.4

31 1 2.4

33 1 2.4

34 3 7.1

35 1 2.4

38 3 7.1

46 3 7.1

Educational Attainment Frequency Percent

College 40 95.2

Graduate Studies 2 4.8

Civil Status Frequency Percent

Single 28 66.7

Married 14 33.3

# of years in Letran Frequency Percent

1 16 38.1

2 6 14.3

3 10 23.8

4 6 14.3

5 4 9.5




Table 3 Summary Mean and Standard Deviation Distribution of Responses

on Dimensions of Organizational Climate

Range: 1.00 - 1.75 = Strongly Disagree

1.76 - 2.50 = Disagree 2.51 - 3.25 = Agree 3.26 - 4.00 = Strongly Agree

The above table presents the following

results: Trust got a mean score of 3.1286 and standard deviation of 0.16, training and development got 2.77 mean score and 0.32 standard deviation, while transformation and diversity and job satisfaction has a mean value of 2.90 and 2.93 and standard deviation score of 0.28 and 0.39 respectively. On the other hand, leadership has a mean score and standard deviation score of 2.97 and 0.38 correspondingly. In terms of employees’ wellness, it has mean value of 2.85 and standard deviation value of 0.39, whereas communication dimension of the organizational climate has 2.78 mean value and 0.48 standard deviation score.

Moreover, regarding the performance management of faculty, it got a mean score of 2.57 and standard deviation vale of 0.47, where, remuneration and rewards acquired 2.85 mean score and 0.50 standard deviation value. Regarding Colegio’s work environment, it has a mean score of 2.92 and standard deviation of 0.71 and for the Colegio’s image, it acquired a 2.99 mean score, the highest in value, and 0.45 standard deviation. All the acquired mean value has a descriptive remarks of “Agree” white connotes positive experience of the respondent as part of the Colegio’s organization.

Dimensions of Organizational Climate Mean Std. Deviation Descriptive Remarks

Trust 3.13 0.16 Agree

Training and Development 2.77 0.32 Agree

Transformation and Diversity 2.90 0.28 Agree

Job Satisfaction 2.93 0.39 Agree

Leadership 2.97 0.38 Agree

Employees’ Wellness 2.85 0.39 Agree

Communication 2.78 0.48 Agree

Performance management 2.57 0.47 Agree

Remuneration and Rewards 2.85 0.50 Agree

Teamwork 2.59 0.51 Agree

Work environment 2.92 0.71 Agree

Colegio’s Image 2.99 0.45 Agree




Table 4

Coefficient of Correlation between Various Dimensions of Organizational Climate with Job Satisfaction

Organizational Dimension Coefficient of Correlation

Sig. at 0.05 level (Phi and Cramers)

Decision (Null Hypothesis)

Trust -0.210 0.070 Accept

Training and Development 0.203 0.653 Accept

Transformation and Diversity 0.120 0.070 Accept

Leadership 0.171 0.048 Reject

Employee’s Wellness 0.417 0.001 Reject

Communication 0.342 0.000 Reject

Performance Management 0.244 0.142 Accept

Remuneration and Rewards 0.341 0.060 Accept

Teamwork 0.221 0.031 Reject

Work Environment 0.203 0.040 Reject

Colegio’s Image 0.006 0.012 Reject

Pearson product moment method of

correlation was used to find the relationship of various dimensions of organizational climate with job satisfaction. The values for various coefficients of correlation are given in Table.

The value of correlation between trust and job satisfaction was found to be 0.091, which is greater than the level of significance. Hence, the relationship there exists significant relationship between trust and job satisfaction stands accepted.

The value of correlation between training and development and job satisfaction was found to be 0.099, which is less than 0.05 level of significance. Hence, the relationship there exists no significant relationship between training and development and job satisfaction stands accepted.

The value of correlation between transformation and diversity and job satisfaction was found to be 0.225, which is greater than 0.05 level of significance. Hence, the relationship there exists significant relationship between transformation and diversity and job satisfaction stands accepted.

The value of correlation between leadership and job satisfaction was found to be 0.139, which is greater than 0.05 level of significance. Hence, the relationship there exists significant relationship between transformation and diversity and job satisfaction stands accepted.

The value of correlation between employee’s wellness and job satisfaction was found to be 0.003, which is less than the 0.05 level of significance. Hence, the relationship there exists no significant relationship between transformation and diversity and job satisfaction stands accepted.

The value of correlation between communication and job satisfaction was found to be

0.013, which is less than 0.05 level of significance. Hence, the relationship there exists no significant relationship between communication and job satisfaction stands accepted.

The value of correlation between performance management and job satisfaction was found to be 0.060, which is greater than 0.05 level of significance. Hence, the relationship there exists no significant relationship between performance management and job satisfaction stands accepted.

The value of correlation between remuneration and rewards and job satisfaction was found to be 0.014, which is less than 0.05 level of significance. Hence, the relationship there exists no significant relationship between remuneration and rewards and job satisfaction stands accepted.

The value of correlation between teamwork and job satisfaction was found to be 0.079, which is greater than 0.05 level of significance. Hence, the relationship there exists significant relationship between teamwork and job satisfaction stands accepted.

The value of correlation between work environment and job satisfaction was found to be 0.099, which is greater than 0.05 level of significance. Hence, the relationship there exists no significant relationship between teamwork and job satisfaction stands accepted.

The value of correlation between Colegio’s image and job satisfaction was found to be 0.484, which is greater than the table value of 0.195 at 0.05 level of significance. Hence, the relationship there exists significant relationship between Colegio’s image and job satisfaction stands accepted.




FINDINGS 1. There is significant relationship between

dimensions of transformation and diversity and Colegio’s image of organizational climate and job satisfaction.

2. There is no significant relationship between dimensions of trust, training and development, leadership, employee’s wellness, communication, performance management, remuneration and rewards, teamwork and work environment of organizational climate and job satisfaction.

Educational Implications The principal is the key person in any

school. He is not only responsible for his own behavior in as far as the aspects of organizational climate are concerned but he is more or less responsible for behavior of the teachers. In order to build up a sound organizational climate, administrators must understand teachers in the school. The importance must be given to what

motivates job performance in general and building an overall climate conducive to motivation of the teachers.

RECOMMENDATIONS On the basis of the above results, following recommendations may be given 1. The present study deals with college and high

school faculty of Colegio de San Juan de Letran. It may be replicated at any college or university

2. An investigation may be designed to compare the job satisfaction level of teachers working in public and private schools.

3. A comparative study of organizational climate of schools in rural and urban areas can also be studied.

4. Organizational climate and its relationship with academic achievement of students may also be an area of paramount importance for further research.

WORKS CITED 1. Chambers, H. (1978). Psychology of Human

Behavior. New Jersey: McGraw Hill Book

Company, Inc.

2. Croft, S. (1963). Organizational Climate

Descriptive Questionnaire. New York: New York

Publishing Inc.

3. Jackson, C. (1995). Human Organization. School

Management: How To, 32.

4. Liano, M. (2001). School Climate: Where to?

Educational Psychological Approach, 11.

5. Mundray, H. M. (1999). Organizational Behavior

and Work Assessment. Mississippi: Academia

Inc.

6. Stone, H. A. (1978). Validated Instruments.

Arizona.

7. Taneja, R. P. (1989). Dictionary of Education.

New Delhi: Annol Publishers.

8. Thompson, J. (1995). Organizational Climate

and Teacher Job's Satisfaction. AdMus Journal,

18-21.

9. Watkin, W. A. (2003). Organizational Climate in

Schools and Job Satisfaction of Teachers. International Education Kansas Education.





FOLK SPIRIT AND STYLE IN ARTISTIC CREATIVITY

Matyakubova Tozagul Rajapovna Associate professor on the science of Philology of the Tashkent State University of the

Uzbek language and literature named after Alishera Navoi


ABSTRACT The impact of the folk literature to the poetry of the Uzbek academician poet Gafur Gulam (1903 - 1966) has been learnt

by this article. Through the model of the analyses of poems by the poet the inheriting interrelations between folk and

written literature have been observed. The scientific-theoretical opinions on the specific depiction style of the folk melody

and spirit, which was closely got acquainted with national belief and life style, that is the peculiar depiction style

appropriately to the genre fairy tales and folk epics as proverbs, parable, blessings, scolding have been ahead for

formulation the individual style of Gafur Gulam.

KEY WORDS: Poetry, lyric feeling, sense, philosophical pithiness, folk melody, folk inspiration, folklore,

inheritance, figurativeness, simplicity, coherency, motive, fairy tale, oral epic, blessing, scolding, proverb, parable,

sayings, lyric character, outlook, style, folk phrase, ceremony, cross impact, individuality, authentic ideal, literary-

depictive means, stanza, idea, content.

INTRODUCTION

There is a specific place of the great poet Gafur Gulam in the history of the XXth century Uzbek literature. His lyric poetry, literarily mature stories and narratives which are full of with the sensitive observations, research articles and translations dedicated to the up to date issues of the literature are the profound literary works of the Uzbek literature. The literary heritage of Gafur Gulam is variegated according to the content and formation and poetry takes a leading place in his creative work. The lyrics of the poet distinguished by its high artistic value, full of sensitive feelings, deep expression of humanitarian ideas and philosophical richness of content.

For getting certain imagination about the poetic proficiency of the poet, at first one should learn the resources, which had been the important factor of the creative work of that professional artist. Analyzing and researching in this way help to define clearly how wide the level of knowledge and outlook, how deep the degree of the literary investigation and the sources of influence of this author. Because the poet by the innovative approach to the source of folks used creatively its philosophical content, tune, spirit, the world of characters, simple and flowing style, folk motives as such specific characters and signs of many genres. Through this the poet managed to be close to the reader’s soul according to the highest philosophical-aesthetic, literarily fineness, effectiveness, simple folk stylistic formation and content, tune and spirituality of his poetry. He

managed to create national and humanitarian essence by his lyric character’s outlook, specific thoughts as to eastern wisdom, action in a certain situation. In this article by revealing such kind of sides of the situation to be investigated the issues of the cross-impact between folk and written literature. So that, the sources of the poetic skill one of the owners of the rare talent of the XXth century Uzbek poetry Gafur Gulam has been defined and the secrets of his literary artistic skill has been discovered as much as possible.

MAIN TEXT As to the folklore of the world people being a

sample of the highest literary art-word the Uzbek folklore has been taken very important place for development of the national culture century by century. Lots of genre of the Uzbek folklore the human thoughts have been depicted simply, coherent and effective style. According to satisfaction the live-aesthetic needs of reader these artworks have been appreciated by our nation over the centuries. The Uzbek folklore takes very important place in the formulation system of the views about past, present and future, existence and non-existence, real and ideal life, human and society in the nation’s thought and soul as a part of the eastern folklore.

In the samples of the literary folk works of our nation the social-political, moral-educational ideas as benefaction, belief for the future, philanthropy, patriotism, courageous, justice, hatred to the enemy, fight against ignorance, freedom have been depicted






harmoniously to the nation’s thoughts. That’s why Uzbek folklore has strongly influenced on the formulation of the artistic talent of many authors. It has been served as the main source of providing individuality of their formal-stylistic poetic heritage.

It is known that every authors style is formed closely dealing with the environment which he brought up, social-genetic factors, specific thoughts regarding to national mentality and his perceiving mode of all human beings. Undoubtedly, one of the main factors which provided literary perfection of the most outstanding authors’ literary artworks of the world literature was their creative impression from the folklore. Such kind of statements can be clearly visible in the artworks by the professional authors as Nizomi, Djomi, Dehlavi, Navoi, Bobur, Ogohi, Muqumi, Furqat, W. Shakespeare, Servantes, J. Bokkachcho, I. V. Goethe, A.S.Pushkin, G.G.Marcus, G.P. Bulgakov, Ch.Aytmatov and others. The humanitarian feelings which is depicted in the poetic heritage of these great writers and poets came out of the world with direct connection of the national folklore. This has been caused to provide quick and easy snatch to the readers’ soul.

One can observe with the example of the creative development of the representatives of the XXth century Uzbek Literature as A. Qodiri, Cholpon, Hamza, Oybek, A. Qahhor, G. Gulam, H. Olimjon, Mirtemir, M. Shaykhzoda and others had an opportunity to use such kind of invaluable treasure. The impact of the folklore to the creative work of Gafur Gulam is vividly seen. If the specific tune of folk tales and anecdotes indicates the style of stories and narratives of the author, effective usage of folk proverbs and sayings strengthened the attractiveness of the literary language. Folk spirit and melody provides simplicity, flowing and tunefulness of the poems. As to the true statement of the academician S. Mamajonov, each writer’s approach to the folklore depends on their outlook, aesthetical ideal, personality and style. (Mamajonov S. (1974) The World of Poet. p.143)

In this sense, Gafur Gulam also approached to the folk traditions according to his own outlook, aesthetical ideal, personality and style. For depiction of the inner feelings of the lyric character he used specific lyricism regarding to the creativity of the people that is full of simplicity and ebullience.

The influence of folklore to the poetry of Gafur Gulam, firstly its folk inspiration and melody has been observed its closeness to the folk songs. The form and style of the poet poems dedicated to children as “Hayu chitti gul” (“hayu” means healthy yells which is used among young children while they are playing, enjoying something, “chitti gul” means “a small”, “a tiny” flower), “Oq terakmi, kuk terak” (word by word translation is White poplar or blue poplar. This is the national game of children which is called such.), “Bizning boqqa kelinglar” (means

“Come to our garden”), “Yangi yil qo’shig’i” (means “The New Year Song”) and others the impact of the children’s folklore has been clearly visible. His poem “Chitti gul” which was dedicated to his daughter

Toshxon can be an example for this: Toshkhon qiz o’zi-o’zi Boshida yo’rma do’zi Yo’rma do’zi yarashgan Oyisiga qarashgan Ha-yu chitti gul (Gafur Gulom (1984) 12 volumes. Volume 3) (Meaning of this poetry extract: A girl Toshkhon by herself Embroidery on her head Embroidery suited well Mother enjoys her help Ha-yu chitti gul)

This poem dedicated to children was written in

a simple style, its language is easy, eloquent and melodious. Here the spirit of intending the girls to be industrious, to study well and be a skillful sewer, feeling beauty and elegance is a priority task. One can meet the similar tunes like this poem in the Uzbek folk songs:

Qumrikhon o’zi-o’zi Ostida yo’rma do’zi Yo’rma do’zi yarashgan O’z yoridan adashgan (Uzbek folk songs (1972) (Meaning of the poem: Qumrikhon on her own Embroidery her below Embroidery well suited But her beloved missed)

Both given poetry example is a 7sylabble finger metre style of Uzbek poetry and close to each other according to the melody. But they are depicted the feelings and situation of a different aged girls. The poem of Gafur Gulam which is dedicated to the young girl Toshkhon after each canto the phrase “Hayu chitti gul” has come as a refrain. But the example which is taken from the creative work of people hinted at feeling of parting in the soul of Qumrikhon. That’s why the author by equally describing his spirit of regret for the improper acts of the girl who were very pretty and clothes well suited by herself, he stated that assuring mutuality inner and outer beauty is very important for people.

It is clear that Gafur Gulam knew the children’s folklore very well, his ability of knowing their spirituality deeply provided the perfection of the poem which had been chosen for analyzing.

In his poems which have been created in the folk melody the depiction Gafur Gulam’s lyric character inner feeling folk melody has taken an important place. We can observe the proofs of our thoughts with the example of the poem “Ona qizim Jamilaga” (To my darling daughter Jamila) by the poet:





Jazoir zindonida bir qiz uqubatdadir, Rubobning torlaridek joni jonimga payvand. Hasratingdan qon tomib, ko’zlarim kulfatdadir, Khalkhol taqqan oyoqlar bugun kishan bilan band. (Meaning of the extract: There was a girl suffered in the Algerian dungeon. My heart engrafted into hers as the strings of rubob, Dropping the blood from your sorrow, my eyes are in trouble, Today bangle worn feet are engaged with hobble.)

To create unrepeated expressions as “My heart

engrafted into hers as the strings of rubob”, “Dropping the blood from your sorrow” in the poem only the poetry talent is not enough. There is embodied a great humanity under the spiritual inspiration of the poet whose “heart engrafted” into the one who is suffering from captivity in the prison of Algeria in distant. Actually, the poet’s lyric “I” for creating such kind of expressions and assimilations the professional intelligence is not enough, but there is clearly seen a feeling of consentient ness, companionship for all human beings. At the same time the poem is exactly similar to folk spirit and it helps to describe the thoughts and feelings in fascinated, melodious and efficiently.

The specific traditional beginning elements of folk fairy tales can be met into the poetry of Gafur Gulam. Such kind of moments the poet started his poem directly this rhythmic style of folklore. For instance, the poem of the poet under the title “Ko’klam keldi, yoz keldi” (Word for word translation “Spring comes, summer comes”) started as following:

Bor ekanda, yo’q ekan, Och ekanda, to’q ekan, Bo’ri bakovul ekan, Tulki yasovul ekan, Qirg’ovul qizil ekan, Dumlari uzun ekan, Qarg’a qaqimchi ekan, Chumchuq chaqimchi ekan, Degan eski gap bilan, O’ngi qolib chap bilan, Sizni yupatish uchun, Yarmi yolg’on, yarmi chin She’rni tizib ketsam, Baliqday suzib ketsam. (Meaning of the extract: Once upon a century, It’s full or hungry, A wolf was a chef man, A fox was a watchman,) A pheasant was red-hot, Its tail was not short, A crow was a chatterer, A sparrow was a slenderer, With such an old talk,

Leaving right for left, For making you quiet, Half wrong and half right, A poem I’ll write, And swim a fish like. A literary critic B. Sarimsoqov while talking

about rhyme he stated that the beginning element of the folk tales is directly connected with rhythms. He noted that there had been met three types of beginning elements in folk tales according to its usage. The first one the beginning element without rhyme, the second one the beginning element with rhymes with short phrases, and the third one is the mostly usage of rhyme which is characterized with its specific order, simplicity of long rhymes (Sarimsoqov B. O’zbek adabiyotida saj (1983). (Rhymes in the Uzbek Literature). So that the above given poem closeness to the third type of the beginning element of rhymes of the folk tales can be observed. Because the long rhymed words as: century-hungry, chef man- watchman, red hot- not short, chatterer-slenderer, quiet-right, write-like which is used long in order. These lines of poetry are close to the beginning element of the folk tale under the title “Susambil” (Uzbek National Folk tales. 3 Volumes. V.1 (2007)). The usage of folk tale style provides to keep target thoughts and feelings in the mind of the reader perfectly and understand it easily and quickly.

The specific fairy-tail beginning elements of some poems of Gafur Gulam like “O’rdak va Turg’un” (“A duck and Turgun”) from the early lines it served for drawing the readers attention and aimed of leading them to the world of events:

Bir bor ekan, bir yovvoyi o’rdak bor ekan, Ko’m-ko’k quyuq o’rmonchada yakkayu yolg’iz. Shu yaqinda bir anhorcha, qirg’og’I ko’rkam O’rdak shunda cho’milarkan kechayu kunduz (Gafur Gulam. v.1. (1983) p.134) (Meaning of the extract: Once only a wild duck there had been, In a green, thick forest lived alone. Near there a nice water place seen The duck swam day and night in that stream.)

The poem was written for the young learners who studied at elementary classes. After introducing the children with the duck and its living place the poet moved to description of the main event. The fairy-tail style beginning of the poem helps to draw the young learners’ attention to the exemplary situation easily.

One can observe fairy-tail styled beginning elements most of the poems of the poet. The range of his poems as “Once there alive an old dear marshal. And there was only one his soldier called Toshmukhammad” (“Your donation”), “Once there was a head of one camel”, as it was said, the tramp heart existed in my soul, some years ago was beaten suffering from hopeless love…” (“Wedding”), “Once upon a time, there lived Mamaniyoz in the Chust





side” (“Ko’kan”) reminded us the style of folk tales. Using folk style in such poems together strengthening the humanism it gives an opportunity to express the thoughts clear and efficient. And also helps to reach of the poem to the soul of the reader easily and understandable.

In the poetry of Gafur Gulam the literary depiction which is specific for fairy tales and oral epic poems has been used with some changes. This style gave the poet a chance to reveal the content truly and express the idea brightly. In his poem “Mard yigitlar qanoti” (“The wing of young fellows”) he depicted the young Uzbek fellow’s courageous in the field of battle as following:

Sovuq o’tmas, suv ham o’tmas kiygan egnidan, Quyib qo’ygan sovut yanglig’ yo’lbars po’stini. Qomatiga olmos qilich juda yarashgan, Quloch yozib quchoqlaydi bizdek do’stini (Gafur Gulam. (1984) v.2. p.29) (Meaning of the extract: Cold and water doesn’t go through by his wearing, Coat fitted like a chain as a tiger fleece. Diamond sword matches great to his figuring, By hugging friend of ours in his embrace.)

The literary characters in the folk epic poems

as Alpomish, Rustam, Guro’g’li and others are the heroes who “weren’t burnt on the fire, weren’t sunk into the water, weren’t cut out with the sword”. The poet adapted such kind of peculiarities to the new situation and position – the period of World War II and he depicted the courageousness of the real heroes. Through the lines in the poem as “Yasha” – dedik ot egasi Rustam nishonga”, “Ustidagi Alpomishdan edi ko’rkamroq” (“Well done”- we said to horse owner a tracer Rustam”, He was more attractive than Alpomish) stressed that the nations courageous people are equal to the people’s ideal. Such kind of situation increased the effectiveness of the poem on the one hand, and on the other hand it gives romantic colour of the poem, the third it gives an opportunity of expressing the poetic thoughts by the created characters.

The specific exaggerated depiction styles of folk tales and oral epic poems as: “Yurganda yer titrar, o’kirsa osmon, Bu safda arslonlar keradi o’mrov” (v.2.p.19). (Meaning of the extract: “The earth will shook if he walks, the sky will shook if he roars, the lions spread their embrace in this row”) are widely used in the poem “Khalq otlandi” (“People is going”) by Gafur Gulam. The poet by expressing the stages of the Uzbek fellows’ action while going to the battle with high romantic inspiration he aimed to inspire them to be courageous. This depiction equally being harmonious to the mood of young fellows, it can make soothing the soul of their parents. So the specific depiction style of folk heroic epic poems can be made as an effective poetic tool.

As to the opinion of the outstanding researchers of the Uzbek folk eposes V.M.Jirmunskiy and H.T. Zaripov: “The majestic realism of the heroic eposes is depicted a real social reality individual heroic forms. The same time, the characters image and their courageous action is a bit higher than the beyond of the border of reality” (Jirmunskiy V.M.,

Zaripov H.T. Узбекский народный героический

эпос (1947)). It is defined that the more the heroes of the oral epic poems individualized, the depiction of the events connected with reality the deeper it is always adapted to the lyric-romantic emotion.

Having been a leading action as journalistic emotion, the feeling of appeal and call in the lyrics of that time is a specific features of the poetry of the Uzbek poets as Oybek, M. Shaykhzoda, H. Olimjon. So Gafur Gulam, standing in the leading place among his contemporary people used folk style and melody effectively. The poet made a contribution to be richening the XXth century Uzbek poetry with the formal-stylistic traditions of the national literature. Through this he managed to strengthen the spirit of national colour, expressing the ideas and feelings proficiently.

Proverbs are one of the widely used genres in the literary creativity of the Uzbek folklore. There the results of observations which have been done for a long century, the comments and reflections of our people about their life experience and events have been expressed in the simple and clear form (O’zbek folklori ocherklari. (Essays of the Uzbek folklore). 3 volumes. V.1 (1988). There is no any writer or poet who didn’t address to the proverb or didn’t use them creatively in the history of the world literature. Because the proverb besides giving poetic attraction and simplicity to the literary artwork, it also provides touching its influence to the soul of the reader simply and quickly.

The phrases which are consisted of set expressions help to define the creators’ literary style on increasing the efficiency and emotionality of speech, expressing specific features of the depicted events and actions by more exaggerating and generalizing, identifying moral-aesthetic objectives.

Having known well the stylistic role of the proverbs and sayings in the literary artistic speech Gafur Gulam addressed to them actively in his lyrics. For the purpose of expressing his thoughts clear, briefly and picturesque the poet mostly used folk proverbs, sayings and phrases in his poems. With the help of proverbs, sayings and phrases he created the state-view provided the national spirit of the expression. Folk proverbs and phrases have been used without any changes, or with some creative changes according to the ideal intention of the poet. Sometimes by creating new version of the proverbs and phrases Gafur Gulam depicted the specific style of thoughts and feelings. Our investigations showed that the most proverbs and sayings which have been used in the poetry of Gafur Gulam are specific to the





live language belonged to their creation period. It means that through these tools the poet achieved to make his artworks closer to the folk language.

In some poems of Gafur Gulam folk sayings have been used as a tool of expressing specific characters of national mentality brightly. For instance in his poem “May”: Paxtakor o’zbekning xolis niyati, Xalqim kiyinsin deb ayqirar, gurlar. Yil bo’yi shu umid ishtiyoqida Tinmaydi uyinga bug’doy to’lgurlar ( Meaning of the extract: Cotton-grower Uzbek’s true objective, Let my people be worn attractive. For this hope all the year round can’t sit my dears, That’s why let their house full of wheat grain.)

This poem is valid by the depiction of the

specific characters and features belonged to only our nation. Accordingly to the general spirit of his poem Gafur Gulam used the set expression “uyinga bug’doy to’lgur” (It means: Let your house full of wheat grain). This set expression expressed not only one person’s specific character, but it served to express literarily the moral-national characters of all our people as tolerance, industrious, hope to the future, clear intention and belief.

In his poem “Talon-taroj qilingan yerda” (Meaning of the title: “In the plundering place”) Gafur Gulam wrote about the villages and towns which turned into ruins. For the purpose of depicting the whole horror of the war in reality the poet appealed to the folk set expressions:

Dahshat qo’shinning oyoq ostida Yiringlar misoli yaralangan tan. Shaharlar xaroba, bir uyum tuproq, Qishloqlarning kuli ko’kka sovrulgan (Meaning of the extract: Horror is under the feet of troops Wounded bodies are seeping out. Ruined towns, a heap of soil, Villages’ ashes are scattered out)

The lyric character of the poem felt deep in his

heart the great tragedy of the war for the mankind. The depiction of the places abolished under the feet of enemies, wounded bodies, the ruined towns turned into a heap of soil, scattered out villages’ ashes have been enliven the terrific results of the war before the eyes of the reader. The poet used appropriate expressions for expressing specific thoughts of the lyric hero. He directed each word, each description to express the inner feelings and distress of lyric “I” and its hate to the enemy. Using the set expression “kuli ko’kka sovrulgan” (ashes scattered out) which is actively used in the spoken language of the Uzbek people managed to describe the view and situation lively and efficient.

Folk aphorisms have been used harmoniously for expressing the general idea in the poem “Sen salomat bo’lsang bas” (“If you’re safe, that’s enough”) by Gafur Gulam: O’n bola o’rni boshqa, qirqta bo’lsa qilig’i, Qalbim darichasidan mo’ralagan istiqbol. O’yin-kulgi aralash elvagay erka yig’i, Yerimizning ko’rki bu uydagi yetuk jamol. (Meaning of the extract: Children’s role and action is differ either they are ten or forty Glanced future upon my soul shutter. A spoilt draught weeping mixed with joy and play, It’s a perfect beauty both in the house and the place.)

The Uzbeks are one of the philoprogenitive

nations of the world. Such kind of ancient philoprogenitiveness also got its depiction in the samples of their creative artworks. The lyric hero above given poetic lines of Gafur Gulam relized the beauty of the world with unitly of peace and abundance in the family. The poet considered that the family peace and abundance would be the beginning of the happiness in the world. He felt himself happy and joyful at his home, around his children. He felt different love for each son and daughter in his heart. He thought of fulfilling his plans and achieving his dreams with the cooperation with them. That’s why he described their future as “Glanced future upon my soul shutter”. As a result the inner feelings of the lyric hero has been gone out of the level of personality and turned into national, humanitarian character. He expressed the mood of lyric hero by literarily using the folk proverb “If they are ten will differ from their role, if they are forty will differ from their action”. This proverb helped to reinforce the national spirit in the poem.

In the most poems Gafur Gulam used proverbs and sayings appropriately to the depicted situation and thoughts. Creating characteristic image and expression by means of them he managed to strongly impact to his readers’ soul and awareness. For example, “The beauty is for wedding, but the love is forever” (“Songs of New Year”), “Hasten girl never got sufficient marriage” (“At first study”), “Without sorrow is a stone, without love is a donkey”, “Weeper is an enemy of her own happiness” (“A Wife”), “The youth time is never returned” (“The fate of Uzbek”), “A man’s hand is magic” (“My house”), “Slumber doesn’t choose the place, love doesn’t choose the beauty” (“Gold Medal”), “The best horse runs last” (“The open letter from Bukhara to Andijan”), “A Mermaid doesn’t know what knows the old man” (“Our old men”) and other proverbs and sayings are proofed our thoughts.

The stages appealing to the beliefs connected with the nations’ life, living mode appeared in two versions in the results of poetry thoughts by Gafur Gulam:





1. Hinting at folk customs and traditions for the purpose of reinforcing national spirit.

It is known that one of the widely spread custom among the people is dream prediction. As to peoples’ belief the realizing the dream depends on how the person who heard first predicted it. That’s why people tried to tell their dream to the kind one and the person who predicted first tried to express it with kind words. Actually, dream prediction and interpretation it by symbols is an ancient tradition which has been widely spread among Turkic nations. For example, in the ancient “Irq bitigi” the things, items, actions, which happened in the dream has been predicted by symbols. Binoi who had written a book about dream prediction in his book “Tushlar ta’biri” (Dream Prediction) wrote: “Dream is a necessity of learning out the secrets and predicting it” (Binoi. Tushlar tabiri. (Dream prediction) (1987)

Such kind of stages can be met in the lyrics of Gafur Gulom. For instance, in his poem “Tush yo’yish” (“Dream prediction”) the dream of Shukrullo about the rainbow after the rain literarily predicted as following:

Tush ko’rib kelibsan, o’g’lim yo’yaymi, Yomg’ir barakatu qutu nishona. Kamalak ko’ribsan, buning ta’biri – Yetti rang quyoshu qutlug’ peshona. (Meaning of the extract: You dreamt my son, shall I predict, The rain is a symbol of an abundant. You dreamt rainbow, its prediction – Seven coloured Sun and lucky fortune.) His hope to the future the poet expressed by means of dream prediction efficiently. According to this the rain predicted as – abundant, richness, and the rainbow is a symbol of future bright days. So with the help of symbolic essence of the things in the dream Gafur Gulam literarily interpreted the idea of trusting bright future.

2. Creative usage of national-convicted views for depiction of lyric heroes attitude to life, people and the society.

The professional terminology concerning to the life of people, professions and jobs served for accomplishing a literary task can be observed in the creative work of Gafur Gulam. The terms on embroidering as “o’girma”, “chekma”, “sanama”, “yo’rma”, the colours which are giving brightness to the silk skullcap used in his poem “Tagdo’zi” gave an unusual attraction to the artwork:

Qizilu gulnori kam, Tikishi silliq emas, O’girmasa chekmaga, Sanamasa yo’rmag, Kundosh bo’lib turganday (Meaning of the extract: Red and rosy is not enough,

Stitching is rough, Turnings into chekma, Counting into yurma Standing as a rival.)

In this poem Gafur Gulom described not only the process related to embroidering flowery silk skullcap, but he showed the defects which happened while decorating the tagduzi. This depiction dedicated reality of the poem and strengthened the national coloration.

There are a range of poetry lines which are depicted sitting around the dinner table together with his family, giving presents to children during holidays and hayits, grandmothers attention to the behavior of the youth, preparing jam from mulberry when it ripen, appreciation of bread especially its crumbs, calendar folklore, prediction by looking at the lines of the palm, the belief of fate and other views which one can meet in the lyric heritage of Gafur Gulam. For example, “While we have palov in the evenings, someone is missing” (“Sog’inish”- “Miss someone”), “Children are ringed their pennies of hayit” (“Chin arafa” - “True Eve”), “She is happy as young during the Eve day” (“Xotin” – “A wife”), “Lifted my palate poor my granny” (”Ona” - “Mother”), “Smells of mulberry jam, boiled in the pot, make us happy and spirit healthy” (“Kuz keldi” – “Autumn comes”), “Proofing the traditions of the ancestors” (“Yetti yuz kun” – “Seven hundred days”) and other lines have been fed by national spirit and traditions, life and living mode. In these places the poet used creatively national-convicted views for depicting the attitude of his lyric hero to the life, people and society.

Eulogies used among the everyday life of people as “ Boshing toshdan bo’lsin” – “Let your head be like a stone”, “Alhazar, yaramas ko’zdan alhazar” – “ Let the God protect you from an evil eye”, “O’tganlar ruhi yor bo’lsin” – “May the spirit of the path people with you”, “Boshinga saodat gullari to’lsin” – “May the happiness flowers fall over your head” have been the basics for writing the poetic couplets of the poet. Essentially eulogies are praising, according to that by asking for help from the God and supportive spirits the ancient belief as striving to save people from danger has been embodied. Using such kind of mythological views Gafur Gulam achieved to provide sincerity of expressions and enriching his poetic heritage taking into consideration of the wide ancient thoughts.

As to the proofs of the folklorist scholars, eulogies and nuisances is a genre which belonged to the genres directly connected with the life of people concerning to the genetics (Imomov K., Mirzaev T. (1990) O’zbek xalq og’zaki ijodi. (Artworks of Uzbek national folklore). The Uzbek folklorist scholar B. Sarimsoqov included nuisances the literary type of genre which is called “Special type”. He stated the specific features of nuisances as its connection with ceremonies according to genetic side, having covered a life mode, doing an important daily-





aesthetic duty, belonging to the mythological imaginations (Sarimsoqov B. (1988) Olqish va qarg’ishlar (Neologies and nuisances)//Essays of Uzbek folklore. Volume 1.).

In some poems which are created during the years of World War II G. Gulam artistically used nuisances for the purpose of increasing the scope of hates to evil enemy. For example, in his poem “Sen yetim emassan” – “You are not orphanage” he wrote as following:

Sut ko’r qilgur haromi, Gitler oqpadar – Farzandning qadrini Qayerdan bilsin?

(Meaning of the extract:

Let the milk make blind, Hitler forbidden-

How does he know? The value of having a child.)

Basing on the nuisance “Sut ko’r qilgur” – “Let the milk make blind” which is widely spread among the people the poet by referring to the sacredness of mother milk expressed his hate to the enemy and his perfect hope of fascism devastation. In his poems the enemy has been whipped by the insulting words as vile, cunning, damned, devil, unfit. For example, the poet used the nuisance appropriately in the places as “Vile, cunning, unfit Hitler …”, “Damned enemy let feel spicy”, “Death-hour was a wine-server for the enemy, the wine - perish”, “Don’t be tolerant for the disgrace, shake hey Earth, Swallow this damned troop into your soul”, “This war which was the self-interest of the devil, certainly would not succeed some days later”. The nuisance helped to express the hate and anger of Gafur Gulam (wide meaning peace loving nation) against the enemy.

CONCLUSION It is clear that Gafur Gulam used folklore professionally in his poetry. Using folk spirit and style the poet increased his poems efficiency. And appealing to the specific styles of folk tales and oral epic poems gave him an opportunity to provide melodiousness and simplicity of thoughts and poetic perfect ness of him. Using folk proverbs and parables effectively provided to express the thoughts clear, briefly and characterized.

Poetic thought mode of Gafur Gulam has been formed in the spirit of national belief and dignity and it was strengthened basing on different theories and ideas. Therefore, the life experience which he realized and tasted in practice powered the belief of knowledge and thoughts. Actually, the belief as a permanent element of the outlook of the people defined the content of their life position and living mode.

Generally, the intellectual level of poet, his attitude to the dignity and changing them according to the given chance of the century and the level of

implementation to the artworks have been depicted in the poetry of Gafur Gulam.

REFERENCES 1. Binoi. Tushlar ta’biri – Dream Prediction. -Т.: 1987.

2. Gafur Gulam. Mukammal asarlar to’plami –Volume of

perfect artworks. 12 Volume ness. V.1. – T.: Fan, 1983






perfect artworks. 12 Volume ness. V.11. – T.: Fan,

1989

6. Jirmunskiy V.M., Zaripov X.T. Узбекский народный

героический эпос. – Uzbek folk heroic eposes. М.:

ГИХЛ, 1947.

7. Imomov K., Mirzaev Т. O’zbek xalq og’zaki ijodi –

Uzbek folk creativity. -Т.:Uqituvchi, 1990

8. Karimov N. Gafur Gulam. - Т. : Publishing House

named after Gafur Gulam – Matbaa ijodiy uyi, 2003.

9. Mamajonov C. Shoir dunyosi – The world of poet-Т.:

1974.

10. Matyakubova T. The Artwork of Gafur Gulam. – Т.:

Science and technology, 2006

11. Nazarov B. The world of Gafur Gulam. – Т.: Fan,

2004.

12. Oq olma, qizil olma. O’zbek xalq qo’shiqlari – White

apple, Red apple. Uzbek folk songs -Т.: Literature and

Art, 1972.

13. Sarimsoqov B. O’zbek adabiyotida saj – The Rhyme in

the Uzbek Literature. -Т.: Fan, 1978.

14. O’zbek folklori ocherklari – Essays of Uzbek folklore.

3 volume ness. V.1. – Т.: Fan, 1988

15. O’zbek xalq ertaklari – Uzbek folk tales. 3 volume

ness. V.1. – Т.: O’qituvchi, 2007.





POETIC THOUGHT AND EXPRESSION POSSIBILITIES

IN UZBEK NOVELS

Islamjon Axmedjanovich Yakubov Associate Professor on the Science of Philology of the Tashkent State

Pedagogical University named after Nizomi


ABSTRACT In this article poetic innovations on the novel writing during the years of national independence have been presented by

dividing into periodicals of the development period of Uzbek novel writing. Objective and subjective basics of the development

of genre, social-genetic roots and literary-aesthetic sources have been defined. Quality-structural changes occurred in the

character of the Uzbek novel writing, the ways of conveying the essence of human has been investigated. The impact of the

different aesthetic point of views which were collided with the outlook of the Uzbek novelists and the form and content of

genre facing with the process of transformation on national bases and its influence to the expression mode have been learnt.

KEY WORDS: literary progression, realistic novel, jadid movement, form, style (method), poetic intelligence, symbol,

polyphony, intellect, poetic innovation, pluralistic thought, existentialism, diffusion of genres, architectonics, neonovel,

experiment, psychoanalyze.

INTRODUCTION For thousands years, especially Uzbek literature which has been developing in the scope of Eastern literature, culture from the end of the XIXth century and from the beginning of the XXth century started to grasp the new spiritual world – experience of the European literature. The realistic novel writing genre which had over a century history in the Uzbek Literature can be divided into the following three huge periods in conditionally: 1. Novel writing in the period of Jadid movement; 2. Novel writing in the period of Soviet time; 3. Novel writing in the period of Independence. The new poetic changes which had been occurred in the nature of Uzbek novel writing in the period of Independence to be stated in this article by us.

MAIN TEXT At the 70th of the previous century uzbek novel

writing which was observed connecting with the names as A. Mukhtor, O. Yoqubov, P.Qodirov, U. Usmonov, S. Ahmad, Sh. Kholmirzaev, U. Hoshimov, refreshed “explosion period” literery-cultural climate was raised up new phase in the second half of the 80th. By standing at the stage of the native land, in the development of the novel genre glancing at the public humanitarian border had been widen ding and its quality had been increased. That was happened relating with the authors’ return to the national source and changing the mode of description of human into specific spiritual stratum. One can say that the novel “Lolazor” (“Tulip field”) (1988) by Murod Muhammad Dust was the first artwork which caused to begin this process. Because

taking into consideration the literary heroes’ specific individual characters and expressing them as a person of thoughts have been raised just after this novel appeared. The economic-moral, political-ideological recession of the stagnation period has been revealed by the language of gestures.

The life, thoughts of Nazar Yakhshibaev in the novel “Lolazor” and his self checking as a person of conscience and honesty made the reader both to sympathize with him and feel sorry for him. The soul distress of the hero who was accounting for his joy and sorrow while being in the hospital has been investigated either a warm kindness or anger, sometimes with a sensitive criticism, gesturing and irony in the polyphonic melodiousness. This was a psychological investigation of the problems of a native person and time, the other word it was a new approach to the interaction of human and authenticity. So the national novel has been richen with the new specifics of genre basing on many factors as real life, the thought manner of creator, the reader’s moral-spiritual needs, self progressive development, the scope and level of mastering and effecting. Actually, having started to get acquainted with the profound literary works belonged to many literary schools and methodological trends in the world literature, the Uzbek readers have not been satisfying with one styled novels created on the method of socio-realism. The changes and enlargement of the reader imagination appealed to the writers to decline ready stereotypes. As a result according to their philosophic-ideological contents the artworks belonged to diverse trends have been appeared.






For instance the number of novels depicted Islamic, religious-clergy interpretation have been raised. One of these artworks is the novel dilogy “Navoi and an artist Abulhayr” (2006) by O. Muktor. In this novel the author found the character of soul by seeking the logics of life inside the poetic world created by Alisher Navoi. The persons’ broken heart, complicated mood and incurable malady have been realized by tightly connecting with the beliefs of the faithfulness holy men. That’s why Navoi appeared before the eyes of reader with his beautiful thoughts and nice wishes, sweet memories and guiltiness regret. That is showed that O. Mukhtor didn’t realize Navoi as a “prudent” person in the centre of cultural-educational and social-political activities of the previous period of our novel writing, but there were changes for the better on investigating and analyzing the great humanist in prose. The artwork gives an opportunity to realize Navoi much better, to feel him according to his thought style, moral patience and his way of beliefs. Because in such kind of artworks the person has not been intensely binded with social-historical condition, state, policy and leading ideology. But it is expressed from the point of thought style, its natural and genetic roots, divine essence, merits-demerits. This situation is not a result of absolute chance. Except, modern Uzbek literature, especially prose has been striven for examining the spiritual periphery of the human, investigating unremarkable sense in his mentality. And the process of realizing Navoi is going on parallel with this. Generally this novel-dilogy is not only high and more perfect stylistic success of the writer, but it is peculiar literary experience in the world of investigations on learning Navoi, as such it is also an important innovation in the development of the Uzbek literature. The characters some of our novels became a tragic characters who controlled by themselves and criticized their past life. For example, in the novel “Adolat manzili” (Justice Haven) (Odil Yoqubov. (1994) Tanlangan asarlar (Selected artworks). Four volumed. Volume I.). the writer sharply declined the efforts of former Soviet government by a wise and strong old man, dedicated his life and fate for his beliefs who made a conclusion about the attitude of the society to the fate of human. Through divulging bad ways and tricks of political-legal forces that were in the mood of colonization their real figures were vividly depicted. The veteran who dedicated his half century life to the activities of the Soviet government while meeting with the dishonest, harmful, sinful, unfair and fraudulent officials feeling himself weak and said with regret: “No, there is not existed the Soviet government any more!... It is foolish my half century life dedicated to this government!” Here the views of the veteran about the honesty, fair, beliefs, human fate sharply differed from the characters of the writer in his previous novels as Normurod domla, Shorahim shovvoz and others. The epoch which realized that the Soviet system had no future, the founded theory was collapsed,

the first it was a reawaken of the national thoughts, the second it was the depiction of the nonsense life of people who dedicated his life and wisdom to the strives of that society and recognizing the spiritual needs of the reader. That’s why drew a special attention to the nonsense of the followed theories, environment where the characters lived, dedicated life to it in the novels like “Olabuji” (“Bogyman”), “Dinosaur” by Sh. Kholmirzaev, “Ming bir qiyofa” (“One thousand figures”) by O. Mukhtor, “Otamdan qolgan dalalar” (“The fields inherited from my father”), “Bu dunyoda o’lib bo’lmaydi” (“It’s impossible to die in this world”) by T. Murod. National novel is not only being richen basing on inner development by the experience gained along the years, but it is being enriched through integration the specific features of the most literary genre into its nature. For instance, various genres as an anecdote, a story, a legend, a myth, a fairytale, an ancient sayings, a letter, moral-didactic and love-romantic, religious, autobiographic oral epic artworks, scientific research work, historical chronologies, journalistic, philosophical passages have been artistically covered - classified basing on the specific literary-aesthetic aims. The novel was subordinated to the ideological-literary and philosophical conception. For example, in the architecture and the style of depiction in the novel “Ikki eshik orasi” (Utkir Hoshimov (1989) Ikki eshik orasi (Between two doors). (“Between two doors”) by U. Hoshimov one can observe the transformation of development tendencies which were started from the novel “Chinor” (“Plane tree”) (Asqad Muktor.(1969) Chinor (Plane tree). Novel) by A. Mukhtor and raised up the new stages in the second half of the 80th, especially story mode and style renewing. So observing the novel by the embrace of the above mentioned process gives an opportunity to discover its essence more deep. In the novel one can notice the influence of stories and myth taken place in “Shohnoma” by Firdavsi and folk tales “Hudoynamak”. And also literary traditions extra story compositional range in the love-adventure oral epic “Sabbai Sayyor” by Alisher Navoi, “Hasht bihisht” by Khisrav Dehlaviy, “Haft paykar” by Nizomi connecting with the using of self story to be assimilated. The conflicts which happened in the spirit of the characters in those artworks, the new approaches to the style of expression are used creatively. It is indicated that the eastern spirit has been clearly demonstrated in the novel and it is a national-aesthetic phenomena of the artwork.

In the novel “Ming bir qiyofa” (“Thousands of figures”) (Omon Mukhtor. (2000) To’rt tomon qibla (Four sides are qibla). Trilogy) by O. Mukhtor relating with Nasriddin who decided to go to Kultepa and his donkey was given the story “The childhood of Afandi”. In the novel “Egilgan bosh” (“Leaning head”) (Omon Mukhtor (2000) Xotin podshoh (The Wife Queen). Novels) was used the fairytale “Mullaning boshi bormidi?” (“Has the mulla a head?”), and the saying about the traveler in the sea. In the “Ko’zgu oldidagi





odam” (“The men in front of the mirror”) the events relating with the magic mirror, in “Aflotun” (Omon Mukhtor. (1998) Aflotun. Novel) used the motive- episode about the mysterious well. In the “Tepalikdagi xaroba” (“The Ruin over the hill”) we met the strange adventures related with the memory and dream flights. In the novel “Ffu” there is a depiction of the episodes a sudden disappearance of a beautiful palace and the “sorcery” of Haydar Makhsum. In the novel “Ayollar mamlakati va saltanati” (“The Land and Reign of Women”) (Omon Mukhtor (2000) The Land and Reign of Women. Novels.) we are witnessed to the impact of the folktale “Bir yolg’onda qirq yolg’on” (“Forty lie under the one lie”), and the anecdotes concerning to beliefs of Afandi and the melody belonged to fairytale. The novel “Ffu” is a style of legend and there is depicted the fight between the sympathy and evil. In “The Land and Reign of the Women” true story was a priority level. In “Aflotun” the degradation of the human thoughts and the process of its reborn had been expressed by giving new form to the plot of fairytale. In the “Thousands of figure” reset the life and love history of Lutfi. In “The Ruin over the Hill” depicted the characters of Akbar, Amur Temur, Bobur, Mirza G’olib, Byron and Mashrab. We met with Nodirabegim in the artwork “The Land and Reign of the Women”, the characters as Bahovuddin Naqshband, Fayzulla Khuja, Abdurauf Fitrat, Ismoil Somoni in the novel “Aflotun”. In “Odamlar kulishlari kerak” (“People should laugh”) (Omon Mukhtor (2008) People should laugh) the historic image of Sher Muhammad Bek was depicted. The writer by setting such kind of characters basing on perfect family tree and he got creative support and proof which belonged to them.

It is clear that the novels of O.Mukhtor are the results of deep understanding the content value of classical literature and integration of thoughts, dream, memory with the reality, effective usage of the folk samples, legends and fairytale models, combining with the eastern national spirit and philosophy. So it is impossible to describe their form, structure of the plot and the style of expression without such kind of national roots. Basically, most of the heroes of the author have the specific sacred features and they are the PERFECT PEOPLE who thought about the aim and sense of living, the problems of people and their inner world. Uzbek novels from the point of view with its aspects (local colour, national spirit, complicated spiritual imagination style which belongs only to our Uzbeks and the reflection of either its sides or describing the person as a complex system, language, architectonics, basing on the ideas and thoughts and etc) and also with their whole content are the real national phenomena. Actually, different aesthetic point of views by meeting with the outlook of the writer first and then get transformation on the national basics. As we mentioned above mixing up the legends, stories, oral epics, sample of poems, fantasy land and reality and other sides

became perfect on the eastern basics as the collapsing of the heroes, strengthening the ironical content and so on. So contemporary our novel writing is not separated from the valuable sources belonged to the Eastern thoughts, folklore and ancient Uzbek prose and also jaded literature which was the progressive pages of our literature. At present time the human and his life, the depiction and investigation made connections the content of the national novels with the fate of human, nation, society and history. And it is provided the development of the artworks in the type of novel-tetra logy as “Ulug’ saltanat” (“The Great Sultanate”) (Muhammad Ali. (2003) Ulug’ saltanat (The Great Sultanate). First book. Jahongir Mirzo) by Muhammad Ali. Such kind of specific quality-structural changes regarding to the diffusion of genre renewed the form of genre and increased the opportunity of literary depiction. The characters of the novel also sharply changed as a historical-cultural type. The scope of conflicts belonged to the outer reality moved into the inner soul of person. And now the fate of the hero are not defined not only by the reality, but the free plot, the trend of “consciousness and thoughts” is also provided the specific characters concerning to the human. It is impossible to impact the form and content, the style of expression through such kind of situation. Because the novel is the genre interpreted the world according to the desire of the author – “subjective epopee” (Goethe I.V. (1980) Selected artworks. Ten volumed. V. 10). There is not reflected only reality, but also reflected the feelings. The epic distance is not always kept in the novel. It has a wide opportunity for completely changing the modern coordination of the genre (Bakhtin M.M. (1986) Epos and novel// Literary-critical article). There is no single poetic rule (Kojinov V. (1964) Novel – epos of the new time.// Theory of the Literature). So the novel is a real literary event which is formulated and increased in reality. The novel is a genre indicated the leading literary form and level of perfect ness of each national literature. In the world novel writing the types of genre and possibilities of the novel has been completely changed in the 70th of the previous century, as to our literature this process have taken place during the years of national independence, its content has become more thick and started to appear the compact novels according to the structure and analytical novels according to the content. That was happened because of the assimilating the specific features of experimental researches relating with the genre novel conducted by N. Carrot, A. Rob- Grey, M. Butter, K. Simon and their followers F. Solvers, G. Richard and others in the 50th – 70th of the XXth century. Besides the desire for drawing more attention to the person than giving odd descriptions of novelists increased the demands for the compact novels. It is known that traditional novel generally the epos has described the conception of a person by





keeping him in the centre of the artwork and interpreted it literarily. “New novel” based on the life experience of the author, the most personal-subjective free thoughts-ideas passed from his mind and soul prism. The composition and content of the artwork differed with its specific features as it should be freed from limits and always not made complete solution. For example, in the artwork of A. Rob-Grey the outer world items depicted with objectively and marked. The novels of N. Sarrot depicted the dialogic elements of the mysterious thoughts which have been occurred inner side of mind. The polyphonic novels of M. Butter the thoughts which seemed dispersed outwardly combined with a single version based on the rules of mosaic. Such kind of views caused to change our traditional point of views about the novel and made a certain reforms. As a result the tastes of the readers also adapted to the “new novels” with the world novel writing experience synthesized national-cultural basics and literary editing regarding to the symbol- images. Because in the content of such kind of novels laid the fate of nation, Motherland and people, the intellectual level of our contemporary person who sought the logics in the life of human. In the complicated world the role of human being has been recognized in different level. We hope that it will serve for sharpening to realize the essence of himself as a created human in the same line of future plans and high civilization achievements. A fifty two paged novel “Boqiy darbadar” (“Eternity Indigent”) (Isajon Sultonov (2010) Boqiy darbadar (Eternity Indigent). Novel,) written by the writer Isajon Sulton depicted the character of the person as the symbol of who stood against the highest decision of the God and always around his own fate. In this artwork was appreciated not only the honesty and helplessness of the people, but also glorified the power, punishment, curse or mercy of the Creator, in the wide meaning his grand occasion which is higher than the eternity to be respected. In this novel synthesized the life giving principles observed in the creative work of the novel writers as Ch. Aytmatov, O. Muktor, A. Dilmurodov, Kh. Dusrmuhammad, U. Hamdam in the specific style. Isajon Sultonov addressed not only to the sayings of “Koran Kareem”, but he addressed to the problems of folklore and ethnography, astrology and history, geneticist engineering – new modeling of the hereditary program of molecular genetics, the theory and practice of cloning of gene, the right of death (euthanasia) of the human beings. He used the achievements of sciences and technology fruitfully in the field of novel writing. From the end of the previous century the attempts of the authors for ridding of vary ideological chains increased the needs to the psychoanalysis. Uzbek novelists tried to explain social relations and the essence of social structure basing on psychic factors. In such novels the social behavior has been interpreted connecting with the genetic factors specifically appropriate only the human psychogenic. Direct interrelations of people were analyzed. In the novel writing began to draw a great attention to the logical

symbols. Under this view there is an idea that the objective world and nature belonged to empriocriticism existed depending on the mind “I”. Using this methodological principles of sociology based on the following view - the human and nature could not been separated, they closely interconnected with each other, but the natural laws have been created basing on the spiritual needs of people. The second, the theory of psychoanalytic association of Z. Frade, the teachings “Humanism psychoanalysis” of E. Froum to be assimilated. As a result their wide usage the artworks as “Adolat manzili” (Justice Haven) by O. Yoqubov, “Bozor” (Market) (Khurshid Dustmuhammad (2010) Bozor. Novel) by Kh. Dustmuhammad, “To’rt tomon qibla” by O. Mukhtor, “Kapalaklar o’yini” (The dance of Butterflies) (Tuxtamurod Rustam (2000) Kapalaklar o’yini. Novel) by T. Rustam appeared in the Uzbek novel writing. In these novels the attempts for analyzing the personality of the hero, his innate feelings, thinking mode, honestly self-observation and formulating various ideas, genetic relations with the ancestors began to be observed. Generally, psychoanalysis which is being acquired on national-cultural basics in the sphere of novel have given an opportunity for effective using of symbolic tools, interpretation of the social process by interrelations, ethics-modesty, aesthetics, human philosophy, international cooperation, wide and deep analysis of special problems related with the inner feelings, making the literary language diverse. Observation the existing literary process defined that the national novel writing is not developing only in the traditional realistic sphere. Hopely can say that even in this field there is happened digression of old thoughts. As to us the main cause for this is not to be limited on analyzing the human only by socially, investigating things and events only reasonable connections – the principles of historical-psychological determinism. The volume size of the novels by Muhammad Ali is just like as the volume size epopee. The problems having public importance have been perceived with the example of Amur Temur and Temurieds period phase by the literary range, basing on the complex plot. Appropriately to this the events have taken place in the hearth and time. The importance is that in the tetra logy the reality depicted in the realistically and lyric-romantic style with the help of the events which have been observed by the author, understanding basing on his ideal and creatively rewritten. In the novels of Omon Mukhtor the association that has been gone in the thoughts and soul of our contemporary fellow who are striving to realize the problems between the human and universe has been revealed through the retrospective plot. For example, in the novel “Navoi and artist Abulkhair” (Omon Mukhtor (2003) Navoiy va rassom Abulxayir. (Navoi and artist Abulkhair). Novels) to be observed the principles of literary understanding the way of saving the unity soul and body while facing with the bitter world verity,





getting the power from the feeling of patience and thanks, the way of defending himself by comparing history and time. Such kind of situation we can meet in the novel “Bu dunyoda o’lub bo’lmaydi” (It’s impossible to die in this world) (Togay Murod (2001)Bu dunyoda o’lib bo’lmaydi. (It’s impossible to die in this world). Novels) T. Murod. As to the novels of Asad Dilmurod either historical or mystic-romantic, sometimes the spirit of sharp psychology achieved domination. The author in the novel “Fano dashtidagi qush” (“A Bird in the sky plain”) (Asad Dilmurod (2002) Fano dashtidagi qush. (A Bird in the sky plain). Novel) in the sphere of realistic novel boldly using the style of mythic romantics, but in his next artworks he avoided the way of making “an experiment”. He began to strive investigating the hollows in the social-cultural life surrounded us clearly and embodying his own ideas through the long history and the trustful real people. Historical-literary materials became a tool of proofing himself for the nation, finding the way to the soul of people from the reality, expressing aesthetic ideas which caused to intend them to be honest and courageous. That’s why A. Dilmurod mostly strived to the aesthetic essence rather than details. The story “Yolg’izlik” (“Loneliness”) (Ulug'bek Hamdam (1998) Yolg'izlik (Loneliness). Narratives and stories) of U. Hamdam despite being a mega artwork that can be a guide for all his works, he followed integrating the principles of realistic depiction in “Muvozanat” (“Balance”) (Ulug'bek Hamdam (2007) Muvozanat (Balance). Novel), symbolic-allegorical in the “Isyon va itoat” (“Revolt and Obedience”) (Ulug'bek Hamdam (2003) Isyon va itoat (Revolt and Obedience). Novel), lyric-romantic and symbolic-allegorical in “Sabo va Samandar” (“Sabo and Samandar”) (Ulug'bek Hamdam (2007) Sabo and Samandar. Novel ). The writer in the field of novel analyzed the basics of the conflicts between the national estimation and outlook. In fact, today the most novelists through writing sincerely as much as it possible try at first to give spiritual power the pureness in their soul, at second to strengthen the readers belief and make changes in their soul. Realizing themselves, perfect ness of belief, the feeling of responsibility not only conscience and soul, but in front of the Creator has been found its meaning and depiction.

CONCLUSION Uzbek novels created in the last years besides the attitude and point of view of the writer several characters rather unrepeatable outlook interrelated with the human adornment and environment in essence found its self expression. Through this complicated, stratum conflict able specific dramatics between the characters of the person, people and universe, people and historical environment, people and time have been reflected. Harmonies of the genre with the life of people, his economical, social and global joy and

sorrow which are occurring in his moral-spiritual world provided them to be rich in ideas and thoughts. Observing the novels as “Otamdan qolgan dalalar” (“The fields inherited from my father”), “Bu dunyoda o’lib bo’lmaydi” (“It’s impossible to die in this world”) “Olabuji” (“Bogyman”), “Dinosaur”, “Jimjitlik” (“Silence”), “Oqqushlar oppoq qushlar”, “White Birds” showed that today’s Uzbek novelists literarily understand the choke of initiative and creation in the character of the nation caused to appearing negative factors as his adaptation to the unfair an inability ness in his outlook, accepting social disgrace as a usual situation. Actually, depicting objective figure of the disgraced people and striving to express main roots of the tragedy is the clear note of national novel writing which is reawaken in the years of Independence. So the main feature of the modern Uzbek novel writing is that the human became a target issue for them. It is true that the changing the nations style on realizing the world the results of thoughts in the novels played a significant role.

REFERENCES 1. Asqad Muktor. Chinor (Plane tree). Novel. -

Tashkent: Uzbliterary publishing. 1969

2. Bakhtin M.M. Epos and novel// Literary-critical

article. - M., 1986

3. Goethe I.V. Selected artworks. A ten volumed. V. 10.

M. 1980.

4. Isajon Sultonov. Boqiy darbadar (Eternity Indigent).

Novel // Sharq Yulduzi, 2010, № 6.

5. Kojinov V. Novel – epos of the new time// Theory of

the Literature. – M. 1964

6. Murod Muhammad Do’st. Galatepa qissalari. –

Tashkent: Yosh gvardiya, 1985.

7. Muhammad Ali. Ulug’ saltanat (The Great

Sultanate). First book. Jahongir Mirzo. – Tashkent:

“Sharq” Head Editing House, 2003; Second book.

Umarshakh Mirzo. – Tashkent: “Sharq” Head

Editing House, 2006; Third book. Mironshoh Mirzo.

– Tashkent: “Sharq” Head Editing House, 2010;

(Up today three books of novel-tetra logy have been

published. I.Ya)

8. Odil Yoqubov. Tanlangan asarlar (Selected

artworks). Four volumed. Volume I. – Tashkent:

“Sharq” Head Editing House, 2005. p. 5- 178

9. Omon Mukhtor. To’rt tomon qibla (Four sides are

qibla). Trilogy. – Tashkent: “Sharq” Head Editing

House, 2000 – p. 9-162.

10. Omon Mukhtor People should laugh. – Tashkent:

Ma’naviyat, 2008.

11. Omon Mukhtor. Navoiy va rassom Abulxayir.

(Navoi and artist Abulkhair). Novels. – Tashkent:

“Sharq” Head Editing House, 2006

12. Khurshid Dustmuhammad. Bozor., Novel. –

Tashkent: “Sharq” Head Editing House, 2000.

13. Tog'ay Murod. Otamdan qolgan dalalar. Novel. –


14. Togay Murod. Bu dunyoda o’lib bo’lmaydi. (It’s

impossible to die in this world). Novels. – Tashkent:

“Sharq” Head Editing House, 2001





15. Tuxtamurod Rustam. Kapalaklar o’yini. Novel. –


16. Asad Dilmurod. Fano dashtidagi qush. (A Bird in

the sky plain). Novel. – Tashkent: – Tashkent:

“Sharq” Head Editing House, 2002.

17. Ulug'bek Hamdam. Yolg'izlik (Loneliness).

Narratives and stories. – Tashkent: Qatortol-

Kamolot, 1998.

18. Ulug'bek Hamdam. Muvozanat (Balance). Novel. –


19. Ulug'bek Hamdam. Isyon va itoat (Revolt and

Obedience). Novel. – Tashkent: Yangi asr avlodi,

2003.

20. Ulug'bek Hamdam. Sabo and Samandar. Novel. –

Tashkent: Muharrir, 2009

21. Utkir Hoshimov. Ikki eshik orasi (Between two

doors). Novel. – Tashkent: Literature and Art

Publishing House named after Gafur Gulam, 1989

22. Shukur Kholmirzaev. Olabo’ji. Novel //Sharq

yulduzi, 1992. № 1-4.

23. Shukur Kholmirzaev. Dinazavr. Novel // Yoshlik,

1996. № 2-4





FIRM CHARACTERISTICS AND SOCIAL DISCLOSURE: THE CASE OF SOUTH EAST ASIAN COUNTRIES

Erna Setiany Universitas Mercu Buana,

Jakarta,

Indonesia

ABSTRACT

This study aims to determine the effect of leverage, profitability and firmsize on social disclosure in Indonesian, Malaysian

and Singapore companies in 2017. This study uses Sustainability Reporting and Annual Reporting as data with company

samples of 93 samples (27 Indonesian companies, 17 Malaysian companies and 49 companies Singapore). The selection of

research samples using the purposive sampling method. Annual Reporting used was obtained from the Indonesia Stock

Exchange (IDX), Malaysia Exchange and Singapore Exchange (SGX). Data processing is performed by using multiple linear

regression techniques and has met the classical assumption test requirements. The results of this study indicate that the

leverage and firm size variables do not affect Social Disclosure in Indonesian, Malaysian and Singapore companies in 2017.

While profitability negatively affects Social Disclosure in Indonesian, Malaysian and Singapore companies in 2017. This

shows that the level of disclosure social companies in all three countries are more influenced by profitability.

KEYWORDS: Social Disclosure, leverage, profitability, firm size.

1. INTRODUCTION

The corporate social responsibility regulations are already listed in Law Number 40 of 2007 concerning Limited Liability Companies (PT). According to Article 74 paragraph 1 of Law No. 40/2007 states that every company that carries on business activities in the fields related to natural resources must carry out social and environmental responsibilities. If not implemented, the company will be subject to sanctions in accordance with applicable regulations. But in Indonesia only a few companies have Sustainability Reporting. Even social disclosure in Indonesia is still said to be relatively low. Compared to overseas companies, almost all overseas companies have Sustainability Reporting. Because they are very concerned about Social Disclosure.

Whereas companies that have paid attention to social aspects and disclose these aspects are expected to reduce existing social problems (Supriyono et al., 2015; Suhardjanto et al. 2018). But in reality, according to the CEO Director, Center for Scholar's Development of Singapore Management University (SMU), there are still many companies in ASEAN countries that do not have regulations in implementing sustainable business, especially in implementing Corporate Social Responsibility. The company only understands the contribution, especially in ASEAN countries which are

still implementing CSR against the background of profit.

And according to research conducted by the ASEAN CSR Network (ACN) and the Center of Governance, Institutions and Organizations (CGIO) at the NUS Business School, overall almost 50% of 100 companies in 4 ASEAN countries namely Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore and Thailand. Has stated commitment to implement sustainable business in its regular reports. But when viewed from the quality of the disclosure of the report, companies in the four countries have not reached half.

Whereas the practice of Corporate Social Responsibility has values that promote and protect human rights. Because the practice of Corporate Social Responsibility concerns corporate responsibility in terms of social aspects. In addition, investors and consumers also began to press companies to implement business and code of conduct that guarantees the company's human rights protection. Therefore, to maintain market competitiveness, companies in ASEAN countries should implement sustainable business practices, especially paying attention to social issues such as human rights (cnnindonesia.com, 2016).

Various studies related to corporate social disclosure show the diversity of results based on the





characteristics disclosed. The first factor examined in this study is Leverage. Leverage is a comparison between total debt and total equity. Previous research conducted by (Masyitah, 2016) using agency theory, as well as the standard of measurement made by GRI. The results of this study indicate that the liver has a significant influence on Social Disclosure. Meanwhile, according to research (Sriayu and Mimba, 2013) using stakeholder theory and legitimacy theory. Show that leverage has no significant effect on Social Disclosure.

The second factor examined in this study is profitability. According to Kasmir (2010 profitability is a ratio to assess the company's performance in generating profits (profit). Previous research conducted by (Masyitah, 2016) using agency theory, as well as disclosure standards made by GRI, shows that profitability has a significant effect on Social Disclosure. Meanwhile, according to other studies using GRI, it shows that profitability has no positive and significant effect on Social Disclosure (Saputra, 2016).

The third factor examined in this study is Firm Size. Firm size is the size of the company as seen from the total value of the company's assets (Delena, 2016). Previous research conducted by (Sriayu and Mimba, 2013) using stakeholder theory and legitimacy theory. Shows that firm size has a positive and significant effect on Social Disclosure. According to other studies using GRI, it shows that firm size has a negative and significant effect on Social Disclosure (Saputra, 2016).

Based on the differences in various previous studies and backgrounds, thus encouraging the authors to reexamine three countries namely Indonesia, Malaysia and Singapore from the phenomenon. Because the two countries have a geographical closeness and are still within the scope of ASEAN countries.

2. STAKEHOLDER THEORY Stakeholder theory is used to explain how to

maintain stakeholder relationships between the company and all company stakeholders (Hadiwijaya, 2013). Based on the theory of stakeholder management the company can be expected to carry out activities that are considered very important by stakeholders. According to Freeman (1984) this theory explains that a stakeholder is a group or individual that can influence or be influenced by the process of achieving the goals of an organization.

This theory also states that organizations will choose voluntarily in disclosing information about an environmental, social and intellectual performance, exceeding and above their mandatory requests to meet the true expectations of stakeholders. One form of

voluntary disclosure that is developing at this time is corporate social responsibility or social disclosure. This theory also underpins companies to carry out corporate social responsibility and disclosure in annual and separate reports (Widayuni, 2014).

Through the publication of corporate social responsibility, the company can provide more complete and sufficient information relating to the activities and their influence on the social aspects of the community and the environment. By doing corporate social responsibility it is expected that stakeholder desires can be fulfilled so that it will produce a harmonious relationship between the company and its stakeholders.

The main purpose of stakeholder theory is to assist corporate managers in understanding stakeholder environments and to make more effective management between the existence of relationships within the company (Ulum, 2016: 35). However, the broader goal of stakeholder theory is to help corporate managers increase the value of the impact of their activities while minimizing losses for stakeholders. In fact, the whole point of this theory lies in what will happen when the company and its stakeholders run a relationship (Nurhayati, 2017).

In relation to social disclosure that is all additional information about social disclosures that have been carried out by the company which will also be influential in decision making. Social disclosure is one of the company's strategies to satisfy the wishes of stakeholders because by doing social disclosure means the company is concerned about social issues so that later stakeholders will provide full support for all company activities that can ultimately increase company performance and can generate higher profits. Social Disclosure

According to Hackston and Milne (1996), corporate social responsibility is often referred to as corporate social responsibility or social disclosure, corporate social reporting, social reporting is a process of communicating the social and environmental impacts of an organization's economic activities to specific groups of interest and to society as a whole .

Meanwhile according to ISO 26000: Guadiance Standard on Social Responsibility, CSR is an organization's responsibility for the impact of its activities on society and the environment through transparent behavior.

Based on ISO 26000: Guadiance Standard on Social Responsibility, the application of social responsibility covers 7 main issues, namely: 1. Organizational Governance 2. Consumer Issues





3. Fair Operating Practices 4. Environment 5. Employment Practices 6. Human rights 7. Community Engagement and Development

Company Characteristics

With the characteristics of the company, the company can explain a wide variation of voluntary disclosure in annual reports. Because company characteristics are predictors of disclosure quality. And each company has different characteristics from one entity to another. Leverage

Leverage is total liabilities to total shareholder equity. The ratio is used to provide an overview of the capital structure owned by the company. In addition, leverage is also a tool to measure how much a company depends on creditors in financing the company's assets.

In accordance with stakeholder theory, the company will be more motivated in expressing wider social disclosure if it has high leverage aimed at meeting the information needs of creditors (Hidayat, 2007 in Sriayu and Mimba, 2013). Creditors need a company's corporate social responsibility as information to properly evaluate risk (Marie et al., 2016 in Sriayu and Mimba, 2013). These results support his research Saputra (2016) and Masyitah (2016) show that leverage has a significant effect on CSR disclosure. Then the hypothesis of this study is:

H_1: Leverage affects Social Disclosure.

Profitability Profitability is one part of finance that affects the

characteristics of a company. Profitability shows the level of net profit that can be achieved by the company when running its operations. The shareholders always want the profit from the investment they invest in the company. The greater the profits obtained, the greater the company's ability to pay dividends, so that more investors invest in these companies.

In theory, stakeholders encourage companies to provide information to external parties regarding company finances. With high profitability the company can stimulate investors to invest their capital in the company by making a request to buy shares of the company. That is because profitability is the company's ability to fulfill its obligations to stakeholders.

These results support his research Amalia (2013), Masyitah (2016), and Swandari and Sadikin (2016) show that profitability influences CSR. While Gantyowati and Agustine (2017) have a significant

positive effect on CSR. Then the hypothesis of this study is:

H_2: Firm profitability affects Social Disclosure Firm Size

In general, large-sized companies will disclose more information than small-sized companies (Hackston and Milne, 1996 in Delena 2017). Large companies are entities that are widely seen by the capital market and the public in general, by disclosing more information the company can realize public accountability.

Large companies also have large human resources and with these resources’ companies need and are able to finance the provision of information for internal and external needs of the company. Large companies are the indicators most widely seen by the public so that greater disclosure is a reduction of political costs as a form of corporate social responsibility (Sembiring.2006 in Delena, 2017). Conversely, for small-sized companies that have limited human resources, they may not have ready-to-serve information, such as large-sized companies, so that there is a large amount of money required to make a more complete disclosure.

These results support his research in Sriayu and Mimba (2013), Amalia (2013), Masyitah (2016), Generous and Deitiana (2014), Wagiu and Mekel (2014), Istianingsih (2015), Gantyowati and Agustine (2017), and Riantani and Nurzamzam (2015) shows that firm size influences CSR disclosure. Then the hypothesis of this study is:

H_3: Firm size influences Social Disclosure. Country

Variable control is a variable that controls the relationship between the dependent variable and the independent variable. In this study the control variable used is the state. The indicator used is the number 1 if the company is an Indonesian company and the number 0 if the company is a company other than Indonesia.

3. RESEARCH METHOD This study was conducted on non-financial

companies listed on the Indonesia Stock Exchange, Malaysia Exchange and Singapore Exchange in the period 2017. The population in this study were all non-financial companies listed on the Stock Exchanges of each Country. In this study, sample selection uses a purposive sampling method with sampling criteria.

The sample criteria in this study consisted of: 1. Companies listed on the Stock Exchange engaged in non-financial fields.





2. Companies that issue sustainability reporting separately as well as in annual reporting during 2017. 3. Companies that disclose sustainability reporting using GRI Standards during 2017. 4. Companies that have a positive ROA.

4. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Description of the research sample

This study uses a sample of all companies other than financial companies listed on the stock exchanges

of each country, namely the Indonesia Stock Exchange, the Malaysia Stock Exchange and the Singapore Stock Exchange during 2017. After sampling based on the criteria specified in the previous chapter, the sample results obtained used 93 samples consisting of 27 Indonesian companies, 17 Malaysian companies and 49 Singapore companies. The breakdown of the number of sample companies that become research samples is as follows:

Table 1 Sample perusahaan

No Keterangan Number of companies

Indonesia Malaysia Singapura 1 Listed in stock exchange 645 887 816 2 Financial companies (93) (36) (66) 3 Does not disclose social disclosure or

sustainability reporting in 2017 annual report (504) (634) (530)

4 Non GRI Standard disclosure (17) (198) (158) 5 Non positive povitability (4) (2) (13) Sample fit to criteria 27 17 49

From the results of research on the results of the

percentage of Social Disclosure in 2017 for Indonesian companies, Malaysian companies and Singapore companies with a sample of 93 companies. Shows the largest average percentage of the three countries namely Singapore by obtaining a percentage of more than 50%, then followed by Indonesia by obtaining a percentage of nearly 30% and the lowest percentage of the three countries is Malaysia, which is still below 20%.

Descriptive statistics are used to provide an overview of the maximum, minimum, mean and average standard deviation of a data. The variables used in this study are leverage, profitability and size as independent, and social disclosure as the dependent variable. Following are the results of descriptive testing of Indonesian companies presented in the following table:

Tabel 1. Descriptive Statistic Indonesia


Social Disclosure 27 .088 .705 .32959 .185080 DER 27 .175 5.423 1.40237 1.169650 ROA 27 .002 .370 .07311 .073951 SIZE 27 15.848 29.586 23.03200 2.759847


In the table above you can see the number of

samples, minimum, maximum, mean and standard deviation of each variable. Column N shows the large number of data examined (samples), as many as 27 Indonesian company data. The minimum column shows the smallest data on each variable in this study. While the maxsimum column shows the largest data on each variable in this study. The mean column shows the average data for each of the variables of this study. Next there is a standard deviation column

that shows the size to determine the spread of data from the average value used in the study.

Social disclosure variable which is the dependent variable in this study. Indonesian company social disclosure variable has a minimum value of 0.088 which is the value of social disclosure from PT. Sinar Mas Agro Resources and Technology Tbk. While the maximum value of social disclosure is 0.705 which is the value of social disclosure from PT. Indah Kiat Pulp & Paper Tbk. The average value of





the social disclosure variable is 0.32959 with a standard deviation value of 0.185080. And the number of samples used is the same, namely 27 samples of Indonesian companies.

The first independent variable in this study is the leverage variable, with a sample (N) of 27 samples of Indonesian companies, having a minimum value of 0.175 which is the value of leveragePT. Indocement Tunggal Prakarsa Tbk. While the maximum value of the variable leverage is 5.423 from PT. ABM Investama Tbk. The average value of this variable is 1.40237 with a standard deviation of 1.169650.

The second independent variable is profitability, with the same sample (N) that is as many as 27 samples of Indonesian companies, has a minimum value of 0.002 which is the profitability value of PT. Indo-Rama Synthetics Tbk. While the maximum value of the profitability variable is 0.370 from PT. Unilever Indonesia Tbk. Furthermore, there

is an average value of the profitability variable of 0.07311 with a standard deviation of 0.073951.

Then the third independent variable is size, with sample (N) as many as 27 samples of Indonesian companies, which have a minimum value of 15,848 owned by PT. Indah Kiat Pulp & Paper Tbk. While the maximum value of 29,586 is owned by PT. Wijaya Karya Beton Tbk. The average value of the variable size is 23.032200 with a standard deviation of 2.75947.

Furthermore, the results of the descriptive analysis of Malaysian companies are presented in the following table:

Tabel 2. Descriptive Statistic Malaysia

The social disclosure variable of Malaysian

companies has a minimum value of 0.088 which is the value of social disclosure from Sarawak Oil Palm Berhad. While the maximum value of social disclosure is 0.764 which is the value of social disclosure from United Plantations BHD. The average value of the social disclosure variable is 0.31788 with a standard deviation value of 0.173972. And the number of samples used is the same, namely 17 Malaysian company samples.

The first independent variable in this study is the leverage variable, with a sample (N) of 17 Malaysian company samples, having a minimum value of 0.001 which is the leverage value of Hap Seng Plantation Holdings Berhad. While the maximum value of the leverage variable is 3.324 from Hicom BHD DRB. The average value of this variable is 0.68959 with a standard deviation of 0.878413.

The second independent variable is profitability, with the same sample (N) of 17 Malaysian company samples, having a minimum value of 0.008 which is the Salcon Berhad profitability value. While the maximum value of the profitability variable is 0.285 from Bursa Malaysia Berhad. Furthermore, there is an average value of the profitability variable of 0.08435 with a standard deviation of 0.079474.

Then the third independent variable is size, with sample (N) as many as 17 samples of Malaysian companies, which have a minimum value of 9,124 which is owned by IOI Corporation Berhad. While the maximum value of 21,551 is owned by MRCB-Quill Reit. The average value of the variable size is 13,90088 with a standard deviation of 3.132775.

Furthermore, the results of the descriptive analysis of Singaporean companies are presented in the following table:


Social Disclosure 17 .088 .764 .31788 .173972 DER 17 .001 3.324 .68959 .878413 ROA 17 .008 .285 .08435 .079474 SIZE 17 9.124 21.551 13.90088 3.132775






Tabel 3. Descriptive Statistic Singapore

The Singapore corporate social disclosure

variable has a minimum value of 0.029 which is the social disclosure value of Hutchison Port Management Gold Pte. Limited While the maximum value of social disclosure is 0.647 which is the value of social disclosure from Infraestructura Energetica Nova. The average value of the social disclosure variable is 0.22264 with a standard deviation value of 0.160081. And the number of samples used is the same, namely 49 Singaporean company samples.

The first independent variable in this study is the leverage variable, with a sample (N) of 49 samples of Singaporean companies, having a minimum value of 0.001 which is the leverage value of Thakral Corporation Ltd. While the maximum value of the variable leverage is 3,448 from Panda Green Energy Group Limited. The average value of this variable is 0.42320 with a standard deviation of 0.636343.

The second independent variable is profitability, with the same sample (N) of 49 Singapore corporate samples, having a minimum value of 0.002 which is the profitability value of Regal International Group Ltd. While the maximum value of the profitability variable is 0.940 from Delong Holdings Limited. Furthermore,

there is an average value of the profitability variable of 0.15357 with a standard deviation of 0.179826.

Then the third independent variable is size, with sample (N) as many as 49 samples of Indonesian companies, which have a minimum value of 16,077 owned by Katrina Group Ltd. While the maximum value of 26,888 is owned by Samko Timber Limited. The average value of the variable size is 19.58063 with a standard deviation of 2.456721.

Based on the test results above, the adjusted R aquare value obtained is 0.124. This shows that the magnitude of the percentage variation in the value of 12.4% of the company's social disclosure variables in Indonesia and Singapore can be explained by the variable leverage, profitability, and size. While the remaining 87.6% can be explained by other factors outside the model.

Based on the results of SPSS data processing in the table above, it shows the calculated F value of 5.129 with probability 0.003. Because the probability is much smaller than 0.05, the regression model can be used to predict social disclosure or it can be said that leverage, profitability, size and country together influence the social disclosure.

Tabel 7. Results

Descriptive Statistics


Social Disclosure 49 .029 .647 .22264 .160081 DER 49 .001 3.448 .42320 .636343 ROA 49 .002 .940 .15357 .179826 SIZE 49 16.077 26.888 19.58063 2.456721




t Sig.

B Std. Error Beta

1

(Constant) -.798 .380 -2.100 .039

DER .023 .080 .031 .287 .775

ROA -1.318 .484 -.272 -2.721 .008

SIZE -.037 .020 -.213 -1.813 .073

COUNT .440 .194 .286 2.272 .026





Based on Table 7, the results of the T test can be explained as follows:

a). Leverage shows a p-value of 0.775 (> 0.05). This means that the leverage has no effect on the social disclosure of Indonesian companies, Malaysian companies and Singapore companies.

b). The Effect of Profitability on Social Disclosure shows a p-value of 0.008 (<0.05). This means that profitability affects social disclosure for Indonesian companies, Malaysian companies and Singapore companies.

c). The effect of firm size on Social Disclosure shows a p-value of 0.073 (> 0.05). This means that profitability affects social disclosure for Indonesian companies, Malaysian companies and Singapore companies.

By looking at table 7 above, we get the

following linear regression equation: Y = -0,798 + 0,023DER – 1,318ROA –

0,037SIZE +0,440COUNT+ E From the regression equation can be seen and

interpreted as follows: a. A constant value of -0.798 can be interpreted

if the leverage, profitability and firm size are zero then the value of social disclosure will decrease by -0.798.

b. The leverage value is 0.023, it is assumed that the independent variable has a fixed value and the leverage has increased by 1 unit, then social disclosure will increase by 0.023.

c. Profitability value is -1.318, it is assumed that the independent variable has a fixed value and profitability has increased by 1 unit, then social disclosure will increase by 1.318.

d. Firm size value is -0.037, it is assumed that the independent variable has a fixed value and firm size has increased by 1 unit, then social disclosure will increase by 0.037.

e. The count value is 0.440, it is assumed that the independent variable has a fixed value and the count has increased by 1 unit, then social disclosure will increase by 0.440.

DISCUSSION Effect of Leverage on Social Disclosure

The first hypothesis testing Ha1 in this study is leverage measured using a debt equity ratio (DER) with a Sig of 0.775 more than 0.05. So it can be concluded that leverage has no effect on social disclosure. Because now many companies are aware of the importance of social disclosure and it is the company's obligation to disclose social disclosure. These results are in line with

previous research conducted by Sriayu and Mimba (2013), Dermawan and Deitiana (2014) and Riantani and Nurzamzam (2015) who found that the level of corporate leverage does not affect social disclosure. Effect of Profitability on Social Disclosure

Testing the second hypothesis of Ha2 in this study is profitability. The results showed that the significance value of 0.008 was smaller than 0.05, but the results of the value of B on unstandardized coefficients were negative, so it can be concluded that profitability had a significant negative effect on social disclosure. Because when a company has a high level of profit, the company considers it unnecessary to report things that interfere with information about the company's financial success. Conversely, when the level of profit is low, they expect stakeholders to read "good news" on company performance, for example in the social sphere (Kusumawardani and Sudana, 2017). Previous research on the effect of Profitability on Social Disclosure was conducted by Sembiring (2003) and Sembiring (2005) which results in profitability which has a negative effect on CSR disclosure.

Effect of Firm Size on Social Disclosure

Testing the third hypothesis of Ha3 in this study is firm size. The results showed that the significance value of 0.073 was greater than 0.05 so it could be concluded that firm size had no effect on social disclosure. Because large companies did not always pay attention to social disclosure. This research is in line with research conducted by Swandari and saidikin (2016).

CONCLUSION Based on the results of data analysis and

discussion of the analysis of the effect of company characteristics on social disclosure in Indonesian, Malaysian and Singaporean companies, both partially and simultaneously. This research was conducted on all companies engaged in the non-financial sector which were listed on the Indonesia Stock Exchange, Malaysia Stock Exchange and Singapore Exchange in 2017.

Based on the results of the classic assumption test that has been carried out on the regression model used in this study, the variables used in this study were declared eligible to be used. The regression model in this study has fulfilled the assumption of normality, there is no multicollinearity and heteroscedasticity does not occur.

While from the results of multiple regression analysis it can be concluded that:





a) The results of the study indicate that the liver has no effect on social disclosure. Because now many companies are aware of the importance of social disclosure and it is the company's obligation to disclose social disclosure that has been regulated in PT Law number 40 of 2007.

b) The results show that profitability has a significant negative effect on social disclosure. Because when a company has a high level of profit, the company considers it unnecessary to report things that interfere with information about the company's financial success.

c) The results of the study indicate that firm size does not significantly influence social disclosure. Due to that large companies do not always pay attention to social disclosure.

SUGGESTION Based on the above conclusions, the suggestion

that can be given to companies is to be more proactive, consistent and transparent in disclosing Social Disclosure so companies in south east asia (i.e. Indonesia, Malaysia, and Singapore) able t take optimum advantage of such transparency, such as higher firm value or, lower cost of equity capital.

REFERENCES 1. Amalia. (2013). Pengaruh karakteristik perusahaan

terhadap Corporate Social Responsibility

Disclosure di Bursa Efek Indonesia. Diambil dari

Media Riset Akuntansi Volume 3 No 1.

2. CNN Indonesia. CSR Perusahaan di ASEAN Belum

Memperhatikan HAM.

https://m.cnnindonesia.com/nasional/201607231230

01-20-146532/csr-perusahaan-di-asean-belum-

memperhatikan-ham diakses pada tanggal 23

September 2018.

3. Dermawan, Deitiana. (2014). Faktor-faktor yang

mempengaruhi pengungkapan Corporate Social

Responsibility. Diambil dari Jurnal Bisnis dan

Akuntansi Volume 16 No 2.

4. Freedman, M. and Jaggi. M. (1988). An Analysis of

The Association Between Pollution Disclosure and

Economic Performance, Accounting, Auditing

&Accountability Journal, Vol. 1 No. 2, pp. 43-58.

5. Gantyowati, Agustine. (2017). Firm’s

Characteristics and CSR Disclosure, Indonesia and

Malaysia Cases. Diambil dari Review of Integrative

Business and Economics Research Volume 6 Issue

3.

6. Ghozali. (2013). Aplikasi Analisis Multivariate

dengan Program IBM SPSS 21. Badan Penerbit

Universitas Diponegoro.

7. Global Reporting Initiative. GRI Standards

Download Centre.

https://www.globalreporting.org/standard/gri-

standards-download-centre/ diakses pada tanggal

25 September 2018.

8. Hendriksen. (1991) Accounting Theory Edition 5.

Professional M-H.

9. IDN Financial.

https://www.idnfinancials.com/company/ diakses

pada tanggal 24 September 2018.

10. Ikatan Akuntansi Indonesia. PSAK 1 Penyajian

Laporan Keuangan.

https://iaiglobal.or.id/v03/standar-akuntansi-

keuangan/pernyataan-sak-7-psak-1-penyajian-

laporan-keuangan diakses pada tanggal 24

September 2018

11. Indonesian Stock Exchange. Laporan Keuangan

dan Tahunan.

http://www.idx.co.id/idid/beranda/perusahaantercat

at/laporankeuangandantahunan.aspx/ diakses pada

tanggal 26 September 2018.

12. Istianingsih. (2015). Impact of Firm Characteristics

on CSR Disclosure: Evidence from Indonesia Stock

Exchange. Diambil dari IJABER Volume 13 No 16.

13. ISO Center Indonesia. ISO 26000 sebagai Standar

Global dalam Pelaksanaan CSR.

http://isoindonesiacenter.com/sekilas-tentang-iso-

26000/ diakses pada tanggal 27 September 2018.

14. Kuncoro. (2013). Metode Riset untuk Bisnis &

Ekonomi Edisi 4. Erlangga.

15. Masyitah. (2016). Faktor-faktor yang

mempengaruhi pengungkapan sosial (Social

Disclosure) dalam laporan keuangan tahunan

perusahaan manufaktur yang terdaftar di Bursa

Efek Indonesia. Diambil dari Jurnal Al-Qasd

Volume 1 No 1.

16. NUS Business School. Centre for Governance,

Institutions and Organisations.

https://bschool.nus.edu.sg/cgio/our-

research/sustainability-reporting diakses pada

tanggal 23 September 2018

17. Otoritas Jasa Keuangan. Undang-Undang No. 40

Tahun 2007 Tentang Perseroan Terbatas.

https://www.ojk.go.id/sustainable-

finance/id/peraturan/undang-

undang/pages/Undang-Undang-No.-40-tahun-2007-

tentang-Perseroan-Terbatas.aspx diakses pada

tanggal 23 September 2018

18. Priyastama. (2017). Buku Sakti Kuasai SPSS.

Bantul : Start Up.

19. Riantani, Nurzamzam. (2015). Analysis of Company

Size, Financial Leverage, and Profitability and Its

Effect to CSR Disclosure. Diambil dari Jurnal

Dinamika Manajemen Volume 6 No 2.

20. Saputra. (2016). Pengaruh Leverage, Profitabilitas

dan Size terhadap pengungkapan Corporate Social

Responsibility pada perusahaan di Bursa Efek


https://m.cnnindonesia.com/nasional/20160723123001-20-146532/csr-perusahaan-di-asean-belum-memperhatikan-ham



https://www.globalreporting.org/standard/gri-standards-download-centre/

https://www.globalreporting.org/standard/gri-standards-download-centre/

https://www.idnfinancials.com/company/

https://iaiglobal.or.id/v03/standar-akuntansi-keuangan/pernyataan-sak-7-psak-1-penyajian-laporan-keuangan



http://www.idx.co.id/idid/beranda/perusahaantercatat/laporankeuangandantahunan.aspx/


http://isoindonesiacenter.com/sekilas-tentang-iso-26000/

http://isoindonesiacenter.com/sekilas-tentang-iso-26000/

https://bschool.nus.edu.sg/cgio/our-research/sustainability-reporting

https://bschool.nus.edu.sg/cgio/our-research/sustainability-reporting

https://www.ojk.go.id/sustainable-finance/id/peraturan/undang-undang/pages/Undang-Undang-No.-40-tahun-2007-tentang-Perseroan-Terbatas.aspx







Indonesi. Diambil dari Journal of Economic and

Economic Education Volume 5 No 1.

21. Sembiring, E.R. (2003). Kinerja Keuangan,

Political Visibility, Ketergantungan Pada Hutang

dan Pengungkapan Tanggung Jawab Sosial

Perusahaan. Simposium Nasional Akuntansi 6,

Universitas Airlangga, Surabaya.

22. Sembiring. (2005). Karakteristik Perusahaan dan

Pengungkapan Tanggung Jawab Sosial: Study

Empiris pada Perushaan yang Tercatat di Bursa

Efek Jakarta. Simposium Nasional Akuntansi 8,

Universitas Negeri Selas Maret, Solo.

23. Setyawanti, Suhardjanto, Triatmoko. (2013).

Praktik Social Disclosure (Kajian Komperatif

Indonesia- Malaysia). Diambil dari Simposium

Nasional Akuntansi XVI.

24. Sekaran. (2006). Research Methods For Business

(Metode Penelitian untuk Bisnis). Edisi empat buku

1. Salemba Empat.

25. Singapore Exchange. Annual / Financial Report.

http://www.sgx.com/wps/portal/sgxweb/home/comp

any_disclosure/annual_financial diakses pada


26. Sriayu, Mimba. (2013). Pengaruh karakteristik

perusahaan terhadap Corporate Social

Responsibility Disclosure. Diambil dari E-Jurnal

Akuntansi Universitas Udayana Volume 5 No 2.

27. Sugiyono. (2009). Metode Penelitian Bisnis.

Bandung: CV Alfabeta.

28. Suhardjanto, D., Purwanto, P., Sari, K., & Setiany,

E. (2018). Corporate governance and social

disclosure: a comparative study of listed hospitality

industries in South East Asia. International Journal

of Trade and Global Markets, 11(1-2), 21-30.

29. Supriyono, E., Almasyhari, A. K., Suhardjanto, D.,

& Rahmawati, S. (2015). The impact of corporate

governance on corporate social disclosure:

comparative study in South East Asia. International

Journal of Monetary Economics and Finance, 8(2),

143-161.

30. Suwardjono. (2010). Teori Akuntansi. Yogyakarta :

IKAPI

31. Swandari, Sadikin. (2016). The Effect of Ownership

Structure, Profitability, Leverage and Firm Size on

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR). Diambil

dari Binus Business ReviewVolume 7 No 3.

32. Trading View. Singapore Stock Market.

https://www.tradingview.com/markets/stocks-

singapore/market-movers-large-cap diakses pada


33. Ulum. (2016). Intellectual Capital Konsep dan

Kajian Empiris.

34. Wagiu, Mekel. (2014). The Effect of Firm Size,

Profitability, Leverage and Board Size on

Disclosure of Ccorporate Social Responsibility

Company’s Annual Reports. Diambil dari Jurnal

EMBA Volume 2 No 3.

35. Wibison. (2007). Membedah konsep & Aplikasi CSR

: Corporate Social Responbility. Gresik : Fascho.


http://www.sgx.com/wps/portal/sgxweb/home/company_disclosure/annual_financial


https://www.tradingview.com/markets/stocks-singapore/market-movers-large-cap





THE FIRM CHARACTERISTICS AND ENVIRONMENTAL DISCLOSURE OF SOUTH EAST

ASIAN COUNTRIES

Erna Setiany Universitas Mercu Buana,

Indonesia

ABSTRACT This study examine the influence of firm characteristics on environmental disclosures. Environmental disclosure is a

disclosure of information that relating to the environment presented by the company's financial statements which

includes prevention or improvement of environmental damage, and other disclosures related to the environment. The

firm characteristics in this research include of profitability, company size, and leverage.

This research is quantitative research on non-financial listed companies in the year of 2017. The sampling

method is purposive sampling. The final sample consist of 27 listed companies from Indonesia, 17 companies from

Malaysia, and 49 companies from Singapore. Multiple regression analysis is performed to analyze the data. The result

shows that firm profitability and size positively influence environmental disclosure, leverage shows insignificant relation.

KEYWORDS: Profitability, Company Size, Leverage, and Environmental Disclosure

1. INTRODUCTION

Every industrial activity undertaken by companies in various countries causes a change in environmental balance. This is marked by changes in weather and climate change weather or climate change is known as global warming. In Indonesia, Malaysia and Singapore, industrial activities still need attention by the government. Because there are still many companies that have not shown concern for the environment. Hutomo (1996) in Paramitha and Rohman (2014) noted three environmental problems related to business activities. First, environmental problems, especially in big cities, are at a dangerous level. Secondly, in free trade the product is required to be environmentally friendly, forcing companies to develop comprehensive business strategies. Third, the lack of science and technology and the increasing welfare of the community have raised awareness of a clean and healthy environment.

Environmental problems are a concern for investors, the public and the government. One way as a form of corporate concern for the environment is to provide information about environmental responsibility in the annual report instrument or can be called the Environmental Disclosure. Environmental disclosure in the annual report is still voluntary causing environmental information by the company is still governed by the policies of each company (Paramitha and Rohman, 2014). Research conducted by Mecedes and Sri (2016) with the title of the study is the effect of company characteristics and foreign share ownership on environmental disclosure shows the influence between company characteristics

and Foreign Stock Ownership on environmental disclosure. This research is different from previous studies. This research is focused on companies in Indonesia, Malaysia and Singapore.

2. TEORI STAKEHOLDER Freeman (1984) defines stakeholders as a group or individual that can impact or be affected by the results of the company's goals. Stakeholder theory is a theory that describes which parties the company is responsible for. The company must maintain relationships with its stakeholders by accommodating the desires and needs of its stakeholders, especially stakeholders who have the power to the availability of resources used for operational activities of the company, for example labor, markets for company products and others (Chariri and Ghozali, 2007).

Environmental Disclosure Environmental disclosure is the disclosure of

information relating to the environment presented in the company's annual report. Information contained in environmental disclosures such as discussion of regulations and requirements for environmental impacts, environmental policies or corporate concern for the environment, recycling efforts, expenses incurred by companies related to environmental management, legal aspects of cases related to the environmental impacts caused by the company (Wiseman 1982).





Company Characteristics The characteristics of companies that produce

high environmental impacts demand high fulfillment of environmental responsibilities (Paramitha and Rohman, 2014). In this study the characteristics of the company are proxied into three namely profitability, company size, and leverage

Profitability Profitability is a company indicator that is used to see the company's ability to earn profits (Paramitha and Rohman, 2014). According to Hackston and Milne (1996) in Suhardjanto (2010) states that the relationship between profitability and disclosure is a reflection that shows that a social response is needed to make a company profit. Thus disclosure of environmental responsibility is believed to be a management approach to reducing social pressure and responding to social needs. Research conducted by Suhardjanto and Miranti (2007) found evidence that profitability has a significant effect on environmental disclosure. Based on the explanation above, this research forms the following hypothesis: Ha1: Profitability has a significant positive effect on environmental disclosure.

Company Size Company size is a variable that can explain how much the disclosure is in the financial statements. Company size is measured by log (total assets). Research conducted by Suhardjanto (2010) found evidence that company size has a significant effect on environmental disclosure. In line with the theory of legitimacy and stakeholders, the activities of large companies will be more visible compared to small companies so that the demands and pressures from stakeholders and the community become even greater. Based on the explanation above, this research forms the following hypothesis: Ha2: Company size has a significant positive effect on environmental disclosure.

Leverage According to Syamsudin (2001: 89) leverage is the ability of companies to use assets or funds that have a fixed cost (fixed cost assets or funds) to increase the level of income (return) for company owners. The leverage ratio is proxied by Debt to Equity Ratio (DER) by comparing the amount of debt with the company's equity. Research conducted by Mecedes and Sri (2016) found evidence that leverage has an influence on the extent of corporate environmental disclosure. Based on the explanation above, this research forms the following hypothesis: Ha3: Leverage has a significant negative effect on environmental disclosure.

Country Variable control is a variable that controls the relationship between the dependent variable and the independent variable. In this study the control variable used is the state. The indicator used is the number 1 if the company is an Indonesian company and the number 0 if the company is a company other than Indonesia.

3. RESEARCH METHODS Research variable

In this study the dependent variable used is Environmental Disclosure. This variable is denoted by ED. Environmental disclosure is measured using the environmental disclosure index, the disclosure index used is the disclosure index issued by the Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) in Sustainability Reporting and in the company's annual report. Profitability is the company's ability to make a profit. Profitability is measured by comparing the company's profits with assets (ROA). leverage shows the proportion of the use of debt to finance its investment (Sartono, 2008). The leverage ratio is proxied by Debt to Equity Ratio (DER) by comparing the amount of debt with the company's equity. Population and Sample Determination of the company's sample using the purposive sampling method, namely the determination of samples from existing populations based on criteria. The criteria used in sampling are as follows: 1. Companies registered in Indonesia and Malaysia

butsa securities other than the 2017 financial services company.

2. Companies that disclose environmental disclosure through sustainability reporting inside and outside the 2017 annual report.

3. Companies that disclose environmental disclosure through sustainability reporting using the GRI Standard 2017 period.

4. Companies that during the 2017 period had a positive ROA

This study uses descriptive statistics, classic assumption tests, multiple regression analysis, and hypothesis testing. Statistical analysis was performed using SPSS Version 23 program assistance.

4. RESULT AND DISCUSSION Result

Penelitian ini menggunakan sampel seluruh perusahaan selain perusahaan keuangan yang terdaftar di bursa efek masing-masing negara yaitu Bursa Efek Indonesia, Bursa Efek Malaysia dan Bursa Efek Singapura selama tahun 2017. Setelah dilakukan pengambilan sampel berdasarkan kriteria yang sudah ditentukan pada bab sebelumnya didapat hasil sampel yang digunakan yaitu sebesar 93 sampel





yang terdiri dari 27 perusahaan Indonesia, 17 perusahaan Malaysia dan 49 perusahaan Singapura. Adapun perincian dari jumlah sampel perusahaan

yang menjadi sampel penelitian adalag sebagai berikut:

Table 1 Sample perusahaan

No Keterangan Number of companies

Indonesia Malaysia Singapura 1 Listed in stock exchange 645 887 816 2 Financial companies (93) (36) (66) 3 Does not disclose social disclosure or

sustainability reporting in 2017 annual report (504) (634) (530)

4 Non GRI Standard disclosure (17) (198) (158) 5 Non positive povitability (4) (2) (13) Sample fit to criteria 27 17 49

Descriptive statistics are used to provide a

description / description of the data seen based on the average (mean), standard deviation, maximum, minimum. Because this study uses a sample of three companies with different countries, namely Indonesia, Malaysia and Singapore, a descriptive statistical analysis was carried out based on each country. Based on the results of descriptive statistical tests it is known that the study used 27 Indonesian company data, 17 Malaysian companies and 49 Singapore companies. Environmental disclosure as the dependent variable seen in the 2017 financial report and sustainability report with the GRI Standard guidelines consisting of 44 items. Based on descriptive statistical tests the average owned by Indonesian companies amounted to 0.2879, the highest value was 0.84 and the lowest value was 0.07 and the standard deviation value was 0.15847. For Malaysian companies, the average value is 0.3623, the highest value is 0.89, the lowest value is 0.09, and the standard deviation is 0.23897. While Singapore companies have an average value of 0.1753 the highest value of 0.59 and the lowest value of 0.02 and a standard deviation value of 0.14722.

Profitability as an independent variable measured by ROA (return on assets) that can be seen in the company's 2017 financial statements, the average value owned by Indonesian companies is 0.715, the highest value is 0.37 and the lowest value is 0.00 and the standard value deviation of 0.07368. For Malaysian companies, the average value is 0.0848, the highest value is 0.29, the lowest value is 0.01, and the standard deviation is 0.07949. While Singapore companies have an average value of 0.1536 the highest value of 0.94 and the lowest value of 0.00 and a standard deviation value of 0.17982.

Company size as an independent variable measured using logs (total assets) that can be seen in the company's financial report in 2017, the average value owned by Indonesian companies is 22.7938, the highest value is 29.59 and the lowest is 14.12 and standard deviation of 3.22850. For Malaysian

companies, the average value is 13.9013, the highest value is 21.55, the lowest value is 9.12, and the standard deviation is 3.13273. While Singapore companies have an average value of 19.5812, the highest value is 26.89 and the lowest value is 16.08 and the standard deviation value is 2.45673.

Leverage as an independent variable measured by DER (debt equity ratio) which can be seen in the company's 2017 financial statements, the average value of Indonesian companies is 1.3440, the highest value is 5.42 and the lowest value is 0.18 and standard deviation of 1.19354. For Malaysian companies, the average value is 0.76902, the highest value is 3.32, the lowest value is 0.00, and the standard deviation is 0.87851. While Singapore companies have an average value of 0.4231, the highest value is 3.45, the lowest value is 0.00 and the standard deviation value is 0.63640.

The coefficient of determination (R ^ 2) shows how big the role of the independent variable is in determining the dependent variable. The value of determination is getting closer to 100%, the better the determination of the regression equation. The results of the coefficient of determination of 0.183 or 18.3%, which means the independent variables are able to explain the dependent variable by 18.3% while the remaining 81.7% is influenced by other variables outside this study.

F test is performed to determine whether the independent variables simultaneously have an influence on the dependent variable. The independent variable is said to have simultaneous effect on the dependent variable if the significant value ≤ 0.05. The results of the simultaneous F test of 0,000 are smaller than the significance value of 0.05 so it can be said that simultaneously the independent variable has a significant effect on the dependent variable.

T test was conducted to determine the level of significance of each independent variable significantly influence the dependent variable. This test is performed using a significance level of 0.05, if the significant value ≤ 0.05, partially the independent





variable has a significant influence on the dependent variable.

Tabel 2 Result

Model

Unstandardized Coefficients Standardized Coefficients

t Sig. B Std. Error Beta

1 (Constant) ,825 ,102 8,072 ,000

ROA -,298 ,110 -,266 -2,695 ,008

STA -,017 ,005 -,381 -3,428 ,001

LEV ,023 ,041 ,061 ,553 ,582

COUNT ,132 ,048 ,327 2,738 ,007

The results of testing the hypotheses in table 4.6 can be explained as follows: 1. The significance value (sig.) Of the ROA

variable is 0.008, the value is ≤ 0.05 so it can be said that the profitability variable which is proxied by the ROA variable influences the environmental disclosure variable.

2. The significance value (sig.) Of the STA variable is 0.001, the value is ≤ 0.05 so it can be said that the size of the company size which is proxied by log (total assets) influences the environmental disclosure variable.

3. The significance value (sig.) Of the LEV variable is 0.582,> 0.05 so that it can be said that the

leverage variable which is proxied by the DER variable has no effect on the environmental disclosure variable.

4. The significance value (sig.) Of the COUNT control variable is 0.007, the value is ≤ 0.05 so it can be said that the state control variable influences the environmental disclosure variable.

Regression analysis in this study uses multiple regression analysis. Multiple regression analysis is performed to see the effect of independent variables on the dependent variable in a study. From this table, the results of the regression equation obtained in the regression model of this study are as follows:

The meaning of the regression model above is as follows: 1. A constant of 0.825 means that the variables

ROA, STA, LEV, and COUNT are considered constant or zero, then the ED value is 0.825.

2. Regression coefficient of -0.298 shows that if ROA increases by 1%, the ED will decrease by -0.298.

3. Regression coefficient of -0.017 shows that if STA increases by 1%, the ED will decrease by -0.017.

4. Regression coefficient of 0.023 indicates that if the LEV increases by 1%, the ED will increase by 0.023.

5. Regression coefficient of 0.132 indicates that if COUNT increases by 1%, the ED will increase by 0.132.

Discussion 1. Effect of Profitability on

Environmental Disclosure The first hypothesis testing (Ha1) in this study is profitability measured using return on assets (ROA) with a significance value (Sig.) Of 0.008 smaller than 0.05, the results of B on unstandardized coeficients are negative so that it can be concluded that profitability has an effect negative to environmental

disclosure. This result is in line with previous research conducted by Sari, Yuniarta, and Wahyuni (2019) which states that profitability has a negative effect on environmental disclosure. Companies with a high level of profitability believe that there is no need for environmental disclosure.

2. Effect of Company Size on Environmental Disclosure

Testing the second hypothesis of Ha2 in this study is company size. The results showed that the significance value (Sig.) Of 0.01 was smaller than 0.05, but the results of the value of B on unstandardized coefficients were negative, so it can be concluded that company size had a significant negative effect on environmental disclosure. The results of this study are in line with previous studies conducted by Purnama (2018). The larger the company, the company believes it does not need to do environmental disclosure

3. Effect of Leverage on Environmental Disclosure

Testing the third hypothesis of Ha3 in this study is leverage. The results showed that the significance value (Sig.) 0582 was greater than 0.05 so it could be concluded that leverage had no effect on

ED = 0,825 – 0,298 ROA – 0,017 STA + 0,023 LEV + 0,132 COUNT + e





environmental disclosure. This result is in line with previous research conducted by Purnama (2018) and Juhairiyah, Afifudin, and Junaidi (2018) which states that leverage has no effect on environmental disclosure. Companies with high levels of leverage do not necessarily increase environmental disclosure.

5. CONCLUSION This research was conducted to determine whether profitability, company size, and leverage affect the environmental disclosure of companies listed on the Indonesia Stock Exchange, Malaysia Stock Exchange and Singapore Stock Exchange in 2017. Then each hypothesis is compiled to prove it. Based on the results of testing and discussion, it can be concluded as follows: 1. The results of testing the first hypothesis show that profitability has a significant negative effect on environmental disclosure. 2. The results of the second hypothesis testing show that the size has a significant negative effect on environmental disclosure. 3. The results of testing the third hypothesis show that leverage has no effect on environmental disclosure.

6. SUGGESTIONS Suggestions that can be given by researchers

for the next research are: Adjusted R Square value in this study is still relatively low at only 18.3%, so researchers can then add other variables related to environmental disclosure. This study uses aspects of GRI Standards, researchers can then use other aspects so that it can produce differences between aspects of standard GRI with other aspects.

REFERENCES 1. A Chariri dan Imam Ghozali. 2007. “Teori

Akuntansi”. Semarang: Badan Penerbit

2. Universitas Diponegoro.

3. Agus, Sartono. 2008. Manajemen Keuangan

Teori dan Aplikasi Edisi Empat.

Yogyakarta: BPFE

4. Freeman, R. E. 1984. Strategic Management: A

Stakeholder Approach, Boston,

5. Pitman.

6. Hackston, D., dan Milne, M.J. (1996). Some

Determinant Of Social And Environment

7. Disclosures In New Zealand Companies.

Accounting,

Auditing & Accountability Journal. Vol. 9: 77-

108/

8. IDN Financial.

https://www.idnfinancials.com/company/ diakses


9. Ikatan Akuntansi Indonesia. PSAK 1 Penyajian

Laporan Keuangan.

https://iaiglobal.or.id/v03/standar-akuntansi-

keuangan/pernyataan-sak-7-psak-1-penyajian-

laporan-keuangan diakses pada tanggal 24

September 2018

10. Indonesian Stock Exchange. Laporan Keuangan

dan Tahunan.

http://www.idx.co.id/idid/beranda/perusahaanter

catat/laporankeuangandantahunan.aspx/ diakses


11. Juhairiyah,J., Afifudin, A., & Junaidi, J. (2018).

Pengaruh Dewan Komisaris Terhadap

Enviromental Disclosure Pada Perusahaan

Manufaktur Yang Listing Di BEI Tahun 2015-

2017. Jurnal Riset Akuntansi, 7(06).

12. Lukman Syamsudin. 2001. Manajemen Keuangan

Perusahaan (Konsep Aplikasi

13. Dalam Perencanaan, Pengawasamn, dan

Pengambilan Keputusan). Jakarta: PT.Raja

Grafindo Persada.

14. Mecedes, M., & Sri, D. (2016). Pengaruh

Karaktersitik Perusahaan Dan Kepemilikan

Saham Asing Terhadap Enviromental Disclosure.

Jurnal Keuangan dan Bisnis, 14(2), 30-60.

15. Paramitha, Bunga Widia dan Abdul

Rohman.2014. Pengaruh Karakteristik

Perusahaanterhadap Environmental Disclosure.

Diponogoro Journal of Accounting (online), Vol.

3, No 3, Hal 1-11. (www.ejournal-s1.undip.ac.id).

16. Purnama, D. (2018). Analisis Karakteristik

Perusahaan Dan Enviromental Performance

Terhadap Enviromental Disclosure. Jurnal Riset

Keuangan Dan Akuntansi (JRKA), 4(1).

17. Sari, G. A. C. N., Yuniarta, G. A., Ak, S. E., Si,

M., & Wahyuni M. A. (2019). Pengaruh

Mekanisme Good Corporate Governance,

Profitabilitas, dan Kinerja Lingkungan Terhadap

Environmental Disclosure (Studi pada

Perusahaan Sektor Pertambangan dan Sektor

Perkebunan yang Terdaftar di Bursa Efek

Indonesia (BEI) dan Terdaftar PROPER tahun

2013-2017). JIMAT (Jurnal Ilmiah Mahasiswa

Akuntansi) Undiksha, 10(1).

18. Sekaran. (2006). Research Methods For Business

(Metode Penelitian untuk Bisnis). Edisi empat

buku 1. Salemba Empat.

19. Singapore Exchange. Annual / Financial Report.

http://www.sgx.com/wps/portal/sgxweb/home/com

pany_disclosure/annual_financial diakses pada


20. Sriayu, Mimba. (2013). Pengaruh karakteristik

perusahaan terhadap Corporate Social

Responsibility Disclosure. Diambil dari E-Jurnal

Akuntansi Universitas Udayana Volume 5 No 2.

21. Sugiyono. (2009). Metode Penelitian Bisnis.

Bandung: CV Alfabeta.

22. Suhardjanto, D. (2010). “Corporate Governance,

Karakteristik Perusahaan Dan Enviromental

Disclosure”. Surakarta. Vol 6 No.1.

23. Suhardjanto, D., & Miranti, L. (2009).

Indonesian Enviromental Reporting Index Dan

Karakteristik Perusahaan. Jurnal Akuntansi dan

Auditing Indonesia, 13(1).

24. Suwardjono. (2010). Teori Akuntansi. Yogyakarta

: IKAPI

25. Swandari, Sadikin. (2016). The Effect of

Ownership Structure, Profitability, Leverage and

Firm Size on Corporate Social Responsibility


https://www.idnfinancials.com/company/






http://www.ejournal-s1.undip.ac.id/






(CSR). Diambil dari Binus Business

ReviewVolume 7 No 3.

26. Trading View. Singapore Stock Market.

https://www.tradingview.com/markets/stocks-

singapore/market-movers-large-cap diakses pada


27. Ulum. (2016). Intellectual Capital Konsep dan

Kajian Empiris.

28. Wagiu, Mekel. (2014). The Effect of Firm Size,

Profitability, Leverage and Board Size on

Disclosure of Ccorporate Social Responsibility

Company’s Annual Reports. Diambil dari Jurnal

EMBA Volume 2 No 3.

29. Wibison. (2007). Membedah konsep & Aplikasi

CSR : Corporate Social Responbility. Gresik :

Fascho.

30. Wiseman, J. (1982). "An Evaluation of

Environmental Disclosure Made In Corporate

Annual Reports". Accounting, Organizations and

Society, Vol. 7(1). pp.53-63.







IS NIGERIA’S DEMOCRACY BREEDING CONFLICT?

Adaora Osondu-Oti, Ph.D. Department of International Relations and

Diplomacy

College of Social and Management Sciences

Afe Babalola University,

Nigeria

Ugonna Obi-Emeruwa Programme Officer

Society for International Relations Awareness

(SIRA)

ABSTRACT

This paper seeks to address the question: Is Nigeria’s democracy breeding conflict? The objective of the study is to establish if

there exists a link between democracy and Nigeria’s recurring conflicts as well as analyse the implications of increasing

conflict for the country’s development and democratic consolidation. Making use of primary (oral interviews with

scholars/academics in the fields of Political Science and Peace and Conflict Studies with specialisation in the areas of

democracy and conflict management) and secondary (relevant books, journals, internet materials) sources of data, this paper

found that democracy may not necessarily breed conflict but the “freedom” that is associated with it often gives any aggrieved

group the opportunity to put forward their concerns to the government, which sometimes have resulted into violence and

armed conflict when not managed properly. This is clearly seen in Nigeria’s current democratic setting.

KEYWORDS: Nigeria, Democracy, Breeding, Conflict, Development

INTRODUCTION The greatest threat facing the survival of

Nigerian democracy and unity is the general insecurity occasioned by various ethnoreligious conflicts, communal clashes, violent crimes, and terrorist activities across the country in the last decade. Aside from the Nigerian Civil War (1969-1970) and some “bloody” military take-over of government, the Nigerian nation has never been confronted with such great security challenges as we presently experience in the activities of ethnic militia and Islamic fundamentalist sect. In other words, the persistent insecurity resulting from the ethnic-religious crisis, Boko Haram terrorism and other threats of violence have become more pronounced since the country‟s return to democracy in 1999. For example, the Niger Delta militancy was one major armed conflict that gripped Nigeria after its transition to civilian rule in 1999. As a result, the Nigerian government Amnesty Programme for Niger Delta militants came into place in 2009 and brought “relative peace” to the region until the surfacing of Niger Delta Avengers in 2016. Today, Boko Haram terrorist activities, the Fulani-herdsmen and farmers clashes and the arrival of this new group in

the Niger Delta called “Avengers” are making Nigeria‟s democratic environment a fragile one.

The subject of democracy, peace, and violence have attracted so much attention in academic circles due to increasing violence in democratic states, including well-established democracies. The practice of democracy everywhere rests with foundational acts of violence (Keane, 2010). In established democracies, flaws in the system have become worryingly visible and disillusion with politics is rife (The Economist, 2014). In the United Kingdom, Brexit is gradually tearing the people apart, as many UK citizens are divided on the issue. No doubt, Chan (1984) in his research found that „relatively free‟ countries participated in war just as much as the „less free.‟ The claim that democracy is a system for peaceful resolution of conflicts since conflicting claims by rival social groups are solved by majority votes or consensual agreements (Hegre, 2014) is being increasingly refuted. According to Hegre (2014), democratic institutions by themselves are ineffective in reducing the risk of internal conflict onset. For Boswell and Dixon, (1990); Muller and Weede, (1990); Hegre et al (2001) and Fearon and Laitin (2003), it is semi-democratic regimes that have a





higher risk of internal conflict than consistent autocracies or democracies. Where, for instance, autocrats have been driven out of office, their opponents have mostly failed to create viable democratic regimes (The Economist, 2014).

However, while democracies rarely engage in interstate wars (Moaz and Russet, 1993), the stark reality is that democratic countries have been witnessing one form of internal conflict or the other. Many democracies are undergoing a series of tests and tribulations. The Economist (2014) pointed out that democracy is going through a difficult time. The fact that “democracy lets people speak their minds” have escalated minor issues to armed conflict in many countries of the world. According to Hegre (2014) in democracies, when individuals are denied the political rights and the economic benefits they believe they are entitled to, they may react with aggression and organize violent political opposition. Given these backdrops, this paper seeks to address this major question: Is democracy breeding conflict? With particular reference to Nigeria, the paper seeks to establish if there exists a link between democracy and recurring conflict in Nigeria. It is clear that since Nigeria‟s return to democracy in 1999, the country has known no peace. Conflict pervades the country, ranging from militancy in Niger Delta, ethnic agitations, insurgency/Boko Haram terrorism, and Fulani-herdsmen and farmer‟s clashes. What is the future of Nigeria‟s democracy and development in the event of increasing conflicts?

THE CONCEPT OF DEMOCRACY Democracy originated many years ago in

ancient Greece. The word democracy comes from two Greek words: demos meaning people and kratos meaning rule. Therefore, the word means “rule by the people,” sometimes called “popular sovereignty.” and can refer to direct participatory and representative forms of rule by the people. A democratic government must meet the essential democratic credentials: it must first and foremost be based on popular will expressed through a free and fair election; accountable to people; practice the rule of law and ensure freedom of speech and choice, freedom of association and equality before the law. Scholars have defined democracy as a form of governance done in the people‟s best interest that is they tend to stress the representative character of democracy. Democracy has been defined in various ways including the government of the people, by the people and for the people; government with the consent of the governed, and a form of a regime that derives from popular sovereignty in which ordinary citizens are endowed with the right and ability to govern themselves (Osablu-Kle, 2004).

However, the definition of democracy as the government with the consent of the people has often been contested especially when the elites have captured democracy and the people with vote-buying and election rigging. In that regard, it is not reasonable to argue that democracy is the will of the people when for instance, people in extreme poverty sell their votes out of necessity for survival. In democratic practice, the exclusion of certain sections of society exists in the form of rigging. Exclusion undeniably enables small groups (who may not be in power by majority vote) to dictate to the majority (who are either excluded through vote-rigging or vote-buying “ against their will”). Nevertheless, the exclusion of a certain subset of the society in decision-making has not made any of the democracies to be pronounced autocracy. In the ancient Greeks, for example, a certain subset of the society was also excluded. The common people who could take part in political decision making was defined to comprise only a subset of the people as a whole, for children, prisoners, women, and slaves were excluded (Osablu-Kle, 2004). For the Greeks, the exclusion of certain sections of society from the definition of the common people was reasonable and did not render democratic practice null and void (Osabu-Kle, 2004). Thus, democracy essentially means “the rule of the common people” and as Osabu-Kle (2004) noted any attempt to define it otherwise is a matter of convenience and may have its roots in the difference between what democracy essentially is and how it is practiced.

In this way, a democratic practice may be conceived of as a mixture of some essence of democracy and some measure of dictatorship (Osabu-Kle, 2004). Undoubtedly, democratic societies have been seen as those that conduct periodic elections and allow citizens‟ participation. The fact that election is conducted as at and when due qualifies a certain system as democracy, and whether it is semi or partial democracy depends on how it is practiced. Thus, since it has been called a democracy, it then means that some elements of freedom exists and claims of human rights. This, in essence, means that in times of grievances, marginalisation or neglect by the government in power, citizens in a democratic setting often have no choice than to express their concerns through protest/demonstrations. In summary, although democracy is sometimes equated with a positive meaning, it is not always so in practice. Democracy has its negative sides and can also create an environment where conflict thrives.





DEMOCRACY AND CONFLICT: THEORETICAL DISCOURSE

The subjects of war and democracy and their potential symbiosis have recently been brought to life by the fact that virtually all democracies are today caught in the sticky threads of permanent war against „terror‟ (Keane, 2010). Conflict exists in all countries and in every level of society. It is endemic to all social life (Bercovitch, n.d cited in Osondu-Oti, 2017). The essence of conflict seems to be disagreement, contradiction or incompatibility. Thus, conflict refers to any situation in which they are incompatible goals. Wallensteen (2002) sees conflict as the manifestation of hostile attitude in the face of conflicting interests between individuals, groups, and states. From the perspective of conflict theory, tensions and conflicts arise when resources, status, and power are unevenly distributed between groups in society; as a result, conflicts become the engine for social change (Crossman, 2019).

Conflict theory originated in the work of Karl Marx, who focused on the causes and consequences of class conflict between the bourgeoisie (the owners of the means of production and the capitalists) and the proletariat (the working class and the poor). Focusing on the economic, social, and political implications of the rise of capitalism system in Europe, Marx theorized that the system premised on the existence of a powerful minority class (the bourgeoisie) and an oppressed majority class (the proletariat) created class conflict because the interests of the two were at odds, and resources were unjustly distributed among them (Crossman, 2019).

Social conflict theory basically looks at struggles for power and control in society as a major causal factor of conflict. Conflict occurs when two or more actors oppose each other in social interaction, reciprocally exerting social powers in an effort to attain scarce or incompatible goals and prevent the opponent from attaining them. The quest for dominance and power become the currency rather than consensus (Egbuta, 2018). In a democratic setting, the exclusion of certain groups from decision-making or the lack of benefits from the dividends of democracy among other factors have created conflicts in Nigeria. An example is the Niger Delta militancy. Niger Deltans felt they have been marginalised and neglected by the few elites in power and as a result frustration sets in, which eventually led to aggression. Thus, the frustration-aggression also explains some of these conflicts in Nigeria clearly. Aggression is one of several possible consequences of frustration (cited in Breuer, 2017). In other words, conflict arises due to frustration from the inability to achieve certain goals.

While frustration is the feeling of irritation and annoyance when something blocks you from achieving a goal, aggression is the malicious behaviour or attitude towards someone or something, usually triggered by frustration. The Fulani-herdsmen and farmers conflict/clashes occurred because each of the groups is frustrated from being blocked from achieving their goals of either farming or pasturing due to competition for land. Conflict theory also focuses on the competition between groups within society over limited resources (Chappelow, 2019). Conflicting interests can occur due to discrimination, struggle for resources, identity, underrepresentation, neglect among others. Since conflict is inevitable in any society and human interactions, it then follows that conflict can occur both in democratic and undemocratic settings. Moreover, democracy can create the environment for conflict in the sense that frustration that was not let out during military rule because of fear of military crackdown can be brought forward in an era of democratic dispensation. While democracy has been equated positive meanings such as peace, justice, and promotion of human rights, recent conflicts all over the world, including Nigeria revealed that democracy is not always as portrayed.

NIGERIA’S DEMOCRACY AND CONFLICT

At the inception of Nigeria‟s democracy on May 29, 1999, there were great expectations that the newborn democracy would deliver Nigeria from the long decades of savagery and oppression witnessed under the military rule. However, within the euphoria that came with the country‟s return to democratic rule, crisis ensued (Osondu-Oti, 2019). The return to the civilian rule provided some of the aggrieved groups the opportunity to voice out their grievances, as democracy is believed to offer people the environment to freely express themselves (Osondu-Oti, 2019). While democracy seemed to have provided the avenue for the Nigerian people to demand justice (as seen in the Niger Delta people clamour for environmental protection); it has failed to prevent or manage conflict. As pointed by Eck and Hultman (2007) democratic governments make use of less violence against civilians‟ and engage in less repression (Davenport, 2007; Colaresi & Carey, 2008), although the rebel groups tend to make more extensive use of violence against civilians when fighting democratic regimes (Eck & Hultman, 2007). Possibly because of the stronger constraints on the use of violence against insurgents, democracies tend to have longer internal wars (Gleditsch et al, 2009).

Since 1999, Nigeria has been faced with various conflicts and clashes of interests such as the





militancy in the Niger Delta region of Nigeria, the Boko Haram insurgency in the northern region and the current Fulani-herdsmen clashes with farmers in different parts of the country. These conflicts present grave challenges to security and consolidation of the country‟s democracy and development. A brief examination of these conflict and the challenges they pose to the country is presented below.

NIGER DELTA MILITANCY The Niger Delta environmental and human

rights issues are not new. The killing of human rights Ken Saro Wiwa and 9 Ogoni men by late General Sani Abacha in 1995 revealed that the region has been clamouring for justice prior to the dawn of democracy. Thus, when Nigeria entered into democratic rule in 1999, it was an opportunity for the people to regroup again to put forward their demands to the government of the day. Several groups also addresses such as the Movement for the Emancipation of Niger Delta (MEND) became very active in the fight for the rights of the Niger Deltans. The Niger region, which contributes over 80 percent of Nigeria‟s revenue through oil believed that they have been marginalised and neglected. As they struggled to get across their views to the government, the youth became violent and resorted to militancy (Osondu-Oti, 2019). Militancy caused a lot of damage to the region, the nation‟s economy and the external image. In a bid to solve the problem that has lingered, the Nigerian government under President Umaru Musa Yar‟dua came up with an Amnesty programme for the militants with diverse initiatives to cater for the youth unemployment. The initiative was believed to have brought relative peace to the region. A few years (in 2016) after the Amnesty Programme was put in place by Umaru Yar‟dua for Niger Delta militants, a new group known as “Niger Delta Avengers” emerged and they are said to be driven by environmental pollution that has not been addressed by the government.

The 2016 resumption of hostilities in the oil-rich Niger Delta region that is the mainstay of Nigeria‟s economy in a dwindling international oil price has been attracting international concern (Francis and John, 2018). Prior to the Amnesty programme, Niger Delta was believed to be under siege due to the activities of the militants involving kidnapping, maiming, etc. and the government military forces fighting the group. The resurgence of militancy in the Niger Delta has led to a series of attacks on oil facilities and has reduced the barrel production of crude oil per day in the region (Moses and Olaniyi, 2017). According to the former Group Managing Director, Nigerian National Petroleum Corporation, Mr. Emmanuel Ibe Kachikwu oil

production has reduced significantly due to the series of attacks on the country‟s oil facilities in the Niger Delta region by the Avengers. For the Niger Deltans, the country‟s democracy has not made any significant impact on their lives and in the development of the region. According to Akinola (2012), although there are theoretical reasons to think of democracy as the springboard of human development, the Niger Delta region that produces the lion‟s share of revenue for Nigeria has been reduced to a basket of waste for the majority of its citizens.

BOKO HARAM INSURGENCY Boko Haram gained widespread exposure in

2009 when the group members were alleged to be subjected to the excessive use of force by the police and they were unable to get an official investigation into the matter. As a result, the group launched attacks on police posts and other government installations killing scores of police officers (Editors of the Encyclopedia Britannica, 2019). The inability of the police to control the group‟s activities made the Nigerian government bring in the army to quell the uprising. The ensuing Joint Military Task Force operation left more than 700 Boko Haram members dead and destroyed the mosque that the group used as its headquarters (Editors of the Encyclopedia Britannica, 2019). The leader of the group who was under police custody was also killed.

Later on, Abubakar Shekau declared that he was the group‟s new leader and vowed to avenge the deaths of their former leader, Yusuf and other group members who were killed by security forces. Since 2009, Boko Haram has carried out assassinations and large-scale acts of violence in Nigeria. In the summer of 2010, the group began to assassinate individuals, typically police officers and also attacked larger targets. One operation that garnered widespread attention occurred in September 2010, when the group attacked a prison in the city of Bauchi, in Bauchi State and released more than 700 inmates, including some 100 Boko Haram members (Editors of Encyclopaedia Britannica, 2019). A year later, Boko Haram‟s attacks increased in frequency and magnitude. For example on August 26, 2011, the group struck its first high-profile international target within Nigeria when a suicide bomber crashed a car into the United Nations building in Abuja and detonated an explosive which killed at least 23 people and injured more than 100 others. The attack at the United Nations building in Abuja drew worldwide attention. In addition, the kidnapping of over 250 Chibok schoolgirls in April 2014 at Borno state, which received international condemnation and outcry placed Nigeria among countries on U.S security alert.





The group has continued to cause great havoc to the nation and its neighbours. Although the Joint Military Task Force has often claimed that they have defeated the group, Boko Haram attacks have continued intermittently in the northern region. Boko Haram has been a major challenge to Nigerian people; a threat to democracy and Nigeria‟s development since 2009 to date. While autocracies often repress the formation of organizations before they can reach the stage of armed insurgencies, in democracies, opposition groups expression of discontent are allowed (Hegre, 2014), thereby making it easier for a group to sometime become either violent or to transform into a full-fledged terrorist organisation.

FULANI-HERDSMEN AND FARMERS CONFLICT

In recent times, the north-central states of Benue, Plateau and Nasarawa and some states in the East such as Enugu have experienced conflicts that have led to thousands of deaths and displacements as a result of clashes between pastoralists (herders) and local farmers in several communities (Egbuta, 2018). Violent conflicts between herdsmen and farmers are threatening the country‟s security, stability, and peace. The driving force of the clashes is the competition for available resources, especially grazing land (Egbuta, 2018). The changing climatic condition generally referred to as global warming is no doubt taking a toll on the survival of herdsmen cattle. According to Egbuta (2018), desert encroachment from the Sahara towards the Sahel region and other associated climatic conditions have continued to affect the livelihood of herdsmen as they push further south in search of available space, pitching them against farmers and host communities in different parts of Nigeria.

With an estimated death toll of approximately 2,500 people in 2016, these clashes are becoming as potentially dangerous as the Boko Haram insurgency in the North East. In a particular attack by Fulani herdsmen in 2016 on residents in Uzo-Uwani Local Government Area of Enugu State about 40 persons were left dead (Abiodun, 2016). In Benue, one of the hardest-hit states, Governor Samuel Ortom reports more than 1,878 people were killed between 2014 and 2016 (cited in Ajigbo et al, 2018). From January 2015 to February 2017, at least 62,000 people were displaced in Kaduna, Benue and Plateau states (Ajigbo et al, 2018). In January 2018, the News Agency of Nigeria reported that over 18, 000 internally displaced persons (IDPs) were in 11 camps in Nasarawa state. Yet to date, response to the crisis at both the federal and state levels have been poor (International Crises Group, 2017).

In January 2018 alone, Amnesty International report indicated that 168 people were killed as a result of herdsmen-farmer clashes (cited in Egbuta, 2018). For example, concerning the clashes in Benue, farming along the Benue River accounts for over 20, 000 tons of grain annually and this same area is also fertile ground for herdsmen to feed their cattle. Gbaradi (2018) cited in Ajigbo et al (2018) showed that Fulani herdsmen killed 3,780 Nigerians in attacks across the country excluding the injured and abducted. On the other hand, farmers have killed scores of cows and Fulani herdsmen in reprisal attacks for the destruction of farms and farm produce by cows (Ajigbo et al, 2018). Thus, farmlands within the riverbank areas are the most affected by the movement of the herdsmen, resulting in a number of clashes (Egbuta, 2018). The democratic government/the present administration under President Muhammadu Buhari has failed to address the conflict properly and adequately as many states are left to their own fate. Some states such as Benue have enacted anti-grazing laws but it has been reported Fulani herdsmen have not abided fully with these laws. Thus, the conflict has not ceased.

Nigeria’s Recurring Conflict: Implications for Nigeria’s Democratic Consolidation and Development

Two decades after Nigeria‟s transition to democratic rule in 1999, the country is still battling with various challenges, particularly conflict, that continue to threaten its democratic consolidation and development. Nigeria‟s democracy has known no peace. Conflict pervades the whole region and insecurity has become the order of the day. In the Southern, Eastern and Central parts of Nigeria militancy, kidnapping, insurgency and Fulani-herdsmen, and farmers clashes loom large. In the North, the Boko Haram insurgency is creating a theatre of violence, displacement, and a cycle of poverty. The same applies to Niger Delta. Nigeria‟s democracy is in a turbulent state as more conflict emanates every day. In an interaction with a scholar at the Department of Political Science at Afe Babalola University, he noted that it looks like democracy is breeding conflict because there seems to be a lack of political will to nib these conflict problems in the bud.

The consequences of conflict for Nigeria‟s development are profound. Armed conflict often leads to forced migration, long-term refugee problems and the destruction of infrastructure (Gates et al, 2015), and Nigeria is no exception. In times of conflict social, political, and economic institutions can be permanently damaged. As noted by Ray and Esteban (2017), within-country conflicts account for an enormous share of the





deaths and hardships in the world today. For example, the Fulani-herdsmen and farmers' clashes have claimed thousands of lives, destroyed properties, and means of livelihood of the people in the affected states reducing both social and economic activities. In a country that boasts Africa‟s largest economy, these resource-based conflicts have impeded market development and economic growth by destroying productive assets, preventing trade, deterring investment, and eroding trust between market actors (Rhynard-Geil, 2019).

It is a known fact that the development of any country in the world is dependent on many factors, which may fast-track or retards its growth, among which security is central (Adebayo, 2014). Nigeria‟s fight against Boko Haram remains one of the deadliest conflicts in the north despite a major military offensive to contain the African Islamist militant group and support from international partners (Campbell and Harwood, 2018). Although Boko Haram strongholds in the northern region have been limited to some villages and pockets of countryside due to the military crackdown, the group has not been totally subdued. For example, the United Nations‟ refugee agency estimates the conflict has displaced 2.4 million people and put more than seven million at risk of starvation (cited in Campbell and Harwood, 2018). The Boko Haram conflict has also led to the degradation of infrastructure, including the closing or destruction of more than half of the region‟s schools and the near-complete breakdown of an already weak public health system (Campbell and Harwood, 2018).

The Boko Haram terrorist activities in the north have also taken a big toll on the country‟s economic development as the nation has to redirect spending to attend to conflict-related issues including building internally displaced camps and rebuilding of communities. The money that would have been used to develop infrastructure is now used for either military expenses in the fight for terror and militancy or for reconstruction. In the words of Adebayo (2014) combating a scourge like Boko Haram necessarily involves a significant drain on the nation‟s material and human resources.

In the case of Niger Delta, oil wealth accounts for over 80 percent of Nigeria‟s foreign exchange earnings, the Nigeria Natural Resource Charter (NNRC) report (2018) showed the country lost about N3.8 trillion within the years 2016 and 2017 to oil theft. The NNRC report pointed out that the estimated financial value of what Nigeria lost through crude oil theft in the Niger Delta was higher than the current combined allocations of the country to health and education in the 2018 federal budget (NNRC, 2018). It stressed that the combined allocations for health and education amount

to N189.4 billion, which translates to a mere 8.4 percent of the estimated value of losses from oil theft two years ago (NNRC, 2018). NNPC report (2016) showed that Nigeria lost 643 million litres of crude oil or N51.28 billion as a result of 3,000 incidences of pipeline vandalisation in 2015 alone (Dialoke and Edeja, 2017).

Hostage takings by the militants and political instability are also injurious to the economy, as it induces capital flight or slows foreign direct investment (Dialoke and Edeja, 2017). Capital flight has a multiplier effect on an economy. For example, it impedes business investment, economic growth, and productivity, spurs inflation and unemployment and negatively affects the living standards of the people. Moreover, security of lives and property plays a major role in the development of any country, as investors in any economy want to be assured of the safety of their investments (Adebayo, 2014). Since the risk of doing business increases when there is insecurity in the polity, investors who are to facilitate industrial growth and employment generation, try as much as possible to avoid such an unfavourable business environment (Adebayo, 2014). Nigeria‟s human capital development remains weak due to under-investment and the country ranked 152 of 157 countries in the World Bank‟s 2018 Human Capital Index (World Bank, 2019).

Rhynard-Geil (2019) in a study for Mercy Corps organisation found that states affected by farmer-pastoralist conflicts lost an average of 47% of taxes (Internally Generated Revenue, or IGR) due to these conflicts. In addition, the study found that the average household affected by farmer-pastoralist conflict would experience at least a 64% increase in income, and potentially 210% or higher increase in income, if these conflicts were reduced to near zero (Rhynard-Geil, 2019). Destruction of means of livelihood has resulted in an increase in the number of the poor. According to the United Nations Development Programme (2018), over 62 percent of the Nigerian population live in poverty. Today, Nigeria has overtaken India as the poverty capital of the world, and there is no doubt that incessant conflicts in the country contributes to the country‟s increasing poverty level. Also, Nigeria‟s unemployment rate has been rising. According to the African Development Bank (2019) cited in Chidozie (2019) unemployment situation in Nigeria is frightening. The National Bureau of Statistics reported that Nigeria has some of the highest unemployment and underemployment rates in Africa, put respectively at 23.1 percent and 20.1 percent (cited in Chiedozie, 2019).

These conflicts also pose greater challenges to the economic health of families and households, in addition to the obvious and incalculable loss of human





life (Rhynard-Geil, 2019). Conflicts have not brought any gains to the country but losses. If these conflicts are resolved, Rhynard-Geil (2019) study found that Nigeria stands to gain up to the US $13.7 billion annually in total macroeconomic progress in a scenario of peace between farmers and pastoralists in Benue, Kaduna, Nasarawa, and Plateau alone. Conflict remains a major obstacle (among other factors) to development and democratic consolidation in Nigeria. Nigeria‟s democracy has been chaotic and crisis-ridden, although Nigeria is not alone in that regard. Scholars believe that democracy is going through a difficult time (The Economist, 2014). Wang Jisi of Beijing University observed that “many developing countries that have introduced Western values and political systems are experiencing disorder and chaos” (cited in The Economist, 2014). Even in its heartland, democracy is clearly suffering from serious structural problems, rather than a few isolated ailments (The Economist, 2014). For Nigeria, democracy has been equated with corruption, bad governance/leadership, lack of development, increasing poverty, and of course conflict. As the country strives/works towards the achievement of the Sustainable Development Goals, one major issue (among others) that stands in the way of Nigeria is recurring conflict. Nigerian Government’s Strategies for Managing Conflict in a Democratic Era

Nigeria‟s strategies to manage conflict in a democratic era has not been particularly different from the military era, except that the government in question is a “democracy.” One of the foremost strategies of the Nigerian government in responding to insecurity and conflict is the use of police and military intervention. Aside from sending the police to maintain peace and order in conflict areas at the outset, the government has also responded through full military action, where sometimes the military has applied excessive force and rendered many civilians homeless. An example is the case of the Odi incident in Bayelsa state which was aimed at silencing the Ijaw Youth Council (IYC) on November 20, 1999, and the military ended up destroying the whole community. There was also the deployment of military forces to contain incidences of insecurity and conflict as witnessed in the Eggon-Megili in Aryaragu and Eggon-Fulani Herdsmen conflicts in Nasarawa State in February 2013. The government has used the military Joint Task Force (JTF) to quell violence in conflict zones. Scholars have attributed the use of the military without adequate consideration of the main causes of the conflict to bad governance. According to Aghedo and Osumah (2015) due to poor governance, the state relies essentially on

repression and the military option in managing challenges to its legitimacy, leading to the radicalization of violent non-state actors.

The government has also responded through dialogue or the use of mediators. In the use of dialogue, the government has utilized the services of elder statesmen or men of integrity in the society to negotiate peace among warring factions. For example, Chief Edwin Clark and other prominent leaders in the Niger Delta played leading roles in the reconciliation and mediation between the government and the Niger Delta militants. Such mediating role was said to have been proposed by former President General Olusegun Obasanjo to former President Goodluck Jonathan although it was reported by the government that this was rebuffed by Boko Haram. In addition, the government also established Panels or Commissions of inquiry which act as Adhoc committee to provide the best solutions to restore peace in troubled areas. Unfortunately, after huge amounts of money and time had been spent for such panels of inquiries, their reports are never looked upon, reviewed or implemented. This is the bane of conflict management in Nigeria. Among different conflict management strategies employed, the Nigerian government has relied heavily on the deployment of military troops to diverse regions of conflict in Nigeria to restore order. The military itself has constituted a security threat in a democratic era (Osondu, 2012).

CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS

Francis Fukuyama was right when he pronounced that the world is now moving from a democratic regression to a democratic depression. Citizens of many countries are losing faith with democracy, particularly the system‟s inability to protect the rights of the people and put an end to armed conflict. In Nigeria today, democracy has not lived up to its expectations. The country has not experienced complete peace as envisaged but is often confronted with conflict. In established democracies, semi-democracy or transitional democracies, democracy is now equated with conflict, often intrastate wars. Since 1999 that Nigeria returned to democracy, every administration has one or more conflicts to address starting with Niger Delta militancy, Boko Haram insurgency and currently Fulani-herdsmen clashes with farmers, among others such as Biafra secession. It has been established that democracy can create an environment where conflict could thrive when people have the opportunity to mobilize to show opposition. These conflicts have negative developmental implications for Nigeria. For example, Nigeria‟s





economic growth and development continue to regress instead of progress. There are issues of capital flight, increasing poverty and displacement that are retarding the progress on development in the country. Recurring conflict also poses a great threat to democratic consolidation in Nigeria. Nigeria is just two decades old in running a democratic government, as a result, increasing conflict can impact on strengthening democracy in the country.

The paper then recommends that the Nigerian government should not treat these conflicts with a kid glove if the country must make any significant progress towards sustainable development by 2030. In addition, some of the root causes of these conflicts such as unemployment, deprivation of certain rights, poverty, marginalisation, and sectionalism must be adequately addressed. In the land dispute between farmers and herdsmen, for example, the government can apply equity in solving the clashes where necessary. Illegal arms proliferation and possession should come with grave punishments/sanctions to avoid reckless killings of citizens. Lastly, Nigerian laws such as anti-grazing laws enacted by some states must be enforced on offenders without fear or favour.

REFERENCES 1. Abiodun (2016) “Bloodbath in Enugu as Fulani

Herdsmen kill 40”,

https://www.vanguardngr.com/2016/04/bloodbath-

enugu-fulani-herdsmen-kill-40/ (Accessed 15

November 2019)

2. Adebayo, Anthony Abayomi (2014), “Implications

of „Boko Haram‟ Terrorism on National

Development in Nigeria: A Critical Review”,

Mediterranean Journal of Social Sciences, Vol.5,

No.16

3. Aghedo, Iro and Osumah, Oarhe (2015),

“Insurgency in Nigeria: A Comparative Study of

Niger Delta and Boko Haram Uprisings” Journal of

Asian and African Studies, Vol.50, Issue 2

4. Ajibo, Henry T.; Onuoha, Emmanuel Chima; Obi-

Keguna, Christy N; Okafor, Agnes E and Oluwole,

Israel Oluwasanmi (2018), “Dynamics of Farmers

and Herdsmen Conflict in Nigeria: The Implication

to Social Work Policy Intervention”, International

Journal of Humanities and Social Science Vol. 8,

No. 7

5. Akinola, Samson Ranti (2012), “Overcoming

Tyranny and Underdevelopment in the Niger Delta

Through Appropriate Human Resources

Development and Utilization”, In, Ukaga,

Oekchukwu, Ukiwo Ukoha O and Ibaba S. Ibaba

(ed.), Natural Resources, Conflict, and Sustainable

Development: Lessons from the Niger Delta, New

York: Routledge

6. Boswell, Terry & Dixon, William J (1990),

“Dependency and Rebellion” American

Sociological Review 55(4): 540–559

7. Breuer, Johannes (2017), Frustration-aggression

Theory, United Kingdom: John Wiley & Sons Ltd

8. Chan, Steve (1984), “Mirror, mirror on the Wall . . .

Are the Freer Countries More Pacific?” Journal of

Conflict Resolution 28(4): 617–648

9. Campbell, John, and Harwood, Asch (2018), “Boko

Haram‟s Deadly Impact”,

https://www.cfr.org/article/boko-harams-deadly-

impact (Accessed 15 November 2019)

10. Chappelow, Jim (2019), “Conflict Theory”,

https://www.investopedia.com/terms/c/conflict-

theory.asp (Accessed 15 November 2019)

11. Colaresi, Michael & Carey, Sabine (2008), “To Kill

or to Protect.” Journal of Conflict Resolution 52(1):

39–67

12. Crossman, Ashley (2019), “Understanding Conflict

Theory”, https://www.thoughtco.com/conflict-

theory-3026622 (Accessed 16 November 2019)

13. Chiedozie, Ihuoma (2019), “Nigeria‟s

Unemployment Rate Frightening, says AfDB”,

https://punchng.com/nigerias-unemployment-rate-

frightening-says-afdb/ (Accessed 15 November

2019)

14. Dialoke, Ikechukwu, and Edeja, Marshall S (2017),

“Effects of Niger Delta Militancy on the Economic

Development of Nigeria (2006-2016)”,

International Journal of Social Sciences and

Management Research Vol. 3 No.3

15. Davenport, Christian (2007), State Repression and

the Domestic Democratic Peace, Cambridge:

Cambridge University Press

16. Editors of Encyclopaedia Britannica (2019), “Boko

Haram: Nigerian Islamic Group”,

https://www.britannica.com/topic/Boko-Haram

(Accessed 15 November 2019)

17. Egbuta, Ugwumba (2018), “Understanding the

Herder-Farmer Conflict in Nigeria”,

https://www.accord.org.za/conflict-

trends/understanding-the-herder-farmer-conflict-in-

nigeria/ (Accessed 15 November 2019)

18. Eck, Kristine & Hultman, Lisa (2007), “One-sided

Violence against Civilians in War”. Journal of

Peace Research 44(2): 233–246

19. Fearon, James D & Laitin, David D (2003)

Ethnicity, insurgency, and Civil War. American

Political Science Review 97(1): 75–90

20. Francis Chinwe Chikwem & John Chikwendu Duru

(2018) “The Resurgence of the Niger Delta

Militants and the Survival of the Nigerian State”

The Round Table, 107:1, 45-55

21. Gates, Scott; Hegre, Håvard; Mokleiv, Håvard

Nygård, and Strand, Håvard (2015), “The

Consequences of Internal Armed Conflict for

Development”, Stockholm International Peace

Research Institute,

https://www.sipri.org/commentary/blog/2015/conse


https://www.vanguardngr.com/2016/04/bloodbath-enugu-fulani-herdsmen-kill-40/

https://www.vanguardngr.com/2016/04/bloodbath-enugu-fulani-herdsmen-kill-40/

https://www.cfr.org/article/boko-harams-deadly-impact

https://www.cfr.org/article/boko-harams-deadly-impact

https://www.investopedia.com/terms/c/conflict-theory.asp

https://www.investopedia.com/terms/c/conflict-theory.asp

https://www.thoughtco.com/conflict-theory-3026622

https://www.thoughtco.com/conflict-theory-3026622

https://punchng.com/nigerias-unemployment-rate-frightening-says-afdb/

https://punchng.com/nigerias-unemployment-rate-frightening-says-afdb/

https://www.britannica.com/topic/Boko-Haram

https://www.accord.org.za/conflict-trends/understanding-the-herder-farmer-conflict-in-nigeria/



https://www.sipri.org/commentary/blog/2015/consequences-internal-armed-conflict-development-part-1




quences-internal-armed-conflict-development-part-

1 (Accessed 15 November 2019)

22. Gleditsch, Nils Petter; Hegre, Håvard & Strand,

Håvard (2009), “Democracy and Civil War”. In:

Manus Midlarsky (ed.) Handbook of War Studies

III. Ann Arbor, Michigan: University of Michigan

Press, 155–192

23. Hegre, Harvard (2014), “Democracy and Armed

Conflict”, Journal of Peace Research, Vol. 51(2)

159-172

24. Hegre, Håvard; Tanja Ellingsen, Gates, Scott &

Gleditsch, Nils Peter (2001), “Toward a

Democratic Civil Peace? Democracy, Political

Change, and Civil War”, 1816–1992. American

Political Science Review 95(1): 33–48

25. International Crises Group (2017). “Herders

Against Farmers: Nigeria‟s Expanding Deadly

Conflict”, https://www.crisisgroup.org/africa/west-

africa/nigeria/252-herders-against-farmers-

nigerias-expanding-deadly-conflict (Accessed 15

November 2019)

26. Keane, J. (2010). “Does Democracy Have a Violent

Heart?” In, David Pritchard (ed.), War,

Democracy, and Culture in Classical Athens.

Cambridge: Cambridge University Press

27. Mercy Corps Nigeria (2015), “The Economic Costs

of Conflict: Evidence on Violence, Livelihoods, and

Resilience in Nigeria‟s Middle Belt”, http://

www.bit.ly/1HvJdHm (Accessed 15 November 2019)

28. Moaz, Z. & Russett, B. (1993). Normative and

Structural Causes of Democratic Peace (1946-

1986), American Political Science Review 87 (3):

624-638

29. Moses, D & Olaniyi, A.T (2017), “Resurgence of

Militancy in the Niger Delta Region of Nigeria”,

Journal of Political Sciences & Public Affairs,

Vol.5, No.4

30. Muller, Edward N & Erich Weede (1990) Cross-

national Variations in Political Violence. Journal of

Conflict Resolution 34(4): 624–651

31. Nigeria Natural Resource Charter (2018), “NNRC

Assesses the Impact of Crude Oil Theft on

Nigerians”, http://www.nigerianrc.org/nnrc-

assesses-the-impact-of-crude-oil-theft-on-nigerians/

(Accessed 15 November 2019)

32. Osablu-Ke, Daniel Tetteh (2004), Democracy and

Its Practice: A General Theory of Democratic

Relativity, https://carleton.ca (Accessed 15

September 2019)

33. Osondu-Oti, Adaora (2019), “Women, Conflict and

Nigeria‟s Sustainable Development Agenda”, In,

Bekele, Gashawbeza W, and Oyebade, Adebayo

(ed.), Africa in the Twenty-First Century, New York:

Lexington Books

34. Osondu-Oti, Adaora (2017), “Weaning Africa from

Conflict: The Role of Women in Conflict

Management and Peacebuilding”, In Ayo

Dunmonye et al (ed.), Reflections on Nigeria‟s

Foreign Policy, Abuja: Friedrich Ebert Stiftung

35. Osondu, Adaora (2012), “Challenges to the

Fundamental Rights of Women in Niger Delta”, In,

Ukaga, Oekchukwu, Ukiwo Ukoha O and Ibaba S.

Ibaba (ed.), Natural Resources, Conflict, and

Sustainable Development: Lessons from the Niger

Delta, New York: Routledge

36. Ray, Debraj and Esteban, Joan (2017), “Conflict

and Development”, The Annual Review of

Economics, Vol.9: 263-269

37. Rhynard-Geil, Meghann (2019), “The Economic

Costs of Conflict in Nigeria”,

https://www.mercycorps.org/research/economic-

costs-conflict-nigeria (Accessed 15 November 2019)

38. The Economist (2014), “What‟s Gone Wrong with

Democracy”,

https://www.economist.com/essay/2014/02/27/whats

-gone-wrong-with-democracy (Accessed 15

November 2019)

39. Wallensteen, Peter (2002). Understanding Conflict

Resolution: War, Peace, and the Global System,

London: SAGE Publications




https://www.crisisgroup.org/africa/west-africa/nigeria/252-herders-against-farmers-nigerias-expanding-deadly-conflict



http://www.bit.ly/1HvJdHm

http://www.nigerianrc.org/nnrc-assesses-the-impact-of-crude-oil-theft-on-nigerians/

http://www.nigerianrc.org/nnrc-assesses-the-impact-of-crude-oil-theft-on-nigerians/

https://carleton.ca/

https://www.mercycorps.org/research/economic-costs-conflict-nigeria

https://www.mercycorps.org/research/economic-costs-conflict-nigeria

https://www.economist.com/essay/2014/02/27/whats-gone-wrong-with-democracy

https://www.economist.com/essay/2014/02/27/whats-gone-wrong-with-democracy




THE IMPACT OF GOOD GOVERNANCE ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT IN BANAADIR

REGION-SOMALIA

Abdirashiid Abdullahi Huriye Faculty of Post-Graduation Study Master Degree

of Public Administration at University Of

Somalia (UNISO) Mogadishu-Somalia

Prof. Hussein Osman Ahmed Supervisor

ABSTRACT As mentioned in the topic and noted in the problem statement, the general objective of this study was to know how good

governance influences socio economic dev elopment or how the good Governance and socioeconomic development can

interact in Somalia particularly Banadir region. To obtain the main objectives and concentrate on the research problem, the

particular objectives of this study were: to known effect of participatory on socio-economic development. to examined impact

of accountability on socio-economic development to determined the relationship between transparent and socio-economic

development. to investigated the impact of good governance and socio economic development , The study was concerned good

governance and socio-economic development in Somalia special Banadir region. However, the choice of this sample size is

directed by the literature of Mercy Corps , Data was analyzed through inferential data analysis techniques special correlation

analysis to describe the relationship between good governance and socio-economic development in local government of

Banadir region, correlation defines as a measure of degree of association between two or more scores or between two or more

variables that have been obtained from the same group of subjects By using Statistical Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS)

version 16 techniques

Findings of result the majority respondent is positive that’s result of two variable and Good governance is generally

characterized by accessibility, accountability, predictability and transparency. Good also governance as having openness,

participation, accountability, and transparency as key elements

INTRODUCTION Socio economic development initiative is a way

or system that promotes economic development at different levels that helps the improvement of living conditions of the society. Targeting establishing the foundations of microeconomic system at micro level is the way or system that socioeconomic system takes its roots to grow and develop. Socio economic development is very crucial and important to economic development and economists strongly believe that without socio economic development initiatives and minds economic growth can not be reached.

Good governance is better management and governance system that promotes the save guarding of properties, allows rights to have and increase property and resources that will encourage economic growth at

levels at personal, societal and national levels. It put or sets the foundations that are very important and effective for socio economic development first at micro level then to macro level in orderly manner. This will give the population of the nation or the country the opportunity to benefit the countries national resources or property. And as a result good governance encourages economic growth and development.

Governance is a broad notion. Etymologically, the word governance came from the Greek verb "Kubernan" (steer a ship or a tank.) It was used for the first time by Plato metaphorically to denote the fact of governing people which gave birth to the Latin verb "Gubernare" from which many terms have been generated in multiple languages. For instance, in French langu age, the terms "gouverner", "gouvernement", and





"gouvernance" are generated from the Latin term. The term of old French "gouvernance" was first used in the thirteenth century as the equivalent of " gouvernement" (art or manner of governing) and then, from 1 47 8 , to designate some northern areas of France that had a special administrative status . It passed into the English language in the fourteenth century, giving rise to the term governance (action or manner of governing) . The English term governance was introduced to the economic literature in l 990 ' s by the Anglo-Saxon economists and political scientists and international institutions (UN, World Bank and IMF in particular), again to designate the " art or manner of governing " , but with two additional concerns ; first, it gave a clear distinction with the government as an institution; secondly, it promoted a new mode of governance based on the participation of civil society at all levels. (lahouij, 2017)

From this perspective we can understand that there is a direct relationship between socio economic development and good governance as socio economic development needs having structures that support the initiation, development and the continuity of economic development. Because in the socio economic development there are many things to be done like creating job employment opportunities for the society so that those with skills can interact with business , supporting self employment schemes sot that those with business minded people can carry out their own businesses , creating investment initiatives so that those with capitals and money can invest the country and the region. All these need. ,The good managerial system that endures the tasks of creating stability in administrative field ,create polices and environment in which policy can be developed and work , guarding basic rights of both people and investors , proper legal institutions that arrange all legal aspects governing business and investment. So good governance and socio economic development are two aspects that are inter dependent.

The good governance agenda has been in the ascendant in the field of international development since the mid-1990s. The term ‘governance’ is broad and far-reaching, and the achievement of ‘good governance’ is premised on improvements to ‘virtually all aspects of the public sector’ (Grindle 2004: 525). Promotion of the good governance agenda will involve engagement with a wide range of institutions, from, those which set the rules of the game for economic and political interaction, to decision-making structures that determine priorities among public problems and allocate resources to respond to them, to organizations that manage administrative systems and deliver goods

and services to citizens, to human resources that staff government bureaucracies, to the interface of officials and citizens in political and bureaucratic arenas. Getting good governance at times implies changes in political organization, the representation of interests, and processes for public debate and policy decision making. (Earle, 2017).

During the last 4-5 years, the Indian economy has witnessed remarkable improvement in macro-economic environment with lead indicators in positive trajectory. The real GDP growth has increased from 6.4% in 2014 to 7.2% in 2019. Per-capita income at current prices has exhibited an increasing trend from Rs. 79,118 in 2014 to Rs. 1,25,397 in 2019. The overall inflation has contained over the last few years as the WPI inflation decreased from 5.2% in 2014 to 4.4% in 2019 and CPI inflation dipped from 9.5% in 2014 to 3.3% in 2019 which is highly encouraging. The exports growth has steadily increased from 7.8% in 2014 to 12.1% in 2019 and the total trade of the country has improved from USD 764.5 billion in 2014 to USD 769.1 billion in 2019. The fiscal deficit as share of GDP declined from 4.5% in 2014 to 3.3% in 2019. Further, India recorded a consistent increase in foreign inflows over the last few years. The FDI inflows have increased from USD 36.0 billion in 2014 to USD 61.9 billion in 2019. The exchange rate in 2014 was INR/USD 60.5 however it is expected to dwindle between INR/USD 69-67 in 2019. Going ahead, the industry growth is expected to increase from 3.8% in 2014 to 7.8% in 2019, while the services growth is also expected to show a positive trend, increasing slightly from 7.7% in 2014 to 7.9% in 2019. On the flip side, the agriculture sector is expected to grow at 3.8% in 2019. The public consumption has increased from 0.6% in 2014 to 9.2% in 2019. The GFCF grew from 1.6% in 2014 to 12.2% in 2019. (Champer, 2019)

In Somalia, the different regions in the country there are initiatives of socio economic development to promote economic development in the country. Banadir region is the biggest region and the most populated region in the country. Banadir region initiated the first steps of socio economic development of a) understanding the gaps b) the problem c) the priorities to promote economic development But still there are some greater challenges especially in the areas of good governance , public participation in the governance system ., public service delivery , transparent public revenue collection and public expenditure that are not very smooth in Banadir region and within the national government and this will effect the socio economic development in Banadir region.





Somalia is a complex political, security and development environment, and much of its recent past has been marked by poverty, famine and recurring violence. However, in 2012, with the establishment of permanent political institutions and important military offensives, Somalia entered into a new period; a period where longer term peace seems possible. After decades of conflict and instability, a federal government was established, built through national dialogue and consensus. When this Federal Government was formed, Somalia was divided and with no clear path to reconciliation and unification Somalia faced the significant challenge of simultaneously building frameworks and institutions, whilst needing to immediately deliver tangible benefits to the Somali people. The challenges that Somalia faces are thus complex, multifaceted and differ according to various political, social and regional contexts. The National Plan recognizes this fact; the strategy set out in this chapter seeks to address these challenges and effectively lead Somalia on a path of recovery, development and a durable peace. (Planing, 2017)

An understanding of Somalia‘s geography, recent trends in its economy and consequences of the civil strife is important to determining the nature and extent of its poverty. Approximately, 69% of Somalia‘s population lives below the poverty line. Poverty in Somalia is more pronounced in the IDP camps estimated to be 88% followed by rural areas with 75% and urban areas with areas 67%. At regional level, two specific regions of Somalia; Somaliland, located in the North-West and Puntland, located in the North East, experience more stability with regard to socio economic conditions. Stability in the two areas may have contributed to some improvement in poverty reduction. On the contrary, the Southern part of Somalia is comparatively poorer and suffers from unstable economic conditions and fragile security conditions. The southern part of Somalia, where conflict and confusions reign supreme, is subjected to food shortages and suffers from lack of proper infrastructure. The poor socio-economic and extreme poverty in Somalia can be attributed to a number of factors. The prominent ones being absence of an active and strong central government, civil disputes, natural calamities like floods and droughts. Somalia, witnessed many inhibiting factors including the downfall of the government, and outbreak of civil war, which further aggravated the problem of poverty in Somalia. (Planing, National Development Plan, 2017)

RESEARCH OBJECTIVE The objectives of this study are: To obtain the main objectives and concentrate on the research problem, the particular objectives of this study were:

To explore effect of participatory on socio-economic development.

To examine the impact of accountability on socio-economic development.

To determine the relationship between transparent and socio-economic development.

To investigate the impact of good governance and socio economic development.

REVIEW OF RELATED LITERATURE Definition of good governance: According to (IFAD, 1999) Good governance is defined as the manner in which power is exercised in the management of a country’s economic and social resources for development, also defines governance as a process referring to the way in which power is exercised in the management affairs of a nation. Good governance is generally characterized by accessibility, accountability, predictability and transparency also good governance as having openness, participation, accountability, and transparency as key elements,(Morita, Schiko, & Zaelke, 2007). In additionally, defines governance as ‘the exercise of economic, political and administrative authority to manage a country’s affairs at all levels which comprises, mechanisms, processes and institutions through which citizens and groups articulate their interests, exercise their legal rights, meet their obligations and mediate their differences, (Rachel, 2012). Definition of socio-economic development: is refers to a monitored, manipulated or encouraged , process that brings about changes in locations where people live, work, and share things in common (source of quote) as relating to or giving consideration to both social and economic factors. Within the community the process may be experienced as it happens without apparent cause-an insight stemming from a paraphrased (economic development web page, 2013). Definition of socio-economic development: is refers to a monitored, manipulated or encouraged , process that brings about changes in locations where people live, work, and share things in common (source of quote) as relating to or giving consideration to both social and economic factors. Within the community the process may be experienced as it happens without apparent





cause-an insight stemming from a paraphrased (economic development web page, 2013). Good governance consist eight major characteristics it is participatory, consensus oriented, accountable, transparent, responsive, effective and efficient, equitable and inclusive and follows the rule of law. Therefore researchers are tried to describe any above character of good governance from previous explore. According to Amos, Graham, & Plumptre, (2003) participatory is all men and women should have a voice in decision-making, either directly or through legitimate intermediate institutions that represent their intention, also participatory is such broad participation is built on freedom of association and speech, as well as capacities to participate constructively. Participation is an involve consultation in the development of policies and decision-making, elections and other democratic processes, (Mercy Corps, 2000). However these definitions agree that the participatory is to give a freedom on society to participate political, economical and social decision through represent, election and association. The process of establishing mutual understanding among diverse stakeholders about what is in the best interest of the whole community or society and the general direction for achieving that vision, (Mercy Corps, 2000). Good governance mediates differing interests to reach a broad consensus on what is in the best interest of the group and, where possible, on policies and procedures, (Amos, Graham, & Plumptre, 2003). On the other hand these explanations are also concur that consensus is to receive the best interest of whole public and social and how this can be achieved, but above definitions fail to inform that consensus oriented requires a broad and long term perspective on what is needed for sustainable human development and how to achieve the goals of such development. According to Amos, Graham, & Plumptre, (2003) accountability is when Decision-makers in government, the private sector and civil society organizations are accountable to the public, or society, as well as to institutional stakeholders. This accountability differs depending on the organizations and whether the decision is internal or external.Alsoaccountability is a key requirement of good governance and constitutes the other side of participation, (Mercy Corps, 2000). About above definitions have the same opinion that an accountability is a decision makers like government, civil society organization and private sector be accountable to the community that they are serve, but it disregard that an accountability about in a generally an organization or an institution is accountable to those who will be effect by its decision or action. And

accountability cannot be enforced without transparency and role of low. Transparency means that decisions, and their enforcement, follow established rules and regulations; it also means that all people who will be affected by such decisions have access to easily understandable information in local languages and accessible to illiterate and blind/deaf community members,(Mercy Corps, 2000). Transparency is built on the free flow of information. Processes, institutions and information are directly accessible to those concerned with them, and enough information is provided to understand and monitor them, (Amos, Graham, & Plumptre, 2003). on the other hand this on top of definitions are have the same opinion that the transparent is decision and their enforcement follow established rule and regulation, and it is received full information and understandable that can understand. But beyond definitions are ignore that transparence provided in easily understandable forms and media. According to Mercy Corps, (2000) responsiveness is when good governance requires that institutions and processes seek to serve all stakeholders within a reasonable timeframe and have mechanisms for soliciting ideas and giving updates to constituents. Responsiveness is an institution and processes try to serve all stakeholders, (Graham, Amos, & Plumptre, 2003). These two descriptions are use same opinion about responsiveness that it is good governance required the institutions and the process try to be serving all stakeholders within responsible timeframe.

METHODOLAGY To explore the impact of good governance on

socio-economic development this chapter discussed the methodology of the study. The chapter consists of seven sections. First section, the study presents research design followed by research population including sample size and sampling procedure. To verify the technique, the third section provides research instrument with the validity and reliability of the instrument followed by data gathering procedures. To analyze the data, section five presents data analysis followed by the ethical consideration of the study, while final section presents the constraint/ limitation of the study.

CONCLUSION Good governance is one of the fundamental

prerequisites for the successful socio-economic development in a country. Governance usually plays a key role in the area like health, education, infrastructure, capital market regulation,





macroeconomic stability, safety net provision, the legal system, creation of a good business environment, and the environment protection, all of which are preconditions and basic features of the developed economy. Therefore characteristics of good governance like accountability, transparent, responsiveness, rule of low, and others are absent more than 20 years in Somali country because lack of government. Also at end of last year 2012 Somalis restart the way of democratic government that elected a new president and a new government system that seems to practice some characteristics of good governance , and during this time Banadir region restored peace building, and great hope about socio economic development.

RECOMMENDATIONS To improve Good governance plays an

important role in providing strategic direction for social development and helping them to foster commitment.

People can choose to become leaders. People can learn good governance to reduce social conflict.

To providing cost-effective and efficient public services.

The inequitable distribution of central government aid and the ability of local governments to issue rules and regulations specific to their sub-national government hinders intergovernmental cooperation.

Resource-rich regions may provide better services than resource-poor regions and there is no direct incentive to cooperate and provide services jointly.

REFERENCE 1. Abdellatif, A. M. (2003). Good Governance and Its

Relationship to Democracy & Economic

Development. Governance, Democracy and

Economic Development , 18-22.

2. Amos, B., Graham, J., & Plumptre, T. (2003).

Principles for Good Governance in the 21st

Century. Policy Brief , 5,7.

3. economic development web page. (2013, 01 15).

Retrieved 05 09, 2013, from

http://www.economicdevelopment.net:

http://www.economicdevelopment.net

4. Graham, J., Amos, B., & Plumptre, T. (2003).

Principles for Good Governance in the 21st

Century. Policy Brief , 5,7.

5. IFAD. (1999). GOOD GOVERNANCE: AN

OVERVIEW. IFAD , 1,5.

6. Mercy Corps. (2000). Guide to Good Governance

Programming. mercy corps , 9,11.


Programming. mercy corps , 10,12.


Programming. Mercy Corps , 97-99.

9. Morita, Schiko, & Zaelke, D. (2007). RULE OF

LAW, GOOD GOVERNANCE,. MORITA, ZAELKE

, 2,3.

10. oso, w. y., & onen, d. (2008). Ageneral guide book

to writing research proposal and report. kampala.

11. Rachel, M. G. (2012). Good Governance as a

Concept, and why This Matters for Development.

United nation university , 5.





FEATURES OF ELECTROCHEMICAL MACHINING OF

MAGNETIC - HARD MATERIALS

Sarvar Tursunbaev

Department of Mechanical Engineering,

Tashkent State Technical University,

Tashkent Uzbekistan

Munira Kuchkorova



Tashkent Uzbekistan

Otabek Kxasanov



Tashkent Uzbekistan

Azamat Baydullaev



Tashkent Uzbekistan

ABSTRACT

This article describes the features of processing by an effective method of electrochemical grinding of parts made of hard-to-

process metals and alloys. Ways to improve production, reduce costs, and improve product production efficiency are briefly

described.

KEYWORDS: Electrochemical grinding, abrasive, electro erosive treatment, magnetic hard materials, diamond.

INTRODUCTION At the present stage of technology, one of the

most important ways to solve the problem of processing parts made of hard-to-process metals and alloys is grinding with conductive diamond and abrasive wheels. This provides a significant increase in labor productivity, reducing costs and improving production efficiency while achieving high performance properties of the treated surfaces.

Electrochemical grinding with diamond or abrasive wheels on conductive metal bundles is a combined process in which the material is removed as a result of simultaneous processes: anodic dissolution, mechanical cutting with diamond or abrasive grains, and electro erosive phenomena “Figure -1”. In addition, as a result of the influence of electrolytes, an adsorption decrease in the strength of the processed material

occurs due to a decrease in the interfacial surface energy. Due to the absence of continuous contact between the discrete contact surfaces of the part and the tool, as well as the protrusion of diamond or abrasive grains from the bundle, a gap filled with electrolyte is formed between them. In the gap, under the influence of an electric current, the surface of the part is anodic ally dissolved. Thus, the surface layer during electrochemical grinding is formed as a result of the electrochemical process and the mechanical work of the circle produced by the diamond or abrasive grains, which remove the products of anodic dissolution and cut off the material being processed, and also act as depassivators, destroying and removing the film of metal oxides formed on the surface of the part.





Figure-1. Scheme of electrochemical grinding.

MATERIALS AND METHODS If the electrochemical removal significantly

prevails over the mechanical one, the process is close to the electrochemical dimensional processing in a flowing electrolyte based on the results of exposure to the treated surface. In this case, the process can be considered cold, and the treated surface is free from machining defects. In the case of a predominance of mechanical removal, the quality of the treated surface is close to the results of diamond grinding. There are several methods of abrasive-diamond grinding with simultaneous influence of electrochemical processes on the work piece and tool. When changing the polarity of the electrodes (circle-anode, part — cathode), i.e. the so-called processing on the reverse polarity, the metal ligament of the circle dissolves. The process is characterized by intensive self-sharpening, reducing the cutting force and temperature, resulting in increased processing performance. The wear of the circles in this case increases significantly. Only diamond circles are used for grinding parts made of hard alloys, and diamond and less often abrasive circles on metal bundles are used for high-temperature alloys, stainless and structural steels. The same rectifiers used for electrochemical grinding are used as current sources. The voltage of the current source 3-5 V.

The use of abrasive wheels on a metal bundle is possible when grinding with continuous electrochemical correction of the circle. In this case, an additional cathode is installed, which destroys the ligament. The advantage of this method of grinding is that there is no friction between the binder and the surface to be processed. For the same purpose, a reversible power supply is sometimes used, giving a reverse half-wave. It is known to use an electro-neutral abrasive tool, in which the electrochemical and mechanical processes are separated in space. Electrochemical removal from the surface of the part is carried out in this case by an

additional circle. All types of processing methods using anodic processes can be used very effectively in industry.

Electrochemical grinding is a very effective method of processing parts made of magnetic-hard materials. Grains of diamonds or abrasives, cutting into a surface with reduced physical and mechanical properties as a result of electrochemical dissolution, generally perform a non-deforming function, but mechanically remove the products of the electrochemical reaction. Naturally, the tool life in this case is significantly higher and the processing quality is better.

The study of the cutting properties of circles made of various abrasive materials showed that during electrochemical grinding, circles made of green silicon carbide have a higher efficiency than circles made of white electro corundum and provide a roughness of Ra = 0.164-0.08 microns.

Electrochemical grinding of parts made of magnetic-hard materials is characterized by very small values of the longitudinal feed rate-no more than 0.5 m / min - and significant-up to 2 mm-grinding depths. Under these conditions, the process parameters are significantly affected by the voltage of the current source. Thus, increasing the voltage from 5 to 30 leads to a significant decrease in the power parameters of the process due to an increase in the electrochemical component of the removal. The optimal operating voltage of the current source when grinding with abrasive wheels on metal bundles SESH-2 and M5-5 should be considered 10-16 V. Increasing the voltage beyond the optimal leads to the appearance of electric contact and electro erosion processes in the processing zone and, consequently, increasing the roughness of the treated surface. At low voltage, electrochemical grinding becomes an abrasive grinding process with circles that have low cutting properties.





Insufficient performance of the process, rapid loss of cutting properties, which leads to frequent edits of high-strength abrasive wheels on metal bundles, a large marriage caused by the operation of significantly blunted grains of silicon carbide, etc., led to attempts by domestic and foreign researchers to use circles made of synthetic super hard materials, in particular, synthetic diamonds, for electrochemical grinding. Electrochemical grinding with diamond wheels provides 1.5-2 times greater performance compared to abrasive wheels. At the same time, in contrast to grinding with abrasive wheels on a metal bundle, the insignificant influence of the properties of the processed material and heat treatment on the process parameters and performance was established.

DISCUSSION AND RESULTS Diamond circles are more resistant, retain high

cutting properties for much longer, and provide a higher quality of processing compared to silicon carbide circles. The best results are provided by circles with a grain size of 100/80-125/100 with diamonds of the DIA brand.

Intensification of grinding performance is achieved by increasing the speed of the longitudinal feed. The voltage of the current source, which determines the role of electrochemical dissolution in these conditions, significantly affects the grinding performance. However, the area of optimal values of working stresses when grinding with diamond circles in comparison with abrasive ones on a metal bundle is much lower and is only 6-12 V.

The study of the quality of the surface layer after electrochemical grinding with diamond circles showed that the surface layer is characterized by reduced micro hardness and the absence of macro-stresses. Electron microscopic studies showed no structural changes. It is also established that electrochemical grinding has virtually no effect on the magnetic properties of parts (residual induction and coercive force).

Of particular interest are attempts to intensify the process of electrochemical grinding of parts made of hard-to-process materials, including magnetic-hard alloys, by applying oscillating movements, vibrations, ultrasonic vibrations, and so on to the grinding wheel.it Should be noted that there is currently no unity of views on these issues. In some works, the influence of these processes on the process indicators has not been established. In others, on the contrary, it is found that, for example, ultrasonic vibrations with an amplitude of 15-25 microns intensify both the anode process and the cutting process, resulting in significantly increased productivity. Obviously, conducting research in the same methodological conditions will allow us to clearly resolve some controversial issues.

CONCLUSION The results of research work give reason to

believe that electrochemical grinding of magnetic-hard alloys, especially diamond circles, is a highly effective

technological process that provides a significant increase in productivity and the quality of the surface layer and the performance characteristics of the parts allow the use of electrochemical grinding as a rough and final processing method.

REFERENCES 1. Tursunbaev S.A. An Analysis of Electrolytic In-Process

Dressing (ELID) grinding. SCIREA Journal of

Mechanical Engineering. Volume 2, Issue 3, 2019

2. Umarov E. O. Cutting theory and cutting tools.

Textbook, Tashkent, 2019.

3. Stephenson, D. J., Veselovac, D., Manley, S., and

Corbett, J., Ultra-precision grinding of Hard Steels, J.

Int. Soc. Prec. Eng. Nanotech, 25:336–345 (2001)

4. Hitoshi Ohmori, Ioan D. Marinescu, Kazutoshi

Katahira Electrolytic In-Process Dressing (ELID)

Technologies: Fundamentals and Applications. 2011

5. Weinberg R. R., Vasiliev V. G. Electrochemical

grinding of heat-resistant alloys with diamond circles

on a metal bond. - In SB. Efficiency and accuracy of

abrasive-diamond processing. M " MDNTP, 1971. pp.

59-64

6. Poduraev V. N. Cutting hard-to-process materials. -

Moscow, Higher school, 1974.

7. Sergeev V. V., Bulygina, T. I. hard Magnetic materials.

Moscow, Energia, 1980.

8. Holysz L, Szczes A, Chibowski E. Effects of a static

magnetic field on water and electrolyte solutions. J

Colloid Interface Sci 2007;316(2):996.

https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jcis.2007.08.026.

9. Leese Rebecca, Ivanov Atanas 2017/02/01

095440541664017 Electrochemical micromachining:

Review of factors affecting the process applicability in

micro-manufacturing - 232 Proceedings of the

Institution of Mechanical Engineers, Part B: Journal of

Engineering Manufacture

10. Pooranachandran, K., Deepak, J., Hariharan,

P.Mouliprasanth, B. 2019/09/01 ,SN - 978-981-13-

1723-1 Effect of Flushing on Electrochemical

Micromachining of Copper and Inconel 718 Alloy:

Select Proceedings of ICEMMM 2018 - Lecture Notes

in Mechanical Engineering


http://bookfi.net/g/Hitoshi%20Ohmori

http://bookfi.net/g/%20Ioan%20D.%20Marinescu

http://bookfi.net/g/%20Kazutoshi%20Katahira

http://bookfi.net/g/%20Kazutoshi%20Katahira

https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jcis.2007.08.026




MULTIPLE INTELLIGENCE TEST: DESIGNING STUDENTS’ ASSESSMENT PERFORMANCE BASED

ON INTEREST

Janice P. Maravilla

HT III Mayamot National High School,

Division of Antipolo City

Jayson Seel M. Maravilla

T II Mayamot National High School,

Division of Antipolo City

ABSTRACT

This study aimed to prove that considering Gardner’s Multiple Intelligences (MI) Theory will help teachers tailor

appropriate activities specifically differentiated instructions in order to address diverse students. More importantly,

applying MI theory improves students’ performance as they develop and utilize their individual intelligence in learning a

skill.

Semi-structured interview was conducted to the teachers in English to obtain detailed information and teachers’

enabling practices in providing performance assessment tasks for students and their views towards the application of

multiple intelligence theory.

The researchers wish to address the struggles of the students in getting high scores in performance tasks. As

cited in DepEd Order No. 8 series 2015, performance task covers 50% of the total classroom assessment of the student in

the English subject.

Through series of LAC sessions, English teachers will be familiarized with the MI test and will be equipped in

crafting differentiated instructions which will make effective learning to happen.

ACKNOWLEDMENT The researcher would like to extend their sincerest gratitude to the following individuals who benevolently rendered time and support to make this study successful: Reynaldo L. Agustin, Principal IV- He has been encouraging teachers to improve quality education and research would be of great help in achieving that goal. English Teachers- They have demonstrated willingness to participate to improve instructional teaching and cater diversified learners.

CONTEXT AND RATIONALE This study aims to prove that considering

Gardner’s Multiple Intelligences (MI) Theory will help teachers tailor appropriate activities specifically

differentiated instructions in order to address diverse students. More importantly, applying MI theory improves students’ performance as they develop and utilize their individual intelligence in learning a skill. According to DepEd Order No. 8, Series 2015 which is also known as Policy Guidelines on Classroom Assessment for the K to 12 Basic Education Program, classroom assessment is an integral part of the curriculum implementation that allows the teachers to track and measure learners progress and to adjust instruction accordingly.

This DepEd Order also highlights that performance tasks of the students is higher than those of written test and quarterly assessment as shown in the table below:

Weighted Score (WS) = Percentage Score x Weight of Component Table 4. Weight of the Components for Grades 1 – 10 1 to 10

Components

Language A. P. EsP Science Math MAPEH EPP/ TLE

Written Work 30% 40% 20%

Performance Tasks

50% 40% 60%

Quarterly Assessment

20% 20% 20%





The Department of Education encourages a

holistic approach in learning. Though the Multiple Intelligences theory promotes activities that enhance a particular intelligence of a student in acquiring competency, Gardner explains that students are not limited of having intellectual capacities. He elaborates that an individual possesses many kinds of intelligence such as musical, interpersonal, spatial-visual, and linguistic intelligences (Cherry, 2018).

In Mayamot National High School, 88 students underwent remediation or commonly known as “summer class” on the 15th day of April until the 24th of May 2019, not to mention, other students who failed in the subject who did not attend the said remediation or “summer class”. It clearly showcases that in the English subject alone, 28 struggling students were accounted.

It can be recalled that DepEd allotted 50% for the students’ performance task when it comes to classroom assessment. Since teachers are expected to provide activity-based assessment and student-centered approach on this, the performance of the students are yet questionable based on the list of students who failed in the English subject alone (S.Y. 2018-2019).

Therefore, this study considers Howard Gardner’s Multiple Intelligences Theory in diagnosing the students’ individual intelligence aside from the diagnostic test which intends to know the knowledge the students have at the moment.

In the study initiated by Ozdemir, Guneysu, and Tekkaya (2006), they have found out that in schools generally, only mathematical and linguistic intelligences are taken consideration. This means that students who are weak in either intelligence are usually disadvantaged.

Gogebakan, (2003) presented the relationship of learning and brain structure. Gardner (1983) played vital role in this study for his theory was used as justification of the findings. Moreover, Gardner explained the biological structure of the brain and stated how it works especially on the multiple intelligences.

PROPOSED INNOVATION, INTERVENTION, AND STRATEGY Multiple intelligence test will be conducted vis-à-vis the diagnostic test to primarily test not only the knowledge but also the intelligence each learner possesses. The result of the study will be utilized to

design performance assessment tasks based on the interest of the students. However, at the same time, these tasks lead to students’ acquisition of competencies.

ACTION RESEARCH QUESTIONS This study aimed to prove that Multiple Intelligences (MI) theory addresses the needs of students in improving their performance tasks.

Specifically, it sought to provide answers to the following questions: 1. What are the enabling practices of teachers in providing performance assessment tasks? 2. How do teachers handle students who struggle in the performance assessment tasks? 3. What are the teachers’ view towards the multiple intelligence theory?

ACTION RESEARCH METHODS A. Parts and/or Other Sources of

Data and Information Teachers who have failed students in the

English subjects in grade seven, eight, nine and ten school year 2018-2019, based on the submitted list of candidates for remediation through summer class 2018.

Those teachers appeared to have frequently visited by parents about the failing marks of the students. Also, they have been teaching for over 5 years during the conduct of the study.

B. Data Gathering Methods In order to obtain detailed information and

teachers in English’ enabling practices in providing performance assessment tasks for students and their views towards the application of multiple intelligence theory, Semi-Structured Interview was crafted and utilized in this study.

Prieto, Naval, & Carey (2017), defined interview as a purposive collection of information which intends to explore opinions, beliefs, viewpoints, experiences, and judgements about something.

C. Data Analysis Plan In this study, Content Analysis was used to

analyze the data gathered. It is a research method for subjective interpretation of the content of text data through the systematic classification process of coding and identifying themes and patterns (Hsieh and Shannon, 2005).





Discussion of Results and Reflection

The Enabling Practices of Teachers in Providing Performance Assessment Tasks

QUESTION RESPONSE THEME/CODE What are the common activities do you use in your students’ performance tasks?

Teacher 1: “Some of the common activities I use in the performance tasks of my students are skits, no-word acting movie, illustrations, group reporting or presentations, and many more.”

-skits -group presentations

Teacher 2: “I usually provide group activities and games like charade, etc.)”

-group activities -games

Teacher 3: “Common activities I use in the performance tasks of my students are group reporting, skits, illustrations, and more.”

-group activities

Teacher 4: “Some of the activities I used during performance tasks are role playing, poem making, singing, output, skit, etc.”

-role playing

It can be gleaned from the table that the English teachers tend to practice group activities in their lesson executions. Therefore, students are engaged in a collaborative performances. With the presence of unity among the groups, students will more likely perform and pass the assessment. However, the number of struggling students in English remain high. Therefore, the problem of struggling learners in English is not catered accordingly.

In the study initiated by Ozdemir, Guneysu, and Tekkaya (2006), they have found out that in schools generally, only mathematical and linguistic intelligences are taken consideration. This means that students who are weak in either intelligence are usually disadvantaged.

If other intelligence can be taken consideration or, in other words, be used towards linguistic acquisition, the result may become positive. As a result, students may show positive response in learning English.

The Teachers Strategies’ in Handling Struggling Students in the Performance Assessment Tasks

What intervention do you use for the struggling students in a particular activity?

Teacher 1: “When I see one of my students have struggle in a particular activity, I usually allot a certain time to explain to that student the activity or pair up the student to another student who knows and understands the activity.”

-additional time -pairing

Teacher 2: “When I found out that after the evaluation there are struggling students I usually give extra activities to them and sometimes I ask my students who understands the lesson to pair up with those who are struggling.”

-additional activities -pairing

Teacher 3: “A particular activity I do is that I usually a lot a certain time to explain to my student the activity or pair up the student to another student who knows and understands the activity.”

-additional time -pairing

Teacher 4: [I provide them] “remedial classes. [Also, I] give them additional activities.”

-additional time -remediation





In the presence of the k-12 Curriculum, teachers are expected to provide output-based activities. The first table demonstrated that teachers adhere to this demand. All of them facilitate group activities and collaborative out-put. In the second table, they even maximized cooperative learning through “pairing.” Moreover, “Think-Pair-Share” strategy as explained by Kadoura (2013), promotes critical thinking among students. They can be able to exchange ideas or transfer learnings between the two.

On the other hand, teacher commonly gives additional time and activities to the students who showed difficulty in learning a particular lesson. It can also be gleaned based on the participants responses that they least prioritized re-teaching or another diagnostic to identify why the students struggle and on which specific part they find the lesson difficult.

The Teachers’ Perception towards the Multiple Intelligence Theory What do you know about Gardner’s Multiple Intelligence Theory?

Teacher 1: “Gardner’s Multiple Intelligence Theory helps us assess or evaluate the intelligence level of our students and also helps us to decide the best activity suited to a particular group of students. It also helps us in arranging and managing our classroom. Another thing is, it helps us have a wide perspective of the individual and unique abilities of our students to best cater to their intellectual needs.”

-assessing students -choosing activities

Teacher 2: “Gardner’s Multiple Intelligence Theory is used to assess or evaluate the intelligence level of our students and also helps us decide the best activity suited to a particular group of students. It will also helps us to identify what activities to use for a particular student.”

-students’ intelligence -suit activities

Teacher 3: “Gardner’s Multiple Intelligence Theory helps us assess or evaluate the intelligence level of our students and also helps us decide the best activity suited to a particular group of students.”

-assess students -suit activities

Teacher 4: It helps us assess or evaluate the intelligence level of students.

-evaluate intelligence

Based on the table, the teachers showed understanding about the multiple intelligence theory. However, based on the interview conducted, teachers were unable to maximize the function of multiple intelligence test. In addition, none of them conducted M.I. test like the way they administered diagnostic examination before starting teaching. Though there were attempts of collaborative learning which will provide opportunities to students in discovering commonalities among them. M.I. test can be utilized to group students among their peer who share the same intelligence. Gardner (1983) explained the biological structure of the brain and stated how it works especially on the multiple intelligences.

“In order to capture the full range of abilities and talents that people possess, Gardner theorizes that people do not have just one intellectual capacity.” Cherry, (2019).

ACTION RESEARCH WORK PLAN AND TIMELINES

The study will be divided into three parts namely Pre-Implementation Plan, Implementation Plan and Post Implementation Plan. It will take 6 months for the full implementation of the study which starts from June 2019 to November 2019.





TIME ACTIVITY Pre-Implementation Plan

June

Formulating the problem Gathering supporting documents Crafting of interview questions

Implementation Plan

July-August

Collating students’ individual performance task grade Conducting interview with the teachers

September Analyzing data gathered using Coding Interpreting and summarizing data and results

Post Implementation Plan October-November Conducting LAC session and sharing the results

Suggesting appropriate assessment performance tasks based on results

COST ESTIMATE Expenses Category Amount

Supplies and Materials Deliverables Php 3,000.00 Reproduction and Printing Deliverables Php 4,000.00 Transportation Deliverables Php 1,000.00 Food Deliverables Php 2,000.00

Total Expenses Php 10,000.00

PLANS FOR DISSEMINATION AND UTILIZATION At the end of this study, the results and findings will be disseminated to the teachers in English. This will open opportunities to the series of LAC sessions. Through these, teachers are expected to familiarize with the multiple intelligence test and will be equipped with the skills in crafting differentiated instructions. As a result of these endeavors, appropriate assessment will be provided and students’ multiple intelligences will be catered. Simply, an increase on students’ performance tasks is expected.

REFERENCES 1. Cheyy, K. (2019). Gardners theory of multiple

intelligences. Retrieved in Cognitive Psycology

2. DepEd Order No. 8, Series 2015 (2015). Policy

Guidelines on Classroom Assessment for the K to

12 Basic Education Program as cited in www.

deped.gov.ph.

3. Gogebakan, Derya (2003). How students’

multiple intelligences differ in term of grade level

and gender. Middle East Technical University,

112.

4. Prieto, Nelia G., Naval, Victori C. & Carey

Teresita G. (2017). Practical research. Quezon

City: Lorimar Publishing. 194.

5. Ozdemir, Pinar, Guneysu, Sibel, & Tekkaya,

Cerren (2006). Enhancing Learning Through

Multiple Intelligences. Middle East Technical

University and Bashkent University, Turkey

pp.74-78.





TECHNOLOGY FOR PRODUCING M10DM OIL BASED ON OIL DISTILLATES FERGHANA OIL PROCESSING PLANT

(FOPP)

Ergashev Mahmudjon Mamadjanovich PhD,

Fergana Polytechnic Institute,

Fergana city,

Uzbekistan.


ANNOTATION

A technology for producing M-10 DM engine oil using the K-471 n. additive package has been developed, which provides high

performance characteristics.

KEY WORDS: additives, oil, raw materials, additive, resin, phenols.

INTRODUCTION

The ever-increasing demand for lubricating oils can only be met by expanding their range in accordance with the requirements of the equipment used and the technological capabilities of the oil refining industry. Severe operating conditions of high-powered diesel engines, which are widely distributed in the territory of the Republic of Uzbekistan, impose increased requirements for the quality of engine oil. Oils intended for these purposes must have, first of all, high thermal-oxidative stability, an increased stock of washing-dispersing and anti-carbon properties, as well as long-term anti-wear, anti-corrosion and anti-pressure qualities [1].

OBJECTIVES One of the main conditions for the intensification

of oil production is the constancy of the composition of oil raw materials with a high content of desirable components. A special feature of the Ferghana refinery is the use of a mixture of local high-sulfur raw materials from the Kokdumalak oil field, Kazakh oil (Kumkol) and gas condensate. The chemical composition of base oils depends on the nature of the raw material and the technological parameters of its processing processes, so a cycle of works was carried out at the FOOP to modernize the oil production without reducing the selection of the target product. In order to select the most rational technology for cleaning oil distillates, which ensures the production of oils with the specified parameters and the maximum yield of the target product, the chemical composition of the raw material and the properties of its individual groups of hydrocarbons, which determine such

important performance characteristics of the base oils as viscosity, viscosity index and pour point, are studied in detail.

METHODOLOGY It is shown that oil distillates and deasphaltisates

obtained at the fnpz, along with high-index low-cyclic naphthenic and aromatic hydrocarbons with a high proportion of short side chains, also contain a significant amount of low-index polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons, resins, as well as sulfur and nitrogen compounds. Analysis of the components of base oils obtained by selective purification with phenol at the fnpz revealed a significant difference in their properties, which often do not meet the criteria of international standards, according to which the carbon content in aromatic rings should not exceed 7%. In addition, base oils obtained from high-sulfur raw materials of unstable chemical composition often contain an understated number of high-index components and a lot of resins (up to 3.1 %) [1]. As a result, in order to obtain motor oil of the M-10 DM brand corresponding to GOST, it is necessary to select different fractions of oil distillate obtained during complex processing, including vacuum distillation, selective purification with phenol, dewaxing and Hydrotreating. The optimal ratio of the base components was found experimentally, providing the base oil viscosity at 100°C within 7.5-8.5 cSt: the III fraction is 45% and the remainder is 55 %. Table-1.

STATISTICAL DESIGN Characteristics of the initial components and 10 DM oil based on them table-1






Indicators

Components of the base oil - OIL 10 DM

III fraction Residual Actual GOST

Kinematic viscosity, мм2/с, at 100°С 6,8-7,8 19,45-20,82 11,96 11,77 11,82 ≥11,4

Viscosity index 96-102 94-95 97 96 100 96

The density at 20°С, кг/дм3 0,885-0,887 0,902-0,904 0,902 0,895 0,900 0,905

Base number, мг КОН /г 8,32 8,25 8,34 ≥8,2

Color on the colorimeter CNT, unit CNT with dilution 15: 85, at CNT

2,7-2,9 6,0-6,2 2,5 3,5 3,7 ≤3,5

Flash point, °C

- in an open crucible

- closed crucible

210-230 200-260 224 232 244 ≥220

Pour temrature, °С -15 -15 -18 -18 -18 ≥-18

Mass fraction of mechanical impurities, %

0,0047 0,0048 0,010 0,015 0,017 ≤0,025

Sulphate ash content, % 0,68 0,71 0,83 ≤1,5

Mass fraction of active elements: - calcium

- - zinc

0,35

0,097 0,32

0,093 0,37

0,098 ≥0,03 ≥0,09

Corrosion on the plates of lead, г/м2 Absent At.

Stability over the induction period of sedimentation (NGO)

Withstands ≥60

However, the complex of additives usually used

to produce motor oil of the M-10 DM type proved to be insufficiently effective when injected into the resulting base oil. Therefore, employees of the Federal customs service, together with the scientific and production enterprise "Quality", conducted a study to select the composition of additives for oil type M-10 DM, providing

a high level of motor performance properties. The compounding series of prototypes distillates with different color characterizing the degree of purification, showed that the required level of quality end product is achieved only by using well-purified base oil, the optimum chemical composition and balanced composition of additives of polyfunctional action K-471 (table-1).





RESULTS The alkaline number is one of the most important

indicators of the neutralizing ability of oils, in addition, it directly or indirectly characterizes the level of performance and performance of motor oils. Sulfonates of alkaline earth metals are widely used as detergent-dispersing additives to motor oils in order to increase the alkaline number. In [2-3], it is shown that medium-alkaline additives based on alkylphenol formaldehyde condensation products are equally effective in improving the cleaning and antioxidant properties of the oil, as well as significantly reducing the tendency to varnish formation at high temperature. The effectiveness of these additives is significantly affected by the nature of the cation in their structure. For example, in terms of dispersing and anticorrosive efficiency, calcium sulfonate is somewhat superior to the corresponding barium and strontium sulfonates, but the most toxic barium sulfonate shows the greatest effect in increasing thermal stability [2]. In addition, sulfonates of alkaline earth metals, with a General reduction in the content of additives in the composition, provide high physical, chemical and functional properties.

SUGGESTIONS As a result of the conducted experiments, it was

found that this base oil shows the greatest pick-up in relation to the package of K - 471n additives produced by JV Pharma. In addition to neutral, medium-alkaline and 'high-alkaline calcium sulfonates, the package also includes alkylphenol and succinimide additives, as well as high-temperature antioxidant additive K-34 and additive A-22. The optimal concentration (4-6 %) of the additive K-471h was found. Heavy operating conditions for the engines of quarry heavy-duty dump trucks, excavators, and similar equipment for which the M-10 DM oil is intended require increased depressor properties. This effect is achieved by the additional introduction of a special additive K-110 that modifies the crystal structure of solid hydrocarbons while maintaining the mobility of the oil at relatively low temperatures. Since many of the chemicals introduced into the base oil have foaming properties, the use of an anti – foam additive-polymethylsiloxane-is provided for accelerated foam destruction.[4] for the production of M-10DM oil, the Technological regulations and Technical conditions have been developed.

CONCLUSION Thus, the use of the K-471 n additive package in

combination with the K-110 depressor additive made it possible to obtain a motor oil with high functional properties that fully complies with GOST 8581. Due to good quality, m10dm engine oil is widely used by enterprises of the Republic of Uzbekistan and is imported to the CIS and foreign countries.

REFERENCES 1. Sochevko T. I., Pakhomov M. D., Falkovich

M. I., Yevtushenko V. M. Of base and

commercial oils. // Chemistry and technology

of fuels and oils, 2000, no. 2, Pp. 37-39.

2. Sadykhov K. I., Agaev A. N., Velieva S. M.

medium-Alkaline sulfonate additive to motor

oils. // Chemistry and technology of fuels and

oils, 2001, no. 1, Pp. 27-28.

3. Lashhi V. L., Leimeter T, Shor G. I.,

Falkovich M. I. Alkaline number as an

indicator of compatibility of additives to

engine oil. // Chemistry and technology of

fuels and oils, 2001, no. 5, Pp. 49-51.

4. Abdullayev Ibrohim Numanovich, Marupov

Azizxon Abbosxonovich, “THE ANALYSIS

OF LANDS IN SECURITY ZONES OF

HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER LINES (POWER

LINE) ON THE EXAMPLE OF THE

FERGANA REGION”, 2020, №2, doi:

10.36713/EPRA3977





THE PROBLEMS OF PRESERVATION AND USE OF

ARCHITECTURAL MONUMENTS OF THE FERGHANA REGION

Salimov Arif Muslimovich1

DC’s of Tashkent Architectural Building

Institute1

Tursunova Dilnoza Raufjonovna2

PhD applicant of Fergana Polytechnic Institute2


ANNOTATION This article is about conservation and the use of monuments of folk architecture Ferghana Valley for modern function.

Uzbekistan is a country of ancient culture that has given the world architecture excellent examples of architecture and art,

and has exceptionally favorable conditions for the development of all forms of tourism.

KEY WORDS: Posho Prim, Margilan, monuments, history, builings, old buildings, multi-ethnic culture.

INTRODUCTION Famous cities of around the world of

Uzbekistan - Bukhara, Samarkand, Khiva and other cities, a large number of outstanding architectural monuments of the past, from the ancient Bactrian Kingdom to our time, have been preserved. Many of them are unique works of world architecture, preserved almost in its original form.[1]

OBJECTIVES At present, every year the number of

monuments of architecture, cultural heritage of peoples and archeology taken under state protection is revealed. In Uzbekistan, the number of them exceeds 10 thousand. They are scattered everywhere, especially in our ancient cities, but not everyone wants to notice them. One could read the history of Uzbekistan from these monuments alone in the main essays. The work of scientists to create a Set of historical and cultural monuments of the peoples of Uzbekistan helps to identify thousands of previously unknown, overlooked or not properly evaluated works of the past. Only in Uzbekistan, more than 4 thousand archaeological monuments, 3 thousand historical monuments, and more than 2 thousand monuments of architecture and monumental art are now registered.[1]

However, it is important not only to find and study monuments, but also to create conditions under which they will be preserved and used to the maximum extent in the life of modern society, in cultural and educational work, in the ideological, moral, aesthetic, cultural and spiritual education of the people. National policy provides, as you know, for the formation of a qualitatively new, unprecedented in history, multi-

ethnic culture, which concentrates the achievements of the cultures of peoples of different nationalities. This requires us to pay great attention to the study, promotion and protection of cultural monuments of the Republic, Autonomous regions and national districts.[1,2]

METHODOLOGY The solution of these complex problems is

possible only at the level of modern science, with a broad generalization of the experience accumulated in this area. In recent years, there has been an extraordinary increase in interest in the study of historical and cultural heritage, and especially in its use. This is evidenced by a significant number of international scientific conferences and symposiums, a huge number of articles and other materials devoted to these problems. Of particular interest are the methodological aspects of the problem, because until recently we had serious shortcomings in the protection and use of monuments, which are overcome with great difficulty. When determining the nature of modern use of architectural monuments, there are no uniform rules that are suitable for all cases. A differentiated approach and consideration of the totality of specific facts and circumstances is needed to justify the optimal solution. The development of methods, research, and various factors that influence this decision are of great practical importance. This material, which is contained in the book, will be useful for everyone who is interested in the problems of protection and use of historical and cultural heritage and is working on problems.






STATISTICAL DESIGN Works of folk architecture in Uzbekistan,

homes and quarter mosques, in their artistic value, deserve no less attention than monuments of monumental architecture. They are particularly in need of protection, because of the fragility and fragility of structures (broken clay, raw material, frame, beam covered), there are very few of them left. In accordance with current practice, protected mosques are rented out to various artels and production associations. But the problem is not so much in the fact of such a utilitarian use of buildings, as in the undifferentiated approach to them. A sad example of this is the Mirlyar mosque (1869) in the Suzuk-OTA mahalla in Tashkent, where mechanical workshops were located since the 30s of the last century, which caused the magnificent paintings to die in the monument. As for old residential buildings, they were rebuilt, destroyed and destroyed over time. In the process of reconstruction, all the details of the wall ornament, painted plank ceilings, carved doors disappeared. Currently, in the "Suzik OTA" mahallas, a complete reconstruction is underway and all monuments-mosques that are in disrepair are being reconstructed.[2]

2018-19. at the suggestion of the Fergana regional society for the protection of historical and cultural monuments of Uzbekistan, more than 30 monuments of the city of Margilan and surrounding areas were examined - mainly mosques and Mazars (as the buildings over the grave of revered "saints" are called in Uzbekistan), as well as residential buildings. The buildings of the Ferghana valley, especially in Kokand, are distinguished by a high culture of decoration, primarily by the abundance and colorfulness of ceiling paintings.

With frequent alterations, houses constantly changed their appearance and few of them survived. Therefore, the identification of two old residential buildings can be considered a great success. In Kuva, part of the Zainiddin-boy house, built in 1899, has been preserved. Interesting construction plan and rich painting of the figured ceiling with raw walls, clay-Adobe plaster and earthen floor in the area of Gulchaman in the Akhunbabayevsky district. The beams of its ceiling are painted on a red background with a simple floral pattern, blue, green and white paint, and the crates are painted in pairs of red and blue colors. The plan is symmetrical with openings along the axes of each wall. Above the door was a canopy (preserved in a later version). The building served, apparently, as a summer country house: you can still trace in the form of ramparts traces of the Adobe fence that surrounded the garden plot, and opposite the door-the bed of the pond-house. The existence of such dacha buildings in the Ferghana valley in the past was known from survey data, but only one survived.

The decoration of mosques is of great artistic value. The combination of a sparse range of colors with the carving of the Hanako ceiling (1790) in Margilan conveys the features of the old local style. In a different

manner, the ceiling of the Aivan of the Jami mosque in Kokand at the end of the XVIII century is made, where the main lines of the multicolored pattern are underlined with a lot. Many mosques in the Ferghana valley also had a rich and colorful wall decoration, but it has now been lost. The walls of the Kaftarlik mosque are bare, and it is hard to believe that they were once decorated with panels depicting flowers and landscapes.

The flat-roofed architecture of the Ferghana valley in its own way reflected the features of the monumental architecture of the major cultural centers of Uzbekistan. This affected the composition of the Cathedral (Friday) mosques. By the XVI century, a certain type of mosque was established-Namazgoh for citywide prayer on the annual holidays of Eid al-Fitr and Eid al-Fitr. Intended for a large gathering of people, Namazgohs were built outside the city and consisted of an expanded arcade on the Western side of a vast courtyard; the arcade was interrupted by a domed hall, spaced along the Central axis of the building. Friday mosques of the Ferghana valley repeat the composition of Namazgoh in the system of rack-and-beam construction: arcades with domes on pylons are replaced by rows of wooden columns bearing a beam earthen roof, a flat-roofed closed room is allocated for buildings. This type of mosque appeared to have developed by the 19th century and spread from Andijan to Kokand. The attached drawing shows schematic plans of five mosques of this type. They are dominated by an even number of naves, although the Mihrab located on the axis of the building is inevitably obscured by the middle row of columns. In contrast to the monumental Namazgoh, the facade of the closed hall of the Ferghana gallery mosques is always shaded by a portico. This part of Ayvan-has emphasized ceremonial forms: the slightly raised ceiling gets the form of figured plafonds with a rich overlay and colorful ornament, the Archi-i line is broken accordingly-the equivalent of the portal of monumental buildings, the so-called Kayvan, and the facade columns are crowned with magnificent capitals.[2]

Reproduction of techniques inherent in monumental architecture can be noticed in the area of decoration. The ceiling painting was dominated by relief ornament, where the main lines of the pattern were applied with a thick white mass-apparently, a special composition of purified ganch (local alabaster), then covered with gilding. This is a kind of equivalent of the relief ornament' kundal', which is famous for the Samarkand buildings of the time of the Temurids. That is a gilded pattern in high relief adorns the cornices of the ceiling of the mosque margilansai Haldiram and Kuva houses. The ornament of these buildings is unique.

Most of the monuments of Margilan are used for storage and production facilities. In the Friday mosques (the end of the XVIII century) and the Tumba of souls (the beginning of the XX century), warehouses of the city Trade were located. In the mosque of Shirma-Ghiyaz (XIX century) - the sewing shop of the





mining Plant. In Dar mosque (1868) - the weaving shop of the society of the blind, and the walls, columns and ceiling of the Ivan are damaged by looms and mezzanines. A driving school is located in the Kazein mosque (the beginning of the XX century). Educational tables and billboards with ads are nailed on the walls with carved ornaments. The Department of preventive disinfection is located in the Khoja Igiz mosque (XIX century). Segamat Khoja mosque (beginning of XX century) with its beautiful painted ceilings is used as a dwelling house. The winter room of the Friday mosque (1903) in the village of Charvak in the Buvaydinsky district is used as a collective farm warehouse. Most of the buildings are empty.

Until now, not all architectural monuments have been taken under protection, for example, the Pirim mausoleum In Pakhtaabad. As a result, the monument was subjected to unauthorized repairs and its appearance was distorted - internal arches were laid, rough coating hid the brickwork of the facades and the edges of the domes. The same thing happened with the mausoleum of Buwayda (the same area), where the bookmark of the portal arch hid the inscription with the date of construction.[3]

RESULTS Placement in monuments of any kind of

production, where it is inevitable that any devices are attached to walls, columns, ceiling, mechanical damage, clogging, etc., should be categorically excluded. It is absolutely unacceptable to use mosques for housing.

It would be highly desirable to use mosques as premises for temporary or permanent exhibitions of local artistic crafts-ceramics, embroidery, wood carvings, etc. the Idea of using old mosques sometimes comes from the population. In the village of Shahristan (Shahand) in Namangan region, a local retired teacher suggested opening a Museum in one of the mosques in order to exhibit archaeological finds there. The organization of such a Museum in Shahriston district is not only appropriate, but highly desired: next to excavate in the mounds VIII., where the finds could go to the Museum, besides the modern village stands on the site of the city of X-XII centuries, the Excavations are visited by students, tourists of the neighboring resort, here comes the pioneers of the camps. The necessary repair of the premises was supposed to be carried out by public assistance as “hashar”.[3]

Many works of folk art are lost, since neither the national nor regional museums collect details of collapsing buildings. Fragments of the ceiling, wall panels, parts of columns and carved doors must be preserved and exhibited. Concerted action should be taken between conservation societies and museums in this area.

SUGGESTIONS It is known that scientific documentation of

monuments is of great importance for the preservation of monuments. It is necessary to make detailed

measurements of valuable objects, graphically fix plans, sections, and decorative elements. Every year, the flow of tourists and tourists to the historical cities of Uzbekistan increases. To acquaint them with the artistic culture of the republics, it is necessary to bring the cultural monuments in a satisfactory state of exposition. Each society has its own views on heritage and its own attitude to it.

The Republic of Uzbekistan has developed a method of approach to the artistic monuments of the past, which, on the one hand, is based on the principles of historical materialism, and on the other, is based on the need to organically combine the best of what humanity has created on the path of its development with the phenomena of modern culture. An active attitude to the heritage, the desire to " mobilize the past in the interests of the coming one, is characteristic of our entire practice of cultural construction and defines its important features. In other words, the process of forming historical culture does not negate or discard the achievements of past stages of development, but on the contrary, proceeds from the need to further deepen and improve everything valuable that is contained in the culture of the people. The more original and significant this culture is, the more masterpieces it enriches history, the more its monuments are included in the Treasury of the world's historical and artistic experience.[2]

At present, every year the number of monuments of architecture, cultural heritage of peoples and archeology taken under state protection is revealed. In Uzbekistan, the number of them exceeds 10 thousand. They are scattered everywhere, especially in our ancient cities, but not everyone wants to notice them. One could read the history of Uzbekistan from these monuments alone in the main essays. The work of scientists to create a Set of historical and cultural monuments of the peoples of Uzbekistan helps to identify thousands of previously unknown, overlooked or not properly evaluated works of the past. Only in Uzbekistan, more than 4 thousand archaeological monuments, 3 thousand historical monuments, and more than 2 thousand monuments of architecture and monumental art are now registered.

However, it is important not only to find and study the monuments, but also to create such conditions under which they will be provided for preservation and maximum use in the life of modern society, in cultural and educational work, in the ideological, moral, aesthetic, cultural and spiritual education of the people. National policy provides, as you know, for the formation of a qualitatively new, unprecedented in history, multi-ethnic culture, which concentrates the achievements of the cultures of peoples of different nationalities. This requires us to pay great attention to the study, promotion and protection of cultural monuments of the Republic, Autonomous regions and national districts.[3]

The solution of these complex problems is possible only at the level of modern science, with a broad generalization of the experience accumulated in





this area. In recent years, there has been an extraordinary increase in interest in the study of historical and cultural heritage, and especially in its use. This is evidenced by a significant number of international scientific conferences and symposiums, a huge number of articles and other materials devoted to these problems. Of particular interest are the methodological aspects of the problem, because until recently we had serious shortcomings in the protection and use of monuments, which are overcome with great difficulty. When determining the nature of modern use of architectural monuments, there are no uniform rules that are suitable for all cases. A differentiated approach and consideration of the totality of specific facts and circumstances is needed to justify the optimal solution.

CONCLUSION In conclusion the development of methods,

research, and various factors that influence this decision are of great practical importance. This article will be useful for everyone who is interested in the protection and use of historical and cultural heritage and is working on problems.

REFERENCES 1. Azimov I.M. Architectural monuments of

the Ferghana valley. "Uzbekistan".

Tashkent in 1982.

2. Mirzaxmedov R., Murtazaev A., Margilan

floor jewels. “Publishing house"

Fergana". 2014.

3. Salimov A.M. Preservation and use of

monuments architecture of Uzbekistan.

"Science.", T., 2009, pg. 288.





FAST AND ACCURATE SIMILARITY DETECTION IN

TIME SERIES REPRESENTATION MODEL

A.Angeline Valentina Sweety1

1, PGStudent,

Francis Xavier Engineering College,

Department of Computer Science and

Engineering

R.Muthulakshmi 2

2 PGStudent,



Engineering

R.Uma Maheshwari3

3UGStudent,



Engineering

N.Raja Priya4




Engineering

Tamilnadu,

India

ABSTRACT Likeness search and location is a focal issue in time arrangement information preparing and the executives.In this paper,

two novel approaches to perform similarity detection efficiently and effectively. The new information portrayal model

depends on the pattern data of time arrangement, which can give succinct yet include rich portrayal of time arrangement. FAD_DTW can adjust the portions of time arrangement in direct time, which significantly quickens the closeness

discovery process.It extensively compare FAD_DTW with state-of-the-art time series representation models and similarity .One is composed of a new time series representation model and a corresponding similarity measure, which is called

Fragment Alignment Distance(FAD);the other applies dynamic time warping to the representation.It efficiency and

effectiveness validations on various data sets demonstrate that FAD_DTW can achieve fast and accurate similarity

detection.

KEYWORDS: Time series data mining ,Time series , Similarity measures , Data representation models,

Clustering.

I. INTRODUCTION A time series is a sequence of ordered

numeric values between which an interval of points is defined.Time series are generally used to indicate the object with time;hence,large amounts of such data are available from many domains,including speech recognition,financial and market data analysis ,biomedical measurement,sensor networking and moving-object trajectory tracing.Time-series data mining unveils numerous facets of complexity. The most unmistakable issues emerge from the high dimensionality of time-arrangement information and the trouble of characterizing a type of similitude measure dependent on human

observation.To normalize the similarity detection problem and guide the research work,many scholars have noted various benchmarks for similarity measurement algorithms.Most of them can be classified as one of two types: Data representation models.

Representing data in a form that can be effectively processed is the first step of data mining. The ideal representation of time series not only can maintain the original features of the data but also has a simple format. Hence, the representation model should be realized in a low-dimensional space and consider the basic distribution of the data.





Similarity measures. Similarity measurement is the central

technique of similarity search and detection. Distinguishing between two time series or formalizing the difference between two series in accordance with human common sense is the crucial problem. Thus, a reasonable similarity measure should have the following characteristics: consistency with human cognition, consideration of the most prominent features on both the local and global spaces, and the capability to unconditionally identify arbitrary objects.

II. RELATED WORKS Phongsakorn Sathianwiriyakhun[2] has

proposed a fast,accurate,parameter-free shape averaging method that can automatically discover the proper number of subclasses within the training data, and then globally average sequences within these subclasses to generate multiple templates for classification task. The investigation results show that our proposed work can accelerate the general order assignments by huge edge, while having the option to keep up high exactnesses, contrasting and the cutting edge NCC approach. It is likewise seen that our proposed highlight can accomplish similar grouping correctnesses (little lower in a few and minimal higher in a few, with no measurably noteworthiness).In any case, in some datasets where the mistake rates drop down beneath noteworthy degree of 5%, great speedups on all different datasets are accomplished, showing the tradeoff between the characterization correctnesses and the running time it could spare.

Donald J. Bemdt, James Clifford [3] has proposed the Knowledge discovery in databases presents many interesting challenges within the content of providing computer tools for exploring large data archives. Electronic information storehouses are developing rapidly and contain information from business, logical, and different spaces. A lot of this information is naturally worldly, for example, stock costs or NASA telemetry information. Distinguish £bug designs in such information streams or time arrangement is a significant information disclosure task. This work portrays some esseWntial investigations with a dynamic prograrning way to deal with the issue. The example discovery calculation depends on the dynamic time traveling system utilized in the discourse acknowledgment field.

Johannes ABfalg, Hans-Peter Kriegel..en has proposed the most conspicuous work has concentrated on closeness search thinking about either complete time arrangement or comparability as indicated by subsequences of time arrangement. For some, spaces like monetary examination, medication, ecological meteorology, or natural perception, the recognition of worldly conditions

between various time arrangement is significant. Rather than customary methodologies which consider the course of the time arrangement to coordinate, coarse pattern data about the time arrangement could be adequate to take care of the previously mentioned issue. Specifically, worldly conditions in time arrangement can be recognized by deciding the purposes of time at which the time arrangement surpasses a particular edge. In this job, we begin the book thought of threshold queries in time series databases which statement those time series greater than a user-defined query threshold at similar time frames compared to the query time series. We present a new resourceful access method which uses the fact that only partial information of the time series is necessary at query time. The performance of our solution is demonstrated by an extensive investigational evaluation on real world and an artificial time series data.

Gustavo E.A.P.A. Batista, Xiaoyue Wang has proposed The pervasiveness of time arrangement information across practically all human undertakings has delivered an incredible enthusiasm for time arrangement information mining in the most recent decade.While there is a plenty of characterization calculations that can be applied to time arrangement, the entirety of the current exact proof proposes that basic closest neighbor order is particularly hard to beat. The choice of distance measure used by the nearest neighbor algorithm depends on the invariance’s required by the domain. In this work we make a surprising claim. There is an invariance that the network has missed, multifaceted nature invariance. Instinctively, the issue is that in numerous spaces the various classes may have various complexities, and sets of complex articles, even those which abstractly may appear to be fundamentally the same as the human eye, will in general be extra separated under present separation measures than sets of basic items. This reality presents blunders in closest neighbor order, where complex items are inaccurately appointed to an easier class.

Xiaoyue Wang, Abdullah Mueen has proposed the exploration endeavors right now centered around presenting new portrayal techniques for dimensionality decrease or novel comparability occasions for the central information. In the limitless best piece of cases, every individual work presenting a demanding strategy has made explicit cases and beside the incidental hypothetical supports, gave quantitative exploratory perceptions.In any case, generally, the similar parts of these trials were excessively barely centered around showing the advantages of the proposed strategies over a portion of the recently presented ones. In sort to give a total approval, we led a general test study re-actualizing eight diverse time arrangement portrayals and nine likeness measures





and their variations, and giving their effectiveness a shot 38 minutes in time arrangement informational indexes from a wide scope of use areas.In this editorial, we give a summary of these different techniques and present our relative experimental findings regarding their effectiveness.

III. SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

Fig.1 System Architecture for Time Series Representation Model

IV PROPOSED WORK The contributions of our work as follows:

Like other data representation models, Dynamic Time Warping can be applied to the representation model of FAD directly; FAD_DTW is devised based on the concept that similar time series have similar change trends. It is consistent with human cognition and available for various data types; FAD_DTW is time-warping-aware and can deal with data of unequal length in linear time; FAD_DTW transforms the comparison between points into the comparison between change trends, which can address the high dimensionality as well as capture the essential features of time series.

To evaluate the performance of FAD_DTW, we conducted an extensive experiment by using clustering and classification frameworks. This evaluation inevitably involved prominent state-of-the-art methods for both the time series representation models and similarity measures. Experimental evidence that FAD_DTW is an effective and efficient method in similarity detection is presented.

V. METHODOLOGY 5.1 Derivative Estimation Model

Gullo et al. presented a more accurate way to approximate the first derivative of a time series;The DSA estimation model only considers the slope of the line from the left adjacent point to the right adjacent point to the right adjacent point.The derivatives of the first and last points in the series are calculated by their adjacent points as well.Formally,

xh+1-xh h = 1

xh = ½( xh+1-xh-1) h ϵ [. . . ,n-1] (1)

xh-xh-1 h = n

Fig.2 Derivative Estimates of Time Series

5.2 Symbolic Representation Sequences The key idea of the segmentation step is

to divide a time series according to the derivative estimation value of the points.Specifically,it set a

threshold ɛ to judge the change magnitude of the data.If the derivative estimation value of a point is

less than ɛ,that poimt has little change compared to previous one.In this way,FAD can transform the derivative sequence into a symbolic representation sequence.Formally.

λ xh> λ. ɛ

. . . . . .

1 ɛ<xh≤2. ɛ

Rh = 0 |xh|≤ ɛ (2)

-1 -2. ɛ<xh≤- ɛ

. . . . . .

- λ xh<- λ. ɛ

.

Time Series

Data set

Derivative

estimates and

Symbolic

representation

Mergin

g

Process Compute the

FAD_DTW

Classification

and

Clustering

Similarity

Detection





Rh is the Symbolic representation of xh.

ɛ is a threshold value for the change trend.

λ indicates the number of symbols used to

represent the time series.

λ is an integer and is not less than one.

The original series is a sinusoidal signal with

random noise.The series with different scales can

be obtained by adjusting the value of ɛ.The series

become flatter as the threshold value increases.The

values are 0.08 , 0.10 , 0.12 , 0.20.If the derivative

estimation value of a point has little change

compared to the previous one.The change trends of

series with threshold values.

Fig.3 Symbolic Representation Sequences

5.3 Merging Process A fragment of the time series is obtained

by merging adjacent points with the same symbos. To avoid the loss of time axis information, every fragment also records the number of adjacent points that have the same symbols during the process of merging them. For example, the first subsequence of R in Fig. 4 is composed of four zero symbols and can be represented by (0, 4) in T1.

R 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 . . . 0 0 -1 -1 -1 . . .

k1=4 k2=6 k3 kj

T1 (0,4) (0,6) (R3,k3) (Rj,kj)

Figure 4. Symbolic representation of time series.

Fig.5 Merging process of Time Series

5.4 Fragment Alignment Distance The purpose of this subsection is to give clear definitions of the terms used throughout this article. Definitions 1) A time series T consisting of n ordered numerical points can be defined as:

T=(x1,x2,....,xn), xiϵR A time series is usually an observation result of an underlying process.It can thus be defined as a set of successive time instants. Definitions 2) Given a time series T of length n,a subsequence S of T is a part of the series T that consists of contiguous time instants of length m(m<=n): S = (xk,xk+1, . . . ,xk+m-1) , 1≤k≤n-m+1. Definition 3) The similarity measure D(T,U) of time series T and U is a function that measures the distance between them.D(T,U) takes two time series as inputs and returns the distance between them.This distance cannot be a negative value,that is,D(T,U)≥0.

5.5 Similarity Measure In the following part, It propose a new computational method that can find such a warping path in linear time. To align the two series, three cases need to be considered satisfied in the course of similarity measurement. 1)The mapped fragments in T11 and T22 have same symbols,which indicates they have similar change trends.Hence,the distance between them mainly depends on the difference in their lengths.It compute the distance between them by Eq.(3).

D(S1i,s2j)=γx(max{k1i,k2j}/min{k1i,k2j}-1), ifR1i=R2j (3)

Where k1i and k2j are the quantities of focuses for

S1i and S2j,respectively,and γ is a movable parameter to change the separation proportion of





same images to various images..Intuitively, the distance between the same symbol fragments must be less than the distance ones.Thus,It have 0≤

D(S1i,s2j)<1 and γ ϵ(0,1).

2)Due to the time series’ unequal lengths and the time warping awareness of FAD, some Fragments usually remain in one of the series with no fragments in the other series for mapping.Such fragments can be viewed as not being similar to any fragments, which correspond to case 1).It define the distance as Eq.(4)

D(-,Si)=1 (4)

Algorithms Since the objective of our work is to

access the ability of FAD in time series data mining tasks,It employed standard classification and clustering framework for assessment,which include K-means clustering and nearest neighbor classification.

K-Means Clustering The K-means algorithm,one need to

specify the number of output clusters;for simiplicity,it adopted data sets for which relavant classifications are available.Thus,It set the number of output equal to the actual number of classes in each clustering evaluation.Moreover,since the initial cluster cendroids greatly affect the performance of the K-means algorithm.

Fig.6 K-means clustering

One Nearest Neighbor Classification Nearest-neighbor classification is widely known to be a straightforward and effective method to access the performance of various algorithms. The one nearest-neighbor classifications classifies each data instance according to the most similar instance to it.

Fig.7 One Nearest Neighbor Classification

TABLE 1.Data sets.

Data Description The 4 time series data sets employed in this experiment are collected from the UCR Time series Classification/Clustering in Homepage. The data resource is provided by Keogh et al.,which is derived from a variety of applications.Table 2.The type labels require a brief explanation.Some data sets are real,which simply means they were recorded as natural time series from some physical process,for instance,the earthquake signal from sensor reading.Some datas are shapes:these are one dimensional time series that were extracted by processing some two-dimensional shapes,such as leaf profiles or the silhouettes of planes.

Performance in Time Series Clustering FAD is the fastest method among the competing methods. Moreover ,FAD_DTW,SAX_DTW and PAA_DTW all have relatively high performance in run time.Due to the high complexity of DTW,the methods based on it show inferior performances compared with FAD.FAD,SAX and PAA representation methods can greatly improved the time performance of basic DTW.Thus, FAD will demonstrate great superiority in terms of run time as the size of the data increases.

No Data sets Classes Size of training/test

set

Time series length

Type

1 OSU Leaf 6 200/242 427 Shape 2 Lighting7 7 70/73 319 Real 3 ECG200 2 100/100 96 Real 4 Plane 7 105/105 144 Shape





Table 2. Ranking of different methods for k-means clustering results

Fig.8 Time performance in the k-means clustering tasks

VI CONCLUSION FAD_DTW and FAD are more accurate than other methods in both classification and clustering tasks. Uncommonly, FAD_DTW is more precise than FAD in the 1-NN characterization and K-implies bunching errands.transform time series into compact yet feature-rich symbolic sequences by extracting trend information of data and diagonally mapping the similar change trends between series. FAD is devised based on the notion that similar time series have similar trends. Thus, it is a technique dependent on the pattern of the information. FAD_DTW applies Dynamic Time Warping on the representation model of FAD; thus, it can extract the same features of time series as FAD. FAD_DTW has high accuracy in classification and clustering tasks.

VII REFERENCES 1. Fujii, K. Yamamoto, and S. Nakagawa(2011),

``Automatic speech recognition using hidden

conditional neural _elds,'' in Proc. IEEE Int.

Conf. Acoust.,Speech, Signal Process., , pp.

5036_5039.

2. D. J. Berndt and J. Clifford, ``Using dynamic

time warping to _nd patterns in time series,'' in

Proc. Knowl. Discovery Databases Workshop,

1994, pp. 359_370.

3. J. Aßfalg, H.-p. Kriegel, P. Kroger, P. Kunath,

A. Pryakhin, and M.Renz, (2006)“Similarity

search on time series based on threshold

queries,”in Proc. 10th Int. Conf. Adv. Database

Technol., , pp. 276–294.

4. G. E. Batista, X. Wang, and E. J. Keogh, “A

complexity-invariant distance measure for time

series,” in Proc. SDM, 2011, pp. 699–710.

5. X. Wang, A. Mueen, H. Ding, G. Trajcevski, P.

Scheuermann, and E. Keogh,(2012)

“Experimental comparison of representation

methods and distance measures for time series

data,” Data Mining Knowl. Discovery, vol. 26,

no. 2, pp. 275–309, Feb.

6. E. J. Keogh and M. J. Pazzani, ``Derivative

dynamic time warping,(2001)'' in Proc. SIAM

Int. Conf. Data Mining, , pp. 1_11.

7. C. Ratanamahatana and E. J. Keogh(. 2004),

``Making time-series classi_cation more

accurate using learned constraints,'' in Proc.

SIAM Int. Conf. Data Mining, Lake Buena

Vista, FL, USA, Apr, pp. 11_22.

8. E. Keogh, K. Chakrabarti, M. Pazzani, and S.

Mehrotra(2001), ``Dimensionality reduction

for fast similarity search in large time series

databases,'' Knowl. Inf. Syst., vol. 3, no. 3, pp.

263_286,.

9. Q. Li, B. Moon, and I. F. V. Lopez(2004),

``Skyline index for time series data,'' IEEE

Trans. Knowl. Data Eng., vol. 16, no. 6, pp.

669_684, Jun..

0

1

2

3

1 2 3 4 5 6

Series3

Series2

Series1

DATA SIZE

PAA_DTW SAX_DTW FAD_DTW

10 0.705 0.666 0.322 30 0.805 0.827 0.48 50 0.555 0.845 0.376 40 0.994 0.777 0.698 90 0.666 0.699 0.393 60 0.589 0.643 0.484





MACHINE LEARNING TECHNIQUES FOR BIOMETRIC FINGERPRINT RECOGNITION USING THE

MAGNITITUDES

A. Angeline Valentina Sweety1,

1PGStudent,



Engineering

Dr. C. Gopala Krishnan2,

2Associate Professor,



Engineering

M. Mukesh Krishnan3



Department of Computer Science and Engineering,

Tamilnadu, India

ABSTRACT

Fingerprint recognition refers to the automatic technique of distinctive or confirming the identity of a private supported the

comparison of 2 fingerprints. Fingerprint recognition is one in every of the foremost well-known bioscience, and it's out and

away the foremost used biometric answer for authentication on processed systems. the explanations for fingerprint

recognition being thus common area unit the convenience of acquisition, established use and acceptance compared to

different bioscience, and also the indisputable fact that there area unit varied (ten) sources of this biometric on every

individual. With the rise of on-line communication and transactions, the demand for security and privacy will increase. There

area unit many solutions already in use to guard counseling and to certify individuals electronically. once bioscience is

employed, it usually triggers a discussion regarding privacy and integrity. One major reason for this can be that fingerprints

from criminals area unit keep in police registers. This paper can determine increased alternatives that may replace less secure

ancient strategies of logging-on to computers. the advantages of victimisation this technology over aging secret, tokens, or

revolving credit technology can become more and more apparent and set the stage for meeting the safety and authentication

challenges of the twenty first Century.

KEYWORDS: Fingerprint Recognition, Biometric,Security, Authentication.

I. INTRODUCTION Positive identification of people may be a

terribly basic social group demand. Reliable user authentication is turning into associate degree more and more necessary task within the internet –enabled world. The consequences of associate degree insecure authentication system in a company or enterprise setting are often ruinous, and will embody loss of counsel, denial of service, and compromised information integrity. the worth of reliable user authentication is not restricted to simply pc or network access. several alternative applications in a day life additionally need user authentication, like

banking, e-commerce, and will like increased security. In fact, as a lot of interactions take electronically, it becomes even a lot of necessary to possess associate degree electronic verification of a person‟s identity. till recently, electronic verification took one in every of 2 forms. it had been supported one thing the person had in their possession, sort of a magnetic swipe card, or one thing they knew, sort of a Arcanum. The matter is, these varieties of electronic identification aren't terribly secure, as a result of they'll tend away, taken away, or lost and actuated folks have found ways in which to forge or circumvent these credentials. The ultimate variety of electronic verification of a person‟s is statistics.





statistics refers to the automated identification of someone supported his/her physiological or activity characteristics like biometric identification, retina, iris, voice scan, signature scan etc. By mistreatment this system physiological characteristics of someone are often became electronic processes that square measure cheap and simple to use. folks have continuously used the brain‟s innate ability to acknowledge a well-known face and it's long been famed that a person‟s fingerprints are often used for identification.The use of fingerprints as a biometric is each the oldest mode of computer-aided, personal identification and therefore the most rife in use nowadays. However, this widespread use of fingerprints has been and still is essentially for enforcement applications. there's expectation that a recent combination of things can favor the utilization of fingerprints for the abundant larger market of private authentication. These factors include: tiny and cheap fingerprint capture devices, quick computing hardware, recognition rate and speed to satisfy the requirements of the many applications, the explosive growth of network and net transactions, and therefore the heightened awareness of the requirement for ease-of-use as a vital element of reliable security.

II. RELATED WORK There is archaeologic proof that fingerprints

as a variety of identification are used a minimum of since 7000 to 6000 BC by the traditional Assyrians and Chinese. within the mid-1800's scientific studies were begun that might established 2 essential characteristics of fingerprints that ar true still to the present day: no 2 fingerprints from totally different fingers are found to own a similar ridge pattern, and fingerprint ridge patterns ar unchanging throughout life. These studies diode to the utilization of fingerprints for criminal identification, 1st in Argentina in 1896, then at constabulary in 1901, and to different countries within the early 1900's. pc process of fingerprints began within the early Sixties with the introduction of component that would fairly method these pictures. Since then, machine-controlled fingerprint identification systems (APIS) are deployed wide among enforcement agencies throughout the globe. within the Nineteen Eighties, innovations in 2 technology areas, personal computers and optical scanners, enabled the tools to form fingerprint capture sensible in non-criminal applications like for ID-card programs. Now, within the late Nineties, the introduction of cheap fingerprint capture devices and also the development of quick, reliable matching algorithms has set the stage for the growth of fingerprint matching to private use. Why

embody a history of fingerprints during this chapter? This history of use is one that different sorts of biometric don't identical to. therefore there's the expertise of a century of rhetorical use and many many fingerprint matches by thatwe can able to say with some authority that fingerprints are distinctive and their use in matching is very reliable. For more historical data, see [2].

III. PROPOSED WORK

IV. METHODOLOGY Identification and verification systems

A person‟s identity may be resolved in 2 ways: identification and verification. the previous involves distinguishing an individual from all biometric measurements collected in a very information and this involves a one-to-many match additionally brought up as „cold search‟. “Do i do know UN agency you are”? is that the inherent question this method seeks to answer. Verification involves authenticating a person‟s claimed identity from his or her antecedently registered pattern and this involves a 1 to 1 match. The question it seeks to answer is, “Are you claim to be?”

Verification

Verification involves comparison a person‟s fingerprint to 1 that pass antecedently recorded within the system information. The person claiming Associate in Nursing identity provided a fingerprint, generally by putting on a capacitance scanner or Associate in Nursing optical scanner. the pc locates the previous fingerprint by observing the person‟s identity. This method is comparatively straightforward as a result of the pc must compare 2 fingerprint records. The verification method is referred as a „closed search‟ as a result of the search field is proscribed. The second one is identification





operate, that is employed to forestall duplicate application or enrollment during this case a recently equipped fingerprint is equipped to all or any others within the information.

Identification

The identification method, additionally called Associate in Nursing „open search‟, is far additional technically demanding . It involves more comparisons and will need differentiating among many information fingerprints that area unit like the objects.

Feature varieties

The lines that flow in numerous pattems across fingerprints area unit known as ridges and also the areas between ridges area unit valleys. it's these ridges that area unit compared between one fingerprint and another once matching. Fingerprints area unit ordinarily matched by one (or both) of 2 approaches. we have a tendency to describe the fingerprint options as related to these approaches. The additional microscopic of the approaches is named item matching. the 2 item varieties that area unit shown in Fig area unit a ridge ending and bifurcation. Associate in Nursing ending could be a feature wherever a ridge terminates. A bifurcation could be a feature wherever a ridge splits from one path to 2 methods at a Y-junction. For matching functions, a item is attributed with options. These area unit kind, location (x, y), and direction (and some approaches use further features).

The lot of megascopic approach to matching is termed international pattern matching or just pattern matching. during this approach, the flow of ridges is compared in the least locations between a combine of fingerprint pictures. The ridge flow constitutes a worldwide pattern of the fingerprint. 3 fingerprint pattems square measure shown in Fig. (Different classification schemes will assign to 10 just about pattern categories, however these 3 square measure the essential pattems.) 2 different options square measure generally used for matching: core and delta, (Figure 2.2.) The core is thought of because the center of the fingerprint pattem. The delta may be a

singular purpose from that 3 pattems deviate. The core and delta locations is used as landmark locations by that to orient 2 fingerprints for consequent matching - although these options aren't gift on all fingerprints.

There could also be alternative options of the fingerprint that square measure employed in matching. as an example, pores is resolved by some fingerprint sensors and there's a body of labor (mainly analysis at this time) to use the position of the pores for matching within the same manner that the trivia square measure used. Size of the fingerprint, and average ridge and natural depression widths is used for matching, but these square measure changeable over time. The positions of scars and creases also can be used, however square measure typically not used as a result of they'll be temporary or by artificial means introduced

Image process and Verification Following image capture to get the fingerprint image, image process is performed. the final word objective of image process is to realize the simplest image by that to provide the proper match result. The image process steps square measure the following: image noise reduction and sweetening, feature detection, and matching. This section is organized to explain initial the sequence of process and verification via a "common" minutia-based approach. this is often delineate while not variants and facultative strategies (of that there square measure many) for the sake of reading flow and ease. it's necessary to notice that, although several researchers and merchandise developers follow this approach, all do not, and even the selection of what constitutes "common" could also be contentious. within the final subsections of this section, variations of this approach, each minutia-based and non-minutia-based, square measure delineate.





Image Specifications Depending upon the fingerprint capture

device, the image will have a variety of specifications. Commonly, the pixels square measure 8-bit values, ANd this yields an intensity vary from zero to 255. The image resolution is that the variety of pixels per unit length, and this ranges from 250 dots per in. (100 dots per centimeter) to 625 dots per in. (250 dots per centimeter), with five hundred dots per in. (200 dots per centimeter) being normal|a typical} standard. The image space is from zero.5 inches sq. (1.27 centimeter) to one.25 inches (3.175 centimeter), with one in. (2.54 centimeter) being the quality. we have a tendency to discuss additional on image capture devices in Section eight.

Image sweetening

Image sweetening may be a comparatively long method. A 500x500-pixel fingerprint image has 250,000 constituents; many multiplications and alternative operations square measure applied at every pixel. each matched filtering and dilution contribute for the most part to the present time expenditure. Consequently, several fingerprint systems square measure designed to conserve operations at this stage to succeed in a match result additional quickly. this is often not an honest exchange. The results of all future operations rely upon the standard of the image as captured by the sensing element and as processed at this stage. Economizing for the sake of speeding can lead to degraded match results, that successively can lead to continual tries to verify or false rejections. Therefore, it's our rivalry that a system providing affordable speed with an accurate answer is far higher than a quicker system that yields poorer match results. Feature Extraction The fingerprint trivia square measure found at the feature extraction stage. in operation upon the diluted image, the trivia square measure simple to discover. Endings square measure found at termination points of skinny lines. Bifurcations square measure found at the junctions of 3 lines. Description of Algorithm

Fingerprint classification will be viewed as a rough level matching of the fingerprints. As input fingerprint is matched at a rough level to at least one of the prespecified sorts so, at a finer level, it's compared to the set of the info containing that form of fingerprints solely.

An algorithmic program is developed to classify fingerprints into 5 categories, namely, whorl, right loop, arch and tented arch. The algorithmic

program separates the quantity of ridges gift in four directions (o degree, 45 degree, ninety degree and one hundred thirty five degree) by filtering the central a part of a fingerprint with a bank of physicist filters. This data is measure to come up with a finger code that is employed for classification. a lot of recently, it's become potential to scan a person‟s fingerprint into storage in an exceedingly pc with the help of optical device technology. so as to prove identification, a person‟s fingerprint are scanned once more within the future by an analogous device, and a match of print to call is verified through system. once a brand new fingerprint image is value-added to info, the FingerCode was calculated 2 times: just the once for input image and a second time for the image revolved of a correct angle (22.5/2 degrees) so as to form the method rotation-invariant (see the cited reference for a lot of details). The image was revolved victimisation the Matlab operate imrotate. This procedure will introduce noise. To avoid this behavior we tend to calculated the FingerCode associated to the revolved image during this way: we tend to rotate sectorization and therefore the orientation of physicist filters of filter-bank of constant angle (22.5/2 degree). this is often appreciate contemplate as filter-bank input a revolved image.

When a brand new fingerprint image is value-added to info, only 1 core purpose is found. On the opposite facet, once associate input image is chosen for fingerprint matching, a listing of candidates for core purpose is found and therefore the matching is performed for every of them. ultimately solely the candidate with the tiniest distance is taken into account. as an example , in info I actually have three pictures Img1, Img2 and Img3. every of them is characterised solely by one core purpose, therefore i will be able to have three core points, every of them associated to a picture gift in info. If i choose a picture for fingerprint matching (let or not it's ImgNew) I found for it a particular range of core purpose (let it N). for every of those N core points (candidates) i will be able to notice the closest fingerprint image gift in info. ultimately i will be able to acquire N distances (as the quantity of core points candidates): I say that the recognized image is that the image with the closest distance I actually have obtained (this distance is associated to at least one of the initial N core points candidates of ImgNew).

The pixel-wise orientation field estimation (the M-function is orientation_image_luigiopt.m) is greatly accelerated reusing previous total computations. The total of parts of a block focused at pel (I,J) will be used for the computation of the total





of block parts focused at pel (I,J+1). this may be performed within the following way:

Once the add of values focused at picture element (I, J) has been calculated (sum of yellow pixels and orange pixels of Figure 1), so as to calculate the add focused at picture element (I, J+1) we have a tendency to merely cypher from the previous add the yellow space and add the inexperienced space (see Figure 2): during this manner it's doable to avoid wasting heaps of computation. In alternative words

SUM (I, J) = yellow + orange

SUM (I, J+1) = add (I, J) – yellow + inexperienced.

V RESULTS





VI. CONCLUSION Biometric fingerprint identification has several usability blessings over ancient systems like passwords. Specifically, users will ne'er lose their fingerprints, and therefore the fingerprint is tough to steal or forge. The intrinsic bit strength of a fingerprint is sort of smart when put next to standard

passwords. Finger scanners have gotten smaller, cheaper, and additional correct, and might be employed in mobile gadgets while not sprucing up the scale, cost, and power consumption. By mistreatment this technology stealing are often prevented and might conjointly eliminate dishonest transactions. Mobile makers and wireless operators square measure incorporating voice and fingerprint scanning techniques in their devices. Fingerprint could be a terribly sturdy desktop answer, and it's anticipated that the desktop can become a tool for biometric revenue derived from product sales and transactional authentication. Most middleware solutions leverage a spread of fingerprint solutions for desktop authentication. Fingerprint could be a proved technology capable of high levels of accuracy. sturdy fingerprint solutions square measure capable of process thousands of users while not permitting a false match, and might verify nearly 100 percent of users with one or 2 placements of a finger. attributable to this, several fingerprint technologies are often deployed in application wherever either security or convenience is that the primary driver. Reduced size and power necessities, in conjunction with fingerprint‟s resistance to environmental changes like background lightweight and temperature, enable the technology to be deployed in a very vary of logical and physical access environments. Fingerprint acquisition devices have full-grown quite tiny sensors slightly thicker than a coin, and smaller than one.5 cm x 1.5 cm, square measure capable of getting and process pictures. so fingerprint has emerged as a extremely distinctive symbol, and classification, analysis and study of fingerprints has existed for many years.

REFERENCE 1. Xudong Jiang, M. Liu and A. C. Kot, (2004),

"Reference point detection for fingerprint

recognition," Proceedings of the 17th

International Conference on Pattern

Recognition, 2004. ICPR 2004., Cambridge,

Vol.1,pp. 540-543

2. J. Berry,(1994), "The history and development of

fingerprinting," in Advances in Fingerprint

Technology, (H. C. Lee and R. E. Gaensslen,

ed.s), CRC Press, Florida, , pp. 1-38, 1994

3. .K. Rerkrai and V. Areekul, (2000), "A new

reference point for fingerprint recognition,"

Proceedings 2000 International Conference on

Image Processing (Cat. No.00CH37101),

Vancouver, BC, Canada, vol.2,pp. 499-502

4. Minwei He, Huimin Zhao, (May 22- 24,2009), A

Identity Authentication Based on” Fingerprint

Identification”, Proceedings of the 2009

International Symposium on Web Information





Systems and Applications (WISA’09), ,pp.261-

263

5. Le Hoang Thai and Ha Nhat Tam, (May 2010),

“Fingerprint recognition using standardized

fingerprint model”, IJCSI International Journal

of Computer Science Issues, Vol. 7, Issue 3, No 7,

pp. 11-17.

6. P. Mohan, S. Anand, R. B. Varghese, P. Aravinth

and D. R. J. Dolly, (2019),"Analysis on

Fingerprint Extraction Using Edge detection and

Minutiae Extraction," 2019 2nd International

Conference on Signal Processing and

Communication (ICSPC), Coimbatore, India pp.

161-164.

7. Kumar, M., Priyanka (2019), Various image

enhancement and matching techniques used for

fingerprint recognition system Int. j. inf.

tecnol. 11, 767–772

https://doi.org/10.1007/s41870-017-0061-4

8. Ragendhu S.P., Thomas T. (2019), Fast and

Accurate Fingerprint Recognition in Principal

Component Subspace. In: Shetty N., Patnaik L.,

Nagaraj H., Hamsavath P., Nalini N. (eds)

Emerging Research in Computing, Information,

Communication and Applications. Advances in

Intelligent Systems and Computing, Springer,

Singapore vol 882.

9. Alsmirat, M.A., Al-Alem, F., Al-Ayyoub, M. et

al. (2019),Impact of digital fingerprint image

quality on the fingerprint recognition

accuracy. Multimed Tools Appl 78, 3649–

3688 https://doi.org/10.1007/s11042-017-5537-5

10. K. Martin Sagayam, D. Narain Ponraj, Jenkin

Winston, Yaspy J C, Esther Jeba D, Antony

Clara, (February 2019) Authentication of

Biometric System using Fingerprint Recognition

with Euclidean Distance and Neural Network

Classifier, International Journal of Innovative

Technology and Exploring Engineering (IJITEE)

ISSN: 2278-3075, Volume-8 Issue-4.

11. Zhao Q., Zhang L., Zhang D., Luo N. (2009)

Direct Pore Matching for Fingerprint

Recognition. In: Tistarelli M., Nixon M.S. (eds)

Advances in Biometrics. ICB 2009. Lecture

Notes in Computer Science, Springer, Berlin,

Heidelberg vol 5558.


https://doi.org/10.1007/s41870-017-0061-4

https://doi.org/10.1007/s11042-017-5537-5




EMOTIONAL MATURITY ANALYTICAL STUDY OF

STUDENTS IN GRANTED AND NON GRANTED SCHOOLS OF GADCHIROLI DISTRICT

Dr. Govindprasad Dubey Dy. Regi. Gondwada University,

Gadchiroli

ABSTRACT Education is development through experience. This experience is gained through society, family & social relations. Education

help to development proper behaviors and thoughts which are morally acceptable.

Even though education is a natural process, word to successfully live in this developed society and to live a peaceful

life one cannot be completely dependent naturally acquired education. One has to make efforts to learn new things language,

daily behavior in cultural life, rules of citizenship means of earning livelihood, social, cultural and religious conduct,

traditions, moral values etc. have to be inculcated by oneself. Since we cannot acquire holistic knowledge through family and

social experiences, it is necessary to establish educational institutions for upcoming generations.

INTRODUCTION Education is development through experience.

This experience is gained through society, family & social relations. Education help to development proper behaviors and thoughts which are morally acceptable. Even though education is a natural process, word to successfully live in this developed society and to live a peaceful life one cannot be completely dependent naturally acquired education. One has to make efforts to learn new things language, daily behavior in cultural life, rules of citizenship means of earning livelihood, social, cultural and religious conduct, traditions, moral values etc. have to be inculcated by oneself. Since we cannot acquire holistic knowledge through family and social experiences, it is necessary to establish educational institutions for upcoming generations.

EDUCATION According to Sanskrit language, Shiksh is experienced and old people guide, direct and inculcate discipline to the younger generations showing them the right path. Other word for education is ‘Vidya’ means combination of 2 words, ‘Vid’ and ‘Dhat’ were meaning is to know self evaluatation. Steps of education process

1. Primary education 2. Secondary education 3. Higher education

Primary Education Middle education fulfills requirements of basic needs which includes general knowledge and business. Primary education is the education provide basic education and the education regulated in India. The aims and objective of education :

1) Full development of personality 2) Development of progressive compliance 3) Development of leadership ability

Types of Schools:-

1) Aided Schools Aided Schools are those schools which receive help from the government and all authorized of the government. The expenses included for the activities implemented by the school, salaries and allowances of teaching and non teaching staff and other expenses include are paid by the government.

Non Aided Schools:- Non Aided Schools are the school which do have government approval but they didn’t receive aid





(money) from Government, These schools are called as ‘Non aided School. These schools run by private Institutes.

EMOTIONAL MATURITIES Nowadays the student class has bear a struggle and result is lot of psychological problems. Anxiety, stress, neonatal, have become everyday things. To study the emotional attachment of youth it is very important to pay attention to the emotions until the person is emotionally mature. Until you can’t face the team, a measure of emotionally maturity is require Emotional Maturity, taking full advantage of one own personality and motivates us to enjoy life through full use of force.

SIGNIFICANCE OF EDUCATION Today, progress has been made in all fields. The stocks of knowledge expending more and more. Also

competition in every field is increase day by day. On this in width sold in order to the overall always of the student is essential. As will as his own personality. It has to be done well. Emotional intelligence makes it possible to develop a personality. Highly emotional for successful adjustment, personalities to handle your emotions will and good future corner must how intelligence.

LIFE TOOLS Following standard questions as a tool for presenting records The emotional maturity scale of Yashwir Singh Y M Bhargav was used to measure emotional maturity analysis & interpretation of information received. In the research presented, the information obtained by the students was segregated and its statistical analytic interpretation were taken.

Table – Table showing the value of the students & students in the subsidies No Granted Nongranted

N1(S)

N2(S)

D1 D2 ‘t’ Significance level

N1 N2 D1 D2 T Signifance level

1 30 30 21.37 14.70 2.41 0.15 30 30 16.06 25.80 1.07 N.S 2 60 60 19.21 23.10 0.10 N.S 60 60 11.96 22.45 2.34 0.05

The table above shows the total number of students as well as students . The values of the (N,1and N2) as well as the standard deduction (d1 & d2) are shown and the value of obtained on the bear of these values a shown.

FINDINGS The most important and final stage of the

research is the finding of the research suggestions for further research. This is called emotional hijacking in scientific terms.

Interpersonal relationships can be handled appropriately with emotional stability and this is a the basis for the next life. Therefore, high emotional maturity is a must among adolescent children in order to have a happy and fulfilling life and to succeed in life. In today’s education system, when students often experience a lack of emotional mainly the research needs to perform research to find out what emotional maturity.

Objectives

1. To study emotional maturity of the aided secondary school students as well.

2. To study the emotional maturity of unaided secondary school students as well as compare the emotional maturity of out heats

3. Comparison of emotional maturity of subsidized secondary school students and non subsidized schools.

4. Compare the emotional maturity of total students in subsidized and non subsidized secondary schools.

Hypothesis: 1) Significant in the emotional maturity of the

aided secondary school students and students with no difference.

2) The emotional maturity of unaided secondary school student and no meaningful difference in secondary school student.

3) The emotional maturity of the unanimous and secondary school unit students is not significant

4) The emotional maturity of all students in subsidiary well as non-subsidized secondary schools is not having much difference.

Scope and Limitations: Granted and non non granted secondary school

in Gadchiroli city will be included for presenting research. It will include only the students of class VII in the Secondary School. This research will be limited to the students of the granted and non granted secondary schoos in Gadchirolli city.





Research Methods The Survey method was chosen for research presented population. The population

Comprise all factors, population is the sum of all individuals or groups of people who want to draw conclusions.All the students of the secondary school in Gadchiroli city were selected as the study population for the research presented.

Sample Selection

For this research,60 students selected from granted schools and 60 from non granted schools with proportion of 30 boys and 30 girls. Sampling has been identified in random manner.

FINAL CONCLUSION 1. Emotional maturity is high and

unstable among the middle school students in granted schools.

2. Comparitavely study between girls and boys shows the value of ‘t’ is

high means 1.96 and less than 2.58 and so difference 0.05 accordingly.

3. Emotional maturity is high in non grant schools comparatively granted among the students of non grant schools.

4. Comparisen shows between the students of granted schools and non grant schools, the value of t is 1.96 means it’s not fit at any stage.

5. Students in non granted schools shows the emotional maturity and value of t is more than 1.196 and s than 2.58 means difference is 0.05.

REFERENCES 1. Deshpande, Prakash and Ghatole N.K.(1997) -

Research Methodology

2. Parsnis N.R. Pragat Shaishnik

Manasshastra,Pune -30,Nutan Prakashan

3. Mule S.S.AND Umathe (2001) shaishanik

sanshodhanachimultatave,Nagpur





A STUDY ON MEASURE THE LEVEL OF ACADEMIC STRESS AMONG THE HIGH SCHOOL STUDENTS OF

GOVT. AND PRIVATE SCHOOL

Dr. Kishora Kumar Bedanta HOD,

Dept. of Education

Derabis Degree College,

Derabish, Kendrapara,

Odisha.

ABSTRACT

The Present study was to measure the level of academic stress among the high school students of Govt. & Private School and also

to compare the degree of stress among boys and girls. The sample of the study consisted of 122 students each from Govt. and

Private school. The data was collecting by purposive sampling technique. The sample was administered academic stress scale

developed by Suchismita and Akankshya. The descriptive statistics and‘t’ test was used to verify the hypothesis. The findings

reflect that the nature of school emerged as a significant factor in the experience of stress. The students of Govt. schools were

experiencing more stress further this study also reflected that there is no gender difference in the experience of stress in now-a-

days.

KEY WORDS: Academic Stress, Students of Govt. High School & Private High School.

INTRODUCTION Academic Stress is one of the major problems

among Govt. & Private High School students. Examination has become a crucial parameter to assess learning for the students time to time. They have the significant row in academic acceleration. The teachers & parents are pressurizing the students to perform better result in Exam. As a result, such pressure can stimulate stress among students. That stress can have both positive & negative effects, at a moderate level the stress can enhance performance and the same stress perceived negatively can result in academic failure consequently lead to various psychological & physiological problems now-a-days.

Stress is a normal part of every man in his life it can create in an any situation of life which may be as frustrated, angry or anxious. Webster dictionary defines that “A condition typically characterized by symptoms of mental & physical tension or strain, as description or hypertension, which can result from a reaction to situation in which a person fells threatened, pressure etc.” An individual can stress in daily life in different ways and it can be viewed as the bodies‟ reaction both neurological and physiological.

The author found that academic stress reflects perception of individual‟s academic frustration, academic conflicts, academic pressure & academic anxiety. Academic frustration is a state caused by harm of some

academic goals. Academic conflict is the results of two or more quality in compatible response tendencies to academic goals. Academic pressure refers that when the student is under heavy demands on time and energy to meet academic goals. Academic anxiety reflects that apprehension of harm to some academic goals. Though academic stress makes a significant contribution in predicting school performance but also act as a negative predictor of academic performance in school children.

OBJECTIVES 1. To compare the academic stress Govt. & Private

High School Students. 2. To compare the academic stress between boys

and girls of Govt. & Private High School.

HYPOTHESIS 1. There is no difference in the stress level among

students studying in Govt. & Private schools. 2. There is no difference in the stress level among

boys & girls student.

SAMPLE The sample consisted of 122 High School students

belonging to Govt. and Private School from Derabish. Purposive Sample technique was used to collect the data. The participants‟ age range between 13 – 15 Yrs. who belonging to 8th, 9th & 10th class.





VARIABLES There are two types of variable to assess the study

such as independent and dependent variables. The independent variable is types of school and gender but dependent variable is academic stress.

TOOLS AND TECHNIQUE USED An academic stress scale was used to measure

stress level among high school students. This scale was designed developed and adopted to Indian conditions by Suchismita & Akankshya. The items are classified into five areas namely Personal Inadequacy, Fear of Failure, Interpersonal difficulties with teachers, Teacher-Pupil relationship / Teaching Methods and Inadequate Study Facilities.

PROCEDURE OF DATA COLLECTION The study was conducted in classroom group

setting and contacted personally in their respective schools for data collection. Prior consent was taken from the school before administering the survey. The rapport was established with the students and instructions were given and participants were asked to complete the scale. The entire procedure took approximately 10 – 20 minutes.

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION The primary objective of the study was to measure

level of academic stress between Govt. & Private high school students. To attain the objective and verify the hypothesis, the data were analyzed using SPSS 18.0, Mean, SD and„t‟ test were calculated. The students belonging to Govt. high school report a higher level of academic stress in all the five factors name: personal inadequacy, fear of failure, interpersonal difficulties with teachers, teaching methods and inadequate study facilities. The obtained „t‟ ration indicates that there is significant differences between Private & Govt. school students on all the dimensions of academic stress, hence null hypothesis that stress level of students do not differ significantly in terms of nature of schools is rejected. The result of the present study is magnitude of academic stress among public school students was particularly high and academic stress, overall adjustment of students were correlated to each other for both public school and private school students. In adequate instructional methods, teacher-student relationships, heavy academic workload, poor physical classroom environments and disorganization surrounding academic assignments and schedules were found to be common stressors among students. The casual factors for the differences in the stress level among the Govt. Students might be due to negative attitude towards school and learning, uneven distribution of student teacher ratio, low socio-economic status, lack of parental involvement due to lower level of

parental education when compared to private high school students. In addition poor infrastructure, less supportive teachers towards academic attainment, monotonous teaching methods, poor interpersonal relationship with other students or teachers also contributes in the increase level of stress.

The second objective of the study was to compare gender differences in academic stress which reflects that there is no significant gender difference in experience of stress hence the null hypothesis that stress level do not differ significantly in terms of gender is accepted. The findings of the present study are that the female are more inclined to suffer from higher levels of distress. They are more likely to endorse the fear of failure than males. Lack of gender difference in the stress level found in the present study might be due to unequal sample size and female students from both the types of schools were combined.

CONCLUSION The present study is an attempt to indicate that

students of Govt. High School experience a higher level of academic stress when this is compared to the students of private high school. Both boys and girls student do not differ significantly in their academic stress score. So the researcher gives more important to them.

REFERENCES 1. Alan H.s, Chan. K., and Elaine, Y.L (2010) work

Stress of Teachers from Primary and Secondary

Schools in Hong – Kong, Proceedings of

International Multi Conference of Engineers and

Computer Scientists, Vol. III, IMECS, March 2010

2. Burnett, P.C and Funshawe, J.P.(1997) Measuring

School-Related Stressors inAdolescent,Journal of

Youth and Adolescence 26(4),pp415-428.

3. Hussain,A.Kumar (2008) Academic Stress and

Adjustment Among High School Students,Indian Alad

Appl Psychology,34 (Special Issue) pp 70-73.

4. Jayanthi,P.(2014) Academic Stress and Depression

among Adolescents: A Cross-Sectional Study,Indian

Pediatrics Journal,Vol 15,March pp 217-219.

5. Kumar,Sanjeev and J.P.Bhukar(2013) Stress Level

and Coping Strategies of College Students,Journal of

Physicalo Edn and Sports Management,Vol 4(1)

January pp 5-11





FILM LANGUAGE AND KAADU (A Critical Analysis of Girish Karnad’s Kaadu, (The Forest))

Mahantha D.U. Research Scholar,

Department of English,

Kuvempu University,

Shankaraghatta,

Shimoga(Dist).

India

Under the guidance of; Prof. Rajendra Chenni

Dept. of P.G Studies and

Research in English,

Kuvempu University,

Shankaraghatta,

Shivamogga (Dist)-577451.


ABSTRACT This article spreads light on how successfully the masterly writing of Shrikrishna Alanahallii in short story Kaadu has

emerged in the form of Cinema under the direction of Girish Karnadii and what are the cinematic elements we can find in the

story. The writer has placidly told how at the same time as seeing their land lords turning monstrous for their egotistical

means, the innocent village people become a part of it without unknowingly. Most importantly, a unique narrative technique

of narrating these sequences with the view point of a small boy has been used. Adaption of this unique technique in the

medium of cinema is a challenging task. Nevertheless, by means of the effective dialogues and the meaningful background

music, photography and so on and the best acting given by the artists, the director has emerged successful in depicting the

monstrous face of human beings. The article is an endeavour to understand the cinematic language, possibility and artistic

nature of cinema.

KEY WORDS: Art cinema, Film language, Point of view, Caste discrimination, Class Conflict, Male domination,

INTRODUCTION Cinema is a huge art medium and a commercial

industry as well. Cinema has turned a mere commodity from an art work as it has transformed along its growth as an art form to massive commercial industry. The low-budget cinemas produced merely with the intention of making money have lead to a situation where it is hard to accept that “Cinema is an art”. At this juncture, the art cinemaiii brought a ray of hope among the people who have deep inclination for films. The art film directors gave a new direction to the film media as they

tried to introduce „cinematic language‟, „structure‟, „artistic and aesthetic elements‟ in cinema. Even the audience have developed among themselves an interest towards such films and also considered the medium of film. The first Kannada art movie Samskaraiv was screened on silver screen in 1967. Girish Karnad who wrote the script and dialogues for Samskara movie and acted in the lead role, has his own influence in the Kannada art movies. Kaadu which hit the silver screen in 1977 is the first cinema which was directed independently by Girish Karnad.






KAADU (The Forest) The friction enkindled between the leaders of

adjacent villages in the matters related to land takes the form of caste differences and a matter of pride, with women, going to the extent of depriving one of their access to food, poisoning the dumb innocent animals, men raping the innocent girls resulting in killing the innocents. Eventually, a holocaust makes the whole village turn into a graveyard. The savagery of human nature is unravelled in Kaadu written by Shrikrishna Alanahalli. There is a skilful use of language in the short story Kaadu. The inhuman activities like exploiting the weaker sections of people and killing them for some caste and gender prejudices and in order to keep hold to the pride of masculine power has been brought out deeply in the writing of short story. While reading this barbarity seen among the innocent villagers, the readers do not feel touched. Similar opinion was seen in the then Newspaper article/review about this novel, that though the catastrophes in the novel similar to those seen in movies, moves the readers, it seems they are ephemeral”

The major short coming here is that the novel does not have a strong base. When a reader goes deep down into the insight of the novel penetrating through all the shattering catastrophic elements in the writing of the Kaadu, there is an emptiness. [Alanahalli, 2010, p. 107.]

Though all these opinions, reviews are not invalid, the readers have to consider this not as a negative element of the novel but as that which the writer has done this purposefully. It should be understood that the narrative technique of the novel has distanced itself from the emotional agitations. The novel Kaadu by Krishna Alanahalli‟s been narrated by the lead role, a small boy by name Kitti. The innocent Kitti‟s understanding cannot discern the atrocity seen in his surroundings. It is for this reason that the entire novel has been depicted with no emotional agitations.

“Kitti‟s innocence has bestowed the Director with many privileges. The narrator has no insistence of questioning or analyzing anything going beyond the narration of circumstances. The narration is posed with no essentials to see anything in friction but to depict things as they are. Thus the novel does not urge the reader to look at the work with a certain approach. For instance; we can look at the point that the narrator does not take to depict with any specific approach about the Chavadi incident wherein Kencha is thrashed for raising his voice against Chandregowda and about the advising villagers who are faulty at heart. This could be achieved only for the reason that the whole novel is viewed through Kitti‟s perspective”. [Shanbhag, 2010, p. 9.]

The short story Kaadu has skilfully used language. The writer throws light upon the other facet of village life. The writing goes deep into the material descriminities of a village life like caste, gender discrimination, patriarchal value system which are the widespread elements of a village life and the atrocities, exploitation, monstrous tendencies of killing one another and giving it a colour of prestige and power.

Viveka Shanbhagv, analyses that inspite of the fact that the writer has deliberately imposed self-limitation in not questioning anything and criticizing anything but just depicting the circumstances as they are, the reader is promoted by such a narrative technique to interpret each circumstance of the short story with multiple dimensions as the author Alanahalli has put forth the experiences, with their complete, complex nature and with the usage of incisive language.

All the above mentioned features which shall have to be essentially present in an artistic movie are evolved in the plot of Kaadu and the plot of Kaadu has multidimensional approach. These factors might have promoted Girish Karnad to present this story in the medium of cinema.

As Karnad himself has told in his autobiography, in this narrative, Alanahalli has poured the familiar experiences of his village life and delineated the violence in village life, the mindless hold of customs in front of which the women were treated animalistic. All these elements are implicit in the narrative. Girish Karnad has opined that this „Krowrya‟ had its own sightful approach and a thematic unity. (The original title of the novel was „Krowrya‟, but the Director Karnad has changed it to Kaadu thereby implicitly suggesting in the title the inherent „Krowrya‟ in the story). [Karnad, 2011, p. 277]

And, it can be viewed that in view of all this the short story Kaadu has been transformed as it is into the form of movie. We can even see that Karnad has shown the whole story with the point of view of Kitti himself as is in the original writing and it is for this reason that the film also moves forward placidly and it appears that keeping in mind the technical aspects the director has not given a serious attempt at analyzing things going beyond the circumstances narrated in the story. But, the medium of art movie needs it to be interpreted beyond the circumstances. Even though the director has presented the movie with the narration of Kitti as is in the original writing, the sequences in the film should be enabled in a way of voicing beyond just narration of things as they are. This is interms of the fact that there is a difference between a story and a cinema. At this point, the opinion of Anantamurthyvi can be referred; However good a cinema is made, but the story writer would feel that there is something lacking in the movie





made based on his story. A movie depicts even more poise the story that which is shown in the original story nevertheless.

It‟s true that a cinema would depict with even more poise the narration in the story. The beauty of the elements which are veiled in narration but shine out in the skilful use of language would be lost in the process of film making. Anantamurthy, 2012, p.284.]

Kaadu is a challenging subject for a movie as it has involved in it the quality of veiling many elements of the story and empowering them in its skilful use of language making them still visible to the readers. The novel Kaadu by Alanahalli, speaks implicitly about many issues. The novel spreads light on several issues like gender discrimination, male domination, feudalism etc., This is why, a director needs to be acutely observant while adopting such a literary work into the form of cinema. If we have to analyze some of the matters which leads to a discussion in several sequences in the novel;

EXTRAMARITAL RELATIONSHIP AND ITS DEPICTION

In the novel, the extramarital affair becomes adultery, debauchery and an unceremonious act in connection with a woman. If a woman is seen doing this, she will be seen as someone who threw the dignity of not only of her house and clan but also of the whole village into dust. Such characters have to surrender to the NYAYA(?!) judgments given by the panchayatsvii which are under the control of men, without questioning them. Dejected by the public who speak bitterly of their personal life, they step forward to take the extreme steps of going away from the village, committing suicide. The characters Kalyani, Savitramma wife of Poojarappa are some example for this in the novel.

On the other hand, these extra marital affairs in connection with men get depicted in a different way altogether. Chandregowda, though married, has a relationship with Basakka of Hosur and the whole village is aware of this fact. No one questions Chandrappa about this matter. Even his wife Kamalavva has no right to question him. She is so helpless that she can only complain about this (not publicly) to god.

Girish Karnad has made a good attempt in this direction. Cinema begins with the close-up scene of „Jiraki Chappaliviii‟, Gowda steps out of his home wearing Jiraki Chappali holding a battery. Kamalamma helplessly looks at the way her husband went and Kitti her elder brother‟s son looks innocently at her interrogatively as he does not understand what her pain is. This is the beginning scene of the film. The Chappali (footwear) has been used as a tropeix to denote the

relation of a man with the outer world. The sound heard from the footwear when he is going indicates the male ego. Thus, this scene effectively depicts on the one hand the male ego and the connection of Chandregowda with the outer world and on the other the helplessness of his wife and the state of puzzled Kitti.

Another point to be noted here, the author seems to stand in favor of Chandregowda. The writer has justified the extramarital relationship of Chandregowda through approaching it with another dimension or giving an explanation that Kamali could not give him children. The other point that the audience should observe in the movie is that Chandregowda considers his extra marital relationship as a symbol of his manhood. He has the odious nature of showcasing his male ego or manhood in this way. A sequence in the film is thus:

When the relationship between Chandregowda and Shivaganga had completely deteriorated, Basakka his mistress sends him a message though a servant telling him not to come to her home for one week as it is dangerous for him to wander alone. But, Chandregowda takes it as a question of his courage and pride and replies that he will come to her house the following day and she should keep the bed ready, he will see to whoever that comes in his way. Saying this he scoffs. Listening to his words, Kamalamma closes her eyes and takes a deep sigh with pain. In what way this behaviour of Chandrappa who speaks in front of his own wife about having carnal pleasures with another woman, is to be understood? This makes the audience ponder over his shamelessness.

The same thing which becomes adultery, debauchery relating to women, is a symbol of manhood, pride and courage relating to men. Such social notions are based on which logical and moral values? Chandregowda stands as an unquestionable person for the fact that he is a prominent person in the village and a big landlord. Chandregowda can use Basakka with the use of his money, power and social status. Whereas, Kencha‟s seduction of Devi enticing her with a saree becomes offence. When Basakka gets lured by money, the moral and ethical values do not strike her as he is having a relationship with a big landlord, but when Devi is enticed just for a Saree, the moral and ethical code of the society holds her as an offender, a debauchee because both Dyavi and Kencha are of lower status. This is the dilemma in the social values.

If we look at the role played by caste in such matters; Kencha not just forces Dyavi but also tries to entice her offering her certain things. Behind his shamelessness, there are factors like Devi‟s poverty, her husband‟s helplessness and incompetency and also the support he has from his master like Shivaganga and





above all Devi‟s lower caste. Due to these things, this matter does not become a considerable issue. It also seems that he is fearless thinking that nobody can do anything to him.

The Panchayati Katte scene has emerged very effectively in the cinema. Frames in this scene are good examples for mise-en-scene x technique. In the Panchayati Katte, all those who are sitting in the „Nyaya Peeta‟ and those who have come to panchayath are all men (except Devi who is standing in the place for accused). The women of the village have kept their ear to the doors, veranda and windows of their houses and eyes towards Panchayati Katte and are eagerly waiting to hear from the proceedings in the Nyaya peeta. As soon as the trial begins, Chandregowda thrashes Dyavi who is not in a situation to utter a single word, infront of all the villagers including her husband Subba.

When Shivaganga speaks on behalf of Kencha, Chandregowda asks him is Kencha a paramour to his wife that he is speaking in favor of him. Retorting to Chandregowda‟s abuse, Shivaninga raises the topic of his illicit relationship with Basakka in front of the whole village. Offended by this, he fumes his anger on Kencha by thrashing him black and blue. This sequence of Panchayth effectively picturises the status that a woman is given in the society and atrocious nature of men and how the women belonging to lower caste are treated as less than an animal. We can see another instance which shows how helpless women are in this system; when Kitti is seen crying on remembering his pet dog Monna, Kamalamma asks him would he cry in the same way on her death like the way he is crying on the death of his pet. This question suggests her insecured feelings towards life; this question makes the audience think whether Kamalamma is bothered thinking whom does she have in her life? Her father‟s house is no more her house; her husband now has a mistress discarding Kamalamma, moreover she has no children; One day Kitti will also go back to his home leaving Kamalamma. Thus, her position is no less than that dog. But, the director has overlooked the possibility of depicting the pain, helplessness and insecurities of Kamalamma even more effectively. It seems that the director is attempting to show everything only through the dialogues as is the case in previously discussed scene. It can be noticed that the cinematic language has not been used effectively. The dialogue written by Shrikrishna Alanahalli has made a tremendous contribution to the film.

To state one more sequence of similar nature from the movie, Singappa, Kalyani‟s husband has burnt her skin on thighs for losing her ear rings in the similar way as the animals would be given a burn on their skin. When Kalyani comes to Kamalamma, suffering from

pain, the later treats her wound consoling her. At the same time Chandregowda turns up there and asks what happened. But, when Kamalamma proceeds to tell about what has brother-in-law has done to Kalyani, he cuts her words and asks her to serve dinner as he has to go to the play and look after the arrangements. This reaction of Chandregowda to Kalyani‟s pain, shows how the whole generation of men reacts to the pain and suffering of women and her exploitation in the hands of this patriarchal society.

The director has brought in the scenes of the play „Prachanda Ravana‟ enacted in the film. In that scene, Ravana owes to avenge the Rama brothers for insulting his sister Soorpanaka. Rama and Lakshmana deform the face of Soorpanaka for expressing her love and in order to avenge this heinous act of Rama brothers, the great scholar Ravana kidnaps Sita which is even bitter. Ravana punishes Rama‟s wife for the misconduct of Rama and Lakshmana. Here, neither Sita nor Soorpanaka are at fault. Both of them are innocents but subjected to humility under the patriarchal values. Thus, this victimization of women for the atrocities of men has come down since ages and this fact has been depicted very effectively in this scene and it can be said that thereby the director has used the possibilities offered in medium of cinema very effectively.

At the end of the film, the „village‟ brings fear in Kitti as he goes on witnessing a series of tragic incidents like Kamalamma‟s death, the carnage in Hosur and the police arresting almost all of the villager and police seen everywhere in the village. Puzzled with the situations he goes to „Kaadu‟ (forest). There, he feels that someone gave him a call. He think its a call of an ominous bird which can bring death and feels scared to reply to the call and sits there in panic. The assumption that listening to the cry of certain bird would bring death to someone who listens it crying. He listens to the cry of such a bird and panics. Similarly, the sad end of his pet Monna and his aunt Kamalamma creates havoc in his mind. The director has tried at constructing the way in which the violence that is happening in Kitti‟s surrounding enters Kitti‟s mind and the dilemma he faces about the relationship between society and the individuals and the form it takes in Kitti‟s mind Ashish and Paul has analysed the status of Kitti‟s mind thus:

“The boy cannot distinguish the specifically man made violence that surrounds him from the more primeval threats presented by the dense forest which, according to a legend, contains a killer bird that calls out its victims by name” [Rajadhyaksha and Willman, 1999, p. 418.]

In the same book, further he has opined that Karnad‟s Kaadu and Benagal‟s Ankur placed both film





makers “squarely within New Indian Cinema‟s ruralism”. [Rajadhyaksha and Willman, 1999, p.411]

Kaadu movie has given a great contribution to the history of the art movie in Kannada. G.S. Nataraj son of G.V. Shivananda has given good acting and even got national award as best child actor for his acting in this film.

The efficient experiment in language in the movie has acted complementary to the best acting given by Amarish Puri and Lokesh in the film. Art direction and music composition by B.V. Karanthxi has played an important role in the film. The use of local tunes in the background music has enhanced effectively the shade of fatal incidents occurred in the village. It can be said that it created a new genre.

Karnad says this about the photography of Govind Nihalanixii: Govind Nihalani has picturised the elaborative Okulixiii scene extraordinarily owing to this background in feature films and through the lighting effect along has given the tragic effects to the movie which had black and white scenes as in European Noir Films. Since eighty percent of the movie is shot at night or within the house, this kind of variation in play of lighting effects has brought its own polish to the movie. [Karnad, 2011, p. 281.]

The original writing which was titled as Krowrya has been changed as Kaadu by the director to keep it implicit. Though the title has been used suggestive of broader meanings he has not thrown light on several issues which could be conveyed as implicitly as the title.

End Notes i Srikrishna Alanahalli was a Kannada novelist and poet. He

became popular for his novels Kaadu (1972), Parasangada

Gendethimma (1978) and Bhujangayyana

Dasavataragalu (1982), all of his novels were adapted into

films. ii Girish Karnad was an Indian actor, film director, Kannada

writer, playwright who predominantly worked in South Indian

cinema and Bollywood. iii The term "art cinema" is one of the most familiar in film

studies, marking out simultaneously specific filmmakers,

specific films, specific kinds of cinemas, and, for some writers,

specific kinds iv Samskara is a 1970 Indian Kannada-language film written

by U. R. Ananthamurthy based on his eponymous novel, and

directed and produced by Pattabhirama Reddy. v Vivek Shanbhag is a story writer, novelist

and playwright in Kannada. He is the author of eight works of

fiction and two plays, all of which have been published

in Kannada. vi U. R. Ananthamurthy was an Indian contemporary writer

and critic in the Kannada language. He is considered as one

of the pioneers of the Navya movement. He is the sixth writer

to be honored with the Jnanpith Award for the Kannada

language. vii Panchayat is a village council in India. viii It’s a foot wear made up of leather. ix Trope is a word used in an literal sense to create a powerful

image. x Mise-en-scene is the arrangement of the scenery, props, etc.

on the stage of a theatrical production or on the set of a film. xi B.V. Karanth was a noted film and theatre personality

from India. Throughout his life he was director, actor and

musician of modern Indian theatre both in Kannada as well

as Hindi. xii Govind Nihalani is an Indian film director,

cinematographer, screenwriter and producer, known for his

works in Hindi cinema. xiii Okuli is a Hindu spring festival, bonfires are lit and

coloured water thrown on celebrants.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1. Alanahalli, Shreekrishna. Kaadu, Bharathi

Prakashana, 2010.

2. Anantamurthy, U.R. and anchr. Tejashree, Ja.Na.,

Suragi, Akshara Prakashana, 2012.

3. Eisenstein, Sergei. The Film Form, A Harvest Book,

1977.

4. Kaadu, Dir. Girish Karnad, L N Combines.1973.

5. Karnad, Girish. Aadadata Aayushya, Manohara

Grantha Mala, 2011.

6. Kuhn,Annette. and Westwell,Guy. Dictionary of

Film Studies, Oxford University Press, 2012.

7. Monaco, James. How to Read a Film, Oxford

University Press, 2009.

8. Rajadhyaksha, Ashish. and Willman, Paul.

Encyclopaedia of Indian Cinema, Oxford University

Press, 1998.

9. Samskara, Dir. Pattabhi Rami Reddi, Ram

Manohar Chitra, 1970.

10. Shanbhag, Viveka. Shri Krishna Alanahalli

Vaachike, NudiPustaka, 2010.

11. Tabbaliyu Neenade Magane, Dir. Girish Karnad

and B.V. Karanth, Chandulal Jain, 2007.

12. Vamsha Vruksha, Dir. B.V. Karanth and Girish

Karnad, AnanthaLakshmi Films, 2008.


https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Poet

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/India

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kannada

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/U._R._Ananthamurthy

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pattabhirama_Reddy_Tikkavarapu

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Playwright




https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kannada_language

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kannada_literature#Navya

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jnanpith



https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hindi_theatre

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Indian_film

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hindi_cinema




PSYCHOLINGUISTIC FАCTORS OF SPEECH EFFECT

Qurbanov Elbek Elmurodovich

Doctorate of Andijan State University

АBSTRACT The given аrticle deals with psycholinguistic fаctors of speech effect and their working process. The investigation from which

this information is drawn was the study into the acquisition of linguistic knowledge and linguistic processing.

KEY WORDS: speech effect, psycholinguistic fаctor, linguistics, phonological process, curriculum, automatisation.

INTRODUCTION А large part of our daily life exists of interаctions with our family, friends, neighbors, colleagues,

officiаls and others. These interactions differ in the way interlocutors use language to express themselves, for instance in word choice, pronunciation and sentence structure. One of the most important dimensions of this linguistic variation is formality, but while most people can make an intuitive distinction between formal and informal manners of speech, it is an ongoing challenge to grasp the exact relation between particular speech situations and the corresponding linguistic characteristics. As Dittmar claims, there is an urgent need to refine existing models of linguistic variation by investigating this relation in more detail.

MATERIALS AND METHODS During this research various methods and materials were used written by different famous scholars. Various studies revealed that certain linguistic features occur more in formal than in informal language or vice versa. The concept of formality is not as straightforward as one might think though, because formality is influenced by many parameters, such as the setting, the topic of conversation, the modality (written versus spoken language), and the speaker‟s audience, which potentially have different impacts on speech behavior. Following Bell, who argued that “speakers design their style primarily for and in response to their audience”, this paper focuses on the parameter audience and addresses the question whether speakers express the same idea differently to interlocutors with whom their relation is either formal or informal.

DISCUSSION Many scholars assume that two kinds of knowledge present in the model become more accessible as a result of frequency of use. Fluency is seen as the result of the automatisation of knowledge.

Learners would be seen to build up more and more knowledge of the grammar and the lexicon and to make that knowledge available more and more quickly as a result of practice. Both declarative and procedural knowledge develop in this way: there is general agreement that knowledge is in some way strengthened as a result of use. Views differ, however, as to how this process is carried out. Anderson, for example, claims that the same knowledge may be held in both procedural and declarative form. He argues that declarative knowledge can become proceduralised to a point where it becomes autonomous. In terms of our study here, if this view is correct we would expect there to be continuous development in the L2 for each individual in both knowledge and fluency over time. The critical variable for fluency would be the extent of the linguistic knowledge and the extent to which that knowledge had been automatised. More knowledge and more automatisation would lead to swifter passage through it. Both would depend on exposure. There would be no barrier to prevent development and there would be no reason to expect much variation between mature speakers of the L1. Under the second view, the relationship between knowledge and processing is reversed. This view is associated with the work of Pienemann. He claims that the development of the knowledge of language depends on the ability to process the L2. He attaches particular importance to the creation of linguistic relationships across phrase boundaries and argues that learners cannot develop knowledge of such relations unless they have already attained a certain level of processing capability. The reason why individuals may not have that ability may be physiological, such as a less well-develop. As we have seen in Section 1, there is good evidence to show that differences it can affect language learning. In this case we would expect learners to vary individually and in a parallel way in the L1 and the





L2. Their linguistic knowledge would develop once they have attained a certain level of processing ability. Paradis insists on the fact that implicit competence is qualitatively very different from explicit knowledge: „explicit knowledge is conscious awareness of some data (utterances) and/or of their explicit analyses (structure). Implicit competence, on the other hand, is a set of computational procedures (of which the speaker is unaware) that generates sentences. A crucial point is that „metalinguistic knowledge does not evolve or change into implicit linguistic competence. We have two different sources of knowledge one that remains explicit, the other that independently develops in the form of implicit competence. This also has implications for the role of the memory systems. If L2 users rely more on declarative knowledge, then this undoubtedly increases the load on the STM. This could account for the larger variation in fluency of even relatively advanced L2 users compared to that of native speakers and learners at intermediate level. Indeed, as Paradis points out, „speeded-up control over explicit rules is not the same as automatic use of implicit competence‟. As regards our study here, this view would lead us to expect all subjects to perform at a lower level in the L2 than in the L1. In the L1, learners have acquired the grammatical knowledge and proceduralised it in one natural implicit process. In the L2, learners may have acquired the grammatical knowledge by a different, explicit route and automatised it by general cognitive learning mechanisms. This view therefore implies that there is a differently balanced combination of declarative and procedural knowledge. The critical variable here would be the amount of linguistic knowledge learnt through the implicit as opposed to the explicit route. This understanding of the psycholinguistic factors that contribute to fluency gives rise to four specific research questions to be examined in the context of our longitudinal study. In addition to this, fluency in the context of automatised knowledge: mini-story recall subjects were required to repeat a mini-story. This consists of four sentences which together provide an account of some kind of event. An investigator reads the mini-story to the subject, who is then asked to reproduce as much of it as he or she can immediately after hearing it. The mini-stories are deliberately too long to be held in the research. The subject has to decode the meaning and then recode it using linguistic knowledge which they possess in their own linguistic storage systems. This task places the emphasis on the retrieval process which is taken to be essential for fluency. The quantitative product consists of percentage scores indicating the amount of exact repetition of the forms offered.

RESULT The intention is to reveal the degree of automatisation of knowledge. If it is correct to assume that L1 knowledge is more „implicit‟ than L2 knowledge, then the L1 performance will be higher. We would also expect that between Time 1 and Time 2 the necessary L2 language will have become more automatised and that this would give rise to increased scores. One possible interpretation of this part of the evidence is that the less able L2 learners have difficulty in storing knowledge. The problem is not so much that the less able learners can‟t learn forms but that they have difficulty in storing language forms and procedures. A salient and unexpected fact is that the Low group performed less well on Recall in the L1 than they did in the L2 at Time 2. This would suggest that any storage difficulty that these subjects may have could also apply in their L1. It may be that these learners have difficulty in creating, storing and recalling language productions whether implicit or explicit in any language.

CONCLUSION Finally, we will seek briefly to integrate the findings of this experiment with some of the experiments. Despite what has just been said, it is likely that how WM actually works and how it may fail to function as well in the L2 as in the L1 remain key issues. There are many views as to why this may be the case, and some of these have produced evidence similar to this study. There are similarities with some of the evidence presented as they suggest that performance may be influenced by the age at which the speaker acquired knowledge. All these learners have learned their L2 after the age of seven. Rosen and Engle point to high-memory-span participants as those who can complete tasks whilst monitoring.

REFERENCES 1. Ager, Dennis. 1990. Sociolinguistics and contemporary

French. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

2. Akaike, H. 1973. Information theory as an extension of the

maximum likelihood principle. In B. N. Petrov & F. Csáki

(eds.), Second international symposium on information

theory, 267–281. Budapest: Akademiai Kiado.

3. Baayen, Harald. 2008. Analyzing linguistic data: A

practical introduction to statistics using R. Cambridge:

Cambridge University Press.

4. Bell, Allan. 1984. Language style as audience design.

Language in Society 13(2). 145–204.

5. Bell, Allan. 2001. Back in style: Reworking audience

design. In Penelope Eckert & John R. Rickford (eds.), Style

and sociolinguistic variation, 139–169. Cambridge:

Cambridge University Press.

6. Berruto, Gaetano. 2010. Identifying dimensions of

linguistic variation in a language space. In P. Auer & J

Schmidt (eds.), Language and space: An international

handbook of linguistic variation. Volume 1: Theories and

methods, 226–241. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.





USE OF A CIRCULAR TRAINING METHOD TO DEVELOP MOVEMENT SPEED

Musaev Bahrom Bahtiyorovich Candidate of Philosophical Sciences,

Associate Professor of Uzbekistan State

University of Physical Culture and Sport

Nurmamatova Sarvinoz Qurbon Qizi Master of Uzbekistan State University of

Physical Culture and Sport,

Tashkent,

Uzbekistan

ANNOTATION In this article, the proper selection of methods and tools for the development of movement speed in school children, the

development of a system of action using critical and sensory cycles and various tests. The purpose of our work is to

provide special training sessions on the development of students in physical education classes.

INTRODUCTION Physical culture and sports should become an integral part of the overall culture of every citizen of our country. At the present stage of the development of the humane society, issues related to improving the overall level the physical training and development of physical activity of schoolchildren in the field of physical culture and sports are of particular importance. The educational process in general education schools involves the establishment of the basics of physical training, the formation of the necessary recourses of students’ mobility, skills and abilities, their comprehensive development. The search for more effect bye ways to improve the quality of movement will help to improve the physical education of schoolchildren. The development of movement activities is characterized by periods of “critical or sensory” periods, that is the evidence for a purposeful influence on the physical and physical development of children. Numerous studies by physical education experts show that unless these cycles are used, the development of physical abilities will not take place at all, or may occur with greater difficulty and at a much elder age. Currently, it is not possible to introduce daily physical education classes for objective reasons, so many experts have identified certain physical attributes (speed of movement, speed of strength) etc. To harmoniously develop the physical capabilities of young children to improve the physical education of schoolchildren. Recommend that you make the most of the periods that promote targeted development. During this time, the children’s body’s ability to perceive the selective effects of selected exercises is enhanced.

One of the important issues of the younger generation’s physical education is the search for effective tools and techniques that can help children develop dynamic activities. Accordingly, the need to do research with young school- age children to develop a method for developing physical activating, which is the basis of their physical education programs will be made more urgent. This age was considered appropriate for research because in the target effect had the greatest effect ( 1.5,6), and the rapid development of movement activity occurred at a young school age.

THE PURPOSE OF THE STUDY Improve the method of physical education of

primary school students in physical education classes using targeted exercise to develop movement speed in circular method.

In the course of the lesson, taking into account the sensitivity cycle of movement development and the use of this type of exercises aimed at improving this quality, the use of turnaround exercise can significantly increase the rate of development of early childhood activity.

ORGANIZATION OF PEDAGOGICAL EXPERIENCE

It was organized at the secondary school in 29 the Qarshi under the educational process. A pedagogical experiment was conducted with small school- age children to determine the effectiveness of a developed method of speeding up movement (testers – 60, three – grade students aged 8.9 years). Control group sessions were conducted with a physical education teacher in the traditional physical education program. In the experimental group, during





the main part of the lesson, students performed specific exercise of 8 to 10 minutes. The developed method included the performance of four series of cycles (15 seconds each), the interval between them was 30 second, and 1 minute between the series. The duration of this method was 8 weeks of 2 lessons per week.

The training set included the following exercises: (1,2- table)

Running in a standing position (the testers try to bend their knees as much as possible to the rubber band hanging horizontally at the height of their thighs);

Jumping on the rope (trying to make as many jumps as possible on the two legs being tested by the signal);

Raising the body from the back position (trying to do as much as possible in the initial position with the knees being tested by the signal);

Running with a whip (trying to touch as much as possible, alternating the palms of the palm of his signal – tested stick);

Horse racing for 3x10 meters (from the starting position at the top start forward);

Jump up (full body position from jumping position to full position);

Relaxing (initial position: - blacking. h). Acceleration to 10 m (from high start).

Before the experiment, students were tested, and

the following tests were used to determine and

evaluate the rate of progress of movement:

Comparativ analysis of boys’ scores in the study groups at the beginning of the pedagogical experiment

Table 1

Т/р Control norms Control group Experiment group

Р

1. 30 м to run, second 6,7±0,38 6,3±0,11 <0,05 2. 60 м to run, second 11,4±0,11 10,3±0,18 <0,05 3. Jump up (according to Абалаков ), см 27,7±1,20 36,2±1,93 <0,05 4. Jump from position to length, см 135,1±14,20 154,2±6,50 <0,05 5. Jumping on the rope (15 сек), Times 17,3±2,1 21,1±2,1 <0,05 6. 3х10 Mossy running, (сек) centimeters 11,20±0,31 11,8±0,32 <0,05

Comparativ analysis of girls’ scores in the study groups at the beginning of the pedagogical practice Table 2

Т/р

Control norms Control group Experiment group

Р

1. 30 м to run, second 6,8±0,30 6,7±0,17 <0,05 2. 60 м to run, second 11,7±0,28 10,8±0,20 <0,05 3. Jump up (according to Абалаков ), см 27,35±1,86 31,6±1,82 <0,05 4. Jump from position to length, см 130,1±4,35 133,1±7,92 <0,05 5. Jumping on the rope (15 сек), Times 18,12±1,7 18,1±1,3 <0,05 6. 3х10 Mossy running, (сек) centimeters 12,9±0,40 10,1±0,22 <0,05 1. Running 30 m (low start, speed quality, reactivity

ability, three attempts completed, best result counted);

2. Run 60m (high start, speed attributes are assessed, three attempts were made, the best result is taken into account);

3. Jump to length (speed- strength assessment; three attempts were made, the best result was taken inti account);

4. Mock jugging (3x10m) ( speed assessment of the learner);

5. Jumping rope (two- foot, speed assessment);

6. Jumping from position to position (speed – power quality assessment, three attemps were made, the best result was considered).

RESULTS OF THE STUDY The results obtained after the statistical treatment showed the effectiveness of the methodology used to develop the speed of movement in young children. It was found that there was no difference in physical among the control and experimental group students

before the experiment began (R ). Over the

cource of the whole pedagogical experiment, control over small school- age children has shown that





exercise (rotation method) using exercises that promote rapid activity is the better than traditional

practice (Table-3,4).

Comparative analysis of boys’ scores in the study groups at the end of the pedagogical experiment

Table 3


Р

1. 30 м to run, second 5,8±0,31 5,7±0,12 <0,05 2. 60 м to run, second 10,1±0,26 9,7±0,21 <0,05 3. Jump up (according to Абалаков ), см 29,7±1,36 35,6±1,87 <0,05 4. Jump from position to length, см 140,3±13,17 151,6±6,42 <0,05 5. Jumping on the rope (15 сек), Times 16±1,6 19±1,3 <0,05 6. 3х10 Mossy running, (сек) centimeters 10,9±0,36 10,6±0,28 <0,05

Comparative analysis of girls’ scores in the study groups at the end of the pedagogical experiment

Table 4


Р

1. 30 м to run, second 5,9±0,24 5,8±0,20 <0,05 2. 60 м to run, second 10,3±0,28 9,8±0,17 <0,05 3. Jump up (according to Абалаков ), см 28,3±1,96 33,6±1,76 <0,05 4. Jump from position to length, см 138,1±4,25 148,6±8,92 <0,05 5. Jumping on the rope (15 сек), Times 19,7±1,4 20,1±1,6 <0,05 6. 3х10 Mossy running, (сек) centimeters 11,2±0,34 10,8±0,28 <0,05 In conclude, the test results of the group participants in the pedagogical experiment showed that the proposed method was much more effective than the program used in school practice and confirmed that its use would be of great value for developing speed of movement at a young school age.

REFERENCES 1. “Жисмоний тарбия ва спорт тўғрисида” ги

қонун./ Янги таҳрир/ № 394, 04.09.2015 й.

2. Ўзбекистон Республикаси Президентининг

“Болалар спортини ривожлантириш

жамғармасини тузиш тўғрисида”ги қарори.

Халқ сўзи 2002 йил 24 октябр.

3. Эштаев А.К. Спорт гимнастикаси

машғулотининг назарий асослари. Услубий

қўлланма. Т. ЎзДЖТИ нашриѐт матбаа

бўлими, 2009 йил.

4. Саломов Р.С. “Жисмоний тарбия назарияси ва

услубияти” “Ита-Пресс” Ўқув қўлланма. 2014

йил.

5. Эштаев А.К., Карабаева Д.С., Хасанова Н.Р.

Бадиий гимнастикада буюмсиз бажариладиган

машқларни ўргатиш услуби. Ўқув қўлланма.

Т.; “Фан ва технология” нашриѐти, 2013 йил.





THE PECULIARITIES AND CHALLENGES WITH LEARNERS AGE DIVERSITY IN EFL STUDENT GROUPS

Hamidov Nodirbek Zokirjon ugli Mastery degree of Department of English Phonetics,

Andijan State University,

Andijan, Uzbekistan

ABSTRACT This article is focused on determination of disputable issue weather the age diversity in EFL classes influence on proficiency

and acquisition of the learners. Moreover, the aim of study is to identify the positive and negative sides of Age Diversity in

English classes. The many aspects of diversity in education, with particular emphasis in this paper on English as a Foreign

Language teaching and learning, are interesting subjects to study. The presence of diversity does not exist without challenges;

therefore, the focus here in examines how diversity and its challenges are present in language, learner levels, culture,

ethnicity, religion, attitude, and educational systems themselves in non-English speaking countries.

KEY WORDS: factors, process, students, age, topic, diversity, system, method, research, level, gender, male, female,

education.

INTRODUCTION Over many years, since humankind started

educating, they have perceived many methods and approaches of teaching- learning process. Time by time, people changed some useless ways of teaching with more effective ones. Nowadays, teachers are well qualified and proficient so that except paying attention to methods and approaches they take into consideration other factors that may influence to teaching-learning process such as native language influence, age influence, gender influence, etc.

For my own work, I decided to choose the topic in which I mostly interested and personally experienced. English as a Foreign Language instructor worldwide often struggle to teach English to their foreign language-speaking students. This is due not only to linguistic diversity or differences, but also due to the diversity of the learner levels in the classroom, the ethnic, cultural and religious diversity present in classrooms, and the attitudes of the learners themselves regarding the necessity of learning English. There is also the matter of diversity in foreign education systems’ biases in practice toward the assessment and promotion of students. Teachers do not only on the numerous challenges face the focus here, it also encompasses the pressure to achieve in English language, which is placed on foreign students, and at times creates a stressful classroom environment for them.

MATERIALS AND METHOD In order to conduct this research various

methods were used in this paper. Even though it was somewhat difficult to select the methods appropriate for

the current research, the researcher found some ways, which were effective for achieving the goal of this research. Firstly, there was an observation. Observations were held during the lessons. Next important method was need analysis of learners. Questionnaires were distributed to analyze the significant features of learners. Moreover, survey was held to identify the differences of different aged learners in acquisition process. It is very significant to point out that all methods used during the research completed each other, and helped to come to results and achieve the goal of the research work.

As a subject of the research, the author observed a group of learners studying in study center “West Mood”, where he works. The students were selected according to the level of their proficiency at a target language. Subjects were both male and female, but they were not the same age, hence all of them had almost the same level of proficiency in a current language. Their native language was Uzbek. Before selecting them as a group, he has analyzed the needs of learners and their knowledge at a current sphere. All students are acknowledged with basic item of the language. The lessons have been being conducted three times a week afternoon. The center is located in Andijan. The lessons are conducted in a friendly atmosphere, using interactive method of learning English.

Below the information about the subjects of the target research is given. Overall, there are nine learners:

4 females and 5 males

5 adults and 4 teenagers

all learners are Uzbeks





Information about the subjects

RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS The five-month teaching was important and

reliable in testing the suggested hypothesis in practice. The next stage of the investigation was to interpret the collected data. Before making final decisions, the researcher thoroughly studied the results and questionnaire answers. According to questionnaires, it was obvious that all students were weak at speaking and lack at practicing what they have learnt. To examine the

role of age as a moderating factor in the FL acquisition, the researcher observed the subjects as two separate sub groups. As there were nine students of different age, it was valid to divide them into adults and teenagers. Comparing the expected learners’ needs and actual needs that determined in the course, we could say that they are fitting each other. Overall, there were 30 items and the test was graded for 30 points. To see the blank sheet of Test look for:

Name Age Gender Nationality

Gavhar 20 Female Uzbek

Bekzod 20 Male Uzbek

Husniddin 19 Male Uzbek

Qozimjon 12 Male Uzbek

Mominjon 12 Male Uzbek

Madina 17 Female Uzbek

Umida 15 Female Uzbek

Anvar 26 Male Uzbek

Shohista 22 Female Uzbek





Name The scores Percentage of scores

(Out of 30) (Converted into 100 points)

Gavhar

23

76%

Bekzod

27

90%

Husniddin

20

66%

Qozimjon

18

63%

Mominjon

22

73%

Madina

27

90%

Umida

22

73%

Anvar

23

76%

Shohista

25

84%

In the Table above, the graphic representation of data about the scores that the subjects got on the Test is presented. Considering the fact that the test was designed for starters of language practicing, we can observe that subjects managed the test quite satisfactory.

CONCLUSION The whole period of conducting the research has helped me realize that teaching language is ongoing and challenging process. It requires a teacher to constantly work on her/himself, get abreast of every innovation in the field of linguistic methodology and bring every new method into the classroom by thoroughly selecting the most effective and the most productive ones. Similarly, selecting and adapting course materials is a decisive step in designing a language course. The target research is my first official investigation paper conducted by me as a young beginning EFL teacher. It gave me the confidence to experiment with any method of language teaching in my language classes and not to be afraid to make ongoing corrections and changes when needed.

Through the research, I tried to act according to the research plan constructed by me beforehand. However, anyways, some factors made me periodically get off the track. Those were insufficient amount of time. Nevertheless, I was lucky that I worked with such obedient and supporting students. I would like to thank them and the head of the study center West Mood for helping me to do this research.

REFERENCES 1. Rojab S. R. (2001). Teaching English to Young

Learners: How They Learn and the Pedagogical

Implication. UPI, Bandung;

2. Harmer, Jeremy. (2007). The practice of English

language Teaching. Pearson Education Ltd;

3. Hughes, Annie. (2009). An Introduction to Teaching

English to Young Learners. Avellino Press House;

4. Lightbown, P.M. & Spada, N. (1999). How

languages are learned. New York: Oxford.





EMPIRICAL STUDY ON WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT AND OPERATIONAL EFFICIENCY OF

LISTED MANUFACTURING FIRMS IN NIGERIA 2009 – 2018

Dr.Sylvester Ikechukwu Ejike

Accountancy Dept.,

Enugu State University of Science & Technology (ESUT) Enugu,

and Accountancy Dept.,

Institute of Management & Technology (IMT) Enugu,

ABSTRACT In Nigeria, the manufacturing sector is the second most important after agriculture. It is important in terms of contribution to

gross domestic product, employment and foreign exchange earnings. The purpose of this work was to determine the effect of

working capital management on operational efficiency of manufacturing firms in Nigeria. The study has five objectives which

includes: to determine whether account receivable management influences operational efficiency of listed manufacturing

firms in Nigeria, establish the degree to which account payable influences their operational efficiency, examine how inventory

control, cash conversion circle and debt-equity management influences operational efficiency of listed manufacturing firms

in Nigeria. The study tested five hypothesis in null order. It covered 40 manufacturing firms that are consistently listed on the

Nigeria Stock Exchange from 2008 to 2018. It reviewed relevant literature as well as theoretical, conceptual and empirical

analysis. The study employed an expo-facto research design, while secondary data was also used. Quantitative analysis with

Karl Pearson regression was used in the analysis. The result of the study shows that there was positive relationship between

four of the independent variables. The study makes the following recommendations: manufacturing firms should regularly

review their credit policies, make early payment to their suppliers in order to enjoy good relationship with them, install and

maintain modern inventory control system, establish optimum cash targets etc. KEYWORDS: Working capital, operational efficiency, manufacturing firms.

1. INTRODUCTION Working Capital Management (WCM) is a tool

used to immunize corporations from financial upheavals and when managed strategically it can improve a company’s competitive position and profitability. It is the difference between current assets and current liabilities. One aspect that needs investigation is the management of working capital in manufacturing firms. It is a trading capital, not retained in the business in a particular form for longer than a year (Padachi, 2006).Working capital meets the short term financial requirements of a business enterprise. The money invested in it changes form and substance during the normal course of business operations. The wider perspective of WCM contributes to the greater opportunities to create wealth. Increasing the speed of a cash conversion cycle through receivable and payable management helps improve on profitability and liquidity

(Johnson & Soenen, 2003). Additionally, effective inventory management is also critical to the management of liquidity and profitability in many companies.

Working capital management efficiency is vital for profitability in manufacturing firms, where a major part of the assets is composed of current assets (Horne & Wachowitz, 2004). One of the major components of working capital is inventory. The inventory of a manufacturing concern comprise of finished goods, work in progress and raw materials. The sum of the three components of the inventory constitutes a heavy investment in a manufacturing firm, while current assets for a typical manufacturing company account for over half of its total assets (Raheman & Nasr, 2007).

In the present day of rising capital cost and scarce funds especially in the manufacturing subsector, the importance of working capital needs special





emphasis. It has been widely accepted that the profitability of a business concern likely depends upon the manner in which working capital is managed (Kaur, 2010). Both excessive and inadequate working capital positions are dangerous from the firm’s point of view (Islam & Mili, 2012). Excessive working capital leads to unproductive use of scarce funds. Excessive working capital means holding costs and idle funds which earn no profits for the firm. This leads to reduced profits although it guarantees a low liquidity risk. The inefficient management of working capital impairs profitability and interrupts normal operations of a business as well (Kaur, 2010). This may ultimately lead to financial crisis and bankruptcy. On the other hand, proper management of working capital leads to material savings and ensures financial return at the optimum level even on the minimum level of capital employed (Kaur, 2010). Both excessive and inadequate working capital is harmful for a business.

The most important goal in operating a company is to earn an income for its owners. A business that is not profitable cannot survive. Conversely, a business that is highly profitable has the ability to reward its owners with a large return on their investment. Increasingly, profitability is one of the most important tasks of the business managers and they constantly look for ways to change the business in order to improve profitability (Refuse, 1996). The manufacturing sector is very big, it is made up of companies that make the whole thing from abrasives to wood floors, including industrial and consumer products, as well as both finished products and materials used to manufacture finished products (Amadi, 2013). It occupies a central place in the nations’ financial system and is essential driving force in the growth of the economy. Major product groups include food and beverages, chemicals, transportation, building and electronics equipment and others. In modern economies, industrial sector serves as the vehicle for the production of goods and services, the generation of employment and the enhancement of incomes. Hence, Adamu, (1989) described industry and in particular the manufacturing sub-sector, as the heart of the economy.

1.1 Statement of the Problem This study arises from the need to manage

working capital of manufacturing firms more effectively and efficiently – keeping viability, continuity and profitability in view. In Nigeria many manufacturing firms are said to be struggling to thrive and that some key players have been forced to move their operations to other sectors. Others have shut down their operations as evidenced by closure of Niger Steel Company Ltd, Niger Gas Company Ltd both in Enugu, NigerCem

Nkalagu Ebonyi state Nigeria. All these firms cite high operational costs as the main cause of their precarious financial situation (Udoka 2007).

1.2 Objectives of the study i. To investigate the effect of account receivable

management on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria.

ii. To evaluate the effect of accounts payable management on the profitability of the listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria.

iii. To examine the effect of inventory control management on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria.

iv. To identify the effect of cash conversion circle on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria.

v. To evaluate the effect of debt equity management on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria.

vi.

1.3 Hypotheses In line with the objectives of the study, the following hypotheses have been formulated: Ho1: Account Receivable management has no significant effect on the profitability of the listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria. Ho2: Accounts payable management has no significant effect on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria. Ho3: Inventory control management has no significant effect on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria. Ho4: Cash conversion circle has no significant effect on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria. Ho5: Debt Equity management has no significant effect on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria.

2. LITERATURE REVIEW 2.1 Conceptual Framework

Working capital is the amount of funds that a business has made available to meet the day to day cash requirements of its operations (Pandey, 2008). It is the difference between current assets and current liabilities. Current assets are the resources in cash or readily convertible into cash. Current assets include all those assets that in the normal course of business return to the form of cash within a short period of time, ordinarily within a year and such temporary investment as may readily be converted into cash upon need (Raheman & Nasr, 2007). They include bank balance, cash, marketable securities, inventories and accounts





receivables. A business must maintain an appropriate level of current assets. Over investment in current assets is not desirable. Excessive level of current assets can easily result in a company realizing a sub-standard return on investment (Raheman & Nasr, 2007; Horne & Wachowitz, 2004). However, companies with too little amount of current assets may incur shortages and difficulties in maintaining smooth operations (Horne & Wachowitz, 2004). Current liabilities are organization’s commitments for which cash will soon be required. They include bank overdraft, accounts payables and unpaid bills (Pandey, 2008). A company is responsible for paying these obligations on a time basis. Liquidity for the on-going company is not reliant on the liquidation value of its assets, but rather on operating cash flows generated by those assets (Soenen, 1993). Working capital is regarded as life giving force for any economic unit and its management is considered among the most important functions of corporate management (Pandey, 2008). Every organization, profit oriented or not, irrespective of size and nature of business requires necessary amount of working capital. Working capital is the most crucial factor for maintaining liquidity, survival, solvency and profitability of business (Mukhopadhy, 2004). The management of working capital is important to the financial health of businesses of all types and sizes. The amounts invested in working capital are often high in proportion to the total assets employed and so it is very vital that these amounts are used in an efficient and effective way (Pandey, 2008).

2.2 Gross Operating Profit (GOP) This ratio explains how efficient a company is,

in utilizing its operating assets. This ratio calculates the percentage of profit earned against the operating assets of the company (Lazaridis & tryfonidiens, 2006). Gross operating profit = (Sales – COGS) / (Total asset –financial asset) The negative association between company’s accounts receivables and profitability suggests that the higher level of accounts receivables tend to increase the cash gap and therefore will reduce the working capital. Also the inverse association between the inventory turnover and ROA causes the Productivity volume decrease. (Lazaridis and Tryfonidis, 2006). In another study it was suggested that it is impossible to predict the impact on the current ratio, quick ratio, cash conversion cycle, profits and leverage when a change in sales causes a change in working capital variables. Likewise, a managerial decision that changes components of working capital will cause an unpredictable change in the liquidity, profitability and leverage ratios. Overall, the money collection phase was absolutely associated to the current plus quick ratios, to the receivables and to

the inventory conversion period. There are many firms in Pakistan that have invested ample amount of cash to sustain their working capital height. Then the way in which these companies sustain their working capital height will significantly affect the profitability. An inverse association of profitability with the determinants of the running capital i.e., with the debtors’ collection time, stock change time, cash conversion cycle and the payment received time for the companies that are operating in Pakistan in the cement industry and also on KSE.

2.3 Working Capital Management and Firm Profitability Existing literature is strongly with the view that efficient working capital improves profitability. In this context, profitability refers to the ability of an enterprise to generate profits from its investments; working capital management affects profitability in several ways (Deloof, 2003). For instance, the management of cash, debtors and stocks affects the level of profits made by an enterprise. According to him, the excessive holding of stocks leads to high stock handling costs, deterioration in the value of stocks due to damage and obsolescence, theft or pilferage by employees and wastage. All these are cost to the firm which reduces its profitability.

Moreover, inadequate stocks also lead to stock out costs and loss of goodwill of the firm, leading to losses or profits. Holding a high level of inventories leads to high capital tied up in stocks. This tied up capital means lost profitability due to forgone interest income which would have been earned if the capital tied up in stocks were invested (Saleemi, 2009). Debtors’ management policy adopted by a firm will also determine the cost of bad debts, debt administration, debt collection costs and the forgone benefits due to cash tied up in debtors. This may also include the cost of discounts which may be given to debtors to induce them to make prompt payments arising out of credit sales. Likewise all these costs will reduce the profitability of the firm (Manasseh, 2001). Defective cash management will lead high costs associated with holding cash, financial distress and lost investment income due hold cash in a non-earning form (Manasseh, 2001). Examples of financial distress costs include interest costs, debt restructuring costs and legal costs. Likewise these costs will reduce the amounts of profits made by a firm.

2.4 Empirical Review Studies carried out in Nigeria by (Attama and

Kanayo, 2011; Udoka … et al., 2012;





& Kelechi … et al., 2013) were targeting SME’s and excluding large enterprises. The results can only be interpreted in relation to small and medium enterprises. Ikram, Mohamad, Khalid and Zaheer (2011) studied working capital management on profitability in the cement industry. The results of the study were based on only one sub sector within the manufacturing sector. Therefore, the results of this study should be used with caution and should only be generalized to the cement industry and not entire manufacturing sector. Studies on working capital management use secondary data. Mousavi and Jari (2012), Kaddumi and Ramadan (2012) and Gakure et al(2012) used record survey sheet to collect the secondary data. However, Nyabwanga et al(2012) studied the effects of working capital management practices on performance of small enterprises in North central Kaduna, Nigeria. They used a questionnaire to collect the primary data. Secondary data from financial statements give values at a specific date and therefore required to be supplemented by primary data collected from opinions of finance managers.

Some other researchers namely, Jose, Lancaster, and Stevens (1996) carried out a detailed analysis on the association of cash conversion cycle and financial returns. They located an inverse association of profitability with cash conversion cycle. Shin and Soenen (1998) conducted an expanded study by taking a large sample of 58985 firms of US. Their study was based on a longer time phase of 1975-1994. They suggested that for generating greater volume of wealth for the shareholders of a firm, it is very crucial to manage the working capital of that firm effectively and in an efficient manner. They also recommended that profitability and net trade cycle both are inversely related to each other. In a sample of firms listed in Thailand, Napompech (2012) investigated the impact of working capital management on profitability in Thailand using a sample of 255 companies for a period of 3 years (2007-2009). Regression analysis was used in the analysis and the results revealed a negative relationship between the gross operating profit and cash conversion cycle, receivables collection period, inventory conversion period and average payment period. Therefore managers can increase the profitability of their firms by shortening the cash conversion cycle, inventory conversion period and receivables collection period. However, the findings suggested that they cannot increase profitability by lengthening the payables deferral period.

2.5 Theoretical framework This work will be guided by Agency theory propounded by Fama & Jensen in 1983. According to this agency theory, managers as agents are expected to monitor corporate affairs in a most profitable manner so as to maximize the value of the owners as principals and protect the interest of other stakeholders. Under the theory, managers are responsible for managing the business profitably.

From the agency perspective, working capital is a managerial activity that managers are expected to efficiently monitor and manage so as to make profit and maximize the owners’ value (Stephens & Bartunek, 1997, Dierks & Patel, 1997). Based on agency as managers managed working capital according to prescriptive theory, then it would be expected that businesses would invest in working capital, finance working capital, monitor factors that influence working capital, manage cash, accounts receivable, inventory, accounts payable, the cash conversion cycle (aggregative approach), and measure and analyze performance to ensure that the long term (fixed) assets are utilized effectively and efficiently (Angelique Nadia, 2000).

3.1 RESEARCH DESIGN This study adopted ex-post facto designs. This

ex-post facto research aims to study the effect of working capital management empirically on the profitability of selected listed manufacturing companies in Nigeria. The choice of expo facto research design in this study is informed by the fact that, the aim of the design is to investigate the relationships between variables and to estimate the effect of one variable on another, so as to establish a causal relationship or otherwise among the variables. This is therefore consistent with the objective of the study.

3.2 Population of the study The population of this study will be made up of

all the 40 listed manufacturing firm son the floor of the Nigerian Stock Exchange as at December 2013.

3.3 Sample Size of the study Twenty firms were selected, the choice of was

based on the following criteria: Firms that were compliant with CAMA schedule 2 which stipulates that all listed companies in Nigeria should publish and submit their audited annual report and accounts to the Nigerian Stock Exchange (NSE).

All manufacturing firms which has consistently listed with the Nigeria Stock Exchange from 2004 till





2013.Based on the above criteria, the following firms were chosen: 1. Unilever Plc. 11. 7UP Bottling Company Plc. 2.Nestle Plc. 12. Dangote Floor Mills Plc. 3. Cadbury Plc. 13. National Salt Company of Nigeria Plc. 4. Fidson Healthcare Plc. 14. Mobile Oil Plc. 5. Evans Medical Plc. 15. Total Nigeria Plc. 6. Glaxo Smithkline Plc. 16. MRS Oil Nigeria Plc. 7. Nigerian Breweries Plc. 17. Berger Paints Plc. 8. Guinness Nigeria Plc. 18. Nigerian Ropes Plc. 9. International Breweries Plc. 19. Ashaka Cement Plc. 10. Vita Foam Nigeria Plc. 20. Cement Company of Northern Nigeria Plc.

3.4. Sources and Method of Data Collection.

The study will use secondary data from the annual reports and accounts of the sampled firms under study, for the period of ten years (2004 – 2013). The use of secondary data in this study is informed by the fact that the study is based on the quantitative research methodology that requires quantitative data to test the research hypotheses.

3.5 Data Analysis Pearson’s Multiple regression analysis was

used. Karl Pearson’s regression was used to show the relationship between variables such as those between working capital management and profitability. A number of recent studies have used Pearson’s correlation, regression analysis. Kaddumi and Ramadan (2012) used the models to determine the effects of working capital management on profitability of Jordan industrial firms listed at Amman stock exchange. Hussain, Farooz and Khan (2012) used these three models to investigate the relationship between aggressiveness investment policy and aggressiveness financing policy with profitability in Pakistan manufacturing firms. Regression Coefficient between

each of the variables was computed as guided by research hypothesis.

3.6 Statistical Model and Hypothesis Testing

The model will use Gross operating profit GOP (Profitability) as dependent variable and five independent variables, which includes Account Receivable in days (ACR), Account Payable in days (ACP), Inventory in days (INV), Cash Conversion Cycle (CCC) and Debt equity (DE). GOP is reliable in studying the effect of working capital management on firm’s profitability because it measures only the performance of the operating activities of a firm in a year, this is because the measurement of the gross operating profit which is sales minus cost of goods sold excludes taxes, interest costs, depreciation and amortization (Lazaridis & Tryfonidis, 2006; Gill et al., 2010) and also it is based on this fact that this measurement will focus on the profitability. GOP is calculated as follows: (Lazardis & Tryfonidis, 2006; Deloof, 2003). Gross operating profit = (Sales – COGS) / (Total asset –financial asset).

The relationship that exists among the five independent variables and the one dependent variable is given by the equation:

Y = β0 + β1X1 + β2 X2 + β3X3 + β4X4 + β5X5 + ε Where:

Y = Profitability

Β0 = Constant

X1 = Accounts Receivable management

X2 = Account Payable management

X3 = Inventory Control management

X4 = Cash Conversion Circle

X5 = Debt Equity management

Β1 = Regression Coefficient of variable X1 (Account receivable)

Β2 = Regression Coefficient of Variable X2 (Accounts Payable)

Β3 = Regression Coefficient of Variable X3 (Inventory Control)

Β4 = Regression coefficient of variable X4 (Cash Conversion Circle)





Β5 = Regression Coefficient of variable X5 (Debt Equity)

Ε = Error term

3.7 Variable Used To study the effects of working capital

management on the profitability of selected manufacturing companies, the Gross operating profit (Profitability) has been considered as the dependent variable of the research. The explanatory variables to be used as proxies of working capital management are (1) account receivable in days, (2) account payables in days (3) Inventory in days (4) Cash conversion Cycle (5) Debt Equity (DE).

Variable Measurements

1. Account receivables in days - is receivable conversion period (RCP) calculated as (account receivable/sales) *365

2. Account payables in days or Credit policies - is payable deferral period (PDP) computed as [(account payable/cost of goods sold)* 365

3. Inventory control - is inventory conversion period (ICP) calculated as (inventory/cost of goods sold)*365

4. Cash conversion cycle (CCC), liquidity management – is calculated as [Receivable collection period + inventory conversion period - Payable deferral period. (1 + 3 – 2 as specified above).

ebt/Equity (DE) is debt-to-equity ratio computed as total current assets/total current liability.

4.1 RESULTS 4.2 Descriptive Statistics The descriptive statistics of the data collected for the study is presented and discussed in this section. The summary of the descriptive statistics of the data collected is presented in Table 4.1 as follows;

Table 4.2: Descriptive Statistics of the Variables: All firms (2009 to 2018).

VAR MIN MAX MEAN STD SKY KUR N GOP 0.25 103 48 22 0.57 -0.64 200 ACCT REC 16 480 122 84 1.75 3.57 200 ACT PAY 5 351 131 89 0.37 -0.87 200 INV 15 530 160 97 1.18 1.58 200 CCC 15 472 180 106 0.85 0.58 200 DE 0.21 299 17 33 4.71 30.4 200

4.3 Hypotheses Testing In this section, the study tested the hypotheses formulated; Table 4.6 presents the coefficients of the

variables of the study from which the hypotheses are

tested. The hypothesis tested was: H0: β1 = β2 = β3 =

β4 = β5 = 0

H1: At least one of (β1, β2, β3, β4, β5) ≠ 0

Table 4.3.1 Regression Coefficients of the Study (2004 to 2013)

Variables Coefficient

P-value

Intercept/Constant 56.14584815

6.5005231

ACCT REC -0.06175656

0.004357858

ACCT PAY 0.05887937

0.001386704

INV -0.09416348

1.01013E-06

CCC 0.053800077

0.005899845

DE -0.17574466

0.000157447





Table 4.3.1 shows that account receivables (ACCT REC) days has a negative significant effect on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria as indicated by the coefficient of -0.06175656 with p-value of (0.004357858) which is significant at 1% level of significance. Therefore, the study infers that as (ACCT REC) days increases the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria falls. That is, account receivable days significantly reduces profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria.

Based on this, the study rejects the null hypothesis one (H01) which state that, Account Receivables collection has no significant effect on the profitability of the listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria. Therefore, the study infers that Account Receivables collection has significant effect on the profitability of the listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria, during the period covered by the study. The table also shows that account payables (ACCT PAY) days has a positive and significant effect on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria, considering a positive coefficient of 0.05887937 and p-value of 0.001386704 which is significant of 1% level of significance. That is, account payables day has significantly improved the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria. Based on this, the study rejects the null hypothesis two (H02) which states that Account payables period has no significant effect on the profitability of the listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria. Therefore, the study infers that account payables period has significant positive effect on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria, during the period covered by the study. On the contrary, the results from the table shows that the sales days in inventory (INV) has a negative coefficient of -0.09416348 with a p-value of 1.0101306) which is not statistically significant at all levels. This suggests that the inventory in day’s management has not significantly affected the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria during the period of the study. Based on this, the study fails to rejects the null hypothesis six (H03) which states that sales days inventory has no significant effect on the profitability of the listed manufacturing

firms in Nigeria. Therefore, the study infers that sales day’s inventory does not drive the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria.

The results presented in the table also show that the cash conversion cycle (CCC) has a significant positive effect on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria, from the coefficient of 0.053800077 which is statistically significant at 1% level of significance (from the p-value of 0.005199845). This suggests that the CCC significantly affects the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria during the period of the study. Based on this, the study rejects the null hypothesis four (H04) which states that, cash conversion cycle has no significant effect on the profitability of the listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria.

Lastly, the results from the table shows that the debt equity (DE) has a negative significant effect on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria, from the coefficient of -0.17574466 and p-value of 0.000157447 which is statistically significant at 1% level. This suggests that the debt equity management ratio has negative significant effect on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria during the period of the study. Therefore, the study infers that as (DE) increases, the profitability of listed manufacturing firms has no significant effect on the profitability of the listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria. Therefore, the study infers that debt equity management does significantly affect the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria.

Based on the above result the null hypothesis was rejected that all the partial regression coefficients are equal to zero and concluded that at least one of the partial regression coefficients is not equal to zero. The implication to these findings is that all the independent variables; Account receivable in days, accounts payable practices, inventory control practices, liquidity management practices and working capital levels have a significant combined effect on profitability and can be used to predict profitability.

Table 4.4 Results of Normality Test

VARIABLES W/E V/Con.index Z -order Prob>Z N

GOP 4.459 1.000 2.247 0.012 200

ACR 0.734 2.464 0.88 0.038 200

ACP 0.333 3.660 0.94 0.085 200

INV 0.254 4.192 -.171 -0.194 200

CCC 0.148 5.490 0.005 0.015 200

DE 0.072 7.871 0.024 0.047 200

Source: STATA Output





The variables of the study are subjected to Shapiro-Wilk (W) test for data normality; the technique test the null hypothesis (that the data is normal), that is, the variable came from a normally distributed population. Table 4.4 indicates that the data for all the variables are not normally distributed, because the P-values are significant at 1% level of significance (ACR, ACP, INV, CCC and DE, from Prob>Z value of 0.038, 0.085, -0.0.194, 0.015, and 0.047 respectively): and 5% level of significance (GOP Prob>Z value of 0.012). Thus, the null hypothesis (that, the data is normally distributed) is rejected. This may have effects on the results, as most of the parametric tools of analysis including regression assumed that the data is normally distributed.

5. SUMMARY This study investigates the effect of working

capital management on the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria, using a sample of twenty companies. The study covers a period of 10 years (2004–2013) and employed regression research design and OLS regression analysis. Based on the tests conducted on the data collected and the analyses of the results, this study found a significant relationship between the working capital management components (account receivables, account payables, cash conversion cycle and debt equity management and the profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria. In essence, working capital management explained 71 % of the variations in the profitability (gross operating profit) of the listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria, during the period under review.

The study was conducted based on the premise that working capital management does not influence profitability of manufacturing firms in Nigeria. The study reviewed both theoretical and empirical literature on working capital management. From the review of the related literature, a comprehensive conceptual framework of argument of the relationship between working capital management and profitability was formulated. The hypothesized relationship was tested empirically guided by the following specific objectives; to determine whether account receivable management influences profitability of manufacturing firms, to determine the degree to which accounts payable management influence profitability of manufacturing firms, to examine how inventory control management influence profitability of manufacturing firms, to establish whether cash conversion circle (liquidity management practices) influence profitability of manufacturing firms and to investigate whether debt

equity management influence profitability of manufacturing firms in Nigeria.

Based on the conceptual framework and objectives of the study and the nature of the study, secondary data was used in the study which are collected from publish account of sample firms from the fact book of the Nigerian Stock Exchange. The independent variables of the study were tested for multicollinearity and independence. Normality tests were carried out on the profitability (dependent variable). Statistical package for social sciences MINITAB version 20.0 was used as the statistical tool for analysis all through. The study is quantitative in nature, hence data was analyzed and described using descriptive and inferential statistics. Multiple linear regression analysis was used to test the combined effect of all the independent variables.

5.1 Findings The study found that there is a strong

combined effect of 71% variations in the profitability of manufacturing firms in Nigeria. This was evidenced by an adjusted R-square value of 0.71253 or 71%. The independent variables (account receivable management, accounts payable management, cash conversion circles and debt equity management) on profitability of manufacturing firms in Nigeria. The above listed four independent variables were found to be statistically significant while inventory control management was removed from the optimal model because it was not significant at all levels. The findings indicated that not all independent variables (account receivable management, accounts payable management, inventory control management, cash conversion circles and debt equity management) made a significant positive contribution in explaining the dependent variable (profitability). It was found that only inventory control management practice that is not significant at all levels, while account payable management and cash conversion circle made positive and statistically significant contribution. On the other hand debt equity management and account receivable management recorded a significant negative effect on profitability of listed manufacturing firms in Nigeria. This means that as DE and CCC increases

profitability will decrease.

6. AREAS FOR FURTHER RESEARCH This study was not able to exhaust all working

capital management components that have effects on profitability in manufacturing firms. Therefore, effects of prepayments, accrued expenses, government regulations and policy, economic environment and





culture on profitability of manufacturing firms need be established in future studies.

REFERENCES 1 Adamu, T., & Nazir, M. S. (1989). Working Capital

Management Efficiency of Cement Sector of Pakistan.

Journal of Economics and Behavioral Studies 2 (5), 223-

235.

2 Amadi H. (2013). Impact of Working Capital

Management on Profitability. European Scientific

Journal, 10 (1), 374-381

3 Angelique Nadia (2000). The Relationship between

Working Capital Management and Profitability:

Evidence from the United States. Business and

Economics Journal, 10, 1-9.

4 Attama & Kanayo. (2011). Research Design:

Qualitative, Quantitative and Mixed Methods Approach.

London: Sage Publications, Inc.

5 Deloof, M. (2003). Does working capital management

affect profitability of Belgian firms, J. Business Finance

and Accounting, V.30. 573-588.

6 Fama & Jensen. M. (1983). An Analysis of Working

Capital Management. Mid-American Journal of

Business, 20 (2), 11-18.

7 Horne, Van J. C. & Wachowicz, J. M. (2004).

Fundamentals of financial management. Upper saddle

River, New York: Prentice Hall International.

8 Ikram, H., Mohammad, S., Khalid, Z. & Zaheer, A.

(2011). “The Relationship between Working Capital

Management and Profitability, A Case Study of Cement

Industry in Pakistan”. Mediterranean Journal of Social

Sciences, 2 (2), 10-18.

9 Islam, M. N. &Milli, S. A. (2012). “Working Capital

Investment and Financing Policies of selected

Pharmaceutical companies in Bangladesh”. Research

Journal of Finance and Accounting, 3 (4), 1-8.

10 Kaur, J. (2010). Working Capital Management in Indian

Tyre Industry. International Journal of Finance and

Economics, 46, 7-15. 142

11 Lazaridis, I. & Tryforidis, D. (2006). Relationship

between Working Capital Management and Profitability

of Listed Companies in the Athens Stock Exchange.

Journal of Financial Management and Analysis, 19 (1)

26-35.

12 Manaseh, D. (2001). The Essentials of Factor Analysis,

2nd Edition. London: Cassel Education Limited

13 Mousavi, Z., & Jari, A. (2012). The Relationship between

Working Capital Management and Firm Performance:

Evidence from Iran. International Journal of Humanities

and Social Science, 2 (2), 1-7.

14 Mukhopadhyay, D. (2004). “Working Capital

Management in Heavy Engineering Firms A case study,

retrieved May 27, 2012, http://www.myicwai.com/

15 Naasiuma, D. (2000). Survey Sampling Theory &

Methods. Nairobi: University of Nairobi Press

16 Nanopechi, A. (2012). Corporate Finance: Issues

Investigations, Innovations and Applications. Lagos:

High Rise Publications

17 Nyabwanga, R. N., Ojera, P., Lumumba, P., Odondo, A.

J. & Otieno, S. (2012). Effects of Working Capital

Management Practices on Financial Performance: A

Study of

18 Small Scale Enterprises in Kisii South District, Kenya.

Africa Journal of Management, 6 (18), 5807 - 5817.

19 Padachi, K. (2006). “Trends in Working Capital

Management”. International Review of Business

Research Papers, 2 (2), 45-58.

20 Pandey, A. (2008). Eiteman, D. K., Stonehill, A. I.,

Moffett, M. H., “Multinational Business Finance”. New

Delhi: Dorling Kindersley Pvt. Limited.

21 Pandey, I.M. and K.L.W. Parera, 1997. Determinants of

effective working capital management – a discriminant

analysis approach. Iima working paper no. 1349.

22 Research and Publication Department Indian Institute of

Management Ahmedabad India.

23 Raheman, A. & Nasr, M. (2007), Working Capital

management and profitability, case of Pakistani firms,

International Review of Business Research papers, 3 (1),

279-300.

24 Raheman, A & Nazr, M. (2007). “Working Capital

Management and Profitability - Case of Pakistan

Firms”. International Review of Business Research

Papers, 3 (1), 279 - 300.

25 Robert, A, McNulty, J. & Stiles P. (2005). Working

Capital Management and Profitability of Manufacturing

Firms at Nairobi Stock Exchange. Prime Journal of

Business Administration and Management, 2 (9), 680-

686

26 Salemi R. (1993). The Practice of Social Research.

Belmont C. A.: Wadsworth.

27 Shin, H.H. and L. Soenen, 1998. Efficiency of working

capital management and corporate profitability.

Financial Practice and Education, 8(2): 37-45.

28 Smith, M & Begemann, E. (1980). “Measuring

Association between Working Capital and Return on

Investment”. South Africa Journal of Business

Management, 28, (1), 43-52

29 Soenen, L. & Johnson, R. (1993). Indicators of

Successful Companies. European Management

Journal, 21 (3), 364-369.

30 Stephen, K. K. (1995), Analysis of Effects of Working

Capital Management on Profitability of Manufacturing

Companies: A Case Study of Listed Manufacturing

Companies on Nairobi Securities Exchange. A Research

Project Submitted to the School of Business in Partial

Fulfillment of the Requirements for the Award of a

Master of Business Administration Degree (Finance


Date post:	13-Sep-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	1 times
Download:	0 times